Aws D1.1 (1992)
Uploaded by
Alex GutierrezAws D1.1 (1992)
Uploaded by
Alex GutierrezI AWS D I - I 92 07842b5 0500034 8 I
//:/
/Welding
Structural
Code '\
\>
' \\,
\
'
Steel
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Keywords- allowable stress, dynamically loaded ANSIIAWS D1.1-92
structures, inspection, qualification, An American National Standard
structural details, statically loaded
structures, stud welding, tubular Approved by
structures, welded joint details,
workmanship
American National Standards Institute
December 24,1991
Structural Welding Code-
Steel
Thirteenth Edition
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Superseding
ANSI/AWS Dl.1-90
Prepared by
AWS Structural Welding Committee
Under the Direction of
AWS Technical Activities Committee
Approved by
AWS Board of Directors
Abstract
This Code covers the welding requirements for any type of welded structure made from thecommonlyused carbon and
low alloy constructionalsteels. Sections 1 through 7 and 11 constitute a body of rules for the regulation of welding in
steel construction. Sections 8,9, and 10 contain additional rules applicable to specific types of structures,i.e., statically
loaded structures, dynamically loaded structures, and tubular structures, respectively, and supplement the first seven
sections. There are eleven mandatory and ten non-mandatory appendixes in this Code. A Commentary of the Code is
included with the document.
American Welding Society
550 N.W. LeJeune Road,P.O. Box 351040, Miami, Florida 33135
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-& 9 2 W 07842b5 050003b I =
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Statement on Use of AWS Standards
All standards (codes, specifications, recommended practices, methods, classifications, and guides) of the American
Welding Society are voluntary consensus standards that have been developed in accordance with the rules of the
American National Standards Institute. When AWS standards are either incorporated in, or made part of, documents
that are included in federal or state laws and regulations, or the regulations of other governmental bodies, their
provisions carry the full legal authority of the statute. In such cases, any changes in those AWS standards must be
approved by the governmental body having statutory jurisdiction before they can become a part of those laws and
regulations. In ali cases, these standardscarry the full legal authority of the contract or other document that invokes the
AWS standards. Where this contractual relationship exists, changes in or deviations from requirements of an AWS
standard must be by agreement between the contracting parties.
International Standard Book Number: 0-87171-380-2
American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, P.O.Box 351040, Miami, Florida 33135
@ 1992 by American Welding Society. All rights reserved
Printed in the United States of America
Note: The primary purpose of AWS is to serve and benefit its members. To this end, AWS provides a forum for the
exchange, consideration, and discussion of ideas and proposals that are relevant to the welding industry and the
consensus of which forms the basis for these standards. By providing such a forum, AWS does not assume any dutiesto
which a user of these standardsmay be required to adhere. By publishing this standard, the American Welding Society
does not insure anyone using the information it contains against any liability arising from that use. Publication of a
standard by the American Welding Societydoes not carry with it any right to make, use, or sell any patented items. Users
of the information in this standard should make an independentinvestigationof the validity of that information for their
particular use and the patent status of any item referred to herein.
With regard to technical inquiries made concerning AWS standards, oral opinions on AWS Standards may be rendered.
However, such opinions represent only the personal opinions of the particular individuals giving them, These
individuals do not speak on behalf of AWS, nor do these oral opinions constitute official or unofficial opinions or
interpretations of AWS. In addition, oral opinions are informal and should not be used as a substitute for an official
interpretation.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the AWS StructuralWelding Committee. It must be reviewed every
five years and if not revised, it must be either reapproved or withdrawn. Comments (recommendations, additions, or
deletions)and any pertinent data that may be of use in improving this standard are requested and should beaddressed to
AWS Headquarters. Such comments wili receive careful considerations by the AWS Structural Welding Committee
and the author of the comments will be informed of the committee’s response to the comments. Guests are invited to
attend all meetings of the AWS Structural Welding Committee to express their comments verbally. Procedures for
appeal of an adverse decision concerning ali such comments are provided in the Rules of Operation of the Technical
Activities Committee. A copy of these Rules can be obtained from the American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune
Road, P.O. Box 351040, Miami, Florida 33135.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 9 2 3
0784265 0500037-~ ~~
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Personnel
Dedication: i'ñe A WS Structural Weldìng Committee hereby dedicates the publication of this prestigious standard
ANSIJAWS 01.1-92, in memory of Mr, Paul Cortland and allpast DI Committee members. At the time of Paul's
death in February 1991, he was the Chairman of ihe Committee. Along with Mr, Cortland, past members are
remembered for their dedicated and tireless efforts in the advancement of the DI documents, AWS and our welding
industry as a whole. To that end, their contributions are herein remembered.
J. L. Skiles, Chairman Omaha Public Power District
D. L. McQuaid, Vice Chairman American Bridge Company
K.K. Verma, Vice Chairman Federal Highway Administration
D. D. Rager, Vice Chairman Reynolds Metals Company
€? Cortland, Chairman** Nuclear Regulatory Commission
H. H. Campbell III, Secretary American Welding Society
R.E. Albrecht H. H.Robertson Company
K G. Alexander Consultant
G.A. Alison* Consultant
R.L. Alley TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division
l? G. Armao Alcoa Technical Center
E. M.Beck Law Engineering, Incorporated
E R Beckmann American Institute of Steel Construction
J. T. Biskup Consultant
R.D. Block Diamond Power Specialty Company
O. K Blodgett The Lincoln Electric Company
R. Bonneau Canadian Welding Bureau
T J. Bosworth Boeing Aerospace and Electronics
J. A. Bradley* J. A. Bradley and Associates, Incorporated
E C. Breismeister Bechtel Corporation
B. M. Butler Walt Disney World Company
H. A. Chambers TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division
L B. Chandler* Allied Industries
R W; Christie Hardesty and Hanover
S. L M. Cole P and K Pole Products
L. E. Collins Consultant
R B. Corbit General Public Utilities Nuclear Corporation
E. G.Costello Boeing Aerospace Company
M,E Couch* Consultant
H. E Crick* Consultant
W: E Crozier* California Department of Transportation
M.V; Davis Consultant
D. A. Delsignore Westinghouse Electric Corporation
R. A. Dennis Chevron Corporation
l? B. Dickerson Consultant
J. K Dockery Rust International
J. E Dougherty Sverdrup Corporation
J. D. Duncan Fluor Daniel
D. L. Finstad* Consultant
B. W: Folkening FMC Corporation
J. S. Fortenberry Chevron USA, Incorporated
G, L. Fox Texas Department of Highways and Public
Transportation
A. R. Fronduti Trinity Industries
*Advkor
**Deceased1991
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500038 5 m
J. M. Gdaniec Atomic Energy of Canada, Limited
G,A. Gix NTH Consultants
M. A. Grieco Massachusetts Department of Public Works
D. P. Gustafion Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
G. Haaijer American Institute of Steel Construction, Incorporated
C. FK Hayes The Lincoln Electric Company
C. R. Hess High Steel Structures, Incorporated
E L Hicks Tru-Weld Division, Tru-Fit Products Corporation
G. J. Hill G. J. Hill and Associates, Incorporated
M. L. Hoitomt FL Industries, Incorporated, Meyer Industries Division
E. R. Holby IFR Engineering
C. FK Holmes West Virginia Department of Transportation
W L Jeflery Martin Marietta Astronautics Group
J. C. Jenkins TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division
A. L Johnson American Iron and Steel Institute
K. I? Johnson Bucyrus-Erie Company
A. J. Julicher A. J. Julicher and Associates
J. H. Kiefer Conoco, Incorporated
L A. Kloiber L. L. LeJeune Company
h g . D. Kosteas* Technical University of Munich
R. M. Kotan Omaha Public Power District
J. K. Lambert Westinghouse Company, Savannah River Site
R. A. LuPointe GENSYS
J. L Larson Jr. L. R. Willson and Sons, Inc.
J. A. filly Minnesota Department of Transportation
FK T McGuire* Corneli University
P. FK Marshall Shell Oil Company
P. E. Masters* Consultant
FK A. Milek, Jr. Consultant
D. K. Miller Lincoln Electric Company
R. C. Minor Hapco Division of Kearney National, Incorporated
FK C. Minton* Southwest Research Institute
R. E. Monroe** Consultant
J. L Munnerlyn Professional Service Industries
J. E. Myers Owen Steel Company, Incorporated
J. A. Nicholas Westinghouse Electric
J. A. Packer University of Toronto
E J. Palmer American Institute for Holiow Structural Sections
C. C. Pease* C P Metallurgical
I: PekoP Cornell University
M.L. Peterson Conoco, Incorporated
C. FK Pinkham S. B. Barnes and Associates
P. Pollak The Aluminum Association
J. W Post J. W. Post and Associates, Incorporated
G. W Reardon Omaha Public Power District
D. E. H. Reynolds Canadian Welding Bureau
D. A. Ringle Texas Utilities Generating Company
J. E. Roth James E. Roth, Incorporated
FK FK Sanders, Jr. Iowa State University
E G. Schlosser* Cooper Lighting, P and K Pole Products
J. Seiders Texas Department of Transportation
M. L. Sharp Alcoa Laboratories
A. W Sindel National Tank Company
D. L Sprow McDermott Incorporated
R. FK Stieve New York Department of Transportation
J. R. Stitt J. R. Stitt, PE
*Advhor
**Deceased 1990
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society iv
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 9 2 m B 7 8 4 2 b 5 -0500039 '7 m
-
C. R. Stuart Shell Offshore, Incorporated
€? J. Sullivan Consultant
IK A. Svekric Welding Consultants, Inc.
G. R. Swank Cimarron Holding Company, Dallas, Texas
J. D. ïñeisen Exxon Company, USA
IK A. ïñomton Cives Corporation
R. H. R Tide Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates
A. A. Tkinidad, Jr. Andrews and Clark
C. L Bai The Ohio State University
J. E. Uebele Waukesha County Technical College
B. D. Wright Brown and Root, Incorporated
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
V
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 07842b5 0500040 3 =
AWS Stnictural Welding Committee and Subcommittees
Main Committee Dlc -Subcommittee3 on Qualification
J. L. Skiles, Chairman G. J. Hill A. W; Sindel, Chairman D. K. Miller
D. L. McQuaid, Vice Chairman M. L Hoitomt D. D. Rager, Vice Chairman J. A. Nicholas
K. K Verma, Vice Chairman J. C. Jenkins T J. Bosworth M.L. Peterson
D. D. Rager, Vice Chairman A. J. Julicher E C. Breismeister J. W; Post
P. Cortland** R. M.Kotan R. B. Corbit J. E. Roth
H. H. Campbell III, Secretary R. A. LaPointe I! Cortland** J. L Skiles*
W; G. Alexander l? W; Marshall R A. Dennis D. L Sprow
E M.Beck l? E. Masters* J. D. Duncan J. R. Stitt
J. T Btkkup IK A. Milek, Jr. A. R. Fronduti C. R. Stuart
O. W; Blodgett* D. K. Miller M. A. Grieco G. R. Swank
J. A. Bradley* J. L. Munnerlyn E. R. Holby B. D. Wright
E C. Breismeister J. E. Myers
R. W; Christie M. L Peterson Dld -Subcommittee 4 on Workmanship
L E. Collins J. W; Post
R. B. Corbit D. E H. Reynoldr L. E. Collins, Chairman G. J. Hill
H. E Crick* a! a! Sanders, Jr. F. R. Beckmann, Vice Chairman J. K. Lambert
W; E Crozier A. W; Sindel IK G. Alexander W; A. Milek, Jr.
M. i? Davis D. L Sprow J. T Biskup J. L. Munnerlyn
G. L. Fox R. W; Stieve J. A. Bradley* J. E. Myers
A. R. Fronduti J. R. Stitt L. B. Chandler* D. D. Rager
G. A. Gix P. J. Sullivan M. E Couch* D. E. H. Reynoldr
G. Haaoer J. D. Theisen J. E Doughtery A. IK Sindel
G. L. Fox J. L. Skiles
Dlx -Executive Committee G, A. Gix
M. A. Grieco
J. R. Stitt
K K. Verma
J. L Skiles, Chairman R. B. Corbit
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C. R. Hess
D. L. McQuaid, Vice Chairman W; E Crozier
K. K. Verma, Vice Chairman
D. D. Rager, Vice Chairman
J. C. Jenkins
R. M. Kotan
-
D l e Subcommittee 5 on Inspection
P. Cortland, Chairman** R. L LaPointe J. L. Munnerlyn, Chairman G. J. Hill
H. H. Campbell III, Secretary J. L Munnerlyn M. L. Hoìtomt, Vice Chairman J. H. Kiefer
W; G. Alexander M.L Peterson u! G. Alexander l? W; Marshall
E C. Breismeister A. W; Sindel E. M.Beck* D. L McQuaid
L E Collins E R. Beckmann W; A. Milek, Jr.*
J. A. Bradley* W; C. Minton*
Dla -Subcommittee 1 on Design L. E. Collins
H. E Crick*
D. A. Ringle
R. W; Stieve
R. M.Kotan, Chairman W; A. Milek, Jr. W; E Crozier l? J. Sullivan
A. J. Julicher, Vice Chairman E J. Palmer J. E Doughtery FK A. Svekric
J. T Biskup a! W; Sanders, Jr. D. L Finstad* J. D. Theisen
O. W; Blodgett W; A. Thornton
G. L. Fox K. K. Verma
R. W. Christie R. H. R. !lide C. W; Hayes
G. Haaijer A. A. Dinadad, Jr.*
C. R. Hess -
Dlf Subcommittee 6 on Tubular Structures
Dlb -Subcommittee2 on PrequMed Procedures M.L Peterson, Chairman J. A. Packer
P. W; Marshall, Vice Chairman E J. Palmer
E C. Breismeister, Chairman J. D. Duncan E. M.Beck J. W; Post
B. D. Wright,Vice Chairman M. L. Hoitomt O. W. Blodgett E G.Schlosser*
R. D. Block D. L McQuaid B. M. Butler J. L. Skiles*
R. Bonneau J. A. Nicholas H. E Crick* D. L. Sprow
S. L M.Cole IK A. Thornton J. S. Fortenberry J. D. Theisen
R. B. Corbit J. L Uebele K. K Johnson C. L. Tsai
D. A. Delsignore L. A. Kloiber
+Advisor
+*Deceased1991
Copyright American Welding Society
vi
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - 1 92 D 07B42b5
-~0500041 5 D
~
0 D l g -Subcommittee 7 on Stud Welding Dlj -Subcommittee 10 on Reinforcing Bars
J. C. Jenkins, Vice Chairman G. A. Gix R A. LaPointe, Chairman D. l? Gustafson
C. C. Pease, Vice Chairman E L. Hicks J. E. Myers, Vice Chairman J. C. Jenkins
R. L. Alley A. J. Julicher R. L. Alley R. M. Kotan
H. Chambers J. Larson W; K Crozier R. E. Monroe**
A. R. Fronduti W; A. Thornton J. K Dockery
Dlh -Subcommittee 8 on Sheet Steel
R. B. Corbit, Chairman
R. D. Block, Vice Chairman
D. K.Miller
II: Pekoz*
Dlk Subcommittee 11 on-
AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Committee
R. E. Albrecht C. FK Pinkham
O. W; Blodgett* G. W; Reardon FK G. Alexander, Chairman, AWS
J. D. Duncan J. E. Roth FK K Crozier, Chairman, AASHTO
A. L. Johnson J. L. Skiles
FK I: McGuire* B. D. Wright
Dli -Subcommittee 9 on Aiuminum Structures AWS D1 Representatives
D. D. Rager, Chairman J. M. Gdaniec K R. Beckmann C. R. Hess
P. J. Sullivan, Vice Chairman W; L. Jejjfery L. E. Collins D. L. McQuaid
G. A. Alison, Secretary* J. C. Jenkins* A. R. FrondutP K. K. Verma
R. L Alley* D. Kosteas*
F. G. Armao R. C. Minor
R. Bonneau C. C. Pease*
S. L. M. Cole l? Pollak AASHTO Representatives
E. G. Costello FK W; Sanders, Jr.
M. E Davis* K G. Schlosser* M. A. Grieco J. Seiders
l? B. Dickerson M. L. Sharp C. W; Holmes R FK Stieve
B. K Folkening A. A. Trinidad, Jr. J. A. filly
*Advisor
**Deceased 1990
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Vii
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500042 7 m
Foreword
(This Foreword is not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes only.)
In 1928, the first edition of the Code for Fusion Welding and Gas Cutting in Building Constructionwas published by
the American Welding Society. Since then, nine other editions of the Code have been published. During the latter part of
July 1934, a committee was appointed to prepare specifications for the design, construction, alteration, and repair of
highway and railroad bridges by fusion welding. The first edition of the specifications was published in 1936, followed
by seven other editions.
Until 1963, there were two committees, one for the Building Code and one for the Bridge Specifications. These two
major committees recognized the community of interestin establishing a better level of structural welding standardiza-
tion in the industry and had been cooperatingfor some time. In June 1963, these two committees were abolished, and
the Structural Welding Committee was organized. The committee is concerned with the preparation of standards and
the promulgationof sound practices for the applicationof welding to the design and constructionof structures. Since its
organization, the committee has prepared the Building Code and the Bridge Specifications.
The 1972, edition was prepared to cover structural welding in general, alongwith specific requirements for buildings,
bridges, and tubular structures. This consolidationeliminated the duplication in previous editions by combining the
Code and the Specificationsinto a single document. The 1975editionpublished revisions, errata, and editorialchanges.
The present edition of the Code includes additions and changes necessary to keep it current with the practices of and the
requirements for structural welding.
Sections 1 through 7 and 11 constitute a body of rules for the regulation of welding in steel structures. Sections 8,9,
and 10contain additional rules applicable to specific types of structures-statically and dynamically loaded structures,
and tubular structures-and should be used as a supplement to the first seven sections. For general structuralwelding of
statically loaded structures where no specific code or specification is applicable, section 8 is recommended.
Certain shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, and flux cored arc welding procedures, plus certain types of
joints, have been tested by users and have a history of satisfactory performance. These procedures and joints are
designated as prequalified, may be employed without presentation of further evidence (1.3), and include most of those
that are commonlyused. However, the purpose of defdng prequawied procedures and joints is not to prevent the use of
other procedures as they are developed.
When other processes, procedures, orjoints are proposed, they are subject to the applicable provisions of sections 2,
3, and 4 and shall be qualified by tests in accordance with the requirements of section 5. In the same section, the
requirements for the qualification of welders, welding operators, and tack welders are also given.
This Code does not concern itself with such design considerations as the arrangement of parts, loading, and the
computation of stresses for proportioning the load-carrying members of a structure and their connection. Such
considerations,it is assumed, are covered elsewhere in a general code or specification such as a Building Code, AISC
Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, American Railway Engineering
Association Specifications for Steel Railway Bridges, or other specifications prescribed by the owner.
Fatigue testing has demonstrated that any abrupt discontinuity of section and stress path is a factor adversely
affecting the strengthof members subject to cyclic loading. Gradual rather than sudden transitionsof sections should be
employed, and for the same reason, welds in butt joints are preferable to faet welds.
In the case of old structures, material of questionableweldability may have been used (including wrought iron or
high-strength structural silicon or nickel steels). Accordingly, it is advisable when making repairs to an old structure to
obtain samples of the material and to make laboratory tests for developing the proper welding procedure and weld
values.
Changes in Code Requirements. Where changes have been made in old requirements, a double vertical line appears
in the margin immediately adjacent to the paragraph affected. New requirements are also indicated in this manner.
Major editorialchanges in material will be indicated by a singlevertical line in the margin of the paragraph affected. This
style continues the style and format that have been used throughout the previous editions of the Code.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
Viii
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tables. Nine new tables have been added, and ten tables have been revised. The new and revised tables are indicated
by a single vertical line in the margin (the outside margin wherever possible).
Drawings. Twenty new figures have been added to the Code. Seven figures have been revised. New and revised
figures are indicated with a single vertical line in the margin adjacent to the figure.
Some of the more important revisions of the Code text are outlined below.
(1) Revision to Holding Times for Alternate Stress-Relief. Longer minimum holding times for alternate stress relief
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
heat treatment are now required. (See Table 4.5)
(2) Responsibility for Performance Qualifcation. This revision requires that the manufacturer or contractor
assume the responsibility for performance qualification, regardless of whether this qualification testing is performed by
other agencies. (See 5.4.1)
(3) Welder Qualification Requirements for GMAW-S. Welders who use GMAW in the short circuiting mode of
transfer are now required to qualify in that mode. (See 5.16.4)
(4) Welder Qualification on Pipe Greater than 4 in. O.D. and less than 3/8 in. thick. This addition to Table 5.6
aliows welders to qualify on pipes with the aforementioned dimensional lunitations. (See Table 5.6)
(5) New Limits for Tubular Weld or Base Metal Yield Strengths. All weld or base metals used in tubular
construction that exceed 75 ksi yield strength will require procedure qualification. (See 10.2.5.2)
(6) Box Tube Design Rules. New provisions have been added for the design of box tube connections, using the
Allowable Stress and Load and Resistance Factor Design methods. (See 10.5.2)
(7) Tubular Notch Toughness. New criteriato assure adequatenotch toughness in heavy thickness tubular members
has been introduced. (See 10.2.6 and 10.12 4)
(8) Revisionto Form E-4, Welder, Welding Operator and Tack Welder QualificationForms. A revision to this form
incorporates a number of welding variables. (See Appendix E)
(9) Appendix K on AlternativeMethods for the Ultrasonic Examination of Groove Welds. A new nonmandatory
appendix has been added to give users an optional method with which to inspect groove welds.
(10) Mechanical Testing. ANSIIAWS B4.0, Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds, provides addi-
tional details of test specimen preparation and details of test fixture contruction.
Commentary. The Commentary on the Structural Welding Code has been revised to reflect interpretation of
requirementsin the 1992 Code. Changes are indicated by a single vertical line in the margin. The Commentary is not
intended to supplement Code requirements, but only to provide a useful document for interpretation and application
of the Code. None of its provisions are binding. The Commentary is bound together with the 1992 Code, and the
Committee intends to follow this practice with future Codes and to update the Commentary with each new edition of
the Code.
Index. As in previous Codes, the entries in the Index are referred to by subsection number rather than by page
number. This should enable the user of the Index to locate a particular item of interest in minimum time.
Errata. It is the Structural Welding Committee’s policy that all errata should be made available to users of the Code.
Therefore, in the Society News Section of the AWS Welding Journal, any errata (major editorial changes) that have
been noted will be published in the July and November issues of the Welding Journal.
Suggestions. Comments and suggestions for the improvement of this standard are welcome. They should be sent to
the Secretary,Structural Welding Committee, American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeuneRoad., P.O. Box 351040,
Miami, Florida 33135.
Interpretations. Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may be obtained by
sendinga request, in writing, to the Director of Technical Standards and Publications, American Welding Society, 550
N.W. LeJeune Road, P.O. Box 351040, Miami, Florida 33135 (See Appendix F).
Copyright American Welding Society ix
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 W 07842b5 0500044 O
.
Table of Contents
.
Page No
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Personnel ...................................................................................... iii
...
Foreword ...................................................................................... VIU
List of Tables ................................................................................. xix
List of Figures ................................................................................. xxi
1. General Provisions ........................................................................... 1
1.1 App~cation ............................................................................. 1
1.2 Base Metal ............................................................................. 1
1.3 Welding Processes ........................................................................ 2
1.4 Thermal Cutting Processes ................................................................ 2
1.5 Definitions ............................................................................. 2
1.6 Welding Symbols ........................................................................ 2
1.7 Safety Precautions ....................................................................... 2
1.8 Standard Units of Measurement ............................................................ 2
2. Design of Welded Connections ... ............................................................. 3
Part A. General Requirements .... ............................................................. 3
2.1 Drawings ................. ............................................................. 3
2.2 Basic Unit Stresses ......... ............................................................. 3
2.3 Effective Weld Areas. Lengths and Throats .................................................. 3
Part B. Structurai Details ...................................................................... 4
2.4 Fillers .................................................................................. 4
2.5 Partial Penetration Groove Welds .......................................................... 6
Part C. Details of Welded Joints ................................................................ 6
2.6 Joint Qualification ....................................................................... 6
2.7 Details of Fillet Welds .................................................................... 6
2.8 Details of Plug qnd Slot Welds ............................................................. 6
2.9 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds ................................................... 7
2.10 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds ..................................................... 34
.........................................................................
2.1 1 Skewed T-Joints 55
3. Workmanship ............................................................................... 57
3.1 General ................................................................................ 57
3.2 Preparation of Base Metal ................................................................. 57
3.3 Assembly ............................................................................... 59
3.4 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage ........................................................ 61
3.5 Dimensional Tolerances ................................................................... 62
3.6 Weld Profiles ........................................................................... 64
3.7
3.8
Repairs
Peening
................................................................................
................................................................................ 64
66
3.9 Caulking ............................................................................... 66
3.10 Arc Strikes ............................................................................. 66
3.11 Weld Cleaning .......................................................................... 66
3.12 Weld Termination ........................................................................ 66
3.13 Groove Weld Backing .................................................................... 67
Copyright American Welding Society
X
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I J 92 0784265 0500045 2-~
W ~~
~~ ~
4 . Technique.................................................................................. 69
. Part A. General Requirements.. ............................................................... 69
4.1 Filler Metal Requirements ................................................................ 69
4.2 Preheat and Interpass Temperature Requirements ............................................ 69
4.3 Heat Input Control for Quenched and Tempered Steel ........................................ 74
4.4 Stress Relief Heat Treatment .............................................................. 77
Part B. Shielded Metal Arc Welding ............................................................ 77
4.5 Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding .................................................. 77
4.6 Procedures for Shielded Metal Arc Welding ................................................. 78
Part C. Submerged Arc Welding ............................................................... 79
4.7 GeneralRequirements ................................................................... 79
4.8 Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding ........................................... 80
4.9 Proceduresfor Submerged Arc Welding With a Single Electrode.
4.10 Procedures for Submerged Arc Welding With Parallel Electrodes
...............................
............................... 80
80
4.11 Procedures for Submerged Arc Welding With Multiple Electrodes .............................. 81
Part D. Gas Metal Arc and Flux Cored Arc Welding., ............................................ 82
4.12 Electrodes ............................................................................. 82
4.13 Shielding Gas .......................................................................... 82
4.14 Procedures for Gas Metal Arc and Flux Cored Arc Welding With Single Electrode ................ 82
Part E. Electroslag and Electrogas Welding ...................................................... 83
4.15 Qualification of Process. Procedures. and Joint Details ........................................ 83
4.16 All-Weld Metal Tension Test Requirements ................................................. 83
4.17 Condition of Electrodes and Guide Tubes ................................................... 84
4.18 Shielding Gas .......................................................................... 84
4.19 Condition of Flux ...................................................................... 84
4.20 Procedures for Electroslag and Electrogas Welding ........................................... 84
Part F. Plugandslot Welds ................................................................... 84
4.21 Plug Welds ............................................................................ 84
4.22 Slot Welds ............................................................................. 85
5. Qualijìcation ............................................................................... 87
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 87
5.1 Approved Procedures ................................................................... 87
5.2 Other Procedures ....................................................................... 87
5.3 Welders. Welding Operators. and Tack Welders .............................................. 87
5.4 Qualitïcation Responsibility .............................................................. 87
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Part B. Procedure Qualification ............................................................... 88
5.5 Limitation of Variables .................................................................. 88
5.6 Types of Tests and Purposes .............................................................. 91
5.7 Base Metal and Its Preparation ........................................................... 91
5.8 Position of Test Welds ................................................................... 91
5.9 Joint Welding Procedure ................................................................. 92
5.10 Weld Specimens: Number. Type. and Preparation ............................................ 92
5.11 Method of Testing Specimens ............................................................. 105
5.12 Test Results Required ................................................................... 111
5.13 Records ............................................................................... 115
5.14 Retests ................................................................................ 115
Part C. Welder Qualification .................................................................. 115
5.15 General ............................................................................... 115
5.16 Limitation of Variables .................................................................. 115
5.17 Qualification Tests Required .............................................................. 116
5.18 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Unlimited Thickness .......................... 117
xi
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 m 078426.5 0500046 4 m
Contents
5.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Limited Thickness ............................ 117
5.20 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints on Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing ...........117
5.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T. Y. or K-Connections on Pipe or Square or
Rectangular Tubing ..................................................................... 117
5.22 Qualifikation Tests for Fillet Welds Only and Plug Welds Only ................................. 118
5.23 Position of Test Welds ................................................................... 120
5.24 Base Metal ............................................................................ 122
5.25 Joint Welding Procedure ................................................................. 124
5.26 Test Specimens: Number. Type and Preparation ............................................. 124
5.27 Method of Testing Specimens ............................................................. 126
5.28 Test Results Required ................................................................... 131
5.29 Retests ................................................................................ 131
5.30 Period of Effectiveness. .................................................................. 132
5.31 Records............................................................................... 132
Part DyWelding Operator Qualification ......................................................... 132
5.32 General ............................................................................... 132
5.33 Limitation of Variables .................................................................. 132
5.34 Qualification Tests Required .............................................................. 135
5.35 Base Metal ............................................................................ 137
5.36 Joint Welding Procedure ................................................................. 137
5.37 Test Specimens: Number. Type. and Preparation ............................................. 137
5.38 Methods of Testing Specimens ............................................................ 139
5.39 Test Results Required ................................................................... 140
5.40 Retests ................................................................................ 140
5.41 Period of Effectiveness ................................................................... 140
5.42 Records ............................................................................... 140
Part E. Qualification of Tack Welders .......................................................... 140
5.43 General ............................................................................... 140
5.44 Limitations of Variables .................................................................. 141
5.45 Qualification Tests Required .............................................................. 141
5.46 Base Metal ............................................................................ 141
5.47 Test Specimens: Number. Type. and Preparation ............................................. 141
5.48 Method of Testing Specimens ............................................................. 142
5.49 Test Results Required ................................................................... 142
5.50 Retests ................................................................................ 142
5.5 1 Period of Effectiveness ................................................................... 142
5.52 Records ............................................................................... 142
6. Inspection .................................................................................. 143
Part A. General Requirements., ............................................................... 143
6.1 General ............................................................................... 143
6.2 Inspection of Materials .................................................................. 144
6.3 Inspection of Welding Procedure Qualification and Equipment ................................. 144
6.4 Inspection of Welder. Welding Operator. and Tack Welder Qualifications ........................ 144
6.5 Inspection of Work and Records .......................................................... 144
6.6 Obligations of the Contractor ............................................................. 144
6.7 Nondestructive Testhg .................................................................... 145
6.8 Extent of Testing ....................................................................... 145
Part ByRadiographicTesting of Groove Welds in Butt Joints ....................................... 146
6.9 General ............................................................................... 146
6.10 RadiographicProcedures ................................................................ 146
6.11 Acceptability of Welds. .................................................................. 153
6.12 Examination. Report. and Disposition of Radiographs. ....................................... 153
Part C. Ultrasonic Testing of Groove Welds ..................................................... 153
6.13 General ............................................................................... 153
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
.
Contents
6.14 ............................................................... 154
UT Operator Requirements
6.15 ................................................................... 154
Ultrasonic Equipment
6.16 Reference Standards .................................................................... 155
6.17 ................................................................. 155
Equipment Qualification
6.18 .................................................................. 155
Calibration for Testing.
6.19 Testing Procedures ...................................................................... 159
6.20 .................................................... 162
Preparation and Disposition of Reports
6.21 .................162
Calibration of the Ultrasonic Unit with IIW or Other Approved Reference Blocks
6.22 ....................................................... 163
Equipment Qualification Procedures
6.23 .......................................................... 165
Flaw Size Evaluation Procedures
6.24 ...................................................................... 165
Scanning Patterns
6.25 .............................................................................. 165
Examples
Part D. Other Examination Methods ........................................................... 166
6.26 General ............................................................................... 166
6.27 Radiation Imaging Systems Including Real-Time Imaging ..................................... 166
7. Stud Welding ............................................................................... 169
7.1 Scope ................................................................................. 169
7.2 General Requirements ................................................................... 169
7.3 Mechanical Requirements ................................................................ 170
7.4 Workmanship .......................................................................... 170
7.5 Technique ............................................................................. 171
7.6 Stud Application Qualificatkn Requirements................................................ 172
7.7 Production Control ..................................................................... 173
7.8 ........................................
Fabrication and Verification Inspection Requirements 173
8. Statically Loaded Structures .................................................................. 175
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 175
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8.1 Application ............................................................................ 175
8.2 Base Metal ............................................................................. 175
Part B. Ailowable Unit Stresses. ............................................................... 176
8.3 Base Metal Stresses ..................................................................... 176
8.4 Unit Stresses in Welds ................................................................... 176
8.5 Increased Unit Stresses.................................................................. 176
Part C. Structural Details ..................................................................... 178
8.6 Combinations of Welds .................................................................. 178
8.7 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts ................................................ 178
8.8 ......................................................................
Fillet Weld Details 178
8.9 ............................................................................
Eccentricity 178
8.10 .......................................................
Transition of Thicknesses or Widths 178
8.11 Beam End Connections .................................................................. 179
8.12 Connections of Components of Built-up Members............................................ 179
Part D. Workmanship ....................................................................... 179
8.13 Dimensional Tolerances .................................................................. 179
8.14 Temporary Welds ....................................................................... 181
8.15 Quality of Welds........................................................................ 181
9. Dynamically Loaded Structures ............................................................... 185
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 185
9.1 Application ............................................................. ..............185
9.2 Base Metal ............................................................................ 185
Part B. Allowable Unit Stresses ................................................................ 186
9.3 Unit Stresses in Welds ................................................................... 186
9.4 Fatigue Stress Provisions ................................................................. 186
Copyright American Welding Society xiii
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 = 07842b5 0500048 8 =
Contents
9.5 ...............................................................
Combined Unit Stresses., 186
9.6 Increased Unit Stresses ................................................................. 186
Part C. Structural Details ..................................................................... 186
9.7 General .............................................................................. 186
9.8 Noncontinuous Beams .................................................................. 192
9.9 Participation of moor System ............................................................ 192
9.10 Lap Joints ............................................................................ 192
9.1 I Corner and T-Joints .................................................................... 192
9.12 .....................................................
Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds 192
9.13 .................................................................
Combinations of Welds 192
9.14 ...............................................
Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts 192
9.15 .....................................................................
Fillet Weld Details 192
9.16 ..............................................................
Eccentricity of Connections 193
9.17 .................................
Connections or Splices-Tension and Compression Members 193
9.18 ...........................
Connections or Splices in Compression Members with Milled Joints 193
9.19 ...........................................
Connection of Components of Built-up Members 193
9.20 ............................................
Transition of Thickness or Widths at Butt Joints 193
9.21 ......................................................................
Girders and Beams 195
Part D. Workmanship ....................................................................... 196
9.22 Preparation of Material ................................................................. 196
9.23 Dimensional Tolerances ................................................................. 197
......................................................................
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
9.24 Temnorarv Welds 197
.
9.25 Quality of Welds.
10 ïhbular Structures
Part A. General Requirements
10.1 Application
......................................................................
..........................................................................
.................................................................
...........................................................................
197
203
203
203
e
10.2 Base Metal ........................................................................... 207
Part ................................................................
B. Allowable Unit Stresses 209
10.3 ....................................................................
Base Metal Stresses 209
10.4 ..................................................................
Unit Stresses in Welds 210
10.5 ...................................
Limitations of the Strength of Welded Tubular Connections 210
10.6
10.7
........................................
Allowable Stresses and Load and Resistance Factors
..............................................................................
Fatigue
219
219
10.8 ..........................................................
Effective Weld Area and Length 221
Part C. Structural Details., ................................................................... 222
10.9 Combination .......................................................................... 222
10.10 Fiilet Weld Details ..................................................................... 222
10.11 Transition of Thicknesses ............................................................... 223
Part D. Special Provision for Welding Tubular Joints ............................................. 223
10.12 Procedures and Welder Requirements for Tubular Joints ..................................... 223
10.13 Details for Welded Tubular Joints in T-. Y-.and K-connections Made From One Side
Without Backing ...................................................................... 228
Part E. Workmanship ........................................................................ 234
10.14 .............................................................................
Assembly 234
10.15 ......................................................................
Temporary Welds 234
10.16 .................................................................
Dimensional Tolerances 234
10.17 .......................................................................
Quality of Welds 234
Part F.Nondestructive Testing.of Groove Welds in Tubular Joints ................................... 241
10.18 Radiographic Testing ................................................................... 241
10.19 Ultrasonic Testing ...................................................................... 245
Copyright American Welding Society XiV
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
.
Contents
.
I l Strengthening and Repairing Existing Structures ................................................. 251
11.1 General ............................................................................... 251
11.2 Materials .............................................................................. 251
11.3 Design ................................................................................ 251
11.4 Workmanship .......................................................................... 251
11.5 Special ................................................................................ 251
Appendixes- Mandatory Information ............................................................. 253
Appendix I Effective Throat ............................................................... 255
Appendix II: Effective Throats of Fillet Welds in Skewed T-Joints ................................ 255
Appendix III: Requirements for Impact Testing ................................................. 257
Appendix IV: Joint Welding Procedure Requirements ........................................... 261
Appendix V Weld Quality Requirements for Tension Joints hDynamically Loaded Structures ........263
Appendix VI: Flatness of Girder Webs-Statically Loaded Structures .............................. 265
Appendix VII: Flatness of Girder Webs-Dynamically Loaded Structures ........................... 269
Appendix VI11 Temperature-Moisture Content Charts ............................................ 275
Appendix IX: Manufacturer’s Stud Base Quaiification Requirements ............................... 279
Appendix X Qualification and Calibration of Ultrasonic Units with Other Approved Ultrasonic
Reference Blocks .............................................................. 281
Appendix XI: Guideline on Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat .......................... 285
Appendixes- Nonmandatory Information .......................................................... 295
Appendix A ....................................................... 295
... .........................................................
Short Circuiting Transfer
Appendix B: Terms and Definitions. 297
Appendix C Guide for Specification Writers .................................................. 305
Appendix D: Ultrasonic Equipment Qualification and Inspection Forms ........................... 307
Appendix E Sample Welding Forms ......................................................... 317
Appendix F Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries for the Structural Welding Committee ...325
Appendix G Local Dihedral Angles ......................................................... 327
Appendix H Contents of Prequalified Welding Procedure Specification ............................ 333
Appendix J Safe Practices ................................................................. 335
Appendix K Ultrasonic Examination of Welds by Alternative Techniques .......................... 339
Commentary on Structural Welding Code -Steel .................................................... 353
Foreword ...................................................................................... 355
CI . General Provisions .......................................................................... 357
C1.1 Application .......................................................................... 357
C1.2 Base Metal ........................................................................... 357
C1.3 Welding Processes ..................................................................... 358
C2. Design of Welded Connections ................................................................ 359
C2.5 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds ................................................... 359
C2.8 Plug Welds and Slot Welds ............................................................. 359
C3. Workmanship .............................................................................. 361
C3.1 General .............................................................................. 361
C3.2 Preparation of Base Metal .............................................................. 361
C3.3 Assembly ............................................................................ 362
C3.5 Dimensional Tolerances ................................................................ 364
C3.6 Weld Profiles ......................................................................... 364
C3.7 Repairs .............................................................................. 364
C3.8 Peening .............................................................................. 366
C3.10 Arc Strikes ........................................................................... 366
C3.11 Weld Cleaning ........................................................................ 366
C3.12 Weld Termination ..................................................................... 366
C3.13 Groove Weld Backing .................................................................. 368
C4. Technique .................................................................................. 369
C4.1 Filler Metal Requirements .............................................................. 369
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1
Copyright American Welding Society
xv
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L - L 92 m 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500050 b m
Contents
C4.2 Preheat and Interpass Temperature Requirements ........................................... 369
C4.3 Heat Input for Quenched and Tempered Steel
(3.4 Stress Relief Heat Treatment
..............................................
............................................................
370
370
Part B. Shielded Metal Arc Welding ............................................................ 370
C4.5 Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding ................................................ 370
(2.6 Procedures for Shielded Metal Arc Welding ............................................... 371
Part CySubmerged Arc Welding ............................................................... 371
(2.7 General Requirements .................................................................. 371
C4.8 Electrodes and Flux for Submerged Arc Welding ........................................... 371
C4.9 Procedures for Submerged Arc Welding with a Single Electrode ...............................
C4.11 Procedures for Submerged Arc Welding With Multiple Electrodes ............................. 372
372
Part D. Gas Metal Arc and Flux Cored Arc Welding .............................................. 372
C4.12 Electrodes ............................................................................ 372
.........................................................................
C4.13 Shielding Gas 372
04.14 Procedures for Gas Metal Arc and Flux Cored Arc Welding with a Single Electrode .............. 372
Part E. Electroslag and Electrogas Welding ...................................................... 373
C4.15 Qualification of Processes. Procedures. and Joint Details ..................................... 373
C4.16 AH-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements ................................................ 373
C4.18 Shielding Gas ......................................................................... 373
04.20 Procedures for Electroslag and Electrogas Welding .......................................... 373
C5. Qualijìcation ............................................................................... 375
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 375
C5.1 Approved Procedures .................................................................. 375
C5.2 Other Procedures ...................................................................... 375
C5.3 Welders. Welding Operators. and Tack Welders
C5.4 Qualification Responsibility
.............................................
............................................................. 375
376
Part B. Procedure Qualification ............................................................... 376
C5.5 Limitation of Variables ................................................................. 376
C5.8 Positions of Test Welds .................................................................
C5.10 Test Specimens: Number. Type and Preparation ............................................ 376
376
Part C. Welder Qualification .................................................................. 378
C5.15 .............................................................................
General. 378
C5.16 .................................................................
Limitation of Variables 378
C5.21 .............................
Welder Qualification of Pipe. and Square and Rectangular Tubing 378
C5.23 .................................................................
Position of Test Welds 378
C5.30 .................................................................
Period of Effectiveness 379
C6. Inspection .................................................................................. 381
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 381
C6.1 General ............................................................................... 381
C6.2 Inspection of Materials ................................................................. 381
C6.3 Inspection of Welding Procedure Qualification and Equipment ................................ 382
C6.4 Inspection of Welder. Welding Operator. and Tack Welder Qualifications ....................... 382
C6.5 Inspection of Work and Records ......................................................... 382
C6.6 Obligations of the Contractor ........................................................... 382
C6.7 Nondestructive Testing ................................................................. 382
C6.8 Extent of Testing ...................................................................... 383
Part B. RadiographicTesting of Groove Welds in Butt Joints ....................................... 383
C6.9 General .............................................................................. 383
C6.10 RadiographicProcedure ................................................................ 383
C6.11 Acceptability of Welds ................................................................. 385
C6.12 Examination. Report. and Disposition of Radiographs ...................................... 385
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
xvi
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 m 0784265 050005L 8 m ~ ~
~
Contents
.....................................................
Part C. Ultrasonic Testing of Groove Welds 385
..................................................................
C6.15 Ultrasonic Equipment 386
...................................................................
(3.16 Reference Standards 386
................................................................
C6.17 Equipment Qualification 386
.................................................................
C6.18 Calibration for Testing 387
....................................................................
C6.19 Testing Procedures 387
C7. Stud Welding ............................................................................... 389
C7.1 Scope ............................................................................... 389
C7.2 General Requirements .................................................................. 389
C7.3 Mechanical Requirements .............................................................. 389
C7.4 Workmanship Details .................................................................. 389
C7.6 Stud Application Qualification Requirements .............................................. 389
C7.7 Production Control .................................................................... 390
C7.8 Fabrication and Venfication Inspection Requirements ....................................... 390
Appendix CIX Manufacturer 3 Stud Base Quali#ìcation Requirements .................................. 390
C8. Statically Loaded Structures .................................................................. 391
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 391
C8.1 Application .......................................................................... 391
C8.2 Base Metal ........................................................................... 391
Part B.Allowable Unit Stresses ................................................................ 391
Part C. Structural Details ..................................................................... 392
C8.6 Combination of Welds ................................................................. 392
C8.7 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts ............................................... 392
C8.8 Fillet Weld Details ..................................................................... 392
C8.9 Eccentricity .......................................................................... 394
(3.10 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths ...................................................... 394
C8.12 Connection of Components of Built-up Members ........................................... 395
Part D. Workmanship .......................................................................
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
397
C8.13 Dimensional Tolerances ................................................................ 397
C8.15 Quality of Welds ...................................................................... 397
C9. Dynamically Loaded Structures ............................................................... 401
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 401
C9.1 Application .......................................................................... 401
C9.2 Base Metal ........................................................................... 401
Part B. Allowable Stresses in Welds ............................................................ 401
C9.3 Unit Stresses in Welds .................................................................. 401
C9.4 Fatigue Stress Provisions ............................................................... 401
C9.5 Combined Unit Stresses ................................................................ 402
C9.6 Increased Unit Stresses ................................................................. 402
Part C. Structural Details ............... ..................................................... 402
C9.12 Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds ..................................................... 402
C9.13 Combination of Welds ................................................................. 402
C9.14 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts ............................................... 402
C9.19 Connections of Components of Built-up Members .......................................... 402
C9.20 Transition of Thickness or Widths at Butt Joints ............................................ 402
C9.21 Girders and Beams .................................................................... 403
C9.23 Dimensional Tolerances ................................................................ 403
C9.25 Quality of Welds ...................................................................... 404
Copyright American Welding Society xvii
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Contents
CIO. lbbular Structures ......................................................................... 407
Part A. General Requirements ................................................................. 407
C10.1 Application ......................................................................... 407
C10.2 Base Metal .......................................................................... 407
Part ByAllowable Unit Stress in Welds ......................................................... 412
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C10.3 Base Metal Stress .................................................................... 412
C10.4 Unit Stresses in Welds ................................................................. 412
C10.5 Limitations on the Strength of Welded Tubular Connections ................................. 412
Part DySpecial Provisions for Welding Tubular Joints ............................................. 424
C10.12 Procedures and Welder Requirements for Tubular Joints .................................... 424
C10.13 Prequalified Tubular Joints ............................................................ 427
Part E. Workmanship ........................................................................ 427
C10.14 Assembly ........................................................................... 427
C10.17 Quality of Welds .......... ........................................................... 427
C10.19 Ultrasonic Testing .................................................................... 428
CI 1. Strengthening and Repairing of Existing Structures ............................................. 431
C11.2 Materials ........................................................................... 431
C11.3 Design .............................................................................. 431
C11.5 Special ............................................................................. 431
Appendix CXI Guidelines on Alternate Methods for Determining Preheat ............................... 433
CXIl Preheat-Background Review and Discussion ............................................ 433
CXI2 Restraint ................:. ...................;....................................... 434
CX13 Relation Between Energy Input and Fiilet Leg Size ......................................... 434
CX14 Application ......................................................................... 435
Index ......................................................................................... 437
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
xviii
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 7 2 m 0784265 0500053 L m~ ~ ~~
List of Tables
Table Page No .
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2.1 ..................................................
Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds 4
2.2 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for PrequaUed Joints ............................................. 7
2.3 Minimum Weld Size for Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds ................................ 34
2.4 Z Loss Factor........................................................................... 55
3.1 Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Mill Induced Laminar Discontinuities in
Cut Surfaces............................................................................ 58
3.2 ....................................................... 62
Camber Tolerance for Typical Girder
3.3 Camber Tolerance for Girders Without Designed Concrete Haunch .............................. 63
4.1 ........................................................ 70
Matching Filler Metal Requirements
4.2 Filler Metal Requirements for Exposed Bare Applications of ASTM A242 and A588 Steel ........... 74
4.3 Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperature ................................................ 75
4.4 Minimum Holding Time A.. .............................................................. 77
...................................................... 77
Alternate Stress-Relief Heat Treatment
Permissible Atmospheric Exposure of Low Hydrogen Electrodes ................................ 78
Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified-Procedure
....................................... 99
Qualification; Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
5.2 Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified-Procedure
......................................... 102
Qualification; Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds
5.3 Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified-Procedure
................................................................. 111
Qualification; Fillet Welds
5.4 Procedure Qualification-Type and Position Limitations ...................................... 114
5.5 Welder Qualification-Type and Position Limitations ......................................... 125
5.6 Number and Type of Specimens and Range of Thickness Quaiified -Welder and Welding
................................................................... 126
Operator Qualification
5.7 Electrode Classification Groups -Tack Welder Qualification................................... 141
6.1 Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Requirements........................................ 149
6.2 ............................................ 150
Wire Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Requirements.
6.3 Testing Angle........................................................................... 160
7.1 Mechanical Property Requirements for Studs ................................................ 171
7.2 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Small Diameter Studs .......................................... 172
8.1 ............................................................... 177
Allowable Stresses in Welds
8.2 .................................................... 184
Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria
9.1 ............................................................... 187
Allowable Stresses in Welds
9.2 ....................................... 188
Fatigue Stress Provisions -Tension or Reversal Stresses
9.3 .................................................... 201
Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria
10.1 ............................................................... 211
Allowable Stresses in Welds
10.2 ......................................... 213
Terms for Strength of Connections (Circular Sections)
10.3 ......................... 216
Stress Categories for Type and Location of Material for Circular Sections
10.4 Fatigue Category Limitations on Weld Size or Thickness and Weld Profile........................ 221
10.5 Procedure and Welder Requirements for Tubular Joints........................................ 225
.................................................................. 228
Joint Detail Application
PrequalXed Joint Dimensions and Groove Angles for Complete Joint Penetration Groove
Welds in Tubular T-. Y-. and K-Connections Made by Shielded Metal Arc. Gas Metal Arc
.......................................
(Short Circuiting Transfer) and Flux Cored Arc Welding 229
I 10.8 Z Loss Factor ........................................................................... 238
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 m 07842b5 0500054 3 m
List of Tables
11-1 Equivalent Fiilet Weld Leg Size Factors for Skewed T-Joints ................................... 256
111-1 Impact Test Requirements ................................................................ 259
IV-1 Code Requirements That May Be Changed by Procedure Qualification Tests ...................... 262
XI- 1 Susceptibility Index Grouping as Function of Hydrogen Level “H” and Composition
Parameter P,, .......................................................................... 291
XI-2 Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperatures for Three Levels of Restraint ...................... 293
A- 1 Typical Current Ranges for Short Circuiting Transfer Gas Metal Arc Welding of Steel .............. 295
K-1 Acceptance-Rejection Criteria ............................................................. 350
c8.1 Ultrasonic Acceptance Criteria for 2 in. (50 mm) Welding. Using a 70’ Probe ...................... 400
c10.1 Structural Steel Plates .................................................................... 409
c10.2 Structural Steel Pipe and Tubular Shapes .................................................... 410
C10.3 Structural Steel Shapes ................................................................... 410
C10.4 Classification Matrix for Applications ....................................................... 411
C10.5 Survey of Diameter/Thicknessand Flat Width/Thkkness Limits for Tubes ....................... 413
C10.6 Suggested Design Factors ................................................................. 418
C10.7 Values of JD ............................................................................ 421
C10.8 Weld Notch Toughness ................................................................... 425
C10.9 HAZ Notch Toughness ................................................................... 426
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
List of Figures
Figure Page No .
2.1 Fillers Less Than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) Thick .................................................... 5
2.2 Fillers 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or Thicker .......................................................... 5
2.3 Details for PrequaWied Fillet Welds ........................................................ 7
2.4 PrequaWied Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints ................................. 8
2.5 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints .................................... 35
2.6 Details for Skewed T-Joints ............................................................... 56
3.1 Edge Discontinuities in Cut Material ........................................................ 59
3.2 Weld Access Hole Geometry ............................................................... 60
3.3 Workmanship Tolerances in Assembly of Groove Welded Joints ................................. 61
3.4 Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles .................................................. 65
4.1 Weld Bead in Which Depth and Width Exceed the Width of the Weld Face ....................... 80
5.1 Positions of Groove Welds ...:. ............................................................. 93
Positions of Fillet Welds .................................................................. 94
@ ::i
5.4
Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds
Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds
...................................................
............................................
95
96
5.5 Positions of Test Plate for Fillet Welds ...................................................... 97
5.6 Positions of Test Pipes for Fillet Welds ...................................................... 98
5.7 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe ............................................. 98
5.8 Location of Test Specimens for Welded Square or Rectangular Tubing ........................... 102
5.9 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plates-Electroslag and Electrogas Welding-
Procedure Qualification .................................................................. 103
5.10 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate Over 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) Thick-
Procedure QuaUcation .................................................................. 104
I 5.11 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate 3/8 in.(9.5 mm) Thick and Under-
Procedure Qualification .................................................................. 105
5.12 Reduced Section Tension Specimens ........................................................ 106
5.13 All-weld-metal Tension Specimen .......................................................... 108
5.14 Side Bend Specimens ..................................................................... 109
5.15 Face-and Root-Bend Specimens ........................................................... 110
5.16 Fillet Weld Soundness Tests for Procedure Qualification ....................................... 112
5.17 Pipe Fillet Weld Soundness Test-Procedure Qualification ..................................... 113
5.18 Location of Test Specimen on Welded Test Plate 1 in . (25.4 m)Thick-Consumables
Verification for Fillet Weld Procedure Qualification ........................................... 115
5.19 Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness-Welder Qualification ..................................... 116
5.20 Optional Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness-Horizontal Position-Welder Qualification ..........118
5.21 Test Plate for Limited Thickness- All Positions- Welder Qualification .......................... 119
5.22 Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness-Horizontal Position-Welder Qualification ............119
5.23 Tubular Butt Joint -Welder Qualification- Without Backing .................................. 120
5.24 Tubular Butt Joint -Welder Qualification-With Backing ..................................... 120
5.25 Test Joint for T-. Y-. and K-Connections on Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing-
Welder Qualification ..................................................................... 121
O 5*26
5.27
5.28
Corner Macroetch Test Joint for T-. Y-. and K-Connections on Square or Rectangular
Tubing for Complete Joint Penetration- Welder Qualification ..................................
Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate- Welder Qualification-Option 1
Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate- Welder Qualification-Option 2
....................
.............................
121
122
123
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 m 0784265 0500056 7 m
List of Figures
5.29 Plug Weld Macroetch Test Plate- Welder Qualification ....................................... 124
5.30 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe and Square or Rectangular Tubing-
Welder Qualification ..................................................................... 130
5.31 Guided-Bend Test Jig .................................................................... 132
5.32 Alternative Wraparound Guided-Bend Test Jig ............................................... 134
5.33 Alternative Roller-Equipped Guided Bend Test Jig for Bottom Ejection of Test Specimen ............134
5.34 Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness- Welding Operator Qualification ............................ 135
5.35 Butt Joint for Welding Operator Qualification-Electroslag and Electrogas Welding ................136
5.36 Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate-Welding Operator Qualification-Option 1 ...........137
5.37 Fillet Weld Root Bend Test Plate- Welding Operator Qualification-Option 2 .................... 138
5.38 Plug Weld Macroetch Test Plate-Welding Operator Qualification .............................. 139
5.39 Fillet Weld Break Specimen-Tack Welder Qualification ....................................... 141
5.40 Method of Rupturing Specimen-Tack Welder Qualification ................................... 142
6.1 RadiographicIdentification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately
Equal Thickness Joints 10 in. (255 mm) and Greater in Length.................................. 147
6.2 RadiographicIdentification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately
Equal Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in. (255 mm) in Length .................................... 148
6.3 RadiographicIdentification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints
10 in. (255 mm) and Greater in Length...................................................... 149
6.4 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints
.
Less Than 10 in (255 mm) in Length ........................................................ 150
6.5 ..............................................
Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Design 151
6.6 Image Quality Indicator (Wire Penetrameter)................................................. 152
6.7 Transducer Crystal ....................................................................... 154
6.8 ..............................
Qualification Procedure of Search Unit Using IIW Reference Block 155
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.9 .............................
International Institute of Welding (IIW) Ultrasonic Reference Blocks 156
6.10 Qualification Blocks ..................................................................... 157
6.11 Transducer Positions (Typical)............................................................. 163
6.12 Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns ........................................................ 166
7.1 Dimension and Tolerances of Standard Type Shear Connectors ................................. 169
7.2 ...............................................................
Typical Tension Test Fixture 170
7.3 Torque Testing Arrangement and Table of Testing Torques..................................... 172
8.1 Double-Fiilet Welded Lap Joint............................................................ 178
8.2 Fillet Welds on Opposite Side of a Common Plane of Contact .................................. 179
8.3 ........................................
Transition of Butt Joints in Parts of Unequal Thickness 180
8.4 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths........................................................ 181
8.5 Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography
............................................................
for Statically Loaded Structures 183
9.1 Examples of Various Fatigue Categories..................................................... 190
9.2 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F-Redundant Structures ....................... 191
9.3 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F-Nonredundant Structures .................... 191
9.4 Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of a Common Plane of Contact.,................................ 193
9.5 ........................
Transition of Thickness at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Thickness 194
9.6 ..............................
Transition of Width at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Width 195
9.7 Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Tension Welds (Limitations
of Porosity and Fusion Discontinuities)..................................................... 199
9.8 Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Compression Welds (Limitations
..................................................
of Porosity or Fusion Type Discontinuities) 200
10.1 Parts of a Tubular Connection............................................................. 205
10.2 Punching Shear Stress.. .................................................................. 208
10.3 Detail of Overlapping Joint............................................................... 215
10.4 Limitations for Box T-. Y-. and K-Connections............................................... 215
10.5 Overlapping T-. Y-. and K-Connections ..................................................... 218
10.6 Allowable Fatigue Stress and Strain Ranges for Stress Categories (See Table 10.3),
Redundant Structures for Atmospheric Service ............................................... 220
10.7 Tubular T-. Y-. and K-Connection Fillet Weld Footprint Radius ................................ 222
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
~
AWS DL.1 92 0784265 0500057 9 ~ ~~
10.8 Fillet Welded Lap Joint ................................................................... 223
10.9 .............................
Transition of Thickness of Butt Joints in Parts of Unequal Thickness 224
10.10 Acute Angle Heel Test (Restraints Not Shown) ............................................... 227
10.11 Definitions and Detailed Selection for Complete Joint Penetration PrequaUed Tubular
Joints for Simple T. Y. or K-Connections .................................................. 228
10.12 Prequalified Joint Details for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds in Tubular
T. Y-and K-Connections-Standard Hat Profdes for Limited Thickness ........................ 230
10.13 PrequaUied Joint Details for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds in Tubular
T. Y. and K-Connections-Profde with Toe Fillet for Intermediate Thickness .................... 231
10.14 Prequaiified Joint Details for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds in Tubular
T. Y. and K-Connections-Concave Improved Profile for Heavy Sections or Fatigue ..............232
10.15 Prequalified Joint Details for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds in Box Connections
Made by Shielded Metal Arc. Gas Metal Arc (Short Circuiting Transfer) and Flux Cored
Arc Welding ............................................................................ 233
10.16 PrequalZed Joint Details for Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds in Simple T. Y .
and K-Connections Made by Shielded Metal Arc. Gas Metal Arc (Short Circuiting Transfer).
or Flux Cored Arc Welding ............................................................... 235
10.17 Fillet Welded Prequalified Tubular Joints Made By Shielded Metal Arc. Gas Metal Arc.
and Flux Cored Arc Welding .............................................................. 239
10.18 Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by Radiography of
Tubular Joints .......................................................................... 240
10.19 Maximum Acceptable Radiographic Images Per 10.17.3.2 ...................................... 242
10.20 For Radiography of Tubular Joints 1-1/8 in. (29 mm) and Greater. Typical of Random
Acceptable Discontinuities ................................................................ 243
Class R Indications ...................................................................... 244
Class X Indications ...................................................................... 245
Single Wall Exposure-Single Wall View .................................................... 246
10.24 Double Wall Exposure -Single Wail View ................................................... 246
10.25 Double Wall Exposure-Double Wall (Elliptical) View,.Minimum Two Exposures .................247
10.26 Double Wall Exposure-Double Wall View. Minimum Three Exposures ......................... 247
10.27 Scanning Techniques ..................................................................... 249
111-1 Location of Welding Procedure Charpy Specimens ............................................ 258
VIII-1 Temperature-Moisture Content Chart to be Used in Conjunction with Testing Program
to Determine Extended Atmospheric Exposure Time of Low Hydrogen Electrodes (see 4.5.2) ........276
VIII-2 Application of Temperature-Moisture Content Chart in Determining Atmospheric Exposure
Time of Low Hydrogen Electrodes ......................................................... 277
IX-1 Bend Testing Device ..................................................................... 280
Suggested Type of Device for Qualification Testing of Small Studs ............................... 280
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Ix-2
x-1 Other Approved Blocks and Typical Transducer Position ....................................... 282
XI-1 Zone Classification of Steels ............................................................... 287
XI-2 Critical Cooling Rate for 350 VH and 400 VH ................................................ 287
XI-3 Graphs to Determine Cooling Rates for Single Pass Submerged Arc Fillet Welds ...................288
XI4 Relation Between Fillet Weld Size and Energy Input ........................................... 292
A-1 Oscillograms and Sketches of Short Circuiting Arc Metal Transfer ............................... 296
D-1 Example of the Use of Form D-8 Ultrasonic Unit Certification .................................. 311
D-2 Example of the Use of Form D.9 ........................................................... 311
D-3 Example of the Use of Form D.10 .......................................................... 313
K-1 Standard Reference Reflector .............................................................. 340
K-2 Recommended Calibration Block .......................................................... 341
K-3 Typical Standard Reflector (Located in Weld Mock-ups and Production Welds) .................... 341
K-4 Transfer Correction ...................................................................... 342
K-5 Compression Wave Depth (Horizontal Sweep Calibration) ..................................... 343
Compression Wave Sensitivity Calibration ................................................... 343
Shear Wave Distance and Sensitivity Calibration ............................................. 344
Scanning Methods ....................................................................... 345
I K-9 Spherical Discontinuity Characteristics...................................................... 346
I
Copyright American Welding Society
xxui
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 m 0784265 0500058 O m
List of Figures
K-10 ....................................................
Cylindrical Discontinuity Characteristics 346
K-1 1 ........................................................
Planar Discontinuity Characteristics 347
K-12 Discontinuity Height Dimension........................................................... 348
K-13 . Discontinuity Length Dimension........................................................... 348
K-14 CRT Screen Marking .................................................................... 350
K-15 Report of Ultrasonic Examination (Alternative Procedure)..................................... 351
Comme,ntary ................................................................................... 353
c2.1 Details of Alternative Groove Preparations for Prequalified Corner Joints ........................ 360
C3.1 Examples of Unacceptable Reentrant Corners ................................................ 362
C3.2 Examples of Good Practice for Cutting Copes ................................................ 362
c3.3 Permissible Offset in Abutting Members. .................................................... 363
c3.4 Correction of Misaligned Members ......................................................... 363
c3.5 Illustration Showing Camber Measurement Methods .......................................... 365
C3.6 Measurement of Flange Warpage and Tilt ................................................... 366
c3.7 Tolerances at Bearing Points ................................................................ 367
c4.1 Examples of Centerline Cracking ........................................................... 371
C5.1 Type of Welding on Pipe That Does Not Require Pipe Qualification ............................. 377
C8.1 Shear Planes for Fillet and Groove Welds .................................................... 392
c8.2 Minimum Length of Longitudinal Fillet Welds in End Connections .............................. 392
c8.3 Examples of Lap Joints ................................................................... 393
C8.4 Single Fillet Welded Lap Joints ...................................... .....................
; 393
C8.5 Examples of Boxing.. .................................................................... 394
(3.6 Balancing of Fillet Welds About a Neutral Axis. .............................................. 394
C8.7 Maximum Clear Spacing When Using Stitch Welds in Connections Between Rolied Members ........ 395
(3.8 Local Buckling Under Compression ........................................................ 395
C8.9 Application of Eq. 1 to Fillet Welded Members............................................... 396
C8.10 Fillet Welds in Axial Compression.......................................................... 396
C8.11 Typical Structural Applications............................................................ 397
C8.12 Example of the Application of Stitch Welds in Tension Members ................................ 398
C8.13 Partial Length Groove Weld ............................................................... 398
C8.14 Typical Method to Determine Variations in Girder Web Flatness................................ 399
c9.1 Fillet Welds in End Connections ........................................................... 402
...........................................
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C9.2 Transition in Thickness Between Unequal Members 403
c9.3 Application of Intermittent Fillet Welds to Stiffeners in Beams and Girders ........................ 404
c9.4 Relationship of Terminal Development to Weld Size ........................................... 405
c9.5 Typical Method to Determine Variations in Girder Web Flatness ................................ 406
c10.1 Simplified Concept of Punching Shear ...................................................... 414
c10.2 Definition of Terms for Computed Alpha., .................................................. 414
C10.3 Reliability of Punching Shear Criteria Using Computed Alpha (AWS Dl.1-84) .................... 415
C10.4 Upper Bound Theorem ................................................................... 417
C10.5 Yield Line Patterns ...................................................................... 418
C10.6 Transition Between Gap and Overlap Connections ............................................ 420
C10.7 Illustrations of Branch Member Stresses Corresponding to Mode of Loading ...................... 422
C10.8 Improved Weld Profile Requirements ....................................................... 423
Copyright American Welding Society XXiV
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 07842b5 0500059 2 ~ m
AWS 01.1-92
Structural Welding Code -Steel
1. General Provisions
1.1 Application will be used, and it is to be construed to mean the
Building Commissioner or the Engineer.
1.1.1 This Code covers welding requirements applicable
to welded structures.It is to be used in conjunctionwith 1.1.4 Most provisions of the Code are mandatory when
any complementary code or specification for the design the use of the Code is specified. Certain provisions are
and construction of steel structures. It is not intended to optional and apply only when specified in contract docu-
apply to pressure vessels or pressure piping. Require- ments for a specific project. Examples of common
ments that are essentially common to all structures are optional requirements and typical ways to specify them
covered insections 1through 7, and 11,while provisions are given in Appendix C.
applying exclusively to static loading, dynamic loading,
or tubular structuresare includedin sections 8,9, and 10,
respectively.
Note: m e use ofprequalij?edjoints is not intended as a
1.2 Base Metal
substitute for engineeringjudgement with respect to the 1.2.1 Specified Base Metal. The contract documents
suitability of application of these joints to a welded shalldesignatethe specification and classification of base
assembly. metal to be used. Normally, they will be selected in
accordance with the applicable design codes and specifi-
1.1.2 The fundamental premise of the Code is to provide cations. When welding is involved in the structure,
general stipulations applicable to any situation. Accept- approved base metals, as defined in 1.2.2, shouldbe used
ance criteria for production welds different from those wherever possible.
specified in the Code may be used for a particular appli-
cation, provided they are suitably documented by the 1.2.2 Approved Base Metals. The base metals to be
proposer and approved by the Engineer.' These alter- welded under this Code are carbon and low alloy steels
nate acceptance criteriacan be based upon evaluationof commonly used in the fabrication of steel structures.
suitability for service using past experience, experimen- Steels complyingwith the specificationslisted in 8.2,9.2,
tal evidence or engineering analysis considering material and 10.2, together with special requirements applicable
type, service load effects, and environmental factors. individually to each type of structure, are approved for
use with this Code. Carbon and low alloy steels other
1.1.3 AU references to the need for approval shall be than those listed in 8.2, 9.2, or 10.2 may be used, pro-
interpreted to mean approval by the Building Commis- vided the provisions of 8.2.3, 9.2.4, or 10.2.3 are com-
sioner2or the Engineer. Hereinafter, the term Engineer plied with.
1.2.3 Thickness Limitations. The provisions of this
Code are not intended to apply to welding base metals
1. The Engineeris the duly designated person who acts for and less than 118 in. (3.2 mm) thick. Where base metais
in behalf of the owner on aii matters within the scope of this thinner than 1/8 in. are to be welded, the requirements of
Code. ANSI/ AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code-Sheet
2. The term Building Commissioner refers to the officiai, or Steel, should apply. When used in conjunction with
bureau, empoweredto enforcethe local building law or specifi- ANSI/AWS D1.3, the applicable provisions of this
cations or other construction regulations. Code shall be observed.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
1
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
2/ General Provisions
1.3 Welding Processes 1.5 Definitions
1.3.1 Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), submerged The welding terms used in this Code shall be inter-
arc welding (SAW), gas metal arc welding (GMAW) preted in accordance with the definitions given in the
(except short circuiting transfer), and flux cored arc latest edition of ANSI/ AWS A3.0, Standard Welding
welding (FCAW) procedures which conform to the pro- Terms and Definitions, supplemented by Appendix B of
visions of sections 2,3, and 4, in addition to sections 8,9, this Code.
or 10, as applicable, shall be deemed as prequalified and
are therefore approved for use without performing
procedure qualification tests.
1.3.2 Electroslag (ESW) and electrogas (EGW) welding 1.6 Welding Symbols
may be used, provided the procedures conform to the Welding symbols shall be those shown in the latest
applicable provisions of sections 2, 3, and 4, and the edition of ANSI/ AWS A2.4, Symbols for Welding,
contractor qualifies them in accordance with the require- Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. Special
ments of 5.2. conditions shall be fully explained by added notes or
1.3.3 Stud welding may be used, provided the proce- details.
dures conform to the applicable provisions of section 7.
1.3.4 Other welding processes may be used, provided
they are qualified by applicable tests as prescribed in 5.2
and approved by the Engineer. In conjunction with the 1.7 Safety Precautions
tests, the joint welding procedures and limitation of Safety precautions shall conform to the latest edition
essential variables applicable to the specific welding of ANSIIASC 249.1, Safety in Welding and Cutting,
process must be established by the contractor developing published by the American Welding Society (also see
the procedure. The range of essential variables shall be Appendix J, Safe Practices).
based on documented evidence of experience with the
process, or a series of tests shall be conducted to establish Note: This Code may involve hazardous materials,
the limit of essential variables. Any change in essential operations, and equipment. The Code 'doesnot purport
variables outside the range so established shall require to address all of the safety problems associated with its
requalification. use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish
appropriate safety and healthpractices. The user should
determine the applicability of any regulatory limitations
1.4 Thermal Cutting Processes prior to use.
1.4.1 Electric arc cutting and gouging processes and
oxyfuel gas cutting processes are recognized under this
Code for use in preparing, cutting, or trimming mate-
rials. The use of these processes shall conform to the 1.8 Standard Units of Measurement
applicable requirements of section 3.
The values stated in U.S. customary units are to be
1.4.2 Other thermal cutting processes may be used regarded as the standard. The metric (SI) equivalents of
under this Code, provided the Contractor demonstrates U.S. customary units given in this Code may be
to the Engineer an ability to successfully use the process. approximate.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 m 0784265 0500061 O m
2. Design of Welded Connections
Part A 2.1.3.2 Special groove details shall be specified where
GeneralRequirements required.
2.1.4 Detail drawings shall clearly indicate by welding
2.1 Drawings symbols or sketches the details of groove welded joints
2.1.1 Full and complete information regarding location, and the preparation of material required to make them.
type, size, and extent of all welds shall be clearly shown Both width and thickness of steel backing shall be
on the drawings.3 The drawings shall clearly distinguish detailed.
between shop and field welds. 2.1.5 Any special inspection requirements shall be noted
2.1.2 Drawings of those joints or groups of joints in on the drawings or in the specifications.
which it is especiallyimportant that the welding sequence
and technique be carefully controlled to minimize shrink-
age stresses and distortion shall be so noted. 2.2 Basic Unit Stresses
2.1.3 Contract design drawings shall specifythe effective Basic unit stresses for base metals and for effective
weld length and, for partial penetration groove welds, areas of weld metal for application to statically loaded
the required weld size, as defined in2.3 and 10.8. Shop or structures, dynamically loaded structures, and tubular
working drawings shall specify the groove depths (S) structuresshall be as shownin Part B of sections 8,9, and
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
applicablefor the weld size (E) required for the welding 10, respectively.
process and position of welding to be used.
2.1.3.1 It is recommended that contract design draw- 2.3 Effective Weld Areas, Lengths,
ings show complete joint penetration or partial joint and Throats
penetration groove weld requirements. The welding
symbol without dimensions designates a complete joint 2.3.1 Groove Welds. The effective area shall be the
penetration weld as follows: effective weld length multiplied by the weld size.
completejoint penetration 2.3.1.1 The effective weld lengthfor any groove weld,
-/( cJp groove weld ( U P ) square or skewed, shall be the width of the part joined,
perpendicular to the direction of stress.
The welding symbol with dimensions above or below the
arrow designates a partial joint penetration weld, as 2.3.1.2 The weld size of a complete joint penetration
follows: groove weld shall be the thickness of the thinner part
joined. No increase is permitted for weld reinforcement.
/-
where
(E21 (E2)
partial joint
penetration groove weld 2.3.1.3 The weld size of a partial joint penetration
groove weld shall be the depth of bevel less 1/ 8 in. (3 mm)
for grooves having a groove angle less than 60°, but not
less than 45", at the root of the groove, when made by
El = weld size, other side shielded metal arc or submerged arc welding or when
E2 = weld size, arrow side made in the vertical or overhead welding positions by gas
metal arc or flux cored arc welding.
The weld size of a partial joint penetration groove
3. The term drawings refers to plans, design and detail draw- weld shall be the depth of bevel, without reduction, for
ings, and erection plans. grooves having the following angles:
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
4/ Design of Welded Connections
(1) a groove angle of 60' or greater at the root of the 2.3.2.2 The effectivelength of a curved fillet weld shall
groove when made by any of the following welding be measured along the centerline of the effective throat.
processes: shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal If the weld area of a fillet weld in a hole or slot computed
arc, flux cored arc, or electrogas welding from this length is greater than the area found from 2.3.3,
(2) a groove angle not less than 45" at the root of the then this latter area shall be used as the effective area of
groove when made in flat or horizontal positions by gas the fillet weld.
metal arc or flux cored arc welding
The design weld size of a prequalified partial joint 2.3.2.3 The minimum effective length of a fillet weld
penetration groove weld shail not be greater than that shall be at least four times the nominal size, or the size of
shown in Figure 2.5 for the particular welding process, the weld shall be considered not to exceed 25% of its
joint designation, groove angle, and welding position effective length.
proposed for use in welding fabrication. 2.3.2.4 The effective throat shall be the shortest dis-
tance from the joint root to the weld face of the dia-
2.3.1.4 The effective weld size for flare groove welds grammatic weld (see Appendix I). Note: See Appendix
when filled flush to the surface of a bar, a 90' bend in a II for formula governing the calculation of effective
formed section, or a rectangular tube shall be as shown in throats for fillet welds in skewed T-joints. A convenient
Table 2.1. tabulation of measured legs (W) and acceptable root
(1) When required by the Engineer, test sections shail openings (R) related to effective throats (E) has been
beused to verify that the effectiveweld size is consistently provided for dihedral angles between 60" and 135'.
obtained.
(2) For a given set of procedural conditions, if the 2.3.3 Plug and Slot Welds. The effective area shall be
contractor has demonstrated consistent production of the nominal area of the hole or slot in the plane of the
larger effective weld sizes than those shown in Table 2.1, faying surface.
the contractor may establish such larger effective weld
sizes by qualification. 2.3.4 The effective throat of a combination partial joint
(3) Qualification required by (2) shall consist of sec- penetration groove weld and a fillet weld shall be the
tioning the radiused member, normal to its axis, at shortest distance from the joint root to the weld face of
midlength and ends of the weld. Such sectioningshall be the diagrammatic weld minus 1/8 in. (3 mm) for any
made on a number of combinations of material sizes groove detail requiring such deduction (see Appendix I).
representative of the range used by the contractor in
construction or as required by the Engineer.
Part B
Structural Details
Table 2.1 2.4 Fillers
Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds 2.4.1 Fillers may be used in
(see 2.3.1.4) (1) Splicing parts of different thicknesses.
Fiare-Bevel- Hare-V- (2) Connectionsthat, due to existing geometricalign-
Groove Welds Groove Welds ment, must accommodate offsets to permit simple
framing.
5/16 R 112 R*
2.4.2 A filler less than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) thick shall not be
NOTE R = radius of outside surface used to transfer stress, but shall be kept flush with the
*Use 3/8 Rfor GMAW (except short circuitingtransfer) process when welded edges of the stress-carrying part. The sizes of
Ris 1/2 in. (13 mm) or greater. welds along such edges shall be increased over the
required sizes by an amount equal to the thickness of the
2.3.1.5 The minimum weld size of apartialjoint pene- filler (see Figure 2. i).
tration groove weld shail be as specified in Table 2.3. 2.4.3 Any filler 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or more in thickness
2.3.2 Fillet Welds. The effective area shall be the effec- shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate or
tive weld length multiplied by the effective throat. Stress connection material, It shall be welded to the part on
in a fillet weld shall be considered as applied to this which it is fitted, and the joint shail be of sufficient
effective area, for any direction of applied load. strength to transmit the splice plate or connection mate-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
rial stress applied at the surface of the filler as an eccen-
2.3.2.1 The effective length of a fillet weld shall be the tric load. The weldsjoining the splice plate or connection
overall length of the full-size fillet, including boxing. No material to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the
reduction in effective length shall be made for either the splice plate or connection material stress and shall be
start or crater of the weld if the weld is full size through- long enough to avoid overstressing the filler along the toe
out its length. of the weld (see Figure 2.2).
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
a
Design of Welded Connections/ 5
.............................................................
..............................................................
........................................................
TRANSVERSE
WELDS MAY
BE USED ALONG
EFFECTIVTI THESE ENDS
SIZE
4 1- ACTUAL
SIZE
Note: The effective area of weld 2 shall equal that
of weld 1, but its size shall be its effective size
plus the thickness of the filler T.
Figure 2.1 -Fillers Less Than 1/4 in.(6.4 mrn) Thick (see 2.4.2)
3
2
TRANSVERSE
WELDS MAY
BE USED
ALONG
THESE
ENDS
Notes:
1. The effective area of weld 2 shall equal that of weld I.
The length of weld 2 shall be sufficient to avoid overstressing
the filler in shear along planes x-x.
2. The effective area of weld 3 shall equal that of weld 1.
and there shall be no overstress of the ends of weld 3 resulting
from the eccentricity of the forces acting on the filler.
Figure 2.2 -Fillers 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or Thicker (see 2.4.3)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 92 9 0784265 05000b4 b 9
6/ Design of Welded Connections
2.5 Partial Joint Penetration Groove 2.7.1.2 The maximum fillet weld size detailed along
Welds edges of material shall be:
(1) the thickness of the base metal, for metal less than
Partial joint penetration groove ‘welds subject to 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) thick (see Figure 2.3, Detail A)
tension normal to their longitudinal axis shall not be (2) i/ 16 in. (1.6 mm) less than the thickness of base
used where design criteria indicate cyclic loading could metal, for metal 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or more in thickness
produce fatigue failure. Joints containing such welds, (see Figure 2.3, Detail B), unless the weld is designated
made from one side oniy, shall be restrained to prevent on the drawing to be built out to obtain full throat
rotation. thickness. In the as-welded condition, the distance
between the edge of the base metal and the toe of the
weld may be less than 1/ 16 in. (1.6 mm), provided the
weld size is clearly verifiable.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Part C 2.7.1.3 Fillet welds in holes or slots in lap joints may
Detaih of WeldedJoints be used to transfer shear or to prevent buckling or
separation of lapped parts. These fillet welds may
overlap, subject to the provisions of 2.3.2.2. Fillet welds
2.6 Joint Qualification in holes or slots are not to be considered as plug or slot
2.6.1 Joints meeting the following requirements are welds.
designated as prequalified: 2.7.1.4 The minimum length of an intermittent fillet
(1) Conformance with the details in Table 2.1 or weld shall be 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).
specified in 2.7 through 2.11 and 10.13
(2) Use of one of the following welding processes in 2.7.1.5 Minimum spacing and dimensions of holes or
accordancewith the requirementsof sections 3,4, and 8, slots when fillet welding is used shall conform to the
9, or 10 as applicable: shielded metal arc, submerged arc, requirements of 2.8.
gas metal arc (except short circuiting transfer), or flux
cored arc welding
2.6.1.1 Joints meeting these requirements may be
used without performing the joint welding procedure 2.8 Details of Plug and Slot Welds
qualification tests prescribed in 5.2,
2.8.1 The details of plug and slot welds made by the
2.6.1.2 The joint welding procedure for all joints shielded metal arc, gas metal arc (except short circuiting
welded by short circuiting transfer gas metal arc welding transfer), or flux cored arc welding processes are listed in
(see Appendix A) shall be qualified by tests prescribed 2.8.2 through 2.8.8 and 3.3.1 and may be used without
in 5.2. performing the joint welding procedure qualification
2.6.2 Joint details may depart from the details pre- prescribed in 5.2, provided the technique provisions of
scribed in 2.9,2.10,2. ll, and 10.13only if the contractor 4.21 or 4.22, as applicable, are complied with.
submits the proposed joint welding procedures to the 2.8.2 The minimum diameter of the hole for a plug weld
Engineer for approval and, at the contractor’s expense, shail be no less than the thickness of the part containing
demonstrates their adequacy in accordance with the it plus 5/ 16 in. (8 mm), preferably rounded to the next
requirements of 5.2 of this Code and their conformance greater odd 1/16 in. (1.6 mm). The maximum diameter
with applicable provisions of sections 3 and 4. shallequal the minimum diameterplus 1/ 8 in. (3 mm) or
2-1/4 times the thickness of the member, whichever is
greater.
2.7 Details of Fillet Welds 2.8.3 The minimum center-tocenter spacing of plug
welds shall be four times the diameter of the hole.
2.7.1 The details of fillet welds made by shielded metal
arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc (except short circuiting 2.8.4 The length of the slot for a slot weld shall not
transfer), or flux cored arc welding to be used without exceed ten times the thickness of the part containing it.
joint welding procedure qualifications are listed in The width of the slot shall be no less than the thickness of
2.7.1.1 through 2.7.1.5 and detailed in Figures 2.3, 2.6 the part containing it plus 5/ 16 in. (8 mm), preferably
and 10.14. rounded to the next greater odd 1/ 16 in. (1.6 mm). The
maximum width shall equal the minimum width plus
2.7.1.1 The minimum fillet weld size, except for fillet 1/8 in. (3 mm) or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the
welds used to reinforce groove welds, shall be as shown member, whichever is greater.
in Table 2.2. In both cases, the minimum size applies if it
is sufficient to satisfy design requirements. 2.8.5 Plug and slot welds are not permitted in quenched
and tempered steels.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connections/7
2.9 Complete Joint Penetration
Groove Welds
2.9.1 Completejoint penetration groove welds made by
shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc (except
I I I
short circuiting transfer), or flux cored arc welding in
butt, comer, and T-joints which may be used without
BASE METAL LESS THAN BASE METAL 114 in. (6.4 mm) performing thejoint welding procedure qualification test
1/4 in. (6.4 mm) THICK THICK OR MORE INTHICKNESS prescribed in 5.2 are detailed in Figure 2.4 and are sub-
(A) (BI ject to the limitations specified in 2.9.2.
MAXIMUM DETAILED SIZE OF FILLETWELD ALONG EDGES Complete joint penetration groove welds made by
short circuiting transfer gas metal arc welding (see
Appendix A) shall be qualified by the welding procedure
-
Figure 2.3 Details for Prequalified
Fillet Welds (see 2.7.1.2)
qualification tests prescribed in 5.2.
Legend for Figures 2.4 and 2.5
~~
Symbols for joint types
Table 2.2 B-butt joint
C-corner joint
Minimum Fillet Weld Size for T-T-joint
Prequalified Joints (see 2.7.1.1) BC-butt or corner joint
~ ~~ ~
TC-T- or corner joint
Minimum Size BTC-butt, T-, or corner joint
Base Metal Thickness (T)* of Fillet Weld**
Symbols for base metal thickness and penetration
in. mm L-limited thickness-complete joint penetration
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
U-unlimited thickness-completejoint penetration
T11/4 T 5 6.4 P-partia1j oint penetration
1 / 4 a 5 1 / 2 6.44T112.7
L/2 a 5 3/ 4 12.7aS19.0 1/4 Symbols for weld types
314- 19.m 1-square-groove
2-single-V-groove
*For non-low hydrogen processes without preheat calculated in 3 -double-V-groove
accordancewith 4.2.2, T equals thicknessof the thicker partjoined. 4 -single-bevel-groove
For non-low hydrogen processes using procedures established to 5 -double-bevel-groove
prevent cracking in accordance with 4.2.2, and for loa hydrogen 6-single-U-groove
processes, T equals thickness of the thinner part joined; single pass 7 -double-U-groove
requirement does not apply. 8-singíe-J-groove
**Except that the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the 9 -double-J-groove
thinner partjoined, 10-flare-bevel-groove
***Minimumfie for dynamicallyloaded structuresis 3/ 16 in. (5 m).
Symbolsfor welding processes if not shielded metal arc
S-submerged arc welding
G-gas metal arc weIding
2.8.6 The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall F-flux cored arc welding
have the corners rounded to a radius not less than the Welding processes
thickness of the part containing it, except those ends SMAW-shielded metal arc welding
which extend to the edge of the part. GMAW-gas metal arc welding
FCAW-flux cored arc welding
2.8.7 The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a SAW-submerged arc welding
direction transverse to their lengthshall be four times the
width of the slot. The minimum center-to-center spacing Welding positions
in a longitudinaldirection on any line shall be two times F-flat
the length of the slot. H- horizontal
V-vertical
2.8.8 The depth of filling of plug or slot welds in metal OH- overhead
5/8 in. (15.9 mm) thick or less shall be equal to the
thickness of the material. In metal over 5/ 8 in. thick, it The lower case letters, e.g., a,bycyetc., are used to differentiate
between joints that would otherwise have the same joint
shall be at least one-half the thickness of the material, but designation.
no less than 5/8 in.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
8/ Design of Welded Connections
Square-grooveweld (i)
Butt joint (B)
e
Corner joint (C)
-t-r
I-R-I
Square-grooveweld (i)
Butt joint (B) I
+-o-+. Ø
........
.......
.......
...J...%
+
,+KGOUGE
.:,T,:,:,:h:
........
............
.......
...........
.q.<.q
....$.. q ....
............
............
.A:..:.k.
(EXCEPT B-LI -SI
a
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Base Metal Groove Preparation
Thickness
(U = unlimited) Tolerances Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root As Detailed As Fit Up Welding
Process Designation T2 Opening (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3) Positions I
SMAW
GMAW
FCAW
I
B-Lib
B-Lib-GF I
114max
318 max I I
-
-
R=T 112
R=Oto li8
+il1 6,-O
+1/16,-O
+1116,-118
I +1/16,-1/8 I
All
All
%+$
required
SAW B-Li -S 318 max - R=O IO +1/16,-O F
SAW 8-Li a-S 518 max - R=O +O +1/16,-O F
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
~~
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135' to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Figure 2.4 -Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connections/B
Quare-groove weld (1) I\
L<
-.
T-joint (T)
ACKGOUGE
Corner joint (C)
Base Metal Groove Preparation
Thickness Gas
(U = unlimited) Tolerances Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation Opening (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW TC-L1b 114max U R=lj/2 +1/16,-O +I /I
6,-1 18 All - GJ
Not AS,
GMAW TC-LI-GF 318max U R=Oto1/8 +l/16,-0 +1/16,-1/8
FCAW required J
SAW , TC-L1-S 318 max U R=O t.0 +Il1 6,-O F - J,C
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root I Groove Weldina for
Process Designation TI T2 Opening Angle Position> FCAW Notes
R=1/4 a = 45" All - N
~ 6-U2a U - R=3/8 a = 30" F,V,OH - N
-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
~ R=l/2 a = 20" F.V.OH N
R=3/16 a = 30" F,V,OH Required A,N
GMAW B-U2a-GF U - R=3/8 a = 30" F,V,OH Notreq. A,N
FCAW
R=114 a = 45" F,V,OH Not req. A,N
SAW B-L2a-S 2max - R=1/4 a = 30" F - N
- I F - I N
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 318 in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structuresshall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 114 TI, but not more than 3/8 in.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135' to 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) PrequalifiedComplete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 07842b5 05000b8 3
lo/ Design of Welded Connections
Single-V-grooveweld (2) Tolerances
Corner joint (C) As Detailed As Fit Up
isee 2.9.2) (see 3.31
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Root Groove Welding for
T2 Opening Angle Positions FCAW Notes
R=1/4 a=45O All - Q
U U R=3/8 a=3O0 F,V,OH - Q
R=1/2 a=2o0 F,V,OH - Q
R=3/16 a =30° F,V,OH Required A
GMAW
C-U2a-GF U U R=3/8 a=30° F,V,OH Not req. A,Q
FCAW
R=1/4 a -45' F,V,OH Not req. A,Q
SAW I c - L ~ ~ - sI 2max I U I R=1/4
SAW I U R=510 a=20°
I F -
jingle-V-grooveweld (2)
&,< BACKGOUGE
~ cy c g
'
u
.................
................
.................
{.P*
............
I1 TTi
if*:..........
......
I I -TT
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness Gas
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Shielding
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Root Face Welding for
Process Designation Ti T2 Groove Angle Positions FCAW Notes
R=O to 118
SMAW B-U2 U - f=O to 118
Ol=6O0
R=O to 1/8
f=O to 118
"a=60°
f=1/4 max
R=O, a = 60 o F -
f=1/2 max
R=O, a = 60
f4I8 m a
O
I
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vat" from 135" to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note Q: For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may be changed provided the groove angle Is maintainedas specified.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
- --``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 2.4 (continued) Prequalified CompleteJoint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500069 5 m ~ ~
Design of Welded Connections/ 11
Single-V-groove weld (2)
Corner joint (C) I
.ï.............
...............
................
.:.:<<<g-
.......
~
'..'c.%
$ &
........
I 4 R NOTEJ
~ ~~
Base Metal * Gr we Preparation
Thickness Gas
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Shielding
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation Groove Angle (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
~~ ~
R=O to 118 +1116,-O +Il1 6,-ï18
GJ,
-I
SMAW c-u2 f=O to 118 +1116,-O Not limited All - R
a=60° + 10,O- o o + 10,"- 5 O
R=O to lia +1/16,-O +Il1 6,-1/8
GMAW Not AG,
FCAW
C-UPGF
u lu
I
f=O to 110
a =60 O
+1116,-O
+ 10-: o O
Not limited
+ 10-: 5 O
All
required JB
SAW
Double-V-grooveweld (3)
c-u2b-s
u lu R=O
f=ïl4 max
a=60°
f O
+O,-114
+ 10-: o O
+1116,-O
f 1116
+ 10,"- 5 O
F
Tolerances
- C,J,
R
Butt joint (B) BACKGOUGE As Detailed As Fit Up
(see 2.9.2) (see 3.3)
R = fO +114,-O
I i f = fO +1116,-O
f-t a =+io:- o' +IO,"- 5 '
SAW. fO +1116,-O
Spacer
SMAW fO +118,-O
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Root Groove Welding for
I ~2
Process
1
Designation
B-U3a 1 Spacer=1/8XR
TI
U
-
Opening
R=114
R=3/8
R=112
Face
f=O to 118
f=O to 118
f=O to 118
Angle
a=45 O
a = 30 O
a = 20 o
Positions
All
F,V,OH
F.V,OH
FCAW Notes
-
-
-
C,M,
N
1
Note A Not prequalifiedfor gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structuresto reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 3/8 in. Groovewelds in corner and T-joints of dynamicallyloadedstructures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 TI, but not more than 3/8 in.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner pari joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" to 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135" for corner joints and from 45" to 90"for T-joints,
provided that the basicjoint configuration (grooveangle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Figure 2.4 (continued)-Requalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - 1 92 m 0784265 0500070 1 m
12/Design of Welded Connections
Double-V-grooveweld (3) For B-U3c-Sonly
Butt joint (B)
,+<BACKGOUGE
Over to
2 2-112 1-318
2-112 3 1-314
3 3-518 2-118
3-518 4 2-318
-
4 4-314 2-314
4-314 5-112 3-114
5-112 6-114 3-314
For 11 > 6-1/4, or 1
15 2
SI= 213 (TI - 1/4)
I Base Metal I Groove Preparation
Thickness Gas
(U = unlimited) Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation Ti T2 Groove Angle (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U3b R=Oto l i a +I 116,-O +I 116,-11a All - C,M,N
U - iia
EFft B-U3-GF
f=oto
a = ß =60 "
+1116,-O
+ I O 3 -oo
Not limited
+10q-5"
Al'
Not
required
A,C,M,
N
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R=Q +Il16,-O +I II 6,-O
SAW B-U3C-S U - f=1/4min +114,-O +114,-O F - C,M,
N
a = ß =60 o +io3 -oo +IO: -5"
To find SI see table above; S2 = TI- ( S., + f )
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" to 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) bequalined Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I * & 92 E 0784265 050007I 3 = ~
Design of Welded Connections/ 13
Single-bevel-grooveweld (4) Tolerances
Butt ioint (B) As Detailed As Fit Up
(see 2.9.2) (see 3.3)
R=+l/l6,-0 +1/4,-1/16
a=+lOP-O' +10,'-5'
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation
Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Groove Welding
Process Designation Positions
R=1/4 All Br,N
SMAW B-U4a
All - I Br,N
R-3/16 a=30' All I
Required A,Br,N
GMAW -
FCAW
B-U4a-GF U R=1/4 All Not rea. I A,Br,N
R=3/8 a=30 ' F Not req. I A,Br,N
Single-bevel-groove-weld(4) Tolerances
NOTEJ,
(see 2.9.2)
NOTE V
R=+l/16,-0 +1/4,-1 /I 6
a=+10;-O0 I +10:-5'
Welding Joint
Base Metal
Thickness
(U = unlimited)
Opening
R=1/4
Groove Preparation
I
Groove
Angie
a=45'
Permitted
Welding
Posiiipns 1 1
I
F
Gas
Shielding
F
I
Notes
J,Q,V
1I II
R=3/8 a=30° F,V,OH - J,Q,V
All Required A,J,Q,V
TC44a-GF U F Not rea. A,J,Q,V
FCAW
R=3/8 a=30°
SAW TC-U4a-S
R=1/4 a=45'
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 3/8 in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 TI, but not more than 3/8 in.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135' to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note Q: For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may be changed provided the groove angle is maintained as specified.
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequafe edgedistance is maintainedto support the welding operationswithout excessive edge melting.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 M 07842b5 0500072 5
14/Design of Welded Connections
Single-bevel-grooveweld (4)
3utt joint (B)
R BACKGOUGE
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I I I
Base Metal
Thickness
(U = unlimited)
Root Opening
Groove Preparation
Tolerances Permitted
Gas
Shielding
I
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Desianation T, I T, Groove Angle (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW B-Wb U - R=O to 118 +1/16,-O +1/16,-118 All - Br,C,N
GMAW
FCAW
B-lJ4b-GF U
- f=O to 118
a=45'
+1/16,-o
+io:- o'
Not limited
+io:- 5' All Not
required I
I
N
Single-bevel-grooveweld (4) i,
T-joint (T)
:orner joint (C)
NOTE V
Welding
Process
SMAW
GMAW
FCAW
SAW
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 Ti, but need not exceed 3/8in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 Ti, but not more than 3/8in.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135' to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, roof opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135' for corner joints and from 45' to 90' for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) hequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connections/15
Double-bevel-arooveweld (5) I Tolerances
ACKGOUGE
NOTEV - F1 I -
As Detailed
(see 2.9.21
As Fit Up
(see 3.31
+1/4,-O
f=+l il6,-O t 1/16
a=+10:-O0 +10:-5'
Spacer +1/16,-O + I
/&-O
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation Opening Face Angle Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW
B-Uob
2Spacer=1/8 X R
R=1/4 f=O to 118 a=45' All
lu
U R=l/4 f=O to 118 All
TC-U5a Spacer=l/4 x R
F,OH
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 3/8 in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 TI, but not more than 3/8 in.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135' to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135" for corner joints and from 45" to 90" for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessiveedge melting.
Figure 2.4 (continued)-Prequalified Complete Joint PenetrationGroove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 92 = 0784265 0500074 9
16/Design of Welded Connections
I J& 'p,+<,
3ouble-bevel-grooveweld (5)
3utt joint (B) BACKGOUGE
A
' W
4 T1 k
Welding
Process
1
I
I
I
Joint
-
Desianation
1
4
1
I
I
I
1-1
RFA?E?
Base .
..-.. Metal
(U = unlimited)
I -
I
I
GrooveAngle
Groove Preparation
I
(see 2.9.2)
I
(see 3.3)
: : :E
I
I
I
Positions
Ga
shielding
for
FCAW Notes
I I I R=Oto 118 I +1/16.-O I
+1/16,-118 I
- f=O to 118 +1/16,-O Not limited All -
SMAW B-U5a U
cr=45' +loo +10 "
ß = O"to 15' a+p -0" a+ß 5o
I I I I R=OtO1/8 I
+1/16,-O I +1116,-118 I
GMAW - f=O to 118 +1/16,-O Not limited Not req.
B-U5-GF U All
FCAW a=45" a+ß= a+ß=
ß = O'to 15" +lOp-Oo +lOp-SO
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Base Metal Groove Preparation
Gas
Thickness Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Shielding
Joint unlimited) Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding
Welding for
Process Designation Tp Groove Angle (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
MS I I u I 1 1
FCAW
TC-U5b
TC-US-GF
R=O to 118
f=O to 1/8
a = 45 "
R=O
+li16,-O
+1/16,-O
+lop - O o
+O
+I116,-1/8
Not limited
+lop - 5 "
+1116,-O
1, Not
required
SAW TC-U5-S U U 14/3/16max +O,-3/16 f 1/16 F
a = 60 " +lop -0" +lop - 5 "
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 Ti, but need not exceed 3/8 in. Groovewelds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loadedstructures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 114 Ti, but not more than 3/8 in.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Nofe N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135O to 180e provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135O for corner joints and from 45' to 90° for T-joints,
providedthat the basic joint configuration (grooveangle, root face, root opening) remainthe same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V Forcorner joints, the outside groovepreparation may be in either or both members, providedthe basic grooveconfiguration
is not changedand adequate edge distanceis maintainedto support the welding operationswithout excessive edge melting.
Figure 2.4 (continued)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
-PrequalifiedComplete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 9 2 m 0784265 0500075 O m ~
Design of Welded Connections/ 17
I f = ? 1/16 I Nof Limited
I r=+118,-0 I +1/8,-0
-
Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
I I
~
Welding Joint Root Groove Roof Groove Welding for
Process Designation T19-
;l Opening Angle Face Radius Positions FCAW Notes
R=O to l i a All C,N
R=O fo 118 F,OH
SMAW
R=O to 118 All
R=O to 118 a=20 o I f=1/8 I r=1/4 F,OH
GMAW B-U6-GF U All
U All I Notreq. I A,C,J,R
I Tolerances
For B-U7 and B-U7-GF For B-U7-S
R=+O +1/16,-0
la =+IO.% O I +io05 O I
f =+1/16,-O I Not Limited
r=+114,-0 I 11/16
Groove Preparation
CI =20 o
f=114 r=1/4 F - C,M,N
max
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge roof to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shali be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 318 in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamicaliy loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 TI, but not more than 318 in.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" to 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 4 5 O to 135" foF corner joints and from 45" to 90" for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain thesame and that the design weld
size is maintained. --``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 2.4 (continued) -Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
18/Design of Welded Connections
Single-J-grooveweld (8) Tolerances
Butt joint (B)
r=+114.-0 f1116
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Groove Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation T2 Opening Angle Face Radius Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U8 U - R=O to 118 a = 45 o f=118 r=3/8 All - Br,C,N
:!!p B-U&GF U -
R=O to 110 a= 30 O f=118 r=318
All Not
Required
AsBr,
C,N
Single-J-grooveweld (8) Tolerances 1
I a= +10 P- O o l + I O P- 5' I
I f=+1116,-0 I Not Limited I
r=+114,-0 I f 1116
Y
NOTE J
Groove Preparation
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 3/8 in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to V 4 TI, but not more than 3/8 in.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45' to 135' for corner joints and from 45" to 90" for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0784265 0500077 4 ~~
Design of Welded Connections/ 19
Double-J-groove weld (9) Tolerances
Butt joint (B) As Detailed As Fit Up
(see 2.9.2) (see 3.3)
R=+I/l6,-0 +1/16,-1/8
CI= +io,o-oo +10:-5O
f =+1/16,-0 Not Limited
r=+1/8,-0 fl/l6
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 1 3 5 O to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Figure 2.4 (continued) -Prequalified CompleteJoint Penetration GrooveWelded Joints (see 2.9.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 9 2 W 0784265 0500078 b
20/ Design of Welded Connections
Double-J-grooveweld (9) Tolerances
T-joint (T) As Detailed As Fit Up
ACKGOUGE (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3)
r NOTE V R=+l/l6,-0 +1/16,-1/8
a= + l o p - o o +10,"-5"
f =+1/16,-O Not Limited
r=+1/8,-0 t 1/16
Base Metal
Thickness
(U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation
Permitted
I Gas
Shielding
I
Welding Joint Root Groove Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation T2 Opening Angle Face Radius Positions FCAW Notes
R=O to 118 a = 45 ' f=1/8 r=3/8 All - C,J,M,R,V
SMAW TC-U9a U U
R=O to 118 a = 30 O f=1/8 r=3/8 F,OH I - IC,J,M,R,V
GMAW TC-U9a-GF U U R=O to 118 Q= 30 ' f=1/8 r=3/8
FCAW
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 T,, but need not exceed 3/8 in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 T,, but not more than 3/8 in.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135" for corner joints and from 45' to 90" for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
Figure 2.4 (continued) -Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connectionsi2l
Square-grooveweld (1)
Butt joint (E) n
Corner joint (C)
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Base Metaf Groove Preparation
Thickness Gas
(U = unlimited) Tolerances Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation T2 Opening (see 2.9.23 (see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
€3-Lla 6.4max - R=T 1 +1.6,-O +6,-1.6 All - N
SMAW
C-LIa 6.4max U R=T i +I.6,-O +6,-1.8 Ali - -
FcAw Not
GMAW
E-Lla-GF 9.5rnax - R=T 3 +.6,-O
i +6,-1.6 A''
required
A,N
/+-
e
1
Square-grooveweld (i
Butt joint (E} GOUGE (EXCEPT B-Li-S)
ALL DIMENSIONS tN mrn
Base Metal Groove Preparation
Thickness Gas
(U= unlimited) Tolerances Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation Ti T2 Opening (see2.9.2) (see3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
-
~
SMAW E-L1b 6.4max - R=T 1i 2 +1.6;0 + .6,-3
i All G.N
GMAW Not A,C,
FCAW
E-Llb-GF 9.5 max - R=û to 3 +1.6,-O +I -6,-3 AU
required N
SAW €3-LI-s 9.5 rnax - R=O I +O +i .6,-O F
- N
-
SAW B-Lla-S 15.9max - R=O I to il .6.-O F C, N
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note G: Backgouge root to sound metal before wetding second side.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135O to 180° provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, roof opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
a -
Figure 2.4 (continued) PrequalifiedComplete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
221Design of Welded Connections
Square-groove weld (1) I-
;-'*
T-joint (TI
/e< BACKGOUGE
ALL DIMENSIONS IN rnm
-
Notes
Single-V-grooveweld (2) Tolerances
Butt -ioint 03)
. . As Detailed I As Fit Up
I \ I /
(see 2.9.2)
R=+l -6,-O
a =+IO,%
ALL DtM NSIONS IN rnrn
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Welding
Process
SMAW
GMAW
E-U2a-GF U - R=10 (y. -30 O F,V,OH Notreq. A,N
FGAW
R=6 a 4 5O F,V,OH Notreq. A,N
SAW 8-L2a-S 50.8max - R=6 (y. =30 o F - N
-
I
~~
SAW 6-U2-s 1 U - R=l6 a =20 O F N
Note A: Not prequatifiedfor gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shalt be equal to
1/4 T, , but need not exceed 10mm. Groove wetds in corner and T-joints of dynamicatly loaded structuresshall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to U4 T,, but not more than 10 mm.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135O to 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Figure 2.4 (continued) -PrequaIified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of \Velded Connectionsf23
Single-V-grooveweld (2)
Corner joint (C) 1 I
(see 2.9.21 (see 3.3)
I
I
R=+t.6.-0 +6,-1.6
In =+lO,"-O' 1 +10,"-5"
Wf
ALL DIMENSIONSIN mm I
4 Tz
-i .-
14-R
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
jingle-V-grooveweld (2) I
3utt joint (BI I BACKGOUGE
R-. &-
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
R o b Opening Tolerances Permitted 5 hieláing
Welding Joint - Root R ~ c e As Detailed As Fit Up Welding
Process Designation T2 Groove Angle (see2.9.21 (see 3.3j ~
Positions
*I ~1
II-
R=O to 3 -1-1.6,-O +l.6.-3
- f=O to 3 +1.6,-0 Not limited
01 =60 i-1000 O 110% o
R-O to 3 +I .6,-O cl 6.-3
- f=O to 3 +1.6.-0 Not limited All required
U. =6Q a ClCtOO O +I005
Over 12.7
to 25.4
- R=O, =60
f=6 max
SAW
I B-L2c-S
I Over 25.4 to
38.1
Over 38.1 R=O, U. =60
-
to 50.8 f=t6 max
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note G: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" to 18ûo provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note Q: For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may he changed provided the groove angle is maintained as specified.
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) PrequaIified CornpieteJoint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see2.9.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
~- ~-(Dimensions in Milluneters) -~ Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
- - ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L 9 L 7 2 m 07842b5 0500082 B m
~
241Desigrt of Welded Connections
Single-V-grooveweld (2) O
~-
f ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Metal Groove Preparation
Thickness Gas
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Shielding
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Resignation Tj T2 Groove Angle (see 2.9.2) {see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
R=O to 3 +.6,-O
I +1.6,-3
C,J.
SMAW C-U2 U U k O to 3 +1.6,-0 Not limited All - R
O: =60 O +10;0 O +10,%5 o
R=O to 3 +1.6,-O +1.6,-3
C-UPGF U U f=O to 3 +I .6,-0 Not limited Not AC,
FCAW required J.R
Cr =60 o i10~0 +10,?5 '
-
R=O 'O +f .6,-O
SAW C-U2b-S U U f=6 max +O,-6 +_ 1.6 F - C.J,
R
e
O: =60 o +loo0 " +I005 o
Double-V-grooveweld (3) Tolerances
Buttjoint (Bj As Detailed As Fit Up
(see 2.9.2) (see 3.3)
R=+O +&-O
f='O .6,-a
+i
u =clO.oO O +lo% o
SAW +o +i.6,-0
Spacer
SMAW 1 'O +3,-O
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Metai
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
{U = unlimited) . Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Root Groove Welding for
Process DeSiQflatiOn Ti T2 opening Face Angle Positions FCAW Notes
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R=6 f=O to 3 U =45 O All -
U
SMAW B-U3ã
Spacer=3 X R
- R=10 f=O to 3 a =30 o F.V,OH - GM.
N
R=13 f=O to 3 M =20 o F,V,OH -
SAW
U
Spacer=6 x R
- R=16 f=O io 6 6
3 =20 O F - C,M
N
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: tf fillet wetds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
f/4 T, but need not exceed 10 mm. Groovewelds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
~
with fiflet welds equal to 1í4 TI, but not more than 70 mm.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequat depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shalf be no less than
one-fourih of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135O to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle. root face, root opening} remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two memberc in the joints may vary from 45" to 135O for corner joints and from 45' to 90" for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remainthesame and that the design weid
size is maintained.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS -~
Figure 2.4 (continued) -Bequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
(Dimensionsin Millimeters) Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100 ~
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 92 m 0784265 0500083 T
~~
~~ ~ m
~-
Design of Welded Connectioiis/25
-
:
Double-V-groovewold (3)
Butt joint (B)
t
For E-U3c-Sonly
63.5
I
ì + 63.5 76.2 44
76.2 92.2
2jgi$s.,
.. -t -- 92.1 101.6 60
...*.. ..
...........
...... - i
-f 70
l i : ' 4 - ? 101.6 120.7
120.7 i39.7 83
139.7 158.8 95
ALL DIMENSIONS IN nim
Base Metal Groove Preparation
For T i > 158.8, or T i $50.8
Sr = 2/3 (TI - 6) I
Thickness Gas
Root Opening Toierances Permitted Shielding
(U = unliniited}
Welding Joint __ Root Face As Detailed i As Fit UR Welding for
Process Designation [see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
BU3b Al! - G.M.N
R=O to 3 il .6.-3
1 €3-US-GF
U f-O to 3 il .6.-O Not lirnited
AI!
Not
required
A.C,M?
N
I u SAW B-U~C-S F
1 To find Cl see-tableabwie; ST =TI - (St f) I
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C. Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth. but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner pari joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Figure 2.4 (continued) -Prequaiified CompleteJoint Penetration Groove WeIded Joints (see 2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
261Design of Welded Connections
Single-bevel-grooveweld (4) I Toterances l
Butt joint (6)
!~ ...............
..................
................
.................
-..._..- .;t
.................
..............
As Detailed
(see 2.9.2)
As Fit Up
tsee 3.3)
R-
----e-
Single-bevel-groove-weid (4) Tolerances
T-joint [Tj
Corner joint (G) NOTEV ,
............
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation Ti I TZ Opening Angle Positions FCAW Notes
I I I
~
t
SMAW TC-U4a U U
R=6
I a = 45"
U = 30"
1f All
F,V.OH
t
I
-
-
J,Q,V
I I
R=l O l
R=5 a= 30" Al Required
GMAW TC-U~EI-GF U U R=l O a= 3 0 " F Not req.
FCAW
I I
R=6 f a= 45 o Ali Not req.
R=f O a = 30"
SAW TC-U4a-S U U F -
R=6 a= 45"
Note A: Nof prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Nofe Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints. they shall be equal to
1/4Tf, but need not exceed 10 mm. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 T,, but not more than 10 mm.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Noie Q: For corner and T-joints. the member orientation may be changed provided the groove angle is maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, providedthe basicgroove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
Figure 2.4(continued)
Copyright American Welding Society
-PrequaWed CompleteJoint Penetration GrooveWelded Joints (see 2.9.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
~~ __ ~ - ~~
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
~ - ~~- Not for
- Resale,
- 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
~ ~ - - ~- ~-
Design of WeIded Connections! 27
I !
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm -4 Ti b-
Base Metal Groove Preparafion
Thickness Gas
(U = unlimited) Root Opening Toierances Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation T2 Groove Angle [see 2.9.2) (see 3.3j Positions FGAW Notes
SMAW I B-U4b U - R=O to 3 CI .6.-O +i6.-3 Alt - Br.C,N
GMAW
FCAW
I B-U4b-GF U - f=O to 3
a = 45"
+I -6.-O
+ t o :-
o O
Not limited
+20?-5" Al'
Not
required
A,Br,C
N
Single-bevel-grooveweld (4)
r-joint (TI
Tt NOTE V
NOTE J
I
f2 I
i-
ALL DIMEilVSIONS IN mm -ci
t Base Metal I Groove Preoaration 1
Thickness Gas
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Shielding
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation I fa Groove Angle (see 2.9.2) [see 3 . 3 Positions FCAW Notes
-
SMAW
GMAW
FCAW
TC-U4b-GF I U I u I f=O to 3
450 I +1.6.-0
oa
I Not limited
+i0 05o I Alt
Not
required
~
C.J,R*V
A.C.J.
R'V
I I
R=O ?O &.-O
SAW TG-U4b-S U U f=6 +o,-3 c 1.6 F C.J,R.
a = 60a +looo +I 0.O- 5 o Y
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position {see 9.12.5).
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce grocive welds in corner and T-joints. they shall be equal to
INT,, but need not exceed 10 mm. Groovewelds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loadedstructuresshall be reinforced
with fillet welds equaf to 1/4 T, , but not more than 10 mm.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135O to 180' provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135" for corner joints and from 45O to 90" for T-joints.
providedthat the basic joint configuration (grooveangfe, root face, root opening) remain thesame and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints. the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintainedto support the welding operationswithout excessive edge melting.
Figure 2.4 (continued) -PrequalifiedCompleteJoint Penetration GrooveWeldedJoints (see2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society - ~~ - ~ ~ -
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
28JDesignof Welded Connections
Tolerances
Ac Detailed As Fir Up
(see 2.9.2) (see 3.3)
NOTEV
. R=ro 1 +6;0
f=% 1.6,-0 21.6
a= +io:- 00 +io:- 5"
Spacer +1.6,-O +3,-O
ALL DIMENSIONS tN mrn
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation T2 Opening Face Angle Positions FCAW Notes
B-Wb
U
U R& f=O to 3 a= 4 5 - All - 6r.C.
Spacer=l/8 X R M,N
SMAW
u R=6 f=O to 3 a=45" Alt - C,JM
TC-U5a ~pacer=l/4
xR U R,V
- C,J,M.
R-1 O f=O to 3 a= 30 o F,OH
R,V
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metat before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equaf to
i/4 Tf , but need not exceed $0mm. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structures shall be reinforced
with fillet wetds equal to V 4 TI, but no€more than 10 mm.
Note M: Doublegroove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shalt be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135' to 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
{groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135O for corner joints and from 45" to 90" for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the came and that the design weld
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, providedthe basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintainedto support the welding operationswithout excessive edge melting.
Figure 2.4 (continued) -Prequalified CompleteJoint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 07842b5 0500087 7 ~ ~~ = ~
Design of Welded Connections/29
Double-bevel-grooveweld (51
Buttjoint (B)
-. w
A
1 1 ~ 1 ~
ALL DIMENSIONSIN mm TI
t t BaseMetal
Thickness
I Groove Preparation
Gas
Welding Joint RootOpening Tolerances Permitted Shielding
Ac Detailed As Fit Up Welding for
Process Designation Groove Angle (see 2.9.2) (see 3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
R=O to 3
f=O to 3
All - Br,
o: = 45O CMN
+1.6,-0 +1.6.-3
GMAW
FCAW
B-US-GF U - f=O to 3
o:=45" CI+
+f .6,-O
ß=
Not limited All Notreq. AE:k
p= aoto 15 O
I
Doublebevel-grooveweld (5)
T-joint (T)
Corner joint (G)
NOTE V
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Metal Groove Preparation
Thickness Gas
Root Opening Toierances Permitted Shielding
(U= unlimited)
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up We!ding for
Process Designation T~ f2 Growe Angle {see 2.9.2) (see3.3) Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW TC-USb U U All - C.JM
R=O to 3 i1.6,-0 +l.S,-3 R.V
f-O to 3 +1.6.-0 Not limited
GMAW a = 45O +10p-oo +lop- 5O Not A,C,J'
TC-US-GF U U Al'
required M,R.V
FCAW
R=O CO +I .6,-0
SAW TC-US-S U U C 5 max i0.4 2 1.6 F - CAM.
R.V
C L = 60 a tlOt0-O0 +to:- 5G
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Er: Dynatnic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groovewelds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T,. but need not exceed10 mm. Groovewelds in cornerandT-joints of dynamicailyloadedstructuresshaltbe reinforced
with fillet welds equal to if4 Ti, but not more than 10 mm.
Note M: Double-groovewelds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135" te 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle, root face. roof opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135' for corner joints and from 45" to 90" for T-joints.
O providedthat the basicjoint configuration (grooveangle, root face, root opening) remainthe sameandthat the designweld
size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints. the outsidegroovepreparationmay be ineither or both members. providedthe bask groove configuration
is not changed andadequateedgedistanceis maintainedtosupportthe welding operationswithout excessiveedgemelting.
i
Figure 2.4 (continued) -Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Weìded Joints (see 2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
- - ~. -~ ~- ~
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~~
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - 1 92 m O784265 0500088 9 m
30/Design of Welded Connections
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Tolerances Tolerances
For B-U7 and BU7-GF For SU7-S
R=+f .6,-O
f=+0,-6
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Groove Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation 5 T2 Opening Angte Face Radius Positions FCAW Notes
R=Ofo3 Q 4 5 o f=3 r=6 All - CMN
SMAW B-U7 U -
R=Otû3 O! =2O O f=3 r=6 F.OH - C,MN
FE!. BU7-GF
U - R=Oto3 01 =20 o f=3 f=6 A'' No!
Required
AG.
N,M
CAW 6-U7-S U - R=O ct =2fJ o f=6 r=6 F - C,M,N
max
Mote A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transier. Refer to Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet &ds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shalf be equal to
1/4 TI but need not exceed IO mm. Groovewefds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loaded structuresshalt be reinforced
I
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 T, but not more than 10 rnm.
Rote M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no tess than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from t 3 5 O to 18O0 provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angle. root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45' to 135' for corner joints and from 45O to 90' for T-joints,
providedthat the basic joint configuration (grooveangle, root face, root opening) remainthe same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Figure2.4 (continued) -PreqwWed CompleteJoint Penetration GrooveWeldedJoints(see 2.9.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS ~ ~~
(Dimensions
~-
in Millimeters)
~ ~ _
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
~ ~ _ _ -
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
j
e
Design of Welded tonnectionsj' 31
Single-J-grooveweld (81 IC Toler inces
Butt joint (6) As Detailed As Fit Up
(see 2.9.2) (see 3.3)
R=+1.6.-0 i-1.6,-3
u=+roP-oo +10:-5O
f =+f .6.-O Not Limited
r=+6.-0 f1.6
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm I
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
[U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Joint Root Groove Root Groove Welding for
Welding
Process Designation Ti I T2 Opening Angfe Face Radius Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW f3-U8 U - R=Oto3 u=4?j0 f=3 r=10 All - 6r.C.N
Ti, B-US-GF U - R=Oto3 a= 30' f=3 r=10 A'k
Not
Required
A.Br,
C,N
Single-J-grooveweld (8) I Tolerances t
T-joint (T)
Corner ioint (C1 bee 2.9.2) [see 3.31
-
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Groove Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation Tl T2 Opening Angle Face Radius Positions FCAW Notes
~=0io3 u= 45 O f=3 I r=tO i All - C.J,R.V
SMAW TC-UBa U U
~=0to3 a= 4 5 0 f=3 f r=ío F.OH 1 - C.J,R.V
TC-U8a-GF U U ~=oto3 a= 45 O f=3 r=lO Not A,C,J,
Alr Required R,V
Note A: Not prequaiified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer t o Appendix A.
Note Er: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 Ti, but need not exceed 10 mm. Groovewelds in corner and T-joints of dynamically foaded structures shall be reinforced
with filiet welds equal to IF4 T, but not more than 10 mm.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135Gto 180" provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angte, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135O for corner joints and from 45O to 90" for T-joints,
provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed andadequate edge distance is maintained to support the wetding operations without excessiveedge melting.
Figure 2.4 (continued) -PrequalifiedComplete Joint Penetration GrooveWeldedJoínts(see 2.9.1)
@imensions in Millimeters)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 m 0784265 0500090 7 m
32)Design of Welded Conneetions
Double-J-grooveweld (9) Tolerances
Butt joint (B) As Detailed I As Fit Up
{see 2.9.2) I (see 3.i)
R=+1.6,-0 I +I -6,-3
a =+io,% o I +lo%
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation Gas
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
WetdÌng Joint Root Groove Root Groove Welding for
Process Designation Ti T2 Opening Angle Face Radius Positions FCAW Notes
SMAW &U9 U
- R=Oto3 a 4 5 í=3 r=iO All - Br,C,M,
N
FCAW
B-US-GF I u - R=O to3 O: =30 f=3 r=1û A" N?f
Required
A,&$,
M,N
1 [ f 1
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note Er: Dynamic toad application limits these joints to the horizontal position (see 9.12.5).
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metat before welding second side.
Note M: Doubfe-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 1 3 5 O to 180° provided that the basic joint configuration
(groove angie, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weid size is maintained.
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration GrooveWelded Joints(see 2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m O784265 0500071 9 m ~ ~
~
Design of Welded Connections133
Double-J-grooveweid (9)
f.
'A:
Tderances
T-joint (T) AGKGOUGE kDe€aifed ASFtUp
Corner joint (C) (see2.9.2) (see3.3)
NOTE V R=+t.6,-0 +f .6;3
a=+toP- o" +lOP-5O
f =+1.6.-O Not Limited
r=+3.-0 ?t.6
J
ALL DIMENSIONSIN mm
Base Metal
Thickness Groove Preparation
(U = unlimited) Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Groove Root Groove Welding
Process Designation T2 Opening Angle Face Radius Positions
~=0to3 1 a = 45 O f=3 r=fû All
SMAW TC-USa U U
R=Oto3 I a= 30 o f=3 r=10 F,OH
$
:: TC-Usa-GF
U U R=üfo3 Q= 30 f=3 r=10 All
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metaí arc wetding using short circuiting transfer. Refer ta Appendix A.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet wetds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shalt be equal to
1/4T1, but need not exceed 10mm. Groovewelds in corner and T-joints of dynamically loadedstructuresshall be reinforced
with fillet welds equal to 1/4 TI, but no€more than 10 mm.
Note M: Double-groove wefds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than
one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note R: The orientation of twa members in the joints may vary from 45" to 135" for corner joints and from 45" to 90" for T-joints,
providedthat the basicjoint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld
size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparationmay be in either or both members, providedthe basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessiveedge melting.
-
Figure 2.4 (continued) PrequaìifiedComplete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.9.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D i - L 92 W 0784265 0500092 O W
e
34/Design of Welded Connections
2.9.2 Dimensions of groove welds specified in 2.9.1 may 2.10.1.2 All partial ioint Penetration groove welds
vary on design or detail drawings within the limits or made by short 6ircuitin”gtransfer gas m e t i arc welding
tolerances shown in the “As Detailed” column in Figure (see Appendix A) shall be qualified by the joint welding
2.4. Fit up tolerance of 3.3 may be applied to the dimen- procedure qualification test prescribed in 5.2.
sions shown on the detail drawing.
J- and U-grooves and the other side of partially 2.10.2 Dimensions of groove welds specified in 2.10.1
welded double-V and double-bevel grooves may be pre- may vary on design or detail drawings within the limits
pared before or after assembly. After back gouging, the or tolerances shown in the “As Detailed” column in
other side of partially welded double-V or double-bevel Figure 2.5. Fit up tolerances of 3.3 may be applied to the
joints should resemble a prequalified U-or J-joint con- dimensions shown on the detail drawing. J- and U-
figuration at the joint root. grooves may be prepared before or after assembly.
2.9.3 Groove preparations detailed for prequalified 2.10.3 Minimum Weld Size. The minimum weld size of
shielded metal arc weldedjoints may be used for prequal- partial joint penetration square-, single-, or double-V-,
ified gas metal arc or flux cored arc welding. bevel-, J-, U-, and flare bevel groove welds shall be as
shown in Table 2.3.
2.9.4 Joint Root Openings. Joint root openings may Shop or working drawings shall specify the groove
vary as noted in 2.9 and 2.10. However, for automatic or depths (S) applicable for the weld size (E) required for
machine welding using flux cored arc, gas metal arc, and the welding process and position of welding to be used.
submerged arc welding processes, the maximum root
openingvariation (minimum to maximum opening as fit 2.10.4 Groove preparations detailed for prequalified
up) may not exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm). Variations greater shielded metal arc weldedjoints may be used for prequal-
than 1/ 8 in. shall be locally corrected prior to automatic ified gas metal arc or flux cored arc welding.
or machine welding. 2.10.5 Corner Joints. For corner joints, the outside
2.9.5 Corner Joints. For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members,
groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is not changed
provided the basic groove configuration is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the
and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive melting.
welding operations without excessive melting.
Table 2.3
2.10 Partial Joint Penetration Minimum Weld Size for Partial Joint
Groove Welds Penetration Groove Welds (see 2.10.3)
2.10.1 Partial joint penetration groove welds made by Base Metal Thickness of Minimum
shielded metal arc welding, submerged arc welding, gas Thicker Part Joined Weld Size*
metal arc welding (except short circuiting transfer), or in. mm in. mm
flux cored arc welding in butt, corner, and T-joints which
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
may be used without performing the joint welding 1/8 (3.2) to 3/ 16 (4.8) incl. 1/16 2
procedure qualificationtests prescribed in 5.2 are detailed Over 3/ 16 (4.8) to 1/4 (6.4) incl. 1/8 3
in Figure 2.5 and are subject to the limitations specified Over 1/4 (6.4) to 1/2 (12.7) incl. 3/ 16 5
in 2.10.2. Over 1/2 (12.7) to 3/4 (19.0) incl. 1/4 6
Over 3/4 (19.0) to 1-1/2 (38.1) incl. 5 / 16 8
2.10.1.1 Definition. Except as provided in Figure 2.4 Over 1-1/2 (38.1) to 2-1/4 (57.1) incl. 3/8 10
and 10.13, groove welds without steel backing, welded Over 2-1/4 (57.1) to 6 (152) incl. 1/2 13
from one side, and groove welds welded from both sides, Over 6 (152) 5/8 16
but without back gouging, are considered partial joint
penetration groove welds. *Exceptthe weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner part.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I J 9 2 = 078LI265 0500093 2 W ~
Design of Welded Connections[ 35
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(U = unlimited) Tolerances Permitted Weld
Welding Joint As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation T2 Root Opening (see 2.10,2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
B-Pla 1/8max - R=O to 1116 +1/16,-O *If16 All T1-1/32 6
SMAW
B-Plc 1/4 max - T1 min
R= - +1/16,-O +1/16 All -
T1 B
2 2
I Square-grooveweld (1)
Butt joint (6) I
17 I
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
Tolerances Permitted Weld
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation T1 7-2 Root Opening (see 2.10,2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
SMAW B-Plb 1/4max - 11
R= - +1/16,-O IV16 All 3T1
2 4
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.
Figure 2.5 -PrequaWied Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 72 W 07842b.5 0500074 4 W
361 Design of Welded Connections
Single-V-grooveweld (2)
3utt joint (6)
)orner joint (C)
I Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Weld
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation '1 T, Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
0,+1/16 +1/8,-1/16
SMAW BC-P2 114 min f=1/32 min +u,-o +1/16 All S
+IO00 O +10:-5
R=O 0,+1/16 +1/8,-1/16
GMAW
FCAW
BC-PZ-GF 114 min U f=i/8 min +u,-o +1/16 All S
CI =60 o +lo05 o
SAW BC-PZ-s 7116 min
" I f=1/4 min
aR=o=60 O
+u,-o
+1/16,-O
+1/16
+10,!5 o
F S
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note 6: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) PrequalXed Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connections/37
Iouble-V-grooveweld (3)
3utt joint (E)
R=O fO +llT6,-0
SAW B-P3-S 314 min - f=1/4min +u,-o 5 1/16 F SI + s2
a = 60' +lop- o o +lop- 5 O
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; C as specified on drawings.
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided they conform to the limitations of Note E. Also the weld
size (E), less any reduction applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Figure 2.5 (continued)-Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 92 9 07842b5 050009b B W
38/Design of Welded Connections
Single-bevel-groove (4)
3uti joint (6)
i-joint (T)
;orner joint (C) NOTE V
"II::I I
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
Root Opening Tolerances
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Root FaCe As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation 7-2 Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Notes
R=O +1/16,-O +1/8,-1/16
SMAW BTC-P4 U U f=1/8 min unlimited &1/16
a = 450 +lO,O-Oo +10,O-5'
R=O +1/16,-O +i/a,-m
GMAW BTC-P4-GF 114 min U f=1/8 min unlimited' 1/16
FCAW
I 1
a = 450 +lOp-Oo +10,0-50
+1/16,-O
SAW TC-P4-S 7/16min U +u,-o 1/16
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note 8: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
114 i, but,
need not exceed 318 in.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
*For flat and horizontal positions, f=+U,-O
Figure 2.5 (continued) -Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 9 0784265 0500097
-~ T ~~ ~~~~ ~~ .
Design of Welded Connections/39
Double-bevel-grooveweld (5)
Butt joint (E)
T-joint (T)
Corner joint (C) NOTE V
...
....,
Base Metal Groove preparation
. . I
I I
I
I
Thickness
(U = unlimited)
Root Opening
Welding Joint Root Face
I T2
I ;! 1 I I
Process Designation GrooveAngle
R=O +1/16,-O +lia,-1/16 E,JZ
SMAW ETC-P5 5116min U f=1/8 min unlimited o All ('1 -1,4 '
+ 2
) L,Mp,
a 45O
1 1 1 I
+IO00 O Q2,V
GMAW ETC-P5-GF 112min U f=1/8 min
FCAW
a 45 O
R=O IO +I116,-O LJ2,
SAW TC-P5-S 3f4 min u f=1/4min +u,-o IV16 F Si + S 2 LMp,
I I I I a =60 +lo00 O +I005 Q2,V
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Noie E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 3/8 in.
Note L: Butt and T-Joints are not prequalified for dynamically loaded structures.
Note Mp: Double-groovewelds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided they conform to the limitations of Note E. Also the weld
size (E), less any reduction applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintainedto support the welding operationswithout excessive edge melting.
'For flat and horizontal positions, f=+U,-O
Figure 2.5 (continued) -Prequaìified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 m 0784265 0500098 I m
40/ Design of Welded Connections
Single-U-grooveweld (6)
3utt joint (13)
;orner joint (C) y-:--la/
Groove preparation
Base Metal
Thickness Root Opening
(U = unlimited) Root Face Tolerances Permitted Weld
Joint Groove Radius As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Ti I T2
I
Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +1/16,-O
SMAW BC-P6 114 min u f=1/32 min +u,-o
r=1/4 +1/4,-O
a =45 O +lo00 O
R=O +1/16,-O
BC-P6-GF 114 min u f=1/8 min +u,-o
FCAW r=1/4 +114,-0
a =20 O +io00 o
R=O +O
BC-P6-S 7/16 min u L1/4 min +u,-o
1=1,4 +1/4,-O
a =20 O +IO00 O
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connections/41
3ouble-U-grooveweid (7) CL
3uîl joint (B) S2(E2)
Base Metal
Groove preparation
I
I I
I
Thickness Root Opening
(U = unlimited)
Roof Face
Welding Joinf Groove Radius
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +1Il6,-O +118,-1/16
B-P7 112 min -
f=118 min
SMAW
r=1/4
a =45 o
R=O tlf i 6,-il +1/8,-i116
GMAW f=1/8 min
B-P7-GF 112 min -
FCAW r=l 14
a =20 O
I +i/i6,-0
1 1 1
R=O fO
SAW B-P7-S 314 min - f=1/4 min +u,-o +Vi6 st + s 2 ESMR
r=114 +114,-O +il16 o Q2
CI =20 O +loo0 O +lo,%
Note A Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note Mp: Double-grooveweids may have grooves of unequal depth, provided they conform to the limitations of Note E. Also the weld
size (E), less any reduction applies individually to each groove.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are mainfained as specified.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - 1 92 0784265 0500100 b
421Design of Welded Connections
jingle-J-grooveweld (8)
3utt joint (6)
r-joint (T)
NOTE V
1
I: ( s t
T1
Groove preparation
Base Metal
Thickness Root Opening I
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint
Process Designation Ti Notes
SMAW TC-P8' 114 min U
R=O
f=118 min
+1/16,-O
+u,-o
+1/8,-1/16
I I All S CJ2,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
r=3/8 +1/4,-O I1116 Q2,V
a 45O +IO00 O +i005 o I I
R=O +1/16,-0 +i/8,-1/16
SMAW BC-P8'* 114 min U
f=1/8 min +u,-o *1/16
All S E,J2,
r=318 +114,-O I1116 Q2,V
a =30 O +IO00 O +10,?5 o
R=O +1116,-O +118,-i/16
114 min U
f=1/8 min +u,-o I1116
r=3/8 +1/4,-O &Ili6
a =45 O +lo00 O +lo05 o
R=O +1/16,-O +i/8,-1116
i l 4 min U f=i/8 min +u,-o fi116 A L
J2,Q2,
q-
r=3/8 +1/4,-O I1116
a -30 O +10,?0 O +I005 V
-
R=O IO +1/1 6,-O
TC-P8-S 7116 min U
f=1/4 min +u,-o +i116
r=1/2 +1/4,-O ti116
a 4 5 O +io00 O +I005 o
I
R=O IO +1/16,-0
SAW C-P8-S" 7116 min U
f=1/4 min +u,-o I1116
r=1/2 +114,-0 +i116
a =20 O +lo00 O +lo05 o
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
114 TI,but need not exceed 318 in.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, providedthe basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintainedto support the welding operationswithout excessive edge melting.
*Applies to inside corner joints.
**Applies to outside corner joints.
Figure 2.5 (continued)-Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connections/43
Iouble-J-grooveweld (9)
3utl joint (6)
;-joint (T)
:orner joint (C)
NOTE V
.....
*1"'
::::.y
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
x%
.....
P .....
T EJ2
Welding
Process
Joint
Designation
Base Metal
Thickness
(U = unlimited)
T2
Root Opening
Roof Face
Groove Radius
Groove Angle
R=O
Groove preparation
Tolerances
As Detailed
(see 2.1 0.2)
+1/16,-O
As Fit Up
(see 3.3)
+1188-111
6
Permitted
Welding
Positions
7Size
(E) I Notes
SMAW ETC-P9' 112 min U f=1/8 min +u,-o tr 1/16
All
LJ2,
r=318 +1/4,-O I1116 s1 +S2 Mp,Q2,
V
a =45 O +loo0 O +lo05 o
R=O +1/16,-O +118,-1116
GMAW
BTC-P9-GF" 112 min U
f=1/8 min +u,-o &U16
All
FCAW r=3/8 +1/4,-O +1/16
a =30 O +lo00 O +lo05 o
R=O +O +1116.-O
SAW c-P9-s* 314 min U
f=1/4 min
r=112
a =45
R=O
O
+u,-o
+1/4,-O
+lo00
+O
O
+_1/16
+1/16
+lo05 o
+1116,-0
F
s+
1 s2
IV
SAW c-P9-S" 314 min U f=1/4 min +u,-o I1116
F
r=112 +1/4,-O -1.1116
a =20 O +lo00 o +lo05 o
R=O +O +1/16,-O
SAW T-P9-S 314 min
f=1/4 min +u,-o +1/16
F
u r = ~ +1/4,-O +1/16
a =45 O +lo00 O +lo05 o
Note A: Not prequalifíed for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
i14 TI, but need not exceed 318 in.
Note Mp: Double-groovewelds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided they conform to the limitations of Note E. Also the weld
size (E), less any reduction applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration
is not changedand adequateedge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
*Applies to inside corner joints.
**Applies to outside corner joints.
Figure 2.5 (continued)-Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1-1 92 W 0784265 0500102 T
=lare-bevel-grooveweld (IO)
3uti joint (B)
T-joint (T)
:orner joint (C)
Lr------- Í%
,-'
T3 TL-- ---- -
PTr
I
A........
.............
.......
.........
...........
........
..... I ?.L t,
Tc
Base Metal
Thickness
L
L T 2
R
A
Groove preparation
rF
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Weld
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up ~ Welding Size
Process Designation TI T2 T3 Bend Radius' (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +1/16,-O +1/8,-1/16 J2,
f=3/16min +U,-1116 All 5/8T 1 Q2,
SMAW BTC-PIO 3/16min U Timin
C=LT,min -O,+Not- -O,+Not- 2
2 Limited Limited
R=O +Il1 6,-O +1/8,-1/16 A
GMAW f=3/16min +U,-1/16 All 518T 1 J2'
BTC-PIO-GF 3/16min U Tlmin
FCAW C=TT min -O,+NOt- -O,+NOt- Q2,
2 Limited Limited 2
R=O +O +1/16,-O J2,
112 f=1/2min +u,-o +U,-l/l6 F 5/8T 1 Q2,
SAW T-PIO-S 1/2min min C=LT,min -O,+Not- -O,+Nût- Z
2 Limited Limited
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 TI, but need not exceed 318 in.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note Z Weld size (E) is based on joints welded flush.
'For cold formed (A500)rectangular tubes, C dimension is not limited (see commentary).
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - 1 92 m 0784265 0500103 1 m ~~ ~
Design of Welded Conn~tions;45
/(E) R
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
~ ~~
-L -R
' -Li
- REINFORCEMENT1 TO 3
NO TOLERANCE
Base Metal Groove preparaiion
Thickness
Taferances Permitted Weld
(U= unlimited}
Welding Joint As Detailed As Fit Up Leiding Size
Process Desgnation Tt T2 Root Opening (see 2.10.21 (see 3.3) Positions (EI Notes
B-Pla 3.2max - R=O to f .6 +1.6.-0 21.6 A!! Tl-t B
SMAW
I
t
-
I - t -.-
'1
B-PIC 6.4 rnax R= -
'i min i l .6.-O mt.6 All - B
2 2
Square-grooveweld ( I )
3utt joint (BI I
El+ E2MUST NOT EXCEED
TI
4 4-
R ALL DIMENSIONSIN mm
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
Tolerances Permitted Weld
(ü= unlimitedf
Welding Joint As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation T1 I T2 Root Opening (see 2.10,2) [see 3.3) Positions [E) Notes
SMAW B-Plb 6.4 max - Tt
R= - t l .&-O 21.6 Ali 3Tt
_-
2 4
Note 6:Joint is welded from one side only.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500104 3 m
&/Design of Welded Conneetions
Cingle-V-grooveeiu (2)
Butt joint fí3)
Cornerjoint {C)
1
ALL DIMENSIONSIN m m - T2 /- I1
Base Metal Groove preparation
t
Thickness
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Wad
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint FaCe AS Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation T2 G r ~ v Angle
e (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
R=O 0,+1.6 +3.-1.8
SMAW BC-P2 6.4min U f=1 min +u,-o 51.6 All s BE,
QZ
U +IOp-O +?O.cg o
R=O O,+f .6 +3.-i.6
BC-PZ-GF 6 4 min U f=3min A,%,
FCAW +U,-O +If16 All E,Q2
U =GO +10:0 +lo05
R=O +O +i.6,-O
SAW BC-P2-S 11.1 min U f=6min +u,-o 21.6 F S 8,E,
QZ
U =GO +loo0 ~ 1 0 0 5'
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note €3: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Mhimurn weld size (E)as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequallfied Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
@imensions in Millimeters)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connectionsi47
Double-V-groove weld (3)
Butt joint (B)
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
(U = unlimited) Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Weld
Welding Joint Rost Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation T1 Tp G m ~ Angle
e (see 2.t0.3 [see 3.3) Positions !€) Notes
R=O .6:-0
+'I i3.-1.6
SMAW B-P3 12.7min - f= 3 min +&-O 21.6
All %+s2 EM@.
Q2
ct= 60" ctOP- oa +to:-
R=5 +7.6,-0 +3,-1.6 A.€,
GMAW
FCAW
B-Ps-GF 12.7min - f= 3 min +&-O 5 1.6 A!I st + s2 Mp,
a = 60° +lOP- oo +.toc- so Q2
R=5 +O tl.6,-O
%+S2 E,Mp.
Q2
SAW B-P3-S 19.0 min - f= 6 min +U.-O - 1.6
f F
l I 1 1 U = 60° 1 +tO,a-Oa I +10,0-50 [ I I I
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note Mp: Double-groovewelds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided they conform ta the limitations of Note E. Also the weld
size (E),less any reduction applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) PrequaWed Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 W 07842b5 0500LOb 7 W
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Base Meta[ I Groove .preparation
. I I
Thickness
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted Weld
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
I T,
1 1
Process Desirrnation Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Positions (E)
SMAW BTC-P4 U U
R=O
f=3 min
a= 450
+1 .&-O
unlimited
-l.t o p- o o
+Y::
+ î O p - 5"
All s-3
R=O +1.6,-O +3.-1.6
GMAW
BTGP4-GF 6.4 min U f=3 min unlimited* -f 1.6
FCAW
a= 450 clo,a-oo +IO?- !je
R=O tO
SAW TC-F4-S 11.1 min U f=6 mm 4 - 0 ~ +tapa-5"
d = 60" +10P-o"
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc wefding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note 6: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weid size (E)as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforcegroove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equaf to
f/4 TI, but need not exceed 10 mm.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For comer joints, the outside groove preparationmay be in either or both members, providedthe basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequateedge distance is maintained to support the welding opefationswithout excessive edge melting.
'For flat and horizontal positions, f=+U,-O
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
@imensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of WeIded Connectionsf49
Base Metal Groove preparation
Thickness
(U = unlimited) Root Opening Tolerances Pemitted Weld
Welding Joint Root Face As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation Tt T2 Groove Angle {see 2.1 0.2) [see3.3) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +1.6,-0 +3,-1.6
SMAW BTû-P5 8.0 min U f=3 min unlimited 21.6
a =45 O +1OOO O +lo,% o -6
R=O +<.&-O +?,-1.6 F,H “2) A,E,J2,
GMAW ETC-P5-GF 12.7 min U f=3rnmin unlimited‘ 51.6
(Cl +Sd
LMp,
FCAW a 4 5O V.OH
Q2,v
+%OF0 O +10,55 -6
R=O *O +I .6.-O EJ2,
SAW TC-P5-S 19.ü min U f=6 min +u,-o 51.6
o
u +íOOO O +i0.05 o
Note A: Not prequatified for gas metaf arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weld size {E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: i f fillet wefds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforcegroove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 T, , but need not exceed 10 mm.
Note L: Butt and T-Joints are not prequalified for dynamically loaded structures.
Note Mp: Double-groovewelds may have grooves of unequaldepth, providedthey conform to the limitationsof Note E. Also the weld
size (E), less any reduction applies individualty €oeach groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparationmay be in either or both members, providedthe basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
*For flat and horizontal positions, f=+U,-O
Figure 2.5 (continued)-PrequaWged Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
(Dimensions in Miìlimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 W 0784265 0500108 O W
-~ ~ ~ ~ __ ~
jingle-U-grooveweld (6)
3utt joint (6)
:orner joint (C) I
~-~~ i ._......
......_.....
............ ...... ..I
...............
. .-
*-*
1
- -- -.
.....
f %E
.
I I
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
IcT2-i ' :i-R
I_
Groove preparation
Base Metal
Thickness Root Opening
Root Face Tolerances Permitted Weld
(U = unlimited)
Welding Groove Radius As Detailed As Fit Up Welding Size
Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +1 6.-O +3,-1.6
BC-P6
i=f min
r=6
a. 4 5 O
I +u,-o
&.-O
+io;o O
I +f.6
C l O ~ SO
I Ali 1 S R,E.QZ
---I--- R=O +i.6,-0 +3.-1.6
IU
f=3 mm +u,-o 2 1.6
All s AB.
6.4 min E.Q2
~=6 +6,-0 2 1.6
n E20 O +IO% +loo5 O
R=O +O +I 6,-O
+u,-o
I f=6min %1.6
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SAW BC-P6-S 11.1 min U F S B,E,Q2
r=6 +6.-O 51.6
a =20 O +1000 o +10.?5
Note A: Not prequarified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weld size [E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) fiequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
o license from IHS
No reproduction or networking permitted without Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - L 9 2 = 0784265
~ ~~ 0500109 2
Design of Welded Connections/Sl
1o~S:e-U-groove
3utt ioint (6)
weld [ 7 i
I
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mrn
Groove preparation
Base Metai
Thickness Root Opening
Root Face Tolerances Permitted Weid
(U= unlimitc
Welding Joint - Groove Radius As Deta¡!& As F!t Up Welding Size
Process Designation T1 f2 Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) (see 3 . 3 Positions (E) Notes
I
R=O +I .&-O ~3.-1.6
SMAW 8-P7 6.4 min - f=3 min +U.-O +?.a All SI is2 E,MrJ.
r=6 4.-O f1.6 Q2
u. =45 o *roo0 o +lOP-F)
R=O +I .6:0 +3.-t.6
- f=3 min +U.-O cí.6 A E.
r=6 46,-O 21.6 Alt st 's2 Mp.Q2
a =20 a +10:0 o s10%
R=0 I O +1.6.-0
f=6 min +U.-O k1.6
SAW I B-PY-S t 19.0mìn -
r=6 +6,-O +?.E F SI'S2
€.MP.
Q2
u 20 O +fOO0 +IO% o
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weid size (E)as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided they conform to the limitations of Note E.Also the weld
size (Eh less any reduction appfies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequaiified Partíaf.Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10.1)
(Dimensions in Mulimeten)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I i . 1 92 0784265 0500110 7 W
~ - . ................................ ... .
..
.. ._.
..
. __... .... .
.
521Design of Welded Conneetions
%rngle-J-gractveweld (8)
B
3utt jo!nt !Bj
r-pint (TI
>ornerjoint (GI NOTE V
ALL DtMENCIONS IN m m
Base Metal
Thickness
Root Face Permitted Weld
Welding Joint Ac Fit Up Welding Size
Process Designation (see 3.3) Positions (E) Notes
R=O +f .6,-O +3.-1.6
SMAW TC-Fõ' 6.4 min u f=3 min +u,-o ~1.6 Alt S E,JZ
r=l O +6,-O 21.6 Q2,V
a 4 5 O +loo0 O +lo,% o
R=O +l.6,-0 +3,-1.6
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
BG-P8*' 6.4 min U
f=3 min +u,-o i1.6
All S E.32,
CMAW r=l o +&-O 21.6 Q2.V
a =30 O +too0 O +lo,% O
GMhW
FCAW
TC-P&GF* 6.4 min u
R=O
f=3min
r=iû
CI =45
tl.6,-O
+u,-o
+6,-O
+to:o O
+3,-1.6
21.6
11.6
+lo,% O
AlI A,€.
32,QZ.
v
B
R=O +1.6,-O +3,-1.6
GMAW f=3 min +&-O k1.6 A,€,
BC-P&GF" 6.4 min u r=l O +6.-O *1.6
Ali
J2,Q2,
FCAW
U =30 o +io00 o +loo5 O V
R=O *O +I .6.-O
f=6 min +U,-O k1.6
SAW TC-PB-S' f i . ? min u r=13 +6.-0 21.6
F S E.32.
Q2,V
a =45 O +loo0 O +lo% o
R=O +O +1.6,-0
C-P8-S" 11.l min u f=6 min +u,-o +1.6 F S w2,
SAW r=13 +&-O ti.6 Q2,V
a =20 o +TO% O +lo,% o
Note A: Not prequafifiedfor gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weid size (E)as shown in Table 2.3;S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet wefds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove wefds in corner and T-joints. they shall beq u a i to
1/4 T,, but need not exceed 10 mm.
Note €32:The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintainedas specified.
Nofe V: Forcornerjointssthe outside groove preparationmay be in either or both members. providedthe basic groove configuration
is not changedand adequateedge distance is mainfained to suppott the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
'Applies to inside corner joints.
"Applies to outside corner joints.
Figure 2.5 (eonthuedj- Prequaiined Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2,lO.l)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
. ................. -~
.
.
..
..
. ~~ ....... ~-
- .... .
. Licensee=Pacific Gas...... _. Co/9977613100
and Electric .
.
.
..
.
.
.. .
..
..
..
. ......
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Design of Welded Connections! 53
Double-J-grooveweld (9)
Butt joint (6)
T-joint (T)
Corner ioint (Gk
ALL DIMENSIONSIN mm
Groove preparation
Base Metal
Thickness Root Opening
Root Face Tolerances Permitted Weld
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Groove Radius As Detail& As Fit Up Welding Size
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Process Designation Tl
I Tp Groove Angle (see 2.10.2) [see 3.3) Positions (E)
I FFf: 1
I
BTC-P9-GF" 1
t
12.7 min
6.4 min I I
I
I
iJ
i
R=O
f=3min
r=lO
u =45 O
1 R=û
f=3 min
r=lo
a =30
R=O
a
1
1
I
+1.6.-O
+u,-o
+6,-O
+IO00
+1.6,-O
+u;o
+6.-o
+loo0
tO
O
O
.
+3,-1.6
11.6
t1.6
+10:5
+3,-1.6
tf.6
k1.6
+IO05
+1.6,-0
o
o
AIE
All
Sl +s2
+1.6
F
21.6
+1@5 o
I I I +o +1.6,-O
SAW c-P9-S" 19.0 min U
f=6 min +u,-o k1.6
~=13 +6,-O +1.6
a E20 O +loo0 O +fO?5 o
R=O +O +I -6,-O
f=S min +&-O t#.6
SAW T-P9-S 19.0 min SI s2
r=13 +6.-O t1.6 +
u 4 5 O +Wo O +loo5 O
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 2.3; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: if fillet welds are used in staticalty loaded structures to reinforcegroove wefds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4 T,, but need not exceed i 0 mm.
Note Mp: ûoubfe-groovewelds may have grooves of unequaf depth, providedthey conform to the limitationsof Note E. Also the weld
size (E). less any reduction applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outsidegroove preparationmay be in either or both members, providedthe basic groove configuration
is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintainedto support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
'Applies to inside corner joints.
"Applies to outside corner joints.
-
Figure 2.5 (continued) Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see2.10.1)
@hemions in MBmeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
54/Design of We€dedConnections
Ftare-bevel-gfooveweld (10)
Buttjoint (B)
T-joint m
Corner joint (Cl
ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm
Base Mefal Groove preparation
Thickness
Root Opening Tolerances Permitted WeEd
(U = unlimited)
Welding Joint Roof Face As Detailed As Fit Up Wekjing Size
Process Designation Tl T2 f3 BendRadiuS' (see2.10.2) (see3.3) Positions Note
R=O +f .&-O +3,-1.6
SMAW BTC-PtO 4.8min U Tpin f=5min +u,-o +U;f .fi J2,
Alt S8Tt Q2,
C=LT min -O,+Not- -O,+Noà- 2
2 Limited Limited
R=O &-O
+I +3,-7.6 A
FCAW
BTC-PIO-GF 4.8min U Tlmin f=5min
min
+u,-o
-O,+Not-
+U,-1.6
-O,+NoP
AI1 5/8T f '*'
Q2,
2 Limited Limited z
R=O +O +I .6,-O
JZ
-g--pf~-~ 12.7rnin
12.7
wA
f=13 min +u,-o +U,-i .6 F SiST 1 Q2,
SAW min G=LTmin -O,+NOt- -O,+Nût- z
2 Limited Limited
Note A: Not prequakified for gas metat arc wefding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
Note J2: If filfet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
i/4 T1, bu€need not exceed tû mm.
Note 02: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specÍfied.
Note Z: Weld size (E) is based on joints welded flush.
'For cotd formed (A500) rectangular tubes, G dimension is not limited (see commentary).
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 2.5 (continued) -Requalified P d a l Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints (see 2.10,l)
(Dimensions in MiSneters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 07842b.5 0500LL3 4
Design of Welded Connections/55
2.11 Skewed T-Joints shown in Table 2.2. The minimum size applies if it is
sufficient to satisfy design requirements.
2.11.1 Skewed T-joint details for dihedral angles are
shown in Figure 2.6. The details for the obtuse and acute 2.11.5 The obtuse side of skewed T-joints with dihedral
side may be used together or independently depending angles greater than 135” shall be prepared as shown in
on service conditions and design with proper considera- Figure 2.6, Detail C, to permit placement of aweld of the
tion for concerns such as eccentricity and rotation. The required size. The amount of machining or grinding, etc.
Engineer shall specify the weld locations and must make of Figure 2.6, Detail Cyshould not be more than that
clear on the drawings the weld dimensions required. In required to achieve the required weld size(ìV). However,
detailing skewed T-joints, a sketch of the desired joint, if excessive machining or grinding occurs in excess of
weld configuration, and desired weld dimensionsshall be that required by design, the weld size shall be increased
clearly shown on the drawing. by an amount equal to the preparation. The weld size
2.11.2 Welds in skewed T-joint configurationsthat may (W) is dependent on the amount of preparation.
be used without performing the joint welding procedure 2.11.6 The acute side of skewed T-joints with dihedral
qualification test prescribedin 5.2, aredetailed in Figure angles less than 60” and greater than 30”, may be used as
2.6, and are subject to the limitation specified in 2.1 1.3. shown in Figure 2.6, Detail D. The method of sizing the
2.11.3 All skewed T-joint welds made by short circuithg weld, effective throat “E” or leg “W” shall be specified on
transfer gas metal arc welding (see Appendix A) shall be the drawing or specification. The “Z”loss factor speci-
qualified by the joint welding procedure qualification fied in Table 2.4 shall apply.
test prescribed in 5.2.
2.11.7 The effective throat of skewed T-joint welds is
2.11.4 The minimum weld size for skewed T-joint welds dependent on the magnitude of the root opening. See
shown in Figure 2.6, Details A, B, and Cyshall be as 3.3.1.
Table 2.4
2 Loss Factor (see 2.11.6)
~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~~ ~~ ~
Position of Welding V or OH Position of WeIding H or F
Dihedral Angles ?I! Process z (in.) z (mm) Process z (in.) z (mm)
SMAW 118 3 SMAW 118 3
600 >?I!V4450 FCAW-SS 118 3 FCAW-SS O O
FCAW-G 118 3 FCAW-G O O
GMAW NIA NIA GMAW O 4\
o
SMAW 114 6 SMAW 114 6
45’ > V 2 30’ FCAW-SS 114 6 FCAW-SS 118 3
FCAW-G 318 10 FCAW-G 114 6
GMAW NIA NIA GMAW 114 6
Notes:
1. Process
FCAW-SS = Self shielded flux cored arc welding
FCAW-G = Gas shielded flux cored arc welding
GMAW = Spray transfer or globular
2. Position of welding
F = Flat; H Horizontal; V = Vertical; OH = Overhead
3. NIA Not applicable
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - L 92 m 0784265 0500114 b m
561 Design of Welded Connections
Rn
Notes:
1. (E)(n), (E'(n) = Effective throats dependent on magnitude of root opening (Rn). See 3.3.1(n) represents 1 through 5.
2. t = thickness of thinner part.
3. Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer. Refer to Appendix A.
4. Figure D, Apply Z loss factor of Table 2.4 to determine effective throat.
5. Figure D, not prequalified for under 30". For welder qualifications, see Table 10.5, Column IO.
Figure 2.6 -Details for Skewed T-Joints (see 2.11.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3. Workmanship
3.1 General faces on which flange-to-web welds are to be made by
submerged arc welding or by shielded metal arc welding
3.1.1 All applicable subsections of this section shall be with low hydrogen electrodes.
observed in the fabrication of welded assemblies and
structuresproduced by any process acceptable under this 3.2.2 In thermal cutting, the equipment shall be so
Code. adjusted and manipulated as to avoid cutting beyond
(inside) the prescribed lines. The roughness of all
3.1.2 All welding and thermal-cutting equipment shall thermal-cut surfaces shallbe no greater than that defined
be so designed and manufactured, and shall be in such by the American National Standards Institute surface
condition, as to enable designated personnel to follow roughness value of 1000 pin. (25 pm) for material up to
the procedures and attain the results prescribed else- 4 in. (102 mm) thick and 2000 pin. (50 pm) for material
where in this Code. 4 in. to 8 in. (203 mm) thick, with the following excep-
tion: the ends of members not subject to calculated stress
3.1.3 Thermal cuttingprocesses recognized by this Code at the ends shall not exceed a surface roughness value of I I
are limited to arc-cutting and oxyfuel gas processes. 2000 pìn.4
3.1.4 Welding shall not be done when the ambient 3.2.2.1 Roughness exceeding these values and notches
temperature is lower than O O F (-18OC) (see 4.2), when or gouges not more than 3/ 16 in. (5 mm) deep on other-
surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or high wind wise satisfactory surfaces shallbe removed by machining
velocities, or when welding personnel are exposed to or grinding. Notches or gouges exceeding 31 16 in. deep
inclement conditions. may be repaired by grinding if the nominal cross-
sectionalarea is not reduced by more than 2%. Ground
3.1.5 The sizes and lengths of welds shall be no less than or machined surfaces shall be faired to the original sur-
those specified by design requirements and detail draw- face with a slope not exceeding one in ten. Cut surfaces
ings, except as permitted in 8.15.1.7 and 9.25.1.7. The and adjacent edges shall be left free of slag. In thermal-
location of welds shail not be changed without approval cut surfaces, occasional notches or gouges may, with
of the Engineer. approval of the Engineer, be repaired by welding.
3.2.2.2 Repairs by welding shall be made by:5
(1) Suitably preparing the repair area
(2) Welding with an approved low hydrogen process
3.2 Preparation of Base Metal and observing the applicable provisions of this Code
(3) Grinding the completed weld smooth and flush
3.2.1 Surfaces on which weld metal is to be deposited (see 3.6.3) with the adjacent surface to produce awork- I
shall be smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears, manlike finish
cracks, and other discontinuities which would adversely
affect the quality or strength of the weld. Surfaces to be
welded, and surfaces adjacent to a weld, shall also be free 4. ANSI B46.1, Surface Texture, in microinches (pin.). AWS
from loose or thickscale, slag, rust, moisture, grease, and Surface Roughness Guidefor Oxygen Cutting (AWS C4.1-77)
other foreign material that would prevent proper weld- may be used as a guide for evaluating surface roughness
ing or produce objectionable fumes. Miil scale that can of these edges. For materials up to and including 4 in.
withstand vigorous wire brushing, a thin rust-inhibitive (102 mm) thick, use Sample No. 3, and for materials over 4 in.
coating, or antispatter compound may remah with the up to 8 in. (203 mm) thick, use Sample No. 2.
following exception: for girders in dynamically loaded 5. The requirements of 3.2.2.2maynot beadequate incases of
structures, all mill scale shall be removed from the sur- tensile load applied through the thickness of the materia1.
Copyright American Welding Society 57
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 = 07842b5 0500LLb T
58/ Workmanship
3.2.3 In the repair and determination of limits of mill A435, Specificationfor Straight Beam UltrasonicExam-
induced discontinuities visually observed on cut sur- ination of Steel Plates.6
faces, the amount of metal removed shall be the (2) For acceptance of W, X, or Y discontinuities, the
minimum necessary to remove the discontinuity or to area of the discontinuity (or the aggregate area of multi-
determine that the limits of Table 3.1 are not exceeded. ple discontinuities) shall not exceed 4% of the cut
However, if weld repair is required, sufficient base metal material area (length times width) with the following
shail be removed to provide access for welding. Cut exception: if the length of the discontinuity, or the aggre-
surfaces may exist at any angle with respect to the rolling gate width of discontinuities on any transverse section, as
direction. All welded repairs of discontinuitiesshall con- measured perpendicular to the cut material length,
form to the applicable provisions of this Code. exceeds 20% of the cut material width, the 4% cut
material area shall be reduced by the percentage amount
3.2.3.1. The limits of acceptability and the repair of of the width exceeding 20%. (For example, if a discon-
visually observed cut surface discontinuities shall be in tinuity is 30% of the cut material width, the area of
accordancewith Table 3.1,in which the length of discon- discontinuity cannot exceed 3.6% of the cut material
tinuity is the visible long dimension on the cut surface of area.) The discontinuity on the cut surface of the cut
material and the depth is the distance that the discon- material shall be removed to a depth of 1 in. (25 mm)
tinuity extends into the material from the cut surface. All beyond its intersection with the surface by chipping,
welded repairs shall be in accordance with this Code.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
gouging, or grinding, and blocked off by welding with a
Remova1 of the discontinuity may be done from either low hydrogen process in layers not exceeding 118 in.
surface of the base metal. The aggregate length of weld- (3 mm) in thickness for at least the fííst four layers.
ing shall not exceed 20% of the length of the plate surface (3) If a discontinuity Z, not exceeding the allowable
being repaired except with approval of the Engineer. area in 3.2.3.2 (2), is discovered after the joint has been
3.2.3.2 For discontinuities greater than 1 in. (25 111111) completed and is determined to be 1in. (25 mm) or more
in length and depth discovered on cut surfaces, the fol- away from the face of the weld, as measured on the cut
lowing procedures shall be observed. base metal surface, no repair of the discontinuity is
(1) Where discontinuities such as W, X, or Y in Figure required. If the discontinuity Z is less than 1 in. away
3.1 are observed prior to completing the joint, the size from the face of the weld, it shall be removed to a
and shape of the discontinuity shall be determined by distance of 1 in. from the fusion zone of the weld by
ultrasonic testing. The area of the discontinuity shall be
determined as the area of total loss of back reflection,
when tested in accordance with the procedure of ASTM 6. ASTM, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103.
Table 3.1
Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Mill Induced
Laminar Discontinuities in Cut Surfaces (see 3.2.3)
Description of Discontinuity Repair Required
Any discontinuity 1 in. (25 mm) in None, need not be explored.
length or less
Any discontinuity over 1 in. (25 mm) in None, but the depth should be
length and 1/8 in. (3 mm) maximum depth explored,*
Any discontinuity over 1 in. (25 mm) in Remove, need not weld.
length with depth over 1/8 in. (3 mm) but
not greater then 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Any discontinuity over 1 in. (25 mm) in Completely remove and weld.
length with depth over 1/4 in. (6 mm) but not
greater than 1 in.
Any discontinuity over 1 in. (25 mm) in See 3.2.3.2.
length with depth greater than 1 in.
*A spot check of 10%of the discontinuities on the cut surfaceinquestion should be exploredby grindingto determinedepth. Ifthe depth of any one of
the discontinuities explored exceeds 1/8 in. (3 mm), then all of the discontinuities over 1 in. (25 mm) in length remaining on that cut surface shall be
exploredby grindingto determinedepth. If none of the discontinuitiesexploredin the 10%spot check have adepthexceeding 1/8 h.(3 mm), then the
remainder of the discontinuities on that cut surface need not be explored.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 0784265 0500II7 I W
Workmanship/59
welds are used in built-up shapes, access holes are
permitted to terminate perpendicular to the flange. Do
I M A f F R i A i WlnTH not return filet welds through weld access holes. See
Figure 3.2.
3.2.5.2 For ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and
built-up shapes with web material thickness greater than
I/ 7 ZINTERNAL / > 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm), the thermally cut surfaces of beam
copes and weld access holes shall be ground to bright
metal and inspected by either magnetic particle or dye
penetrant methods. If the curved transition portion of
weld access holes and beam copes are formed by pre-
drilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or
cope need not be ground. Weld access holes and beam
copes in other shapes need not be ground nor dye pene-
trant or magnetic particle inspected.
3.2.6 Machining, thermal cutting, gouging, chipping,
or grinding may be used for joint preparation, or the
removal of unacceptable work or metal, except that
oxygen gouging shall not be used on steels that are
-
Figure 3.1 Edge Discontinuities
ordered as quenched and tempered or normalized.
3.2.7 Edges of built-up beam and girder webs shall be
in Cut Material (see 3.2.3)
cut to the prescribed camber with suitable allowancefor
shrinkage due to cutting and welding. However, moder-
chipping, gouging, or grinding. It shall then be blocked atevariation from the specified camber tolerance may be
off by welding with a low hydrogen process in layers not corrected by a carefuI application of heat.
exceeding i /8 in. (3 mm) in thickness for at least the first 3.2.8 Corrections of errors in camber of quenched and
four layers. tempered steel shall be given prior approval by the
(4) If the area of the discontinuity W, X, Y, or Z Engineer.
exceeds the allowable in 3.2.3.2 (2), the cut material or
subcomponentshall be rejected and replaced, or repaired
at the discretion of the Engineer.
3.3 Assembly
3.2.4 Reentrant corners of cut material shall be formed
to provide a gradual transition with a radius of not less 3.3.1 The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be
than 1 in. (25 mm). Adjacent surfaces shall meet without brought into as close contact as practicable. The root
offset or cutting past the point of tangency. The re- opening shall not exceed 3/ 16 in. (5 mm) except in cases
entrant corners may be formed by thermal cutting, involving either shapes or plates 3 in. (76.2 mm) or
followed by grinding, if necessary, to meet the surface greater in thickness if, after straightening and in assem-
requirements of 3.2.2. bly, the root opening cannot be closed sufficiently to
meet this tolerance. In such cases, a maximum root
3.2.5 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes. Radii of opening of 5116 in. (8 mm) is acceptable provided suit-
beam copes and weld access holes shall provide a smooth able backing is used.7 If the separation is greater than
transition free of notches or cutting past the points of 1/16 in. (1.6 mm), the leg of the fillet weld shall be
tangency between adjacent surfaces. increased by the amount of the root opening, or the
contractor shall demonstrate that the required effective
3.2.5.1 All weld access holes required to facilitate throat has been obtained.
welding operations shall have alengthfrom thetoe of the The separation between faying surfaces of plug and
weld preparation or from edge of backing, if applicable, slot welds, and of butt joints landing on a backing, shall
not less than 1-1/2 times the thickness of the materialin not exceed i / 16 in. (1.6 mm). The use of fillers is pro-
which the hole is made. The height of the access hole hibited except as specified on the drawings or as specially
shall be adequate for deposition of sound weld metal in approved by the Engineer and made in accordance with
the adjacent plates and provide clearance for weld tabs 2.4.
for the weld in the materialin which the hole is made, but
not less than the thickness of the material. In hot rolled
shapes and built-up shapes, all beam copes and weld 7. Backing may be of flux, glass tape, iron powder, or similar
access holes shall be shaped free of notches or sharp materials, or welds using a low hydrogen process compatible
reentrant corners except that when fiilet web-to-flange with the filler metal deposited.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
601Workmanship
m
21-5,t 21.5,t
+- RADIUS SIZE F~
DO NOT RETURN
WELD THROUGH
IMMATERIAL
OPENING
I
ROLLED SHAPE WELDED SHAPE OPTIONAL WELDED SHAPE
(GROOVE WELDS OR (FILLET WELDS)
FILLET WELDS) COMPRESSION ONLY
BACKING BACKING
t
i"
- 21.5 tw
OPTIONAL WELDED SHAPE
(FILLET WELDS)
ROLLED SHAPE OR
WELDED SHAPE
OPTIONAL METHOD FOR
MAKING CORNER RADIUS
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
COMPRESSION ONLY
tw = WEB THICKNESS
Notes:
1. ForASTMA6Groups4and5shapesandwelded build-upshapeswithweb thicknessesmorethan 1-1/2in. (38.1 mm), preheat
to 150" F (66" C) prior to thermal cutting, grind and inspect thermally cut edges of access hole using magnetic particle or dye
penetration methods prior to making web and flange splice groove welds.
2. These are typical details for joints welded from one side against steel backing. Alternative joint designs should be considered.
Figure 3.2 -Weld Access Hole Geometry (see 3.2.5.1)
3.3.2 The parts to be joined by partial joint penetration bending due to eccentricity in alignment, an offset not
groove welds parallel to the length of the member shall exceeding 10%of the thickness of the thinner partjoined,
be brought into as close contact as practicable. The root but in no case more than 1/8in. (3 mm), shall be permit-
opening between parts shall not exceed 3/ 16 in. (5 mm) ted as a departure from the theoretical alignment. In
except in cases involving rolled shapes or plates 3 in. correctingmisalignment in such cases, the parts shall not
(76.2 mm) or greater in thickness if, after straightening be drawn in to a greater slope than 112 in. (13 mm) in
and in assembly, the root opening cannot be closed 12 in. (305 mm), Measurement of offset shall be based
sufficientlyto meet this tolerance. In such cases, a maxi- upon the centerline of parts unless otherwise shown on
I mum root opening of 5/16 in. (8 mm) is acceptable the drawings.
provided suitable backing is used and the final weld 3.3.4 With the exclusion of electroslag and electrogas
meets the requirements for weld size. welding, and with the exception of 3.3.4.1 for root open-
Tolerances for bearing joints shall be in accordance ings in excess of those permitted in Figure 3.3, the
with the applicable contract specifications. dimensions of the cross section of the groove welded
joints which vary from those shown on the detail draw-
3.3.3 Parts to be joined at butt joints shall be carefully ings by more than the following tolerances shall be
aligned. Where the parts are effectivelyrestrained against referred to the Engineer for approval or correction.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500119 5 m
Workmanship/ 61
3.3.4.1 Root openings greater than those permitted in
3.3.4, but not greater than twice the thickness of the
thinner part or 3/4 in. (19 mm), whichever is less, may be
corrected by welding to acceptable dimensions prior to
joining the parts by welding.
I 3.3.4.2 Root openings greater than permitted by
R f 1/16in. 4
(1.6 mm) 3.3.4.1 may be corrected by welding only with the
approval of the Engineer.
(A) GR'OOVE WELD WITHOUT BACKING - 3.3.5 Grooves produced by gouging shall be in sub-
ROOT NOT BACKGOUGED
stantial conformance with groove profile dimensions as
specified in Figures 2.4 and 2.5 and provisions of 2.9.2.
Suitable access to the root shall be maintained.
a +IO' 3.3.6 Members to be welded shall be brought into cor-
Y- -5' -7 rect alignment and held in position by bolts, clamps,
wedges, guy lines, struts, and other suitable devices, or by
tack welds until welding has been completed. The use of
jigs and fixtures is recommended where practicable.
Suitable allowances shall be made for warpage and
shrinkage.
3.3.7 Tack WeIds
(B) GROOVE WELD WITH BACKING - 3.3.7.1 Tack welds shallbe subject to the same quality
ROOT NOT BACKGOUGED requirements as the f i a l welds, with the following
exceptions:
(1) Preheat is not mandatory for single-pass tack
welds which are remelted and incorporated into contin-
+I O" uous submerged arc welds.
Fa-5" (2) Discontinuities, such as undercut, unfilled craters,
and porosity need not be removed before the final sub-
merged arc welding.
3.3.7.2 Tack welds which are incorporated into the
f i a l weld shaíl be made with electrodes meeting the
requirements of the final welds and shall be cleaned
thoroughly. Multiple-pass tack welds shall have cas-
(C) GROOVE WELD WITHOUT BACKING - caded ends.
ROOT BACKGOUGED
3.3.7.3 Tack welds not incorporated into final welds
shall be removed, except that, for staticallyloaded struc-
Root not back Root back tures, they need not be removed unIess required by the
gouged' gouged Engineer.
~~
in. mm in. mm
(1) Root face of joint f-1/16 1.6 Not limited
3.4 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage
(2) Root opening of joints *1/16 1.6 +1/16 1.6 3.4.1 In assemblingand joining parts of a stnkture or of
without backing -va 3 built-up members and in welding reinforcing parts to
Root opening of joints +1/4 6 Not members, the procedure and sequence shall be such as
with backing -1/16 1.6 applicable
will minimize distortion and shrinkage.
(3) Groove angle of joint +IO0 +IO0
-5O -5O 3.4.2 Insofar as practicable, ail welds shall be made in a
~
sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding
'see 10.13.1 for tolerances for complete joint penetration
tubular groove welds made from one side without backing.
while the welding progresses.
3.4.3 The contractor shall prepare a weIding sequence
-
Figure 3.3 Workmanship Tolerances in
for a member or structure which, in conjunction with
the joint welding procedures and overall fabrication
Assembly of Groove Welded Joints (see 3.3.4) methods, will produce members or structures meeting
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 07842b5 0500120 1 U
62/ Workmanship
the quality requirements specified. The welding sequence No. of meters of total length -14
and distortion control program shall besubmitted to the lOmm+3mm X
3
Engineer, for information and comment, before the start
of welding on a member or structure in which shrinkage 3.5.1.2 For welded beams or girders, regardless of
or distortion is likely to affect the adequacy of the cross section, where there is no specified camber or
member or structure. sweep, the allowable variation in straightness is
3.4.4 The direction of the general progression in welding No. of ft of total length
on a member shall be from points where the parts are 118 in. X
10
relatively fixed in position with respect to each other
toward points having a greater relative freedom of No. of meters of total length
movement. 3mm x
3
3.4.5 In assemblies, joints expected to have significant 3.5.1.3 For welded beams or girders, other than those
shrinkageshould usually be welded beforejoints expected whose top flange is embedded in concrete without a
to have lesser shrinkage. They should also be welded designed concrete haunch, regardless of cross section,
with as little restraint as possible. the allowable variation from required camber at shop
3.4.6 Allwelded shop splices in each component part of assembly (for drilling holes for field splices or preparing
a cover-plated beam or built-up member. shall be made field welded splices) is
before the component part is welded to other component at midspan, -O,+ 1-1/2in.(38mm)forspans2100ft
parts of the member. Long girders or girder sections may
be made by welding subassemblies,each made in accord- (30 m)
-0, + 3/4 in. (19 mm) for spans < 100 ft
ance with 3.4.6. When making these subassemblysplices,
whether in the shop or field, the welding sequence should (30 m)
be reasonably balanced between the web and fiange at supports, O for end supports
welds as well as about the major and minor axes of the i 118 (3 mm) for interior supports
member.
4(a)b(l - a/S)
3.4.7 In making welds under conditions of severe exter- at intermediate points, -0, +
S
nal shrinkage restraint, the welding shall be carried con-
tinuously to completion or to a point that will ensure where
freedom from crackingbefore the joint is aliowed to cool
below the minimum specified preheat and interpass a distance in feet (meters) from inspection point to
temperature. nearest support
S span length in feet (meters)
b = 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) for spans I100 ft (30 m)
3.5 Dimensional Tolerances b 3/4 in. (19 mm) for spans < 100 ft (30 m)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3.5.1 Dimensions of Welded Structural Members. The See Table 3.2 for tabulated values.
dimensions of welded structural members shall conform
to the tolerances of (1) the general specifications govern-
ing the work, and (2) the special dimensional tolerances Table 3.2
I in 3.5.1.1 to 3.5.3.3. Camber Tolerance for Typical Girder
3.5.1.1 For welded columns and primary truss mem- (see 3.5.1.3)
bers, regardless of cross section, the allowable variation
in straightness is Camber Tolerance (in inches)
Lengths of less than 30 ft (9 m):
No. of ft of total length o. 1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
1/8 in. X
10 Iloo ft 9/16 1 1-1/4 1-7/16 1-1/2
No. of meters of total length
< 100 ft 114 112 518 314 314
3mm x Camber Tolerance (in millimeters)
3
Lengths of 30 to 45 ft (14 m): 3/8 in. (10 mm)
Lengths over 45 ft: o. 1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
No. of ft of total length -45 2 30 m 14 25 32 36 38
318 in. + 118 in. X
10
< 30 m 6 13 16 19 19
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L = L 92
~
07842b5
Workmanship/ 63
For members whose top flange is embedded in con- No. of meters of total length
crete without a designed concrete haunch, the allowable f3mm x
3
variation from required camber at shop assembly (for
drilling holes for field splices or preparing field welded provided the member has sufficient lateral flexibility
splices) is to permit the attachment of diaphragms, cross-frames,
lateral bracing, etc., without damaging the structural
at midspan, f 3/4 in. (19 mm) for spans 2 100 ft member or its attachments.
(30 m)
f 3/8 in. (10 mm) for spans < 100 ft 3.5.1.5 For built-up H or I members, the allowable
(30 m) variation between the centerline of the web and the
centerline of the flange at contact surface is l / 4 in.
at supports, O for end supports (6 -1-
f 1/8 in. (3 mm) for interior supports
3.5.1.6 For girders in statically and dynamically
4(a)b(l - a l s ) loaded structures, the allowable variation from flatness
at intermediate points, f of webs is specified in 8.13 and 9.23, respectively.
S
where a and S are as defied above 3.5.1.7 For welded beams or girders, the combined
warpage and tat of flangeshallbe determined by measur-
b 3/4 in. (19 mm) for spans 2 100 ft (30 m) ing the offset at the toe of the flange from a line normal
b = 3/8 in. (10 mm) for spans < 100 ft (30 m) to the plane of the web through the intersection of the
centerline of the web with the outside surface of the
See Table 3.3 for tabulated values. flange plate. This offset shall not exceed 1% of the total
Regardless of how the camber is shown on the detail flange width or 1/4 in. (6 mm), whichever is greater,
drawings, the sign convention for the allowable variation except that welded butt joints of abutting parts shall
is plus (+) above, and minus (-) below, the detailed fulfill the requirements of 3.3.3.
camber shape. 3.5.1.8 For welded beams and girders, the maximum
These provisions also apply to an individualmember allowablevariation from specified depth measured at the
when no field splices or shop assembly is required. web centerline is
Camber measurements shall be made in the no-load
condition. For depths up to 36 in.(0.9 m) incl.. .......... *1/8 in. (3 mm)
..... f3/16in. (5 mm)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
For depths over 36 in. to 72 in. (1.8 m) incl
3.5.1.4 For horizontally curved welded beams or For depths over 72 in. . ...................... +5/ 16 in.(8 mm)
-31 16 h.(5 m)
girders, the allowable variation in specified sweep at the
midpoint is 3.5.2 Bearing at Points of Loading. The bearing ends of
bearing stiffeners shall be square with the web and shall
No. of ft of total length have at least 75% of the stiffener bearing cross-sectional
f 1/8 in. X
10 area in contact with the inner surface of the flanges. The
outer surface of the flanges when bearing against a steel
base or seat shall fit within 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) for 75% of
Table 3.3 the projected area of web and stiffeners and not more
Camber Tolerance for Girders than 1/32 in. (1 mm) for the remaining 25% of the
projected area. Girders without stiffeners shall bear on
Without a Designed Concrete Haunch the projected area of the web on the outer flange surface
(see 3.5.1.3) within 0.010 in. and the included angle between web and
Camber Tolerance (in inches) flange shall not exceed 90" in the bearing length. See
Commentary.
3.5.3 Tolerance on Stiffeners
o. 1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
~~
3.5.3.1 Fit of Intermediate Stiffeners. Where tight fit
2 100 ft 114 112 518 314 314 of intermediate stiffeners is specified, it shall be defined
il8 114 5/16 318 318 as allowing a gap of up to 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) between
~~ ~
Camber Tolerance (in millimeters) stiffener and flange.
3.5.3.2 Straightness of Intermediate Stiffeners. The
\ a/S out-of-straightness variation of intermediate stiffeners
o. 1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 shall not exceed 112 in. (13 mm) for girders up to 6 f t
6 13 16 19 19 (1.8 m) deep, and 3/4 in. (19 mm) for girders over 6 ft
I <30m 3 6 8 10 10
deep, with due regard for members which frame into
them.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 9 2 M 07842b.5 0500122 5 M
64/Workmanship
3.5.3.3 Straightness and Location of Bearing Stiff- 3.7 Repairs
eners. The out-of-straightness variation of bearing
stiffenersshallnotexceed 1/4in. (6mm)upto6ft(1.8m) 3.7.1 The removal of weld metal or portions of the base
deep or 1/2 in. (13 mm) over 6 ft deep. The actual metal may be done by machining, grinding, chipping, or
centerline of the stiffener shall lie within the thickness of gouging. It shall be done in such a manner that the
the stiffener as measured from the theoretical centerline adjacent weld metal or base metal is not nicked or
location. gouged. Oxyfuel gas gouging shall not be used in
quenched and tempered steel. Unacceptable'portions of
3.5.4 Other Dimensional Tolerances. Twist of box the weld shall be removed without substantial removal of
members and other dimensional tolerances of members the base metal. The surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly
not covered by 3.5 shall be individually determined and before welding. Weld metal shall be deposited to com-
mutually agreed upon by the contractor and the owner pensate for any deficiency in size.
with proper regard for erection requirements. 3.7.2 The contractor has the option of either repairing
an unacceptable weld or removing and replacing the
entire weld, except as modified by 3.7.4. The repaired or
replaced weld shall be retested by the method originally
3.6 Weld Profiles used, and the same technique and quality acceptance
criteria shall be applied. If the contractor elects to repair
3.6.1 The faces of fillet welds may be slightly convex, the weld, it shall be corrected as follows:
flat, or slightly concave as shown in Figure 3.4(A) and 3.7.2.1 Overlap, Excessive Convexity or Excessive
(B), with none of the unacceptable profiles shown in Reinforcement. Excessive weld metal shall be removed.
Figure 3.4(C).
3.7.2.2 Excessive Concavity ofWeld or Crater, Under-
3.6.1.1 Except at outside welds in corner joints, the size Welds, Undercutting. The surfaces shall be pre-
convexity "C"of a weld or individual surface weld shall pared (see 3. l l ) and additional weld metal deposited.
not exceed the values given in Figure 3.4.
3.7.2.3 Incomplete Fusion, Excessive Weld Porosity,
3.6.1.2 Except for undercut, as permitted by the or Slag Inclusions. Unacceptable portions shall be
Code, these profile requirements do not apply to the ends removed (see 3.7.1) and rewelded.
of intermittent fillet welds outside their effective length. 3.7.2.4 Cracks in Weld or Base Metal. The extent of
the crack shall be ascertained by use of acid etching,
3.6.2 Groove welds shall preferably be made with slight magnetic particle inspection, dye penetrant inspection,
or minimum face reinforcement except as may be other- or other equally positive means; the crack and sound
wise provided. In the case of butt and corner joints, the metal 2 in. (50 mm) beyond each end of the crack shall be
face reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm) in removed, and rewelded.
height and shall have gradual transition to the plane of
the base metal surface. See Figure 3.4(D). They shall be 3.7.3 Members distorted by welding shall be straight-
free of the discontinuitiesshown for butt joints in Figure ened by mechanicalmeans or by application of alimited
3.4(E). amount of localized heat. The temperature of heated
areas as measured by approved methods shall not exceed
3.6.3 Surfaces of butt joint welds required to be flush 1100"F (590°C) for quenched and tempered steel nor
shall be finished so as not to reduce the thickness of the 1200°F (650°C) for other steels. The part to be heated
thinner base metal or weld metal by more than 1/32 in. for straightening shall be substantially free of stress and
(1 mm) or 5% of the thickness, whichever is smaller, nor from external forces, except those stresses resulting from
leave reinforcement that exceeds 1/32 in. However, all the mechanical straightening method used in conjunc-
reinforcement must be removed where the weld forms tion with the application of heat.
part of a faying or contact surface. Any reinforcement 3.7.4 Prior approval of the Engineer shall be obtained
must blend smoothly into the plate surfaces with transi- for repairs to base metal (other than those required by
tion areas free from undercut. Chipping and gouging 3.2), repair of major or delayed cracks, repairs to electro-
may be used, provided they are followed by grinding. slag and electrogas welds with internal defects, or for a
Where surface fishing is required, its roughness value revised design to compensate for deficiencies.
(see ANSI B46.1) shall not exceed 250 pin. (6.3 pm).
Surfaces f i h e d to values of over 125 pin. (3.2 pm) 3.7.5 The Engineer shall be notified before improperly
through 250 pin. shall be finished parallel to the direc- fitted and welded members are cut apart.
tion of primary stress. Surfaces finished to values of
125 pin. or less may be finished in any direction. 3.7.6 If, after an unacceptable weld has been made,
work is performed which has rendered that weld inaccess-
3.6.4 Welds shall be free from overlap. ible or has created new conditions that make correction
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500123 7
~~
m
/ Workmanship/óS
S S
(A) DESIRABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES (B) ACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES
Note: Convexity, C, of a weld or individual surface bead shall not exceed the value of the following table:
Measured Leg Size or
Width of Individual Surface Bead, L Max. Convexity
L 55/16 in. (8 mm) 1/16 in. (1.6 mm)
L 2 5/16 in. to L < 1 in. (25 mm) 1/8 in. (3 mm)
L 2 iin. 3/16 in. (5 mm)
SIZE -I SIZE 4 L SIZE 4 L SIZE L SIZE 4 I- SIZE
INSUFFICIENT EXCESSIVE EXCESSIVE OVERLAP INSUFFICIENT INCOMPLETE
THROAT CONVEXITY UNDERCUT LEG FUSION
(C) UNACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES
BUTT JOINT- BUTT JOINT (TRANSITION)-
EQUAL THICKNESS PLATE UNEQUAL THICKNESS PLATE
Note: Reinforcemenf R shall not exceed 1/8 in. (3mm). See 3.6.2.
(D) ACCEPTABLE GROOVE WELD PROFILE IN BUTT JOINT
EXCESSIVE INSUFFICIENT EXCESSIVE OVERLAP
CONVEXITY THROAT UNDERCUT SEE 3.6.4
SEE 3.6.2 SEE 3.6.3 SEE 8.15.1.5,9.25.1.5,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
OR 10.17.1.5
(E) UNACCEPTABLEGROOVE WELD PROFILES IN BUTT JOINTS
Figure 3.4 -Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles (see 3.6)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-.& 9 2 07842b5 0500Ii34 9
661Workmanship
of the unacceptableweld dangerous or ineffectual, then at the edges of the weld except as provided in 10.7.5(3).
the original conditions shall be restored by removing Care should be taken to prevent overlapping or cracking
welds or members, or both, before the corrections are of the weld or base metal.
made. If this is not done, the deficiency shall be compen-
sated for by additional work performed according to an 3.8.2 The use of manual slag hammers, chisels, and
approved revised design. lightweight vibrating tools for the removal of slag and
spatter is permitted and is not considered peening.
3.7.7 Welded Restoration of Base Metal with Mis-
located Holes. Except where restoration by welding is
necessary for structural or other reasons, punched or
drilled mislocated holes may be left open or filled with 3.9 Caulking
bolts. When base metal with mislocated holes is restored
by welding, the following requirements apply: Caulking of welds shall not be permitted.
(1) Base metal not subjected to dynamic tensile stress
may be restored by welding, provided the contractor
prepares and follows a repair welding procedure specifi-
cation. The repair weld soundness shall be verified by the 3.10 Arc Strikes
appropriate nondestructive tests, when such tests are Arc strikes outside the area of permanent welds
specified in the contract documents for’groove welds should be avoided on any base metal. Cracks or blem-
subject to compression or tension stress. ishes caused by arc strikes shall be ground to a smooth
(2) Base metal subject to dynamic tensile stress may contour and checked to ensure soundness.
be restored by welding provided:
(a) The Engineer approves repair by welding and
the welding repair procedure specification.
(b) The welding repair procedure specification is 3.11 Weld Cleaning
foliowed in the work and the soundness of the restored
base metal is verified by the NDT method(s) specified in 3.11.1 Inprocess Cleaning. Before welding over pre-
the contract documents for examination of tension viously deposited metal, all slag shallbe removed and the
groove welds or as approved by the Engineer. weld and adjacent base metal shall be brushed clean.
(3) In addition to the requirements of (1) and (2), This requirement shall apply not only to successive
when holes in quenched and tempered base metals are layers but also to successive beads and to the crater area
restored by welding: when welding is resumed after any interruption. It shall
(a) Appropriate filler metal, heat input, and post not, however, restrict the welding of plug and slot welds
weld heat treatment (when PWHT is required) shall be in accordance with 4.21 and 4.22.
used.
(b) Sample welds shall be made using the welding 3.11.2 Cleaning of Completed Welds. Slag shall be
repair procedure specification. removed from all completed welds, and the weld and
(c) Radiographic testing of the sample welds shall adjacent base metal shall be cleaned by brushing or other
verify that weld soundness conforms to the requirements suitablemeans. Tightly adherent spatter remahhg after
the cleaning operation is acceptable, unless its removal is
of 9.25.2.1.
(d) One reduced section tension test (weld metal); required for the purpose of nondestructive testing.
two side bend tests (weld metal); and three Charpy V- Weldedjointsshall not be painted until after welding has
notch (CVN) impact tests of the heat-affected zone been completed and the weld accepted.
(coarse grained area) removed from sample welds shall
be used to demonstratethat the mechanical properties of
the repaired area conform to the specified requirements 3.12 Weld Termination
of the base metal. See Appendix III for Charpy testing
requirements. 3.12.1 Welds shall be terminated at the end of ajoint in a
(4) Weld surfaces shall be finished as specified in manner that will ensure sound welds. Whenever neces-
3.6.3. sary, this shall be done by use of weld tabs aligned in such
amanner to provide an extension of thejoint preparation.
3.12.2 For statically loaded structures, weld tabs need
3.8 Peening not be removed unless required by the Engineer.
3.8.1 Peening may be used on intermediate weld layers 3.12.3 For dynamically loaded structures, weld tabs
for control of shrinkage stresses in thick welds to prevent shall be removed upon completion and cooling of the
cracking or distortion, or both. No peening shail be done weld, and the ends of the weld shall bemade smooth and
on the root or surfacelayer of the weld or the base metal flush with the edges of abutting parts.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Workmanship/ 67
3.12.4 Ends of welded butt joints required to be flush Thickness, min
shall be f i s h e d so as not to reduce the width beyond the Process in. -
mm
detailed width or the actual width furnished, whichever -
is greater, by more than 118 in. (3 mm) or so as not to SMAW 3/16 4.8
leave reinforcement at each end that exceeds 118in. Ends GMAW 1/4 6.4
of welded butt joints shall be faired at a slope not to FCAW-SS 114 6.4
exceed 1 in 10. FCAW-G 318 9.5
SAW 318 9.5
Note: Commercially available steel backing for pipe and tubing is
acceptable, provided there is no evidence of meIting on exposed inte-
rior surfam.
3.13 Groove Weld Backing 3.13.4 For dynamically loaded structures,steel backing
of welds that are transverseto the directionof computed
3.13.1 Groove welds made with the use of steel backing stress shallbe removed, and the joints shall beground or
shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused with the finished smooth. Steel backing of welds that are parallel
backing. to the direction of stress or are not subjectto computed
stress need not be removed, unless so specified by the
3.13.2 Steel backing shall be made continuous for the Engineer.
full length of the weld. Alljoints in the steel backing shall 3.13.5 Where the steel backing of longitudinalwelds in
be completejoint penetration welded butt joints meeting dynamically loaded structures is externally attached to
all the requirements of section 3, Workmanship, of this the base metal by welding, such welding shall be contin-
Code. uous for the length of the backing.
3.13.3 Backing Thickness. The suggested minimum 3.13.6 Steel backing for welds in statically loaded struc-
nominal thickness of backing bars, provided that the tures (tubular and non-tubular) need not be welded full
backing shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent melt- length and need not be removed unless specifïed by the
through, is shown in the following table: Engineer.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 m 0784265 O500326 2 m
4. Technique
Part A made with a singlepass or a singlepass each side, may be
General Requirements made using an MX-EXXX or MX-EXX-XX electrode-
flux combination.
4.1 Filler Metal Requirements 4.1.5.3 Gas Metal Arc Welding. Single-pass fillet
welds up to 5/ 16in. (8 mm) maximum and groove welds
4.1.1 When matching weld metal is required in Tables made witha singlepass or asingle pass each side, may be
8.1,9.1, or 10.1, theelectrode or electrode-flux combma- made using an ER70S-X electrode. I
tion shall be in accordance with Table 4.1.
4.1.5.4 Flux Cored Arc Welding. Single-pass f l e t
4.1.2 The electrode or electrode-flux combination for welds up to 5/ 16in. (8 mm) maximum and groove welds
complete joint penetration or partial joint penetration made with a single pass or a single pass each side, may be
groove welds, and for fillet welds shall be as specified in made using an E7OTX-X electrode.
Tables 8.1,9.1, and 10.1, as applicable.
4.1.6 For electroslag and electrogas welding of exposed,
4.1.3 After f l e r metal has been removed from its origi- bare, unpainted applications of ASTM A242 and A588
nal package, it shall be protected or stored so that its steel requiring weld metal with atmospheric corrosion
characteristics or welding properties are not affected. resistance and coloring characteristics similar to that of
the base metal, the electrode-flux combination shall be
4.1.4 For exposed, bare, unpainted applications of in accordancewith 4.16, and the chemical composition
ASTM A242 and A588 steel requiring weld metal with shall conform to one of the filler metals listed in Table
atmospheric corrosionresistance and coloring character- 4.2.
istics similar to that of the base metal, the electrode or
electrode-flux combination shall be in accordance with
Table 4.2. In multiple-pass welds, the weld metal may be
deposited so that at least two layers on all exposed 4.2 Preheat and Interpass
surfaces and edges are deposited with one of the filler
metals listed in Table 4.2, provided the underlying layers Temperature Requirements
are deposited with one of the fder metals specified in Note: The preheat and interpass must be sufficient to
Table 4.1. prevent cracking. Experience has shown that the min-
4.1.5 For single-pass welding, other than electroslag or imum temperatures specijìed in Table 4.3 are adequafe
electrogas, of exposed, bare, unpainted applications of to prevent cracking in most cases. However, increased
ASTM A242 and A588 steel requiring weld metal with preheat temperatures may be necessary in situations
atmospheric corrosion resistance and coloring character- involving higher restraint, higher hydrogen, lower weld-
istics similar to that of the base metal, the following ing heat input, or steel composition at the top end of the
variations from Table 4.2 may be made. specajìcation. Conversely, lower preheat temperatures
may be adequate to prevent cracking depending on re-
4.1.5.1 Shielded Metal Arc Welding. Single-pass fillet straint, hydrogen level, and actual steel composition or
welds up to 1/4 in. (6 mm) maximum and 1/4in. groove higher welding heat input.
welds made with a single pass or a single pass each side,
may be made by using an E70XX or E7OXX-X low 4.2.1 With the exclusion of stud welding (see 7.5.4) and
hydrogen electrode. electroslag and electrogas welding (see 4.20.5) the min-
imum preheat and interpasstemperatures shall be either
4.1.5.2 Submerged Arc Welding. Single-pass f l e t in accordance with Table 4.3 for the welding process
welds up to 5/ 16in. (8 mm) maximum and groove welds being used and higher strength steel being welded or in
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
69
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 m 07842b5 0500327 4 m
70/ Technique
r.4
I d
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Technique/71
in m
9 9
."cE
4 e
F
in
2
d
ril
d
O O
W W
CU- w-
2
nn
%
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 ..
O784265 0500327 8 -
. . .
72lTechnique
GQ)
.-3E
U
C
c
8
2
Q)
a
oov,
32G
.Ei
.!4 .d .Ei
N N me4
VI A VI VI --``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Technique! 73
-
9
.-3
C
c
inoin
amo\
14'1
C
8
U
7
U
Q)
n
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 0784265 050013L b
74lTechnique
Table 4.2
Filler Metal Requirements for Exposed Bare Applications of
ASTM A242 and A588 Steel (see 4.1.4)
Welding Processes
Shielded Metal Arc Submerged Arc Gas Metal Arc Flux Cored Arc
-
A5.5 A5.23134 A5.284 A5.29
E7018-W MAX-EXXX-W
E8018-W E8XT1-W
E8016-C3 or E8018-C3 MAX-EXXX-Nil ER80S-Nil E8XTX-Nil
E8016-C1 or E8018-CI F7AX-EXXX-Ni42
E8016-C2 or E8018-C2
E7016-C1L or E7018-C1L WAX-EXXX-N~~~ ER80S-Ni2 E8XTX-Ni2
E7016-C2L or E7018-C2L MAX-EXXX-Ni3 ER80S-Ni3 E80T5-Ni3
E8018-B2L1 ER80S-B2L1 E80T5-B2L
ER80S-G
E71T8-Nil
E71T8-Ni2
E7XTX-K.2
Notes:
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1. Deposited weld metal shail have a minimum impact strength of Charpy V-notch 20 ft-lb (27.1 J) at Oo F (-is0 C).
2. The use of the same type of filler metal having next higher tensile strength as listed in AWS specification is permitted.
3. Deposited weld metal shail have a chemical compositionthe same as that for any one of the weld metais in this table.
4. Composite (metai cored) electrodes are designated as follows:
SAW. Insert letter “C” between the letters “E” and “X”;e.g., FîAX-ECXXX-Nil.
GMAW Replace the letter “S” with the letter “C,” and omit the letter “R,” e.g., EIOC-Nil.
accordance with 4.2.2. Welding shaii not be done when such as those provided in Appendix XIY8or other
the ambient temperature is lower than 0°F (-18OC). methods approved by the Engineer may be used. How-
(ZeroOF does not mean the ambient environmental ever, should the use of these guidelines result in preheat
temperature,but the temperaturein the immediate vicin- temperatures lower than those of Table 4.3, procedure
ity of the weld. The ambient environmental temperature qualification in accordance with 5.2 shail be required.
may be below OOF, but a heated structure or shelter
around the area being welded could maintain the
temperature adjacent to the weldment at O O F or higher.) 4.3 Heat Input Control for Quenched
When the base metal temperatureis below the temper- and Tempered Steel
ature listed in Table 4.3 for the welding process being
used and the thickness of material being welded, the base When quenched and tempered steels are welded, the
metal shall be preheated (except as otherwise provided) heat input shall be restricted in conjunction with the
in such manner that the parts on which the weld metal maximum preheat and interpass temperatures required
is being deposited are above the specified minimum
temperature for a distance equal to the thickness of the 8. These methods are based on laboratory cracking tests and
part being welded, but not less than 3 in. (75 mm), in ail may predict preheat temperatures higher than the minimum
directionsfrom the point of welding. In joints involving temperature shown in Table 4.3. The guide may be of value in
combinations of base metals, preheat shall be as speci- identifying situations where the risk of cracking is increased
fied for the higher strength steel being welded. due to composition, restraint, hydrogen level or lower welding
heat input where higher preheat may be warranted. Alterna-
4.2.2 Optionally, minimum preheat and interpass tem- tively, the guide may assist in defining conditions under which
perature may be established on the basis of steel compo- hydrogen cracking is unlikely and where the minimum require-
sition. Recognized methods of prediction or guidelines ments of Table 4.3 may be safely relaxed.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 3 - 3 9 2 O784265 0500332 8 ~~ ~~
=
.=
Technique175
W F O
W
CI 2
io
5 M 8
m
i
s
.d
.B
2
:
1
d
O
P
ñ
mn & W
u io
m
- \ io 2:
W-4
w m o m
mio-4-i
4444
f
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 3 - 3 92 m 0784265 0500333 T m
76/Technique
O
El 2
8 8
o
i
fi
.e
2 x
W
't. 2
A
m A
O
.CI
3 O
P
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
hlm
5s
U d c i Q> M O c h
U
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Technique/77
(because of base metal thicknesses). The above limita- thickness of the thicker part in inches, but in no case
tions shall be in strict accordance with the steel pro- more than 500°F per hour. From 600°F, the assembly
ducer's recommendations. The use of stringer beads to may be cooled in still air.
avoid overheating is strongly recommended. Oxygen
4.4.3 Alternatively, when it is impractical to postweld
gouging of quenched and tempered steelsis not permitted.
heat treat to the temperature limitations stated in 4.4.2,
weIded assemblies may be stress-relieved at lower temper-
atures for longer periods of time, as given in Table 4.5.
4.4 Stress Relief Heat Treatment
4.4.1 Where required by the contract drawings or speci-
fications, welded assemblies shall be stress-relieved by Part B
heat treating? Finish machining shallpreferably be done Shielded Metal Arc Welding
after stress relieving.
4.4.2 The stress relief treatment shall conform to the 4.5 Electrodes for Shielded Metal
following requirements: Arc Welding
(1) The temperature of the furnace shall not exceed
600" F (315OC) at the time the welded assembly is placed 4.5.1 EIectrodes for shielded metal arc welding shall
in it. conform to the requirements of the latest edition of
(2) Above 600" F, the rate of heating shallnot be more ANSI/ AWS A5.1, Specificationfor Mild Steel Covered
than 400°F (200°C) per hour divided by the maximum Arc Welding Electrodes, or to the requirements of
metal thickness of the thicker part, in inches, but in no ANSIIAWS A5.5, SpeciJcation for Low Alloy Steel
case more than 400°F per hour.l0 During the heating Covered Arc Welding Electrodes.
period, variations in temperature throughout the por- 4.5.2 Low Hydrogen Electrode Storage Conditions. All
tion of the part being heated shall be no greater than electrodeshaving low hydrogen coverings conforming to
250°F(1400C) withinany 15ft(4.6m)intervaloflength. ANSIIAWS A5.1 shall be purchased in hermetically
(3) After a maximum temperature of 1100"F (590" C) sealed containers or shall be dried for at least two hours
is reached on quenched and tempered steels, or a mean between 450'F (230°C) and 500°F (26OOC) before they
temperature range between 1100 and 1200°F (650°C) is are used. Electrodes having a low hydrogen covering
reached on other steels, the temperature of the assembly conforming to ANSIIAWS A5.5 shall be purchased in
shall be held within the specified limits for a time not less
than specified in Table 4.4, based on weld thickness.
When the specified stress relief is for dimensional stabil- Table 4.4
ity, the holding time shall be not less than specified in
Table 4.4, based on the thickness of the thicker part. Minimum Holding Time (see 4.4.2)
During the holding period there shall be no difference 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) Over 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) Over 2 in.
greater than 150°F (84" C) between the highest and low- or Less Through 2 in. (50.8 mm) (50.8 mm)
est temperature throughout the portion of the assembly -~ ~~~
being heated. 2 hrs plus 15 min
(4) Above 6OO0F, cooling shall be done in a closed 15 min 1 hr/in. for each
furnace or cooling chamber at a rate no greater than additional
500°F (260°C) per hour divided by the maximum metal in. over
2 in. (50.8 mm)
9. Stress relieving of weldments of A514, A517, A709 Grades
100 and 100W, and A710 steels is not generally recommended. ~ ~
Stress relieving may be necessary for those applications where
weldments must retaindimensionalstability during machining Table 4.5
or where stress corrosion may be involved, neither condition Alternate Stress-relief Heat Treatment
being unique to weldments involving A514, A517, A709 (see 4.4.3)
Grades 100 and lOOW, and A710 steels. However, the results of
notch toughnesstests have shown that postweld heat treatment Decrease in Temperature Minimum Holding Time at
may actually impair weld metal and heat-affected zone tough- below Minimum Decreased Temperature,
ness, and intergranular cracking may sometimes occur in the Specified Temperature, Hours per Inch (25.4 mm)
grain-coarsened region of the weld heat-affected zone. AO F A OC of Thickness
10. The rates of heating and cooling need not be less than 50 28 2
100OF( 5 5 O C) per hour. However, hall cases, consideration of
II
100 56 4
closed chambers and complex structuresmay indicatereduced 150 84 10
rates of heating and cooling to avoid structural damage due to 200 112 20
excessive thermal gradients.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 W 0784265 0500335 3 W
78/Technique
hermetically sealed containers or shall be dried at least
one hour at temperatures between 700°F (370°C) and Table 4.6
8M°F (430°C) before being used. Electrodes shall be Permissible Atmospheric Exposure of
dried prior to use if the hermetically sealed container
shows evidence of damage. Immediately after opening of Low Hydrogen Electrodes (see 4.5.2.1)
the hermetically sealed container or removal of the elec- Column Column
trodes from drying ovens, electrodes shall be stored in A B
ovens held at a temperature of at least 250°F (120°C). Electrode (hours) (hours)
After the opening of hermetically sealed containers or
removal from drying or storage ovens, electrode expo- -
A5.1
sure to the atmosphere shall not exceed the requirements E70XX 4 max Over 4 to 10 max
of either 4.5.2.1 or 4.5.2.2.
4.5.2.1 Approved Atmospheric Exposure Time Peri-
-
A5.5
E70XX-X 4 max Over 4 to 10 max
ods. After hermetically sealed containers are opened or
E8oXX-x 2 max Over 2 to 10 max
after electrodes are removed from drying or storage Over 1 to 5 max
E9OXX-X 1 max
ovens, the electrode exposure to the atmosphere shall E100XX-X 1/2 max Over 1/2to 4 max
not exceed the values shown in column A, Table 4.6, for El 1OXX-X 1/2 max Over 1/2to 4 max
the specific electrode classification.
Notes:
4.5.2.2 AlternativeAtmosphere Exposure Time Peri- 1. Column A Electrodes exposed to atmosphere for longer periods
ods Established by Tests. The alternative exposure t h e than shown shall be redried before use.
values shown in column B in Table 4.6 may be used 2. Column B: Electrodes exposed to atmosphere for longer periods
provided testing establishes the maximum allowable than those established by testing shall be redried before use.
time. The testing shall be performed in accordance with 3. Entire table: Electrodes shall be issued and held in quivers, or other
smail open containers. Heated containers are not mandatory.
ANSI/ AWS A5.5, subsection 3.10, for each electrode
classfication and each electrode manufacturer. Such
tests shall establish that the maximum moisture content more than one time. Electrodes that have been wet shall
values of ANSI/AWS A5.5 (Table 9) are not exceeded. not be used.
Additionally, E7OXX or E70XX-X (ANSI/AWS A5.1 4.5.5 Manufacturer's Certification, When requested by
or A5.5) low hydrogen electrode coverings shall be the Engineer, the contractor or fabricator shall furnish
limited to a maximum moisture content not exceeding an electrode manufacturer's certification that the elec-
0.4% by weight. trode will meet the requirements of the classification.
These electrodes shallnot be used at relative humidity-
temperature combinationsthat exceed eitherthe relative
humidity or moisture content in the air that prevailed
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
during the testing program." 4.6 Procedures for Shielded Metal
4.5.2.3 Electrodes exposed to the atmosphere for
Arc Welding
periods less than those permitted by Table 4.6 may be 4.6.1 The work shall be positioned for flat position weld-
returned to a holding oven maintained at 25O0F(12O0C) ing whenever practicable.
min; after a minimum holding period of four hours at
250°F min the electrodes may be reissued. 4.6.2 The classification and size of electrode, arc length,
voltage, and amperage shall be suited to the thickness of
4.5.3 Electrode Restrictions for A514 or A517 Sfeels. the material, type of groove, welding positions, and
When used for welding ASTM A514 or A517 steels, other circumstances attending the work. Welding cur-
electrodes of any classification lower than E100XX-X rent shall be within the range recommended by the elec-
shall be dried at least one hour at temperaturesbetween trode manufacturer.
700 and 800°F (370 and 430°C) before being used,
whether furnished in hermetically sealed containers or 4.6.3 The maximum diameter of electrodes shall be:
otherwise. (1) 5/16 in. (8.0 mm) for all welds made in the flat
position, except root passes
4.5.4 Redrying Electrodes. Electrodes that conform to (2) 114 in. (6.4 mm) for horizontal fiiiet welds
the provisions of 4.5.2 shall subsequently be redried no (3) 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) for root passes of fillet welds
made in the flat position and groove welds made in the
11. For proper application of this provision, see Appendix flat position with backing and with a root openhg of
Vi11 for the temperature-moisturecontent chart and its exam- 114 in. or more
ples. The chart shown in Appendix VIU, or any standard (4) 5 / 32 in. (4.0 mm) for welds made with E m 1 4 and
psychrometric chart, must be used in the determination of low hydrogen electrodes in the vertical and overhead
temperature-relativehumidity limits. positions
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 = 07842b5 0500336 5
Technique/ 79
(5) 3/ 16 in. (4.8 mm) for root passes of groove welds 4.7.2 The following subsections (4.7.3 -4.7.8) governing
and for all other welds not included under 4.6.3(1), the use of submerged arc welding are suitable for any
4.6.3(2), 4.6.3(3), and 4.6.3(4) steel included in 8.2,9.2, or 10.2 other than those of the
quenched and tempered group. Concerning the latter
4.6.4 The minimum size of aroot passshall be sufficient group, it is necessary to comply with the steel producer’s
to prevent cracking. recommendation for maximum permissible heat input
4.6.5 The maximum thickness of root passes in groove and preheat combinations. Such considerations must
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
welds shall be 1/4 in. (6 mm). include the additional heat input produced in simultane-
ous welding on the two sides of a common member.
4.6.6 The maximum size of single-pass fillet welds and
root passes of multiple-pass fiiet welds shall be: 4.7.3 The diameter of electrodes shall not exceed 1/4 in.
(1) 3/8 in. (10 mm) in the flat position (6.4 mm).
(2) 5/16 in. (8 mm) in the horizontal or overhead
positions 4.7.4 Surfaces on which submerged arc welds are to be
(3) 1/2 in. (13 mm) in the vertical position deposited and adjacentfaying surfaces shall be cIean and
free of moisture as specified in 3.2.1.
4.6.7 The maximum thickness of layers subsequent to
root passes of groove and fillet welds shall be: 4.7.5 When the joint to be welded requires specific root
(1) 1/8 in. (3 mm) for subsequent layers of welds penetration and is not back gouged, the contractor shall
made in the flat position prepare a sampIejoint and macroetched cross section to
(2) 3/16 in. (5 mm) for subsequent layers of welds demonstrate that the proposed welding procedure will
made in the vertical, overhead, or horizontal positions attain the required root penetration. At the Engineer’s
discretion, a radiograph of a test joint or recorded evi-
4.6.8 The progression for all passes in vertical position
dence in lieu of the test specified in this subsection may
welding shall be upward, except that undercut may be be accepted. (The Engineer should accept properly docu-
repaired vertically downwards when preheat is in accord- mented evidence of previous qualitication tests.)
ance with Table 4.3, but not lower than 70°F (21OC).
However, when tubular products are welded, the pro- 4.7.6 Roots of groove or fdet welds may be backed by
gression of vertical welding may be upwards or down- copper, fíux, glass tape, iron powder, or similar materials
wards, but only in the direction(s) for which the welder is to prevent meltingthrough. They may also be sealed by
qualified. means of root passes deposited with low hydrogen elec-
4.6.9 Complete joint penetration groove welds made trodes if shielded metal arc welding is used, or by other
without the use of steel backing shall have the root back arc welding processes.
gouged to sound metal beforewelding is startedfrom the 4.7.7 Neither the depth nor the maximum width in the
second side, except as permitted by 10.13. cross section of weld metal deposited in each weld pass
4.6.10 When required by contract documents or specifi- shall exceed the width at the surfaceof the weld pass (see
cations, impact tests shall be included in the welding Figure 4.1). This requirementmay be waived only if the
procedure qualification. The impact tests, requirements, testing of a welding procedure to the satisfaction of the
and procedures shall be in accordance with the provi- Engineer has demonstratedthat such welds exhibit free-
sions of Appendix III. dom from cracks, and the same welding procedure and
flux-electrode classifications are used in construction.
Part C 4.7.8 Tack welds [in the form of fillet welds 3/8 in.
(10 mm) or smaller, or in the roots of joints requiring
Submerged Arc Weldìng specific root penetration] shall not produce objection-
able changes in the appearance of the weld surface or
4.7 General Requirements resultin decreased penetration.Tack welds not conform-
4.7.1 Submerged arc welding may be performed with ing to the preceding requirements shall be removed or
one or more single electrodes, one or more parallel elec- reduced in size by any suitable means before welding.
trodes, or combinations of single and parallel elec- Tack welds in the root of ajoint with steel backing less
trodes.I2 The spacing between arcs shall be such that the than 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick shall be removed or made
slag cover over the weld metal produced by a leading arc continuous for the full length of the joint using shielded
does not cool sufficiently to prevent the proper weld metal arc welding with low hydrogen electrodes.
deposit of a following electrode. Submerged arc welding
with multiple electrodes may be used for any groove or 4.7.9 When required by contract documents or specifi-
fillet weld pass. cations, impact tests shall be included in the welding
procedure qualification. The impact tests, requirements,
and procedures shall be in accordance with the provi-
12. See Appendix B for parallel electrode. sions of Appendix III.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 0784265 0500337 7 M
801Technique
WIDTH OF FACE may be reused after recovery by vacuuming, catch pans,
I sweeping, or other means.
The welding fabricator shali have a system for collect-
4 4 DEPTH ing unmelted flux, addingnew flux, and welding with the
mixture of these two, such that the flux composition and
t particle size distribution at the weld puddle are relatively
constant.
WIDTH- .c.
4.8.5 Recrushed Slag. Recrushed slag may be used
provided it has its own marking, using the recrusher’s
name and trade designation. In addition, each dry batch
or dry blend (lot) of flux, as defined in ANSI/AWS
A5.01, Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines, shall be
tested in accordance with Schedule I of ANSI/AWS
A5.01 and classified by the contractor or recrusher per
ANSI/ AWS AS. 17 or A5.23, as applicable.
4.9 Procedures for Submerged Arc
Welding with a Single Electrode
4.9.1 Single electrode means one electrode connected
Figure 4.1 -Weld Bead in Which Depth and exclusively to one power source which may consist of
Width Exceed the Width of the Weld Face one or more power units.
(see 4.7.7) 4.9.2 All submerged arc welds, except fillet welds, shall
be made in the flat position. Filiet welds may be made in
4.8 Electrodes and Fluxes for either the flat or horizontal position, except that single-
pass fillet welds made in the horizontalposition shall not
Submerged Arc Welding exceed 5 / 16 in. (8 mm).
4.8.1 The bare electrodes and flux used in combination 4.9.3 The thickness of weld layers, except root and sur-
for submerged arc welding of steeIs shall conform to the face layers, shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm). When the
requirements in the latest edition of ANSI/AWS A5.17, root opening is 112 in. (13 mm) or greater, a multiple-
Specijìcationfor Bare Mild Steel Electrodes and Fluxes pass, split-layer technique shall be used. The split-layer
for Submerged Arc Welding, or to the requirements of technique shall also be used in making multiple-pass
the latest edition of ANSI/ AWS A5.23, Specijkationfor welds when the width of the layer exceeds 518 in.
Low Alloy Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc (16 mm).
Welding.
4.9.4 The welding current, arc voltage, and speed of
4.8.2 When requested by the Engineer, the contractor travel shall be such that each pass will have complete
or fabricator shall furnish an electrode manufacturer’s fusion with the adjacent base metal and weld metal, and
certification that the electrode and flux combination will there will be no overlap or undue undercut. The maxi-
meet the requirements of the classification or grade. mum welding current to be used in making a groove weld
for any pass that has fusion to both faces of the groove
4.8.3 Flux used for submerged arc welding shall be dry shall be 600 A, except that the final layer may be made
and free of contamination from dirt, mill scale, or other using a higher current. The maximum current to be used
foreign material. All flux shall be purchased in packages for making fillet welds in the flat position shall be
that can be stored, under normal conditions, for at least lo00 A.
six months without such storage affecting its welding
characteristics or weld properties. Flux from damaged
packages shall be discarded or shall be dried at a min- 4.10 Procedures for Submerged Arc
imum temperatureof 500°F (260OC)for one hour before
use. Flux shall be placed in the dispensing system imme- Welding with Parallel Electrodes
diately upon opening a package, or if used from an
opened package, the top one inch shall be discarded. 4.10.1 Parallel electrode means two electrodes con-
II Flux that has been wet shall not be used. nected electrically in parallel exclusively to the same
power source. Both electrodes are usually fed by means
4.8.4 Flux Reclamation. Submerged arc welding flux of a single electrodefeeder. Welding current, when speci-
that has not been melted during the welding operation fied, is the total for the two electrodes.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - 1 9 2 07842b5
Technique/ 81
4.10.2 Submerged arc welds with parallel electrodes, having aminimum specified tensile strengthgreater than
except fillet welds, shall be made in the flat position. 60 ûûû, but not exceeding 70 O00 psi (485 MPa).I3
Fillet welds may be made in either the flat or horizontal 4.10.6.1 Hardness determinationof the heat-affected
position, except that single-pass parallel electrode fillet zone will be made on:
welds made in the horizontal position shall not exceed (1) Initial macroetch cross sections of a sample test
5/ 16 in. (8 mm). specimen.
4.10.3 The thickness of weld layers is not limited. In (2) The surface of the member during the progress of
making the root pass of a groove weld, single or parallel the work. The surface shall be ground prior to hardness
electrodes may be used. Backing or root faces shall be of testing:
adequate thickness to prevent melt-through. (a) The frequency of such heat-affected zone test-
When the width of a surface in a groove on which a ing shall be at least one test area per weldment of the
layer of weld metal is to be deposited exceeds 1/2 in. thicker metal involved in ajoint for each 50 ft (15 m) of
(13 mm), parallel electrodes shall be displaced laterally groove welds or pair of fillet welds.
or a split-layer techniqueused to assure adequate comer (b) These hardness determinationsmay be discon-
fusion. When the width of a previously deposited layer tinued after the procedure has been established to the
exceeds 5/8 in. (16 mm), a split-layer technique with satisfaction of the Engineer.
electrodes in tandem shall be employed. 4.10.6.2 No reduction of the preheat requirements in
4.10.4 The welding current, arcvoltage, speed of travel, Table4.3will be permitted for fillet welds 3/8 in. (10 mm)
and relative location of electrodes shall be such that each and under in size.
pass will have complete fusion with the adjacent base
metal, and such that there will be no depressions or
undue undercutting at the toe of the weld. Excessive 4.11 Procedures for Submerged Arc
concavity of initial passes shall be avoided to prevent Welding with Multiple Electrodes
cracking in the roots of joints under restraint. 4.11.1 Multiple electrodes are defined as the combina-
4.10.4.1 The maximum welding current in making a tion of two or more single or parallel electrode systems,
groove weld shall be: Each of the component systems Bas its ownindependent
(i) 700 A for parallel electrodes when making the root power source and its own electrode feeder.
layer in a groove having no root opening, and which does 4.11.2 Submerged arc welds with multiple electrodes,
not fill the groove except fillet welds, shall be made in the flat position.
(2) 900 A for parallel electrodeswhen making the root Fillet welds may be made in either the flat or horizontal
pass in a groove having steel backing or a spacer bar position, except that single-pass multiple electrode faet
(3) 1200 A for parallel electrodes for all passes except welds made in the horizontal position shall not exceed
the final layer 1/2 in. (13 mm).
(4) No restriction on welding current for final layer
4.11.3 The thickness of weld layers is not limited. In
4.10.4.2 The maximum welding current to be used making the root pass of a groove weld, a single or
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
in making a fillet weld shall be 1200 A for parallel multiple electrode may be used. Backing or root faces
electrodes. shall be of adequate thickness to prevent melt-through.
4.10.5 Welds may also be made in the root of groove or When the width of a surfacein a groove on which a layer
fillet welds using gas metal arc welding, followed by of weld metal is to be deposited exceeds 112in. (13 mm),
parallel submerged arcs, provided that the gas metal arc a split layer technique shall be used to assure adequate
welding conforms to the requirements of Part D of this comer fusion. When the width of a previously deposited
section, and providing the spacing between the gas layer exceeds 1 in. (25 mm), and two electrodes only are
shielded arc and the following submerged arc does not used, a split-layer technique with electrodes in tandem
exceed 15 in. (380 mm). shall be employed.
4.10.6 Preheat and interpass temperatures for parallel 4.11.4 The welding current, arc voltage, speed of travel,
electrode submerged arc weIding shall be selected in and relative location of electrodes shallbe such that each
accordance with Table 4.3. For single-pass groove or pass will have complete fusion with the adjacent base
fillet welds, for combinationsof metals being welded and metal and weld metal and such that there will be no
the heat input involved, and with the approval of the depressions or undue undercuttingat the toe of the weld.
Engineer, preheat and interpass temperatures may be
established which are sufficient to reduce the hardness 13. The Vickers hardness number shall be determined in
in the heat-affected zones of the base metal to less than accordancewith ASTM E92. If another method of hardness is
225 Vickers hardness number for steel having a min- to be used, the equivalenthardness number shaii be determined
imum specified tensile strength not exceeding 60 O00 psi from ASTM E140, and testing shaii be performed accordingto
(415 MPa), and 280 Vickers hardness number for steel the applicable ASTM specification.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 W 0784265 0500337 O W
82/Technique
Excessive concavity of initial passes shall be avoided to Part D .
prevent cracking in roots of joints under restraint. Gas Metal Arc and
4.11.4.1 The maximum welding current in making a Flux Cored Arc Welding
groove weld shall be:
(1) 700 A for any single electrode or for parallel elec- 4.12 Electrodes
trodes when making the root layer in agroove having no
root opening and which does not fill the groove 4.12.1 The electrodes and shielding for gas metal arc
(2) 750 A for any single electrode or 900 A for parallel welding or flux cored arc welding for producing weld
electrodes when making the root pass in a groove having metal with minimum specified yield strengths of 60 O00
steel backing or a spacer bar psi (415 MPa) or less, shall conform to the requirements
(3) 1000 A for any single electrode or 1200 A for of the latest edition of ANSI/AWS A5.18, Specification
parallel electrodes for all other passes except the final for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc
layer Welding, or ANSI/ AWS A5.20, Specification for Car-
(4) No restriction on welding current for the final bon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding, as
layer applicable.
4.11.4.2 The maximum welding current to be used in 4.12.2 Weld metal having a minimum specified yield
making a fillet weld shall be 1000 A for any single strength greater than 60 O00 psi (415 MPa) shall conform
electrode or 1200 A for parallel electrodes. to the following requirements:
4.11.5 Multiple electrodewelds may also be made in the 4.12.2.1 The electrodes and shieldingfor gas metal arc
root of groove or fillet welds using gas metal arc welding welding for producing weld metal with a minimum speci-
followed by multiple submerged arcs, provided that the fied yield strength greater than 60 O 0 0 psi (415 MPa)
gas metal arc welding conforms to the requirements of shall conform with the latest edition of ANSI/AWS
Part D of this section, and provided the spacingbetween A5.28, Specification for Low Alloy Steel Filler Metals
the gas shielded arc and the first followingsubmerged arc for Gas Shielded Arc Welding.
does not exceed 15 in. (380 mm).
4.12.2.2 The electrodes and shielding gas for flux
4.11.6 Preheat and interpass temperatures for multiple- cored arc welding for producing weld metal with a min-
electrode submerged arc welding shall be selected in imum specified yield strength greater than 60 O00 psi
accordance with Table 4.3. For single-pass groove or (415 MPa) shall conform to the latest edition of ANSI/
fillet welds, for combinations of metals being welded and AWS A5.29, Specijìcationfor Low Alloy Steel Elec-
the heat input involved, and with the approval of the trodesfor Flux Cored Arc Welding.
Engineer, preheat and interpass temperatures may be
established which are sufficient to reduce the hardness 4.12.3 When requested by the Engineer, the contractor
in the heat-affected zones of the base metal to less than or fabricator shall furnish the electrode manufacturer’s
225 Vickers hardness number for steel having a min- certification that the electrodewill meet the requirements
imum specified tensile strength not exceeding 60 o00 psi of classification or grade per the provisions of 4.12.
(415 MPa) and 280 Vickers hardness number for steel
having a minimum specified tensile strength greater than
60 000, but not exceeding 70 o00 psi (485 MPa). 4.13 Shielding Gas
4.11.6.1 Hardness determinationsof the heat-affected
zones shall be made on: A gas or gas mixture used for shieldingin gas metal arc
(1) Initial macroetch cross sections of a sample test welding or flux cored arc welding shall be of a welding
specimen. grade having a dew point of -40°F (-40°C) or lower.
(2) The surface of the member during the progress of When requested by the Engineer, the contractor or fabri-
the work. The surface shall be ground prior to hardness cator shall furnish the gas manufacturer’s certification
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
testing: that the gas or gas mixture is suitable for the intended
(a) The frequency of such heat-affected zone test- application and will meet the dew point requirement.
ing shall be at least one test area per weldment on the
thicker metal involved in ajoint for each 50 ft. (15 m) of
groove welds or pair of fillet welds. 4.14 Procedures for Gas Metal Arc
(b) These hardness determinations may be discon- and Flux Cored Arc Welding
tinued after the procedure has been established to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. with Single Electrode
4.11.6.2 No reduction of the preheat requirements of 4.14.1 The following are the requirements for prequali-
Table 4.3 will be permitted for fillet welds 3/8 in. fied procedures that are exempt from qualification
(10 mm) and under in size. testing.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 0784265 . .
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Technique/ 83
4.14.1.1 Electrodes shall be dry and in suitable con- wind velocity in the vicinity of the weld to a maximum of
dition for use. five miles per hour (eight kilometers per hour).
4.14.1.2 The maximum diameter of welding electrodes 4.14.4 To prevent melt-through, roots of groove or fillet
shall be 5/32 in. (4.0 inm) for the flat and horizontal welds may be backed by copper, flux, glass tape, iron
positions, 3/ 32 in. (2.4 mm) for the vertical position, and powder, or similar materials, or sealed by means of root
5/64 in. (2.0 mm) for the overhead position. - passes deposited by shielded metal arc welding with low
hydrogen electrodes or other arc welding processes.
4.14.1.3 The maximum size of a fillet weld made in
onepassshallbe 1/2in. (13mm)fortheflat andvertical 4.14.5 When required by contract documents or specifi-
positions, 3/8 in. (10 mm) for the horizontal position, cations, impact tests shall be included in the welding
and 5/16 in. (8 mm) for the overhead position. procedure qualification. The impact tests, requirements,
and procedures shall be in accordance with the provi-
4.14.1.4 Gas Metal Arc Welding. The thickness of sions of Appendix III.
weld layers in groove welds, except root and surface
layers, shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm). When the root
opening is 1/2 in. (13 mm) or greater, a multiple-pass
split-layer technique shall be used. The split-layer tech- Part E
nique shall also be used in making all multipass welds Electroslag and Electrogas Weldìng
when the width of the layer exceeds 5/8 in. (16 mm).
4.14.1.5 Flux Cored Arc Welding. The thickness of 4.15 Qualification of Process,
the weld layers in groove welds, except root and surface
layers, shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm). When the root
Procedures, and Joint Details
opening is 112 in. (13 mm) or greater, a multipass split- 4.15.1 Prior to use, the contractor shall prepare a weld-
layer technique shall be used. When the width of a layer ing procedure specification and qualify each procedure
of a groove weld in the flat, horizontal, or overhead for eachprocessto be used according to the requirements
position is 5/8 in. (16 mm) or greater, a multiple-pass insection 5, Qualification. The welding procedure speci-
split-layer technique shall be used, When welding in the fication shall include the joint details, filler metal type
vertical position, a split-layer technique shall be used and diameter, amperage, voltage (type and polarity),
when the width of the layer exceeds 1in. (25 mm). When speed of vertical travel if not an automatic function of
welding circular tubularjohts in the 5G or 6G positions, arc length or depositionrate, oscillation (traverse speed,
progress of welding upwards, a split-layer technique length, and dwell time), type of shielding including flow
shali be used when the Width of the layer exceeds 1 in. rate and dew point of gas or type of flux, type of molding
4.14.1.6 The welding current, arc voltage, gas flow, shoe, postweld heat treatment if used, and other perti-
mode of metal transfer, and speed of travel shall be such nent information.
that each pass will have complete fusion with adjacent 4.15.2 The electroslag and electrogas welding processes
base metal and weld metal, and there will be no overlap shalí not be used for welding quenched and tempered
or excessive porosity or undercutting. steel nor for welding dynamically loaded structural
4.14.1.7 The progressions for all passes of vertical members subject to tensile stresses or reversal of stress.
position welding shall be upwards except that undercut 4.15.3 When requiredby contract drawings or specifica-
may be repaired vertically downwards when preheat is in tions, impact tests shall be included in the welding
accordance with Table 4.3, but no lower than 70°F procedure qualification. The impact tests, requirements,
(21OC). In tubular structures,the progression of vertical and procedureshallbe in accordance with the provisions
welding may be upwards or downwards, but only in the of Appendix III.
direction(s) for which the welder is qualified.
4.15.4 At the Engineer's discretion, properly documented
4.14.2 Complete joint penetration groove welds made evidence of previous qualification of the joint welding
without the use of backing shall have the root of the procedures to be employed may be accepted.
initial weld backgouged, chipped, or otherwiseremoved
to all but traces l4 of the root of the initial weld before
welding is started from the second side.
4.16 All-Weld Metal Tension
4.14.3 Gas metal arc or flux cored arc welding with
externalgas shieldingshallnot be donein a draft or wind Test Requirements
unless the weld is protected by a shelter. Such shelter Prior to use, the contractor shall demonstrate by the
shall be of material and shape appropriate to reduce test prescribed in section 5, Part B, that each combina-
tionof shielding and filler metal willproduce weld metal
14. Intermittent remnant of root. having the mechanical properties specified in the latest
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 07892b5 0500L41 9 ,
84/Technique
edition of ANSI/ AWS A5.25, Specijìcationfor Consum- 4.20.3 The type and diameter of the electrodes used shall
ables Usedfor Electroslag Welding of Carbon and High meet the requirements of the welding procedure speci-
Strength Low Alloy Steels, or the latest edition of fication.
ANSI/ AWS A5.26, Specijìcationfor Consumables Used
for Electrogas Welding of Carbon and High Strength 4.20.4 Welds shall be started in such a manner as to
Low Alloy Steels, as applicable, when welded in accord- permit sufficient heat buildup for complete fusion of the
ance with the welding procedure specification. weld metal to the groove faces of the joint. Welds which
have been stopped at any point in the weld joint for a
sufficient amount of time for the slag or weld pool to
begin to solidify may be restarted and completed, pro-
4.17 Condition of Electrodes vided the completed weld is examined by ultrasonic
and Guide Tubes testing for a minimum of 6 in. (150 mm) on either side of
the restart and, unless prohibited by joint geometry, also
Electrodes and consumable guide tubes shall be dry, confirmed by radiographictesting. Ail such restart loca-
clean, and in suitable condition for use. tions shall be recorded and reported to the Engineer.
4.20.5 Because of the high heat input characteristic of
these processes, preheating is not normally required.
4.18 Shielding Gas However, no welding shall be performed when the tem-
perature of the base metal at the point of welding is
A gas or gas mixture used for shielding for electrogas below 32OF (OOC).
welding shall be of a welding grade and have a dew point
of -40°F (-40°C) or lower. When requested by the 4.20.6 Welds having defects prohibited by 8.15 or 9.25
Engineer, the contractor or fabricator shall furnish the shall be repaired as permitted by 3.7 utilizing a qualified
gas manufacturer's certification that the gas or gas mix- welding process, or the entire weld shall be removed and
ture is suitablefor the intended applicationand will meet replaced.
the dew point requirements.
4.19 Condition of Flux Part F
Flux used for electroslag welding shall be dry and free Plug and Slot Welds
of contamination from dirt, mill scale, or other foreign
material. All fiuxshall be purchased in packages that can 4.21 Plug Welds
be stored, under normal conditions, for at least six
months without such storage affecting its welding char- The technique used to make plug welds when using
acteristics or weld properties. Flux from packages shielded metal arc welding, gas metal arc welding (except
short circuiting transfer), and flux cored arc welding
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
damaged in transit or in handling shall be discarded or
shall be dried at a minimum temperature of 250'F processes shall be as follows:
(12OOC) for one hour before use. Flux that has been wet 4.21.1 For welds to be made in the flat position, each pass
shall not be used. shall be deposited around the root of the joint and then
deposited along a spiral path to the center of the hole,
fusing and depositing a layer of weld metal in the root
4.20 Procedures for Electroslag and bottom of the joint. The arc is then carried to the
and Electrogas Welding periphery of the hole and the procedure repeated, fusing
and depositing successive layers to f i the hole to the
4.20.1 Gas to be used for shielding shall be of a welding required depth. The slag covering the weld metal should
grade and shall meet all requirements of the welding be kept molten until the weld is finished. If the arc is
procedure specification. When mixed at the welding site, broken or the slag is allowed to cool, the slag must be
suitablemeters shall be used for proportioningthe gases. completely removed before restarting the weld.
Percentage of gases shall conform to the requirements of
the welding procedure specification. 4.21.2 For welds to be made in the vertical position, the
arc is started at the root of the joint at the lower side of
4.20.2 Electrogas welding shall not be done in adraft or the hole and is carried upward, fusing into the face of the
wind of a velocity greater than five miles per hour (eight inner plate and to the side of the hole. The arc is stopped
kilometers per hour) unless the weld is protected by a at the top of the hole,. the slag is cleaned off, and the
shelter. This shelter shail be of a material and shape process is repeated an the oppositeside of the hole. After
appropriate to reduce wind velocity in the vicinity of the cleaning slag from the weld, other layers should be sim-
weld surface to a maximum of five miles per hour. ilarly deposited to f i the hole to the required depth.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Technique/ 85
4.21.3 For welds to be made in the overhead position, 4.22 Slot Welds
the procedure is the same as for the flat position, Slot welds shall be made using techniques similar to
except that the slag should be allowed to cool and those specified in 4.21 for plug welds, except that if the
should be completely removed after depositing each length of the slot exceeds three times the width, or if the
successive bead until the hole is f i e d to the required slot extends to the edge of the part, the technique
depth, requirements of 4.21.3 shall apply.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
. AWS D 3 - 3 9 2 W 0784265 0500343 2 ~~~ ~~ -
5. Qualification
Part A (1) Amperage (wire feed speed) (2) Voltage
General Requirements (3) Travel Speed
(4) Shielding Gas Flow Rate
5.1 Approved Procedures 5.1.3 A combination of qualified or prequawied joint
5.1.1 Welding procedures which conform in all respects welding procedures may be used without qualification,
to the provisions of section2, Design of Welded Connec- provided the limitation of essential variables applicable
tions, section 3, Workmanship, section 4, Technique, as to each process is observed.
well as pertinent provisions of section 8, Statically
Loaded Structures, section 9, Dynamically Loaded
5.2 Other Procedures
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Structures, or section 10, Tubular Structures, whichever
is applicable, shall be deemed as preq~aN1ed.l~ They Except for the procedures exempted in 5.1,joint weld-
shall be exempt from tests or qualification, except that ing procedures which are to be employed in executing
all groove and fillet weld procedures for weld metal and contract work under this Code shall be qualified prior
base metal with a minimum specified yield strength of to use to the satisfaction of the Engineer, by tests as
90 o00 psi (620 MPa) or higher for application in sec- prescribed in Part B of this section. At the Engineer’s
tions 8 and 9 and over 75 O00 psi (515 MPa) for applica- discretion, evidenceof previous qualification of thejoint
tion in section 10shall be qualifiedprior to use by tests as welding procedures to be employed may be accepted.I6
prescribed in 5.2 of this section to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Note: The use of a prequalijìed joint welding procedure 5.3 Welders, Welding Operators,
is not intended as a substitutefor engineeringjudgment and Tack Welders
in the suitability of application of these joint welding 5.3.1 Welders, welding operators, and tack welders to be
procedures to a welded assembly or connection.
employed under this Code, and using the shielded metal
5.1.2 Limitation of Variables for Requalified Proce arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, flux cored arc, elec-
dures. All prequalified joint welding procedures to be troslag, or electrogaswelding processes, shall have been
used shall be prepared by the manufacturer, fabricator, qualified by the applicabletests as prescribed in Parts Cy
or contractor as written prequaWed welding procedure D, or E of this section. See Commentary.
specifications, and shall be availableto those authorized
to use or examine them. The written welding procedure 5.3.2 Except for joints welded by gas metal arc welding
specification may follow any convenient format. The (short circuitingtransfer), radiographicexaminationof a
welding parameters set forth in (1) through (4) of this welder or welding operator qualificationtest plate or test
subsection shall be specified on the written welding pipe may be made inlieu of guided-bend tests prescribed
procedure specifications within the limitation of varia- in Parts C and D of this section,
bles prescribed in 5.5 for each applicable process.
Changes in these parameters, beyond those specified on 5.4 Qualification Responsibility
the written welding procedure specification, shall be
considered essential changes, and shall require a new 5.4.1 Each manufacturer or contractor shallconduct the
or revised prequalified written welding procedure tests required by this Code to qualify the welding
specification. procedures.
15. The Code states ail the requirements for prequalified weld- 16. Only the requirements listed in Appendix IV, Table IV-1,
ing. For convenience, Appendix H lists provisions to be Code Requirements That May be Changed by Procedure
included in a prequalified welding procedure specification, and QualificafionTests,may bevaried when the procedure is quali-
which must be addressed in the fabricator’s or contractor’s fied by tests. No other code requirement may be changed by
welding program. procedure qualification.
Copyright American Welding Society
87
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1-1 9 2 W. ..0784265
. . 0500144 4 W
881Qualification
5.4.2 Each manufacturer or contractor shall be respon- thick 100 O00 psi (690 MPa) yield strength base metal
sible for the qualification of welders, welding operators also qualifies for a 3 in. (76.2 mm) thick 9OOOO psi
and tack welders, whether the qualification testing is (620 MPa) yield strength base metal of the samematerial
conducted by the manufacturer, contractor, or an inde- specification.
pendent testing agency.
5.5.1.4 Qualification of a welding procedure estab-
5.4.3 At the Engineer's discretion, properly documented lished with a combination of base metals included in
evidence of previous qualification of welders, welding Table 4.1, one of which is in Groups III, IV, or V, shall
operators, and tack welders to be employed may be qualify the procedure for welding that high yield strength
accepted. base metal to any other of those base metals in Table 4.1
having a minimum specified yield strength equal to or
5.4.4 Qualifications which were performed to and met less than that of the lower strength base metal in the test.
the requirements of earlier editions of ANSI/AWS D1.l
or AWS D1.O or AWS D2.0 while those editions were in 5.5.1.5 In preparing the procedure qualification test
effect are valid and may be used. It is not acceptable to record and the welding procedure specification,the man-
use an earlier edition for new qualifications in lieu of the ufacturer or contractor shall report the specificvalues for
current edition, unless the specific early edition is a con- the essential variables that are specified in 5.5. The sug-
tractual requirement. gested form for showing the information required in the
welding procedure specification is given in Appendix E.
5.5.2 The changes set forth in 5.5.2.1 through 5.5.2.5
Part B shall be considered essential changes in a welding proce-
Procedure Qualijication dure and shall require establishing a new procedure by
qualification. When a combination of welding processes
5.5 Limitation of Variables is used, the variables applicable to each process shall
5.5.1 When necessary to establish a welding procedure apply*
by qualification as required by 5.2 or by contract specifi- 5.5.2.1 Shielded Metal Arc Welding. The essential
cations, the following rules apply, and the procedure variables for this process are the following:
shall be recorded by the manufacturer or contractor as a (1) A change increasing filler metal strength level (a
welding procedure specifi~ation.'~ change from E7OXX to E80XX-X, for example, but not
5.5.1.1 Qualification of a welding procedure estab- vice versa)
lished with a base metal included in Group I of Table 4.1 (2) A change from a low hydrogen type electrode to a
shall qualify the procedure for welding any other base non-low hydrogen type of electrode, but not vice versa
metal or combination of base metals included in this (3) An increase of diameter of electrodes by more
than 1/32 in. (1 mm) over that used in the procedure
group. qualification
5.5.1.2 Qualification of a welding procedure estab- (4) A change of electrode amperage and voltage
lished with a base metal, or combinations of base metals, values that is not within the ranges recommended by the
included in Group II of Table 4.1 shall be considered as electrode manufacturer **
procedure qualification for welding any other base (5) For a specified groove, a change of more than
metal, or combinations of base metals within Group I or f 25% in the specified number of passes. If the area of the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
II, or any combinations between Groups I and II. groove is changed, it is permissible to change the number
of passes in proportion to the area
5.5.1.3 Qualification of a welding procedure estab- (6) A change in position in which welding is done as
lishedwith a base metal included in Groups III, IV, or V defined in 5.8
of Table 4.1 shall qualify the procedure for welding only (7) For a change in groove type:
base metals of the same material specification and grade (a) A change in the type of groove (a change from a
or type having the same minimum specified yield V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualification
strength as the base metal tested, reduction in yield of a completejoint penetration groove weld qualifies for
strength for increase in material thickness excepted. For any groove detail which complies with the requirements
example, a procedure qualified with a 1 in. (25.4 mm) of 2.9 or 2.10
(b) A change in the type of groove to a square
groove or vice versa
17. Welding procedures for processes listed in 1.3 and qualified
in accordance with the requirements of previous editions of this
Code shalí be considered to have qualified under the tests
prescribed herein subject to the limitation of variables in 5.5. 18. When welding quenched and tempered steel, any change
Any requalifications or new qualifications shall be made in within the Illnitation of variables shall not increase the heat
accordance with the requirements of this edition. input beyond the steel producer's recommendations.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 m 0784265 0500345 6 m
Qualification/ 89
(8) A change exceeding tolerances of 2.9, 2.10, or (12) A change in the angle of electrodes in machine or
10.13 in the shape of any one type of groove involving: automatic welding of more than:
(a) A decrease in the included angle of the groove (a) f 3 " in the direction of travel
(b) A decrease in the root opening of the groove (b) f5" normal to the direction of travel
(c) An increase in the root face of the groove (13) For a specified groove, a change of more than
(d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing f25%in the specified number of passes. If the area of the
(9) A decrease of more than 25°F (13.9OC) in the groove is changed, it is permissibleto change the number
minimum specified preheat or interpass temperature'9 of passes in proportion to the area.
(10) In vertical welding, a change in the progression (14) A change in position in which welding is done as
specified for any pass from upward to downward or vice defined in 5.8
versa (15) For a change in groove type:
(11) The omission, but not the inclusion, of back (a) A change in the type of groove (a change from a
gouging V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualification
(12) The addition of or deletion of postweld heat of a completejoint penetration groove weld qualifies for
treatment any groove detail which complies with the requirements
of 2.9 or 2.10
5.5.2.2 Submerged Arc Welding. The essential vari- (b) A change in the type of groove to a square
ables for this process are the following: groove or vice versa
(1) A change from one AWS flux-electrode classifica- (16) A change, exceeding tolerances of 2.9,2.10, and
tion to any other AWS flux-electrode classification, 3.3.4, in the shape of any one type of groove involving:
except for a change decreasing filler metal strength level (a) A decrease in the included angle of the groove
(for example, from Grade F90 to F80). (b) A decrease in the root opening of the groove
(2) A change from one AWS flux-electrode classifica- (c) An increase in the root face of the groove
tion to any flux-electrode combination for which there is (d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing
not an AWS classification. (17) A decrease of more than 25°F (13.9"C) in the
(3) A change in diameter of electrodes when using an mínimum specified preheat or interpass temperature
alloy flux20 (18) An increase in the diameter of the electrode used
(4) A change in the number of electrodes used over that called for in the welding procedure specification.
( 5 ) A change in the type of current (AC or DC) or (19) The addition or deletion of supplemental pow-
polarity when welding quenched and tempered steel or dered or granular filler metal or cut wire
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
when using an alloy flux (20) An increasein the amount of supplemental pow-
(6) A change of more than 10%above or below speci- dered or granular filler metal or cut wire
fied mean amperage for each diameter of electrodes (21) If the alloy content of the weld metal is largely
used. If the wire feed speed is measured and controlled dependent on the composition of supplemental pow-
rather than the amperage, a change of more than 10%in dered filier metal, any change in any part of the joint
the specified wire feed speed. welding procedure which would result in important
(7) A change of more than 7% above or below the alloying elements in the weld metal not meeting the
specified mean arc voltage for each diameter electrode chemical requirements given in the welding procedure
used specification
(8) A change of more than 15% above or below the (22) The omission, but not the inclusion, of back
specified mean travel speed gouging
(9) A change of more than 1096, or 1/8 in. (3 mm), (23) The addition of or deletion of postweld heat
whichever is greater, in the longitudinal spacing of the treatment
arcs
(10) Achangeofmorethan 10%,or 1/16in.(1.6mm) 5.5.2.3 Gas Metal Arc Welding. The essential varia-
whichever is greater, in the lateral spacing of the arcs bles for this process are the following:
(11) A change of more than f 1 0 " in the angular (1) A change in the electrode and method of shielding
position of any parallel electrode not covered by ANSIIAWS A5.18 or A5.28
(2) A change increasing filler metal strength level
(from E70S to E80S, for example, but not vice versa)
(3) A change in diameter of electrodes
19. The temperature may faii more than 25OF (13.9OC) below (4) A change in the number of electrodes used
the minimumspecified,provided (1) the provisions of 3.4.7 and (5) A change in shielding gas from a single gas to any
Table 4.3 are complied with, and (2) the work shail be at the other single gas or to a mixture of gases, or a change in
specified minimum temperature at the time of subsequent the specified nominal percentage composition of the gas
welding. mixture.
20. An ailoy flux is defined as a flux upon which the aiioy (6) A change of more than 10% above or below the
content of the weld metal is largely dependent. specified mean amperage for each diameter electrode
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 m 07842b5 0500L4b 8 =
901Qualification
used. If the wire feed speed is measured and controlled (5) A change in shielding gas from a single gas to any
rather than the amperage, a change of 'morethan 10%in other single gas or to a mixture of gases, or a change in
the specified wire feed speed. the specified nominal percentage composition of the gas
(7) A change of more than 7% above or below the mixture.
specified mean arc voltage for each diameter electrode (6) A change of more than 10%above or below the
used specified mean amperage for each size electrode used. If
(8) A change of more than 25% above or below the the wire feed speed is measured and controlled rather
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
specified mean travel speed unless heat input control is than the amperage, a change of more than 10% in the
required. Travel speed ranges for all sizes of fillet welds specified wire feed speed.
may be determined by the largest single pass fillet weld (7) A change of more than 7% above or below the
and the smallest multi-pass fillet weld qualificationtests. specified mean arc voltage for each size electrode used
(9) An increase of 25% or more or a decrease of 10% (8) A change of more than 25% above or below the
or more in the rate of flow of shielding gas or mixture specified mean travel speed unless heat input control is
(10) For a specified groove, a change of more than required. Travel speed ranges for all sizes of f i e t welds
f25%in the specified number of passes. If the area of the may be determined by the largest single pass fillet weld
groove is changed; it is permissible to change the number and the smallest multi-pass fillet weld qualification tests.
of passes in proportion to the area (9) An increase of 25%or more or a decrease of 10%
(11) A change in the position in which welding is or more in the rate of flow of shielding gas or mixture
done, as defied in 5.8 (10) For a specified groove, a change of more than
(12) For a change in groove type: f 25%in the specified number of passes. If the area of the
(a) A change in the type of groove (a change from a groove is changed, it is permissible to change the number
V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualification of passes in proportion to the area
of a completejoint penetration groove weld qualifies for (1 1) A change in the position in which welding is done
any groove detail which complies with the requirements as defined in 5.8
of 2.9 or 2.10. (12) For a change in groove type:
(b) A change in the type of groove to a square (a) A change in the type of groove (achange from a
groove or vice versa. V-groove to U-groove for example), except qualification
(13) A change, exceeding tolerances in 2.9, 2.10, or of a completejoint penetration groove weld qualifies for
10.13; and 3.3.4, or 10.14.3, in the shape of any one type any groove detail which complies with the requirements
of groove involving: of 2.9 or 2.10
(a) A decrease in the included angle of the groove (b) A change in the type of groove to a square
(b) A decrease in the root opening of the groove groove or vice versa
(c) An increase in the root face of the groove (13) A change, exceeding tolerances in 2.9, 2.10, or
(d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing 10.13; and 3.3.4 or 10.14.3, in the shape of any one type
(14) A decrease of more than 25°F (13.9OC) in the of groove involving:
minimum specified preheat or interpass temperature (a) A decrease in the included angle of the groove
(15) In vertical welding, a change in the progression (b) A decrease in the root opening of the groove
specified for any pass from upward to downward, or vice (c) An increase in the root face of the groove
versa (d) The omission, but not inclusion, of backing
(16) A change in type of welding current (AC or DC), (14) A decrease of more than 25°F (13.9"C) in the
polarity, or mode of metal transfer across the arc minimum specified preheat or interpass temperature
(17) The omission, but not the inclusion, of back (15) In vertical welding, a change in the progression
gouging specified for any pass from upward to downward or vice
(18) The addition of or deletion of postweld heat versa
treatment (16) A change in type of welding current (AC or DC),
(19) When required, an increase of more than 10%in or polarity
the heat input (combinationof travel speed, current and (17) The omission, but not the inclusion, of back
voltage). gouging
(18) The addition of or deletion of postweld heat
5.5.2.4 Flux Cored Arc Welding. The essential vari- treatment
ables for this process are the following: (19) When required, an increase of more than 10%in
(1) A change in electrode and method of shieldingnot the heat input (combination of travel speed, current and
covered by ANSIIAWS A5.20 or A5.29 voltage)
(2) A change increasing f i e r metal strength level
(from E70T to E80T, for example, but not vice versa) 5.5.2.5 Electroslag and Electrogas Welding. The
(3) An increase in the diameter of electrodeused over essential variables for these processes are the following:
that called for in the welding procedure specification (1) A significant change in filler metal or consumable
(4) A change in'the number of electrodes used guide metal composition
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.L 92 = 07842b.5 0500147 T
~~ ~
Qualification/ 9 1
(2) A change in consumable guide metal core cross- (13) A change in groove design other than square
sectional area exceeding 30% groove, reducing groove cross-sectional area
(3) A change in flux system (cored, magnetic elec- (14) A change in speed of vertical travel, if not an
trode, external flux, etc.) automatic function of arc length or deposition rate,
(4) A change in flux composition including consum- exceeding 20% except as necessary to compensate for
able guide coating variation in joint opening.
(5) A change in shielding gas compositionof any one
constituent of more than 5% of the total flow
(6) A change either in welding current exceeding 20%
or a change in wire feed speed (rate) exceeding 40% 5.6 Types of Tests and Purposes
(7) A change in groove design, other than square
groove, increasing groove cross-sectional area The types of tests outlinedbelow are to determine the
(8) A change injoint thickness 0outside the limits of mechanical properties and soundness of welded joints
0.5 T to 1.1 T, where T is the thickness used for the made under a given welding procedure specification.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
procedure qualification 5.6.1 For Groove Welds. The types of tests required for
(9) A change in number of electrodes these welds are the following:
(10) A change from single-pass to multiple-pass or (1) Reduced-section tension test (for tensile strength)
vice versa (2) Root-bend test (for soundness)
(11) A change to a combination with any other weld- (3) Face-bend test (for soundness)
ing process os method (4) Side-bend test (for soundness)
(12) A change in postweld heat treatment (5) Longitudinalface, root-bend tests (for soundness)
(13) A change in design of molding shoes, eitherf i e d (6) All-weld-metal test (for mechanical properties -
or movable, fromnonfusing solid to water-cooled or vice electroslag and electrogas)
versa. (7) Impact tests for toughness-when required by
contract dQCUmentSos specifications, see Appendix III.
5.5.3 The following changes i n a qualXed electsoslag or (8) Macroetch test for soundness and weld size in
electrogas procedure shali requise requalification of the partial joint penetration groove welds
procedure by radiographic or ultrasonic testing only, in (9) Radiographic or ultrasonic testing (for soundness).
accordance with the requirements of Part B or C of
section 6. 5.6.2 For Fillet Welds. The types of tests required for
(1) A change exceeding 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) in filler these welds are the following:
metal diameter (1) Macroetch test for soundness and fusion
(2) A change exceeding 10 ipm (4.2 mm/s) in filler (2) Side-bend test (for soundness)
metal oscillation traverse speed (3) Ail-weld-metal test (for mechanical properties)
(3) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse dwell
time exceeding 2 seconds except as necessary to compen- Note: (2) and (3) are for consumable verification
sate for variation in joint opening
(4) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse length
which affects, by more than 1/ 8 in. (3 mm), the proxim-
ity of filler metal to the molding shoes 5.7 Base Metal and Its Preparation
(5) A change in flux burden exceeding 30% The base metal and its preparation for welding shall
(6) A change in shieldinggas flow rate exceeding 25% comply with the welding procedurespecification. For all
(7) A change in design of molding shoes, either fixed types of welded joints, the length of the weld and dimen-
or movable, as follows: sions of the base metal shall provide sufficient material
(a) Metallic to nonmetallic or Vice versa for test specimens required by this Code.
(b) Nonfusing to fusing or vice versa
(c) A reductionin any cross-sectional dimension or
area of solid nonfusing shoe exceeding 25%
(8) A change in welding position from vertical by 5.8 Position of Test Welds
more than loo
(9) A change from AC to DC or vice versa, or a AU welds that will be encountered in actual construc-
change in polarity for direct current tion shall be classified as flat, horizontal, vertical, or
(10) A change in welding power volt-ampere charac- overhead in accordancewith the definitions of welding
teristics from constant voltage to constant current or vice positions given in Figures 5.1 and 5.2. Each procedure
versa. shall be tested in the manner stated below for each
(11) A change in voltage exceeding 10% position for which it is to be qualified. Welding position
(12) A change exceeding 1/4 in. (6 mm) in square limitations for procedure qualification are shown in
groove root opening. Table 5.4.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500148 1 m
921Qualification
5.8.1 Groove Plate Test Welds (illustrated in Figure side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical
5.3). In making the tests to qualify groove welds, test surface. See Figure 5.5(D).
plates shall be welded in the following positions:
(1) Position 1G(Fiat)-The test plate shail be placed -
5.8.4 Fillet Welds Pipe Positions (illustrated in Fig-
in an approximatelyhorizontal plane and the weld metal ure 5.6).
deposited from the upper side. See Figure 5.3(A). (1) Flat Position 1F-The test pipe shall be placed
(2) Position 2G (Horizontal)-The test plates shall with its axis inclined at 45" to the horizontal and rotated
be placed in an approximately vertical plane with the during welding. The weld metal is deposited from above
groove approximately horizontal. See Figure 5.3(B). so that at the point of deposition, the axis of the weld is
(3) Position 3G (Vertical)-The test plates shall be horizontal and the throat vertical. See Figure 5.6(A).
placed in approximately vertical plane with the groove (2) Horizontal Position 2F and 2F Rotated
approximately vertical. See Figure 5.3(C). (a) The position 2F test pipe shall be placed with its
(4) Position 4G (Overhead)-The test plates shalí be axis vertical so that the weld is deposited on upper side of
placed in an approximately horizontal plane and the the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface.
weld metal deposited from the under side. See Figure The axis of the weld will be horizontal and the pipe is not
5.3(D). rotated during welding. See Figure 5.6(B).
(b) The position 2F Rotated test pipe shall be
5.8.2 GroovePipe Test Welds (illustrated in Figure 5.4). placed with its axis horizontal and the axis of the depos-
In making the tests to qualify groove welds, test pipe ited weld in the vertical plane. The pipe is rotated during
shall be welded in the following positions: welding. See Figure 5.6(C).
(1) Position 1G (Pipe Horizontal Rotated)-The test (3) Overhead position 4F-The test pipe shall be
pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and the placed with its axis vertical so that the weld is deposited
groove approximately vertical. The pipe shall be rotated on the underside of the horizontal surface and against
during welding so the weld metal is deposited from the the vertical surface. The axis of the weld will be horizon-
upper side. See Figure 5.4(A). tal and the pipe is not rotated during welding. See Figure
(2) Position 2G (Pipe Vertical)-The test pipe shall 5.6(D).
be placed with its axis vertical and the welding groove (4) Multiple position 5F-The test pipe shall be
approximately horizontal. The pipe shall not be rotated placed with its axis horizontal and the axis of the depos-
during welding. See Figure 5.4(B). ited weld in the vertical plane. The pipe is not rotated
(3) Position 5G (Pipe Horizontal Fixed)-The test during welding. See Figure 5.6(E).
pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and the
groove approximately vertical. The pipe is not rotated
during welding. See Figure 5.4(C).
(4) Position 6G (Pipe Inclined Fixed)-The test pipe 5.9 Joint Welding Procedure
shall be inclined at 45O with the horizontal. The pipe is
not rotated during welding. See Figure 5.4(D). 5.9.1 The joint welding procedure shall comply in all
(5) Position 6GR (Test for completejoint penetration respects with the welding procedure specification.
groove welds of tubular T-, Y-, and K-connections)-
The test pipe shall be inclined at 45O with the horizontal. 5.9.2 Weld cleaning shall be done with the test weld in
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The pipe or tube is not rotated during welding. See the same position as the welding position being qualified.
Figure 5.4(E).
5.8.3, Fillet Welds -Plate Positions (illustrated in Fig-
ure 55). In making the tests to qualify fillet welds, test 5.10 Weld Specimens: Number, Type,
plates shall be welded in the positions outlined below: and Preparation
(1) Position 1F (Flat)-The test plates shall be so
placed that each fillet weld is deposited with its axis 5.10.1 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
approximately horizontal and its throat approximately 5.10.1.1 The type and number of specimens that must
vertical. See Figure 5.5(A). be tested to qualify a welding procedure are shown in
(2) Position 2F (Horizontal)-The test plates shall be Table 5.1, together with the range of thickness that is
so placed that each fillet weld is deposited on the upper qualified for use in construction. The range is based on
side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical the thickness of the test plate, pipe, or tubing used in
surface. See Figure 5.5(B). making the qualification.
(3) Position 3F (Vertical)-The test plates shall be
placed in approximately vertical planes and each fillet 5.10.1.2 Test specimens for groove welds in corner or
weld deposited on the vertical surfaces. See Figure T-joints shall be butt joints having the same groove
5.5(c). configuration as the corner or T-joint to be used on
(4) Position 4F (Overhead)-The test plates shall be construction, except the depth of groove need not exceed
so placed that each fillet weld is deposited on the under 1 in. (25 mm).
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tabulation of positions of groove welds
Position Diagram reference Inclinationof axis Rotation of face
Flat A O'to 15' 150' to 21 O"
Horizontal B O'to 15' 80"to i50'
~
21O" to 280°
Overhead C O' to 80' O' to 80'
280"to 360"
D 15 to 80' 80"to 280"
Vertical O' to 360"
E 80' to 90'
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
I. The horizontal reference plane is always taken to lie below the weld under consideration.
2. The inclination of axis is measured from the horizontal reference plane foward the vertical
reference plane.
3. The angle of rotation of the face is determined by aline perpendicularto the theoretical
face of the weld which passes through the axis of the weld. The reference position (O')
of rotation of the face invariably points in the direction opposite to that in which the
axis angle increases. When looking at point P, the angle of rotation of the face of the
weld is measured in a clockwise direction from the reference position (O').
Figure 5.1 -Positions of Groove Welds (see 5.8.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
941Qualification
I
I I
I
AXIS LIMITS FOR C
AXIS LIMITS FOR D
125-n I _ _ _ ^
Tabulation of positions of fillet welds
Diagram Inclination Rotation
Position reference of axis of face
Flat A O'to 15" 150" to 210"
Horizontal B Oe to 15O 125"to 150"
210"to 235"
Overhead C O' to 80' O' to 125'
235' to 360'
Vertical D 15" to 80' 125' to 235'
E 80' to 90' O' to 360'
~ ~~
Figure 5.2 -Positions of Fiilet Welds (see 5.8.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500151 1 m
PLATES VERTICAL:
PLATES HORIZONTAL
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(A) TEST POSITION 1G
(B) TEST POSITION 2G
PLATES VERTICAL;
Isi
AXIS OF WELD
VERTICAL PLATES HORIZONTAL
(C) TEST POSITION 3G
(D) TEST POSITION4G
Figure 5.3 -Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds (see 5.8.1.1)
5.10.1.3 Nondestructive Testing. Before preparing welded test assemblies conforming to 5.10.1.3 shall have
mechanical test specimens, the qualification test plate, test specimens prepared by cutting the test plate as
pipe, or tubing shall be nondestructively tested for shown in Figures 5.10, or 5.11, whichever is applicable.
soundness as follows: The test specimensfor the longitudinalbend test shall be
(1) Either radiographic or ultrasonic testing shall be prepared for testing as shown in Figure 5.15.
used. The entire length of the weld in test plates, except
the discard lengths at each end, shall be examined in 5.10.2 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds. The
accordance with section 6, Parts B or C. For tubulars, type and number of specimens that must be tested to
the full circumference of the completed weld shall be qualify a welding procedure are shown in Table 5.2. A
examined in accordancewith section 10, Parts E and F. sample weld shall be made using the type of groove
(2) For acceptable qualification, the weld, as revealed design and joint welding procedure to be used in con-
by radiographic or ultrasonic testing, shall conform to struction, except the depth of groove need not exceed
the requirements of 5.12.5. 1 in. (25 mm). For the macroetch test required below,
any steel of Groups I, II, and III of Table 4.1 may be used
5.10.1.4 Mechanical Testing. The welded test assem- to qualify the weld size on any steels or combination of
blies conforming to 5.10.1.3 shall have test specimens steels in those groups. If the partial joint penetration
prepared by cutting the test plate, pipe, or tubing as groove weld is to be used for corner or T-joints, the butt
shown in Figures 5.7 through 5.11, whichever is applica- joint shall have a temporary restrictive plate in the plane
ble. The test specimens shall be prepared for testing in of the square fa% to simulatethe T-joint configuration.
accordancewith Figures 5.12 through 5.15, as applicable. The sample welds shall be tested as follows:
5.10.1.5 Whenmaterial combinations differ markedly 5.10.2.1 For joint welding procedures which conform
in mechanical bending properties, as between two base in all respects to sections 3 and 4, three macroetch cross-
materials or between the weld metal and the base metal, section specimens shall be prepared to demonstratethat
longitudinal bend tests (face and root) may be used in the designated weld size (obtained from the requirements
lieu of the transverse face and root bend tests. The of the welding procedure specification) are met.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D i - 3 92 0784265 0500352 3 W
961Qualification
15' PIPE HORIZONTALAND ROTATED.
WELD FLAT (115"). DEPOSIT
-- FILLER METAL AT OR NEAR THE TOP.
I (A) TEST POSITION 1G ROTATED
PIPE OR TUBE VERTICAL AND
NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING.
WELD HORIZONTAL (515").
U
M-l
15' 15'
(6) TEST POSITION 2G
PIPE OR TUBE HORIZONTAL FIXED (+15")AND NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING.
WELD FLAT, VERTICAL, OVERHEAD.
(C) TEST POSITION 5G
PIPE INCLINATION FIXED (45" +go) AND NOT
ROTATED DURING WELDING.
(D) TEST POSITION 6G (E) TEST POSITION 6GR (T-,Y- OR K-CONNECTIONS)
Figure 5.4 -Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds (see 5.8.1.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 72 m 0784265 0500153 5 m ~ ~~
Qualification/ 97
AXIS OF WELD
THROAT OF WELD HORIZONTAL
/ / -
AXIS OF WELD
HORIZONTAL -
Note: One plate must be horizontal
(A) FLAT POSITION 1F (B) HORIZONTAL POSITION 2F
AXIS OF WELD VERTICAL
I
I
Note: One plate must be horizontal
(C) VERTICAL POSITION 3F (D) OVERHEAD POSITION 4F
Figure 5.5 -Positions of Test Plate for Fillet Welds (see 5.8.1.3)
5.10.2.2 When a joint welding procedure has been 5.10.3 Fillet Welds. The type and number of specimens
qualified for a complete joint penetration groove weld that must be tested to qualify a welding procedure are
and is applied to the welding conditionsof a partialjoint shown in Table 5.3.
penetration groove weld, three macroetch cross-section
tests specimens are required.
5.10.3.1 Finet Welds. A fillet welded T-joint, as shown
5.10.2.3 Ifajoint welding procedure is not covered by in Figure 5.16 for plate or Figure 5.17 for pipe (Detail A
either 5.10.2.1 or 5.10.2.2, or if the welding conditions do or Detail B), shall be made for each procedure and
not meet a prequalified status, or if they have not been position to be used inconstruction. One test weld shail be
used and tested for a completejoint penetrationweld in a the maximum size single-pass fillet weld and one test
butt joint; then a samplejoint must be prepared and the weld shall be the mínimum size multiple- pass fillet weld
fEst operation is to make a macroetch test specimen to used in construction. These two fillet weld tests may be
determine the weld size of the joint. Then, the excess combined in a singie test weldment or assembly. The
material is machined off on the bottom side of the joint weldment shail be cut perpendicular to the direction of
to the thickness of the weld size. Tension and bend test welding at locations shown in Figures 5.16 or 5.17, as
specimens shall be prepared and tests performed, as applicable. Specimens representing one face of each cut
required for complete joint penetration groove welds shall constitute a macroetch test specimen and shaíl be
(see 5.10.1).
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tested in accordance with 5.1 1.2.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
981 Qualification
m-
il@
(A) TEST POSITION 1F (B) TEST POSITION 2F (C) TEST POSITION 2F
FOR FLAT POSITION FOR HORIZONTAL POSITION FOR HORIZONTAL
(ROTATED) (FIXED) POSITION (ROTATED)
m-
i!@
Q
(D) TEST POSITION 4F
FOR OVERHEAD POSITION
(E) TEST POSITION 5F
FOR MULTIPLE POSITION
(FIXED) (FIXED)
Figure 5.6 -Positions of Test Pipes for Fillet Welds (see 5.8.1.4)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
/TOP OF PIPE FOR
TOP OF PIPE FOR
\5G AND 6G POSITIONS \E% ~~P&~lONS
5G AND 6G POSITIONS
TENSION
I ROOTBEND 1
TENSION SPECIMENS BEND SPECIMENS
DETAIL A - 2 in. OR 3 in. IN DIAMETER DETAIL B - 6 in. OR 8 in. IN DIAMETER
(50 mm OR 75 mm IN DIAMETER) (150 mm OR 200 mm IN DIAMETER)
Note: Duplicate test pipes or tubes or larger job size pipe may be required when impact testing is
specified on contract or specifications.
Figure 5.7 -Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe (see 5.10.1.4)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D 1 - 1-~
92 = 0784265 0500155 9 = _ _ = ~
Table 5.1
Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified Procedure
Qualification; Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds (see 5.10.1 .l)
-
(Dimensions in Inches)
1. Tests on Plate
Test Specimens Required
Reduced-
Plate Section Root- Face- Side- Plate
Thickness (T) Number of NDT' Tension Bend Bend Bend Thickness2
Tested, Sample Welds (see 5.10.1.3) (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. Quaiified, T
in. per Position 5.12) 5.15) 5.15) 5.14) in. I
118 I T < 318 1 Yes 2 2 2 - 118 to 2T
318 1 Yes 2 2 2 - 1/8to3/4 II
3/8<T<1 1 Yes 2 - -
~ ~~
4 1/8to2T I
I
1 and over 1 Yes 2 - -
Notes:
1. All welded test plates shail be visually inspected (see 5.12.7).
2. For square groove welds, the maximum thickness qualifiedshall be limited to thickness tested.
~~
2. Tests on Pipe or Tubmg
Pipe Size of Test Specimens Required
Sample Weld Plate, Pipe
Reduced- or Tube
Nominal Number of Section Root- Face- Side- Diameter Thickness,
Pipe Size Sample Tension Bend Bend Bend ofpipeor Qualified, in.
or Wall Welds per (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. Tube Size
Diam., in. Thickness, T,in. Position NDT334 5.12) 5.15) 5.15) 5.14) Qualified, in. Min Max
2 Sch. 80 314
or 2 Yes 2 2 2 - through 0.125 0.674
3 Sch. 40 4
6 Sch. 120 4
or 1 Yes 2 - - 4 and 0.187 Any
8 Sch. 80 over
Job Size Pipe or Tubing
Nominal
Pipe Size
or Wall
Diam,, in. Thickness, T, in.
1/85T53/8 1 Yes 2 2 2 - Test diam. 118 2T
and over
<24 3/8<T<3/4 1 Yes 2 - - 4 Test diam. T/2 2T
and over
T13/4 1 Yes 2 - - 4 Test diam. 0.375 Any
and over
1/ 8 1 T 5 3 / 8 1 Yes 2 2 2 - Test diam. 118 2T
and over
224 3/8<T<3/4 1 Yes 2 - - 4 B a n d over T/2 2T
T23/4 1 Yes 2 - - 4 24andover 0.375 Anv
Notes:
3. All welded test pipes or tubing shail be visualiy inspected (see 5.12.6).
4. For pipe or tubing, the full circumference of the completed weld shall be tested by RT or UT prior to mechanical testing (5.10.1.3).
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 078LI265 0500L5b O m
lûû/ Qualification
Table 5.1 (continued)
3. Tests on Eleetroslag and Electrogas Welding
Test Specimens Required6
Reduced- AU-Weld
Section Metal Side-
Plate Number of Tension Tension Bend Impact Plate
Thickness Sample (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. Tests* Thickness
Tested Welds NDT's5 5.12) 5.13) 5.14) (see 4.15.3) Quaiified
T** 1 Yes 2 1 4 8 0.5T-1.1T
Notes:
1. AU welded test plates shaü be visually inspected (see 5.12.7).
5. 6 in. minimum length of weld shaü be tested by radiographic or ultrasonic methods prior to mechanid testing (see 5.10.1.3).
6. See 5.6.1(7) and Appendix UI.
*If specified.
**T is the test plate thickness.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table 5.1
Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified Procedure -
Qualification; Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds (see 5.10.1.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
1. Tests on Plate
Test Specimens Required
Reduced-
Plate Section Root- Face- Side- Plate
Thickness 0 Number of NDT Tension Bend Bend Bend Thicknas2
Tested, Sample Welds (see 5.10.1.3) (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig, Quaiified, T
mm per Position (see Note i) 5.12) 5.15) 5.15) 5.14) mm
3.2 5 T < 9.5 1 2 2 2 - 3.2 to 2T
9.5 1 Yes 2 2 2 - 3.2 to 19.0
9.5 < T < 25.4 1 Yes 2 - - 4 3.2 to 2T
25.4 and over I Yes 2 4 3.2 to Unlimited
Notes:
1. AU welded test plates shaü be visually inspected (see 5.12.7).
2. For square groove welds, the maximum thickness qualified shaü be limited to thickness tested.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Quaiification/ 101
Table 5.1 (continued) (Dimensions in Millimeters)
2. Tests on Piw or Tubine
Pipe Size of
Sample Weld Test Specimens Required
Plate, Pipe
Nominal Redùced- Diameter
or Tube
Pipe Sue Number of Section Root- Face- Side- ofpipeor
wall Thickness,
or Wall Sample NDT3*4 Tension Bend Bend Bend Tubesize
Qualified, m m
Diam., Thickness, T, Welds per (Notes (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. Qualifïed,
mm mm Position 3 and4) 5.12) 5.15) 5.15) 5.14) mm Min Max
~~
50 5.5 19
or 2 Yes 2 2 2 - through 3.2 17.1
75 5.5 100
~ ~~
150 14.3 100
or 1 Yes 2 - - 4 and 4.8 Any
200 12.7 over
Job She Pipe or Tubig
~~
Nominal
Pipe Size
or Wall
Diam. Thickness, T,
mm mm
3.25359.5 1 Yes 2 2 2 - Test diam. 3.2 2T
and over
<610 9.5C<19.0 1 Yes 2 - - 4 Testdiam. T/2 2T
and over
'1219.0 1 Yes 2 - - 4 Testdiam. 9.5 Any
and over
3.LsE9.5 1 Yes 2 2 2 - Test diam. 3.2 2T
and over
2610 9.5C<19.0 1 Yes 2 - 4 610andover T/Z 2T
T119.0 1 Yes 2 - - 4 610andover 9.5 Any
3. Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas Welding
Test Specimens Required6
Reduced- Au-Weld
Section Metal Side-
Plate Number of Tension Tension Bend Impact Plate
Thickness Sample (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. Tests* Thickness
Tested Welds NDT'15 5.12) 5.13) 5.14) (see 4.15.3) Qualified
T** 1 Yes 2 1 4 8 OST-1.1T
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
1. AU welded test plates shaii be visuaiiy inspected (see 5.12.7).
3. AU welded test pipes or tubing shaii be visuaiiy inspected (see 5.12.6).
4. For pipe or tubing, the full circumference of the completed weld shall be tested by RT or UTprior to mechanical testing (5.10.1.3).
5. A minimum length of 150 mm of weld shail be tested by radiographic or ultrasonic methods pdor to mechanical testing (see 5.10.1.3).
6. See 5.6.1(7) and Appendix ILI.
*If specified.
**Tis the test plate thickness.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1-L 9 2 m O784265 0500158 4 m
102/Qualification
TOP OF TUBING
5G AND 6G POSITIONS
FACE OR SIDE BEND
ROOT OR SIDE BEND
FACE OR SIDE BEND
ROOT OR SIDE BEND
Figure 5.8 -Location of Test Specimens for Welded Square or Rectangular Tubing
(see 5.10.1.4)
Table 5.2
Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified Procedure -
Qualification: Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds (see 5.10.2)
Test Specimens Required
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Tension and Bend Tests (5.10.2.3)
Macroetch for Reduced-
Weld Size (E) Section Root- Face- Side- Plate
Groove Number of (5.10.2. i) Tension Bend Bend Bend Thickness
Groove Depth Sample (5.10.2.2) (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. (see Fig. Qualified
Type in. (mm) Welds (5.10.2.3) 5.12) 5.15) 5.15) 5.14) in.
Same as Used 1/8 IT I 3 / 8 1 3 2 2 2 - 1/8 to 2T
in Construction* (3.2 IT I9.5)
Same as Used 3/8 < T I 1 1 3 2 - - 4 1/8 to
in Construction* (9.5 < T I25.4) unlimited
Note: All welded test plates shall be visuaiiy inspected (see 5.12.7).
*If a partial joint penetration bevel- or J-groove weld is to be used for T-joints or a double-bevel- or double-J-groove weld is to be used for comer
joints, the butt joint shaii have a temporary restrictive plate in the plane of the square face to simulate a T-joint configuration.
5.10.3.2 Consumables Verification Test. If both the (1) If the welding consumables used do not conform
proposed welding consumables and the proposed weld- to the prequalified provisions of 5. I. 1, and also
ing procedures for welding the fillet weld test plate or test (2) If the welding procedure using the proposed con-
pipe prescribed in 5.10.3.1 are neither prequalified nor sumables has not been established by the contractor in
otherwise qualified by 5.2, that is: accordance with either 5.10.1 or 5.10.2, then a complete
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.3 92 0784265 0500359 b ~~ ~
=
Quarification/ 103
- DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL)
...............
-
I:- - -- - ==DI=SCARD'THi;
.................
............. PIECE
pmy- - - - - -- - -
I
.- -
----
-- --
-- SIDE BEND:SPECIMEN
--
-- --- &:*G.$-
..u. -.-
----
--
"
- = 1=
REDUCED SECTION'TENSION SPECIMEN
24 MIN
----
IMPACT SPECIMENSWHEN
---, REQUIRED) I
EXTENSIONS NEED NOT
BE USED IF THE JOINT
IS OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH
--------- --------- TO PROVIDE 19 in. OF
SOUND WELD EXCLUSIVE
OF RETESTS
12MIN - , 12MIN
I
I I
I I
THE GROOVE CONFIGURATION SHOWN IS FOR ILLUSTRATION ONLY.
THE GROOVE SHAPE USED SHALL CONFORM TO THAT BEING QUALIFIED.
Note: When impact specimens are required, see Appendix 111 for requirements.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 5.9 -Location of Test Specimenson Welded Test Plates-Electroslag and
Electrogas Welding-Procedure Qualification (see 5.10.1.4)
joint penetration groove weld test plate shall be welded practical. These conditions establish the welding proce-
to qualify the proposed combination. dure specification from which, when production fiiet
The test plate shall be welded as follows: welds are made, changes in essential variables will be
(i) The test plate shall have the groove configuration measured in accordance with 5.5.2.
shown in Figure 5.19 (Figure 5.34 for SAW), with steel The test plate shall be tested as follows:
backing. (1) Two side-bend (Figure 5.14) and one all-weld-
(2) The plate shall be welded in the 1G (flat) position. metal tension (Figure 5.13) test specimen shall be
(3) The plate length shall be adequate to provide the removed from the test plate, as shown in Figure 5.18.
test specimens required below, oriented as shown in (2) The bend test specimens shall be tested in accord-
Figure 5.18. ance with 5.1 1.3. Those test results shall conform to the
(4) The welding test conditions of current, voltage, requirements of 5.12.2.
travel speed, and gas flow shall approximate those to be (3) The tension test specimen shall be tested in accord-
used in making production fillet welds as closely as ance with 5.11.4. The test result shall determine the
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 0784265 0500LbO 2 m
104/Qualification
- DIRECTIONOF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) -
r
6 MIN
in. 2 6 7 15 30
L
2 MIN
mm 50 150 180 380 760
r - DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) -
6 MIN
30 I
6 MIN
L
2 MIN
r
I2.
7 - 7 MIN
I
MIN
I
7 MIN ,A 7 MIN
WHEN IMPACT TESTS ARE REQUIRED,THE SPECIMENS
SHALL BE REMOVEDFROM THEIR LOCATIONS, AS
SHOWN IN APPENDIX 111, FIGURE 111-1.
'a
(1) LONGITUDINALBEND SPECIMENS (2) TRANSVERSE BEND SPECIMENS
Note: Longer test plates may be required when impact testing is specified on contract documents or
in specifications. Impact specimens should be removed at mid-lengthof the test weld.
THE GROOVE CONFIGURATION SHOWN IS FOR ILLUSTRATION ONLY.
THE GROOVE SHAPE USED SHALL CONFORM TO THAT BEING QUALIFIED.
Figure 5.10 -Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate Over 3/8 in.
-
(9.5 mm) Thick Procedure Qualification (see 5.10.1.4)
strength level of the welding consumables, which shall 5.10.4 Aging. When required by the filler metal specifi-
conform to the requirements of 4.1.2 for the welding cation applicable to weld metal being tested, fully welded
process being used and the base metal strength level qualification test specimens may be aged at 200" to
being welded. 220°F (93" to 104°C)for 48 & 2 hours.
5.10.5 Pipe Welding Positions Qualified. Qualification
5.10.3.3 Pipe and Tubing Qualification. A joint on pipe or tubing shall also qualify for plate, but not vice
welding procedure specification for groove welding of versa, except that qualification on plate shall qualify for
pipe or tubing qualified in accordance with 5.10.1 shali pipe or tubing over 24 in. (610mm) in diameter. Welding
also constitute procedure qualification for fillet welding position limitations for procedure qualification are
plate, pipe, or tubing as shown in Table 5.4. shown in Table 5.4.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
30
-
I
I_7MIN
DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL)
DISCARDTHIS PIECE
(1) LONGITUDINAL BEND SPECIMENS
Figure 5.11
the 5G (pipe horizontal fixed) position qualifies the
procedure for flat, vertical, and overhead position
groove and fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate.
5.10.5.2 Procedure qualification of pipe or tubing in
the 6G (inched fxed) position qualifies the procedure
for all position groove and fiuet welding of pipe, tubing,
and plate, but does not qualify the procedure for com-
plete joint penetration groove welding of T-, Y-, and
K-connections.
5.10.5.3 Procedure qualification of pipe or tubing in
the 6GR position, as shown in Table 5.4, qualifies for
groove and fillet welding of T-, Y-, and IC-connections,
subject to the limitations of 10.12.2, and qualifies for
groove and fillet welds in ail positions of piping, tubing,
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
7MIN -
-
I
I
h.
rnrn
2
50
6
150
..........
FACE BEN,D;;SPECIMEN
.......... - - - - - - =
..........
-- -- - -- -+E#
ROOT BÈND'SPECIMEN
SHOWN IN APPENDIX 111, FIGURE111-1.
THE GROOVE CONFIGURATIONSHOWN IS FOR ILLUSTRATIONONLY.
THE GROOVE SHAPE USED SHALL CONFORMTO THAT BEING QUALIFIED.
(2) TRANSVERSE BEND SPECIMENS
-Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate 3/8 in.(9.5 mm)
Thick and Under -Procedure Qualification (see 5.10.1.4)
5.10.5.1 Procedure qualification of pipe or tubing in
.....
180
7
..........
E<<<<<<<<<<,
FACE BEND SPECIMEN
WHEN IMPACTTESTS ARE REQUIRED,THE SPECIMENS
SHALL BE REMOVEDFROMTHEIR LOCATIONS, AS
and plate. Does not qualify for single welded open butt
joints (without backing). Qualification is limited to
groove angies 30' or greater.
5.10.5.4 Plate qualitïcations are applicable to rec-
tangular tubing except for complete joint penetration
T-, Y-, and K-connections.
5.11 Method of Testing Specimens
5.11.1 Reduced-Section Tension Specimens. Before
testing, the least width and corresponding thickness of
the reduced section shail be measured. The specimen
shall be ruptured under tensile load, and the maximum
load shail be determined.
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
20
510
30
760
- - --- - - =
.
Qualification/ 105
20 MIN
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E
AUS DL.1 72 07842b5 0500Lb2 b
106/ Qualification
MACHINE WELD REINFORCEMENT
FLUSH WITH BASE METAL
THEE EDGES MAY
BE 0: 'GEN-CUT
ITHIS
SECTION^
LED PREFERABLYBY MILLING
6GR SPECIMEN . MACHINE THE MINIMUMAMOUNT
NEEDEDTO OBTAIN PLANE PARALLEL
FACES OVER THE REDUCED SECTION
Dimensions in inches
Test plate Test Pipe
6 in. & 8 in.
2 in. & 3 in. diameter or larger
TD Il in. 1 <Tp < 1-1/2in. Tp L 1-1/2in. diameter job size pipe
-
A Length of reduced Widest face of weld + 1/2 in., 2-1/4min Widest face of weld +
section 1/2in., 2-1/4min
-
L Overall length, min As required by testing equipment As required by testing equipment
(Note 2)
-
W Width of reduced 3/4in. min 3/4in. min 3/4in. min 1/2-10.01 3/4in. min
section (Notes 3,4)
-
C Width of grip section W + 1/2in. min W + 1/2in. min W + 1/2in. min W + 1/2 in. min W + 1/2in. min
(Notes 4,5)
t - Specimen thickness TP TP Tpln Maximum possible with plane
(Notes 6,7) Note 7 parallel faces within length A
r - Radius of fillet, min 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 1
Notes:
I. Tp = Nominal Thickness of the Plate.
2. It is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section large enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a
distance equal to two-thirds or more of the length of the grips.
3. The ends of the reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.004in. Also, there may be a gradual decrease in width
from the ends to the center, but the width of either end shall not be more than 0.015 in. larger than the width at the center.
4. Narrower widths (Wand C) may be used when necessary. In such cases, the width of the reduced section should be as largeas
the width of the material being tested permits. If the width of the material is less than W, thesides may be parallel throughoutthe
length of the specimen.
5. For standard plate-type specimens, the ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with the center line of the reduced section
within 0.25in.
6. The dimension t is the thickness of the specimen as provided for in the applicable material specifications. The minimum
nominal thickness of 1-1/2in. wide specimens shall be 3/16 in. except as permitted by the product specification.
7. For plates over 1-1/2in. thick, specimens may be cut into approximatelyequalstrips. Each strip shall beat least 3/4in. thick. The
test results of each strip shall meet the minimum requirements.
8. Due to limited capacity of some tensile testing machines, the specimen dimensions for Group IV and V steels in Table 4.1 may
be as agreed upon by the Engineer and the Fabricator.
Figure 5.12 -Reduced Section Tension Specimens (see 5.10.1.4)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 05001b3 8 ~~
m ~
Qualification/ 107
MACHINE WELD REINFORCEMENT
FLUSH WITH BASE METAL
I I \
EDGE OF WIDEST
FACE OF WELD
PREFERABLY BY MILLING
6GR SPECIMEN MACHINE THE MINIMUM AMOUNT
NEEDED TO OBTAIN PLANE PARALLEL
FACES OVER THE REDUCED SECTION
Dimensions in millimeters
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Test plate Test Pipe
150 mm &200 mm
50 mm & 75 mm diameter or larger
Tp 525.4 mm 25.4<Tp < 38.1 mm Tp 138.1 mm diameter job size pipe
A - Length of reduced
section
Widest face of weld + 13 mm, 60 mm min
I Widest face of weld +
13 mm, 60 mm min
L - Overall length, min
(Note 2)
W - Width of reduced 19 m m min
As required by testing equipment
19 mm min 19 mm min
I As required by testing equipment
13f .25m m 19 mm min
section (Notes 3,4)
-
C Width of grip section W + 13 mm min W + 13 mm min W + 13 mm min W + 13 mm min W + 13 mm min
(Notes 4,5)
-
t Specimen thickness
(Notes 6,7)
TP TP Tp/n
Note 7
Maximum possible with plane
parallel faces within length A
r - Radius of fillet, 13 13 13 25 25
mm min
Figure 5.12 (continued) -Reduced Section Tension Specimens (see 5.10.1.4)
(Dimensions in Miilimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 W 0 7 8 4 2 6 5 05001bll T W
108/ Qualification
Dimensions íinchesi
Standard specimen Small-size specimens proportionalto standard
Nominal diameter 0.500in. round 0.350in. round 0.250in. round
G - Gage length 2.000'0.005 1.400k 0.005 1 .O00 '0.005
D - Diameter (Note 1) -~
0.500 '0.010 0.350-10.007 0.250'0.005
r - Radius of fillet, min 318 1/4 3/16
A - Length of reduced section
(Note 2),min 2-114 1-3/4 1-114
Di msions (metric version per ASTM E 8M)
Standard specimen Small-size specimens proportional to standard
Nominal diameter 12.5 mm round 9 mm round 6 mm round
G - Gage length, mm 62.5 '0.1 45.0-10.1 30.0-10.1
-
D Diameter (Note I), mm 12.5-10.2 9.0-10.1 6.0-10.1
r - Radius of fillet, mm, min 10 8 6
A - Length of reduced section, mm
(Note 2), min 75 54 36
Notes:
1. The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends not
more than one percent larger in diameter than the center (controlling dimension).
2. If desired, the length of the reduced section may be increasedto accomodate an extensometer of
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
any convenient gage length. Reference marks for the measurementof elongation should be spaced
at the indicated gage length.
3. The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any form to fit the holders
of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial. If the ends are to be held in
wedge grips, it is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough to
allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal to two-thirds or more of the length
of the grips.
Figure 5.13 -All-weld-metal Tension Specimen (see 5.10.1.4)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.I 9 2 07842b5 0500Ib5 ~
I W
Qualification/ 109
* 6 in. (150 mm)
118 in. (3 mm)
_----------------
(9.5mm)
IF OXYGEN-CUT, ALLOW RADIUS 118 in. MAX
NOT LESS THAN 118 in. TO BE
MACHINED FROM EDGES
6GR SPECIMEN
WHEN t EXCEEDS 1-1/2in. (38.1 mm), MACHINE THE MINIMUM AMOUNT
CUT ALONG THIS LINE. EDGE MAY NEEDED TO OBTAIN PLANE PARALLEL
BE OXYGEN CUT FACES (OPTIONAL)
t, in. T, in. t, mm T, mm
318 to I-Il2 t 9.5 to 38.1 t
>I-112 See Note 2 >38.1 See Note 2
Notes:
1. A longer specimen length may be necessary when using a wraparound type bending fixture or when
testing steel with a yield strength of 90 ksi (620 MPa) or more.
2. For plates over 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm) thick, cut the specimen into approximately equal strips with T
between 3/4 in. (19.0 mm) and 1-1/2 in. and tesf each strip.
3. t = plate or pipe thickness.
Figure 5.14 -Side Bend Specimens(see 5.10.1.4)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The cross-sectional area shaii be obtainedby multiply- gap. Root-bend and fillet-weld-soundness specimens
ing the width by the thickness. The tensile strength shall shall be placed with the root of the weld directed toward
be obtained by dividing the maximum load by the cross- the gap. Side-bend specimens shall be placed with that
sectional area. side showing the greater discontinuity, if any, directed
toward the gap.
5.11.2 MacroefchTest. The weld test specimens shall be The plunger shall force the specimen into the die until
prepared with a finish suitable for macroetch examina- the specimen becomes U-shaped. The weld and heat-
tion. A suitablesolution shall be used for etching to give affected zones shall be centered and completely within
a clear definition of the weld. the bent portion of the specimen after testing.
When using the wraparound jig, the specimen shall be
5.11.3 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Specimens. Each firmly clamped on one end so that there is no slidingof
specimen shall be bent in a bend test jig that meets the the specimen during the bending operation. The weld
requirements shown in Figures 5.31,5.32 or 5.33, or is and heat-affected zones shall be completely in the bent
substantiallyin accordance with those figures, provided portion of the specimen after testing. Test specimens
the maximum bend radius is not exceeded. Any con- shall be removed from the jig when the outer roll has
venient means may be used to move the plunger member been moved 180' from the starting point.
with relation to the die member.
The specimen shail be placed on the die member of the 5.11.4 Ali-Weld-Metal Tension Test. The test specimen
jig with the weld at midspan. Face-bend specimens shaii shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A370, Mech-
be placed with the face of the weld directed toward the anical Testing of Steel Products.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-II 7 2 m 0784265 0500Lbb 3 m
1lO/Qualification
1-112
I r
L I iLI
'I JFACEL
BEND BEND
318 in. TEST PLATE TEST PLATE OVER
318 in. THICK
(1) LONGITUDINALBEND SPECIMEN
I_ 6 MIN (SEE NOTE 1) RADIUS 118 MAX
_I /
t
NOTE2 r NOTE3
y -y318
/ 1, 1, 1 1 -
........
.......
......
...
"
'--r T
t MATERIALTO BE REMOVED 318 (PLATE) (PIPE)
FOR CLEANUP
FACE-BENDSPECIMEN
6MIN(SEENOTEl) _i RADIUS 1/8 MAX
I I
='I
NOTEZ y
..........
_..........
.........
.........
........
..........
.........
....
..........
..........
....
..........
..........
MATERIAL TO BE REMOVED
-4 I-
ri
318
t' ......
........
...-..
.....
(PLATE) (PIPE)
NOTE 3 318
ROOT-BENDSPECIMEN
(2) TRANSVERSEBEND SPECIMEN
I 318 I 10 I
Dimensions
Test weldment Test specimen width, in. (W)
Plate 1-112
Test pipe or tube 1
5 4 in. (100 mm) in diameter
Test plpe or tube 1-112 150
> 4 in. (100 mm) in diameter 200
Notes:
1. A longer specimen length may be necessary when using a wraparound type bending fixture or when
testing steel with a yield strength of 90 ksi (620 MPa) or more.
2. These edges may be oxygen-cut and may or may not be machined.
3. The weld reinforcement and backing, if any, shall be removed flush with the surface of the specimen
(see 3.6.3.).If a recessed backing is used, this surface may be machined to a depth not exceeding
the depth of the recess to remove the backing: in such case, the thickness of the finished specimen
shall be that specified above. Cut surfaces shall be smooth and parallel.
4. t = plate or pipe thickness.
5. When the thickness of the test plate is less than 3/8 in. (9.5mm), use the nominal thickness for face
and root bends.
Figure 5.15 -Face- and Root-Bend Specimens (see 5.10.1.4)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.3 92 m 0784265 0500367
~.
5 m
Qualification/ 111
Table 5.3
Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified - Procedure
Qualification: Fillet Welds (see 5.10.3)
Test Specimens Required
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Ail-Weld-
Macro- Metal Side- Sizes Qualified
Number of etch Tension Bend
Test Fillet Welds per 5.10.3 (see Fig. (see Fig. Plate/Pipe FilIet
Specimen Size Procedure 5.11.2 5.13) 5.14) Thickness Size
Single-pass, max 1in each position 3 faces - - Unlimited Maxtested
Plate size to be used in to be used single-pass
T-test construction and smaüer
(Fig. 5.16)
Multiple-pass, min 1 in each position 3 faces - - unlimited Mintested
sue to be used in tobeused multiple-pass
construction and larger
Single pass, max 1in each position 3 faces (except - - Unlimited Maxtested
Pipe size to be used in to be used (see for 4F Bi 5F, 4 single pass
T-test2 construction Table 5.4) faces req’d) and smaller
(Fig. 5.17)
Multiple pass min 1in each position 3 faces (except - - Unlimited Min tested
size to be used in to be used (see for 4F Bi 5F,4 multiplepass
construction Table 5.4) faces req’d) and larger
Groove test3 - 1 in 1G position - 1 2 QualXes welding
(Fig. 5.18) consumablesto be used in
T-test above
Notes:
I 1. The minimum thickness qualified is 1/8 in. (3.2 mm).
2. AU welded test plates shail be visually inspected (see 5.12.7).
3. See Table 5.1-2for pipe diameter qualification.
4. When the welding consumablesused do not conform to theprequalifieáprovisionsof 5.1.1, and aweldingprocedureusing the proposed welding
consumableshasnot beenestablished by thecontractor inaccordancewitheither5.10.1 or5.10.2, acompletejointpenetrationgrooveweldtesf plate
shall be welded in accordance with 5.10.1.
5.11.5 Nondestructive Testing. Radiographic and ultra- surface shall contain no discontinui€ies exceeding the
sonic testing procedures and techniques shall be in following dimensions:
accordance with the requirements of section 6, Part B or (1) 1/8 in. (3 mm) measured in any direction on the
C, as applicable, for test welds in plate, and section 10, surface.
Part E or F, as applicable, for tubular test welds. (2) 318 in (10 mm)-the sum of the greatest dimen-
sions of alldiscontinuities exceeding 1/32 in. (1 mm), but
less than or equal to 1/8 in. (3 mm).
5.12 Test Results Required (3) 1/4 in. (6 mm)-the maximum comer crack,
except when that corner crack resulted from visible slag
The requirements for the test results shall be as inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the
follows: 1/8 in. (3 mm) maximum shall apply.
Specimenswith comer cracks exceeding 1/ 4 in. (6 mm)
5.12.1 Reduced-Section Tension Test. The tensile with no evidence of slag inclusions or other fusion type
streneth shall be no less than the minimum of the sueci- I
discontinuities shall be disregarded, and a replacement
fied tksile range of the base metal used. test specimen from the original weldment shall be tested.
5.12.2 Root-. Face-. and Side-Bend Tests. The convex 5.12.3 Macroetch Test. For acceptable qualification,
surface of the’bend &st specimen shall be visually exam- the macroetch test specimen, when inspected visually,
~
ined for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the shall conform to the following requirements:
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 078'4265 0500Lb8 7 m
112/Qualification
DISCARD
MACROETCHTEST
SPECIMEN
INCHES MILLIMETERS
Weld Weld
size T I min" T2 min' size T I min* T2 min*
3116 112 3116 5 12.7 4.8
1I4 314 1I4 6 19.0 6.4
5116 1 5116 8 25.4 8.0
318 1 318 10 25.4 9.5
1I2 1 1I2 13 25.4 12.7
518 1 518 16 25.4 15.9
314 1 314 19 25.4 19.0
>3/4 1 1 719 25.4 25.4
* Note: Where the maximum plate thickness used in production is
less than the value shown in the table, the maximum thickness of
the production pieces may be substituted for T I and T2.
Figure 5.16 -Fillet Weld Soundness Tests for Procedure Qualification (see 5.10.3.1)
(1) Partial joint penetration groove welds shall have 5.12.4 All-Weld-Metal Tension Test (Electroslag an
the designated weld size. Electrogas). The mechanical properties shall be no less
(2) Fillet welds shall have fusion to the root of the than those specified in 4.16.
joint, but not necessarily beyond. 5.12.5 Nondestructive Testing. For acceptable qualifi-
(3) Minimum leg size shall meet the specified fillet cation, the weld, as revealed by radiographic or ultra-
weld size. sonic testing, shall conform to the requirements of 8.15,
(4) The partial joint penetration groove welds and 9.25, or 10.17, whichever is applicable.
fillet welds shall have the following:
(a) no cracks 5.12.6 Visual Inspection -Pipe and Tubing. For
(b) thorough fusion between adjacent layers of acceptable qualification, a pipe weld, when inspected
weld metals and between weld metal and base metal visually, shall conform to the following requirements:
(c) weld profiles conformingto intended detail, but (1) The weld shali be free of cracks.
with none of the variations prohibited Ui 3.6 (2) All craters shall be filled to the full cross section of
(d) no undercut exceeding 1/ 32 in. (1 mm) the weld.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 9 2 m 0784265 0500Ib9 9 ~~
Qualification/113
3 in.
(75 mm)
I
-
DETAIL A PIPE TO PIPE ASSEMBLY
r START AND STOP OF WELD
MACROETCH TEST
SPECIMEN
SEE TABLE 5.4 FOR POSITION REQUIREMENTS
Note: Pipe shall be of sufficient thickness to
prevent melt-through.
TOP
1F ROTATED, 2F, 2F ROTATED 4F AND 5F
LOCATION OF TEST SPECIMENS ON WELDED PIPE - PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
FILLET SIZE = t
LTM, T = WALL THICKNESS
DETAIL B - PIPE TO PLATE ASSEMBLY
-
\
START AND STOP OF WELD
MACROETCH TEST
SPECIMEN
SEE TABLE 5.4 FOR POSITION REQUIREMENTS
Note: Pipe shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent melt-through.
Figure 5.17 -Pipe Fillet Weld Soundness Test -Procedure Qualification(see 5.10.3.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
114/ Qualification
Table 5.4
Procedure Qualification-Type and Position Limitations (see 5.10.5)
Type of Weld and Position of Welding Qualified*
Qualification Test Piate' Pipe'
~
Plate or Pipe
Weld Positions** Groove Fillet Groove Fillet
Plate-groove 1G F
2G H
Complete joint penetration 3G V
4G OH
Plate-groove 1G F
2G H
Partial joint penetration 3G V
4G OH
Plate-fillet IF F
2F F,H
3F V
4F OH
Pipe-groove 1G Rotated F F F F
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2G F,H F,H F,H F,H
Complete joint penetration 5G F,V,OH F,V,OH F,V,OH F,V,OH
6G F,H,V,OH F,H,V,OH F,H,V,OH F,H,V,OH
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
6GR Only All3 All All4.5 All (see 5.10.3.3
and 10.12)
6GR plus sample All3 Au AllB.5 All
joints or mock-up
per 10.12.3.3
Pipe-fillet IF Rotated F
2F F,H
2F Rotated F,H (Note 6)
4F F,H,OH
5F All
Notes:
1. QuaMies for a welding axis with an essentially straight line and specificallyincludes plates, wrought shapes, fabricated sections, and rectangular
fabricated sectionsand rectangular tubing, and pipe or tubing over 24 in. (610mm) in diameter, except for completejoint penetration welds in tubular
T-, Y-, and K-connections. This includes welding along a line parallel to the axis of round pipe.
2. Qualifies for fdet and groove welds in all positions except for complete joint penetration groove welding of T-,Y-, and K-connections.
3. Limited to prequalified joint details. See 2.9.1 and Figure 2.4; also 2.10.1 and Figure 2.5.
4. Qualifies for T-i Y-, and K-connections subject to limitations of 10.12, and any p&palifiedjoint detail, see 2.9.1 and Figure 2.4; also 2.10.1 and
Figure 2.5.
5. Qualificationlimited to groove angles 30" orgreater. Does not qualify for buttjoints weldedfrom oneside without backing. See 10.12.3.1,2.10.1
and Figure 2.5.
6. Quaiiîïes for horizontal fdet welds on rotated pipes only.
*Positions of welding: F flat, H horizontal, V = vertical, OH overhead.
**SeeFigs. 5.8.1.1,5.8.1.2,and5.8.1.3.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0784265
QuaMication/ 115
- DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) - shall conform to the requirements for visual inspection
in 9.25.1, exceptthat the undercut shall be no more than
1/32 in. (1 mm).
5.13 Records
Records of the test results shall be kept by the manu-
facturer or contractor and shall be available to those
authorized to examine them.
10 in.
(255 mm)
5.14 Retests
If any one specimen of all those tested f& to meet the
test requirements, two retests for that particular type of
test specimen may be performed with specimens cut
from the same procedure qualification material. The
results of both test specimens must meet the test
requirements. For material over 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm)
thick, failure of a specimen shall require testing of all
specimens of the same type from two additional loca-
tions in the test material.
.-e Ez
Part c
r Welder Qud'ìcation
5.15 General
The qualification tests described in Part C are spe-
cially devised tests to determine the welder's ability to
-
Figure 5.18 Location of Test Specimen on produce sound welds. The qualification tests are not
intended to be used as a guide for weIding during actual
Welded Test Plate 1 in. (25.4 mm) Thick-
Consumables Verification for Fillet Weld construction. The latter shall be performed h accord-
ance with the requirements of the welding procedure
Procedure Qualification (see 5.10.3.2) specification.
(3) The face of the weld shallbe flush with the surface
of the base metal, and the weld shall merge smoothly 5.16 Limitation of Variables
with the base metal. Undercut shall not exceed 1/32 in.
(1 mm). Weld reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in. For the qualification of a welder, the following rules
(3 mm). shall apply:
(4) The root of the weld shall be inspected, and there 5.16.1 Qualification established with any one of the
shall be no evidence of cracks, incomplete fusion, or steels permitted by this Code shall be considered as
inadequatejoint penetration. A concave root surface is qualificationto weld or tack weld any of the other steels.
permitted within the limits shown below, provided the
total weld thickness is equal to or greater thanthat of the 5.16.2 A welder shall be qualified for each process used.
base metal. A separate qualificationis required for the short circuit-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(5) The maximum root surface concavity shall be ing mode of metal transfer of GMAW process, when
i/ 16 in. (1.6 mm) and the maximum melt-through shall used.
be 1/8 in. (3 mm). For T-, Y-, and K-connections, melt-
through at the root is considered desirable and shall not 5.16.3 A welder qualified for shielded metal arc welding
be cause for rejection. with an electrodeidentified in the followingtable shall be
considered quaWied to weld or tack weId with any other
-
5.12.7 Visual Inspection Plate. For acceptable quali- electrode in the same group designation and with any
fication, the welded test plate, when inspected visually, electrode listed in a numerically lower group designation.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 W 07842b5 0500372 9 W
116/Qualification
SIDE-BEND
SPECIMEN 7
1 DIRECTION OF
\ ROLLING (OPTIONAL)
in. mm
1 I4 6
-
318 10
-
6 MIN
. -w/-,5
1 25
3 75
Notes:
5 125
w
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I.When radiography is used for testing, no tack
welds shall be in test area. 6 150
-
2. The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. min.
to 3/8in. m a . ; backing width shall be 3 in.
min when not removed for radiography,
otherwise 1 in. min.
Figure 5.19 -Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness-Welder Qualification (see 5.18)
5.16.7 When the plate is in the vertical position, or the
Group AWS pipe or tubing is in the 5G or 6G position, a change in the
Designation Electrode Classification*
direction of welding shall require requalification.
F4 EXX15, EXX16, EXX18, EXX15-X,
EXX16-X, EXX18-X 5.16.8 The omission of backing in complete joint pene-
F3 EXX10, EXX11, EXX10-X, EXX11-X tration welds welded from one side shall require re-
F2 EXX12, EXX13, EXX14, EXX13-X qualification.
F1 EXX20, E m , EXX27, EXX28,
EXX20-X, EXX27-X 5.16.9 A change in the base metal thickness beyond the
range qualified shall require requalification (see Table
*The letters “XX” used in the classification designation in this table 5.6).
stand for the various strength levels (60,70,80,90,100,110, and 120)
of deposited weld metal.
5.17 Qualification Tests Required
5.16.4 A welder qualified with an approved electrode
and shielding medium combination shall be considered 5.17.1 Plate and Rolled Structural Shapes
qualified to weld or tack weld with any other approved 5.17.1.1 The welder qualification test for manual and
electrode and shielding medium combination for the proc- semiautomatic welding shall be as follows:
II ess used in the qualification test, except for GMAW-S. (1) Groove weld qualification tests for plate of un-
5.16.5 A change in the position of welding to one for limited thickness in accordance with 5.18
which the welder is not already qualified shall require (2) Groove weld qualification tests for plate of limited
requalification. thickness in accordance with -.-<
5 19
(3) Fillet weld qualificationtests (only) in accordance
5.16.6 A change from one diameter wall pipe grouping with 5.22.1.1
shown in Table 5.6 to another shall require requalifi- (4) Plug weld qualification tests for plug welds only in
cation. accordance with 5.22.2
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 07842b5
Qualification/ 117
5.17.1.2 Procedure Qualification for Plate and Rolled (6.4 mm) min to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) max by 1 in. (25 mm)
Structural Shapes. A welder may also be qualified by min. The minimumlengthof thewelding groove shall be
welding a satisfactory procedure qualification test plate, 5 in. (130 mm).
asspecifiedin5.10.1, thatmeets therequirementsof5.12.
The welder is thereby qualified to weld plate (square or
rectangular tubing within the limitations of Table 10.5) 5.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification
with the process and in the test position used for proce-
dure qualification. The welder is also qualified for slot Test for Plate of Limited Thickness
welding for the process and position tested. The thick- The groove detail shall be 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) plate,
ness range qualified for is specified in Table 5.6 (I), Tests single- V-groove, 45" included angle, 1/4in. (6 mm) root
on Plate, opening with backing (see Figure 5.21). For horizontal
5.17.2 Pipe or Tubing position qualifcation, the joint detail may, at the con-
tractor's option, be single-bevel-groove, 45" groove
5.17.2.1 Welder qualification tests for manual and angle, 1/4 in. root opening with backing (see Figure
semiautomaticwelding shall be as follows: 5.22). Backing shall be 114 in. (6.4 mm) min to 3/8 in.
(1) Groove weld qualification tests for butt joints on max by 3 in. (75 mm) min, if radiographic testing is
pipe or square or rectangular tubing in accordance with used without removal of backing. For mechanicaltesting
5.20. or for radiographictesting after the backing is removed,
(2) Groove weld qualification tests for T-, Y-, or K- it shall be 1/4 in. min to 3/8 in. rnax by 1in. (25 mm).
connections on pipe in accordance with 5.21.1. Groove The minimum length of welding groove shall be 7 in.
weld qualification tests for T-, Y-, or K-connections on (180 mm).
square or rectangular tubing shall be in accordance with
5.21.1 and 5.21.2.
(3) Groove weld qualification tests for butt joints on 5.20 Groove Weld Qualification Test
square or rectangular tubing on flat plate in accordance for Butt Joints on Pipe or Square
with 5.18 or 5.19.
(4) Fillet weld qualification tests for fillet welds, in or Rectangular Tubing
accordance with 5.22.1.2. Thejoint detail shail be that shown in a qualifiedjoint
5.17.2.2 Procedure Qualification for Pipe and Tubing. welding procedure specification for a single-welded pipe
A welder may also be qualified by welding a satisfactory butt joint weld or shall be as follows: pipe diameter-wall
procedure qualification test pipe, without backing, as thickness as required, single-V-groove, 60" included
specified in 5.10.1, that meets the requirements of 5.12. angle, 1/8 in. (3 mm) max root face and root opening
The welder is thereby qualified to weld pipe and tubing without backing strip (see Figure 5.23), or single-V-
with the process and in the test position used for proce- groove, 60" included angle and suitable root opening
dure qualification. The welder is also qualified for slot with backing (see Figure 5.24).
welding for the process and position tested. The diameter
and wall thickness ranges qualified for shall be as speci-
fied in Table 5.6(2), Tests on Pipe and Tubing. 5.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for
T-,Y-, or &Connections on Pipe
or Square or Rectangular Tubing
5.18 Groove Weld Plate Qualification 5.21.1 Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing. Thejoint
detail shail be as follows: single-bevel, 37-1/2" included
Test for Plate of Unlimited angle with bevel on pipe or tube at least 1/2 in. (12.7 mm)
Thickness thick; the square edge pipe or tube shall be at least
3/ 16 in. (5 mm) thicker than the beveled pipe thickness;
The joint details shall be as follows: 1 in. (25.4 mm) i/16 in. (1.6 mm) rnax root face and 1/8 in. (3 mm) root
plate, single-V-groove, 45" included angle, 114 in. opening. A restrictionring shall be placed on the thicker
(6 mm) root opening with backing (see Figure 5.19). For material, within 112 in. (13 mm) of the joint and shall
horizontal position qualification, the joint detail may, extend at least 6 in. (150 mm) beyond the surface of the
at the contractor's option, be as follows: single-bevel- pipe or tube. (See Figure 5.25.) Test spechens for side
groove, 45" groove angle, 1/4 in. root opening with bends shall be taken as indicated in Figure 5.30 and
backing (see Figure 5.20). Backing shall be 1/4 in. machined to be standard specimens with parallel sides.
(6.4 mm) min to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) by 3 in. (75 mm) if
radiographictesting is used without removal of backing. 5.21.2 Comer Macroeteh Test Joint for Square or Rec-
For mechanical testing or for radiographic testing after tanguiar Tubing. The joint detail shall be as follows:
the backing is removed, the backing shall be 1/4 in. single-bevel, 37-1/2" included angle with bevel on the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 m 0784265 0500374 2 m
118/ Qualification
DIRECTION
OF ROLLING
(OPTIONAL)
!
- SIDE-BEND
SPECIMEN
-
in.
-
1 I4
1I
318
SIDE-BEND
SPECIMEN 1
3 75
-
Notes: 5 125
-
1. When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be
in test area. 6 150
2. The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. min to 3/8 in. m a ;
backing width shall be 3 in. min when not removed for
radiography, otherwise 1 in. min.
Figure 5.20 -Optional Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness-Horizontal
Position -Welder Qualification (see 5.18)
tube at least 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) thick, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) tion shall also be valid for joints having a dihedral angle
max root face and 1/ 8 in. (3 mm) root opening. This tube !P of 60' and greater.
shall be welded to a plate 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) minimum (2) For joints having a dihedral angle Y of 60" or
thickness and extending at least 6 in. (150 mm) beyond greater, but not exceeding 135O, the welder shall weld a
the surface of the tube. (See Figure 5.26.) Four (4) test plate according to Option 1 or Option 2, depending
macroetch test specimens shall be removed from the upon the contractor's choice, as follows:
corners of the weld as indicated in Figure 5.26. (a) Option 1. Weld a T-test plate in accordance
with Figure 5.27.
(b) Option 2. Weld a soundness test plate in accord-
5.22 Qualification Tests for Fillet Welds ance with Figure 5.28.
Only and Plug Welds Only 5.22.1.2 For Pipe or Tubing. For fillet weld qualifica-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5.22.1 Fillet Weld Qualification Tests for Fillet Welds tion only:
(1) For fillet welds in T-, Y-, or K-connections having
OdY a dihedral angle Y of less than 60°, qualification tests
5.22.1.1 Plate and Rolled Structural Shapes. The fol- shall be as required by 5.20 for the 5G position. The
lowing is for fillet weld qualification only: qualificationshall also be valid for connections having a
(1) For filet welds between parts having a dihedral dihedral angle Y of 60" and greater.
angle !P of less than 60", the welder shali weld a groove (2) For T-, Y-, or K-connections having a dihedral
weld test plate as required by 5.18 or 5.19. This qualifica- angle !Pof 60° or greater, the welder shall weld test plates
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
a
Qualification/119
FACE-BEND
SPECIMEN7 ,di
[
ROOT-BEND
SPECIMEN
DIRECTION OF
ROLLING (OPTLONAL)
318
150
180
Notes:
1. When radiography is used for testing, no tack
welds shall be in test area.
2. The backina thickness shall be li4 in. min
\ \YI
to 318 in. ;ax; backing width shall be 3 in.
min when not removed for radiography,
u
otherwise 1 in. min.
Figure 5.21 -Test Plate for Limited Thickness-All Positions-
Welder Qualification (see 5.19)
DIRECTION
6 OF ROLLING
(OPTIONAL)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Notes:
1. When radiography is used for testing, no fack
welds shall be in fest area.
2. The backing thickness shall be 114 in. min
to 3/8 in. m a ; backingwidth shall be 3 in.
FACE-BENDA
SPECIMEN
min when not removed for radiography,
otherwise 1 in. min.
I 7 I 180 I
I Figure 5.22 -Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness-Horizontal
Position -Welder Qualification (see 5.19)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 07842b5 0 5 0 0 3 7 6 b W
120/Qualification
5.23.1.2 Qualificationin the 2G (horizontal) position
qualifies for flat and horizontal position groove and flat
and horizontal position fillet welding of plate, pipe, and
tubing.
5.23.1.3 Qualification in the 3G (vertical) position
qualifiesfor flat, horizontal, and vertical position groove
--/ 1/8 in. (3 mrn) i- 118 MAX welding of plate, pipe and tubing; flat, horizontal, and
MAX vertical position fillet welding of plate; and flat and
horizontal position fillet welding of pipe and tubing.
-
Figure 5.23 Tubular Butt Joint Welder - 5.23.1.4 Qualification in the 4G (overhead) position
-
Qualification Without Backing (see 5.20) qualifies'for flat and overhead position groove and flat,
horizontal, and overhead position fiillet welding of plate;
and flat position fillet welding of pipe and tubing.
5.23.2 Groove Pipe Test Welds. See Figure 5.4.
5.23.2.1 Qualification in the 1G (pipe horizontal
rotated) position qualifies for flat position groove weld-
ing of pipe, tubing, and plate; flat and horizontal posi-
tion fillet welding of pipe and tubing; and flat and
horizontal position fillet welding of plate.
5.23.2.2 Qualification in the 2G (pipe vertical) posi-
SUITABLE tion quawies for flat and horizontal position groove and
ROOT OPENING flat and horizontal position fillet welding of pipe, tubing,
and plate.
-
Figure 5.24 Tubular Butt Joint Welder -
-
Qualification With Backing (see 5.20)
5.23.2.3 Qualification in the 5G (pipe horizontal
fixed) position qualifies for flat, vertical, and overhead
position groove and flat, vertical, and overhead position
in the 3F and 4F positions according to Option 1 or fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate.
Option 2, depending upon the contractor's choice, as 5.23.2.4 Qualification in the 6G (inclined fixed) posi-
follows: tion qualifiesfor all position groove and all position fillet
(a) Option 1. Weld a T-test plate in accordance welding of pipe, tubing, and plate, except completejoint
with Figure 5.27. penetration groove welds in T-, Y-, and K-connections.
(b) Option 2. Weld a soundnesstest plate in accor-
dance with Figure 5.28. 5.23.2.5 Qualificationfor T-, Y-, or K-connections in
(3) For fillet welds in other than T-,Y-, or K- the 6GR (inclined fixed) position qualities for complete
connections, the qualification test assembly shall be as joint penetration groove T-, Y-, or K-connections and
shown in Figure 5.17, Details A or B. groove and fillet welding in all positions of pipe, tubing,
and plate, except for butt joints welded from one side
5.22.2 Plug Weld Qualification Tests for Plug Welds without backing. Qualificationslimited to groove angles
Only. Thejoint shallconsist ofa3/4h. (19mm)diame- 30" or greater. Macroetch test, Figure 5.26, is also
ter hole in a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) thick plate with a 3/8 in. required for complete joint penetration T-, Y-, and K-
minimum thickness backing plate. (See Figure 5.29). connections using square or rectangular tubing.
5.23.3 Füiet Weld Test-Plate. See Figure 5.5.
5.23 Position of Test Welds 5.23.3.1 Qualification in the 1F (flat) position quali-
See Table 5.5. fies for flat position fillet welding of plate, pipe, and
tubing.
5.23.1 Groove Plate Test Welds (illustrated in Figure
5.3) 5.23.3.2 Qualification in the 2F (horizontal) position
qualifies for flat and horizontal position fillet welding of
5.23.1.1 Qualification in the 1G (flat) position quali- plate, pipe, and tubing.
fies for flat position groove welding of plate, pipe, and
tubing; flat and horizontal position fillet welding of 5.23.3.3 Qualification in the 3F (vertical) position
plate; and flat and horizontal position fillet welding of qualifies for flat, horizontal, and vertical position fillet
pipe and tubing. welding of plate.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 = 0784265 0500377 8 ~ ~~~
Qualification/121
A\
6MIN
A ,- RESTRICTION RING
3/16
12.7
150
112 MAX
Figure 5.25 -Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Pipe or
-
Square or Rectangular Tubing Welder Qualification (see 5.21)
MACROETCH
TEST SPECIMEN
LOCATIONS
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TEST SPECIMEN
LOCATIONS
6MIN
Figure 5.26- Corner Macroetch Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections
on Square or Rectangular Tubing for Complete Joint Penetration -
Welder Qualification (see 5.21)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
122/Qualification
DISCARD
1O0
150
200
MACROETCHSPECIMEN
(ETCH INTERIOR FACE)
1
Note:
1. Plate thickness and dimensions are minimum.
Figure 5.27 -Filiet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate -Welder
Qualification -Option 1 (see 5.22.1.1)
5.23.3.4 Qualification in the 4F (overhead) position fillet welding of plate; and fillet welding of pipe in the
qualifies for flat, horizontal, and overhead position fillet inclined rotated, horizontal rotated, and horizontal fixed
welding of plate. and overhead fixed positions.
5.23.4 Fillet Weld Test -Pipe. See Figure 5.6. 5.23.4.5 Qualification in the 4F (overhead fied) and
5F (multiple position, fixed) positions qualifies for fillet
5.23.4.1 Qualification in the lF(pipe inclined, rotated) welding of plate and pipe in all positions.
position qualifies for fillet welding of plate and pipe in
the flat position. 5.23.5 Test Plate Quaiification for Pipe and Tubing.
Qualification with a groove plate test weld in the 1G
5.23.4.2 Qualification in the 2F (pipe axis vertical (flat) position, 2G (horizontal)position, or 3G (vertical)
fixed) position qualifies for flat and horizontal position position shall also qualify the welder for welding pipe or
fillet welding of plate; and fillet welding of pipe in the tubing over 24 in. (610 mm) in diameter in the positions
inclined rotated, horizontalfixed, and horizontalrotated shown in Table 5.5. This qualification shall apply to
positions. welding butt joints in pipe or tubing from one side with
5.23.4.3 Qualification in the 2F Rotated (pipe axis backing or welding from both sides with back gouging.
vertical, rotated) position qualifies for flat and horizon-
tal position fillet welding of plate; and filet welding of
pipe in the inclined rotated and horizontal rotated
positions. 5.24 Base Metal
5.23.4.4 Qualification in the 4F (overhead fixed) posi- The base metal used shall comply with 10.2 or the
tion qualifies for flat, horizontal, and overhead position welding procedure specification.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 ? 0784265 0500379 ~
3 ?~
Qualification/123
- DIRECTION OF ROLLING
IOPTIONALI
-
~~
15/16 24
THESE EDGES MAY BE OXYGEN-CUTAND
MAY OR MAY NOT BE MACHINED
1-112
L
75
RADIUS 118 MAX
THE PORTION BETWEEN 180
FILLET WELDS MAY BE
WELDED IN ANY POSITION
AT LEAST 318 x 2 in.
IF RADIOGRAPHY IS
MAXIMUMSIZE SINGLE USED, THEN USE AT
PASS FILLET WELD 318 in. LEAST 318 x 3 in.
BACKING
THE BACKING SHALL BE IN INTIMATE
CONTACT WITH THE BASE METAL.
THE WELD REINFORCEMENTAND THE BACKING
I SHALL BE REMOVED FLUSH WITH THE BASE
- - /?
\ METAL (SEE 3.6.3).THERMAL CUlTING MAY BE
\L USED FOR THE REMOVAL OF THE MAJOR PART
OF THE BACKING, PROVIDED AT LEAST 118 in.
OF ITS THICKNESS IS LEFT TO BE REMOVED
BY MACHININGOR GRINDING.
Figure 5.28 -Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate Welder -
-
Qualification Option 2 (see 5.22.1.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - 1 9 2 W 07842b5 0500180 B W
124/ Qualification
i It 314 r 318MIN
It 3/8 MIN
MACROETCHTEST
SPECIMEN
I
r - - - - - i - - - --I-
-
MACROETCH SPECIMEN
(ETCH INTERIOR FACE)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I l I 75
CUTLINE
-------
PLUG WELD TEST PLATE
(MACROETCH BOTH INTERIOR FACES)
Figure 5.29 -Plug Weld Macroetch Test Plate -Welder Qualification (see 5.22.2)
5.25 Joint Welding Procedure 5.26 Test Specimens: Number, Type,
5.25.1 The welder shall follow ajoint welding procedure and Preparation
specification applicable to the joint details given in 5.18, 5.26.1 The type and number of test specimens that must
5.19,5.20,5.21, or 5.22, whichever is applicable. For butt be tested to qualify a welder by mechanical testing are
joints with complete joint penetration groove welds in shown in Table 5.6 together with the range of thickness
tubular members, welded from one side without backing, that is qualified for use in construction by the thickness
the welder shall follow a welding procedure specification of the test plate, pipe, or tubing used in making the
applicable to the joint detail shown in Figure 5.23. For qualification. Radiographictesting of the test weld may
complete joint penetration T-, Y- and K-connections in be used at the contractor’s option in lieu of mechanical
tubular members welded from one side without backing, testing.
the welder shall follow awelding procedure specification
applicable to the joint details shown in Figure 5.26 for 5.26.2 Guided-bend test specimens sball be prepared by
circular sections or Figures 5.25 and 5.26 for square or cutting the test plate, pipe, or tubing as shown in Figures
rectangular sections. 5.19,5.20,5.21,5.22,5.28, and 5.30, whichever are appli-
cable, to form specimens approximately rectangular in
5.25.2 Weld cleaning shall be done with the test weld cross section. The specimens shallbe prepared for testing
in the same position as the welding position being in accordance with Figures 5.12 through 5.15, whichever
qualified. is applicable.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500181 ~
T
~
m
Qualification/ 125
Table 5.5
Welder Qualification - Type and Position Limitations1(see 5.23)
Type of Weld and Position of Welding Quatified
~ ~~ ~~
QualZcation Test Plate Pipe or Box Tubing
Plate or Pipe
Weld Positions* Groove3*4 Fillet Groove3s4 Fillet
Plate-groove 1G F F, H ~ 5 , 6 F, H
2G F, H F, H (F,H)5'6 F, H
3G F, H, V F, H, v (F, H, v
536 F, H
4G F, OH F, H, OH (F,oH)~,~ F
3G+4G All Au Au536 + partiai joint All
penetration box
T-, Y-, K-connections
Platefillet7 1F
2F
3F
4F
3F+4F
Plate-plug8 Welder qualifications for plug welds q u a y only for the positions in which they are tested,
Pipe-groove 1G Rotated F F, H F F, H
2G F, H F, H (F, HI6 F, H
5G F, V, OH F, V, OH (F,V,OH)ó F, V, OH
6G Au6 All Au6 Au
2G+5G Au6 All All6 All
6GR (Figure 5.25) Au Au A u 9 + circular Au
T-, Y-,K-connections*O
6GR (Figure 5.25 All Au AU9 + circular & box Au
+ 5.26) T-, Y-, K-connectionslo
Pipe-fiet 1F Rotated F F
2F F, H F, H
2F Rotated F, H F, H
4F F, H, OH F, H, OH
4F+5F All Au
Notes:
1. Not applicable for welding operator qualification (see 5.33.5).
2. See Figures 5.3,5.4,5.5, and 5.6.
3. Groove weld qualification also qualifies slot welds for the test positions indicated.
4. Includes both partial and completejoint penetration groove welds.
5. Only qualified for tubulan over 24 in. (610 mm) in diameter with backing or back gouging.
6. Not qualified for complete joint penetration groove welds for T-, Y-,and Kannections.
7. Not qualified for fillet welds between parts having a dihedral angle (Y)of 60" or less (see 5.22.1.1(1)).
8. Plug welds q u w for plug welding only (see 5.22.2).
9. Not qualified for completejoint penetration butt joints welded from one side without backing.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10. Not qualified for partial or completejointpenetrationgroove welds inT-, Y-,and K-connectionshavinggroove(acute) angles less than 30°. See
10.12.3.2, 10.12.3.5, and Figure 10.10 (Acute Angle Heel Test).
5.26.3 The fdet weld break and plug weld macroetch 5.26.4 The plug weld macroetch test specimen shall be
test specimens shall be cut from the testjoint, as shownin cut from the test joint as shown in Figure 5.29. The face
Figures 5.27 and 5.29. The face of the macroetch test of the macroetch test specimen shaií be smooth for
specimen shall be smooth for etching. etching.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI.1 92 W 0784265 0500I82 I W
126/ Qualification
5.26.5 If radiographic testing is used. in lieu of the pre- 5.27 Method of Testing Specimens
scribed bend tests, the weld reinforcement need not be 5.27.1 Root-, Face-, or Side-Bend Specimens. Each
ground or otherwise smoothed for inspection unless its specimen shall be bent in a bend test jig that meets the
surface irregularities or juncture with the base metal requirements shown in Figures 5.31, 5.32 or 5.33, or is
would cause objectionable weld discontinuities to be substantiallyin accordancewith those figures, provided
obscured in the radiograph. If the backing is removed for the maximum bend radius is not exceeded. Any conve-
radiography, the root shall be ground flush (see 3.6.3) nient means may be used to move the plunger member
with the base metal. with relation to the die member.
The specimen shall be placed on the die member of the
5.26.6 The corner macroetch test joint for T-, Y-, and jig with the weld at midspan. Face-bend specimens shall
K-connections on square or rectangular tubing in Figure be placed with the face of the weld directed toward the
5.26 shall have four macroetch test specimens cut from gap. Root-bend and fillet weld soundness specimens
the weld corners at the locations shown in Figure 5.26. shall be placed with the root of the weld directed toward
One face from each comer specimen shall be smooth for the gap. Side-bend specimens shall be placed with that
etching. -
side showing the greater discontinuity, if any, directed
If the welder tested on a 6GR coupon (Figure 5.25) toward the gap.
using square .or rectangular tubing, the four required The plunger shall force the specimen into the die until
corner macroetch test specimens may be cut from the the specimen becomes U-shaped. The weld and heat-
comers of the 6GR coupon in a manner similar to Figure affected zones shall be centered and completely within
5.26. One face from each corner specimen shall be the bent portion of the specimen after testing.
smooth for etching. When using a wraparound jig, the specimen shall be
firmly clamped on one end so that the specimen does not
slide during the bending operation. The weld and heat-
5.26.7 Aging. When required by the filler metal specifi- affected zones shall be completely within the bent por-
cation applicable to weld metal being tested, fully welded tion of the specimen after testing. Test specimens shall be
test specimens may be aged at temperatures up to 275" F removed from the jig when the outer roll has been moved
(135OC). 180° from the starting point.
Table 5.6
Number and Type of Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified -
Welder and Welding Operator Qualification (see 5.26.1)
(Dimensions in Inches)
(1) Test on Plate
Number of Specimens
Thickness of T-
Bend Tests*
Type of Test Plate (T) Visual Joint Macro- Plate Thickness
Weld as Welded,& Inspection Face Root Side .Break etch Test Qualified, in.
Groove 318 Yes 1 1 - - - 118 to 314 max3
Groove 318 <
-l YeS - - 2 - - 1/8 to 2T max3
Groove 1 or over Yes - - 2 - - 118toUnlimited3
~~~~
Fillet Option No. 1 * 112 Yes - - - 1 1 118 to Unlimited
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Fillet Option No. 22 318 Yes - 2 - - - 118 to Unlimited
Plug 318 Yes - - - - 2 118 to Unlimited
~~ ~ ~~
Notes:
1. See Figure 5.27 or 5.36 as applicable.
2. See Figure 5.28 or 5.37 as applicable.
3. Also qualifies for welding f i e t welds on material of unlimited thickness.
*Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test plate may be made in lieu of the bend test. (See 5.3.2.)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Qualification/127
Table 5.6 (continued)
(Dimensions in Inches)
(2) Tests on Pipe or 'iùbing
Number of Specimens
Pipe or Tubing Plate, Pipe
Size, All Positions Except 5G, 6G and 6GR or Tube
as Welded 5G, 6G and 6GR Positions Only Wau Thickness2
Quaiifed, in.
Nominal
Pipe Size Pipe or Tube
Typeof or Nominal Visual Face Root Side Face Root Side SkeQualified,
Weld Diam, in. Thickness Inspection Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend in. Min Max
2 Sch. 80
Groove or Yes 1 1 - 2 2 - 4 or 118 0.674
3 Sch. 40 smailer
6 Sch. lu)
Groove or YeS - - 2 - - 4 4 or 3/16 Unlimited
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8 Sch. 80 larger
Groove Per Fig. 5.25 Yes - - - - - 4 T-,Y-, mdK-
COMectiOns
16 20.500 3/16 Unlimited
with branch
members
Job Size Pipe or Tubing 24in.
Groove 54 b Y Yes 1 1 - 2 2 - 314 through 4 118 0.674
Groove >4 <3/8 YeS 1 1 - 2 2 - 112 test diam 118 0.674
or 4 min3
Groove >4 2318 Yes - - 2 - - 4 1/2testdiam 3/16 Unlimited
or 4 min3
Nominal
Pipe Size
Type of or Nominal Visual Fillet Macroetch Pipe or Tube Wail Thickness
Weld Diam,in. Thickness Inspection Weld Break Test Size Qualifed Quaiified, in.
Groove Per Fig. 5.26 YeS - 4 Comers of Unlimifed5
T-, Y-,and K-
box coMecti0ns
2 Sch 80
or any except
Fillet 2 Sch 40 YeS 14 1 T-, Y-, and K- unlimited
or COMectiOns
Job Size Pipe
Notes:
1. Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test pipe may be made in lieu of the bend test. (See 5.3.2.)
2. Also qualifies for welding f i e t welds on material of unlimited thickness.
3. Minimum pipe size qualified shall not be less than 4 in. or 1/2d, whichever is greater, where d is diameter of test pipe.
4. The quarter-sectionfor thejoint-breaktest may be further sectioned to facilitate the testing and make the break possible, provided that at least one
welding start and stop are stiU tested. The sectioningshouldnot cut any of the welding starts and stops and aii portions of the quarter-section shall be
tested.
5. Use in combination with Figure 5.25.
(continued)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 0784265 0500LBY 5 PI
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(3) Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas Welding
Test Specimens Required
Side
Plate Number of Bend
Thickness Sample Visual (see Figure Plate Thickness
Tested, in. Welds Inspection 5.14) Qualified, in:
1-1/2 max 1 Yes 2 Uniimited for 1-1/2
Max tested for <1-1/2
Note: Radiographic examination of test plate may be made in lieu of the bend test. (See 5.3.2.)
Table 5.6
Number and Type of Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified -
Welder and Welding Operator Qualification (see 5.26.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
(1) Test on Plate
Number of Specimens
Thickness of T-
Type of Test Plate (T) Visual Bend Tests* Joint Macro- Plate Thickness
Weld as Welded, mm Inspection Face Root Side Break etch Test Quaiified, mm
Groove 9.5 Yes 1 1 - - - 3.2 to 19.0 max3
Groove 9.5 5Ta5.4 YeS - - 2 - - 3.2 to 2T m a 3
Groove 25.4 or over Yes - - 2 - - 3.2 to Unlimited3
Fillet Option No. 1 12.7 Yes - - - 1 1 3.2 to Unlimited
Fiilet Option No. 22 9.5 Yes - 2 - - - 3.2 to Unlimited
Plug 9.5 Yes - - - - 2 3.2 to Unlimited
Notes:
1. See Figure 5.27 or 5.36 as applicable.
2. See Figure 5.28 or 5.37 as applicable.
3. Also qualifies for welding f i e t welds on material of unlimited thickness.
*Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test plate may be made in lieu of the bend test. (See5.3.2.)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500385 ~ 7 W
Qualification/129
Table 5.6 (continued)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
(2) Tests on Pipe or Tubing
Number of Specimens
Pipe or Tubing Plate, Pipe
Size, AU Positions Except 5G, 6G and 6GR or Tube
as Welded 5G, 6G and 6GR Positions Only wait Thickness2
Qualified, mm
Nominal ~
Pipesize Nominal Pipe or Tube
Typeof or Thickness; Visual Face Root Side Face Root Side SizeQualified,
Weld Diam, mm mm Inspection Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend mm Min Max
50 5.5
Groove or Yes 1 1 - 2 2 - 100 or 3.2 17.1
75 5.5 smaller
150 14.3
Groove or Yes - - 2 - - 4 100 or 4.8 Unlimited
200 12.7 larger
Groove Per Fig. 5.25 yes - - - - - 4 T-,Y-,andK-
connections
1150 112.7 4.8 Unlimited
with branch
members
Job Size Pipe or Tubing 1100 mm
Groove 1100 Any Yes 1 1 - 2 2 - 19 3.2 17.1
through 100
Groove >lo0 <9.5 Yes 1 1 - 2 2 - 1/2testdiam 3.2 17.1
or 100 m i n 3
Groove >lo0 29.5 Yes - - 2 - - 4 1/2testdiam 4.8 Unlimited
or 100 min3
Nominal
Pipesize Nominal
Typeof or Thickness, Visual Fillet Macroetch Pipe or Tube Wall Thickness
Weld Diam,mm mm Inspection Weld Break Test Size Qualified Qualified, in.
Groove Per Fig. 5.26 YeS - 4 Comers of Unlimited5
T-, Y-, and K-
box connections
50 5.5
or any except
Fillet 50 3.9 YeS 14 1 T-, Y-, and K- Unlimited
or connections
Job Sue Pipe
Notes:
1. Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test' pipe may be made in lieu of the bend test. (See 5.3.2.)
2. Also qualifies for welding f i e t welds on material of unlimited thickness.
3. Minimum pipe size qualified shail not be less than 100 mm or 1/2d, whichever is greater, where d is diameter of test pipe.
4. The quarter-section for thejoint-breaktest may be furthersectioned to facilitatethe testing and make the break possible, provided that at least one
welding start and stop are still fested. Thesectioningshould not cut any of the welding starts and stops and all portions of the quarter-section shall be
tested.
5. Use in combination with Figure 5.25.
~~
(continued)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L - L 92 = 078q2b5 0500L8b 9
130/ Qualification
(3) Tests on Elecírosiag and Eledrogas Welding
Test Specimens Required
Side
Plate Number of Bend
Thickness Sample Visual (see Figure Plate Thickness
Tested, mm Welds Inspection 5.14) Qualified, mm
38.1 max 1 Yes 2 Unlimited for 38.1
Max tested for C38.1
Note: Radiographic examination of test plate may be made in lieu of the bend test. (See 5.3.2.)
, FACE-BEND 7 , SIDE-BEND 7
I SIDE-BEND I
PIPE WALL 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
PIPE WALL OVER 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
AND UNDER
SPECIMENS FOR 1G AND 2G POSITIONS
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TOP OF PIPE FOR
TOP OF PIPE FOR 5G, 6G, AND 6GR
5G, 6G, AND 6GR POSITIONS
FACE-OR
SIDE-BEND
7
I I ROOT-OR I I
I
SIDE-BEND
PIPE WALL 318 in. (9.5 mm) PIPE WALL OVER 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
AND UNDER
SPECIMENS FOR 5G, 6G, AND 6GR POSITIONS
-
Figure 5.30 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe and Square or
-
Rectangular Tubing Welder Qualification (see 5.26.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 72 = 078Y265 0500187 O W
Qualification/ 131
5.27.2 Fillet Weld Break Test. The entire length of the surface shallshowcompletefusion to the root of thejoint
f l e t weld shall be examined visually, and then a 6 in. and shall exhibit no inclusion or porosity larger than
(150 mm) long specimen or a quarter-section of the pipe 3/32 in. (2 mm) in greatest dimension. The sum of the
f l e t weld assembly shall be loaded in such a way that the greatest dimensions of all inclusions and porosity shall
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
root of the weld is in tension. At least one welding start not exceed 3/8 in. (10 mm) in the 6 in. (150 mm) long
and stop shall be located within the test specimen. The specimen.
load shall be steadily increased or repeated until the
5.28.3 Macroetch Test. For acceptable qualification,
specimen fractures or bends flat upon itself.
the test specimen, wheninspectedvisually, shall conform
5.27.3 Macroetch Test. The test specimens shallbe pre- to the following requirements:
pared with a finish suitablefor macroetch examination. (1) Fillet welds shall have fusion to the root of the
A suitable solution shall be used for etching to give a joint, but not necessarily beyond.
clear definition of the weld. (2) Minimum leg sÙe shall meet the specified fillet
weld size.
5.27.4 RadiographicTest. The radiographicprocedure (3) Fillet welds and the corner macroetch test joint for
and technique shall be in accordance with the require- T-, Y-, and K-connections on square or rectangular tub-
ments of Part Bysection 6. Exclude 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) at ing, Figure 5.26, shall have:
each end of the weld from evaluation in the plate test. (a) No cracks
Welded test pipe or tubing 4 in. (100 mm) in diameter or (b) Thorough fusion between adjacent layers of
larger shall be examined for a minimum of one-half of weld metals and between weld metal and base metal
the weld perimeter selected to hclude a sample of all (c) Weld profdes conforming to intended detail,
positions welded. (For example, a test pipe or tube but with none of the variations prohibited in 3.6
welded in the 5G, 6G, or 6GR position shall be radio- (d) No undercut exceeding 1/ 32 in. (1 mm).
graphed from the top centerline to the bottom centerline (e) For porosity 1/ 32 in. (1 mm) or larger, accumu-
on either side.) Welded test pipe or tubing less than 4 in. lated porosity shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm).
in diameter shall require 100% radiography. (f) No accumulated slag, the sum of the greatest
dimensions of which-shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm).
(4) Plug welds shall have:
(a) No cracks
(b) Thorough fusion to backing and to sides of the
5.28 Test Results Required hole
(c) No visible slag in excess of 1/4 in. (6 mm) total
5.28.1 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Tests. The convex accumulated length
surface of the bend test specimen shall be visually exam-
ined for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the 5.28.4 RadiographicTest. For acceptablequalification,
surface shall contain no discontinuities exceeding the the weld, as revealed by the radiograph, shall conform to
following dimensions: the requirements of 9.25.2, except that 9.25.2.2 shall not
(1) 1/8 in. (3 mm) measured in any direction on the apply*
surface.
(2) 3/&in. (10 mm)-the sum of the greatest dimen- 5.28.5 Visual Inspection -Pipe and Thbing. See 5.12.6.
sions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/ 32 in. (1mm), but
less than or equal to 1/8 in. (3 mm).
5.28.6 Visual Inspection Plate. See 5.12.7.-
(3) 1/4 in. (6 mm)-the maximum corner crack,
except when that corner crack resulted from visible slag
inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the
1/8 in. (3 mm) maximum shall apply. Specimens with 5.29 Retests
corner cracks exceeding 1/ 4 in. (6 mm) with no evidence
of slag inclusions or other fusion type discontinuities In case a welder fails to meet the requirements of one
shall be disregarded, and a replacement test specimen or more test welds, a retest may be allowed under the
from the original weldment shall be tested. following conditions:
5.28.2 Fillet Weld Break Test 5.29.1 Immediate Retest. An immediate retest may be
made consistingof two welds of each type and position
5.28.2.1 To pass the visual examination,the fillet weld that the welder failed. AU retest specimens shall meet all
shall present a reasonably uniform appearanceand shall of the specified requirements.
be free of overlap, cracks, and excessiveundercut. There
shall be no porosity visible on the surface of the weld. 5.29.2 Retest After Further Training or Practice. A
retest may be made, provided there is evidence that the
5.28.2.2 The specimen shall pass the test ifit bends flat welder has had further training or practice. A complete
upon itself. If the fillet weld fractures, the fractured retest of the types and positions failed shall be made.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
1321Qualification
-ASREQUIRED -
TAPPED HOLE TO SUIT
TESTING MACHINE PLUNGER MEMBER
314 L
t
\ *
-A-
Y-
“r\
I
L
1-118
r I
I
114 - I
I
Minimum specified A B C D
base metal yield strength, psi in. in. in. in.
50 O00 & under 1-112 314 2-318 1-3/16
over 50 O00 to 90 O00 2 1 2-710 1-7/16
90 O00 & over 2-112 1-114 3-318 1-11116
Note: Plunger and interior die surfaces shall be machine-finished.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 5.31 -Guided-Bend Test Jig (see 5.27.1)
5.30 Period of Effectiveness Part D
The welder’s qualification as specified in this Code Welding Operator Qualjficatìon
shall be considered as remaining in effect indefinitely
unless (i) the welder is not engaged in a given process of 5.32 General
welding for which the welder is qualified for a period The qualification tests described in Part D are specifi-
exceeding six months or unless (2) there is some specific cally devised tests to determine a welding operator’s
reason to question a welder’s ability. In case of (l), the ability to produce sound welds. The qualification tests
requalification test need be made only in the 318 in. are not intended to be used as guides for welding during
(9.5 mm) thickness. The provisions of 5.29 do not apply actual construction. The latter shall be performed in
when a welder fails the requalification test. accordance with the requirements of the welding proce-
dure specification.
5.31 Records
5.33 Limitation of Variables
Records of the test results shall be kept by the manu-
facturer or contractor and shall be available to those For the qualification of a welding operator, the follow-
authorized to examine them. ing rules shall apply.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Qualification/ 133
ASREQUIRED -
TAPPED HOLE TO SUIT ALL DIMENSIONS
TESTING MACHINE 7 PLUNGER MEMBER
IN MILLIMETERS
A
\ SHOULDER HARDENED I I ' 28.6
L
28.6
r 171.5
6.4 -
38 mm IN
DIAMETER MAY BE
SUBSTITUTED FOR
1-98.4 4 JIG SHOULDERS
228.6
Minimum specified A B C D
base metal yield strength, MPa mm mm mm mrn
345 ¿? under 38 19 60 30
over 345 to 620 50 25 73 36.5
620 & over 65 32 86 43
Note: Plunger and interior die surfaces shall be machine-finished.
-
Figure 5.31 (continued) Guided-Bend Test Jig (see 5.27.1)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
5.33.1 Qualification established with any one of the medium combination for the process used in the qualifi-
steels permitted by this Code shall be considered as cation test.
qualification to weld any of the other steels.
5.33.5 A change in the position of welding to one for
5.33.2 A welding operator qualified with an approved which the welding operator is not aiready qualified shall
electrode and shielding medium combination shall be require requalification (See 5.34.2.3)
considered qualified to weld with any other approved 5.33.6 Welding operators quaiified for semiautomatic
electrode and shielding medium combination for the arc welding shall be considered qualified for single elec-
process used in the qualification test. trode machine welding in the same process(es) subject to
the limitations of 5.16, provided the welding operators
5.33.3 For other than electroslag or electrogas welding, receive training and demonstrate their ability to make
a welding operator qualified to weld with multipleelec- satisfactoryproductionwelds. (SeeCommentary C5.3.2).
trodes shall be qualified to weld with a single electrode, A groove weld qualifies a slot weld for the same posi-
but not vice versa. tion@) as defied in 5.8, and the thickness range as
shown in Table 5.6.
5.33.4 An electroslag or electrogas welding operator
qualified with an approved electrode and shielding 5.33.7 A groove weld qualifes a slot weld for the same
medium combination shall be considered qualified to position(s) as defined in 5.8 and the thickness ranges as
weld with any other approved electrode and shielding shown in Table 5.6.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500190 O m
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Minimum specified A B A B
base metal yield strength, psi (MPa) in. in. mm mm
50 O00 (345) & under 1-112 314 38 19
over 50 O00 to 90 O00 (620) 2 1 50 25
90 O00 & over 2-112 1-114 65 32
Figure 5.32 -Alternative Wraparound Guided-Bend Test Jig (see 5.27.1)
R MIN=3/4
(19 mm)
/ A
V
I
Minimum specified A B C A B C
base metal yield strength, psi (MPa) in. in. in. rnrn rnrn rnrn
50 O00 (345) & under 1-112 314 2-318 38 19 60
over 50 O00 to 90 O00 (620) 2 1 2-718 50 25 73
90 O00 & over 2-112 1-114 3-318 65 32 86
-
Figure 5.33 Alternative Roller-Equipped Guided Bend Test Jig for
Bottom Ejection of Test Specimen (see 5.27.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500191 2
Qualification/ 135
5.34 Qualification Tests Required thickness of the material of the test weld need not exceed
1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm) (see Figure 5.35). If a 1-1/2in. thick
5.34.1 For Plate or Roiled Structural Shapes test weld is made, no test need be made for lesser thick-
5.34.1.1 The welding operator qualification test for nesses. This test shall qualify the welding operator for
other than plug welds and electroslag or electrogas weld- groove and f i e t welds in material of unlimited thickness
ing shall have a joint detail as follows: 1 in. (25.4 mm) for this process and test position.
plate, single-V-groove, 20’ included groove angle, 5/ 8 in. 5.34.2 Groove Weld Qualification Test I
(16 mm) root opening with backing. Backingshallbe 3/8
in. (9.5 mm) to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) by 3 in. (75 mm) min if 5.34.2.1 The welding operator who makes a complete
radiographyis used without removal of backing. Ifback- joint penetration groove weld procedure qualification
ing is to be removed, at least 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) width of test that meets the requirements is thereby qualified for
backing is required. that process and test position and the material thickness
The minimum length of welding groove shall be 15in. range shown in Table 5.6(1).
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(380 mm) (see Figure 5.34). This test will qualify the 5.34.2.2 For Pipe or Tubing. The welding operator
welding operator for groove and fiiet welding in mate- who makes a complete joint penetration groove weld
rials of unlimited thickness for the process and position procedure qualification test in pipe or tubing that meets
tested. the requirements is thereby qualified for that process and
Alternatively, the welding operator may be qualified test position for pipe or tubing. The pipe diameter and
by radiography of the initial 15in. (380 mm) of aproduc- wall thickness range qualified for shall be that shown
tion groove weld. The,materialthickness range qualified in Table 5.6(2). This qualifies the welding operator for
shall be that shown in Table 5.6. welding groove and fillet welds in plate, pipe, or tubing
as shown in Table 5.6(2).
5.34.1.2 Electroslag or Electrogas Welding. The
qualificationtest for an electroslag or electrogas welding 5.34.2.3 Plate QualificationApplied to Pipe and Tub-
operator shallconsist of welding ajoint of themaximum ing. Qualificationof a welding operator on plate in the
thickness of material to be used in construction, but the 1G (flat), or 2G (horizontal) position shall qualify the
SIDE-BEND
1-112
50
75
Notes:
1.
518
2M1Nw
When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in test area.
2. The joint configurationof a qualified groove weld procedure may be used in lieu
of the groove configurationshown here.
3. The backing thickness shall be 318 in. min to 112 in. m a ; backing width shall
be 3 in. min. when not removed for radiography, otherwise, 1-112 in.
Figure 5.34 -Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness -Welding
Operator Qualification (see 5.34.1.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 07842b5 0500192 4 m
136/Qualification
c-
DIRECTION OF ROLLING -
íOPTIONAU
1; UN'
430
6 MIN R k 4 ; H6 -MIN
l
I
I '2
T
Notes:
'7
1. Root opening "R" established by welding procedure specification.
2. T = maximum to be welded in construction but need not
exceed 1-1/2 in.
* Extensions need not be used if joint is of sufficient length
to provide 17 in. of sound weld.
Figure 5.35 -Butt Joint for Welding Operator Qualification -
Electroslag and Electrogas Welding (see 5.34.1.2)
welding operator for welding pipe or tubing over 24 in. groove weld test plate as required by 5.34.1. This qualifi-
(610 mm) in diameter for the position qualified, except cation shall also be valid for joints having a dihedral
that qualification in the 1G position also qualifies for angle ?Fof 6oo, and greater.
fillet welding in the 1F and 2F positions, and qualifica- (2) For joints having a dihedral angle P greater than
tion in the 2G position also qualifies for groove welding 60",but not exceeding 135O, the welding operator shall
in the 1G position, and for fillet welding in the 1F and 2F weld a test plate in accordance with Option 1 or Option
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
positions. 2, depending upon the contractor's choice, as follows:
5.34.3 Fillet Weld Qualification Tests For Fillet Welds 5.34.3.1 Option 1. Weld a T-test plate in accordance
Only. The following are for fiUet weld qualification with Figure 5.36.
ody:
(1) For fillet welds between parts having a dihedral 5.34.3.2 Option 2. Weld a soundness test plate in
angle q of 60" or less, the welding operator shail weld a accordance with Figure 5.37.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D393 9 2 m 0784265 0500393 b ~ ~ ~~
m
Qualification/ 137
FILLET WELD
BREAK SPECIMEN 1
1/2 7. I
- DISCARD
5/16 FILLET WELD
4 II !
150
1I2
STOP AND RESTART
WELDING NEAR CENTER
Y
/
Notes:
I. L=15min.
2. Plate thickness and dimensions are minimum.
-
Figure 5.36 Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate -Welding
Operator Qualification-Option 1 (see 5.34.3.1)
5.34.4 Plug Weld Quaufication Tests for Plug Welds 5.37 Test Specimens: Number, Type,
Only. Thejoint shall consist of a 3/4 in. (19 mm) diame- and Preparation
ter hole in a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) thick plate with a 3/8 in.
minimum thickness backing plate. (See Figure 5.38). 5.37.1 For mechanical testing, guided-bend test speci-
mens shall be prepared by cutting the test plate as shown
in Figure 5.34 or 5.37, whichever is applicable, to form
5.35 Base Metal specimens approximately rectangular in cross section.
The specimens shall be prepared for testing in accord-
The base metal used shall comply with 10.2 or the ance with Figures 5.14 or 5.15, whichever is applicable.
welding procedure specification.
5.37.2 Radiographic Testing
5.36 Joint Welding Procedure 5.37.2.1 At the contractor’s option, radiographic test-
ing of the weld may be performed in lieu of the guided-
5.36.1 The welding operator shall follow the joint weld- bend test.
ing procedure specified by the welding procedure speci-
fication. 5.37.2.2 If radiographic testing is used in lieu of the
prescribed bend test, the weld reinforcement need not be
5.36.2 Weld cleaning shall be done with the test weld in ground or otherwise smoothed for inspection unlas its
the same position as the welding position being qualified. surface irregularities or juncture with the base metal
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 W 07842b5 0500L74 8 W
138/ Qualification
- DIRECTION OF ROLLING
IOPTIONALI
in. rnrn
110 3
310 10
15
15/16 24
1 25
1-112 30
2 50
THESE EDGES MAY BE OXYGEN-CUTAND 3 75
MAY OR MAY NOT BE MACHINED. y
"gl
- I
.........
.........
.......... 15 380
...
W] %??.?.
1-1/2 I .........
..........
..........
..........
.........
.........
..........
I
L 3 z 6 1 t 3 M l N
RADIUS 1/8 MAX
4 1
THE PORTION BETWEEN FILLET
WELDS MAY BE WELDED
IN ANY POSITION.
-
I I
/ - y A T i E A S T 3 / 8 IF
~ RADIOGRAPHY
2in. IS
MAXIMUM SIZE SINGLE USED, THEN USE AT
PASS FILLET WELD 3/8 in. LEAST 318 x 3 in.
BACKING
THE BACKING SHALL BE IN INTIMATE
CONTACT WITH THE BASE METAL.
THE WELD REINFORCEMENTAND THE BACKING
SHALL BE REMOVED FLUSH WITH THE BASE
'\.- - /' 1 METAL (SEE 3.6.3). THERMAL CUTTING MAY BE
USED FOR THE REMOVAL OF THE MAJOR PART
OF THE BACKING, PROVIDED AT LEAST 118 in.
OF ITS THICKNESS IS LEFT TO BE REMOVED
BY MACHINING OR GRINDING.
Figure 5.37 -Fillet Weld Root Bend Test Plate -Welding Operator
Qualification -Option 2 (see 5.34.3.2) --``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Qua@ication/ 139
7 3/4 rr WELD
t
r- 318
1
7
MACROETCH TEST It 318 MIN
SPECIMEN
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
125
I I 1
I
I
MACROETCH SPECIMEN
(ETCH INTERIOR FACE)
7' i YI- - 314
I
I
I
i, ::;::<
,, .
:,v*:.;........
; ?;:.:
..'i(::.............
,...........
..........
... ........
..:e...........
::::::::.:,
..'.........
<
I
l
I
I
I
z
z
m
z
z
m
1
I
I
I
I
CUTLINE - I
-I
3MIN
5 MIN
PLUG WELD TEST PLATE
(MACROETCH BOTH INTERIOR FACES)
Figure 5.38 -Plug Weld Macroetch Test Plate -Welding Operator Qualification (see 5.34.4)
would cause objectionable weld discontinuities to be 5.37.5 Aging. When required by the filler metal specxi-
obscured in the radiograph. If the backing is removed for cation applicable to weld metal being tested, fully welded
radiographic testing, the root shall be ground flush with test specimens may be aged at temperatures up to 275" F
the base metal (see 3.6.3). (135OC).
5.37.3 The fillet-weld-break and plug weld macroetch
test specimensshall be cut from the test joint as shown in
Figures 5.36 and 5.38. The face of the macroetch test 5.38 Methods of Testing Specimens
specimen shaii be smooth for etching. 5.38.1 Root- or Side-Bend Specimens. Each specimen
5.37.4 The plug weld macroetch test specimen shall be shail be bent in a bend test jig that meets the require-
cut from the test joint as shown in Figure 5.38. The face ments shown in Figures 5.31,5.32 or 5.33, or is substan-
of the macroetch test specimen shall be smooth for tially in accordance with those figures, provided the
etching. maximum bend radius is not exceeded. Any convenient
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.3 92 m 0784265 0500396 3 m
140/ Qualification
means may be used to move the plunger member with 5.39.3.2 The specimen shall pass the test if it bends flat
relation to the die member. upon itself. If the fillet weld fractures, the fractured
The specimenshall be placed on the die member of the surface shall show complete fusion into the root of the
jig with the weld at midspan. Side-bend specimens shall joint and shall exhibit no inclusion or porosity larger
be placed with that side showing greater discontinuities, than 3/ 32 in. (2 mm) in the greatest dimension. The sum
if any, directed toward the gap; root-bend (fillet weld of the greatest dimensions of all inclusions and porosity
soundness)specimens shall be placed with the root of the shall not exceed 3/8 in. (10 mm) in the 6 in. (150 mm)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
weld directed toward the gap. long specimen.
5.38.2 The radiographic procedure and technique shall 5.39.4 Macroetch Test. See 5.28.3.
be in accordancewith the requirementsof Part Bysection
6. Three (3) in. (75 mm) at each end of the length of the 5.39.5 Visual Inspection. For pipe and tubing, see
test plate shall be excluded from evaluation. 5.12.6. For plate, see 5.12.7.
5.38.3 Fillet-Weld-Break Test. The entire length of the
fillet weld shall be examined visually, and then a 6 in. 5.40 Retests
(150 mm) long specimen shall be loaded in such a way
that the root of the weld is in tension. The load shall be If a welding operator fails to meet the requirements of
steadily increased or repeated until the specimen frac- one or more test welds, a retest may be allowed under the
tures or bends flat upon itself, following conditions.
5.38.4 Macroetch Test. The test specimens shall be pre- 5.40.1 Immediate Retest. An immediate retest may be
pared with a finish suitable for macroetch examination. made consisting of two test welds of each type and
A suitable solution shall be used to give a clear definition position that the welding operator failed. All retest spec-
of the weld. imens shall meet all the specified requirements.
5.40.2 Retest After Further Training or Practice. A
retest may be made, provided there is evidence that the
5.39 Test Results Required welding operator has had further training or practice. A
complete retest of the types and positions failed shall be
5.39.1 Root- or Side-BendTests. The convex surface of made.
the bend test specimen shall be visually examined for
surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the surface shall
contain no discontinuities exceeding the following
dimensions: 5.41 Period of Effectiveness
(1) 1/8 in. (3 mm) measured in any direction on the The welding operator’s qualification specified in Part
surface. D shall be considered as remaining in effect indefinitely
(2) 3/8 in. (10 mm)-the sum of the greatest dimen- unless (1) the welding operator is not engaged in the
sions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/ 32 in. (1 mm), but given process of weldingfor which that welding operator
less than or equal to 1/8 in. (3 mm). is qualified for a period exceeding six months; or unless
(3) 1/4 in. (6 mm)-the maximum corner crack, (2) there is some specific reason to question the welding
except when that corner crack resulted from visible slag operator’s ability.
inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the
1/8 in. (3 mm) maximum shall apply.
Specimenswith corner cracks exceeding 1/4 in. (6 mm)
with no evidence of slag inclusions or other fusion type 5.42 Records
discontinuities may be disregarded, and a replacement Records of the test results shall be kept by the manu-
test specimenfrom the original weldment shall be tested. facturer or contractor and shall be available to those
5.39.2 Radiographic Test. For acceptable qualification, authorized to examine them.
the weld as revealed by radiograph shall conform to the
requirements of 9.25.2, except that 9.25.2.2 shall not
apply- Part E
5.39.3 Fillet-Weld-BreakTest Qualtlfication of Tack Welders
5.39.3.1 To pass the visual examination, the fillet 5.43 General
weld shall present a reasonably uniform appearance and
shall be free of overlap, cracks, and excessive undercut. The qualificationtests described in Part E are specially
There shall be no porosity visible on the surface of the devised tests to determine a tack welder’s ability to pro-
weld. duce sound welds. The qualification tests are not
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 078V2b5 0500197 3 m
Qualification/ 141
intended to be used as a guide for tack welding during 5.44.3 A tack welder qualified with an approved elec-
actual construction. The latter shall be performed in trode and shielding medium combination shall be con-
accordancewith the requirements of the welding proce- sidered qualified to tack weld with any other approved
dure specification. electrode and shielding medium combination for the
process used in the qualification test.
5.44.4 A tack welder shall be qualified for each process
5.44 Limitation of Variables used.
For the qualification of a tack welder, the following 5.44.5 Achangein the position in which tacking is done,
rules shall apply. as defined in 5.8, shall require requalifcation.
5.44.1 Qualification established with any one of the
steels permitted by this Code shall be considered as
qualification to tack weld any of the other steels.
5.45 Qualification Tests Required
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5.44.2 A tack welder qualified for shielded metal arc
welding with an electrode identified in Table 5.7 shall be A tack welder shallbe qualified by one test plate made
considered qualified to tack weld with any other elec- in each position in which the tack welding is to be
trode in the same group designation and with any elec- performed. The tack welder shall make a 1/4 in. (6 mm)
trode listed in a numerically lower group designation. maximum sue tack weld approximately 2 in. (50 mm)
long on the fillet-weld-break specimen as shown in
Figure 5.39.
Table 5.7
Electrode Classification Groups-
Tack Welder Qualification
(see 5.44.2) 5.46 Base Metal
Group AWS The base metal used shall comply with 10.2 or the
Designation Electrode Classification* welding procedure specification.
F4 EXX15, EXX16, EXX18, EXX15-X,
EXXlá-X, EXX18-X
F3 EXX10, EXX11, EXX10-X, EXX11-X
F2 EXXl2, EXX13, EXX14, EXX13-X
F1 EXX20, EXX24, EXX27, EXX28, 5.47 Test Specimens: Number, Type,
EXX2O-X, EXX27-X and Preparation
*The letters "XX" used in the classification designation in this table One test specimen shall be welded as shown in Fig-
stand for the various strength levels (60,70,80,90,100,110, and 120) ure 5.39 with the entire welded assembly as the test
of electrodes.
specimen.
1 - 4 4
I
I
112 .
...........................
............................
.............
c
~~~
'I?
i
- 4 4
F' 1O0
112 -
Figure 5.39 -Fillet Weld Break Specimen-Tack Welder Qualification (see 5.47)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
142/ Qualification
5.48 Method of Testing Specimens 5.49.3 A tack welder who passes the fdet-break test
shall be eligible to tack weld all types of joints (except
A force shall be applied to the specimen as shown in complete joint penetration groove welds, welded from
Figure 5.40 until rupture occurs. The force may be ap- one side without backing; e.g., butt joints and T-, Y-, and
plied by any convenient means. The surface of the weld K-connections) for the process and in the position in
and of the fracture shall be examined visually for defects. which the tack welder is qualified. Tack welds in the
foregoing exception shall be performed by welders fully
qualified for the process and in the positions in which the
5.49 Test Results Required welding is to be done.
5.49.1 The tack weld shall present a reasonably uniform
appearance and shall be free of overlap, cracks, and
undercut exceeding 1/32 in. (1 mm). There shall be no
porosity visible on the surface of the tack weld. 5.50 Retests
5.49.2 The fractured surface of the tack weld shall show In case of failureto pass the above test, the tack welder
fusion to the root, but not necessarily beyond, and shall may make one retest without additional training.
exhibit no incomplete fusion to the base metal nor any
inclusion or porosity larger than 3/32 in. (2 mm) in
greatest dimension.
5.51 Period of Effectiveness
FORCE A tack welder who passes the test just described, or
those tests required for welder qualification, shall be
considered eligible to perform tack welding indefinitely
in the positions and with the process for which the tack
welder is qualified unless there is some specific reason to
question the tack welder’s ability.
5.52 Records
Records of the test results shall be kept by the manu-
-
Figure 5.40 Method of Rupturing Spechen facturer or contractor and shall be available to those
-
Tack Welder Qualification (see 5.48) authorized to examine them.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 m 0784265 0500399 7 m
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6 . Inspection
Part A Acceptable qualification bases are:
GeneralRequirements (1) Current or previous certification as an AWS Certi-
fied Welding Inspector (CWr) in accordance with the
provisions of AWS QCl, Standardand Guidefor Quali-
6.1 General fication and Certification of Welding Inspectors, or
(2) Current or previous qualificationby the Canadian
6.1.1 For the purpose of this Code, fabrication/erection Welding Bureau (CWB) to the requirements of the
inspection and testing, and verification inspection and Canadian Standard Association (CSA) Standard
testing are separate functions. Fabrication/erection W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors, or
inspection and tests shall be performed as necessary (3) An engineer or technician who, by training or
prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and experience, or both, in metals fabrication, inspection and
after welding to ensure that materials and workmanship testing, is competent to perform inspection of the work.
meet the requirements of the contract documents. Verifi-
cation inspection and testing shall be performed and 6.1.3.2 The qualification of an Inspector shall remain
their results reported to the owner and contractor in a in effect indefinitely, provided the Inspector remains
timely manner to avoid delays in the work. active in inspection of welded steel fabrication, unless
Fabrication/ erection inspection and testing are the there is specific reason to questionthe Inspector’s ability.
responsibilities of the contractor unless otherwise pro-
vided in the contract documents. Verification inspection 6.1.3.3 The Inspector may be supported by Assistant
and testing are the prerogatives of the owner who may Inspectors who may perform specific inspection func-
perform this function or, when provided in the contract, tions under the supervision of the Inspector. Assistant
waive independent verification, or stipulate that both Inspectors shall be qualified by training and experience
inspection and verification shall be performed by the to perform the specific functions to which they are
contractor. assigned. The workof Assistant Inspectorsshallbe regu-
larly monitored by the Inspector, generally on a daily
6.1.2 The verification Inspector is the duly designated basis.
person who acts for and in behalf of the owner or Engi-
neer on all inspection and quality matters within the 6.1.3.4 Inspectorsand Assistant Inspectorsshallhave
scope of the contract documents. The fabrication/erec- passed an eye examination with or without corrective
tion Inspector is the duly designated person who acts for, lenses to prove: (1) near vision acuity of Snellen English,
and in behalf of, the contractor on all inspection and or equivalent, at 12in. (305mm); and (2) far vision acuity
quality matters within the scope of the contract docu- of 20140, or better. Eye examination of all inspection
ments. When the term Inspector(s) is used without personnel is required every three years or less ifnecessary
further qualification, it applies equally to inspection and to demonstrate adequacy.
verification within the limits of responsibility designated
in 6.1.1. 6.1.3.5 The Engineer shall have authority to verify the
qualification of Inspectors.
6.1.3 Inspector Quaufication
6.1.4 The Inspector shall ascertain that all fabrication
6.1.3.1 Inspectors responsible for acceptance or re- and erection by welding is performed in accordancewith
jection of material and workmanship shall be qualified. the requirements of the contract documents.
The basis of Inspector qualification shall be docu-
mented. If the Engineer elects to specify the basis of 6.1.5 The Inspector shall be furnished complete detailed
inspector qualification, it shall be so stated in contract drawings showing the size, length, type, and location of
documents. all welds to be made. He shall be furnished the portion of
Copyright American Welding Society 143
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I i 7 2 = 078LI2b5 0500200 T
144/Inspection
the contract documentsthat describesmaterial and qual- 6.5.2 The Inspector shall make certain that only welding
ity requirements for the products to be fabricated or procedures are employed which meet the provisions of
erected, or both. 5.1 or are qualified in accordance with 5.2 and 5.5.
6.1.6 The Inspector shall be notified in advance of the 6.5.3 The Inspector shall make certain that electrodes
start of operations subject to inspection and verification. are used only in the positions and with the type of
welding current and polarity for which they are classified.
6.5.4 The Inspector shall, at suitable intervals, observe
6.2 Inspection of Materials joint preparation, assembly practice, the welding tech-
The Inspector shall make certain that only materiais niques, and performance of each welder, welding opera-
conforming to the requirements of this Code are used. tor, and tack welder to make certain that the applicable
requirements of this Code are met.
6.5.5 The Inspector shall examine the work to make
6.3 Inspection of Welding Procedure certain that it meets the requirements of section 3,
Qualification and Equipment Workmanship, and 8.15, 9.25, or 10.17, as applicable.
Other acceptance criteria, different from those specified
6.3.1 The Inspector shall make certain that all welding in the Code, may be used when approved by the Engi-
procedures are prequalified and covered by a welding neer. Size and contour of welds shall be measured with
procedure specification or are qualified in accordance suitable gages. Visual inspection for cracks in welds and
with 5.2 of this Code. base metal and other discontinuitiesshould be aided by a
6.3.2 The Inspector shall inspect the welding equipment strong light, magnifiers, or such other devices as may be
to be used for the work to make certain that it conforms found helpful.
to the requirements of 3.1.2. 6.5.6 Inspectors shall identify with a distinguishing
mark or other recording methods all parts or joints that
they have inspected and accepted. Any recording method
6.4 Inspection of Welder, Welding which is mutually agreeable may be used. Die stamping
Operator, and Tack Welder of dynamicallyloaded members is not permitted without
the approval of the Engineer.
Qualifkations
6.5.7 The Inspector shall keep a record of qualifications
6.4.1 The Inspector shall permit welding to be per- of all welders, welding operators, and tack welders; all
formed only by welders, welding operators, and tack procedure qualifications or other tests that are made;
welders who are qualified in accordance with the and such other information as may be required.
requirements of 5.3, or shall make certain that each
welder, welding operator, or tack welder has previously
demonstrated such qualification under other acceptable
supervision. 6.6 Obligations of the Contractor
6.4.2 When the quality of a welder’s, welding operator’s, 6.6.1 The contractor shall be responsible for visual
or tack welder’s work appears to be below the require- inspection and necessary correction of all deficiencies in
ments of this Code, the Inspector may require that the materials and workmanship in accordance with the
welder, welding operator, or tack welder demonstrate an requirements of section 3, Workmanship, and 8.15.1,
9.25,1, 10.17.1 or other parts of the Code, as applicable.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ability to produce sound welds by means of a simpletest,
such as the fillet-weld-break test, or by requiring com- 6.6.2 The contractor shall comply with all requests of
plete requalification in accordance with 5.3. the Inspector(s) to correct deficiencies in materials and
6.4.3 The Inspector shall require requalification of any workmanship as provided in the contract documents.
welder or welding operator who has for a period exceed- 6.6.3 In the event that faulty welding, or its removal for
ing six months not used the process for which the welder rewelding, damages the base metal so that in the judg-
or welding operator was qualified. ment of the Engineer its retention is not in accordance
with the intent of the contract documents, the contractor
shall remove and replace the damaged base metal or shall
6.5 Inspection of Work and Records compensate for the deficiency in a manner approved by
the Engineer.
6.5.1 The Inspector shall make certain that the size,
length, and location of all welds conform to the require- 6.6.4 When nondestructive testing other than visual
ments of this Code and to the detail drawings and that no inspection is specified in the information furnished to
unspecified welds have been added without approval. bidders, it shall be the contractor’s responsibility to
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L - L 92 m 0784265 050020L L m
Inspection/145
ensure that all specified welds meet the quality require- 6.7.7 For detecting discontinuities that are open to the
ments of 8.15,9.25, or 10.17, whichever is applicable. surface, dye penetrant inspection may be used. The
standard methods set forth in ASTM E165 shall be used
6.6.5 If nondestructivetesting other than visual inspec- for dye penetrant inspection, and the standardsof accept-
tion is not specified in the original contract agreement ance shall be in accordance with 8.15,9.25, or 10.17 of
but is subsequently requested by the owner, the contrac- this Code, whichever is applicable.
tor shall perform any requested testing or shall permit
any testing to be performed in accordance with 6.7. The 6.7.8 Personnel Qualiiication
owner shall be responsible for all associated costs includ-
ing handling, surface preparation, nondestructivetest- 6.7.8.1 Personnel performing nondestructive testing
ing, and repair of discontinuities other than those listed other than visual shall be qualified in accordance with
in 8.15.1, 9.25.1, or 10.17.1, whichever is applicable, at the current edition of the American Society for Non-
rates mutually agreeable between owner and contractor. destructive Testing Recommended Practice No. SNT-
However, if such testing should disclose an attempt to TC-lA.*‘ Only individuals qualified for NDT Level I
defraud or gross nonconformance to this Code, repair and working under the NDT Level II or individuals
work shall be done at the contractor’s expense. qualified for NDT Level II may perform nondestructive
testing.
6.7.8.2 Certification of Level I and Level II individ-
6.7 Nondestructive Testing uals shallbe performed by a Level III individual who has
The nondestructive testing procedures as described in been certified by (1) The American Society for Non-
this Code have been in use for many years and provide destructive Testing, or (2) has the education, training,
reasonable assurance of weld integrity; however, it experience, and has successfully passed the written
appears that some users of the Code incorrectly consider examination prescribed in SNT-TC-1A.
each method capable of detecting all injurious defects. 6.7.8.3 Personnel performing nondestructive tests
Users of the Code should become familiar with all the under the provisions of 6.7.8 need not be qualified and
limitationsof nondestructive testing methods to be used, certified under the provisions of AWS QCl.
particularly the inability to detect and characterize
planar defects with specific flaw orientations. (The lim-
itations and complementary use of each method are
explained in the latest edition of ANSI/AWS B1.0, 6.8 Extent of Testing
Guidefor Nondestructive Inspection of Welds.)
Information furnished to the bidders shali clearly
6.7.1 When nondestructive testing other thanvisual is to identify the extent of nondestructive testing (types, cate-
be required, it shall be so stated in the information gories, or location) of welds to be tested.
furnished to the bidders. This information shall desig-
nate the categories of welds to be examined, the extent of 6.8.1 Weld joints requiringtesting by specifcation shall
examination of each category, and the method or be tested for their full length, unless partial or spot
methods of testing. testing is specified.
6.7.2 Welds tested nondestructively that do not meet the 6.8.2 When partial testing is specified, the location and
requirements of this Code shall be repaired by the lengths of welds or categories of weld to be tested shall be
methods permitted by 3.7. clearly designated in the contract documents.
6.7.3 When radiographic testing is used, the procedure 6.8.3 When spot testing is specified, the number of spots
and technique shall be in accordance with Part B of this in each designated category of welded joint to be tested in
section. a stated length of weld or a designated segment of weld
shall be included in the information furnished to the
6.7.4 When examination is performed using radiation bidders. Each spot test shallcover at least 4 in. (100 mm)
imaging systems, the procedures and techniques shall be of the weld length. When spot testingrevealsindications
in accordance with Part D of this section. of rejectable discontinuities that require repair, the
6.7.5 When ultrasonictesting is used, the procedure and extent of those discontinuities shall be explored. Two
technique shall be in accordance with Part C of this additional spots in the same segment of weld joint shall
section. be taken at locations away from the original spot. The
location of the additional spots shall be agreed upon
6.7.6 When magnetic particle testing is used, the proce- between the contractor and the verification Inspector.
dure and technique shall be in accordance with ASTM
E709, and the standard of acceptance shall be in accord-
ance with 8.15,9.25, or 10.17 of this Code, whichever is 21. Available from the American Society for Nondestructive
applicable. Testing, 4153 Ariingate Plaza, Columbus, OH 43228.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 M 0784265 0500202 3 M
146/Inspection
When either of the two additional spots show defects and Figures 6.5 and.6.6. Identifying letters and numbers
that require repair, the entire segment of weld repre- shall show clearly in the radiograph.
sented by the original spot shall be completely tested. If
the weld involves more than one segment, two additional 6.10.2 Radiography shall be performed in accordance
spots in each segment shall be tested at locations agreed with all applicable safety requirements.
upon by the contractor and the verification Inspector, 6.10.3 When the contractdocuments require the removal
subject to the foregoing interpretation. of weld reinforcement, the welds shall be prepared for
6.8.4 Nondestructive test personnel shall, prior to test- radiography by grinding as described in 3.6.3. Other
ing, be furnished or have access to relevant information weld surfacesneed not be ground or otherwise smoothed
regarding weld joint geometries, material thicknesses, for purposes of radiographictesting unless surfaceirregu-
and welding processes used in making the weldment. larities or thejunction between weld and base metal may
NDT personnel shall be apprised of any subsequent cause objectionable weld discontinuitiesto be obscured
repairs to the weld. in the radiograph.
6.103.1 Weld tabs shall be removed prior to radio-
graphic inspection unless otherwise approved by the
Part B Engineer.
Radiographic Testing of 6.10.3.2 When required by 3.13 or other provisions of
Groove Welds in Butt Joints the contract documents, steel backing shall be removed
and the surface shall be finished flush by grinding prior
6.9 General to radiography. Grinding shall be as described in 3.6.3.
6.9.1 The procedures and standards set forth in Part B 6.10.3.3 When weld reinforcement or backing, or
are to govern radiographic testing of welds when such both, is not removed, or wire IQI alternate placement is
inspection is required by the contract documents as pro- not used, steel shims which extend at least 1/ 8 in. (3 mm)
vided in 6.7. The requirements listed herein are specifi- beyond three sides of the required hole type IQI or wire
cally for testing groove welds in butt joints in plate, IQI shall be placed under the hole type IQI or wire IQI so
shapes, and bars by X-ray or gamma-ray sources. The that the total thickness of steel between the hole type IQI
methodology shall conform to ASTM E94, Standard and the film is approximatelyequal to the average thick-
Recommended Practice for Radiographic Testing, and ness of the weld measured through its reinforcementand
ASTM E142, Standard Methodfor Controlling Quality backing.
of Radiographic Testing, and ASTM E747, Controlling 6.10.4 Radiographic film shall be as described in ASTM
Quality of Radiographic Testing Using Wire Penetra- E94. Lead foil screens shall be used as described in
meters, and ASTM E1032, Radiographic Examination ASTM E94. Fluorescent screens shall not be permitted.
of Weldments.
6.10.5 Radiographs shall be made with a single source of
6.9.2 Variations in testing procedures, equipment, and radiation centered as near as practicable with respect to
acceptance standards may be used upon agreement the length and width of that portion of the weld being
between the contractor and the owner. Such variations examined.
include, but are not limited to, the following: radio-
graphic testing of fiiiet, T, and corner welds; changes in 6.10.5.1 Gamma ray sources, regardless of size, shall
source-to-film distance; unusual application of film, be capable of meeting the geometric unsharpness limita-
unusual hole type image quality indicators (IQI) appli- tion of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
cations (including film side hole type IQI); and radio- V, Article 2.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
graphic testing of thicknessesgreater than 6 in. (150 mm)
film types, densities, and variations in exposure, devel- 6.10.5.2 The source-to-subject distance shall not be
opment, and viewing techniques. less than the total length of film being exposed in a single
plane. This provision does not apply to panoramic expo-
sures made under the provisions of 6.10.8.2.
6.10 Radiographic Procedures 6.10.5.3 The source-to-subject distance shaU not be
less than seven times the thickness of weld plus rein-
6.10.1 Radiographs shall be made using a single source forcement and backing, if any, nor such that the inspect-
of either X- or gamma radiation. The radiographic sensi- ing radiation shall penetrate any portion of the weld
tivity shall be judged based on hole type IQI image or represented in the radiograph at an angle greater than
wire image quality indicators (IQI). Radiographic tech- 26-1/2O from a line normal to the weld surface.
nique and equipment shail provide sufficient sensitivity
to clearly delineate the required hole type IQIs and the 6.10.6 X-ray units, 600 kvp maximum, and Iridium 192
essentialholes as described in 6.10.7, Tables 6.1 and 6.2, may be used as a source for all radiographic inspection
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 0784265 0500203 5
Inspection/147
provided they have adequate penetrating ability. Cobalt wire on the outer edge of the area being radiographed.
60 shall only be used as a radiographic source when the When a complete circumferential weld is radiographed
steel being radiographed exceeds 2.5 in. (63.6 mm) in with a single exposure and the radiation sourceis placed
thickness. Other radiographicsources shallbe subject to at the center of curvature, at least three equally spaced
the approval of the Engineer. hole type IQIs or wire IQIs shall be used.
6.10.7 Hole type IQIs or wire IQIs shall show clearly 6.10.7.1 The thickness of a hole type IQI or wire IQI
on each radiograph; the minimum number and their set and the essentialhole or wire shall be as specified in
required locations shall be as follows: For welds joining Tables 6.1 and 6.2. A smaller essential hole or wire or a
nominally equal thicknesses, where a radiograph repre- thinner hole type IQI or a wire IQI using smaller wires
sents 10 in. (255 mm) or greater of weld length, two hole may be selected by the contractor, provided all other
type IQIs or wire IQIs placed as shown in Figure 6.1; provisions for radiography are met.
where a radiograph represents less than 10 in. of weld, Thickness shall be measured as T1 or T2,or both, at
one hole type IQI or wire IQI placed as shown in Figure the locations shown in Figures 6.1, 6.2, 6.3 or 6.4 and
6.2. For welds at a transition in thickness, where a radio- may be increased to provide for the thickness of allow-
graph represents 10 in. or greater of weld length, two able weld reinforcement, provided shims are used as
hole type IQIs or wire IQIs on the thinner plate and one specified in 6.10.3.3. Steel backing shall not be con-
hole type IQI or wire IQI on the thicker plate, or two wire sidered part of the weld or reinforcement in hole type IQI
IQIs at the alternate wire IQI placement locations each or wire IQI selection.
as shown in Figure 6.3; when a radiograph represents less
than the outer edge of the area being radiographed, IQI 6.10.7.2 Hole type IQIs shall be manufactured from
wires shall be perpendicularto the joint with the smallest steel, preferably stainless steel, and shall conform to
ALTERNATE WIRE IQI
PLACEMENT
CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD,
AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION
(LOCATION OPTIONAL), SEE 6.10.12
HOLE-TYPE IQI OR WIRE
IQI ON SOURCE SIDE
LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER SHALL BE
PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED
ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING
FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING
(SEE 6.10.12)
CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, Note: Alternate source side IQI placement
AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION permitted for tubular applications and other
(LOCATION OPTIONAL), SEE 6.10.12 applications when approved by the Engineer.
-
Figure 6.1 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on
Approximately Equal Thickness Joints 10 in. (255 m)and Greater in Length (see 6.10.7)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 W 07842b5 0500204 7 W
148/Inspection
Note: Alternate source side IQI placement
permitted for tubular applications and other
applications when approved by the Engineer.
CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD,
AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION
HOLE-TYPE IQI OR WIRE IQI ON SOURCE
(LOCATION OPTIONAL), SEE 6.10.12 -\
SIDE MAY BE PLACED ANYWHERE ALONG
AND ON EITHER SIDE OF THE JOINT
ALTERNATE WIRE IQI
LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER SHALL BE
PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED
ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING
FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (see 6.10.12)
CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD,
T I =T2 AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION
(LOCATION OPTIONAL), SEE 6.10.12
-
Figure 6.2 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on
Approximately Equal Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in. (255 mm) in Length (see 6.10.7)
dimensions shown in Figure 6.5. For more detailed cut by scattered radiation, or any other process that
information, see ASTM E1025, Hole-Tjpe Image Qual- obscures portions of the total weld length shall render
ity Indicators Usedfor Radiography. Each hole type IQI the radiograph unacceptable.
shall be manufactured with three holes, one of which
shall be of a diameter equal to twice the hole type IQI 6.10.8.1 Films shall have sufficientlength and shall be
thickness (2”). The diameter of the two remaining holes placed to produce at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) of film,
shall be selected by the manufacturer. They will ordinar- exposed to direct radiation from the source, beyond each
ily be equal to one times (IT)and four times (4“) the hole free edge where the weld is terminated.
type IQI thickness. Hole type IQI designations 10 6.10.8.2 Welds longer than 14 in. (355 mm) may be
through’25 shall contain a 4T hole, radiographed by overlappingfilm cassettes and making
6.10.7.3 Wire image quality indicators (IQI) shall be a single exposure, or by using singie film cassettes and
manufactured in accordance with Figure 6.6. For more making separate exposures. The provisions of 6.10.5
detailed information, see ASTM E747. shall apply.
6.10.8 Welded joints shall be radiographed and the film 6.10.8.3 To check for backscatter radiation, a lead
indexed by methods that will provide complete and con- symbol“B,” 1/2in. (13 mm)high, 1/16in. (1.6mm) thick
tinuous inspection of the joint within the limits specified shall be attached to the back of each film cassette. If the
to be examined. Joint limits shall show clearly in the “B” image appears on the radiograph, the radiograph
radiographs. Short film, short screens, excessive under- shall be considered unacceptable.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 0784265 0500205 9 --m- ~
Inspection/ 149
HOLE-TYPE IQI OR WIRE
Note: Alternate source side IQI placement IQI ON SOURCE SIDE
permittedfor tubular applications and other
applications when approved by the Engineer.
MEASURET2 AT POINT OF MAXIMUM
THICKNESS UNDER HOLE-TYPE IQI
OR WIRE IQI PLACED ON SLOPE
LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER SHALL BE
ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHIN
FILM TO WELD AFTE
ALTERNATE WIR
IQI PLACEMENT
CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, AND
FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION(see 6.10.12)
Figure
.
-
6.3 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on
Transition Joints 10 in. (255 mm) and Greater in Length (see see 6.10.7)
Table 6.1
Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Requirements (see 6.10.1)
Source Side Film Side2
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Nominal Nominal
Material Thickness Material Thickness1 Essential Essential
Range, in. Range, mm Designation Hole Designation Hole
Up to 0.25 incl. Up to 6.4 incl. 10 4T 7 4T
Over 0.25 to 0.375 Over 6.4 through 9.5 12 4T 10 4T
Over 0.375 to 0.50 Over 9.5 through 12.7 15 4T 12 4T
Over 0.50 to 0.625 Over 12.7 through 15.9 15 4T 12 4T
Over 0.625 to 0.75 Over 15.9 through 19.0 17 4T 15 4T
Over 0.75 to 0.875 Over 19.0 through 22.2 20 4T 17 4T
Over 0.875 to 1.00 Over 22.2 through 25.4 20 4T 17 4T
Over 1.00 to 1.25 Over 25.4 through 31.7 25 4T 20 4T
Over 1.25 to 1.50 Over 31.7 through 38.1 30 2T 25 2T
Over 1.50 to 2.00 Over 38.1 through 50.8 35 2T 30 2T
Over 2.00 to 2.50 Over 50.8 through 63.5 40 2T 35 2T
Over 2.50 to 3.00 Over 63.5 through 76.2 45 2T 40 2T
Over 3.00 to 4.00 Over 76.2 through 102 50 2T 45 2T
Over 4.00 to 6.00 Over 102 through 152 60 2T 50 2T
Over 6.00 to 8.00 Over 152 through 203 80 2T 60 2T
~~ ~ ~~
Notes:
1. Singie wall radiographic thickness (for tubulars)
2. Applicable to tubular structures only.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 m 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 O500206 O m
lSO/Inspection
HOLE-TYPE IQI OR WIRE IQI ON SOURCE
Note: Alternate source side IQI placement
SIDE MAY BE PLACED ANYWHERE ALONG
permitted for tubular applications and other
THE JOINT
applications when approved by the Engineer.
ALTERNATE
PLACEMENT
MEASURE T2 AT POINT OF MAXIMUM
THICKNESS UNDER HOLE-TYPE IQI
OR WIRE IQI PLACED ON SLOPE T2
LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER SHALL BE
PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED
ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING
FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (see 6.10.12) TI
CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, AND
FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION(see 6.10.12) 10 255
-
Figure 6.4 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on
Transition Joints Less Than 10 in. (255 mm) in Length (see 6.10.7.1)
Table 6.2
Wire Image Quality Indicator (U)Requirements (see 6.10.1)
Nominal Nominal Source Side Film Side2
Material Thickness Material Thickness1 Maximum Wire Diameter Maximum Wire Diameter
Range, in. Range, mm in. mm in. mm
Up to 0.25 inc. Up to 6.4 inc. 0.010 0.25 0.008 0.20
Over 0.25 to 0.375 Over 6.4 to 9.5 0.013 0.33 0.010 0.25
Over 0.375 to 0.625 Over 9.5 to 15.9 0.016 0.41 0.013 0.33
Over 0.625 to 0.75 Over 15.9 to 19.0 0.020 0.51 0.016 0.41
Over 0.75 to 1.50 Over 19.0 to 38.1 0.025 0.63 0.020 0.51
Over 1.50 to 2.00 Over 38.1 to 50.8 0.032 0.81 0.025 0.63
Over 2.00 to 2.50 Over 50.8 to 63.5 0.040 1.o2 0.032 0.81
Over 2.50 to 4.00 Over 63.5 to 102.0 0.050 1.27 0.040 1.o2
Over 4.00 to 6.00 Over 102.0 to 152.0 0.063 1.60 0.050 1.27
Over 6.00 to 8.00 Over 152.0 to 203.0 o. 100 2.54 0.063 1.60
Notes:
1. Single wall radiographic thickness (for tubulars).
2. Applicable to tubular structures only.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Inspection/ 151
4 T DIA (MINIMUM SIZE 0.040)
PLACE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBERS HERE T DIA (MINIMUM SIZE 0.010)
2 T DIA (MINIMUM
SIZE 0.020)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
DESIGN FOR IQIs UP TO BUT
NOT INCLUDING 180.
Table of Dimensions of IQI
(in.)
IQI thickness
and hole
diameter
Number A B C D E F Tolerances
5-20 1.500 0.750 0.438 0.250 0.500 0.250 f 0.0005
f0.015 f0.015 50.015 f0.015 iz0.015 f0.030
1.500 0.750 0.438 0.250 0.500 0.250 f 0.0025
21-59 f0.015 t0.015 irO.015 ir0.015 20.015 f0.030
60-179 2.250 1.375 0.750 0.375 1.o00 0.375 f 0.005
f0.030 f0.030 20.030 t0.030 f0.030 f0.030
Table of Dimensions of IQI
(mm)
IQI thickness
and hole
diameter
Number A B G D E F Tolerances
38.100 19.050 11.I25 6.350 12.700 6.35 f 0.0127
5-20 f0.381 50.381 50.381 +0.381 *0.381 f0.762
21-59 38.100 19.050 11.125 6.350 12.700 6.35 f 0.0635
f0.381 f.0.381 f 0.381 f 0.381 f 0.381 f 0.762
60-179 57.150 34.925 19.050 9.525 25.400 9.525 f0.127
f 0.762 f0.762 f 0.762 f 0.762 50.762 f 0.762
NOTE I . IQIs No. 5 through 9 are not IT, 2T, and 4T.
NOTE 2. Holes shall be true and normal to the IQI. Do not chamfer.
Figure 6.5 -Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Design (see 6.10.7.2)
(Reprinted by permission of the American Society for Testing and Materials, copyright.)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500208 4 m
152/ Inspection
ENCAPSULATEDBETWEEN
TWO SHEETS OF .O30in.
(0.76mm) CLEAR 'VINYL'
PLASTIC
\
FOR SETS A & B, THE
MINIMUM DISTANCE
BETWEENTHE AXIS
OF WIRES IS NOT LESS
ASTM, /- 6 WIRES EQUALLY SPACED
THAN 3 TIMES THE
DIAMETER AND
NOT MORE THAN
5 mm (0.2in.) 1 . ,
MINIMUM 25 mm 11 in.)
FOR SETS A & B.
k
4 5mm LENGTH MINIMUM 50 mm (2in.)
FOR SETS C & D,THE
MINIMUM DISTANCE
BETWEEN THE AXIS
I SETS & D.
OF WIRES IS NOT LESS
THAN 3 TIMES THE
DIAMETER AND
NOT MORE THAN
19 mm (0.75in.)
1 D IDENTIFIC TION
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
MATERIAL GRADE
NUMBER / SET IDENTIFICATION LETTERS
Image quality indicator (wire penetrameter) sizes
Wire diameter, in. (mm)
Set A Set B Set C Set D
0.0032(0.08) 0.010(0.25) 0.032 (0.81) 0.1O (2.5)
0.004 (0.1) 0.013 (0.33) 0.040 (1.02) 0.126 (3.2)
0.005(0.13) 0.016 (0.4) 0.050 (1.27) 0.160 (4.06)
0.0063(0.16) 0.020 (0.51) 0.063 (1.6) 0.20 (5.1)
0.008 (0.2) 0.025 (0.64) 0.080 (2.03) 0.25(6.4)
0.010 (0.25) 0.032(0.81) 0.100(2.5) 0.32(8)
Figure 6.6 -Image Quality Indicator (Wire Penetrameter) (see 6.10.7.3)
(Reprinted by permission of the American Society for Testing and Materials, copyright.)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 = 078426.5 0500209 b =
Inspection/ 153
6.10.9 Film widths shall be sufficient to depict all por- over each of the identical identification and location
tions of the weld joint, including the heat-affected zones, marks made on the steel to provide a means for matching
and shall provide sufficient additional space for the the developed radiograph to the weld. Additional iden-
required hole type IQIs or wire IQI and film identifica- tification information may be pre-printed no less than
tion without infringing upon the area of interest in the 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the edge of the weld or shall be
radiograph. produced on the radiograph by placing lead figures on
the steel.
6.10.10 Quality of Radiographs. All radiographs shall Information required to show on the radiograph shall
be free from mechanical, chemical, or other blemishes to include the owner?scontract identification, initials of the
the extent that they cannot mask or be confused with the radiographicinspection company, initialsof the fabrica-
image of any discontinuity in the area of interest in the tor, the fabricator shop order number, the radiographic
radiograph. Such blemishes include, but are not limited identification mark, the date, and the weld repair
to: number, if applicable.
(1) fogging
(2) processing defects such as streaks,water marks, or
chemical stains
(3) scratches, finger marks, crimps, dirtiness, static 6.11 Acceptability of Welds
marks, smudges, or tears Welds shown by radiographictesting to have discon-
(4) loss of detail due to poor screen-to-film contact tinuities prohibited by 8.15, 9.25, or 10.17.3.2 shall be
(5) false indications due to defective screens or inter- corrected in accordance with 3.7.
nal faults
6.10.11 Density Limitations. The transmitted film den-
sity through the radiographic image of the body of the 6.12 Examination, Report, and
required hole type IQI(s) and the area of interest shallbe Disposition of Radiographs
1.8 minimum for single film viewing for radiographs
made with an X-ray source and 2.0 minimum for radio- 6.12.1 The contractor shall provide a suitable variable
graphs made with a gamma-ray source. For composite intensityilluminator (viewer) withspot review or masked
viewing of double film exposures, the minimum density spot review capability. The viewer shall incorporate a
shall be 2.6. Each radiograph of a composite set shall means for adjustingthe size of the spot under examina-
have a minimum density of 1.3. The maximum density tion. The viewer shall have sufficient capacity to properly
shall be 4.0 for either single or composite viewing. illuminate radiographs with an H & D density of 4.0.
Film review shall be done in an area of subdued light.
6.10.11.1 The density measured shall be H & D den-
sity (radiographic density)F2 6.12.2 Before a weld subject to radiographic testing by
the contractor for the owner is accepted, all of its radio-
6.10.11.2 When weld transitions in thickness are graphs, including any that show unacceptable quality
radiographed and the ratio of the thickness of the thicker prior to repair, and a report interpreting them shall be
section to the thickness of the thinner section is 3 or submitted to the verification Inspector.
greater, radiographs should be exposed to produce sin-
6.12.3 A full set of radiographs for welds subject to
gle film densities of 3.0 to 4.0 in the thinner section.
When this is done, the minimum density requirements of radiographic testing by the contractor for the owner,
6.10.11 shall be waived unless otherwise provided in the including any that show unacceptable quality prior to
repair, shall be delivered to the owner upon completion
contract documents.
of the work. The contractor?s obligation to retain radio-
6.10.12 A radiograph identification mark and two loca- graphs shall cease: (1) upon delivery of this full set to the
tion identificationmarks shall be placed on the steel at owner, or (2) one full year after the completion of the
each radiograph location. A corresponding radiograph contractor?s work, provided the owner is given prior
identification mark and two location identification written notice.
marks, all of which shall show in the radiograph, shallbe
produced by placing lead numbers or letters, or both,
Part C
22. H & D (radiographic)density is a measure of film blacken- Ultrasonic Testing of Groove Welds
ing, expressed as:
D = logI,/I 6.13 General
where:
D = H & D (radiographic) density 6.13.1 The procedures and standards set forth in Part C
I, light intensity on the film,and are to govern the ultrasonic testing of groove welds and
I = light transmitted through the film heat-affected zones between the thicknesses of 51 16 in.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 0784265 0500210 2 a
154/Inspection
(8.0 mm) and 8 in. (203 mm) inclusive, when such testing greater than f 1 dB occurs with a supply voltage change
is required by 6.7 of this Code. These procedures and of 15%nominal or, in the case of a battery, throughout
standards are not be be used for testing tube-to-tube T-, the charge operating life. There shall be an alarm or
Y-, or K-connections. meter to signal a drop in battery voltage prior to instru-
ment shutoff due to battery exhaustion.
Il
6.13.2 Appendix K is an example of an alternativetech-
nique for performing ultrasonic examination of groove 6.15.4 The test instrument shall have a calibrated gain
welds. Variations in testing procedure, equipment, and control (attenuator) adjustablein discrete 1or 2 dB steps
acceptance standards not included in Part C of section 6 over a range of at least 60 dB. The accuracy of the
may be used upon agreement with the Engineer. Such attenuator settings shall be within plus or minus 1 dB.
variations include other thicknesses, weld geometries, The procedure for qualification shall be as described in
transducer sizes, frequencies, couplant, painted surfaces, 6.17.2 and 6.22.2.
testing techniques, etc. Such approved variationsshall be
recorded in the contract records. 6.15.5 The dynamic range of the instrument's CRT dis-
play shall be such that a difference of 1dB of amplitude
6.13.3 To detect possible piping porosity, radiographyis can be easily detected on the CRT.
suggested to supplement ultrasonictesting of electroslag
and electrogas welds. 6.15.6 Straight beam (longitudinal wave) search unit
transducers shall have an active area of not less than
6.13.4 Base Metal. These procedures are not intended 1/2in.2(323 mm2)nor more than 1in? (645 mm2).The
to be employed for the procurement testing of base transducer shall be round or square. Transducer fre-
metals. However, welding related discontinuities (crack- quency shall be 2 to 2.5 MHz. Transducers shall be
ing, lamellartearing, delaminations,etc.) in the adjacent capable of resolving the three reflections as described in
base metal which would not be acceptable under the 6.21.1.3.
provisions of this Code shall be reported to the Engineer
for disposition. 6.15.7 Angle beam search units shall consist of a trans-
ducer and an angle wedge. The unit may be comprised of
the two separate elements or may be an integral unit.
6.14 UT Operator Requirements
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.15.7.1 The transducer frequency shali be between
2 and 2.5 MHz, inclusive.
6.14.1 In satisfying the requirements of 6.7.8, the quali-
fication of the ultrasonic testing operator shall include a 6.15.7.2 The transducer crystal shall be square or
specific and practical examination which shall be based rectangular in shape and may vary from 5/8 in. to 1 in.
on the requirements of this Code. This examinationshall (16 to 25 mm) in width and from 5/8 to 13/16 in. (16 to
require the ultrasonic operator to demonstratethe ability 21 mm) in height (see Figure 6.7). The maximum ratio of
to apply the rules of this Code in the accurate detection width to height shall be 1.2to 1.0, and the minimum ratio
and disposition of flaws. 1.0 to 1.0.
6.14.2 The ultrasonic operator shall, prior to making the 6.15.7.3 The search unit shall produce a sound beam
examination, be furnished or have accessto relevant infor- in the material being tested within plus or minus 2O of
mation regarding weldjoint geometry, material thickness, one of the following proper angles: 70°, 60°, or 45", as
and welding processes used in making the weldment. described in 6.21.2.2.
Any subsequent record of repairs made to the weldment 6.15.7.4 Each search unit shall be marked to clearly
shall also be made available to the ultrasonic operator. indicate the frequency of the transducer, nominal angle
of refraction, and index point. The index point location
procedure is described in 6.21.2.1.
6.15 Ultrasonic Equipment
6.15.1 The ultrasonic instrument shall be the pulse echo
type suitable for use with transducers oscillating at fre-
quencies between 1 and 6 megahertz. The display shall be
an "A" scan rectified video trace on a cathode ray tube
(CRV.
6.15.2 The horizontal linearity of the test instrument WIDTH
shall be qualified over the full sound path distance to be
used in testing in accordance with 6.22.1.
6.15.3 Test instruments shall include internal stabiliza- -
Figure 6.7 Transducer Crystal
tion so that after warm-up, no variation in response (see 6.15.7.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - 1 92 m 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 O500211 4 m
Inspection/155
6.15.7.5 Maximum allowable internalreflections from 6.17 Equipment Qualification
the search unit shall be as described in 6.17.4.
6.17.1 The horizontal linearity of the test instrument
6.15.7.6 The dimensions of the search unit shall be shall be requalified after each 40 hours of instrumentuse
such that the distance from the leading edge of the search in each of the distance ranges that the instrumentwiU be
unit to the index point shall not exceed 1 in. (25 mm). used. The qualificationprocedureshall be in accordance
with 6.22.1. (See Appendix X, for alternative method.)
6.15.7.7 The qualification procedure using the IIW
reference block shall be in accordance with 6.21.2.6 and 6.17.2 The instrument’s gain control (attenuator) shall
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
as shown in Figure 6.8. meet the requirements of 6.15.4 and shall be checked for
correct calibration at two month intervals in accordance
with 6.22.2.
6.16 Reference Standards Alternative methods may be used for calibrated gain
control(attenuator)qualification if proven at least equiv-
6.16.1 The International Institute of Welding (IIW) alent with 6.22.2.
ultrasonic reference block, shown in Figure 6.9, shall be
the standard used for both distance and sensitivity cali- 6.17.3 Maximum internai reflections from each search
bration. Other portable blocks may be used, provided unit shall be verified at a maximum time interval of
the reference level sensitivity for instrument/search unit 40 hours of instrument use in accordance with 6.22.3.
combination is adjusted to be the equivalent of that
achieved with the ITW Block. (See Appendix X, for 6.17.4 With the use of an approved calibration block,
examples). each angle beam search unit shall be checked after each
eight hours of use to determine that the contact face is
6.16.2 The use of a “corner” reflector for calibration flat, that the sound entry point is correct, and that the
purposes is prohibited. beam angle is within the permitted plus or minus 2 O
tolerance in accordance with 6.21.2.1 and 6.21.2.2.
6.16.3 The combination of search unit and instrument Searchunits which do not meet these requirements shall
shall resolve three holes in the RC resolution reference be corrected or replaced.
test block shown in Figure6. 10. Thesearch unit position
is described in 6.21.2.5. The resolutionshallbe evaluated
with the instrument controls set at normal test settings
and with indications from the holes brought to mid- 6.18 Calibration for Testing
screen height. Resolution shall be sufficient to distin-
guish at least the peaks of indications from the three 6.18.1 All calibrations and tests shall be made with the
holes. reject (clipping or suppression) control turned off. Use of
(25 mm)
TOE OR
LEADING EDGE AX ALL ANGLES
SEARCH UNIT
INDEX POINT
.O60in. HOLE
0.6 in.
(15.2 mrn
(36 mm)
Figure 6.8 -Qualification Procedure of Search Unit Using IIW Reference Block (see 6.15.7.7)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS DL.1 92 m 0 7 8 Y 2 b 5 0500232 b m
156/ Inspection
0.080 yp-
Il
I I
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
91
TYPE 1
I I l
II n
I
.. --
41.4 6.6 d 435 k---
165 4
TYPE 2 TYPE 2
I 0.92 23
I
II I
11 I
i II
I
300 L
U.S. CUSTOMARY DIMENSIONS
L- 200 ~
SI DIMENSIONS (mm)
100 -
Notes:
1. The dimensional tolerance between all surfaces involved in referencing or calibrating shall be within
+.O5 inch (.13mm) of detailed dimension.
2. The surface finish of all surfaces to which sound is applied or reflectedfrom shall have a
maximum of 125 pin. r.m.s.
3. All material shall be ASTM A36 or acoustically equivalent.
4. All holes shall have a smooth internal finish and shall be drilled 90’ to the material surface.
5. Degree lines and identificationmarkings shall be indented into the material surface so that permanent
orientation can be maintained.
6. Other approved reference blocks with slightly different dimensions or distance calibration
slot are permissible (see Appendix X).
7. These notes apply to all sketches in Figs. 6.9 and 6.10.
Figure 6.9 -International Institute of Welding (IIW) Ultrasonic Reference Blocks (see 6.16.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 M O784265 0500213 8 M ~~
Inspection/ 157
2.533 1-
-I~ 1.000
c
ALL HOLES ARE 1/16 in. IN DIAMETER
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
RC - RESOLUTION REFERENCE BLOCK
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1-2-
-
TYPE DISTANCE AND SENSITIVITY REFERENCE BLOCK
Figure 6.10 -Qualification Blocks (see 6.16.3)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 0784265 0500214 T m
158/Inspection
- -_ I 152.4 .
25.4 c
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ALL HOLES ARE 1.6 m m IN DIAMETER
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS
RC - RESOLUTION REFERENCE BLOCK
TYPE DS - DISTANCE AND SENSITIVITY REFERENCE BLOCK
-
Figure 6.10 (continued) Qualification Blocks (see 6.16.3)
(Dimensions in Millimeters)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Inspection/ 159
the reject (clipping or suppression) control may alt& the See Appendix DyForm D-1 1for a sample ultrasonic
amplitudelinearity of the instrument and invalidatetest test report form.
results.
6.18.2 Calibration for sensitivity and horizontal sweep
(distance) shall be made by the ultrasonic operator just 6.19 Testing Procedures
prior to and at the location of testing of each weld.
6.19.1 An “x”line for flaw location shail be marked
6.18.3 Recalibration shail be made after a change of on the test face of the weldment in a directionparallel to
operators, each 30 minute maximum time interval, or the weld axis. The location distance perpendicular to
when the electrical circuitry is disturbed in any way the weld axis is based on the dimensional figures on
which includes the following: the detail drawing and usually falls on the centerline of
(1) Transducer change the butt joint welds, and always falls on the near face
(2) Battery change of the connecting member of T and corner joint welds
(3) Electrical outlet change (the face opposite Face C).
(4) Coaxial cable change
(5) Fower outage (failure) 6.19.2 A “Y” accompanied with a weld identification
number shall be clearly marked on the base metal adja-
6.18.4 Calibration for straight beam testing of base cent to the weld that is ultrasonically tested. This mark-
metal shall be made with the search unit applied to Face ing is used for the following purposes:
A of the base metal and performed as follows: (1) Weld identification
(2) Identification of Face A
6.18.4.1 The horizontal sweep shall be adjusted for
(3) Distance measurements and direction (+ or -)
distance calibration to present the equivalent of at least from the “X” line
two plate thicknesses on the CRT screen. (4) Location measurement from weld ends or edges
6.18.4.2 The sensitivity shall be adjusted at a location
6.19.3 Allsurfacesto which asearchunit is applied shall
free of indications so that the first back reflection from
the far side of the plate will be 50 to 75% of full screen be free-ofweld spatter, dirt, grease, oil (other than that
height. used as a couplant), paint, and loose scale and shall have
a contour permitting intimate coupling.
6.18.5 Calibration for angle beam testing shail be per-
formed as follows (see Appendix X, X2.4 for alternative 6.19.4 A couplant material shail be used between the
method). search unit and the test material. The couplant shall be
either glycerin or cellulose gum and water mixture of a
6.18.5.1 The horizontal sweep shall be adjusted to suitable consistency. A wetting agent may be added if
represent the actual sound path distance by using the needed. Light machine oil may be used for couplant on
IIW block or alternative blocks as specified in 6.16.1. calibration blocks.
The distance calibration shall be made using either the
5 in. (130 mm) scale or 10 in. (255 mm) scaleonthe CRT 6.19.5 The entire base meta1 through which ultrasound
screen, whichever is appropriate. If, however, the joint must travel to test the weld shall be tested for laminar
configuration or thickness prevents full examination of reflectors using a straight beam search unit conforming
the weld at either of these settings, the distance calibra- to the requirements of 6.15.6 and calibrated in accord-
tion shall be made using 15 or 20 in. (380 or 510 111111) ance with 6.18.4. If any area of base metal exhibits total
scale as required. The search unit positionis described in loss of back reflection or an indication equal to or greater
6.21.2.3. than the original back reflection height is located in a
position that will interfere with the normal weld scan-
Note: í‘ñe horizontal location of allscreen indicationsis ning procedure, its size, location, and depth from the A
based on the location at which the left side of the trace face shall be determined and reported on the ultrasonic
deflection breaks the horizontal base line. test report and an alternate weld scanning procedure
shall be used.
6.18.5.2 The zero reference level sensitivity used for
flaw evaluation (“by’ on the ultrasonic test report, 6.19.5.1 The reflector size evaluationprocedure shall
Appendix D, Form D-11) is attained by adjusting the be in accordancewith 6.23.1.
calibrated gain control (attenuator) of the flaw detector,
meeting the requirements of 6.15, so that a maximized 6.19.5.2 If part of a weld is inaccessible to testing in
horizontalreference level trace deflection23results on the accordance with the requirements of Table 6.3, due to
CRT screen, in accordance with 6.21.2.4. laminar content recorded in accordance with 6.19.5, the
testing shall be conducted using one or more of the
following alternative procedures as necessary to attain
23. A trace deflection adjusted to horizontal reference line full weld coverage:
height with calibrated gain control (attenuator). (1) Weld surface(s) shall be ground flush.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 m 0784265 0500236 3 m
160/ Inspection
Table 6.3
Testing Angle (see 6.19.5.2)
Procedure chart
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Material thickness, in. (mm)
Weld 5/16(8.0) > 1-1/2 > 1-3/4 >2-1/2 >3-1/2 >4-1/2 >5 >6-1/2 >7
Type to to to to to to to to to
1-1/2(38.1) 1-3/4(44.5) 2-1 /2(63.5) 3-1 /2(88.9) 4-1 /2(114.3) 5(127.0) 6-1 /2(165.1) 7( 177.8) 8(203)
* * * * * * * * *
1G 1G 6 8 9 12
Butt 1 O 1 F or F or F or F or F or F or F 1 2 F
4 5 7 10 11 13
F F F F F F F
T 1 O 1 or 4 or 5 or 7 or 10 or 11 or 13 or - -
XF XF XF XF XF XF XF
F 1G F 1G F 6 F 8 F 9 F 13 F
Corner 1 O 1 or or or or or or or or or or or or or - -
XF 4 XF 5 XF 7 XF 10 XF 11 XF 14 XF
Electrogas 1G 1G P1 6 11 11 11 11
& 1 O 1 O or I** or or or P3 or P3 or P3 or P3 or P3
electroslag 4 3 P3 7 15 15 15 15**
dF$
TRANSMITTER
........
.......
......
......
4 r FACEA
.......
l
...... ,
....
"
......
......
......
........ .......
...... ,
FACEC FACEC .......
.......
......
P-..... ......
.....
FACEB _I x FACEB FACE B I
X
A- FACE B
BUTTJOINT x CORNER JOINT
T-JOINT PITCH-AND-CATCH
TOP QUARTER-70'
r FACEA , / GROUNDFLUSH
MIDDLEHALF-70'
BOTTOMQUARTER-BO'
t
Notes:
1. Where possible, all examinations shali be made from Face A and in Leg 1, unless otherwise specified in this Table.
2. Root areas of single groove weldjoints which have backing strips not requiring removal by contract, shall be tested in Leg 1, where possible, with
Face A being that opposite the backing strip. (Grinding of the weld face or testing from additional weid faces may be necessary to permit complete
scanning of the weld root.)
3. Examinations in Leg II or III shall be made only to satisfy provisions of this table or when necessary to test weld areas made inaccessible by an
unground weld surface, or interference with other portions of the weldment, or to meet the requirements of 6.19.6.2.
4. A maximum of Leg IIIshall be used only where thickness or geometryprevents scanningof complete weld areas and heat affectedzones in Leg I or
Leg II,
5. On tension welds in dynamicallyloaded structures, the top quarter of thickness must be tested with the final leg of sound progressing from Face B
toward Face A, the bottom quarter of thickness must be tested with the f i a l leg of sound progressing from Face A toward Face B;i.e., the top quarter
of thickness shall be tested either from Face A in Leg II or from Face B in Leg I at the contractor's option, unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents.
6. The weld face indicated must be ground flush before using procedure 1G, 6,8,9,12,14, or 15. Face A for both connected members must lie inthe
same plane.
(See Legend on next page)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Inspection/ 161
Table 6.3 (continued)
Legend: P-Pitch and catch shail be conducted for further discontinuity eval-
X- Check from Face "C." uation in only the middle half of the materialthickness with only
G- Grind weid face flush. 45 deg or 70 deg transducersof equal specification,both facingthe
0- Not required. weid. (Transducers must be held in a fmture to control position-
A Face-the face of the material from which the initial scanning is ing-see sketch.) Amplitude calibration for pitch and catch is
done (on T- and corner joints, follow above sketches). normally made by calibrating asinglesearch unit. When switching
B Face- opposite the "A" face (same plate). to dual search units for pitch and catch inspection, there should be
C Face- the face opposite the weld on the connecting member or a assurance that this calibration does not change as a result of
T-or corner joint. instrument variables.
* -Required only where CRT reference height indication of F-Weld metal-basemetalinterfaceindicationsshallbe furtherevalu-
discontinuityis noted at the weld metal-base metal interface ated with either 70, deg 60 deg, or 45 deg transducer-whichever
while searching at scanning levei with primary procedures sound path is nearest to beiig perpendicular to the suspected
selected from fist column. fusion surface.
** -Use 15 in. (380 mm) or 20 in. (510 mm) screen distance
calibration.
Procedure legend Procedure legend
Area of weld thickness Area of weld thickness
TOP Middle Bottom TOP Middle Bottom
No. quarfer half quarter
No. quarter half quarter ~
9 7O"G A ao 45"
1 70" 70" 70"
10 60" B 60" 60"
2 60" 60O 60O
11 45" B 70°** 45"
3 45O 45" 45"
12 70"G A 45" 70"G B
4 60" 70" 70"
13 45" B 45" 45"
5 45" 70" 70"
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
14 70"G A 45" 45"
6 70°G A 70° 600
15 70"G A 70"A B 70"G B
7 60" B 70" 60"
8 70"G A 60O 600
(2) Testing from Faces A and B shall be performed. 6.19.6.1 The testing angle and scanning procedure
(3) Other search unit angles shalí be used. shall be in accordance with those shown in Table 6.3.
6.19.6 Welds shall be tested using an angle beam search 6.19.6.2 All butt joint welds shalI be tested from each
unit conforming to the requirements of 6.15.7 with the side of the weld axis. Comer and T-joint welds shall be
instrument calibrated in accordance with 6.18.5 using primarily tested from one side of the weld axis only.
the angle as shown in Table 6.3. Following calibration AU welds shall be tested using the applicable scanning
and during testing, the only instrument adjustment per- pattern or patterns shown in Figure 6.12 as necessary to
mitted is the sensitivity level adjustment with the cali- detect both longitudinal and transverse flaws. It is
brated gain control (attenuator). The reject (clipping or intended that, as a minimum, all welds be tested by
suppression) controlshallbe turned off. Sensitivity shall passing sound through the entire volume of the weld
be increased from the reference level for weld scanningin and the heat-affected zone in two crossing directions,
accordance with Tables 8.2 or 9.3, as applicable. wherever practical.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
162/Inspection
6.19.6.3 When a discontinuity indication appears on 6.20 Preparation and Disposition
the screen, the maximum attainable indication from the of Reports
discontinuity shall be adjusted to produce a horizontal
reference level trace deflection on the CRT screen. This 6.20.1 A report form which clearly identifies the work
adjustment shall be made with the calibrated gain con- and the area of inspection shall be completed by the
trol (attenuator), and the instrument reading in decibels ultrasonicInspector at the time of inspection. The report
shall be used as the “Indication Level,” “a,” for calculat- form for welds that are acceptable need only contain
ing the “Indication Rating,” “d,” as shown on the test sufficient informationto identify the weld, the Inspector
report (Appendix DyForm D-11). (signature), and the acceptability of the weld. An exam-
ple of such a form is shown in Appendix D, Form D-11.
6.19.6.4 The “Attenuation Factor,” “c,” on the test
report is attained by subtracting 1 in. (25 mm) from the 6.20.2 Before a weld subject to ultrasonic testing by the
sound path distance and multiplying the remainder by 2. contractor for the owner is accepted, ali report forms
This factor shall be rounded out to the nearest dB value. pertaining to the weld, including any that show unaccept-
Fractional values less than 1/ 2 dB shall be reduced to the able quality prior to repair, shali be submitted to the
lower dB level and those of 1/2 or greater increased to Inspector.
the higher level.
6.20.3 A full set of completed report forms of welds
6.19.6.5 The “Indication Rating,” “d,” in the UT subject to ultrasonic testing by the contractor for the
Report, Appendix D, Form D-11, represents the alge- owner, including any that show unacceptable quality
braic difference in decibels between the indication level prior to repair, shall be delivered to the owner upon
and the reference level with correctionfor attenuation as completion of the work. The contractor’s obligation to
indicated in the following expressions: retain ultrasonic reports shall cease (1) upon delivery of
this full set to the owner, or (2) one full year after
Instruments with gain in dB: completion of the contractor’s work, provided that the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
a-b-c=d owner is given prior written notice.
Instrumentswith attenuationin dB:
b-a-c=d
6.19.7 The length of flaws shall be determined in accord- 6.21 Calibration of the Ultrasonic
ance with procedure 6.23.2. Unit With IIW or Other
6.19.8 Each weld discontinuity shall be accepted or Approved Reference Block
rejected on the basis of its indication rating and its
length, in accordance with Table 8.2 for statically loaded See6.16andFigures6.9,6.1O,and6.11.
structures or Table 9.3 for dynamically loaded struc- 6.21.1 Longitudinal Mode
tures, whichever is applicable. Only those discontinuities
which are rejectable need be recorded on the test report, 6.21.1.1 Distance Calibration. See Appendix X, X1
except that for welds designated in the contract docu- for alternative method.
ments as being “Fracture Critical,” ratings which are up (1) The transducer shall be set in position G on the
to and including 6 dB less critical than rejectability shall IIW block.
be recorded on the test report. (2) The instrument shall be adjusted to produce indi-
cations at 1 in. (25 mm on a metric block), 2 in. (50 mm
6.19.9 Each rejectable discontinuity shall be indicated on a metric block), 3 in. (75 mm on a metric block), 4 in.
on the weld by a mark directly over the discontinuityfor (100 mm on a metric block), etc., on the CRT.
its entire length. The depth from the surface and indica-
tion rating shall be noted on nearby base metal. 6.21.1.2 Amplitude. See Appendix X, X1.2for alter-
native method.
6.19.10 Welds found unacceptable by ultrasonic testing (1) The transducer shall be set in position G on the
shall be repaired by methods permitted by 3.7 of this IIW block.
Code. Repaired areas shall be retested ultrasonically (2) The gain shall be adjusted until the maximized
with results tabulated on the original form (if available) indication from first back reflection attains 50 to 75%
or additional report forms. screen height.
6.19.11 Evaluation of retested repaired weld areas must 6.21.1.3 Resolution
be tabulated on a new’line on the report form. If the (1) The transducer shall be set in position F on the
original report form is used, an R1, R2,. ..R, shall prefix IIW block.
the indication number. If additional report forms are (2) Transducer and instrument shall resolve all three
used, the R number shall prefix the report number. distances.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 m 07842b.5 0500239 9 m
Inspection/ 163
(2) For the selected angle, the transducer shall be
moved back and forth over the line indicative of the
transducer angle until the signal from the radius is max-
imized. The sound entry point on the transducer shall be
compared with the angle mark on the calibration block
(tolerance92"). (See Appendix X, X2.2 for alternative
methods)
i
" & O
I I
IIW BLOCK
6.21.2.3 Distance Calibration Procedure. The trans-
ducer shall be set in position D on the IIW block (any
angle). The instrument shall then be adjusted to attain
indications at 4 in. (100 mm on a metric block) and 8 in.
(200 mm on a metric block) or 9 in. (225 on a metric
block) on the CRT; 4 in. (102 mm) and 9 in. (230 mm) on
Type 1block; or 4 in. (102 mm) and 8 in. (203 mm) on a
Type 2 block. (See Appendix X, X2.3 for alternative
method)
6.21.2.4 Amplitude or Sensitivity Calibration Proce-
dure. The transducer shall be set in position A on the
IIW block (any angle). The maximized signal shall then
be adjusted from the 0.06 in. (1.5 mm) hole to attain a
horizontal reference line height indication. (See Appen-
dix X, X2.4 for alternative method.) The maximum
decibel reading obtained shail be used as the "Reference
Level" "b" reading on the Test Report sheet (Appendix
DyForm D-11) in accordance with 6.16.1.
RESOLUTION BLOCK DS BLOCK
6.21.2.5 Resolution
(1) The transducershall be set on resolution block RC
Figure 6.11 -Transducer Positions (Typical) position Q for 70" angle, position R for 60" angle, or
position S for 45" angle.
(see 6.21) (2) Transducer and instrument shall resolve the three
test holes, at least to the extent of distinguishing the
6.21.1.4 Horizontal Linearity Qualification. QuaMi- peaks of the indications from the three holes.
cation procedure shall be per 6.17.1. 6.21.2.6 Approach Distance of Search Unit. The
6.21.1.5 Gain Control (Attenuation) Qualification. minimum allowable distance between the toe of the
The qualificationprocedure shall be in accordancewith search unit and the edge of IIW block shall be as follows
6.17.2 or an alternative method, in accordance with (See Figure 6.8):
6.17.2.1, shall be used. for 70" transducer,
X = 2 in. (50 mm)
6.21.2 Shear Wave Mode ('kansverse) for 60" transducer
6.21.2.1 The transducer sound entry point (index X = 1-7/ 16 in. (37 mm)
point) shall be located or checked by the following for 45O transducer,
procedure: X = 1 in.(25mm)
(1) The transducer shall be set in position D on the
IIW block.
(2) The transducer shail be moved until the signal
from the radius is maxhked. The point on the trans- 6.22 Equipment Qualification
ducer which aligns with the radius line on the calibration Procedures
block is the point of sound entry. (See Appendix X, X2.1
for alternative method.) 6.22.1 Horizontal Linearity: Procedure
6.21.2.2 The transducer sound path angle shall be Note: Since this qualijkation procedure is performed
checked or determined by one of the following pro- with a straight beam search unit which produces longi-
cedures: tudinal waves with a sound velocity of almost double
(1) The transducer shall be set in position B on IIW that of shear waves, it is necessary to double the shear
block for angles 40" through 60°, or in position C on wave distance ranges to be used in applying this
IIW blockfor angles 60" through70". (See Figure6.11.) procedure.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 72 0784265 0500220 5 M
Example: The use of a 10in. (255 mm) screen calibration (10) Steps 7,8, and 9 shall be repeated consecutively
in shear wave would require a 20 in. (510 mm) screen until the full range of the gain control (attenuator) is
calibration for this qualification procedure. The follow- reached (60 dB minimum).
ing procedure shall be used for instrument qualification: (1I) The information from columns “a” and “b” shall
(See Appendix X, X3, for alternative method) be applied to equation 6.22.2.2 or the nomograph de-
(1) A straight beam search unit shall be coupled meet- scribed in 6.22.2.3 to calculate the corrected dB.
ing the requirements of 6.15.6 to the IIW or DS blockin (12) Corrected dB from step 11 to column “~”shali be
Position G, T, or U (see Figure 6.11) as necessary to applied.
attain five back reflections in the qualification range (13) Column “c” value shall be subtraAed from
being certified. (See Figure 6.1 1) Column “a”value and the difference in Column “d,” dB
(2) The first and fifth back reflections shall be adjusted error shall be%applied.
to their proper locations with use of the distance calibra-
tion and zero delay adjustments. Note: ïñese values may be either positive or negative
(3) Each indication shall be adjusted to reference level and so noted. Examples of Application of Forms 0 - 8 ,
with the gain or attenuation control for horizontal loca- 0-9, and D-IO are found in Appendix D.
tion examination. (14) Information shall be tabulated on a form, includ-
(4) Each intermediate trace deflection location shall ing minimum equivalent information as displayed on
be correct within 2% of the screen width. Form D-8, and the unit evaluated in accordance with
6.22.2 dB Accuracy instructions shown on that form.
(15) Form D-9 provides a relatively simple means of
6.22.2.1 Procedure evaluating data from item (14). Instructions for this
evaluation are given in (16) through (18).
Note: In order to attain the required accuracy (it 1%) in (16) The dB informationfrom column “e”(Form D-8)
reading the indication height, the CRT screen must be shall be applied vertically and dB reading from column
graduated vertically at 2% intervals at horizontal mid- “a”(Form D-8) horizontally as X and Y coordinates for
screen. ïñese graduations shall be pláced on the CRT plotting a dB curve on Form D-9.
between 60% and 100% of screen height. This may be (17) The longest horizontal length, as represented by
accomplished with use of a graduated transparent screen the dB reading difference, which can be inscribed in a
overlay. If thW.overlay is applied as apermanentpart of rectangle representing 2 dB in height, denotes the dB
the ultrasonic unit, care should be taken that the overlay range in which the equipment meets the Code require-
does not obscure normal testing displays. ments. The minimum allowable range is 60 dB.
(18) Equipment that does not meet this minimum
(I) A straight beam search unit shall be coupled, requirement may be used, provided correction factors
meeting the requirements of 6.15.6 to the DS block are developed and used for flaw evaluation outside the
shown in Figure 6.10 and position “T,” Figure 6.1 1. instrument acceptable linearity range, or the weld testing
(2) The distance calibration shall be adjusted so that and flaw evaluation is kept within the acceptable vertical
the first 2 in. (50 mm) back reflection indication (here- linearity range of the equipment. Note: The dB emor
after called “the indication”j is at horizontal mid-screen. figures (Column “D”) may be used as correction factor
(3) The calibrated gain or attenuation control shall be figures.
adjusted so that the indication is exactly at or slightly
above 40% screen height. 6.22.2.2 The following equation is used to calculate
(4) The search unit shall be moved toward position U, decibels:
see Figure 6.11, until the indication is at exactly 40%
screen height.
(5) The sound amplitude shall be increased 6 dB with
the calibrated gain or attenuation control. The indica- or
tion level theoretically should be exactly at 80% screen
height. dB2=20XLog (%)
%2
+dB1
(6) The dB reading shall be recorded under “a” and
actual % screen height under “b” from step 5 on the
certification report (Appendix D, Form D-8), Line 1. As related to Appendix D, Form D-8:
(7) The search unit shall be moved further toward dB1 = Column a
position U, Figure 6.1 1, until the indication is at exactly dB2 COlumnc
40% screen height. %i Column b
(8) Step 5 shall be repeated. %2 Defined on Form D-8
(9) Step 6 shall be repeated; except, information
should be applied to the next consecutiveline on Appen- 6.22.2.3 The following notes apply to the use of the
dix D, Form D-8. nomograph in Appendix D, Form D-10:
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.3 92 m 07842b5 0500223 7 m
Inspection1165
(1) Columns a, bycyd, and e are on certificationsheet, tions which have dB ratings more serious than for a Class
Appendix DyForm D-8. D indication. The length of such indication shall be
(2) The A, By and C scales are on the nomograph, determined by measuring the distance between the
Appendix DyForm D-10. transducer centerline locations where the indication
(3) The zero points on the Cscale must be prefixed by rating amplitude drops 50% (6 dB) below the rating for
adding the necessary value to correspond with the the applicable flaw classification. This length shall be
instrument settings; i.e., O, 10,20, 30, etc. recorded under ‘‘discontinuitylength”on the test report.
Where warranted by flaw amplitude, this procedure shall
6.22.2.4 The following procedures apply to the use of be repeated to determinethe length of Class A, B and C
the nomograph in Appendix DyForm D10: flaws.
(1) A straight line between the decibel reading from
Column a applied to the C scale and the corresponding
percentage from Column b applied to the A scale shall be
extended.
(2) The point where the straight line from step 1 6.24 Scanning Patterns
crosses the pivot line B as a pivot point for a second
straight line shall be used. See Figure 6.12.
(3) Asecond straightline from the average %point on
the A scale through the pivot point developed in step 2 6.24.1 Longitudinal Discontinuities
and on to the dB scale C shall be extended. 6.24.1.€ Scanning Movement A. Rotation angle a =
(4) This point on the C scale is indicative of the loo.
corrected dB for use in Column c.
6.24.1.2 Scanning MovementB. Scanning distance b
6.22.2.5 For an example of the use of the nomograph, shall be such that the section of weld being tested is
see Appendix DyForm D-10. covered.
6.22.3 Internal Reflections: Procedure 6.24.1.3 Scanning Movement C. Progression dis-
(1) Calibrate theequipment in accordance with 6.18.5.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tance c shall be approximately one-half the transducer
(2) Remove the searchunit from the calibrationblock width.
without changing any other equipment adjustments.
(3) Increase the calibrated gain or attenuation 20 dB Note: movements A, B, and C are combined into one
more sensitive than reference level. scanning pattern.
(4) The CRT screen area beyond 1/2 in. (13 mm)
sound path and above reference level height shall be free 6.24.2 Transverse Discontinuities
of any indication.
6.24.2.1 Scanning pattern D is to be used when welds
are ground flush.
6.24.2.2 Scanning pattern E is to be used when the
6.23 Flaw Size Evaluation Procedures weld reinforcement is not ground flush. Scanning angle
e 15O max.
6.23.1 Straight (longitudinal)Beam Testing. The size of
lamellar discontinuities is not always easily determined, Note: ïñe scanningpattern is to be such that the full
especially those that are smaller than the transducer size. weld section is covered.
When the discontinuityis larger than the transducer, a
6.24.3 Electroslag or Electrogas Welds (Additional
full loss of back reflection will occur and a 6 dB loss of
amplitude and measurement to the centerline of the -
Scanning Pattern) Scanning Pattern E
transducer is usually reliable for determiningflawedges. Search unit rotation angle e between 45O and 60’.
However, the approximate size evaluation of those Note: The scanningpattern shall be such that the full
reflectors, which are smaller than the transducer, must weld section is covered.
be made by beginning outside of the discontinuity with
equipment calibrated in accordance with 6.18.4 and
moving the transducer toward the area of discontinuity
until an indication on the CRT screen begins to form.
The leading edge of the search unit at this point is 6.25 Examples
indicative of the edge of the discontinuity.
dB Accuracy Certification. Appendix Dy shows
6.23.2 Angle Beam (Shear) Testing. The following examples of the use of Forms D-8, D-9, and D-10 for the
procedure shall be used to determine lengths of indica- solution to a typical application of 6.22.2.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 9 2 m 0784265 0500222 9 m
166/Inspection
r
I
WELDAXIS .
l I
-- - - I
I 1
PATTERN D
PATTERN E
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I - C - I
MOVEMENT A MOVEMENT C
MOVEMENT B
Notes:
1. Testing patterns are all symmetrical around the weld axis with the exception of pattern
D which is conducted directly over the weld axis.
2. Testing from both sides of the weld axis is to be made wherever mechanically possible.
Figure 6.12 -Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns (see 6.24)
Part D rejection) and the recording medium shall be no less than
Other Examination Methods that required for radiography.
6.26 General 6.27.2 Procedures. Written procedures shall contain
the following essential variables:
6.26.1 This part contains Nondestructive Examination (1) Specificequipmentidentification including manu-
(NDE) methods not contained in Parts B and C of facture, make, model, and serial number
section 6 of this Code. The NDE methods set forth in (2) Specificradiation and imaging control settingsfor
Part D require written procedures, qualifications, and each combination of variables established herein
specific written approval of the Engineer. (3) Weld thickness ranges
(4) Weld joint types
( 5 ) Scanning speed
6.27 Radiation Imaging Systems (6) Radiation source to weld distance
Including Real-Time Imaging (7) Image conversion screen to weld distance
(8) Angle of X-rays through the weld (from normal)
6.27.1 General. Examination of welds may be per- (9) IQI location (source side or screen side)
formed using ionizing radiation methods other than (10) Type of recording medium (video recording,
radiography, such as electronic imaging, including real- photographic still film, photographic movie film or
time imaging systems, when so approved by the Engi- other acceptable mediums)
neer. Sensitivity of such examination as seen on the (11) Computer enhancement (if used)
monitoring equipment (when used for acceptance and (12) Width of radiation beam
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m O784265 0500223 O m
Inspection/ 167
6.27.3 Procedure Qualification. Procedures shalí be used. IQI placement shall be as specified in Part B for
qualified by testing the radiation, imaging, and recording static examination. For in-motion examination, place-
system to establish and record all essential variables and ment shall be as follows:
conditions. Qualification testing shall consist of demon- (1) Two IQIs positioned at each end of area of interest
strating that each combination of essential variables or and tracked with the run
ranges of variables can provide the minimum required (2) One IQI at each end of the run and positioned at a
sensitivity. Test results shall be recorded on the medium distance no greater than 10ft (3 m) between any two IQIs
that is to be used for production examination. Proce- during the run
dures shall be approved by an individual qualified as
ASNT SNT-TC-IA, Level III (see 6.27.4) and by the 6.27.6 Image Enhancement. Computer enhancement
Engineer. of images is acceptable for improving the image and
obtaining additional information providing required
6.27.4 Personnel Qualifications. In addition to the per-
minimum sensitivity is maintained. Recorded enhanced
sonnel qualifications of 6.7.8, the following qualitica-
images shall be clearly marked that enhancement was
tions shall apply:
used and give the enhancement procedures.
(1) Level III-shali have a minimum of six months
experience using the same or similar equipment and 6.27.7 Records. Radiationimaging examinations which
procedures for examination of welds in structural or are used for acceptance or rejection of welds shall be
piping metallic materials. recorded on an acceptablemedium. The recorded images
(2) Levels I and II-shall be certified by the Level III shall be in-motion or static, whichever are used to accept
above and have a minimum of three months experience or reject the welds. A written record shall be included
using the same or similar equipment and procedures for with the recorded images giving the following informa-
examination of welds in structural or piping metallic tion as a minimum.
materials. Qualification shall consist of written and prac- (1) Identification and description of welds examined
tical examinations for demonstrating capability to use (2) Procedure(s) used
the specific equipment and procedures to be used for (3) Equipment used
production examination. (4) Locations of the welds within the recorded medium
6.27.5 Image Quality Indicator. The wire type image (5) Results, including alist of unacceptable welds and
quality indicator (IQI), as described in Part Byshall be repairs and their locations within the recorded medium
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 9 2 m O784265 0500224 2 m
7. Stud Welding
7.1 Scope
Section7 containsgeneralrequirements for welding of
steel studs to and in addition, it stipulatesspecific
requirements:
(1) For workmanship, pre-production testing, opera-
tor qualification, and application qualification testing
when required, all to be performed by the contractor
(2) For fabricationlerection and verifcation inspec-
tion of stud welding during production
(3) For mechanical properties of steel studs, and
requirements for qualificationof stud bases, aií tests and
documentation to be furnished by the stud manufacturer
7.2 General Requirements
Note: L = manufactured length before welding
7.2.1 Studs shail be of suitable design for arc welding to
steel members with the use of automatically timed stud Standard dimensions, in.
welding equipment. The type and size of the stud shailbe
as specified by the drawings, specifications, or special Shank Length Head Minimum head
provisions. For headed type studs, see Figure 7.1. diameter (C) tolerances (L) diameter (H) height (T)
7.2.2 An arc shield (ferrule) of heat resistant ceramic or f 1/16 If 1/64 9/32
other suitablematerial shallbe furnished with each stud.
5/8 +o'ooo
-0.010 f 1/16 1-114f 1/64 9/32
7.2.3 A suitable deoxidizingand arc stabilizing flux for
welding shall be furnished with each stud of 5/16 in.
(8.0 mm) diameter or larger. Studs less than 5 / 16 in. in
314 :::E I1116 1-1/4f1/64 318
diameter may be furnished with or without flux.
7.2.4 Only studs with qualified stud bases shali be used.
A stud base, to be qualified, shall have passed the test Standard dimensions, mm
prescribed in Appendix M.The arc shield used in pro-
duction shall be the same as used in qualificationtests or
as recommended by the manufacturer. Qualification of
í2.7 :::z f 1.6 25.4f0.4 7.1
stud bases in accordance with Appendix M shall be at 15.9 f1.6 31.7 f 0.4 7.1
the Manufacturer's expense.
19.0 -0.38
+o'oQ f 1.6 31.7 f0.4 9.5
7.2.5 Finish shall be produced by heading, rolling, or
machining. Finished studs shail be of uniform quality 22.1 :1:: f 1.6 34.9f 0.4 9.5
24. Approved steels: for studs, see 7.3.1; for base metais, see
Table 4.1 (Groups I and II). For guidance, see Commentary Figure 7.1 -Dimension and Tolerances of
C7.6.1. Standard Type Shear Connectors (see 7.2.1)
169
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 E 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500225 4
170/Stud Welding
and condition, free of injuriouslaps, fins, seams, cracks,
twists, bends, or other injurious discontinuities. Radial
cracks or bursts in the head of a stud shall not be
the cause for rejection, provided that the cracks or
bursts do not extend more than half the distance from
the head peripheryto the shank, as determined by visual
inspection.25
7.2.6 Only bases qualified under Appendix IX shall be
used. When requested by the Engineer, the contractor
shall provide the following information:
(1) A description of the stud and arc shield
SLOTTED FIXTURESTO
HOLDSTUDHEAD
AND SPECIMEN PLATE
-( I i 1
(2) Certification from the manufacturer that the stud
base is qualified as specified in 7.2.4
(3) Qualification test data
7.3 Mechanical Requirements
7.3.1 Studs shall be made from cold drawn bar stock
conforming to the requirements of ASTM A108, Speci-
$cation for Steel Bars, Cold Finished Standard Quality, t
Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive, either semi-killed
or killed deoxidation. Figure 7.2 -Typical Tension Test Fixture
(see 7.3.2)
7.3.1.1 Mechanical property requirements of studs
other than outlined below shall be specified by the forming to the requirements of 7.3. The mechanical tests
Engineer. shall be on finished studs provided by the manufacturer
of the studs. The number of tests to be performed shall be
73.1.2 At the manufacturer's option, mechanical specified by the Engineer.
properties of studs shall be determined by testing either
the steel after cold finishing or the full diameter finished 7.3.5 The Engineer may select studs of each type and size
studs. In either case, the studs shall conform to the used under the contract as necessary for checking the
requirements shown in Table 7.1. requirements of 7.2 and 7.3. Furnishingthese studs shall
be at the contractor's expense. Testing shall be at the
73.2 Mechanical properties shall be determined in owner's expense,
accordancewith the applicable sections of ASTM A370,
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. A typical test
fixture is used, similar to that shown in Figure 7.2. 7.4 Workmanship
73.3 Upon request by the Engineer, the contractor shall 7.4.1 At the time of welding, the studs shall be free from
furnish rust, rust pits, scale, oil, moisture, or other deleterious
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) The stud manufacturer's certification that the matter that would adversely affect the welding operation.
studs, as delivered, conform to the applicable require- 7.4.2 The stud base shaii not be painted, galvanized, or
ments of 7.2 and 7.3. cadmium-plated prior to welding.
(2) Certified copies of the stud manufacturer's test
reports covering the last completed set of in-plant quality 7.4.3 The areas to which the studs are to be welded shall
control mechanical tests, required by 7.3 for each stock be free of scale, rust, moisture, or other injurious mate-
size delivered. The quality control test shall have been rial to the extent necessary to obtain satisfactory welds.
made within the six month period before delivery of the These areas may be cleaned by wire brushing, scaling,
studs. prick-punching, or grinding.26
73.4 When quality control tests are not available, the 7.4.4 The arc shields or ferrules shall be kept dry. Any
contractor shall furnish mechanical test reports con- arc shields which show signs of surface moisture from
dew or rain shall be oven dried at 250" F (120" C) for two
hours before use.
25. Heads of shear connectors or anchor studs are subject to
cracks or bursts, which arenames for the same thing. Cracks or 7.4.5 Longitudinal and lateral spacings of stud shear
bursts designate an abrupt interruption of the periphery of the connectors (type B) with respect to each other and to
stud head by radial separation of the metal. Such interruptions
do not adversely affect the structuralstrength, corrosion resist- 26. Extreme care should be exercised when welding through
ance, or other functional requirements of headed studs. metal decking.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Stud Welding/ 171
direct current straight polarity power. Welding voltage,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table 7.1 current, time, and gun settings for lift and plunge should
Mechanical Property Requirements for Studs be set at optimum settings, based on past practice, recom-
(see 7.3.1.2) mendations of stud and equipment manufacturer, or both.
ANSI/ AWS C5.4, Recommended Practices for Stud
Type A* Type B** Welding, should also be used for technique guidance.
Tensile strength 55 O00 psi min. 60 O00 psi min. 7.5.2 If two or more stud welding guns are to be oper-
(380 MPa) (415 MPa) ated from the same power source, they shall be inter-
Yield strength (0.2% offset) - 50 O00 psi min. locked so that only one gun can operate at a time, and so
(345 MPa) that the power source has fully recovered from making
Elongation (% in 2 in.) 17% min. 20% min. one weld before another weld is started.
Reduction of area 50% min. 50% min. 7.5.3 While in operation, the welding gun shall be held
in position without movement until the weld metal has
*Type A studs shali be general purpose studs of any type and sizeused solidified.
for purposes other than shear transfer in composite beam design and
construction. 7.5.4 Welding shall not be done when the base metal
**Type B studs shali be studs that are headed, bent, or of other
configurationin1/2in.(12.7mm),5/8in.(15.9mm),3/4in.(19mm), temperatureis below0°F(-18'C) or whenthesurfaceis
and7/8in. (22.2mm)diameterthat areused as anessentialcomponent wet or exposed to falling rain or snow. When the
in composite beam design and construction. temperature of the base metal is below 32OF (OOC), one
additional stud in each 100 studs welded shall be tested
by methods specified in 7.7.1.3 and 7.7.1.4, except that
edges of beam or girder flanges may vary amaximum of the angle of testing shallbe approximately 15'. This is in
1in. (25 mm) from the location shown in the drawings. addition to the first two studs tested for each start of a
The minimum distance from the edge of a stud base to
new production period or change in ~et-up.2~
the edge of a flangeshall be the diameter of the stud plus
118 in. (3 mm), but preferably not less than 1-112 in. 7.5.5 At the option of the contractor, studs may be
(38 mm). welded using prequalified FCAW, GMAW or SMAW
7.4.6 After welding, arc shields shall be broken free from processes, provided the following requirements are met:
studs to be embedded in concrete, and, where practical, 7.5.5.1 Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent to
from ali other studs. a weld shall be free from loose or thick scale, slag, rust,
7.4.7 The studs, after welding, shall be free of any dis- moisture, grease, and other foreign material that would
continuities or substances that would interfere with their prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes.
intended function. However, nonfusion on the legs of the 7.5.5.2 For fillet welds, the end of the stud shall also
flash" and small shrink fissures are be clean.
7.5.5.3 For fillet welds, the stud base shall be prepared
7.5 Technique so that the base of the stud fits against the base metal.
7.5.1 Studs shall be welded with automatically timed 7.5.5.4 When fillet welds are used, the minimum size
stud welding equipment connected to a suitable source of shall be the larger of those required in Table 2.2 or Table
7.2.
27. The expelled metal around the base of the stud is desig-
nated as gash in accordance with the definition of flash in 7.5.5.5 The base metal to which studs are welded shall
Appendix B of this code. It is not a f i e t weld such as those be preheated in accordance with the requirements of
formed by conventional arc welding. The expelled metal, Table 4.3.
which is excess to the weld required for strength, is not detri-
mental but, on the contrary, is essentialto provide agood weld. 7.5.5.6 SMAW welding shall be performed using low
The containment of this excess molten metal around a welded hydrogen electrodes 5/32 or 3/ 16 in. (4.0 or 4.8 mm) in
stud by the ferrule (arc shield) assists in securing sound fusion diameter, except that a smalier diameter electrode may
of the entire cross section of the stud base. The stud weld flash be used on studs 7/ 16 in. (11.1 mm) or less in diameter
may have nonfusion in its vertical leg and overlap on its hori- for out-of-position welds.
zontal leg; and it may contain occasional. small shrink fissures
or other discontinuitiesthat usuallyform at the top of the weld 7.5.5.7 Welded studs shall be visually inspected per
flash with essentially radial or longitudinal orientation, or 6.6.1.
both, to the axis of thestud. Suchnonfusion on the vertical leg
of the flash and small.shrinkfissures are acceptable. 29. Set-up includes stud gun, power source, stud diameter, gun
28. The f i e t weld profiles shownin Figure 3.4 do not apply to lift and plunge, total welding lead length, and changes greater
the flash of automatically timed stud welds. than f 5% in current (amperage) and time.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L * L 92 U 07842b5 0500227 ô U
1721Stud Welding
7.6.6 Test Methods
Table 7.2
Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Small Diameter 7.6.6.1 Bend Test. Studs shall be bend tested by being
Studs (see 7.5.5.1) bent 90" from their original axis. A stud application
shall be considered qualified if the studs are bent 90" and
Stud Diameter Min. Size Fillet fracture occurs in the plate or shape material or in the
shank of the stud and not in the weld.
in.
- mm
- in.
- mm
- 7.6.6.2 Torque Test. Studs shall be torque tested
114 thru7/16 6.4 thru 11.1 3/ 16 5 using a torque test arrangement that is substantially in
112 12.7 114 6 accordance with Figure 7.3. A stud application shall be
5/8,3/4,7/8 15.9, 19, 22.2 5 / 16 8
considered qualified if all test specimens are torqued to
1 25.4 318 10
destruction without failure in the weld.
STUD 7
7.6 Stud Application Qualification -
Requirements
7.6.1 Purpose. Studs which are shop or field applied in
the flat (down-hand) position to a planar and horizontal
surface are deemed prequalifïed by virtue of the manu-
facturer's stud base qualification tests (Appendix IX),
and no further application testing is required. The limit
of flat position is defined as 0"-15' slope on the surface
to which the stud is applied. Some non-prequalified stud
applications that require tests of this section are:
(1) Studs which are applied on non-planar surfaces or
s
to a planar surface in the vertical or overhead positions. Note: The dimensions shall be appropriate to the size of the
(2) Studs which are welded through decking. The stud. The threads of the stud shall be clean and free of lubricant
tests should be with material representative of the condi- other than the residue of cutting oil.
tion to be used in construction.
(3) Studs welded to other than Groups I or II steels Required torque for testing threaded studs
listed in Table 4.1. Nominal diameter Threads per inch
of studs & series designated Testing torque
7.6.2 Responsibilities for Tests. The contractor or stud in. mm ft-lb J
applicator shall be responsible for the performance of 1/4 6.4 28 UNF 5.0 6.8
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
these tests. Tests may be performed by the contractor or 1/4 20 UNC 4.2 5.7
stud applicator, the stud manufacturer, or by another 5/16 7.9 24 UNF 9.5 12.9
testing agency satisfactory to all parties involved. 5/16 18 UNC 8.6 11.7
3/8 9.5 24 UNF 17.0 23.0
7.6.3 Preparation of Specimens 3/8 16 UNC 15.0 20.3
7/16 11.1 20 UNF 27.0 36.6
7.6.3.1 Test specimens shall be prepared by welding 7/16 14 UNC 24.0 32.5
the studs being qualified to specimen plates of ASTM 1 /2 12.7 20 UNF 42.0 57.0
1 /2 13 UNC 37.0 50.2
A36 steel or any base metal listed in Table 4.1, Groups I
and II. 9/16 14.3 18 UNF 60.0 81.4
9/16 12 UNC 54.0 73.2
7.6.3.2 Weld position, nature of surface welded to, 5/8 15.9 18 UNF 84.0 114.0
5/0 1 1 UNC 74.0 100.0
current, and t h e shall be recorded.
3/4 19.0 16 UNF 147.0 200.0
3/4 10 UNC 132.0 180.0
7.6.4 Number of Specimens. Ten specimens shall be
7/8 22.2 14 UNF 234.0 320.0
welded consecutively using recommended procedures 7/8 9 UNC 212.0 285.0
and settings for each diameter, position, and surface 1 25.4 12 UNF 348.0 470.0
geometry. 1 8 UNC 318.0 430.0
7.6.5 Test Required. The ten specimens shall be tested
using one or more of the following methods: bending, Figure 7.3 -Torque Testing Arrangement and
torquing, or tensioning. Table of Testing Torques (see 7.6.6.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS DL.1 92 0784265
Stud Welding/ 173
7.6.6.3 Tension Test. Studs shall be tension tested to 7.7.2 Production Welding. Once production welding
destruction using any machine capable of supplying the has begun, any changes made to the welding set-up, as
required force. A stud application shall be considered determined in 7.7.1, shall require that the testing in
qualified if the test specimens do not fail inthe weld. 7.7.1.3 and 7.7.1.4 be performed prior to resuming pro-
duction welding.
7.6.7 Application Qualification Test Data shall include
the following: 7.7.3 In production, studs on which a full 360' flash is
(1) Drawings that show shapes and dimensions of not obtained may, at the option of the cóntractor, be
studs and arc shields. repaired by adding the minimum fillet weld as required
(2) A complete descriptionof stud and base materials, by 7.5.5 in place of the missing flash. The repair weld
and a description (part number) of the arc shield. shall exteid at least 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond each end of
(3) Welding position and settings (current, time). the discontinuity being repaired.
(4) A record which shail be made for each qualifica-
7.7.4 Operator Qualification. The pre-production test
tion and that record shall be available for each contract.
required by 7.7.1, if successful, shall also serveto qualify
the stud welding operator.
Before any production studs are welded by an opera-
tor not involved in the pre-production set-up of 7.7.1,the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
7.7 Production Control operator shall have the first two studs welded by him
7.7.1 Pre-Production Testing tested in accordance with the provisions of 7.7.1.3 and
7.7.1.4. When the two welded studs have been tested and
7.7.1.1 Before production welding with a particular found satisfactory, the operator may then weld produc-
set-up and with a given size and type of stud, and at the tion studs.
beginning of each day's or shift's production, testing
shall be performed on the first two studs that are welded. 7.7.5 If an unacceptable stud has been removed from a
The stud technique may be developed on a piece of component subjected to tensile stresses, the area from
material similar to the production member in thickness which the stud was removed shail be made smooth and
and properties. If actual production thickness is not flush. Wherein such areas the basemetal has been pulled
available, the thickness may vary 25%. All test studs out in the course of stud removal, shielded metal arc
shall be welded in the same general position as required welding with low hydrogen eIectrodes in accordance
on the production member (flat, vertical, or overhead). with the requirements of this code shall be used to fithe
pockets, and the weld surface shall be flush.
7.7.1.2 Instead of being welded to separate material, In compression areas of members, if stud failures are
the test studs may be welded on the production member, confined to shanks or fusion zones of studs, a new stud
except when separate plates are required by 7.7.1.5. may be welded adjacent to eachunacceptable areain lieu
of repair and replacement on the existing weld area (see
7.7.1.3 The test studs shall be visually examined. They 7.4.4). If base metal is pulled out during stud removal,
shall exhibit full 360' flash. the repair provisions shall be the same as for tension
7.7.1.4 In addition to visual examination, the test
areas except that when the depth of discontinuity is the
lesser of 1/8 in. (3 mm) or 7% of the basemetalthickness
shall consist of bending the studs after they are allowed the discontinuity may be faired by grinding in lieu of
to cool, to an angle of approximately 30' from their
original axes by either striking the studs with a hammer fillingwith weld metal. Where a replacement stud is to be
provided, the base metal repair shall be made prior to
or placing a pipe or other suitable hollow device over the
welding the replacement stud. Replacement studs (other
stud and manually or mechanically bending the stud. At
temperatures below 50'F (10' C), bending shall prefer- than threaded type which should be torque tested) shall
ably be done by continuous slow application of load. For be tested by bending to an angle of approximately 15'
threaded studs, the torque test of Figure 7.3 shall be from their original axes. The areas of components
substituted for the bend test. exposed to view in completed structures shall be made
smooth and flush where a stud has been removed.
7.7.1.5 If on visual examination the test studs do not
exhibit 360' flash, or if on testing failure occurs in the
weld zone of either stud, the procedure shall be cor- 7.8 Fabrication and Verification
rected, and two more studs shall be welded to separate Inspection Requirements
material or on the production member and tested in
accordance with the provisions of 7.7.1.3 and 7.7.1.4. If 7.8.1 Ifavisual inspectionrevealsany stud that does not
either of the second two studs fails, additional welding show a full 360" flash or any stud that has been repaired
shall be continued on separate plates until two consecu- by welding, such stud shall be bent to an angle of approx-
tive studs are tested and found to be satisfactory before imately 15' from its original axis. Threaded studs shall
any more production studs are welded to the member. be torque tested.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 0784265 0500229 1 =
174/Stud Welding II
The method of bending shall be in accordance with tion of the production stud welding operation, except as
7.7.1.4. The direction of bending for studs with less than otherwise provided in the contract.
a 360' flash shall be opposite to the missing portion of
the flash. Torque testing shall be in accordance with 7.8.4 If, in the judgment of the Engineer, studs welded
Figure 7.3. during the progress of the work are not in accordance
with Code provisions, as indicated by inspection and
7.8.2 The Verification Inspector, where conditions war- testing, corrective action shail be required of the Con-
rant, may select areasonable number of additional studs tractor. At the Contractor's expense, the Contractor
to be subjected to the tests specified in 7.8.1. shail make the Set-up changes necessary to ensure that
studs subsequentlywelded will meet code requirements.
7.8.3 The bent stud shear connectors (Type B) and other
studs to be embedded in concrete (Type A) that show no 7.8.5 At the option and the expense of the owner, the
sign of failure shall be acceptable for use and left in the Contractormay be required, at any time, to submit studs
bent position. All bending and straightening when of the types used under the contract for a qualification
required shall be done without heating, before comple- check in accordancewith the procedures of Appendix M.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 9 2 O784265 0500230 8 =
8. Statically Loaded Structures
Part A (4) ASTM A441, Specification for High-Strength
Low-Alloy Structural Manganese-Vanadium Steel
GeneralRequirements (5) ASTM A500, Specification for Cold-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes3I
8.1 Application (6) ASTM A501, Specification for Hot-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
8.1.1 This section supplements sections 1 through 6 and (7) ASTM A5 14, Specification for High-Yield-
is to be used in conjunctionwith the prescribed Building Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
Code30 for the design and construction of statically Suitable for Welding
loaded steel structures. (8) ASTM A516, Specification for Pressure Vessel
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Tem-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8.1.2 Where fatigue loading would govern the propor- perature Service
tions of a statically loaded member or its connections, (9) ASTM A517, Specification for Pressure Vessel
see 9.1.2. Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and
Tempered
(10) ASTM A529, Specification for Standard Steel
with 42 ksi Minimum Yield Point (1/2 in. [13 mm]
Maximum Thickness)
8.2 Base Metal (1 1) ASTM A570, Specificationfor Hot-Rolled Car-
bon Steel Sheet and Strip
8.2.1 Steel base metal to be welded under this Code (12) ASTM A572, Specification for High-Strength
shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of Low-AUoy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural
one of the specifications listed below. Combinations of Quality
any of the steel base metals specified may be welded (13) ASTM A588, Specification for High-Strength
together. Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi Minimum Yield
(1) ASTM A36, Specification for Structural Steel Point to 4 in.[lûû mm] Thick
(2) ASTM A53, Grade By Specification for Pipe, (14) ASTM A606, Type 2 (Type 4 if the properties are
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and suitable for welding), Specification for Steel Sheet and
Seamless Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, High-Strength,
(3) ASTM A242, Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy, with Improved Corrosion Resistance
Low-Alloy Structural Steel(if the properties are suitable (15) ASTM A607, Grades 45,50, and 55, Specifica-
for welding) tion for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled or Cold-
Rolled, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium and/or
Vanadium
30. The term Building Code, whenever the expression occurs
in this Code, refers to the building law or specification or other
construction regulations in conjunctionwith which this Code is
applied. In the absence of any locally applicablebuilding law or
specifications or other construction regulations, it is recom-
<. Products manufactured to this specification may not be
suitable for those applications such as dynamically loaded
mended that the construction be required to comply with the elements in welded structures, etc., where low-temperature
Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of notch-toughness properties may be important. Specialinvesti-
Structural Steel for Buildings ofthe American Institute of Steel gation or heat treatment may be required when this product is
Construction (AISC). applied to tubular T-, Y-,and K-connections.
Copyright American Welding Society 175
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500Z31 T
176/ Statically Loaded Structures
(16) ASTM A618, Grades II and III (Grade I if the 8.2.4 Base Metal for Weld Tabs, Backing, and Spacers
properties are suitable for welding), Specification for
Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength, Low- 8.2.4.1 Weld tabs used in welding shall conform to the
Ailoy Structural Tubing following requirements:
(17) ASTM A633, Specificationfor Normalized High- (I) When used in welding with an approved steel
Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel listed in 8.2.1, they may be any of the steels listed in 8.2.1.
(18) ASTM A709, Specification €or Structural Steel (2) When used in welding with a steel qualified in
for Bridges accordance with 8.2.3 they may be
(19) ASTM 710, Grade A, Specification for Low (a) The steel qualified, or
Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium- (b) Any steel listed in 8.2.1,
Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-Copper-Colum- 8.2.4.2 Backing. Steel for backing shall conform to
bium Ailoy Steels the requirements of 8.2.4.1 (1) and (2), except that 100ksi
(20) ASTM A808, Specification for High Strength (690 MPa) minimum yield strength steel as backing shall
Low Alloy Carbon, Manganese, Columbium, Vanadium be used only with 100 ksi minimum yield strength steels.
Steel of Structural Quality with Improved Notch
Toughness 8.2.4.3 Spacers. Spacers used shall be of the same
material as the base metal.
8.2.2 When an ASTM A709 grade of structural steel is
considered for use, its weldability shall be established by 8.2.5 Base Metal Limitaîions
the steel producer. The procedure for welding it shall be 8.2.5.1 The provisions of this Code are not intended
established by qualification in accordance with the
requirements of 5.2 and other such requirements as may for use with steels having a minimum specified yield
point or yield strength over 100 ksi (690MPa).
be prescribed by the Engineer, with the following excep-
tion: If the grade supplied meets the chemical and 8.2.5.2 Ail groove and fillet weld procedures for weld
mechanical properties of ASTM A36, A572 Gr. 50, or metal and base metal with a minimum specified yield
A588, the applicable prequalified procedures of this strength of 90 ksi (620 MPa) or higher shall be qualified
Code shall apply. to the satisfaction of the Engineer, prior to use, by tests as
8.2.3 Use of Unlisted Base Metais. When a steel other provided in 5.2.
than one of those listed in 8.2.1 is approved under the
provisions of the general specification, and such steel is
proposed for welded constructionunder thls code, weld-
ing procedures shall be established by qualification in PartB
accordancewith the requirements of 5.2. The fabricator
shall have the responsibility for establishing the welding Allowable Unit Stresses
procedure by qualification.
8.2.3.1 Weldability. The Engineer may prescribe 8.3 Base Metal Stresses
additionalweldability testing of the steel. The responsibil- The base metal stresses shall be those specified in the
ity for determining weldability, including the assumption applicable Building Code.
of additional testing costs involved, is assigned to the
party who either specifies a material not listed in 8.2.1 or
who proposes the use of asubstitute material not listed in
8.2.1. The party proposing the use of a substitute mate- 8.4 Unit Stresses in Welds
rial not listed in 8.2.1 shall assume the additional costs
involved with establishing the welding procedure as 8.4.1 Except as modified by 8.5, allowable unit stresses
required in 8.2.3. in welds shall not exceed those listed in Table 8.1.
8.2.3.2 Base Metal Listed in 10.2.1. Materials not 8.4.2 Stress on the effective throat of fillet welds is con-
listed in 8.2.1, but that are listed in 10.2.1, are exempt sidered as shear stress regardless of the direction of
from tests for weldability except that the weldability of application.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ASTM A242, A606, or A618, shall be determined.
8.2.3.3 The Engineer may approve unlisted materials
for auxiliary attachments or components which fall 8.5 Increased Unit Stresses
within the chemical compositionrange of a listed mate-
rial to be welded with prequalified procedures. The filler Where the Building Code permits the use of increased
metal and preheat required shall be in accordance with unit stresses in the base metal for any reason, a corre-
the requirements of 4.2 based upon the similar material sponding increase shall be applied to the allowable unit
strength and chemical composition. stress for welds.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I a I 92 m 0784265 0500232 I m ~~ ~
Statically Loaded Structures/ 177
Table 8.1
Allowable Stresses in Welds (see 8.4.1)
Type of Required Weld
Weld Stress in Weld' Mowable Stress Strength Level2
Tension normal to the Same as base metal Matching weld metal shall be
effective area used. See TabIe 4.1.
Weld metal with a strength
Complete level equal to or one classi-
joint Compression normal to the Same as base metal rication (10 hic69 MPa]) less
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
penetration effective area [han matching weld
groove welds metal may be used.
Tension or compression parallel Same as base metal
to the axis of the weld
0.30 x nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
of weld metal, except shear level equal to or less than
Shear on the effective areas stress on base metal shall not matching weld metal may
exceed 0.40 X yield strength of be used.
base metal
0.50 x nominal tensile strength
Compression Joint not of weld metal, except stress
normal to designed to on base metal shail not exceed
effective area 0.60 x yield strength of base metal
Partial joint
I Joint designed
to bear
Tension or compression parallel
Same as base metal
Same as base metal
penetration to the axis of the weld3 Weld metal with a strength
groove welds level equal to or Iess than
0.30 x nominal tensile strength matching weld metal may be
of weld metal, except shear used.
Shear parallel to axis of weld stress on base metal shail
not exceed 0.40 x yield strength
of base metal
0.30 x nominal tensile strength
of weld metal, except tensile
Tension normal to effective area stress on base metal shall not
exceed 0.60 x yield strength of
base metal
Shear on effective area 0.30 x nominal tensile strength
Fiiiet of weld metal Weld metal with a strength
welds level equal to or less than
matching weld metal may be
Tension or compression parallel Same as base metal used.
to axis of weld3
0.30 x nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
Shear parallel to fayhg of weld metal, except shear level equal to or less than
Plug and surfaces (on effective area) stress on base metal shall matching weld metal may be
slot welds not exceed 0.40 x yield strength used.
of base metal
Notes:
1. For definition of effective area, see 2.3.
2. For matching weld metal, see Table 4.1.
3, Fillet wdd and partialjoint penetration groove weldsjoining the component elements of built-up members, such as flange-to-webconnections,
may be designed without regard to the tensile or compressive stress iP. these elements parallel to the axis of the welds.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-II 9 2 m 07842b5 0500233 3 m
178/Statically Loaded Structures
Part C
Structural Details
8.6 Combinations of Welds
I I
'it
.......
II7
.......
... ..
',W.
.....
If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, 4S -5ti MIN 4S L-- Ltl
fillet, plug, slot) are combined in a single joint, their (NOT LESS THAN 1 in. [25 mrn])
allowable capacity shall be computed with reference to
the axis of the group in order to determine the allowable
Notes:
capacity of the combination. However, such methods of 1. s = as required
adding individual capacities of welds does not apply to 2. t > t l
fillet welds reinforcing groove welds (see Appendix I).
Figure 8.1 -DoubleFillet Welded Lap Joint
8.7 Welds in Combination with Rivets (see 8.8.3)
and Bolts
Rivets or bolts used in bearing type connections shall comers for a distance at least twice the nominal sue of
not be considered as sharing the stress in combination the weld except as provided in 8.8.5.
with welds. Welds, if used, shall be provided to carry the 8.8.6.2 Boxing shall be indicated on the drawings.
entire stress in the connection. However, connections
that are welded to one member and riveted or bolted to 8.8.7 Unless otherwise specified in the code or contract
the other member are permitted. High strength bolts documents, fdlet welds connecting attachments shall
properly installed as a friction type connection prior to start or terminate not less than the weld size from the end
welding may be considered as sharing the stress with the of thejoint. For stiffeners on girders, the weld joining the
welds. stiffenersto the web shall start or terminate not less than
four times the thickness of the web from the face of the
flange.
8.8 Fillet Weld Details
8.8.1 If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in end 8.9 Eccentricity
connections of flat bar tension members, the length of
each fillet weld shall be no less than the perpendicular In general, adequate provisions shall be made for
distance between them. The transverse spacing of longi- bending stresses due to eccentricity, if any, in the disposi-
tudinal fdlet welds used in end connections shall not tion and section of base metal parts and in the location
exceed 8 in. (200 mm) unless end transverse welds or and types of weldedjoints. The disposition of fillet welds
intermediate plug or slot welds are used. to balance the forces about the neutral axis or axes for
end connections of single-angle, double-angle, and sim-
8.8.2 Intermittent fillet welds may be used to carry cal- ilar type members is not required; such weld arrange-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
culated stress. ments at the heel and toe of angle members may be
distributed to conform to the length of the various avail-
8.8.3 For lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall be able edges. Similarly, T's or beams framing into chords
five times the thickness of the thinner part joined but not of trusses, or similar joints, may be connected with
less than 1 in. (25 mm) (see Figure 8.1). unbalanced fillet welds.
8.8.4 Lap joints in parts carrying axial stress shall be
double-fillet welded (see Figure 8.1) except where deflec-
tion of the joint is sufficiently restrained to prevent it 8.10 Ikansition of Thicknesses or
from opening under load. Widths
8.8.5 Fillet welds deposited on the opposite sides of a Tension butt joints between axially aligned members
common plane of contact between two parts shall be of different thicknesses or widths, or both, and subject to
interrupted at a corner common to both welds (see Fig- tensile stress greater than one-third the allowable design
ure 8.2). tensile stress shall be made in such a manner that the
8.8.6 Boxing (End Returns) slope in the transition does not exceed 1 in 2-1/2 (see
Figures 8.3 and 8.4). The transition shall be accom-
8.8.6.1 Side or end fillet welds terminating at ends or plished by chamfering the thicker part, tapering the
sides of header angles, brackets, beam seats and similar wider part, sloping the weld metal, or by any combina-
connections shall be returned continuously around the tion of these.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Statically Loaded Structures/ 179
DO NOT TIE WELDS
DO NOT TIE WELDS
\
Figure 8.2 -Fillet Welds on Opposite Side of a Common Plane of Contact (see 8.8.5)
8.11 Beam End Connections 8.12.3 In built-up tension members, the longitudinal
spacing of stitch welds connecting a plate component to
Welded beam end connections shall be designed in other components, or connecting two plate components
accordance with the assumptions about the degree of to each other, shall not exceed 12 in. (305 mm) or 24
restraint involved in the designated type of con- times the thickness of the thinner plate.
struction.
8.12.4 Intermittent or partial length groove welds are
not permitted except as specified ín 8.12.5.
8.12.5 Members built-up of elements connected by fillet
welds, at points of localized load application, may have
8.12 Connections of Components of groove welds of limited length to participate in the
Built-up Members transfer of the localized load. The groove weld shall
extend at uniform size for at least the length required to
If two or more plates or rolled shapes are used to build transfer the load. Beyond this length, the groove shallbe
up a member, sufficient stitch welding (of the fillet, plug, transitioned in depth to zero over a distance, not less
or slot type) shall be provided to make the parts act ifi than four times its depth. The groove shall be filled flush
unison as follows, except where transfer of calculated before the application of the fillet weld. (See Commen-
stress between the parts joined requires closer spacing. tary, Figure C8.13)
8.12.1 The maximum longitudinal spacing of stitch
welds connecting two or more rolled shapes in contact
with one another shall not exceed 24 in. (610 mm). Part D
8.12.2 In built-up compression members, the longitudi- Workmanship
nal spacing of stitch welds connecting aplate component
to other components shall not exceed the plate thickness 8.13 Dimensional Tolerances
times 4000/.\/Fyfor Fyin psi, 332/&for Fyin MPa The dimensions of structural members shall be within
nor shall it exceed 12 in. (305 mm) (Fy specified min- the tolerances specified in 3.5, with the following addi-
imum yield strength of the type of steel being used). The tional requirements.
unsupported width of web, cover, or diaphragm plates,
between adjacent lines of welds, shall not exceed the 8.13.1 Variations from fíatness of girder webs is deter-
plate thickness times 8000/&for Fyin psi, 6 6 4 1 6 mined by measuring the offset from the actuaí web
for Fyin MPa. When the unsupported width exceeds this centerline to a straight edge whose length is greater than
limit, but a portion of its widthno greater than 8ûOtimes the least panel dimension and placed on a plane parallel
the thickness would satisfy the stress requirements, the to the nominal web plane. Measurements shall be taken
member will be considered acceptable. prior to erection. See Commentary.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 07842b5 0500235 7 m
180/Statically Loaded Structures
2.5 /
TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE
1 \ REMOVE
m
AFTER WELDING
REMOVE
AFTER WELDING /
...........
.
.........
........
:I...
........
.......
.......
........
........
.........
........
.....J.
IW AFTER WELDING
TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE AND CHAMFERING
CHAMFER CHAMFER
I-=-{
BEFORE WELDING BEFORE WELDING
..........
........
......... ..........
.........
.........
.........
.......... .........
........
..........
....... .......
........
.........
..........
...........
..........
CHAMFER
BEFORE WELDING
TRANSITION BY CHAMFERING THICKER PART
CENTERLINE ALIGNMENT OFFSET ALIGNMENT
(PARTICULARLY APPLICABLE (PARTICULARLY APPLICABLE
TO WEB PLATES) TO FLANGE PLATES)
Notes:
I. Groove may be of any permitted or quatified type and detail.
2. Transition slopes shown are the maximum permitted.
Figure 8.3 -Transition of Butt Joints in Parts of Unequal’Thickness(see 8.10)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 W 078Y2b.5 O500236 9 W
Statically Loaded Structures/ 181
8.15.1.2 Thorough fusionshallexist betweenadjacent
WIDTH OF layers of weld metal and between weld metal and base
NARROWER PLATE metal.
1 8.15.1.3 All craters shall be filled to the full cross
section of the weld, except for the ends of intermittent
fillet welds outside their effective length.
8.15.1.4 Weld profiles shall be in accordance with 3.6.
C L
8.15.1.5 For material less than 1 in. (25.4) mm) thick,
2.5 undercut'shall not exceed 1/32 in. (1 mm), except that a
maximum 1/16in. (1.6mm)ispermittedforanaccumu-
-
Figure 8.4 Transition of Thicknesses lated length of 2 in. (50 mm) in any 12in. (305 mm). For
material equal to or greater than 1 in. thick, undercut
or Widths (see 8.10)
shall not exceed i / 16 in. for any length of weld.
8.13.2 Variationsfrom flatness of webs having a depth, 8.15.1.6 The sum of diametersof visible piping poros-
Dyand a thickness, t, in panels bounded by stiffeners or ity 1/32 in. (1 mm) or greater in fillet welds shall not
flanges, or both, whose least panel dimension is d shall exceed 3/8 in. (10 mm) in any linear inch of weld and
not exceed the following: shall not exceed 3/4 in. (19 mm) in any 12in, (305 mm)
length of weld.
Intermediate stiffeners on both sides of web
where D/t < 150, maximum variation = d/ 100 8.15.1.7 A fillet weld in any single continuous weld
where D/t 2 150, maximum variation d/80 shall be permitted to underrun the nominal fdet size
Intermediate stiffeners on one side only of web specified by i / 16 in. (1.6 mm) without correction, pro-
where D/t < 100, maximum variation d/ 100 vided that the undersize portion of the weld does not
where D/t 2 100, maximum variation = d/67 exceed 10% of the length of the weld. On web-to-flange
No intermediate stiffeners welds on girders, no underrun is permitted at the ends for
maximum variation = D/ 150 a length equal to twice the width of the flange.
(See Appendix VI for tabulation.) 8.15.1.8 Complete joint penetration groove welds in
x
butt joints transverse to the direction of computed tensile
8.13.3 Web distortions of twice the allowable tolerances stress shall have no visible piping porosity. For all other
of 8.13.1.2shall besatisfactorywhenoccurringat theend groove welds, the sum of the visible piping porosity
of a girder which has been drilled, or subpunched and 1/32 in. (1 mm) or greater in diameter shall not exceed
reamed; either during assembly or to a template for a 3/8 in. (10 mm) in any linear inch of weld and shall not
field bolted splice; provided, when the splice plates exceed 3/4 in. (19 mm) hany 12 h.(305 mm) length of
are bolted, the web assumes the proper dimensional weld.
tolerances.
8.15.1.9 Visual inspection of welds in all steels may
8.13.4 If architecturalconsiderationsrequire tolerances begin immediately after the completed welds have cooled
more restrictive than described in 8.13.2, specific refer- to ambient temperature. Acceptance criteriafor ASTM
ence must be included in the bid documents. A514 and A517 steels shall be based on visual inspection
performed not less than48 hours after completionof the
weld.
8.14 Temporary Welds
8.15.2 Nondestructive Inspection. All nondestructive
Temporary welds shall be subject to the same welding testing methods including equipment requirements and
procedure requirements as final welds. They shall be qualifications, personnel qualifications, and operating
removed when required by the Engineer. When they are methods shall be in accordance with section 6, Inspec-
removed, the surface shall be made flush with the origi- tion. Acceptance criteria shall be as specified in this
nal surface. section. Welds subject to nondestructive testing shall
have been found acceptable by visual inspection in
accordance with 8.15.1.
8.15 Quality of Welds
8.15.3 Radiographic Inspection
8.15.1 Visual Inspection. All welds shall be visually
inspected and shall be acceptable if the following condi- 8.15.3.1 When subject to radiographictesting in addi-
tions are satisfied: tion to visual inspection, welds shall have no cracks.
8.15.1.1 The weld shall have no cracks. Other discontinuities shall be evaluated on the basis of
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
0500237 O W
182/StaticallyLoaded Structures
being either elongated or rounded. Regardless of the 8.15.4 ultrasonic Testing. Welds that are subject to
type of discontinuity, an elongated discontinuity is one in ultrasonic testing, in addition to visual inspection, shall
which its length exceeds three times its width. A rounded be acceptableif they meet the requirementsof Table 8.2.
discontinuity is one in which its length is three times its For complete joint penetration web-to-flange welds,
width or less and may be round or irregular and may acceptance of discontinuities detected by scanning
have tails. movements other than scanning pattern %‘(see 6.24.2.2)
may be based on weld thickness equal to the actual web
8.153.2 Discontinuities as shown on radiographs thickness plus 1in. (25 mm). Discontinuities detected by
that exceed the following limitations shall be unaccept- scanning pattern ‘E’ shall be evaluated to the criteria of
able. (E = weld size.) Table 8.2 for the actual web thickness. When complete
(1) Elongated discontinuitiesexceedingthe maximum joint penetration web-to-flange welds are subject to cal-
size of Figure 8.5. culated tensile stress normal to the weld, they should be
(2) Discontinuities closer than the minimum clear- so designated on the design drawing and shall conform
ance allowance of Figure 8.5. to the requirements of Table 8.2. Ultrasonically tested
(3) Rounded discontinuities greater than a maximum welds are evaluated on the basis of a discontinuity reflect-
of size of E/3, not to exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm). However, ing ultrasound in proportion to its effect on the integrity
when the thickness is greater than 2 in. (50 mm), the of the weld. Indicationsof discontinuities that remain on
m&um rounded indication may be 3/8 in. (10 mm). the cathode ray tube as the searchunit is moved towards
The minimum clearance of this type of discontinuity and away from the discontinuity (scanning movement
greater than or equal to 3/32 in. (2 mm) to an acceptable “b”) may be indicative of planar discontinuities with
elongated or rounded discontinuity or to an edge or end simicant through throat dimension.
of an intersecting weld shall be three times the greatest Since the major reflecting surface of the most critical
dimension of the larger of the discontinuities being discontinuities is oriented a minimum of 20° (for a 70’
considered. search unit) to 45O (for a 45O search unit) from perpen-
(4) Isolated discontinuities such as a cluster of rounded dicular to the sound beam, amplitude evaluation (dB
indications, having a sum of their greatest dimensions rating) does not permit reliable disposition. When indi-
exceeding the maximum size single discontinuity permit- cations exhibiting these planar characteristics are pres-
ted in Figure 8.5. The minimum clearance to another ent at scanning sensitivity, a more detailed evaluation of
cluster or‘an elongated or rounded discontinuity or to an the discontinuityby other means shall be required (e.g.,
edge or end of an intersecting weld shall be three times alternateultrasonictechniques, radiography, grinding or
the greatestdimension of the larger of the discontinuities gouging for visual inspection, etc.).
being considered. 8.15.5 Liquid Penetrant and Magnetic Particle Inspec-
(5) The sum of individual discontinuities each having
tion. Welds that are subject to magnetic particle and
a greater dimension of less than 3/32 in. (2 mm) shallnot liquid penetrant testing, in addition to visual inspection,
exceed 2E/ 3 or 3/ 8 in. (10 mm), whichever is less, in any shall be evaluated on the basis of the requirements for
linear 1 in. (25 mm) of weld. This requirement is inde-
visual inspection. The testing shall be performed in
pendent of (i), (2), and (3) above. accordance with 6.7.5 or 6.7.6, whichever is applicable.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(6) In-line discontinuities, where the sum of the great-
est dimensions exceeds E in any length of 6E. When the 8.15.6 When welds are subject to nondestructive testing
length of the weld being examined is less than 6E, the in accordancewith 8.15.2,8.15.3, and 8.15.4, the testing
permissible sum of the greatest dimensions shall be pro- may begin immediately after the completed welds have
portionally less. cooled to ambient temperature. Acceptance criteria for
ASTM A514 and A517 steels shall be based on nondes-
8.15.3.3. Figure 10.16 and Figure 10.17 illustrate the tructive testing performed not less than 48.hours after
application of the requirements given in 8.15.3.2. completion of the welds.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Statically Loaded Structures/ 183
i-ilaI OR GREATER 314 MAX
I . TO DETERMINETHE MAXIMUM SIZE OF DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN ANY
1 - JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT A HORIZONTALLY TO B.
2. TO DETERMINETHE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED BETWEEN
.-2 718 - EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIESOF ANY SIZE GREATER THAN
u" OR EQUAL TO 3/32 in., PROJECT B VERTICALLY
k I
TO C. II II II II
a
I
314 I I I
I- 518
Lu
112
!?
u.
u 318
8
u 114
N
(B
9 1I8
5
U
1. TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN ANY
- JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT A HORIZONTALLY TO B.
/
25
E 2. TO DETERMINETHE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED BETWEEN
E - EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIESOF ANY SIZE GREATER THAN
22
u- OR EQUAL TO 2 mm, PROJECT B VERTICALLY
s 19
TO C.
8
I
I- 16
u
I
5 13
!?
u.
u 10
a
O
W 6
N 2
(B
9 3
5
a
-
C MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF THE WELD BETWEEN
EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION TYPE DISCONTINUITIES ( LARGER OF ADJACENT
DISCONTINUITIESGOVERNS), OR TO AN EDGE OR AN END OF AN INTERSECTING WELD.
(C = 38 = 2E)
Figure 8.5 -Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined
by Radiography for Statically Loaded Structures (see 8.15.3.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-I 72 = 0784265 0500237 4
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
184/ Statically Loaded Structures
Table 8.2
Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria (see 8.15.4)
I Weld Thickness* in in. (mm) and Search Unit Angle
Discontinuity
Severity
Class
5/16(8)
t h
> 3/4
t h
3/4(19) 1-1/2(38)
1 > 1-1/2 thni2-1/2(64) > 2-1/2 thru 4(100) > 4 thni 8(200)
I
I
70? 70? 70° 60? 45O 70° 6oo 45O 70° 6oo 45O
Class A +5& +2& -2& +l& +3& -5& -2& O& -7& -4& -l&
lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower
I
Class B +6 +2 +4 -4 -1 +1 -6 -3 O
Class c
Class D
+7
+8
+4
+5
+3
3
+5 -3
-2to
+2
+3
+1
+2
+3
O +2
+3
+4
+5
-5
-4to
+2
+3
-2
-1 to
+2
+3
+1
+2
+3
+4
&up &up &up &up &UP &up &up &up &up &up &up
Notes:
1. Class B and C discontinuities shall be separatedby at least 2L, L being the length of the longer discontinuity,except that when two or more such
discontinuities are not separated by at least 2L, but the combined length of discontinuities and their separationdistance is equal to or less than the
maximum allowable length under the provisions of Class B or C, the discontinuity shall be considered a single acceptable discontinuity.
2. Class B and C discontinuitiesshall not begin at adistancefrom2L from weld ends carrying primary tensile stress, Lbeimg the discontinuitylength.
3. Discontinuitiesdetected at ?scanningleve1?inthe root face area of completejoint penetration double groove weldjoints shaiibeevaluated using an
indicationrating4 dB more sensitivethan described in 6.19.6.5 when such welds are designated as ?tension we1ds?on the drawing (subtract4 dB from
the indication rating ?d?).
4. Electroslag or electrogaswelds: discontinuities detected at ?scanning1evel?whichexceed 2in. (51 mm) in length shall be suspected as being piping
porosity and shall be further evaluated with radiography.
I 5. For indications that remain on the CRT as the search unit is moved, refer to 8.15.4.
*Weld thickness shall be defined as the nominal thickness of the thinner of the two parts being joined,
Class A (iarge discontinuities)
Any indication in this category shall be rejected (regardless of length). Scanning Levels
Class B (medium discontinuities)
Sound path** in in. (mm) Above Zero Reference, dB
Any indication in this categoy having a length greater than 314 inch
(19 mm) shall be rejected. through 2-1/ 2 (64 mm) 14
Class C (small discontinuities) > 2-1/2 through 5 (64-127 mm) 19
Any indicationin this category having a length greater than 2 inches > 5 through 10 (127-254 mm) 29
(51 mm) shali be rejected. > 10 through 15 (254-381 mm) 39
Class D (minor discontinuities) **Thiscolumn refers to sound path distance; NOTmaterialthickness.
Any indication in this category shall be accepted regardless of length or
location in the weld.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 9 2 W 0784265 0500240 O W
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
9. Dynamically Loaded Structures
Part A (4) ASTM A501, Specification for Hot-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
GeneralRequirements (5) ASTM A5 14, Specification for High-Yield-
Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
Suitable for Welding
9.1 Application (6) ASTM A516, Specification for Pressure Vessel
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Tem-
9.1.1 This section supplementssections 1through 6 and perature Service
is to be used in conjunction with the prescribed standard (7) ASTM A572, Grades 42 and 50, Specificationfor
specification for the design and construction of dynami- High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-VanadiumSteels
cally loaded structures, as required. of Structural Quality
(8) ASTM A588, Specification for High-Strength
9.1.2 Where fatigue loading would govern the propor- Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi Minimum Yield
tions of a statically loaded member or its connections, Point to 4 in.[lûû mm] Thick
the provisions of Appendix B of the AISC specification (9) ASTM A618, Grades II and III (Grade I if the
for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural properties are suitable for welding), Specification for
Steel for Buildings should take precedence over the Hot-Formed Welded and SeamlessHigh-Strength Low-
values tabulated in this section. Alloy Structural Tubing
(10) ASTM A633, Specificationfor Normalized High-
Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
(11) ASTM A709, Specification for Structural Steel
for Bridges
9.2 Base Metal (12) ASTM A710, Grade A, Specification for Low
Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-
9.2.1 Steel base metal to be welded under this Code shall Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-Copper-Colum-
conform to the requirements of the latest edition of one bium Alloy Steels
of the specifications listed below. Combinations of any (13) ASTM A808, Specification for High Strength
approved steel bases may be welded together. Low AUoy Carbon, Manganese, Columbium, Vanadium
(1) ASTM A36, Specification for Structural Steel Steel of Structural Quality with Improved Notch
(2) ASTM A441, Specification for High-Strength Toughness
Low-Alloy Structural Manganese-Vanadium Steel
(3) ASTM A500, Specification for Cold-Formed 9.2.2 When an ASTM A709 Grade structural steel is
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in considered for use, its weldability shall be established by
Rounds and Shapes32 the steel producer. The procedure for welding the struc-
turaI steel shall be established by qualificationin accord-
ance with the requirements of 5.2 and such other
requirements as may be prescribed by the Engineer, with
the followingexception: If the grade to be suppliedmeets
32. Products manufactured to this specification may not be
the chemical and mechanical properties of ASTM A36,
suitable for those applications such as dynamically loaded A572 Gr. 50, or A588, the applicableprequalified proce-
elements in welded structures, etc., where low-temperature dures of this Code shall apply.
notch-toughness properties may be important. Special investi-
gation or heat treatment may be required when this product is 9.2.3 When an ASTM A242 or A618 Grade 1low alloy
applied to tubular T-, Y-, and K-connections. steel is considered for use, its weldability shall be investi-
Copyright American Welding Society 185
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
186/DynamicallyLoaded Structures
gated by the Engineer, and the Engineer shall specify ali Part B
pertinent material, design, and workmanship idorma- Allowable Unit Stresses
tion not covered by this Code.
9.3 Unit Stresses in Welds
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
9.2.4 Use of Unlisted Base Metals. When a steel other
than one of those listed in 9.2.1 is approved under the Note: m e applicationof these stresses may be modj?ed
provisions of the general specification, and such steel is by the requirements of 9.4,
proposed for welded constructionunder this Code, weld-
ing procedures shall be established by qualification in 9.3.1 Except as modified by 9.4,9.5, and 9.6, allowable
accordance with the requirements of 5.2. The fabricator unit stresses in welds shall not exceed those listed in
shall have the responsibilityfor establishingthe welding Table 9.1.33
procedure by qualification.
9.3.2 Stress on the effective throat of fillet welds is con-
9.2.4.1 Weldability. The Engineer may prescribe sidered as shear stress regardless of the direction of
additional weldability testing of the steel. The responsi- application.
bility for determining weldability, including the assump-
tion of additional testing costs involved, is assigned to
the party who either specifies a material not listed in 9.2.1 9.4 Fatigue Stress Provisions
or who proposes the use of a substitute material not
listed in 9.2.1. The party proposing the use of a substitute The fatigue stress provisions for structures subject to
material not listed in 9.2.1 shall assume the additional cyclic loading may be obtained from Table 9.2 and Fig-
costs involved with establishingthe welding procedure as ures 9.1,9.2, and 9.3 for appropriate general condition
required in 9.2.4. and cycle life. The cycle life should be determined by the
Engineer to meet the planned life requirements of the
9.2.4.2 Base Metais Listed in 10.2.1. Base metals not structure.
listed in 9.2.1, but that are listed in 10.2.1, are exempt
from tests for weldability except that weldability of
ASTM A242, Aóû6, or A618 shall be determined. 9.5 Combined Unit Stresses
9.2.5 Base Metal for Weld Tabs, Backing, and Spacers In the case of axial stress combined with bending, the
allowable unit stress of each kind shall be governed by
9.2.5.1 Weld Tabs. Weld tabs used in welding shall the requirements of 9.3 and 9.4 and the maximum com-
conform to the following requirements: bined unit stresses calculated therefrom shall be limited
(1) When used in welding with an approved steel in accordance with the requirements of the applicable
listed in 9.2.1, they may be any of the steels listed in9.2.1. general specifications.
(2) When used in welding with a steel qualified in
accordance with.9.2.4, they may be
(a) The steel qualified, or
(b) Any steel listed in 9.2.1, 9.6 Increased Unit Stresses
When the applicable general specification permits the
9.2.5.2 Backing. Steel for backing shall conform to use of increased unit stresses for a combination of loads
the requirements of 9.2.5.1 (1) and (2), except 100 ksi or for secondary or erection stresses, corresponding
minimum yield strength steel as backing shall only be increases may be applied under this Code.
used with 100 ksi minimum yield strength steel.
9.2.5.3 Spacers. Spacers shall be of the same mate-
rial as the base metal. Part c
9.2.6 Base Metal Limitations
Structural Deta&
9.2.6.1 The provisions of this Code are not intended 9.7 General
for use with steels having a minimum specified yield In general, details shall minimize constraint against
point or yield strength over 100 ksi (690 MPa). ductile behavior, avoid undue concentration of welding,
and afford ample access for depositing the weId metal.
9.2.6.2 All groove and fillet weld procedures for weld
metal and base metal with a minimum specified yield ~
strength of 90 ksi (620 MPa) or higher shall be qualified 33. Unless specified in the general specifications, it is recom-
to thesatisfaction of the Engineer, prior to use, by tests as mended that the basic unit shear stress in the net sectionbe 65%
provided in 5.2. of the basic dowable stress in tension.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 W 0784265 0500242 4 W ~~ ~ ~~
Dynamically Loaded Structures/ 187
Table 9.1
Allowable Stresses in Welds (see 9.3.1)
Type of
Weld
~
Stress in Weld'
~
I Allowable Stress
Required Weld
Strength Level2
Tension normal to the Same as base metal Matching weld metal must be
effective area used. See Table 4.1.
Weld metal with a strength
Complete level equal to or one classi-
joint Compression normal to the Same as base metal fication (10 ksi [69 MPa])
penetration effective area less than matching weld
groove welds metal may be used.
Tension or compression parallel Same as base metal
to the axis of the weld
~~
0.27 x nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
of weld metal, except shear level equal to or less than
Shear on the effective area stress on base metal shall not matching weld metal may
exceed 0.36 x yield strength of be used.
base metal
0.45 x nominal tensile strength
Compression Joint not of weld metal, except stress
normal to designed to on base metal shall not exceed
effective area bear 0.55 x yield strength of base metal
Joint designed Same as base metal
to bear
Partial joint
penetration
groove welds
Tension or compression parallel
to the axis of the weld3 I Same as base metal
Weld metal with a strength
level equal to or less than
0.27 x nominal tensile strength matching weld metal may be
of weld metal, except shear used.
Shear paraliel to axis of weld stress on base metal shall
not exceed 0.36 x yield strength
of base metal
0.27 X nominal tensile strength
of weld metal, except tensile
Tension normal to effective area stress on base metal shall not
exceed 0.55 x yield strength of
base metal
Shear on effective area 0.27 x nominal tensile strength
of weld metal Weld metal with a strength
Fillet level equal to or less than
welds matching weld metal may
be used.
Tension or compression parallel Same as base metal
to axis of weld3
0.27 x nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
Shear parallel to faying of weld metal, except shear level equal to or less than
Plug and surfaces (on effective area) stress on base metal shall matching weld metal may be
slot welds not exceed 0.36 x yield strength used.
of base metal
1. For defmition of effective area, see 2.3.
2. For matching weld metal, see Table 4.1.
3. Fillet weld and partialjoint penetrationgroove weldsjoining the componentelements of builf-up members, such as flange-to-web connections,
may be designed without regard to the tensile or compressive stress in these elements parallel to the axis of the welds.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 m 0784265 0500243 b m
188/Dynamicaliy Loaded Structures
Table 9.2
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Fatigue Stress Provisions - Tension or Reversal Stresses* (see 9.4)
General Stress Category Example
Condition Situation (see Figure 9.1) (see Figure 9.1)
Plain Base metal with rolled or cleaned sur- A
material faces. Oxygen-cut edges with ANSI
smoothness of loo0 or less.
*
Built-up Base metal and weld metal in members B
members without attachments, built up of plates
or shapes connected by continuous
complete or partial joint penetration
groove welds or by continuous fillet
welds parailelto the directionof applied
stress.
Caícuiatedflexturalstressat toe of trans- C
verse stiffener welds on girder webs
or flanges.
Base metal at end of partial lengthweld- E
ed cover plates having square or tapered
ends, with or without welds across the
ends.
Groove Base metal and weld metal at complete B
welds joint penetration groove welded splices
of rolled and welded sections havh
similarprofiles when welds are ground 4
and weld soundness established by non-
destructive testing?
Base metal and weld metal in or adja- B 10, lla, l l b
cent to complete joint penetration
groove welded splices at transitions in
width or thickness, with welds ground'
to provide slopes no steeper than 1 to
2-1/23 for yield strength less than
90 ksi (620 MPa) and a radius8 of
R 2 2 ft. (0.6 rn) for yield strength
1 9 0 ksi, and weld soundness estab-
lished by nondestructive testing.2
Groove Base metal at details of any length at- Lon@- Transverse Example
welded tached by groove welds subjected to tudinal loading4 :see Figure
connec- transverse or longitudinal loading, or loading 9.1)
tions both, when weld soundness transverse Materials hav- Materials hav-
to the direction of stress is established ing equd or ing equal ing unequal
by nondestructive testing2 and the de- unequal thick- thickness, not thickness, not
tail embodies a transition radius, R, ness sloped! ground; web sloped or
with the weld termination ground' welds ground,' connections ground, in-
when web connec- excluded. cluding web
tions excluded. connections
(a) R I 24 in.(610 mm) B B C E 13
(b) 24 in. > R 1 6 in. (150 mm) C C C E 13
(c) 6 in. > R 2 2in. (50 mm) D D D E 13
(d) 2in.>R>07 E E E E 12,13
*Except as noted for fillet and stud welds.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 W 0784265 0500244 8 W ~
~~-
Dynamically Loaded Structures/ 189
Table 9.2 (continued)
General Stress Category Example
Condition Situation (see Figure 9.1) (see Figure 9.1)
Groove Base metal and weld metal in, or ad- C 8,9, 10, 11%l l b
welds jacent to, complete joint penetration
groove welded splices either not requir-
ing transition or when required with
transitions having slopes no greater
than 1 to 2-1/23 for yield strength less
than 90ksi (620 MPa) and a radius8 of
R 2 2 ft. (0.6 m) for yield strength
I90 ksi, and when in either case rein-
forcement is not removed and weld
soundness is established by nondes-
tructive testing?
Groove or Base metaiat details attached by groove
fillet or fillet welds subject to longitudinal
welded loading where the details embody a
connec- transition radius, R,less than2in.7, and
tions when the detail length, L, parallel to
the line of stress is
(a) < 2 in. (50 mm) C 12, 14, 15, 16
(b) 2 in. IL < 4 in. (100 mm) D 12
(c) L I4 in. E 12
Fillet Base metal at details attached by fillet
welded welds parallel to the direction of stress
COMeC- regardless of length when the detail em-
tions bodies a transition radius, R, 2 in. or
greater and with the weld termination
ground.'
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(a) When R I24 in. (610 mm) B5 13
>
(b) When 24 in. R I 6 in. (150 mm) e5 13
>
(c) When 6 in. R I2 in. (50 mm) D5 13
Fillet Shear stress on throat of fillet welds. F 8a
welds
Base metal at intermittent welds attach- C 7, 14
ing transverse stiffeners and stud-type
shear connectors.
Base metal at intermittent fillet welds E -
attaching longitudinal stiffeners.
Stud Shear stress on nominal shear area of F 14
welds Type B shear connectors.
Plug and Base metal adjacent to or connected by E -
slot welds plug or slot welds.
Notes:
1. Finished awarding to 3.6.3.
2. Either RT or UT to meet quality requirements of 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 for welds subject to tensile stress.
3. Sloped as required by 9.20.1.
4. Applicable only to completejoint penetration groove welds.
5. Shear stress on throat of weld (ìoading through the weld in any direction) is governed by Category F.
6. Slopes similar to those required by Footnote 3 are mandatory for categories listed. if slopes are not obtainable, Category E must be used.
7. Radii less than 2 in. (50 mm) need not be ground.
8. Radiused as required by 9.20.3.
*Except as noted for fillet and stud welds.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 W 078i1265 0500245 T W
19û/ Dynamically Loaded Structures
CATEGORY E - BASE METAL AT ENDS OF WELD
8(a) CATEGORY F - WELD METAL
Note: The numbers below each example are referenced in Table 9.2.
Reprinted with the permission of the American Association
of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
Figure 9.1 -Examples of Various Fatigue Categories (see 9.4)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Dynamically Loaded Structures/ 191
414.0
345.0
276.0
207.0
-
.-fn
25
138.0
103.5
L
I2
W-
69.0
62.1
u?
zai 55.2
48.3
v)
41.4
v)
v) 34.5
W
a 27.6 Ei
a
lñ 20.7 lñ
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
13.8
6.9
7n 107
CYCLE LIFE
TRANSVERSE STIFFENER WELDS ON GIRDER WEBS OR FLANGES
Figure 9.2 -Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F -
Redundant Structures (see 9.4)
R
fn
5
L
I2 u?
W-
<3
z
v)
ai
wa v)
Ei
a
!ñ !ñ
Figure 9.3 -Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F -
Nonredundant Structures (see 9.4)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D i - L 92 m 0784265 0500247 3 m
1921Dynamically Loaded Structures
9.8 Noncontinuous Beams 9.12.2 Groove welds, made from one side only, are
prohibited, if the welds are made:
The connections at the ends of noncontinuous beams (1) Without any backing, or
shall be designed with flexibility so as to avoid excessive (2) With backing, other than steel, that has not been
secondary stresses due to bending. 'Seated connections qualified in accordance with 5.2
with a flexible or guiding device to prevent end twisting These prohibitions for groove welds made from one
are recommended. side only shall not apply to
(3) Secondary or nonstress-carrying members and
shoes or other nonstressed appurtenances, and
9.9 Participation of Floor System (4) Cornerjoints parallel to the direction of computed
stress, between components for built-up members de-
Details of the floor system should be so designed as to signed primarily for axial stress
avoid, insofar as possible, unintended participation in
the chord or flange stresses. 9.12.3 Intermittent groove welds are prohibited.
9.12.4 Intermittent fillet welds, except as provided in
9.21.3.1, are prohibited.
9.10 Lap Joints 9.12.5 Bevel-groove and J-grooves in butt joints for
9.10.1 The minimum overlap of parts in stress-carrying other than the horizontal position (see Figure 2.4) are
lap joints shall be five times the thickness of the thinner prohibited.
part. Unless lateral deflection of the parts is prevented,
they shall be connected by at least two transverse lines of 9.12.6 Plug and slot welds on primary tension members
fillet, plug, or slot welds or by two or more longitudinal are prohibited.
fillet or slot welds.
9.10.2 If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in lap 9.13 Combinations of Welds
joints of end connections, the length of each fillet weld
shall be no less than the perpendicular distance between If two or more of the general types of welds (groove,
the welds. The transverse spacing of the welds shall not fillet, plug, slot) are combined in a single joint, their
exceed 16 times the thickness of the connected thinner aliowable capacity shall be computed with reference to
part unless suitable provision is made (as by intermediate the axis of the group in order to determinethe allowable
plug or slot welds) to prevent buckling or separation of capacity of the combination (see Appendix I). However,
the parts. The longitudinalfillet weld may be either at the such methods of addingindividual capacities of welds do
edges of the member or in slots. not apply to fillet welds reinforcing groove welds.
9.10.3 When fillet welds in holes or slots are used, the
clear distance from the edge of the hole or slot to the
adjacent edge of the part containing it, measured per- 9.14 Welds in Combination with
pendicular to the direction of stress, shall be no less than Rivets and Bolts
five times the thickness of the part nor less than two times
the width of the hole or slot. The strength of the part shall In new work, rivets or bolts in combination with welds
be determined from the critical net section of the base shall not be considered as sharing the stress, and the
metal. welds shall be provided to carry the entire stress for
which the connection is designed. Bolts or rivets used in
assembly may be left in place if their removal is not
specified. If bolts are to be removed, the plans should
9.11 Corner and T-Joints indicate whether holes should be filled and in what
manner.
Corner and T-joints that are to be subjected to bend-
ing about an axis parallel to the joint shall have their
welds arranged to avoid concentrationof tensile stress at
the root of any weld. 9.15 Fillet Weld Details
9.15.1 Filiet welds which support a tensile force that is
not parallel to the axis of the weld shall not terminate at
9.12 Prohibited Types of Joints corners of parts or members, except as allowed by
and Welds 9.21.6.2(2), but shall be returned continuously, full size,
around the corner for a length equal to twice the weld
9.12.1 Butt joints not fully welded throughout their size where such return can be made in the same plane.
cross section are prohibited. Boxing shall be indicated on design and detail drawings.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 0784265 0500248 5 m
Dynamically Loaded Structures/ 193
9.15.2 Fillet welds deposited on the opposite sides of a DO NOT TIE WELDS
common plane of contact between two parts shall be
interrupted at a corner common to both welds (see Fig-
ure 9.4).
9.16 Eccentricity of Connections
9.16.1 Eccentricity between intersecting parts and mem-
bers shall be avoided insofar as practicable.
9.16.2 In designing welded joints, adequate provision
shall be made for bending stresses due to eccentricity, if
any, in the disposition and section of base metal parts
and in the location and types of weldedjoints.
9.16.3 For members having symmetricalcross sections,
the connection welds shall be arranged symmetrically
about the axis of the member, or proper allowance shall -
Figure 9.4 Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of
be made for unsymmetrical distribution of stresses. a Common Plane of Contact (see 9.15.2)
9.16.4 For axially stressed angle members, the center of
gravity of the connecting welds shall lie between the line
of the center of gravity of the angle’s cross section and the 9.19 Connections of Components of
centerline of the connected leg. Ifthe center of gravity of Built-up Members
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the connecting weld lies outside of this zone, the total
stresses, including those due to the eccentricity from the When a member is built up of two or more pieces, the
center of gravity of the angle, shall not exceed those pieces shall be connected along their longitudinal joints
permitted by this Code. by sufficient continuous welds to make the pieces act in
unison.
9.17 Connections or Splices Tension - 9.20 Transition of Thicknesses or
and Compression Members
Connections or splices of tension or compression
Widths at Butt Joints
members made by groove welds shall have complete 9.20.1 Butt joints between parts having unequal thick-
joint penetration welds. Connections or splices made nesses and subject to tensile stress shall have a smooth
with fillet or plug welds, except as noted in 9.18, shall be transition between the offset surfaces at a slope of no
designed for an average of the calculated stress and the more than 1in 2-1/2 with the surface of either part. The
strength of the member, but not less than 75% of the transition may be accomplishedby sloping weld surfaces,
strength of the member; or if there is repeated applica- by chamfering the thicker part, or by a combination of
tion of load, the maximum stress or stress range in such the two methods (see Figure 9.5).
connection or splice shall not exceed the fatigue stress
permitted by the applicable general specification. 9.20.2 In butt joints between parts of unequal thickness
that are subject only to shear or compressive stress,
transition of thickness shall be accomplishedas specified
9.18 Connections or Splices in in 9.20.1 when offset between surfaces at either side of
the joint is greater than the thickness of the thinner part
Compression Members with connected. When the offset is equal to or less than the
Milled Joints thickness of the thinner part connected, the face of the
weld shall be sloped no more than 1 in 2-1/2 from the
If members subject to compression only are spliced surface of the thinner part or shall be sloped to the
and full-milled bearing is provided, the splice material surface of the thicker part if this requires a lesser slope
and its welding shall be arranged, unless otherwisestipu- with the foliowing exception: Truss member joints and
lated by the applicablegeneral specifications, to hold ail beam and girder flangejoints shall be made with smooth
parts in alignment and shall be proportioned to carry transitions of the type specified in 9.20.1.
50% of the computed stress in the member. Where such
members are in full-milled bearing on base plates, there 9.20.3 Butt joints between parts having unequal width
shall be sufficient welding to hold all parts securely in and subject to tensile stress shall have a smooth transi-
place. tion between offset edges at a slope of no more than 1in
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 07842b5 0500249 7
1941Dynamically Loaded Structures
TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE
. REMOVE
AFTER WELDING
REMOVE
J AFTER WELDING
AFTER WELDING
TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE AND CHAMFERING
r \ CHAMFER
BEFORE WELDING
TRANSITION BY CHAMFERING THICKER PART
CENTERLINE ALIGNMENT OFFSET ALIGNMENT
(PARTICULARLY APPLICABLE (PARTICULARLY APPLICABLE
TO WEB PLATES) TO FLANGE PLATES)
Notes:
I . Groove may be of any permitted or qualified type and detail.
2. Transition slopes shown are the maximum permitted.
-
Figure 9.5 Transition of Thickness at Butt Joints of Parts
Having Unequal Thickness (see 9.20.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
DynamicalIy Loaded Structures/ 195
2-1/2 with the edge of either part or shallbe transitioned 9.21.3 StifZenem
with a 2.0 ft. (610 mm) minimum radius tangent to the
narrower part of the center of the butt joints (see Figure 9.21.3.1 Intermittent fillet welds used to connect
9.6). A radius transition is required for steels having a stiffeners to beams and girders shall comply with the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
yield strength greater than or equal to 90 ksi (620 MPa). following requirements:
(1) Minimum length of each weld shall be 1 4 / 2 in.
(38 mm).
9.21 Girders and Beams (2) Welds shall be made on both sides of the joint for
at least 25% of its length.
9.21.1 Connections or splices in beams or girders, when (3) Maximum end-toend clear spacingof welds shall
made by groove welds, shall have complete joint pene- be twelve times the thickness of the thinner part but not
tration welds. Connectionsor splices made with fillet or more than 6 in. (150 mm).
plug welds shall be designed for the average of the calcu- (4) Each end of stiffeners, connected to a web, shall be
lated stress and the strength of the member, but no less welded on both sides of the joint.
than 75% of the strength of member. Where there is
repeated application of load, the maximum stress or 9.21.3.2 Stiffeners, if used, shall preferably be ar-
stress range shall not exceed the fatigue stress permitted ranged in pairs on opposite sides o€the web. Stiffeners
by the applicable general specification. may be welded to tension or compression flanges. The
fatiguestress or stress ranges at the points of attachment
9.21.2 Splices between sections of rolled beams or built- to the tension flange or tension portions of the web shall
up girders shall preferably be made in a single transverse comply with the fatigue requirements of the general
plane. Shop splices of webs and flanges in built-up specification. Transverse fillet welds may be used for
girders, made before the webs and flanges are joined to welding stiffeners to flanges.
each other, may be located in a single transverseplane or
multiple transverse planes, but the fatigue stress provi- 9.21.3.3 If stiffeners are used on only one side of the
sions of the general specifications shall apply. web, they shall be welded to the compression flange.
i m) / I
WIDTH OF
NARROWER PLATE
,
I \
r=2ft
,
I
ta
I
314 in.
7'
BUiTJo"T WIDTH OF WIDER PLATE
I I
3/32 in.
I
PLAN VIEW
I
6fl 4ft
(1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 m)
DETAIL OF CUT BUTT JOINT
Mandatory for steels with a yield strength greater than
or equal to 90 ksi(620 MPa). Optional for all other steels.
Figure 9.6 -Transition of Width at Buff Joints of Parts
Having Unequal Width (see 9.20.3)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 W 0784265 0500253 5 W
1961Dynamically Loaded Structures
9.21.4 Unless otherwise specified in the Code or con- (b) The width of the cover plate is symmetrically
tract documents, fillet welds connecting attachments tapered to a width no greater than 1/3 the width at the
shall start or terminate not less than the weld size from theoretical end, but no less than 3 in. (75 mm).
the end of the joint. For stiffeners on girders, the weld (c) There is a continuous fillet weld along both
joining the stiffeners to the web shall start or terminate edges of the plate in the tapered terminal development
not less than four times the thickness of the web from the length to connect it to the flange.
face of the flange.
9.21.6.3 Fillet welds connecting a cover plate to the
9.21.5 Girders (built-up I sections) shall preferably be flange in the region between terminaldevelopments shall
made with one plate in each flange; Le., without cover
be continuous welds of sufficient size to transmit the
plates. The unsupported projection of a flange shall be incremental longitudinal shear between the cover plate
no more than permitted by the applicable general speci-
and the flange.34Fillet welds in each terminal develop-
fication. The thickness and width of a flange may be ment shall be of sufficient size to develop the cover plate’s
varied by butt joint welding parts of different thickness portion of the stress in the beam or girder at the inner end
or width with transitions conforming to the require-
of the terminaldevelopment length35and in no case shall
ments of 9.20. the welds be smaller than the minimum size permitted by
9.21.6 Cover Plates 2.7.1.1.
9.21.6.1 Cover plates shall preferably be limited to
one on any flange. The maximum thickness of cover
plates on a flange (total thickness of all cover plates if
more than one is used) shall not be greater than 1-1/2 Part D
times the thickness of the flangeto which the cover plate Workmanship
is attached. The thickness and width of acover plate may
be varied by butt joint welding parts of different thick-
9.22 Preparation of Material
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ness or width with transitions conforming to the require-
ments of 9.20. Such plates shall be assembled and welds
ground smooth before being attached to the flange. The 9.22.1 Material thicker than specified in the following
width of a cover plate, with recognition of dimensional list shall be trimmed if and as required to pr0duce.a
tolerances allowed by ASTM A6, shall allow suitable satisfactory welding edge wherever a weld is to carry
space for a fillet weld along each edge of the joint calculated stress:
between the flange and the plate cover.
9.21.6.2 Any partial length cover plate shall extend
beyond the theoreticalend by the terminal distance, or it
shall extend to a section where the stress or stress range 34. The incremental longitudinal shear is VQ/I,
in the beam flange is equal to the allowable fatigue stress where
permitted by the applicable general specification, which- V the vertical shear at the point of calculation
ever is greater. The theoretical end of the cover plate is Q = the static moment of the cover plate at the point of
calculation, taken about the neutral axis of the cover-
the section at which the stress in the flange without that plated section
cover plate equals the allowable stress exclusive of I = the moment of inertia of the cover-plated section at the
fatigue considerations. The terminaldistance beyond the point of calculation
theoretical end shall be at least sufficient to allow ter-
minal development in one of the following manners: 35. This portion of the stress is equal to MQ/I,
where
(1) Preferably, terminal development shall be made M the bending moment at the inner end of the terminal
with the end of the cover plate cut square, with no development length
reduction of width in the terminal development length, Q the static moment of the cover plate at the inner end of
and with a continuous fillet weld across the end and the terminal developmentlength, taken about the neu-
along both edges of the cover plate or flange to connect tral axis of the cover-plated section
the cover plate to the flange. For this condition, the I the moment of inertia of the cover-plated section at the
terminal development length, measured from the actual inner end of the terminal development length
end of the cover plate, shall be 1-1/2 times the width of Commonly, the inner end of the terminal development
the cover plate at its theoretical end. See also 9.15 and length wiU be at the theoretical end of the cover plate, but in the
Figure 9.4. case of a cover plate extension beyond the theoretical end
which is greater than the terminal developmentlength, only the
(2) Alternatively, terminal development may be made length specified in9.21.6.2(1) or9.21.6.2(2), whicheveris appli-
with no weld across the end of the cover plate provided cable, may be considered in calculating the size of the terminal
that ali of the following conditions are met: development welds. Failure to recognize this limitation can
(a) The terminal development length, measured result in welds that ate too small to support the flange-to-cover
from the actual end of the cover plate, is twice the width. plate terminal transition stresses.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 72 m 07842b5 0500252 7 m
Dynamically Loaded Structures/ 197
Sheared material thicker than 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) (See Appendix VII for tabulation.)
Rolled edges of plates 9.23.3 Web distortion of twice the allowable tolerances
(other than universal mill plates) of 9.23.2 shall be satisfactory when occurring at the end
thicker than 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) of a girder which has been drilled, or subpunched, and
reamed either duringassemblyor to atemplatefor afield
Toes of angles or rolled shapes bolted splice; provided, when the splice plates are bolted,
(other than wide flange sections) the web assumes the proper dimensional tolerances.
thicker than 5/8 in. (15.9 mm)
9.23.4 If architecturalconsiderations require tolerances
Universal mill plates or edges of more restrittive than described above, specificreference
flanges of wide flange sections must be included in the bid documents.
thicker than 1 in. (25.4 mm)
The preparation for butt joints shall conform to the
requirements of 2.4 except as modified by 2.6.2.
9.24 Temporary Welds
9.22.2 Steel and weld metal may be thermally cut, pro- Temporary welds shall be subject to the same welding
vided a smooth and regular surfacefree from cracks and procedure requirements as the final welds. They shall be
notches is secured, and provided that an accurate profie removed unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
is secured by the use of a mechanical guide. Freehand When they are removed, the surface shall be made flush
thermal cutting shall be done only where approved by with the original surface. There shall be no temporary
the Engineer. welds in tension zones of members made of quenched
and tempered steel except at locations more than 1/6 of
the depth of the web from tension flanges of beams or
9.23 Dimensional Tolerances girders; temporary welds at other locations shall be
shown on shop drawings.
The dimensions of structural members shall be within
the tolerances specifled in 3.5. In addition:
9.23.1 Variations from flatness of girder webs is deter-
mined by measuring the offset from the actual web cen- 9.25 Quality of Welds
terline to a straight edgewhose length is greater than the 9.25.1 Visual Inspection. All weIds shall be visually
least panel dimension and placed on a plane parallel to inspected and shall be acceptable if the following condi-
the nominal web plane. Measurements shall be taken tions are satisfied:
prior to erection. (See Commentary)
9.25.1.1 The weld shall have no cracks.
9.23.2 Variation from flatness of webs having a depth,
D, and a thickness, t, in panels bounded by stiffeners or 9.25.1.2 Thorough fusion shall exist between adjacent
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
flanges, or both, whose least panel dimension is d shall layers of weld metal and between weld metal and base
not exceed the following: metal.
Intermediatestiffeners on both sides of web 9.25.1.3 All craters shall be filled to the full cross
section of the weld, except for the ends of intermittent
Interior girders- f i e t welds outside of their effective length.
where D / t < 150-maximum variation = d/115
where D/t 2 150-maxllnum variation = d/92 9.25.1.4 Weld profiles shall be in accordance with 3.6.
Fascia girders- 9.25.1.5 In primary members, undercut shall be no
where D/t < 150-maximum variation = d/ 130 more than 0.01 in. (0.25 mm) deep when the weld is
where D/t 2 150-maximum variation = d/ 105 transverse to tensile stress under any design loading
condition. Undercut shall be no more than 1/32 in.
Intermediatestiffeners on one side only of web (1 mm) deep for all other cases.
Interior girders- 9.25.1.6 The frequency of piping porosity in f i e t
where D/ t < 100-maximum variation = d/ 100 welds shallnot exceed one in each 4 in. (100 mm) of weld
where D / t 2 100-maximum variation d/67 length and the maximum diameter shall not exceed
Fascia girders- 3/32 in. (2 mm). Exception: for fdlet welds connecting
where D / t < 100-maximum variation = d/ 120 stiffeners to web, the sum of the diameters of piping
where D / t I100-maximum variation = d/80 porosity shall not exceed 3/8 in. (10 mm) in any linear
inch of weld and shall not exceed 3/4 in. (19 mm) in any
No intermediate stiffeners-maximumvariation= D/ 150 12 in. (305 mm) length of weld.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 07842b5 0500253 9
198/Dynamically Loaded Structures
9.25.1.7 A fillet weld in any single continuous weld 9.25.2.5 Appendix V illustrates the application of the
shall be permitted to underrun the nominal fXlet weld requirements given in 9.25.2.1.
size specified by i / 16 in. (1.6 m)without correction,
provided that the undersize portion of the weld does not 9.25.3 Ultrasonic Inspection
exceed 10% of the length of the weld. On the web-to-
flange welds on girders, no underrun is permitted at the 9.25.3.1 Welds that are subject to ultrasonic testing in
ends for a length equal to twice the width of the flange. addition to visual inspection are acceptable if they meet
9.25.1.8 Complete joint penetration groove welds in the following requirements:
butt joints transverse to the direction of computed tensile (1) Welds subject to tensile stressunder any condition
stress shall have no piping porosity. For all other groove of loading shali conform to the requirements of Table
welds, the frequency of piping porosity shall not exceed 9.3.
one in 4 in. (100 mm) of length and the maximum (2) Welds subject to compressive stress shall conform
diameter shall not exceed 3/32 in. (2 mm). to the requirements of Table 8.2.
9.25.1.9 Visual inspection of welds in all steels may 9.25.3.2 Ultrasonically tested welds are evaluated on
begin immediatelyafter the completed welds have cooled the basis of a discontinuity reflecting ultrasound in pro-
to ambient temperature. Acceptance criteria for ASTM portion to its effect on the integrity of the weld.
A514 and A517 steels shall be based on visual inspection Indications of discontinuities that remain on the
performed not less than 48 hours after completion of the cathode ray tube as thesearch unit is moved towards and
weld. away from the discontinuity (scanning movement “b”)
may be indicative of planar discontinuities with signifi-
9.25.2 Radiographicand Magnetic Particle Inspection. cant through throat dimension. As the orientation of
Welds that are subject to radiographic or magnetic par- such discontinuities, relative to the sound beam, deviates
ticle testing in addition to visual inspection shall have from the perpendicular, dB ratings which do not permit
no cracks and shall be unacceptable if the radiograph direct, reliable evaluation of the welded joint integrity
or magnetic particle testing shows any of the types of may result. When indications that exhibit these planar
discontinuities listed in 9.25.2.1, 9.25.2.2, 9.25.2.3, or characteristicsare present at scanning sensitivity,a more
9.25.2.4. detailed evaluation of the discontinuity by other means
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
9.25.2.1 For welds subject to tensile stress under any may be required (e.g., alternate ultrasonic techniques,
condition of loading, the greatest dimension of any radiography, grinding or gouging for visual inspection,
porosity or fusion type discontinuity that is i / 16 in. etc.).
(1.6 mm) or larger in greatest dimension shall not exceed
the size, B, indicated in Figure 9.7, for the weld size 9.25.3.3 Complete joint penetration web-to-flange
involved. The distance from any porosity or fusion type welds shall conform to the requirements of Table 8.2,
discontinuity described above to another such disconti- and acceptance for discontinuities detected by scanning
nuity, to an edge, or to the toe or root of any intersecting movements other than scanning pattern ‘E’(see 6.24.2.2)
flange-to-web weld shall be not less than the minimum may be based on a weld thickness equal to the actual web
clearance allowed, Cyindicated in Figure 9.7, for the size thickness plus 1in. (25 mm). Discontinuitiesdetected by
of discontinuity under examination. scanning pattern ‘E’ shall be evaluated to the criteria of
9.25.3 for the actual web thickness. When such web-to-
9.25.2.2 For welds subject to compressive stress only flange welds are subject to calculated tensile stress
and specificallyindicated as such on the design drawings, normal to the weld, they shall be so designated on design
the greatest dimension of porosity or a fusion type dis- drawings and shall conform to the requirements of
continuity that is 1/8 in. (3 mm) or larger in greatest Table 9.3.
dimension shall not exceed the size, Bynor shall the space
between adjacent discontinuities be less than the mini- 9.25.4 Liquid Penetrant Inspection. Welds that are sub-
mum clearance allowed, Cyindicated by Figure 9.8 for ject to liquid penetrant testing, in addition to visual
the size of discontinuity under examination. inspection, shall be evaluated on the basis of the
9.25.2.3 Independent of the requirements of 9.25.2.1 requirements for visual inspection.
and 9.25.2.2, discontinuitieshaving a greatest dimension
ofless than 1/16in.(1.6mm)shallbeunacceptableifthe 9.25.5 When welds are subject to nondestructivetesting,
sum of their greatest dimensionsexceeds 3/ 8 h.(10 mm) in accordance with 9.25.2,9.25.3, and 9.25.4, the testing
in any linear inch of weld. may begin immediately after the completed welds have
cooled to ambient temperature. Acceptance criteria for
9.25.2.4 The limitations given by Figures 9.7 and 9.8 ASTM A514 and A517 steels shall be based on non-
for 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) weld size shall apply to all weld destructive testing performed not less than 48 hours after
sizes greater than 1-1/2 in. thickness. completion of the welds.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Dynamically Loaded Structures/ 199
112
1-112
I . TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN
ANY JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECTA HORIZONTALLYTO B.
œ
1-114 - 2. TO DETERMINE THE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED
O BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIESOF ANY SIZE,
w .G PROJECT B VERTICALLY TO C.
N
Gg 1 - -
gG
$3 314 - -
9s
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8 !i
=-I
112 - -
OE
I
U 114 - -
O I I I Il I I I I
O 112 1 1-112 2 2-112 3 3-112 4 4-112
C IN INCHES
13
38
1. TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN
ANY JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT A HORIZONTALLYTO B.
œ
32 - 2. TO DETERMINE THE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED
BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIES OF ANY SIZE,
O E
PROJECT B VERTICALLY TO C.
!!E
Vjw 25 -
5:
$9 - -
g 19
13 - -
1
a -
O I I I Il I I I I
O 13 25 38 50 65 75 90 1O0 115
C IN MILLIMETERS
-
C MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINALAXIS OF THE WELD
BETWEEN EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION-TYPE DISCONTINUITIES.
(LARGER OF ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES GOVERNS)
Note: Adjacent discontinuities, spaced less than the minimum spacing required by Figure 9.7,
shall be measured as one length equal to the sum of the total length of the discontinuities
plus the length of the space between them and evaluated as a single discontinuity.
-
Figure 9.7 Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Tension
Welds (Limitations of Porosity and Fusion Discontinuities)(see 9.25.2.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 9 2 W 07842b5 0500255 2 W
2001Dynamically Loaded Structures
314
1-112
I. TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN
ANY JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT A HORIZONTALLYTO B.
1-114 - 2. TO DETERMINE THE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED
w .i BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIES OF ANY SIZE,
N PROJECT B VERTICALLY TO C.
v 1-
2vjj ~
w n
3w 314 - -
$3
85 112 - -
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
CCJ
6 G
àg
-
O 112 1 1-112 2 2-112 3 3-112 4 4-112
C IN INCHES
19
38
I . TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE DISCONTINUITY PERMITTED IN
ANY JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT A HORIZONTALLYTO B.
32 - 2. TO DETERMINE THE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALLOWED
BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIES OF ANY SIZE,
BE PROJECT B VERTICALLY TO C.
vj w- 25 -
92
g2 - -
19
9s
OC
$3
5
13 - -
% -
O 13 25 38 50 65 75 90 1O0 115
C IN MILLIMETERS
C - MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINALAXIS OF THE WELD
BETWEEN EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION-TYPE DISCONTINUITIES.
(LARGER OF ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIES GOVERNS)
THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF A DISCONTINUITY LOCATED WITHIN THIS DISTANCE FROM AN EDGE OF
PLATE SHALL BE 118 in.(3 mm), BUT A 118 in. DISCONTINUITY MUST BE 114 in.(6 mm)
OR MORE AWAY FROM THE EDGE. THE SUM OF DISCONTINUITIES LESS THAN 118 in. IN SIZE
AND LOCATED WITHIN THIS DISTANCE FROM THE EDGE SHALL NOT EXCEED 3/16 in45 mm).
DISCONTINUITIES U16 in.(l.6 mm) TO LESS THAN 118 in. WILL NOT BE RESTRICTED IN OTHER LOCATIONS
UNLESS THEY ARE SEPARATED BY LESS THAN 2 L (L BEING THE LENGTH OF THE LARGER
DISCONTINUITY); IN WHICH CASE, THE DISCONTINUITIES SHALL BE MEASURED AS ONE LENGTH
EQUAL TO THE TOTAL LENGTH OF THE DISCONTINUITIESAND SPACE AND EVALUATED AS SHOWN
IN FIGURE 9.8.
Figure 9.8 -Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Compression Welds
(Limitations of Porosity or Fusion Type Discontinuities) (see 9.25.2.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Dynamically Loaded Stmctures/201
Table 9.3
Ultrasonic Acceptance-Rejection Criteria (see 9.25.3.1)
5/16(8) > 3 / 4
Discontinuity thru thru > 1-1/2 thru 2-1/2 (64) > 2-1/2 thm 4 (100) > 4 thrii 8 (200)
Severity 3/4 (19) 1-1/2(38)
Class
70’ 70’ 70’ 60” 45’ 70’ 60’ 45’ 70’ 60’ 45’
Class A +lo& +8& +.4& +7& +9& +l& +4& +6& ~ -2& +I & +3&
lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower lower
Class B +11 +9 +5 +8 +10 +2 +5 +7 -1 +2 +4
t6 +9 +11 +3 +6 +8 O +3 +5
Class c +12 +10 +7 +10 +12 +4 +7 +9 +1 +4 +6
+8 +11 +13 +5 +8 +IO +2 +5 +7
Class D +13 +11 +9 +12 +14 +6 +9 +11 +3 +6 +8
&up &up &up &up &up &up &up &up &up &up &up
(19 mm) shall be rejected.
Class C (small discontinuities)
through 2-1/2 (64 mm) 20
Any indication in this category having a length greafer than 2 in. (51 > 2-1/2 through 5 (64-127 mm) 25
mm)in themiddle halfor3/4inch(l9mm)lengthinthe topor bottom > 5 through 10 (127-254 mm) 35
quarter of weld thickness shali be rejected. > 10 through 15 (254-381 mm) 45
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Class D (minor discontinuities) **”hiscolumn refers to sound path distance; NOT matenal thickness.
Any indication in this category shall be accepted regardless of length or
location in the weld.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 0 7 8 4 2 6 5 0 5 0 0 -~~
~~ 257 b ~
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10. Tubular Structures
Part A Symbol Meaninn References
GeneralRequirements
10.1 Application
ßeff
C
effective ß for K-connection
chord face plastification
corner dimension
10.5.2.1
Figure 10.1 (M)
II
D outside diameter OD
10.1.1 This section supplements sections 1 through 6 (circular tubes) or
and iS to be used in conjunction with the prescribed outside width of main Figure 10.1(M)
member (box sections)
specification for the design and construction of steel D cumulativefatigue damage 10.7.4.2
structures in which the loads are carried primarily by
n
tubular members. It is not intended to apply to pressure ratio, C
vessels or pressure piping.
db diameter of branch member Figure 10.1;
10.1.2 Members in tubular structures shail be identified TabIe 10.2
as shown in Figure 10.1.36 rl (eta) ratio of a, to D Figure 10.1 (B);
Figure 10.1(M);
10.1.3 Symbols used in section 10 are as follows: Table 10.2
eTR (epsilon) total strain range Figure 10.6
Symbol -
Meaning References F toe fulet weld size Figure 10.13
-
(Y (alpha) chord ovalizing
parameter
Tables 10.2
and 10.3
FEXX
F
Y
classified minimum tensile
strength of weld deposit
yield strength of base metal
Table 10.1,
10.5.1.3, 10.8.3
Table 10.2
II
a width of rectangular Figure 10.1 yield strength of main Table 10.2,
FYO
hollow section product member 10.5.1.1,10.5.2.1,
a, ratio of a to sin 8 10.8.5; 10.5.2.2
Figure 10.1 f, axial stress in branch member Figure 10.2
b transverse width of Figure 10.1 fa axial stress in main member Table 10.2
rectangular tubes
bet(be(ovl)branch effective width 10.5.2.5
fb bending stress in branch Footnote 42;
member Figure 10.2
at thru member fb bending stress in main member Table 10.2
b,o(be) branch effective width 10.5.2.5 nominal stress, in-plane Footnote 42;
at chord fbY
bending Table 10.3
b,i(bep) branch effective width 10.5.2.3 fb, nominal stress, out-of-plane Footnote 42;
for outside punching bending Table 10.3
bgap effective width at gap 10.5.2.3 f* nominal stress in branch 10.5.1
of K-connections member
ß (beta) diameter ratio of 10.13.3; 10.8.4 g gap in K-connections Figure 10.1(E),
db to D Figure 10.17 0% and (H),
ratio of rb to R 10.8.4; Figure 10.4
(circular sections) Figure 10.1 H web depth (box chord) 10.5.2
ratio of b to D (box sections)
BgaP dimensionless effective width
Figure 10.1(M)
10.5.2.3 Y
in plane of truss
(gamma) main member Figure 10.1(M)
II
at gap of K-connections flexibility parameter; (Table)
ßeop dimensionless effective width 10.5.2.1 ratio R to t,
for outside punching (circular sections); Figure lO.l(M)
ratio of D to 2t, (Table)
(box sections)
36. Tubular: for defition see Appendix B for explanation of Yb radius to thickness ratio of Table 10.3
various products. tube at transition (Note 4)
203
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 07842b5 0500258
204/Tubular Structures
Symbol Meaning References Symbol Meaning References
II ID
thru member y
(for overlap conn.)
inside diameter
10.5.2.5
Figure 10.9(B)
r corner radius of rectangular
hollow sections as mea-
sured by radius gage
Figure 10.1
K- connection configuration Figure 10.1 (E) r effective radius of inter- 10.8.4
Ka relative length factor 10.8.3; section
10.8.4; 10.8.5.1 rb radius of branch Figure 10.1 (M)
KLl relative section factor 10.8.3; rm mean radius to effective 10.8.2
10.8.4; 10.8.5.2 throat of welds
x (lambda) interaction Table 10.2 SCF stress concentrationfactor Table 10.3
sensitivity parameter (Note 4)
L size of fillet weld dimension Figure 10.5 XII (sigma) summation of actual 10.5.1.5(2)
as shown in Detail A Figures 10.12- weld lengths
10.14; Table 10.7 T- connection configuration Figure 10.1 (C)
L length of joint can 10.5.1.2 TCBR tension/compressionor Table 10.3
Il
load factor 10.6.2 bending, or both, total
(partial safety factor for range of nominal stress
LF load in LRFD) t wall thickness of tube Figure 10.17
4 actual weld length where 10.5.1.5 (1) tb waii thickness of Figure 10.1 (M);
branch contacts main branch member Figure 10.2
member branch member for dimen- Figures 10.12-
12 projected chord length (one 10.5.1.5 sionhg of completejoint 10.15
side) of overlapping weld penetration groove welds
M applied moment 10.5.2.5 thinner member for dimen- Figures 10.16-
(I nM.,
moment in chord
ultimate moment
cycles of load applied
10.5.1.1
10.5.1.1
10.7.4.2 tc
sionhg partial penetration
groove welds and f i e t welds
wall thickness of main
10.17
Figure 10.1 (M);
N number of cycles allowed at 10.7.4.2; member joint can Figure 10.2
given stress range Figure 10.6 thickness 10.5.2.1 (2)
OD outside diameter Figure 10.9(B) tW weld size (effective throat) 10.5.1.5(1)
w (omega) end preparation Figures 10.12- Table 10.7;
ande 10.14 (details A, Figures 10.12-
B, C) 10.16
P axial load in branch member Figure 10.3; t:, t, as qualified in 10.5.1.5 10.5.1.5
10.5.1.5 7 (tau) branch-to-main rela- Figure 10.1 (M)
Il PL? axial load in chord
ultimate load
individual member load
10.5.1.1
10.5.1.1
10.5,1,5(1);
tive thickness geometry
parameter; ratio of tb to t,
tover1ap / ~ t h m 10.5.2.5
component perpendicular
to main member axis
Figure 10.3 2 (theta) acute angle between 10.8.4; Figure
two member axes 10.1 @)Y (E);
projected footprint length Figure 10.5
II
angle between member Figure 10.1(M)
of overlapping member center lines (Table)
$ amount of overlap
(phi)joint included angle
Figure 10.5
Figures 10.12- U
brace intersection angie
utilkation ratio of axial and
Figure 10.2
Table 10.2
10.14 bending stress to allow-
7r (pi) ratio of circumference 10.8.4 able stress, at point
to diameter of circle under consideration
Y (psi) local dihedral angle. See Figure 10.1 (K), in main member
definition Appendix B (M); Figures VP punching shear stress Table 10.2;
- 10.11- 10.16 Figure 10.2
?II (psi bar) supplementary angle Figure 10.1(K); VW allowable stress for weld 10.5.1.5(1);
to the local dihedral angle Table 10.3
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
between branch members Figure 10.3
angle change at transition (Note 4) w backup weld width Figures 10.12-
Qß geometry modifer Table 10.2; 10.15; Table 10.7
10.5.1 1
Qt stress interaction term Table 10.2 X algebraic variable -
27rsine 10.8.4
Q, branch member geometry and Table 10.2; Y- connection configuration Figure 10.1(D)
load pattern modifier 10.5.1
R outside radius, main member Figure 10.1(M) 1 3-82
R root opening (joint fit-up) Figures 10.12- Y algebraic variable 2 _ ~ 210.8.4
10.15 Z Z loss factor Table 10.8;
P (rho) Angular location Appendix G Figure 10.16
on branch member 5 (zeta) ratio of gap to D 10.5.2.1
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 72 0784265 O500257 T ~~
TubuIar Stmctures/205
HEEL 7 I- BRANCH
HEELI
SIDE
TOE
CORNER \MAIN
MEMBER
(A) CIRCULAR SECTIONS (BJ BOX SECTIONS
MAXIMUM LIMIT OF
T-CONNECTION
THAN 10"
i4
E Jj (C) T-CONNECTION (D) Y-CONNECTION
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
GAP g ~ 7
J
' .'
\ ' 9
\
I I
-F GAP g MEASURED
ALONG THE
@ K(T-K) 0 K(T-Y) SURFACE OF THE
CHORD BETWEEN
(E) K-CONNECTION (F) K-COMBINATIONCONNECTIONS PROJECTIONS
OF THE BRANCH
Note: Relevant gap is between braces MEMBER OUTSIDE
whose loads are essentially balanced SURFACEAT THE
NEAREST APPROACH
Figure 10.1 -Parts of a Tubular Connection (see 10.1.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 W 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 05002b0 b W
206/Tubular Structures
(G) CROSS CONNECTIONS
i- OVERLAP
OFFSET ECCENTRICITY
THROUGH
MEMBER
(H) DEVIATIONS FROM CONCENTRIC CONNECTIONS
6
INTERIOR OUTSIDE
DIAPHRAGM STIFFENING
RING
JOINT CAN
CRUSHING
n.B
LOAD
(I)SIMPLE TUBULAR CONNECTION (J) EXAMPLES OF COMPLEX REINFORCED CONNECTIONS
TRANSITION 7
II I l I I I
o o :i $1 1
I $ I I I I
I \ I I I I I I
'I
(K) FLARED CONNECTIONS AND TRANSITIONS
Figure 10.1 (continued) -Parts of a Tubular Connection(see 10.1.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 07842b5 0500261 8
Tubular Stmctures/u)7
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(L) CONNECTION TYPES FOR BOX SECTIONS (M)GEOMETRIC PARAMETERS
'ARAMETER CIRCULAR SECTIONS BOX SECTIONS
"1I- ß fh/R OR dh/D b/D
Y I I D/2tc I
RADIUS AS
MEASURED BY e ]ANGLEBETWEEN MEMBER CENTER LINES
RADIUS GAGE .
T . ILOCAL DIHEDRAL ANGLE AT A GIVEN
(N) CORNER DIMENSION OR THE POINT OF TANGENCY OR CONTACT
RADIUS MEASUREMENT WITH A 90 DEGREE SQUARE PLACED
ON THE CORNER
Figure 10.1 (continued) -Parts of a Tubular Connection (see 10.1.2)
10.2 Base Metal (4) ASTM A131, Specification for Structural Steel
for Ships
10.2.1 Steel base metal to be used for welded tubular (5) ASTM A139, Grade BySpecificationfor Electric-
structuresshallconform to the requirementsof the latest Fusion (Arc) Welded Steel Pipe (Sizes 4 in. and Over)
edition of any specification listed below. Combinations (6) ASTM A242, Specification for High-Strength
of approved steel base metals may be welded together. Low-Alloy StructuralSteel (if the properties are suitable
(1) ASTM A36, Specification for Structural Steel for welding)
(2) ASTM A53, Grade By Specification for Pipe, (7)ASTM A381, Grade Y-35, Specification for Metal-
Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Arewelded Steel Pipe for High-pressure Transmission
Seamless Systems
(3) ASTM A106, GradeB, Specificationfor Seamless (8) ASTM A441, Specification for High-Strength
Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service Low-Alloy Structural Manganese-Vanadium Steel
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
208/ Tubular Structures
(16) ASTM A537, Specification for Pressure Vessel
Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Sion Steel, Heat-Treat~A~~
(17) ASTM A570, Specificationfor Hot-Rolled Car-
bon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality
(18) ASTM A572, Specification for High-Strength
Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural
qua lit^^*$^^
(19) ASTM A573, Grade 65, Specification for Struc-
tural Carbon Steel Plates of Improved Toughness
(20) ASTM A588, Specification for High-Strength
Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Min-
imum Yield Point to 4 in. (100 mm) Thick38139
(21) ASTM A595, Specification for Steel Tubes,
Low-Carbon, Tapered for Structural Use38J9
(22) ASTM A606, Type 2 (Type 4 if the properties are
suitable for welding), Specification for Steel Sheet and
Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, High-Strength,
Low-Alloy, with Improved Corrosion Resistance
(23) ASTM A607, Grades 45, 50, and 55, Speci-
fication for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and
Cold-Rolled, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium
or Vanadium, or both
(24) ASTM A618, Grades II and III (Grade I if the
-
Figure 10.2 Punching Shear Stress properties are suitable for welding), Specification for
Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-
(see 10.5.1)
Alloy Structural Tubing38
(25) ASTM A633, Specificationfor Normalized High-
(9) ASTM A500, Specification for Cold-Formed Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel38
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in (26) ASTM A709, Specificationfor Structural Steel
Rounds and Shapes37 for Bridges38$39
(10) ASTM A501, Specification for Hot-Formed (27) ASTM A710, Grade A, Specification for Low
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-
(1 1) ASTM A514, Specification for High-Yield- Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-Copper-Colum-
Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, bium Alloy Steels38
I Suitable for Welding38J9 (28) ASTM A808, Specification for High Strength
(12) ASTM A516, Specification for Pressure Vessel Low Alloy Carbon, Manganese, Columbium, Vanadium
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temper- Steel of Structural Quality with Improved Notch
ature Service Toughness38
(13) ASTM A517, Specification for Pressure Vessel (29) API 5L, Grade B, Specification for Line Pipe4
Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and (30) API 5L, Grades X42 and X52, Specificationfor
I I Tempered38 Line Pipe 38139
(14) ASTM A524, Specificationfor Seamless Carbon (31) API 2B (when made from plate steel listed
Steel Pipe for Process Piping herein), Specification for Fabricated Structural Steel
(15) ASTM A529, Specificationfor Structural Steel Pipe
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
with 42 ksi (290 MPa) Minimum Yield Point (1/2 in. (32) API 2H, Grades 42 and 50, Specifications for
[13 mm] Maximum Thickness) Carbon-Manganese Steel Plate for Offshore Platform
Tubular Joints
37. Products manufactured to this specification may not be (33) ABS Grades A, B, DyE, DS, and CS, Require-
suitable for those applications such as dynamically loaded ments for Ordinary-Strength HUHStructural Steel4*
elements in welded structures, etc., where low-temperature (34) ABS Grades AH32, DH32, EH32, AH36, DH36,
notch-toughness properties may be important. Special investi- and EH36, Requirements for Higher-Strength Hull
gation or heat treatment may be required when this product is Structural Steel
applied to tubular T-, Y-, and ,K-
connections.
38. Reduced effectiveyield shall be used as Fy0in the design of
tubular connections-See note 2 to Table 10.2. 40. American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220L Street, N.W.,
39. Caution: In the absence of a notch toughness requirement Washington, D.C. 20005
this material may be unsuitable for use as the main member in a 41. American Bureau of Shipping (ABS), 45 Eisenhower
tubular connection. See 10.2.6.2. Drive, Paramus, NJ 07652
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 07842b5 O500263 I W
Tubular Structures/209
10.2.2 When an ASTM A709 grade of structural steel is yield strength over 75 ksi (515 MPa) shall be qualified
considered for use, its weldability shall be established by only by testing as prescribed in section 5, Part Byto the
the steel producer. The procedure for welding the steel satisfaction of the Engineer.
shall be established by qualificationin accordance with
the requirements of 5.2 and other such requirements as 10.2.5.3 The design provisions of 10.5 for welded
prescribed by the Engineer with the followingexception: tubular connections are not intended for use with circular
If the grade to be supplied will meet the chemical and tubes having a specified minimum yield, Fy,over 60 ksi
mechanical properties of ASTM A36, A572 Grade 50, or (415 MPa) or for box sections over 52 ksi (360 MPa).
A588, the applicable prequalXed procedures of this
Code shall apply. 10.2.6 Base Metal Notch Toughness
10.2.3 Base Metals Not Approved in 10.2.1 10.2.6.1 Welded tubular members in tension shali
be required to demonstrate Charpy V-notch absorbed
10.2.3.1 Use of Unlisted Base Metals. When a steel
energy of 20 ft-lb at 70" F (27 J @ 20" C) for the follow-
other than one of those listed in 10.2.1 is approved under ing conditions:
the provisions of the general specification, and such steel
(i) Base metal thickness of 2 in. (50 mm) or greater
proposed for welded constructionunder this Code, weld-
with a specified minimum yield strength of 40 ksi
ing procedures shall be established by qualification in (280 MPa) or greater.
accordance with the requirements of 5.2. The fabricator Charpy V-notch testing shall be in accordance with
shall have the responsibility for establishing the welding
ASTM A673 (Frequency H, heat lot). For the purposes
procedure by qualification. of this subsection, a tension member is defined as one
10.2.3.2 Weldabiiity. The Engineer may prescribe having more than 10 ksi (70 MPa) tensile stress due to
additional weldability testing of the steel, The responsi- design loads.
bility for determining weldability, including the assump-
tion of additional testing costs involved, is assigned to 10.2.6.2 Tubulars used as the main member in struc-
the party who either specifies a material not listed in tural nodes, whose design is governed by cyclic or fatigue
10.2.1 or who proposes the use of a substitute material loading (e.g., the joint-can in T-, Y-, and K-connections)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
not listed in 10.2.1. The party proposing the use of a shall be required to demonstrate Charpy V-notch ab-
substitute material not listed in 10.2.1 shall assume the sorbed energy of 20 ft-lb at the Lowest Anticipated Serv-
additional costs involved in 10.2.3.1. ice Temperature (LAST) for the following conditions:
(1) Base metal thickness of 2 in. (50 mm) or greater,
10.2.4 Base Metal for Weld Tabs, Backing, and Spacers (2) Base metal thickness of 1 in. (25 mm) or greater
with a specified yield strength of 50-ksi or greater.
10.2.4.1 Weld Tabs. Weld tabs used in welding shall When the LASTis not specified, or the structureis not
conform to the following requirements: governed by cyclic or fatigue loading, testingshallbe at a
(1) When used in welding with an approved steel temperature not greater than 40"F (4" C). Charpy V-
listed in 10.2.1, they may be any of the steels listed in notch testing shall normally represent the as-furnished
10.2.1 tubulars, and be tested in accordance with ASTM A673
(2) When used in welding with a steel qualified in Frequency H (heat lot).
accordance with 10.2.3, they may be
(a) The steel qualified, or 10.2.6.3 Alternative notch toughness requirements
(b) Any steel listed in 10.2.1. shall apply when specified in contract documents. The
Commentary gives additional guidance for designers.
10.2.4.2 Backing. Steel for backing shall conform
Toughness should be considered in relation to redun-
to the requirements of 10.2.4.1 (i) and (2), except that dancy versus criticality of structure at an early stage in
100 ksi (690 MPa) minimum yield strength steel as planning and design.
backing shall be used only with 100 ksi minimum yield
strength steels.
10.2.4.3 Spacers. Spacers used shall be of the same
material as the base metal.
Part B
10.2.5 Base Metal Limitations Allowable Unit Stresses
10.2.5.1 The provisions of this Code are not intended
for use with steels having a specified minimum yield
point or yield strength over 100 ksi (690 MPa).
10.3 Base Metal Stresses
II
10.2.5.2 All groove and fìllet weld procedures for
weld metal and base metal with a minimum specified
These provisions may be used in conjunctionwith any
applicable design specifications in either allowable stress
design (ASD) or load and resistance factor design I
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 078Y2b 5 05002b4 3 M
210/Tubular Structures
(LRFD) formats. Unless the applicable design specifica- (1) Punching Shear Format. The acting punching
tion provides otherwise, tubular connection design shall shear stress on the potential failure surface (see Figure
be as described in 10.5, 10.6, and 10.7. The base metal 10.2) shall not exceed the allowable punching shear
stresses shail be those specified in the applicable design stress.
specifications, with the following limitations:
The acting punching shear stress is given by
10.3.1 Limitations on diameter/thickness for circular
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
sections, and largest flat width/thickness ratio for box actingV, = rhsine
sections, beyond which local buckling or other local
failuremodes must be considered, shail be in accordance The allowable punching shear stress is given by
with the governing design code. Limits of applicability
for the criteria given in 10.5 shall be observed as follows: allow V, = Qq Qf Fy0/(0.6y)
(1) circular tubes: D/ t < 3300/ Fy
The allowable V, shall also be limited by the ailowable
(2) box section gap connections: D / t I210/* but shear stress specified in the applicable design specifica-
not more than 35 tion (e.g., 0.4 Fyo).
(3) box section overlap connections: D/ t IlW/.\/F;
10.3.2 Moments caused by signifcant deviation from Terms used in the foregoing equations are defined as
concentricconnections shall be provided for in analysis follows:
and design. See Figure 10.1(H). r, 6, y, ß and other parameters of connectiongeome-
try are defined in Figure lO.l(M).
fn is the nominal axial (A)or bending (fb) stress in
10.4 Unit Stresses in Welds the branch member (punching shear for each kept
separate)42
10.4.1 Except as modified in 10.5, 10.6, and 10.7, the Fyo The specified minimum yield strength of the
allowable stresses in welds shall be as shown in Table main member chord, but not more than 2/3 the
10.1. tensile strength.
10.4.2 Fiber stresses due to bending shall not exceed the Qq, Qf are geometry modifier and stress interaction
values prescribed for tension and compression, unless terms, respectively, given in Table 10.2.
the members are compact sections, (able to develop full
II plastic moment) and any transverse weld is proportioned
to develop fully the strength of sections joined.
For combined axial and bending stresses, the following
inequality shall be satisfied:
10.4.3 Plug or slot welds shail not be ascribed any value
in resistance to stress other than shear in the plane of the
faying surfaces.
[
acting V,
allow v, Iyd [ 1 +
acting V,
aiiow v,
(2) LRFD Format (loads factoredup to ultimate con-
bending
51.0
dition-see 10.6)
10.5 Limitations of the Strength of Branch member loadings at which plastic chord wall
Welded Tubular Connections failure in the main member occurs are given by:
10.5.1 CircularT-, Y-, and K-Connections(See 10.2.5.3) axial load: Pusin 8 = tC Fyo[6 T ß Qq] Qf
10.5.1.1 Local Failure. Where aT-, Y-, or K-connec- bending moment:
tion is made by simply welding the branch member@)
individually to the main member, local stresses at a Mu Sin 6 = t? Fyo [db /4l I6 T B Qql Qf
potential failure surface through the main member wall with the resistance factor <P = 0.8.
may limit the usable strength of the welded joint. The
shear stress at which such failure occurs depends not Qf should be computed with Ü2redefined as (P, /AFyo)2
oniy upon the strength of the main member steel, but + (M,/SFyo)2where P, and M, are factored chord load
also on the geometry of the connection. Such connec- and moment, A is area, S is section modulus.
tions shall be proportioned on the basis of either (1)
punching shear or (2) ultimate load calculations as given
below. The punching shear is an ailowable stress design
(ASD) criterion and includes the safety factor. The ulti- 42. For bending about two axes (e.g., y and z), the effective
mate load format may be used in load and resistance resultant bending stress in circular and square box sections
factor design (LRFD), with the resistance factor <P to be may be taken as
included by the designer; see 10.6.2. Ja=-
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 W 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500265 5
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Tubular Structures/211
These loadings are also subject to the chord material ductile behavior of the joint, the minimum welds pro-
shear strength limits of: vided insimple T-, Y-,or K-coMections shall be capable
of developing, at their ultimate breaking strength, the
Pu sin 8 ITdb t, Fyo/fi lesser of the brace member yield strength or local
strength (punching shear) of the main member!3
Mu sin 8 5 d i t, Fyo/ fi (2) This requirement may be presumed to be met by
with @ = 0.95 the prequalified joint details of Figures 10.12 (complete
penetration) and 10.13.2 (partial penetration), when
where t, = chord wall thickness matching materiah (Table 4.1) are used.
db = branch member diameter and other terms (3) Compatible strength of welds may also be pre-
are as defined in 10.5.1.1(1). sumed with the prequalified filet weld details of Figure
10.17, when the following effective throat requirements
The limit state for combinations of axial load P and
are met:
bending moment M is given by: (a) E = 0.7 t b for elastic working stress design of
+ M/Mu I1.0
(P/Pu)1*75 mild steel circular steel tubes (Fy5 40 ksi (280 MPa)
ioined with overmatched welds (classified strength -
10.5.1.2 General Collapse. Strength and stability of a FE= = 70 ksi))
main member in a tubular connection, with any rein- (b) E = 1.0 t b for ultimate strength design (LRFD)
forcement, shall be investigated using available technol- of circular or box tube connections of mild steel,
ogy in accordance with the applicable design code. Fy5 40 ksi (280 MPa), with welds satisfying the match-
General collapse is particularly severe in cross connec- ing strength requirements of Table 4.1
tions and connections subjected to crushing loads; see (c) E = lesser oft, or 1.07 t b for all other cases
Figure 10.1, (G) and (J). Such connections may be rein- (4) Fillet welds smaller than those required in Figure
forced by increasing the main member thickness, or by 10.17 to match connection strength, but sized only to
use of diaphragms, rings, or collars. resist design loads, shall at least be sized for the following
multiple of stresses calculated per 10.8.3, to account for
(1) For unreinforced circular cross connections, the nonuniform distribution of load:
allowable transverse chord load, due to compressive
branch member axial load P, shall not exceed ASD LRFD
P sin 8 = tz Fy(1.9 + 7.2 B) Qp Qf
E60XX and E70XX- 1.35 1.5
(2) For circular cross connections reinforced by a
“joint can” having increased thickness t,, and length, L, Higher strengths- 1.6 1.8
the allowable branch axial load, P, may be employed as
for L < 2.5 D 10.5.1.4 Material Considerations for Base Metal
P P(1)+ [P(2)- P(1)] L/2.5 D Selection
p P(2) for L 1 2 . 5 D (1) Steel for Tubular Connections. Tubular connec-
tions are subject to local stress concentrationswhich may
where P(l)is obtained by using the nominal main mem- lead to local yielding and plastic strains at the design
ber thickness in the equation in (1); and P(2)is obtained load. During the service life, cyclic loading may initiate
by using the joint can thickness in the same equation. fatigue cracks, making additional demands on the duc-
tility of the steel, particularly under dynamic loads.
The ultimate limit state may be taken as 1.8 thes the These demands are particularly severe in heavy-wall
foregoing ASD allowables, with @ = 0.8.
joint-cans designed for punching shear. See Commen-
(3) For circular K-connections in which the main tary (C10.2.6.2).
member thickness required to meet the local shear provi- (2) Laminations and Lamegar Tearing. Where tubu-
sions of 10.5.1.1 extends at least D/4 beyond the con- lar joints introduce through-thickness stresses, the ani-
necting branch member welds, general collapse need not sotropy of the material and the possibility of base metal
be checked. separation should be recognized during both design and
fabrication. See Commentary.
10.5.1.3 Uneven Distribution of Load (Weld Sizing)
(1) Due to differences in the relative flexibilitiesof the
main member loaded normal to its surface, and the 43. The ultimate breaking strength of fillet welds and partial
branch member carrying membrane stresses parallel to joint penetration groovewelds shall be computed at 2.67 times
its surface, transfer of load across the weld is highly the basic allowable stress for 60 ksi (410 MPa) or 70 ksi (480
non-uniform, and local yielding can be expected before MPa) tensile strength and at 2.2times the basic allowablestress
the connection reaches its design load. To prevent for higher strengthlevels. The ultimate punchingshear shall be
“unzipping”or progressive failure of the weld and insure taken as 1.8 times the allowable Vp of 10.5.1.1.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
0784265 05002bb 7 m
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
212/TubularStructures
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/213
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
x 8
E
LA cr,
2,
h
I
I
I
a
B
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
A,ws 72 07842b 5 05002b8 O
214/ Tubular Structures
Table 10.2
Terns for Strength of Connections (Circular Sections) (see 10.5.1)
Branch member 0.7 (a- 1)
Geometry and load For axial loads (see Note 6)
modifier Qq
1.2 (a- 0.67)
For bending
~
Qß For ß 5 0.6
(needed for Qq) I Qs 0.3
ß(1-0.833 ß) For ß > 0.6
chord (Y = 1.0+0.7g/db For axial load in gap K-connections having all members in
same plane and loads transverse to main member essentially
ovalizing 1.0 5 a < 1.7 balanced (See Note 3)
parameter a = 1.7 For axial load in T- and Y-connections
a = 2.4 For axial load in cross connections
a (needed for Qq) a = 0.67 For in-plane bending (see Note 5)
a = 1.5 For out-of-plane bending (see Note 5 )
Main member stress Qf 1.0 - h 7 Ü2
interaction term Qf h = 0.030 For axial load in branch member
(See Notes 4 and 5) A = 0.044 For in-plane bending in branch member
A = 0.018 For out-of-plane bending in branch member
Notes:
1. -y, /3 are geometry parameters defined by Figure 10.1 (M).
2. Fyo the specified minimum yield strength of the main member, but not more than 2/3 the tensile strength.
3. Gap g is defined in Figures 10.1 (E), (F) and (H);db is branch diameter.
4. U is the utilizationratio (ratio of actualto allowable)for longitudinalcompression(axial, bending) in the main member at the connectionunder
consideration.
5. For combinations of the in-plane bending and out-of-plane bending, use interpolated values of (Y and A.
6. For general collapse (transverse compression) also see 10.5.1.2.
10.5.1.5 Overlappingjoints, in which part of the load l2 the projected chord length (one side) of the
is transferred directly from one branch member to overlapping weld, measured perpendicular
another through their common weld, shall include the to the main member.
following checks: These terms are illustrated in Figure 10.3.
(1) The allowable individual member load compo- The ultimate limit state may be taken as 1.8 times the
nent, PLperpendicularto the main member axis shall be foregoing WSD allowables, with @ 0.8.
taken as PL (Vpt,ll) t (2VWt,12) where Vp is the (2) The allowable combined load component parallel
allowable punching shear as defined in 10.5.1.1, and to the main member axis shall not exceed V, t, 211,
t, the main member thickness where Xii is the sum of the actual weld lengths for all
Il actual weld length for that portion of the braces in contact with the main member.
branch member which contacts the main (3) The overlap shali preferably be proportioned for
member at least 50%of the acting PL,In no case shall the branch
Vp allowable punching shear for the main mem- member wali thickness exceed the main member wall
ber as K-connection (a 1.0) thickness.
V, = allowable shear stress for the weld between (4) Where the branch members carry substantially
branch members (Table 10.1) different loads, or one branch member is thicker than the
t, the lesser of the weld size (effective throat) other, or both, the heavier branch member shall prefer-
or the thickness, tb, of the thinner branch ably be the through member with its full circumference
member welded to the main member.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 m 07842b5
Tubular Structures/215
10.5.2 Box T-, Y-, and K-Connections (See 10.2.5.3)
Criteria given in this section are all in ultimate load
format, with the safety factor removed. Resistance fac-
tors for LRFD are given throughout. For ASD, the
allowable capacity shall be the ultimate capacity, divided
by a safetyfactor of 1.441@. The choice of loads and load
factors shall be in accordancewith the governing design
specification; see 10.6, Connections shall be checked for
each of the failuremodes described below. These criteria
are for connections between square and rectangular sec-
\ tb .,np
THROUGH
SECTION A-A tions of uniform wall thickness, in planar trusses where
the branch members loads are primarily axial. If com-
pact sections, ductile material, and compatible strength
MEMBER welds are used, secondary branch member bending may
be neglected.#
Criteria in this section are subject to the limitations
Figure 10.3 -Detaii of Overlapping Joint shown in Figure 10.4.
(see 10.5.1.5)
10.5.2.1 Local Failure. Branch member axial load Pu
at which plastic chord wall failure in the main member
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
occurs is given by:
(5) Net transverse load on the combined footprint
4
shall satisfy 10.5.1.1 and 10.5.1.2.
(6) Minimum weld size for fillet welds shall provide
effective throat of 1.0 tb for Fy< 40 ksi, 1.2 t b for Fy>
pusine = ~ ~
[?-i
- m]
~ t :
+ Qf
40 ksi. for cross, T-, and Y-connectionswith0.25 5 ß<0.85 and
10.5.1.6 Flared connections and tube size transitions
a) 1.0.
not excepted below shall be checked for local stresses
caused by the change in direction at the transition. (See 44. Secondary bending is that due to joint deformation or
note 4 to Table 10.3,) Exception, for static loads: rotation in fuily triangulatedtrusses. Branch member bending
Circular tubes having D / t less than 30, and due to applied loads, sideway of unbraced frames, etc. cannot
Transition slope less than 1:4. be neglected and must be designed for. See 10.5.2.6.
10.5.1.7 Other Configurations and Loads
(1) The term T-, Y-, and K-connections is often used
generically to describe tubular connections in which
branch members are welded to a main member, or
chord, at a structural node. Specific criteria are also
given for cross o(-)connections (ais0 referred to as
double-tee) in 10.5.1.1 and 10.5.1.2. N-connections are
a special case of K-connections in which one of the
branches is perpendicular to the chord; the same criteria
apply. See Commentary for multiplanar connections.
(2) Connection classification as Ky T, Y, or cross
should apply to individualbranch members accordingto
the load pattern for each load case. To be considered a
K-connection, the punching load in a branch member -0.55H I e I 0.25H
û 2 30"
should be essentially balanced by loads on other braces H/t, and D/t, I 3 5 (40for overlap K- and N-connections)
in the same plane on the same side of the joint. In T- and a / t b and b/tb 5 35
Y-connections the punching load is reacted as beam Fyo5 52 ksi (360 MPa)
shear in the chord. In cross connections the punching 0.5 5 H/D 5 2.0
Fyo/FuitI 0.8
load is carried through the chord to braces on the oppo-
site side. For branch members which carry part of their
load as K-connections, and part as T-, Y-, or cross
connections, interpolate based on the portion of each in -
Figure 10.4 Limitations for Box
total, or use computed alpha (see Commentary). T-, Y-, and K-Connections (see 10.5.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 07842b5 0500270 9 m
216/Tubular Structures
Table 10.3
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Stress Categories for Type and Location of Material for Circular Sections (see 10.7.3)
Stress
Category Situation Kinds of Stress'
A Plain unwelded pipe. TCBR
B Pipe with longitudinal seam. TCBR
B Butt splices, completejoint penetration groove welds, ground flush TCBR
and inspected by RT or UT (Class R).
B Members with continuously welded longitudinal stiffeners. TCBR
Butt splices, complete joint penetration groove welds, as welded. TCBR
CZ Members with transverse (ring) stiffeners. TCBR
D Members with miscellaneous attachments such as clips, brackets, TCBR
etc.
D Cruciform and T-joints with complete joint penetration welds TCBR
(except at tubular connections).
DT Connections designed as simple T-, Y-, or K-connections with TCBR in branch member. (Note:
complete joint penetration groove welds conforming to Figures Main member must be checked
10.12 through 10.14 (including overlapping connections in which separatelyper categoryK I or K2 .)
the main member at each intersection meets punching shear
requirements). See Note 2
E Balanced cruciform and T-joints with partial joint penetration TCBR in member; weld must also
groove welds or fillet welds (except at tubular connections). be checked per category E
E Memberswhere doubler wrap, cover plates, longitudinalstiffeners, TCBR in member; weld must also
gusset plates, etc., terminate (except at tubular connections). be checked per category E
ET Simple T-, Y-, and K-connections with partial joint penetration TCBR in branch member. (Note:
groove welds or f i e t welds; also, complex tubular connections in Main member in simple T-, Y-,or
which the punching shear capacity of the main member cannot K-connections must be checked
carry the entire load and load transfer is accomplished by overlap separately per category K, or K2;
(negativeeccentricity),gusset plates, ring stiffeners,etc. See Note 2 weld must also be checked per
category FT and 10.5.3.)
F End weld of cover plate or doubler wrap; welds on gusset plates, Shear in weld.
stiffeners, etc.
F Cruciform and T-joints, loaded in tension or bending, having fiuet Shear in weld (regardless of direc-
or partial joint penetration groove welds (except at tubular con- tion of loading). See 10.8
nections).
FT Simple T-, Y-, or K-connections loaded in tension or bending, Shear in weld (regardless of direc-
having fillet or partial joint penetration groove welds. tion of loading).
x2 Intersecting members at simple T-, Y-, and K-cOMeCtiOnS; any Greatest total range of hot spot
connection whose adequacy is determined by testing an accurately stress or strain on the outside sur-
scaled model or by theoretical analysis (e.g., f i t e element). face of intersectingmembersat the
toe of the weld joining them -
measured after shakedown in
model or prototype connection or
calculated with best available
theory.
X1 As for X2, profile improved per 10.7.5 and 10.7.6. As for X2
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - 3 92 = 07842b5 0500273 O ~ ~~~
=
Tubular Structures/217
Table 10.3 (continued)
Stress
Category Situation Kinds of Stress'
XI Unreinforced cone-cylinder intersection. Hot-spot stress at angle change;
calculate per Note 4.
KZ SimpleT-, Y-, and K-connections in which thegamma ratio R/tcof Punching shear for main mem-
main member does not exceed 24. (See Note 3) bers; calculate per Note 5.
~~
KI As for Kz, profile improved per 10.7.5 and 10.7.6.
Notes:
1. T = tension, C compression, B bending, R = reversal -Le., total range of nominal axial and bending stress.
2. Empiricalcurves (Figure 10.6) based on "typicaí"connectiongeometries;if actual stress concentration factors or hot spot strains are known, use of
curve X I or X2 is preferred.
3. Empirical curves (Figure 10.6) based on tests with gamma ( R / t c )of 18 to 24;curves on safe side for very heavy chord members (low Rit,); for
chord members (R/t, greater than 24) reduce ailowable stress in proportion to
Allowable fatigue stress -
Stress from curve K - (i&)
Where actual stress concentration factors or hot-spot strains are known, use of curve XI or Xzis preferred.
1
4. Stress concentrafion factor -SCF = -+ 1.17
cos T
tanq fi
where
-
Y = angle change at transition
"/b radius to thickness ratio of tube at transition
5. Cyclic range of punching shear is given by
where,
I
vP= T sin e ah + d (0.67fJ2 + (i.5h2)z]
T and are previously defined, and
fa = cyclic range of nominal branch member stress for axial load.
f& = cyclic range of in-plane bending stress.
fb2 cyclic range of out-of-plane bending stress.
a is as defmed in Table 10.2.
Also, Pu sin 8 F y o tZ L9.8 Peíf fi]Qî These loadings are also subject to the chord material
with = 0.9 shear strength limits of
for gap K- and N-connections with least push8 = ( ~ y o / f i ) t c ~ ~ q + 2 ~ e o p 1
ß,,2 0.1 + 7/50 and g/D = 5 2 0.5 (1 - ß)
where Fyois specified minimum yield strength of the for cross, T-, or Y-connections with ß > 0.85, using =
main member, tcis chord wall thickness, y is D/2t,(D 0.95, and
chord face width); ß, q, 8, and f; are connectiontopology
parameters as defied in Figure lO.l(hQ; (Perfis equiva- pu sin 8 = yo /fi)
tc D PT + Bgap + ßeopl
lent ß defined below); and Qf = 1.3 - 0.4U/ß (Qf I1.0;
use Qf = 1.O for chord in tension) with U being the chord for gap K- and N-connections with ß 2 O. 1+ y/ 50, using
CP = 0.95 (this checkis unnecessary if branch members are
utilization ratio.
square and equal width), where:
fa fb
ßgap ß for K- and N-connections with 5 I1.5 (1 - ß)
ßgap = ßeop for ail other connections
ßeff ( bcornpression
branch
+acornpression
branch
+ btension +atension
branch branch ) /4D
ßeop (effective outside punching)
more than ß.
5 ß / y but not
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 72 m 0784265 0500272 2 m
218/ Tubular Structures
10.5.2.2 General Collapse. Strength and stability of a where
main member in a tubular connection, with any rein-
forcement, shall be investigated using available technol- Fy = specified minimum yield strength of branch
ogy in accordance with the applicable design code. tb branch wall thickness
(1) General collapse is particularly severe in cross a, b branch dimensions (see Figure 10.1(B))
connections and connections subjected to crushing loads. b,, = b for K- and N-connections with 5 I1.5(1 -ß)
Such connections may be reinforced by increasing the bgap= b,,i for all other connections
main member thickness or by use of diaphragms,
gussets, or collars.
For unreinforced matched box connections, the ulti-
mate load normal to the main member (chord) due to
branch axial load P shall be limited to: Note: r I1.0 and FyIFyoare presumed.
Pusin 8 = 2 t, Fyo(a, + 5 t,) (2) Weld Checks, The minimum welds provided in
simple T-, Y-, or K-connections shall be capable of
with @ 1.0 for tension loads, developing, at their ultimate breaking strength, the lesser
and @ = 0.8 for compression. of the branch member yield strength or local strength of
the main member.
and This requirement may be presumed to be met by the
prequalifiedjoint details of Figure 10.15(completepene-
tration and partial penetration), when matching mate-
riais (Table 4.1) are used.
(3) Fillet welds shaíl be checked as described in 10.8.5.
with Cp = 0.8 for cross connections, end post reac-
tions, etc. in compression (ksi units) 10.5.2.4 Material Considerations. The designer should
consider special demands which are placed on the steel
or used in box T-, Y-, and K-connections. See Commentary.
Pusin 8 = 270 tz [i + 3 aJHI 6Qf 10.5.2.5 Overlapped Connections. Lap joints reduce
with Cp = 0.75 for all other compression branch the design problems in the main member by transferring
loads (ksi uNts) most of the transverse load directly from one branch
member to the other. See Figure 10.5.
(2) For gap K- and N-connections, beam shear ade-
quacy of the main member to carry transverse loads
across the gap region shall be checked including interac-
tion with axial chord forces. This check is not required OVERLAPPING
for U I0.44 in stepped box connectionshaving ß + q I MEMBER
H/D (H is height of main member in plane of truss).
10.5.2.3 Uneven Distribution of Load (Effective
Width). Due to differences in the relative flexibilities of
the main member loaded normal to its surface and the
branch member carrying membrane stresses parallel to
its surface, transfer of load across the weld is highly
non-uniform, and local yielding can be expected before
the connection reaches its design load. To prevent pro-
gressive failure and insure ductile behavior of the joint,
both the branch members and the weld shallbe checked,
as follows:
(1) Branch Member Check. The effective width axial
capacity Puof the branch member shall be checked for
all gap K- and N-connections,45 and other connections
having ß > 0.85.
Pue = Fyt b [2a + bgap+ bmi - 4tb]
q
with !i?0.95
Overlap = - x 100%
P
45. This check is unnecessary if branch members are square -
Figure 10.5 Overlapping T-, Y-,
and equal width.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and K-Connections (see 10.5.2.5)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 9 2 m 0784265
Tubular Structures/219
The criteria Df this section are applicableto statically M
loaded connections meeting the föfowing limitations: -
(1) The larger, thicker branch is the thru member.
(2) ß20.25.
P =
JDSin8
In lieu of more rational analysis (see Commentary), JD
I
(3) The overlapping branch member is 0.75 to 1.0 may be taken as qD/4 for in-plane bending, and as
times the size of the thru member with at least 25% of its ßD/4 for out-of-plane bending. The effects of axialload,
side faces overlapping the thru member. in-plane bending and out-of-plane bending shall be con-
(4) Both branch members have the same yield strength. sidered as additive. Moments are to be taken at the
(5) All branch and chord members are compact branch member footprint.
square or recfangular tubes with width/thickness I 35
for branches, and I 4 0 for chord. 10.5.2.7 Other Configurations. Cross, T-, Y-, gap K-,
The following checks shall be made: and gap N-connections with compact circular branch
(1) Axial capacity Pu of the overlapping tube, using tubes framing into a box section main member may be
@ = 0.95 with designed using 78.5% of the capacity given in 10.5.2.1
and 10.5.2.2, by replacing the box dimension “a” and“b”
pu = F,tb[Q0~(2a-4tb)+beo+betl in each equation by branch diameter, d b (limited to
compact sections with 0.4 Iß I0.8).
for 25% to 50% overlap, with
% overlap
QOL = 10.6 Allowable Stresses and Load and
50%
Resistance Factors
for 50% to 80% overlap. 10.6.1 AUowable Stress Design. Where the applicable
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
design specifications permit the use of increased unit
Pu Fytb [(2a - 4tb) + b + betl stresses in the base metal for any reason, a corresponding
increase shall be applied to the allowable unit stresses
for 80% to 100% overlap. given herein, except for fatigue. The allowable stresses
Pu = Fyt b [(2a - 4tb) 2bet] given herein are consistent with a nominal base metal
working stress of 0.6 Fy.
for more than 100% overlap
10.6.2 Load and Resistance Factor Design. Resistance
where be, is effective width for the face welded to the factors, @, given elsewhere in Part B of this chapter, may
chord, be used in the context of load and resistance factor
design (LRFD) calculations in the following format:
@ X (Pu or Mu) = 2 (LF X Load)
and betis effective width for the face welded to the thru where Puor M uis the ultimate load or moment as given
brace. herein, and LF is the load factor as defmed in the govern-
ing LRFD design code, e.g., AISCLoad and Resistance
5b Facfor Design Specijìcation for Structural Steel in
bet - I b
Buildings.
Yt Tt
with:
yt b/(2tb) of the thru brace 10.7 Fatigue
Tt= toveriap/tth 10.7.1 Fatigue, as used herein, is defined as the damage
and other terms are as previously defined. that may result in fracture after a sufficient number of
stress fluctuations.Stress range is defined as the peak-to-
(2) Net transverse load on the combined footprint, trough magnitude of these fluctuations. In the case of
treated as a T- or Y-connection. stress reversal, stress range shall be computed as the
(3) For more than 100% overlap, longitudinalshear- numerical sum (algebraic difference) of maximum re-
ing shall be checked, considering only the sidewalls of the peated tensile and compressive stresses, or the sum of
thru branch footprint to be effective. shearing stresses of opposite direction at a given point,
resulting from changing conditions of load.
10.5.2.6 Bending Moments. Primary bending mo-
ment, M ydue to applied load, cantileverbeams, sidesway 10.7.2 In the design of members and connections subject
of unbraced frames, etc., shall be considered in design as to repeated variations in live load stress, consideration
an additional axial load, P: shall be given to the number of stress cycles, the expected
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L e L 92 m 0784265 0500274 b m
22O/Tubular Structures
range of stress, and type and location of member or 10.7.5 Fatigue Behavior Improvement. For the pur-
detail. pose of enhanced fatigue behavior, and where specified
in contract documents, the following profiie improve-
10.7.3 The type and location of material shall be cate- ments may be undertakenfor welds in tubular T-, Y-, or
gorized as shown in Table 10.3. K-connections:
(I) A capping layer may be applied so that the as-
10.7.4 Where the applicable design specification has a welded surface merges smoothly with the adjoining base
fatigue requirement, the maximum stress shall not metal, and approximates the profiie shown in Figure
exceed the basic allowable stress provided elsewhere, 10.14. Notches in the profiie shall not be deeper than
and the range of stress at a given number of cycles shall 0.04 in. or 1 mm, relative to a disc having a diameter
not exceed the values given in Figure 10.6. equal to or greater than the branch member thickness.
10.7.4.1 The increase in allowable stress provided in (2) The weld surface may be ground to the profiie
10.6 shall not apply to the stress range values used in shown in Figure 10.14. Final grinding marks shall be
fatigue. transverse to the weld axis.
(3) The toe of the weld may be peened with a blunt
10.7.4.2 Where the fatigue environment involves stress instrument, so as to produce local plastic deformation
ranges of varying magnitude and varying numbers of which smooths the transition between weld and base
applications, the cumulative fatigue damage ratio, Dy metal, while inducing a compressive residual stress. Such
summed over all the various loads, shali not exceed peening shall always be done after visual inspection, and
unity, where be followed by magnetic particle inspection as described
n In order to qualify fatigue categories X Iand Ki,
D = Z - representative welds (all welds for nonredundant struc-
N
tures or where peening has been applied) shall receive
n = number of cycles applied at a given stress range magnetic particle inspection for surface and near-surface
N = number of cycles for which the given stress discontinuities. Any indicationswhich cannot be resolved
range would be allowed in Figure 10.6. by light grinding shall be repaired in accordance with
3.7.2.4.
10.7.4.3 For critical members whose sole failure
mode would be catastrophic, D (see 10.7.4.2) shall be 46. Consideration should be given to the possibility of locally
limited to a fractional value of 1/3. degraded notch toughness due to peening.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2000
f
5
1O00
w
500
z$
z
d
200 LiA
100
$
I-
u)
50
CYCLES OF LOAD N
-
Figure 10.6 Allowable Fatigue Stress and Strain Ranges for Stress Categories
(See Table 10.3), Redundant Structures for Atmospheric Service (see 10.7.4)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 0784265 0500275 8 W
Tubular Structures/221
10.7.6 Size and Proíiìe Effects. Applicability of welds 10.8.2 Filiet Welds. The effective area shall be in accord-
asdetailedin2.7,2.9,2.10,3.6,10.10,and10.11,tothe ance with 2.3.2. The effective length of fillet welds in
fatigue categories listed below is limited to the following structural T-, ,
:
Y and K-connections may be computed
weld size or base metal thicknesses: in accordance with 10.8.4 or 10.8.5, using the radius or
face dimensions of the branch member as measured to
Cl 2 in. (50 mm) thinner member at transition the centerline of the weld.
Cz 1 in. (25 mm) attachment
D 1 in. (25 mm) attachment 10.8.3 Stresses in Welds. When weld allowable stress
E 1 in. (25 mm) attachment calculations are required for circular sections, the nomi-
ET 1.5 in. (38 mm) branch nal stress in the weld joining branch to chord in a simple
F 0.7 in. (18 mm) weld size T-, Y-, or K-connection shall be computed as:
FT 1 in. (25 mm) weld size
For applicationsexceedingthese limits, consideration
should be given to reducing the allowable stresses or
improving the weld profile (see Commentary).
For T-, Y-, and K-connections, two levels of fatigue
II
where:
performance are provided for in Table 10.4. The designer
shall designate when Level I is to apply; in the absence tb = thickness of branch member
of such designation, and for applications where fatigue t, = effective throat of the weld
is not a consideration, Level II shall be the minimum fa andfb = nominal axial and bending stresses in the
acceptable standard. branch
For rmand r,, see Figure 10.7
10.8 Effective Weld Area and Length In ultimate strength or LRFD format the following
aexpression for branch axial load capacity P shall apply
10.8.1 Groove Welds. The effective area shall be in for both circular and box sections:
accordance with 2.3.1 and the following: the effective
length of groove welds in structural T-, Y-, and K- Pu QwoLeff
connections shall be computed in accordance with 10.8.4
or 10.8.5, using the mean radius r,,, or face dimensions where Q , weld line load capacity (kips/inch) and Jeff =
of the branch member. weld effective length.
Table 10.4
Fatigue Category Limitations on Weld Size or Thickness and Weld Profile (see 10.7.6)
~ ~
Level I Level II
Limiting Branch Member Limiting Branch Member
Thickness for Categories Thickness for Categories
xi, Ki, DT x2,K2
Weld Profile in. (mm) in. (m)
Standard flat weld profile 0.375 (9.5) 0.625 (15.9)
Figure 10.12
Profile with toe fulet 0.625 (15.9) 1.50 (38.1)
Figure 10.13 qualified for unlimited
thickness for static com-
pression loading
Concave profile, as welded, 1.00 (25.4) unlimited
Figure 10.14
with disk test per 10.7.5(1)
Concave smooth profile unlimited
Figure 10.14
fully ground per 10.7.5(2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 9 2 W 078q2b.5 050027b T W
222/Tubular Structures
2a, t b, for 8 I60"
2a, t 2b, for 8 I50"
I I Thus for 8 150" the heel, toe and sides of the branch can
I I
EFF. THROAT
I be considered fully effective. For 8 2 mo,the heel is con-
sidered ineffective due to uneven distribution of load.
For 50" < 8 < ao, interpolate.
10.8.5.2, The effective length of branch welds in struc-
tural, planar, T-, Y-, and X-connections between box
sections, subjected to predominantly static axial load,
shall be taken as:
Figure 10.7-"ubular T-, Y-, and K-Connection
I for ß < 0.85
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Fillet Weld Footprint Radius (see 10.8.3) 2a, + 2b,
2ax, for ß 2 0.85
For fillet welds,
Q, = 0.6 t, FE= Part C
with 0.8 Structural Detaìk
where FE= classified minimum tensile strength of
weld deposit. 10.9 Combination
Ka and Kb are effective length and section factors 10.9.1 Combination of Welds. If two or more of the
given in 10.8.4 and 10.8.5. general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are com-
bined in a single joint, their allowable capacity shall be
10.8.4 Circular T-, Y-, K-Connections. Length of welds computed with reference to the axis of the group, in
and the intersection length in circular T-, Y-, and K- order to determine the allowable capacity of the com-
connectionsshall be determined as 2 n r K awhere ris the
I effective radius of the intersection(see 10.8.1 or 10.8.2).
bination. However, such methods of adding individual
capacities of welds does not apply to fillet welds reinforc-
K a = x+y+34- ing groove welds (see Appendix I).
x = 1/(2r~ine) 10.9.2 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts.
Rivets or bolts used in bearing type connections shall not
be considered as sharing the stress in combination with
y=&($$) welds. Welds, ifused, shalibe provided to carry the entire
stress in the connection. However, connections that are
where: welded to one member and riveted or bolted to the other
8 the acute angle between the two member axes member are permitted. High strength bolts (properly
installed as a friction type connection prior to welding)
I ß = diameter ratio, branch/main, as previously de-
fined. may be considered as sharing the stress with the welds.
Note: The following may be used as conservative ap-
proximations:
i + ilsin e 10.10 Fillet Weld Details
Ka for axial load
2 10.10.1 Intermittent filet welds may be used to carry
calculated stress.
3 + ilsin e
Kb for in-plane bending 10.10.2 For lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall
4~ine
be five times the thickness of the thinner part joined but
i + 3 / ~ i ne not less than 1 in. (25 mm) (see Figure 10.8).
Kb for out-of-plane bending
4
10.10.3 Lap joints of telescoping tubes in which the load
10.8.5 Box Connections is transferredvia the weld47may be single fillet welded in
10.8.5.1 The effective length of branch welds in struc- accordance with Figure 10.8.
tural, planar, gap K- and N-connections between box sec-
tions, subjected to predominantly static axial load, shall 47. As opposed to an interference slip-on joint as used in
be taken as: tapered poles.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/223
5 t i MIN (NOT LESS THAN 1 in. 125 mm])
Nóte: L E size as required
Figure 10.8 -Fillet Welded Lap Joint (see 10.10.3)
10.10.4 The maximum size of fillet welds that may be only without backing is permitted where the size or
used along edges of material shall be equal to the thick- configurationprevents access to theroot side of the weld
ness of the base metal. as provided in Columns 4 through 8, Table 10.5.
The provisions of Table 10.5 (Columns 6-8) apply
10.10.5 Boxing shall be indicated on the drawings. directlyto weldedjointsin T-, Y-,and K-connections. To
weld T-, Y-,and K-connections, welders shall be quali-
fied by welding special joint configurations in accord-
10.11 ïkansition of Thicknesses ance with 5.21.
Buttjoints (columns 4 and 5) are subject to additional
Tension butt joints in axially aligned primary members conditions specified in 10.12.3.1. To weld butt joints,
of different material thicknesses or size shall be made in welders shall be qualified in accordance with the re-
such a manner that the slope through the transition zone quirements of 10.12.3.1.
does not exceed 1 in 2-112. The transition shall be
accomplishedby chamferingthe thicker part, sloping the 10.12.1.4 Other Tubular Joints Welded From One
weld metal, or by any combinationof these methods (see Side. Where size or configurationprevents accessto the
Figure 10.9). root side of the weld, the provisions of Table 10.5 shall
apply. Completejoint penetration described previously,
partial joint penetration (Columns 9 and lo), or fillet
weld (Column 11) provisions shall apply where these
Part D respective weld types are specified on design drawing or
Special Provisionfor governing general codes or specifications.
Welding Tubular Joints 10.12.2 Conditions of Prequalification
10.12 Procedures and Welder 10.12.2.1 Complete JointPenetrationTubular Groove
Welds. For tubular groove welds to be given prequali-
Requirements for Tubular Joints fied status, the following conditions must apply:
10.12.1 General (1) Tubular Groove welds in buttjoints shallmeetthe
following conditions:
10.12.1.1 Procedure and Welder Qualification. Pro- (a) Prequalified Welding Procedures. Where weld-
cedure and welder qualificationrequirements for tubular ing from both sides or welding from one side with backing
joints shall be as specified in summary form in Table is possible, any procedure and groove detailthat is appro-
10.5. (Column reference in the text, refer to Table 10.5.) priately prequalifiedin accordancewith 5.1 may be used,
10.12.1.2 Joints Welded from Both Sides or From except that submerged arc welding is only prequalified
One Side With Backing. Where welding from both sides for diameters greater than or equal to 24 in. (610 mm).
or when the use of backing is possible, the provisions of Welded joint details shall be in accordance with sec-
sections 2 through 5 of this Code shall apply. tion 2, Part Cyof this Code.
(b) Nonprequalitied Joint Detail. There are no
10.12.1.3 Special Type of Complete Joint Penetra- prequalifiedjoint details for complete joint penetration
tion Groove Welds in Tubular Joints. A completejoint groove welds in butt joints made from one side without
penetration tubular groove weld made from one side backing. See 10.12.3.1.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L . 92 O784265 0500278 3 W
224/ Tubular Structures
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
B
i$
E
5I
o
n
z
a
w
o
e
LT
3
v)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 m 0784265 0500279 5 W
Tubular Structures/225
.*B
*o f
af
Be!
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
*
v>
B
a ~C
O
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 M 0784265 0500280 I W
226/ Tubular Structures
(2) Groove Welds in T-, Y-, K-Connections Made requirementsof sections3 and 4 and further be subjectto
From One Side Without Backing. Groove welds in T-, limitations specified in Figure 10.17 and shali include
Y-, K-connectionsmade from one side without backing joints shown therein. (See also Table 10.5.)
shall conform to the following provisions: (2) Prequalified Details in Tubular T-, Y-, and K-
(a) Prequalified Welding Procedures. Subject to Connections. Fiilet weld details for tubular T-, Y-,and
the limitations shown in Figures 10.12 through 10.15, K- connections are described in 10.13.3.
welding proceduresfor completejoint penetrationgroove
welds in T-, Y-, and K-connectionsmade from one side Note: Prequaljìedfillet weld detail limited to: ß I113
without backing using shielded metal arc or flux cored for circular, and ß 5 0.8for box connections.
arc welding processes are considered prequalified, pro- These details are prequalified for shielded metal arc
vided that the welding proceduresmeet the requirements and flux cored arc welding processes. They may also be
of sections 3 and 4 and include joints specified in used for gas metal arc welding (short circuitingtransfer)
10.12.2.1(2)(b). (See also Table 10.5.) qualified in accordancewith section 5; groove weld qual-
(b) PrequaWied Joint Details. Details for com- ification is required for dihedral angles less than 60".
plete joint penetration groove welds in tubular T-, Y-, (3) Prequalified fillet weld details in lap joints are
and K-connections are described in 10.13.1. These are shown in Figure 10.8.
prequalified for shielded metal arc welding and flux
cored arc welding. They may also be used for GMAW-S 10.12.3 Conditions Requiring Qualificationby Tests
qualified in accordance with 10.12.3.4.
10.12.3.1 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
10.12.2.2 Partial Joint Penetration Tubular Groove in Butt Joints Welded From One Side Without Backing.
Welds. Partial joint penetration tubular groove welds Butt joints, welded from one side without backing, shall
that are accorded prequalified status shall conform to not be considered as complete joint penetration groove
the following provisions: welds unless all of the followingprovisions are complied
(1) Prequalified Welding Procedures. Partial joint with
penetration tubular groove welds made by shielded (1) The joint detail and welding procedure are quali-
metal arc or flux cored arc welding that may be used fied by an appropriate test in accordance with 5.2.
without performing the joint welding procedure qualifi- (2) The welders have been qualified to weld pipe or
cation tests are shown in Figure 10.16. tubing, without backing, in accordance with 5.17.2.
Welding procedures shall meet the requirements of (3) If the groove design to be used varies from Figure
sections 3 and 4 and shall further be subject to the 5.23, the actual groove design used in construction shall
limitations specified in Figure 10.16. (See also Table be used for the test required by (1) and (2).
10.5.) For prequalified details to apply in matched box (4) The entire length of all completed production
connections, the corner dimension and radius of the welds shall be examined nondestructively, either by
main tube shall be as shown in Figure 10.16 (see radiographic testing or ultrasonic testing, and the weld
10.12.3.6). quality shallconform to 10.17.3 or 10.17.4, as applicable.
(2) Prequaliíied Joint Details. Prequalified partial
joint penetration groove weld details shown in section 2, 10.12.3.2 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
Part Cymay be applied to tubular structures where in T-, Y-, and K-Connections Having Groove Angles
applicable. (T-, Y-, and K-connections are subject to the Less Than 30°. For T-, Y-,and K-connections having
limitations of 10.5.1.3 and 10.5.2.3.) groove angles less than 30°, the samplejointdescribed in
Details for partial joint penetration groove welds in 10.12.3.3(1)(a) shall be required, even where thejoint is
T-, Y-, and K-connections,with the use of shielded metal otherwise prequalified. Three test sections shall be pre-
arc welding, flux cored arc welding and gas metal arc pared, and macroetched test specimens shall not exhibit
welding processes, are described in 10.13.2 for circular discontinuities prohibited by 10.12.3.3(2), and shall
and boxed sections. These are prequalified for shielded show the required theoretical weld (with due allowance
metal arc and flux cored arc welding. They may also be for backup welds to be discounted, as shown in Details C
used for gas metal arc welding (short circuitingtransfer) and D of Figures 10.12, 10.13, and 10.14. (See Figure
qualified in accordance with 10.12.3.4. 10.10 for test joint details.)
10.12.2.3 Fillet Welds. Fillet welds to be accorded a 10.12.3.3 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
prequalified status when welding tubular connections in T-, Y-, and K-Connections With Processes and Pro-
shall conform to the following provisions: cedures Without Prequaüüed Status. For processesthat
(1) Prequaliíied Welding Procedures. Fillet welded are not prequalXed and for procedures whose essential
tubular connections made by shielded metal arc or variables are outside the prequalified range, qualifica-
fluxed cored arc welding processes that may be used tion for completejoint penetration tubular groove welds
without performing joint welding procedure qualifica- shall require the preparation and testing of the sample
tion tests are detailed in section 2, Part C of this Code joints described in (1) and (2) below, in addition to
and in Figure 10.17. Welding procedure shall meet the qualification in accordance with section 5 for butt joints.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/227
MIN
GROOVE WIDTH
IS LESS THAN
DIMENSION W Y
(TABLE 10.7)
/
L SOUNDTHEORETICALWELD
DETAIL A
Figure 10.10 -Acute Angle Heel Test (Restraints Not Shown) (see 10.12.3.2)
(1) A SampleJoint or Tubular Mock-up. The sample (d) No undercut exceedingthe values permitted in
joint or tubular mock-up shall provide at least one 10.17.1.5
macroetch test section for each of the following con- (e) For porosity 1/ 32 in. (1mm) or larger, accumu-
ditions: lated porosity shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm)
(a) The groove combining the greatest groove ( f ) No accumulated slag, the sum of the greatest
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
depth with the smallest groove angle, or combination of dimension of which shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm)
grooves to be used: tests with welding position vertical. Those specimens not conforming to (a) through (f)
(b) The narrowest root opening to be used with a shall be considered unacceptabíe; (b) through (0 not
37.5" groove angle: one test welded in the flat position applicable to backup weld.
and one test welded in the overhead position.
(c) The widest root openingto beused with a 37.5"
10.12.3.4 Complete Joint Penefration Groove Welds
in T-, Y-, and K-ConnectionsMade With GasMetal Arc
groove angle: one test to be welded in the flat position Welding (Short Circuiting Transfer), GMAW-S. For
and one test to be welded in the overhead position. T-, Y-, and K-connections, where gas metal arc welding
(d)'For matched box connections only, the min- (short circuiting transfer) GMAW-S is used, qualifica-
imum groove angle, corner dimension and corner radius
tion in accordance with section 5 shall be required prior
to be used in combination: one test in the horizontal
to welding the standard joint configurations detailed in
position. 10.13. The joint tested shall incorporate a 37.5" single
(2) The macroetch test specimens required in (1) bevelgroove, offset root and restrictionring as shown in
above be examined for discontinuitiesand shall have:
Figure 5.25.
(a) No cracks
(b) Thorough fusion between adjacent layers of 10.12.3.5 Other Joinf Details or Welding Procedures.
weld metal and between weId metal and base metal For joint details, welding procedures, or assumed depth
(c) Weld details conforming to the intended detail of sound welds that are more difficult than those pre-
but with none of the variations prohibited in 3.6 qualified herein, a test as described in 10.12.3.2 shall be
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 W 0784265 0500282 5 W
228/Tubular Structures
performed by each welder in addition to the 6GR tests BRANCH MEMBER
(Figure 5.25 or 5.26). The test position shall be vertical.
10.12.3.6 Partiai Joint Penetration Groove Welds in AREA FOR
Matched Box Connections. For partial joint penetra- DETAIL A OR B
tion groove welds in matched box connections, if the
corner dimension or the radius of the main tube, or both,
are less than the prequalified minimums, a samplejoint
of the side detail shall be made and sectioned to verify the
weld size. The test weld shall be made in the horizontal
position. This requirement may be waived if the branch
tube is beveled as shown in Figure 10.15. / \
10.12.4 Weld Notch Toughness
AREA FOR DETAIL B LAREA
FOR
MAIN MEMBER DETAIL C
10.12.4.1 Welding procedures for butt joints (longi- OR D
tudinal or circumferentialseams) within 0.5D of attached
branch members, in tubular connectionjointcans requir-
ing Charpy testing under 10.2.6.2, shail be required to Figure 10.11 -Definitions and Detailed
demonstrate weld metal Charpy V-notch absorbed energy Selection for Complete Joint Penetration
of 20 ft-lb (27 J) at the LAST, or at O O F (-HOC), Prequalified Tubular Joints for Simple
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
whichever is lower. HAWS specifications for the welding T-, Y-, or K-Connections (see 10.13.1)
materiaisto be used do not encompass this requirement,
or if production welding is outside the range covered by
prior testing, e.g., tests per AWS filler metal specifica- Table 10.6
tions, then weldmetal Charpy tests shall be made during
procedure qualification, as described in Appendix III.
Joint Detail Application (see 10.13.1)
10.12.4.2 Alternative notch toughness requirements
Detail I Applicable Range of Local Dihedral Angie, Y?
shall apply when specified in contract documents. If base 180" to 135"
metalswith enhanced notch toughness (beyond the min- 150° to 50°
ima of 10.2.6) have been specified, then an engineering
1
75O to 30"
evaluation of weld metal and heat-affected-zone tough- Not prequalified for
ness is also required. Toughness should be considered in groove angies under
relation to design, inspection, criticality of service, and 40° to 15" 30"
practical achievability, at an early stage in project plan-
ning. The Commentary gives additional guidance. Notes:
a. The applicablejoint detail (A, B, C, or D) for a particularpart of the
connectionisdetermined by the localdihedralangle, Y,whichchanges
continuously in progressing around the branch member.
b. The angle and dimensional ranges given in Detail A, B, C, or D
10.13 Details for Welded Tubular Joints include maximum allowable tolerapces.
in T-, Y-, and K-Connections c. See Appendix B for definition of local dihedral angle.
Made from One Side Without
Backing Alternative weld profiles that may be required for
These details are subject to the limitation of 10.12.1. thicker sections are shown in Figure 10.13. In the
absence of special fatigue requirements, these profiles
10.13.1 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds. are applicable to branch thicknesses exceeding 5/8 in.
Details for complete joint penetration groove welds in (15.9 mm).
tubular T-, Y-, and K-connections used in circular tubes Improved weld profiles meeting the requirements of
are described in this section. The applicable circumferen- 10.7.5 and 10.7.6 are shown in Figure 10.14. In the
tial range of Details A, B, Cyand D are shown in Figure absence of special fatigue requirements, these profiles
10.11, and the ranges of local dihedral angles, T,corre- are applicable to branch thicknesses exceeding 1-1/2 in.
sponding to them are specified in Table 10.6. (38.1 mm). (Not required for staticcompression loading).
Joint dimensions including groove angles are specified PrequalXed details for complete joint penetration
in Table 10.7 and Figure 10.12. When selecting a profile groove welds in tubular T-, Y-, and K-connections, util-
(compatible with fatigue category used in design) as a izing square and rectangular (box) sections, are further
function of thickness, the guidelines of 10.7.6 shall be described in Figure 10.15. The foregoing details are sub-
observed. ject to the limitation of 10.12.2.1.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 07842b5 0500283 ~
7 m ~
Tubular Structures/229
Table 10.7
Prequalified Joint Dimensions and Groove Angles for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
in Tubular T-, Y-, K-Connections Made by Shielded Metal Arc, Gas Metal Arc
(Short Circuiting Tran~fer)~
and Flux Cored Arc Wlding (see f0-13.1)
Detail A Detail B
Y! = 180' - 135' ?zI = 150'- 50'
End preparation(4
max 9oo*
min loo or
45' for Y! > 105'
~____
FCAW-SS GMAW-S FCAW-SS GMAW-S ***
SMAW FCAW-G SMAW FCAW-G Wmax. #
IJ
(1) (2) (1) (2) FCAW-SS
1/8in. (3mm) 25O-4Oo
/4 in. (6 mm) 31 16 in. (5 mm) 15'-25'
for 4>45O
Fitup or root 51 16 in.
sPenh2 (RI 31 16 in. 31 16 in. 114 in. (8 mm)
max (5 mm) (5 m) (6 mm) for 4545'
GMAW-S 1/8in. ( 3 m ) 30'-40'
min i / 16 in. 1/16 in. i / 16 in. 1/16 in. FCAW-G 1/4in. ( 6 m ) 25'-30'
(1.6 mm) (1.6 mm) (1.6 mm) (1.6 mm) (2) 318 in. (10 mm) 20'-25'
No min No min 1/2 in. (13 mm) 15'-20'
for for
4>90' 4>120'
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
loint included 600 for
inde 4 Y!5105' more use Detail B
rnax 90'
min 45' 37-112'; if
~
less use D e w C
i12 Y!
I
Zompleted weld
tw
L >tb/sin Weld may be
but need not built up to
exceed 1.75tb meet this
*Otherwise as needed to obtain required 4
**Notprequalified for groove angles (4) under 30"
***Initialpasses of back up weld discounted until width of groove 0 is sufficient to assure sound welding; the necessary width of w e l d g r o o v e 0
provided by back up weld
Notes:
1. These root details apply to SMAW and FCAW-SS (self-shielded) in accordance with Table 10.5.
2. These root details apply to GMAW-S (short circuiting transfer) and FCAW-G (gas shielded) in accordance with Table 10.5.
3. For GMAW-S see 10.12.3.4.These details are not intended for GMAW (spray transfer).
4. See Figure 10.12 for minimum standard profile (limited thickness)
5. See Figure 10.13 for alternate toe-fillet profile
6. See Figure 10.14 for improved profile (see 10.7.5 and 10.7.6)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - 1 92 m 0784265 0500284 9 m
230/Tubular Structures
ROOT FACE
Y VARIESFROM
135' TO 90'
tw.. F= tb/2
Y = 180' - 135' Y = 150' - 90' Y = 90' - 50'
DETAIL "A" DETAIL "B"
/ '"A
- - F - - F
BACKUP WELD BACKUPWELD BACKUPWELD
F = tb/2 F = tb/2 F = tb/2
' = 75- - 30'
P Y = 45' - 30' Y =40'-15'
DETAIL " C TRANSITION DETAIL " D
FROM "C" TO " D
Notes:
1. See Table 10.7 for dimensions tw, L, R, W, u,4.
2. Minimum standard flat weld profile as shown by solid line.
3. A concave profile, as shown by dashed lines, is also applicable.
4. Convexity, overlap, etc. are subject to the limitations of 3.6.
5. Branch member thickness, tb, is subject to limitations of 10.7.6.
-
Figure 10.12 hequalified Joint Details for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
in Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections Standard Flat Profiles -
for Limited Thickness (see 10.13.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Strudures/231
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
BUILD UP AS
/-*---.--.-.
REQUIRED.TO
'mfi4, r - i,*
by1 ~
ROOT FACE
O-1/16 in.(l.6mm) -y
r TOE
1.4 FANGLE
SPLIT THE
'Z' = 180'- 135' 'Z' = 150" - 90' V = 90"- 50'
DETAIL "A" DETAIL "B'
INSIDE BEVEL
. ..
WELD ----i
'4 = 75' - 30' V = 45' - 30' F
' =40'- 15'
DETAIL "C" TRANSITION DETAIL "D"
FROM "C" TO " D
Notes:
1. Sketches illustrate alternate standard profiles with toe fillet.
2. See 10.7.6 for applicable range of thickness tb.
3. Minimum fillet weld size, F = tb/2, also subject to limits of Table 2.2.
4. See Table 10.7 for dimensions tw, L, R, W, W , 4.
5. Convexity and overlap of weld face and fillet subject to the limitations o
6. Concave profiles, as shown by dashed lines are also acceptable.
Figure 10.13 -Prequalified Joint Details for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
-
in Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections Profile with Toe Fiiiet
for Intermediate Thickness (see 10.13.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 m 0784265 0500286 2 m
232/Tubular Structures
MIN. RADIUS
BUILD UP AS
REQUIRED
REQU TO
MAIN1
ROOT FACE
I/' b'2 ROOT FACE
\ I\
P = 180' - 135' W = 150'- 90" Y -
= 90' 50'
DETAIL "A" DETAIL " B
MIN. BACK UP MIN.
WELD MADE RADIUS
OPTIONAL FOR t b/2
WELD MADE
FROM OUTSIDE
WELD
tw-t-CI. THEORETICAL
WELD
P = 75' - 30' ' = 45" 30'
P - W = 40' - 15'
DETAIL "C" TRANSITION DETAIL " D
FROM "C"TO "D"
Notes:
I. Illustrating improved weld profiles for 10.7.5(1) as welded and 10.7.5(2) fully ground.
2. For heavy sections or fatigue critical applications as indicated in 10.7.6.
3. See Table 10.7 for dimensions tb, L, R, W, w, 4.
-
Figure 10.14 Requalified Joint Detaiis for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
in Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections Concave Improved Profile for -
Heavy Sections or Fatigue (see 10.13.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/233
HEEL
DETAIL6, C, OR D
TOE
DETAIL OR
FIGURE10.12 \ //I' \ FIGURE10.12
DEPENDINGONP
(SEETABLE 10.6)
'
CORNER
TRANSITION
CORNER
TRANSITION
-I SIDE
DETAILB FIGURE10.12 I
STEPPED BOX
CONNECTION
ROOT FACE
O TO 0.10 in. (2.5 min)
DETAIL 6, C, OR D
TOE FIGURE10.12
DETAILA OR B DEPENDINGON P
FIGURE 10.12 (SEE TABLE 10.6)
\
\ / I I
CORNER
Y /
TRANSITION
CORNER
TRANSITION
ii POINT OF TANGENCY
IN LINEWITH INSIDE
OF BRANCHTUBE
DETAILB FIGURE10.12
(SEEALTERNATE DETAILB FOR
MATCHEDCONNECTIONS)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
MATCHED BOX ALTERNATE DETAIL B
CONNECTION (FOR MATCHED BOX SECTIONS)
Notes:
1. Details A, B, C, D as shown in Figure 10.12 and all notes from Table 10.7 apply.
2. Joint preparationfor cornerweldsshallprovideasmoothtransitionfrom onedetailto another. Weldingshall becarriedcontinuously
around corners, with corners fully built up and all arc starts and stops within flat faces.
3. References to Figure 10.12 include Figures 10.13 and 10.14 as appropriate to thickness (see 10.7.6).
-
Figure 10.15 Prequaiiíied Joint Details for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
in Box Connections Made by Shielded Metal Arc, Gas Metal Arc (Short
Circuiting Transfer) and Flux Cored Arc Welding (see 10.13.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 W 0784265 0500288 b W
234/Tubular Structures
Note: See the Commentaryfor engineering guidance in this region to provide a 4 to 1 transition and may be
the sekction of a suitable profile. added in conjunction with making the weld. Offsets in
excess of this shall be corrected as provided in 3.3.3.
The joint dimensions and groove angles shall not vary Longitudinal weld seams of adjoining sections shall be
from the ranges detailed in Table 10.7 and shown in staggered a minimum of 90°, unless closer spacing is
Figures 10.12 through 10.15. The root face of joints is agreed upon by the owner and fabricator.
zero unless dimensioned otherwise. It may be detailed to
exceed zero or the specified dimension by not more than 10.14.3 Vqriation in cross section dimension of groove
i / 16 in. (1.6 mm). It may not be detailed less than the welded joints, from those shown on the detailed draw-
specified dimensions. ings, shall be in accordance with 3.3.4 except
(i) Tolerances for T-, Y-, and K-connections are
10.13.2 Partial Joint Penetration. Details for partial included in the ranges given in 10.13.1.
joint penetration groove welds in tubular T-, Y-, and (2) The following tolerances apply to complete joint
K-connections are described in Figure 10.16 and Table penetration tubular groove welds in butt joints, made
10.8. These are subject to the limitations of 10.12.2.2. from one side only, without backing.
10.13.3 Fillet Welds. Details for fillet welds in tubular
T-, Y-, and K-connections are described in Figure 10.17. Root Opening
These details are limited to ß I1/ 3 for circular connec- Root Face of Joints Without Groove Angle
tions, and ß 50.8 for box sections. They are also subject of Joint Steel Backing4 of Joint
to the limitations of 10.12.2.3(2). For box section with
large corner radii, a smaller limit on ß may be required to in. mm in.
keep the branch member and the weld on the flat face. SMAWf 1/16 1.6 f 1/16 1.6 f5
GMAW f 1 / 3 2 1 f1/16 1.6 f5
FCAW f 1/16 1.6 f1/16 1.6 f5
PartE
Workmanship
10.15 Temporary Welds
10.14 Assembly
Temporary welds shall be subject to the same welding
10.14.1 The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be procedure requirements as the final welds. They shall be
brought into the closest practicable contact, and in no removed unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
event shall be separated by more than 3/ 16 in. (5 mm). If When they are removed, the surface shall be made flush
the separation is i / 16 in. (1.6 mm) or greater, the leg of with the original surface. There shall be no temporary
the fillet weld shall be increased by the amount of the welds in tension zones of members made of quenched
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
separation. The separation between faying surfaces of and tempered material. Temporary welds at other loca-
lap joints and of butt joints landing on a backing shall tions shall be shown on shop drawings.
not exceed 1/ 16 in. Where irregularities in rolled shapes,
after straightening, do not permit contact within the
above limits, the procedure necessary to bring the mate- 10.16 Dimensional Tolerances
rial within these limits shall be subjectto the approval of
the Engineer. The use of fillers is prohibited except as The dimensions of tubular members shall be within
specified on the drawings or as specially approved by the the tolerances specified in 3.5 wherein the term column is
Engineer and made in accordance with 2.4. interpreted as compression tubular member.
10.14.2 Abutting parts to be joined by girth welds shall
be carefully aligned. No two girth welds shall be located 10.17 Quality of Welds
closer than one pipe diameter or 3 ft (0.9 m), whichever is
less. There shall be no more than two girth welds in any All nondestructive testing, including visual examina-
10 ft (3 m) interval of pipe, except as may be agreed upon tion, shall be performed in accordance with this section
by the owner and contractor. Radial offset of abutting using the applicable parts of section 6 when specified
edges of girth seams shall not exceed 0.2t (where t is the herein. The extent of examination and the acceptance
thickness of the thinner member) and the maximum criteria shall be specified in the contract,documentsor
allowable shall be 1/4 in. (6 mm), provided that any information furnished to the bidder.
offset exceeding 1/8 in. (3 mm) is welded from both
sides. However, with the approval of the Engineer, one 48. Root openings wider than permitted by the above toler-
localized area per girth seam may be offset up to 0.3t with ances, but not greater than the thickness of the thinner part,
a maximum of 3/ 8 in. (10 mm), provided the localized may be built up by welding to acceptable dimensions prior to
area is under 8t in length. Filler metal shall be added to the joining of the parts by welding.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
0500289
Tubular Structures/235
SIDE ZONE \TRANSITION
ZONE
(A) CIRCULAR CONNECTION
MITER CUT FOR
P < 60" 7
TOE OF
TOE WELD
Y
CORNER
TRANSITION PLAN SECTION
(B) STEPPED BOX CONNECTION
i BRANCH END
ADDITIONAL BEVEL
(C) MATCHED BOX CONNECTION
I \A
-
Figure 10.16 Prequalified Joint Details for Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds
in Simple T-, Y-, and K-Connections Made by Shielded Metal Arc, Gas Metal Arc
(Short Circuiting Transfer), or Flux Cored Arc Welding (see 10.13.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L = L 92 H 0784265 0500290 4 H
236/Tubular Structures
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
L
- Y
r LTHIS
LINE
TANGENT
AT W.P. AT W.P.
TRANSITION A TRANSITION B
1.5t MIN AT W.P.
Y = 75"-60"
TRANSITION OR HEEL
-/ 1.5t MIN k-
SKETCH FOR ANGULAR
Y = 60"-30" DEFINITION
HEEL 150">-~230°
90"> + 230"
Notes:
1. t = thickness of thinner section.
2. Bevel to feather edge except in transition and heel zones.
3. Root opening: O to 3/16 in. (5 mm).
4. - _-
Not prequalified for under 30".
5. Weld size (effective throat) twit; Z Loss Factor shown in Table 10.8.
6. Calculations per 10.5.3 must be done for leg length less than 1.5t, as shown.
7. For Box Section, joint preparation for corner transitions shall provide a smooth
transition from one detail to another. Welding shall be carried continuously
around corners, with corners fully built up and all weld starts and stops within flat faces.
8. See Appendix B for definition of local dihedral angle, P.
9. W.P. =work point.
-
Figure 10.16 (continued) Bequalified Joint Details for Partial Joint Penetration Groove
Welds in Simple T-, Y-, and K-Connections Made by Shielded Metal Arc, Gas Metal
Arc (Short Circuiting Transfer), or Flux Cored Arc Welding (see 10.13.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-IJ 92 078Y2b5 0500293 ~ ~
Tubular Structures/237
P
' = 150'-105' Y?= 105'-90' Y? = 90"-75'
TOE TOE OR SIDE SIDE OR HEEL
-b - CORNER DIMENSION
C 2 tb + 1/8 in. (3 mm)
- - C I AND r 2 2tb OR ROOT
OPENING 2 1/16 in. (1.6 mm)
OR SEE 10.12.3.6
THIS LINE REQUIRED TO FLUSH
TANGENT OUT (WHICHEVER is
ATW.P. - LESS)
TOE CORNER SIDE MATCHED
-
Figure 10.16 (continued) Prequalified Joint Details for Partial Joint Penetration Groove
Welds in Simple T-, Y-, and K-Connections Made by Shielded Metal Arc, Gas Metal
Arc (Short Circuiting Transfer), or Flux Cored Arc Welding (see 10.13.2)
10.17.1 Visual Inspection. All welds shall be visually 10.17.1.6 The sum of diameters of piping porosity in
inspected and shall be acceptable if the following condi- fillet welds shall not exceed 3/ 8 in. (10 mm) in any linear
tions are satisfíd. inch of weld and shall not exceed 3/4 in. (19 mm) in any
12 in. (305 mm) length of weld,
10.17.1.1 The weld shall have no cracks.
10.17.1.2 Thorough fusion shall exist between adja- 10.17.1.7 Completejoint penetration groove welds in
cent layers of weld metal and between weld metal and butt joints transverse to the directionof computed tensile
base metal. stress shallhave no piping porosity. For all other groove
welds, piping porosity shall not exceed 3/8 in. (10 mm)
10.17.1.3 All craters shall be filled to the cross section in any linear inch of weld and shall not exceed 3/4 in.
of the weld, except for theends of intermittentfillet welds (19 mm) in any 12 in. (305 mm) length of weld.
outside of their effective length.
10.17.1.4 Weld profdes shall be in accordance with 3.6. 10.17.1.8 Visual inspection of welds in all steels may
begin immediately after the completed welds have cooled
10.17.1.5 Undercut shall be no more than 0.01 in. to ambient temperature. Acceptance criteria for ASTM
(0.25 mm) deep when its direction is transverse to pri- A514 andA517 steels shall be based on visual inspection
mary tensile stress in the part that is undercut, nor more performed not less than 48 hours after completionof the
than 1/32 in. (i mm) for all other situations. weld.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0784265 0500292 B W
238/ Tubular Structures
Table 10.8
Z Loss Factor
(see 10.13.2)
Groove Angle 4 Position of Welding: V or OH Position of Welding: H or F
Process' Z(in.) Z(mm) Process' Z(in.) Z(mm)
SMAW O O SMAW - 0 O
FCAW-SS O O FCAW-SS O O
FCAW-G O O FCAW-G O O
GMAW NIA NIA GMAW O O
GMAW-S O O GMAW-S O O
SMAW 118 3 SMAW 118 3
FCAW-SS 118 3 FCAW-SS O O
60" > 4 2 4 5 " FCAW-G 118 3 FCAW-G O O
GMAW NIA NIA GMAW O O
GMAW-S 3 GMAW-S 3
SMAW 114 6 SMAW 114 6
FCAW-SS 114 6 FCAW-SS 118 3
45' > 4 2 30" FCAW-G 318 10 FCAW-G 114 6
GMAW NIA NIA GMAW 114 6
GMAW-S 318 10 GMAWS 6'
Notes:
1. Processes FCAW-SS = Self shielded flux cored arc welding GMAW Spray transfer or globular transfer
FCAW-G Gas shielded flux cored arc welding GMAW-S Short circuiting transfer
2. N/A = Not applicable.
3. Position of Welding: F Hat; H = Horizontal; V = Vertical; OH Overhead.
10.17.2 Nondestructive Inspection. Except as provided (2) Discontinuities closer than the minimum clear-
for in Part F, all NDT methods including equipment ance allowance of Figure 10.18.
requirements and qualifications, personnel qualifica- (3) Rounded discontinuities greater than a maximum
tions, and operatingmethods shall be in accordance with of size of E/3, not to exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm). However,
section 6, Inspection. Acceptance criteria shall be as when the thickness is greater than 2 in. (50.8 mm), the
specified in this section. Welds subject to nondestructive maximum rounded indication may be 3/8 in. (10 mm).
testing shall have been found acceptable by visual inspec- The minimum clearance of this type of discontinuity
tion in accordance with 10.17.1. greater than or equal to 3/32 in, (2 mm) to an acceptable
elongated or rounded discontinuity or to an edge or end
10.17.3 Radiographic Inspection of an intersecting weld shall be three times the greatest
10.17.3.1 When subject to radiographic testing in dimension of the larger of the discontinuities being
addition to visual inspection, welds shall have no cracks. considered.
Other discontinuities shall be evaluated on the basis of (4) Isolated discontinuities such as acluster of rounded
being either elongated or rounded. Regardless of the indications, having a sum of their greatest dimensions
type of discontinuity, an elongated discontinuity is one in exceeding the maximum size single discontinuity per-
which its lengthexceeds three times its width. A rounded mitted in Figure 10.18. The minimum clearance to
discontinuity is one in which its length is three times its another cluster or an elongated or rounded discontinuity
width or less and may be round or irregular and may or to an edge or end of an intersecting weld shall be three
have tails. times the greatest dimension of the larger of the discon-
tinuities being considered.
10.17.3.2 Discontinuities as shown on radiographs (5) The sum of individual discontinuities each having
that exceed the following limitations shall be unaccept- 'agreaterdimensionofless than3/32in. (2mm)shallnot
able. (E weld size.) exceed 2E/ 3 or 3/8 in. (10 mm), whichever is less, in any
(1) Elongated discontinuitiesexceeding the maximum . h e a r 1 in. (25 mm) of weld. This requirement is inde-
size of Figure 10.18. pendent of (1), (2), and (3) above.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 m 07842b5 0500293 T m
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Tubular Structures/239
MIN L for
Y I E=0.7t I E=t I E = 1.07t
Heel e &lo I 1.5t I 1.5t I Laraerof 1.5t
I I I &1.4t+Z
Side 5 lûûo t 1.4t 1.3
Side l û O - l l O o l.lt 1.6t 1.75t
Side 110-120° 1.2t 1.8t 2.0t
Toe > 12ûo t 1.4t Full Bevel
Bevel Bevel 60-90° Groove
SIDE ZONE
1 HEELZONE 1
FOR ?I>! 120' t
EDGE SHALL BE CUT
BACK TO FACILITATE M
TOE
A 1.5t
HEEL
Notes:
I . t = thickness of thinner part. 4. 4 = 15' min. Not prequalified for under 30°.For
2. L = minimum size (see 10.5.3 which may require 4 <mo,loss factor (Tabre 10.8) and special welder
increased weld size for combinations other than 36 ksi qualifications (Table 10.5, Col 11) apply.
(250 Mpa) base metal and 70 ksi (480 Mpa) electrodes) 5. See 10.13.3 for limitations on ß = d/D.
3. Root opening O to 3/16 in. (5 mm) - See 3.3.
Figure 10.17 -Fillet Welded hequalified Tubular Joints Made By Shielded Metal Arc,
Gas Metal Arc, and Flux Cored Arc Welding (see 10.13.3)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L - L 92 m 0784265 0.500294 L m
24O/Tubular Structures
1-118 OR GREATER 314 MAX.
I . TO DETERMINETHE MAXIMUM SIZE OF DISCONTINUITY
1 -
PERMITTED IN ANY JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT
A HORIZONTALLYTO B.
718 - 2.
TO DETERMINETHE MINIMUM CLEARANCE
ALLOWED BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIESOF
314 -ANY SIZE GREATER OR EQUAL TO 3132 in.
PROJECT B VERTICALLY TO C.
518
1I2
318
1I4
1I8
O 1I4 1I2 314 1 1 114 1 112 1 314 2 2 114
C IN INCHES
29 OR GREATER 19 MAX.
I . TO DETERMINE THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF DISCONTINUITY
25 - PERMITTED IN ANY JOINT OR WELD SIZE, PROJECT
A HORIZONTALLYTO B.
22 -2. TO DETERMINETHE MINIMUM CLEARANCE
ALLOWED BETWEEN EDGES OF DISCONTINUITIESOF
ANY SIZE GREATER OR EQUAL TO 2 mm
- PROJECT B VERTICALLY TO C.
16 10
13
10 ~
6
2
3
O 6 13 19 25 32 38 44 50 57
C IN MILLIMETERS
C - MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINALAXIS OF THE WELD
BETWEEN EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION TYPE DISCONTINUITIES(LARGER OF
ADJACENT DISCONTINUITIESGOVERNS), OR TO THE EDGE OR AN END OF AN INTERSECTING
WELD.
(C = 3B = 2E)
-
Figure 10.18 Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as
Determined by Radiography of Tubular Joints (see 10.17.3.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L * L 9 2 œ O784265 0500295 3 œ
Tubular Structures/241
(6) In-line discontinuities, where the sum of the great- 10.17.5 Liquid Penetrant and MagneticParticleInspec-
est dimensions exceeds E in any length of 6E. When the tion. Welds that are subject to magnetic particle and
length of the weld being examined is less than 6E, the liquid penetrant testing, in addition to visual inspection,
permissible sum of the greatest dimensions shall be pro- shall be evaluated on the basis of the requirements for
portionally less, visual inspection. The testing shall be performed in
accordancewith 6.7.5 or 6.7.6, whichever is applicable.
10.17.3.3 Figures 10.19 and 10.20 illustrate the appli-
cation of the requirements ghen in 10.17.3.2. 10.17.6 For welds subject to nondestructive testing in
accordance with 10.17.2, 10.17.3, 10.17.4, and 10.17.5,
the testing may begin immediately after the completed
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10.17.4 Uitrasonic Acceptance Criteria. Acceptance
criteria for ultrasonic testing shall be as provided in welds have cooled to ambient temperature. Acceptance
contract documents. Class R or Class X, or both, may be criteria for ASTM A514 and A517 steels shall be based
incorporated by reference. Amplitude based acceptance on nondestructive testing performed not less than 48
criteria as given by 8.15.3 may also be used for groove hours after completion of the welds.
welds in butt joints in tubing24 in. (610 mm) indiameter
and over, provided all relevant provisions of section 6,
Part Cyare followed. However, these amplitudecriteria
shall not be applied to tubular T-, Y-, and K-connections. Part F
Nondestructive Testing of
10.17.4.1 Acceptance Criteria-Classes R (Applicable
when ultrasonic testing is used as an alternative to radiog- Groove Welds in Tubular Joints
raphy). All indications having one-half (6 dB) or less
amplitude than the standard sensitivity level (with due 10.18 Radiographic Testing
regard for 10.19.6) shall be disregarded. Indicationsex- 10.18.1 Circumferential Groove Welds in Butt Joints.
ceeding the disregard level shall be evaluated as follows: The technique used to radiograph circumferential butt
(1) Isolated random spherical reflectors, with 1 in. joints shall be capable of covering the entire circumfer-
(25 mm) minimum separation up to the standard sensi- ence. The techniqueshall preferablybe single wall expo-
tivity level shali be accepted. Larger reflectors shall be surelsingle wall view. Where accessibility or pipe size
evaluated as linear reflectors. prohibits this, the technique may be double wall expo-
(2) Aligned spherical reflectors shall be evaluated as surelsingle wall view or double wall exposure/ double
linear reflectors. wall view.
(3) Clustered spherical reflectors having a density of
more than one per square inch (645 square millimeters) 10.18.1.1 Single Wall Exposure/Single Wall View.
with indications above the disregard levels [projected The source of radiation is placed inside the pipe and the
area normal to the direction of applied stress, averaged film on the outside of the pipe (see Figure 10.23). Pano-
over a 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld] shall be rejected. ramic exposure may be made if the source to object
(4) Linear or planar reflectors whose lengths (extent) requirements are satisfied; if not, a minimum of three
exceed the limits of Figure 10.21 shall be rejected. Addi- exposures shall be made. The IQI may be selected and
tionally, root reflectors shall not exceed the limits of placedon the sourceside of the pipe. if not practicable, it
Class X. may be placed on the film side of the pipe.
-
10.17.4.2 Accceptance Criteria Class X (experience- 10.18.1.2 Double Wall Exposure/Single Wall View.
based, fitness-for-purpose criteria applicable to T-, Y-, Where access or geometrical conditions prohibit single
and K-connections in redundant structures with notch- wall exposure, the sourcemay be placed on the outside of
tough weldments). All indications having half (6 dB) or the pipe and film on the opposite wall outside the pipe.
less amplitude than the standard sensitivity level (with See Figure 10.24. A minimum of three exposures is
due regard for 10.19.6) shall be disregarded. Indications required to cover the complete circumference. The IQI
exceeding the disregard level shalí be evaluated as may be selected and placed on the film side of the pipe.
follows:
(1) Spherical reflectors shall be as described in Class 10.18.1.3 Double Wall Exposure/Double Wall View.
R, except that any indicationswithin the followinglimits When the outside diameter of the pipe is 3-1/2 in.
for linear or planar are acceptable. (89 mm) or less, both the source side and film side weld
(2) Linear or planar reflectors shall be evaluated by may be projected onto the film and both walls viewed for
means of beam boundary techniques, and those whose acceptance. The source of radiation is offset from the
dimensions exceeded the limits of Figure 10.22 shall be pipe by a distance that is at least seven times the outside
rejected. The root area shall be defined as that lying diameter. The radiation beam shall be offset from the
within 1/ 4 in. (6 mm) or t, /4, whichever is greater, of the plane of the weld centerline at an angle sufficient to
root of the theoretical weld, as shown in Figure 10.12. separate the images of the source side and film side
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L * L 92 07842b5 050027b 5 W .
242/Tubular Structures
-u.
E
h
E
E
E8
E,
3s oa
=I-
V)
2
.-C O
@YE
.-C F ' Bz
03
9
R a
a
c?
2
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
u>
Y
E
E,
32
.G p
@Y
.*. -
Co
9
I I
3 o o
4
h
4
h
w
h
E E E
E E E
w
T- Cu
w
@Y
v
.-E .-E .-E
d 2 8
9 9 7
h h
E E
E E
Cu
w W
w
I
.-C .-C
@Y O
03
9 ;
-
h
E
E
Y
.-E
C o q
i-^ :o
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/243
.-
3
.-
c
3
.-
C
. s
.I-
C
8
.-ln
E
. .'
I=
al
o
m
s
m
:
.c
. m
' . J
óo
F.
z
x p!
3
o)
¡i
8
Q
v
8
-
h
ò
E
E
c?
w E
.-
Cu
a.-3
.-3
.I-
.-C
.I-
C
O
.-s
2O
tlul
U
al
c
al
al
3
c
al
' . a
U
al
O 3
-Om
Q)
0
C
2
w . -mal0
5
.-E
. 5
C
I N l O r JO ûN3
ad
Zr
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 W 07842b5 05001398 9 W
244/Tubdar Structures
1
,
WELD THICKNESS, rnrn OVER
13 25 38 50 50
I I I
7
O 1I2 1 1-11.2
- -- 2
50
OVER
WELD THICKNESS, in. 2
tW
NOTES
1. INTERNAL LINEAR OR PLANAR REFLECTORSABOVE STANDARD
SENSITIVITY (EXCEPT ROOT OF SINGLE WELDED T-, Y-, AND
K-CONNECTIONS-SEE FIGURE 10.22)
2. MINOR REFLECTORS’ (ABOVE DISREGARD LEVEL UP TO AND
INCLUDINGSTANDARD SENSITIVITY) (EXCEPT ROOT OF SINGLE
WELDED T-, Y-, AND K-CONNECTIONS-SEE FIGURE 1022)
*ADJACENT REFLECTORSSEPARATED BY LESS THAN THEIR AVERAGE
LENGTH SHALL BE TREATED AS CONTINUOUS.
tw
WELDTHICKNESS. mm
UNDER75 75 150 225 305 OVER305 -FOR THIS WELD SIZE
UNDER13 13 25 38 50 OVER50 -EVALUATE OVER THIS LENGTH
(NOTTO EXCEED D/2 WHERE
D IS DIAMETER)
1/2
1
B
6
O
E
1-112
%E
2-1/2
3-112
4
UNDER II2 112 1 1-112 2 OVER 2 -FOR THIS WELD SIZE
UNDER3 3 6 9 12 OVER 12 -EVALUATE OVER THIS LENGTH
WELD THICKNESS, In. (NOT TO EXCEED D/2 WHERE
D IS DIAMETER)
tW
*‘ROOT AREA DISCONTINUITIES FALLING OUTSIDE THEORETICAL WELD
(DIMENSIONS‘Yw” OR “L“ IN FIGURES 10.12,10.13, AND 10.14) ARE TO BE
DICREGARDED.
Figure 10.21 -Class R Indications (see 10.17.4.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/245
MAIN MEMBER
BRANCH MEMBER
ALIGNED DISCONTINUITIESSEPARATED BY LESS THAN
(Ll+L2)/2 AND PARALLEL DISCONTINUITIESSEPARATED
BY LESS THAN (Hl+H2)/2 SHALL BE EVALUATEDAS
CONTINUOUS.
ACCUt.4ULATIVEFLAWS ARE EVALUATEDOVER 6 in. (150 mm)
OR D12 LENGTH OFWELD (WHICHEVER IS LESS), WHERE
TUBE DIAMETER = D.
HEIGHT(H) OF
RESS
LAND H BASED ON A RECTANGLE WHICH TOTALLY ENCLOSES INDICATED DISCONTINUITY.
LENGTH, mm
13 25 50 100 150ORDI2
REJECT
T-, Y-,K-ROOT DEFECTS
FOR COMPLETE JOINT PENETRATIONWELD IN SINGLE WELDED
Ti Y-. AND K-TUBULAR CONNECTIONS MADE WITHOUT BACKING.
FLAWS DISCONTINUITIES IN THE BACKUP WELD IN THEROOT, DETAILS C
AND D OF FIGURES 10.12,10.13. AND 10.14 ARE TO BE DISREGARDED.
ACCEPT
1/2 1 2 4 6 0 R M
LENGTH, in.
LENGTH, mm
6 13 25 50 100 1500RDI2
114 (6) OR twf4
L-1 REJECT
iNTERNAL REFLECTORS AND ALL OTBER WELDS
DISCONTINUITIESTHATARE WITHIN H ORtw16 OFTHE
OUTSIDE SURFACE SHALL BE SIZED AS IF EXTENDING TO
THE SURFACE OFTHE WELD.
INDIVIDUAL
FLAWS *REFLECTORS BELOW STANDARD SENSITIVITY [SEE 10.17.41 11(2)
1-11
I ARET0 BEDISREGARDED.
ACCEPT I
ANY* ' ' ' '
114 1/2 1 2 4 60RDl2
LENGTH. In.
Figure 10.22 -Class X Indications (see 10.17.4.2)
welds. There shall be no overlap of the two zone inter- on nominal single wali thicknesses in accordance with
preted, Aminhum of two exposures90° to each other is 6.10.7.1 and Tables 6.1 and 6.2.
required. (See Figure 10.25.)
The weld may also be radiographed by superimposing
the two welds, in whichcase there shailbe a minimum of
three exposures 60" to each other. (See Figure 10.26) 10.19 Ultrasonic Testing
In each of these two techniques, the IQI shali be placed
on the source side of the pipe. The ultrasonic testing (UT) requirements of this sec-
tion represent the state of the art available for examina-
10.18.2 Image Quality Indicator (IQI). IQIs shall be of tion of tubular structures, especially T-, Y-, and K-
the design and type specified in section 6. The IQIs shall connections. Height determination of elongated reflec-
be selected for the techniques described in 10.18.1 based tors with a dimension (H)less than the beam height (see
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
WS DL.1 9 0784265 0500300 3
246/Tubular Structures
Figure 10.22) is considerably less accurate than length
FILM
determination where the reflectors extend beyond the
beam boundaries,and requires more attentionin regards
to procedure qualification and approval, and in the
training and certification of ultrasonic operators.
10.19.1 Procedure. All UT shall be in accordance with
a written procedure which has been prepared or approved
by an individual qualified as SNT-TC-1A, Level III, and
experienced in UT of tubular structures. The procedure
shaíl be based upon the requirements of this section and
section 6, Part Cyas applicable.
PANORAMICEXPOSURE
ONE EXPOSURE
Prior to use on production welds, the procedure and
acceptance criteria shall be approved by the Engineer,
and personnel shaii have been successfully qualified in
I /- accordancewith 10.19.2. The procedure shall contain, as
a minimum, the following informationregarding the UT
method and techniques:
(1) The type of weld joint configuration to be exam-
ined; i.e., the applicable range of diameter, thickness,
and local dihedral angle.49
(2) Acceptance criteria for each type and size weld
(3) Type(@of UT instrumentation(make and model)
(4) Transducer (search unit) frequency, size and shape
of active area, beam angle, and type of wedge on angle
beam probes.50
I (5) Surface preparation and couplant (where used)
FILM -/ (6) Type of calibration test block and reference
MINIMUM THREE EXPOSURES reflector
(7) Method of calibration and required accuracy for
distance (sweep), vertical linearity, beam spread, angle,
Figure 10.23 Single Wall Exposure -
Single Wall View (see 10.18.1.1)
- sensitivity, and resolution
(8) Recalibration interval for each item in (7) above
(9) Method for determining acoustical continuity of
base metal (see 10.19.4), and for establishinggeometry as
a function of local dihedral angle and thickness
(10) Scanning pattern and sensitivity (see 10.19.5)
( i l ) Transfer correction for surface curvature and
MINIMUM THREE EXPOSURES roughness (where amplitude methods are used, (see
10.19.3))
n (12) Methods for determining effective beam angle
(in curved material), indexing root area, and flaw
locations
(13) Method of discontinuity length and height
determination
(14) Method of defect verification during excavation
and repair
49. Conventionaltechniques are generallylimited to diameters
of 12-3/4 in. (325 mm) and larger, thicknesses of 1/2 in.
(12.7 mm) and above, and local dihedral angies of 30' or
greater. Specialtechniques for smailer sizes may be used, pro-
vided they are qualified as described herein, using the smaller
size of application.
50. Procedures using transducers with frequencies up to 6
Figure 10.24-Double Wall Exposure
Single Wall View (see 10.18.1.2)
- MHz, sized down to 1/4 in.(6 mm), and of different shape than
specified elsewhere,may be used, provided they are qualified as
described herein.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Tubular Structures/247
Lyl
OFFSET SOURCE
If! I
FILM
Figure 10.25 -Minimum
Double Wall Exposure -Double Wail (Elliptical) View,
Two Exposures (see 10.18.1.3)
tO\ SOURCE
CENTERLINE
AXIS OF WELD
>$
1
7 FILM
Figure 10.26 -Double Wall Exposure Double Wall View, -
Minimum Three Exposures (see 10.18.1.3)
10.19.2 Personnel. In addition to personnel require- Performance shali bejudged on the basis of the ability
ments of 6.7.7, when examination of T-, Y-, and K- of the operator to determinethe size and classification of
connections is to be performed, the operator shali be eachdiscontinuitywith an accuracyrequired to accept or
required to demonstrate an ability to apply the special reject each weldment and accurately locate the rejectable
techniques required for such an'examination. Practical discontinuities along the weld and within the cross sec-
tests for this purpose shall be performed upon mock-up tion of the weld. At least 70% of the rejectable discon-
welds that represent the type of welds to be inspected, tinuities shall be correctly identified as rejectable, and
including a representative range of dihedral angle and performance shall otherwise be to the satisfaction of the
thickness to be encountered in production, using the Engineer (with particular regard to the level of false
applicable qualified and approved procedures. Each alarms). For work on nonredundant structures, ali of the
mock-up shail contain natural or artificial discontinui- serious flaws (i.e., those exceedingrejectabledimensions
ties that yield ultrasonicindicationsabove and below the by a factor of two, amplitudes by 6 dB) shall be located
reject criteria specified in the approved procedure. and reported.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 72 0784265 0500302 7 .
248/Tubular Structures
10.19.3 Calibration. UT equipment qualification and 10.19.5 Weld Scanning. Weld scanning of T-, Y-, and
calibration methods shali meet the requirements of the K-connections shall be performed from the branch
approved procedure and Section 6, Part C, except as member surface (see Figure 10.27). All examinations
follows: shall be made in leg I and II where possible. For initial
scanning, the sensitivity shall be increased by 12 dB
10.19.3.1 Range. Range (distance) calibration shall above that established in 10.19.3 for the maximum
include, as a minimum, the entire sound path distanceto sound path. Indication evaluation shall be performed
be used during the specific examination. This may be with reference to the standard sensitivity.
adjusted to represent either the sound path travel, sur-
face distance, or equivalent depth below contact surface, 10.19.6 Optimum Angle. Indicationsfound in the root
displayed along the instrument horizontal scale, as de- areas of groove welds in butt joints and along the fusion
scribed in the approved procedure. face of all welds shall be further evaluated with either
70°, 6 0 O , or 45O search angle, whichever is nearest to
10.19.3.2 Sensitivify Calibration. Standard sensitivity being perpendicular to the expected fusion face.
for examination of production welds using amplitude 10.19.7 Discontinuity Evaluation. Discontinuities shall
techniques shall be.: basic sensitivity t distant amplitude be evaluated by use of a combination of beam boundary
correction+ transfer correction.This calibrationshall be and amplitude techniques. Sizes shall be given as length
performed at least once for eachjoint to be tested; except and height (depth dimension) or amplitude, as applica-
that, for repetitive testing of the same size and configura- ble. Amplitude shall be related to “standard calibration.”
tion, the calibration frequency of 6.18.1 may be used. In addition, discontinuities shall be classified as linear or
(1) Basic Sensitivity. Reference level screen height planar versus spherical, by noting changes in amplitude
obtained using maximum reflection from the 0.060 in. as the transducer is swung in an arc centered on the
(1.5 mm) diameter hole in the IIW block (or other block reflector. The location (position) of discontinuities within
which results in the same basic calibration sensitivity) as the weld cross section, as well as from an established
described in 6.18 (or 6.21). reference point along the weld axis, shall be determined.
(2) Distance Amplitude Correction. The sensitivity
level shall be adjusted to provide for attenuation loss 10.19.8 Reports
throughout the range of sound path to be used by either 10.19.8.1 A report form that clearly identifies the
distance amplitude correction curves, electronic means, work and the area of inspection shail be completed by the
or as described in 6.19.6.4. Where high frequency trans- ultrasonictechnician at the time of inspection. A detailed
ducers are used, the greater attenuation shail be taken report and sketch showing the location along the weld
into account. axis, location within the weld cross section, size (or
Transfer correction may be used to accommodate indication rating), extent, orientation, and classification
ultrasonic testing through tight layers of paint not for each discontinuity shall be completed for each weld
exceeding 10 m i l s (0.25 mm) in thickness. in which significant indications are found.
10.19.4 Base Metal Examination. The entire area sub- 10.19.8.2 When specified, discontinuities approach-
ject to ultrasonic scanning shail be examined by the ing rejectable size, particularly those about which there is
longitudinalwave techniqueto detect laminar reflectors some doubt in their evaluation, shall also be reported.
that could interfere with the intended, directed sound 10.19.8.3 Areas for which complete inspection was
wave propagation. All areas containing laminar reflec- not practicable shall also be noted, along with the reason
tors shall be marked for identification prior to weld why.
examination and the consequences considered in selec-
tion of search unit angles and scanning techniques for 10.19.8.4 Unless otherwise specified, the reference
examination of the welds in that area. Base material position and the location and extent of rejectable discon-
discontinuities that exceed the limits of 3.2.3.3 shall be tinuities (flaws) shall also be marked physically on the
brought to the attention of the Engineer or the Inspector. work piece.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
0500303
Tubular Structures/249
(A) BEAM DIRECTION. MAINTAIN SOUND
PERPENDICULAR TO WELD.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(B) V-PATHS. USE SINGLE AND MULTIPLE LEGS AND VARIOUS ANGLES AS REQUIRED
TO COVER THE COMPLETE WELD INCLUDING THE ROOT AREA.
Figure 10.27 -Scanning Techniques (see 10.19.5)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
11. Strengthening and Repairing Existing Structures
11.1 General 11.4 Workmanship
All provisions of this Code apply equally to the 11.4.1 Surfaces of old material, which are to be covered
strengtheningand repairingof existing structuresexcept by repair or by reinforcing material, shall be cleaned of
as modified in this section. dirt, rust, and other foreign matter exceptadherentpaint
-fdm. The portions of such surfaces that are to receive
welds shall be cleaned thoroughly of all foreign matter
including paint film for a distance of 2 in. (50 mm) from
11.2 Materials each side of the outside lines of welds. Such surfaces,
inside the areas cleaned for receiving welds, shall be given
11.2.1 The types of base metal involved shall be deter- a protective coating if so specified.
mined before preparing the drawings and specifications
covering strengthening or repair of existing structures. 11.4.2 Edges to be welded that have been reduced in
thickness to less than the size of weld specified shall be
11.2.2 Where different base metals are to be joined, cut away or built up to provide a thickness equal to the
special consideration must be given to the selection of size of the weld except for occasionalshortlengths where
filler metal and welding procedure. some reduction of weld size would not be detrimental.
11.4.3 Structural elements under stress shall not be
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
removed or reduced in section except as specified by the
11.3 Design plans or Engineer.
11.3.1 Before completing the design, the following
should be determined:
(1) The character and extent of damage to the parts
and connections that require repair or strengthening. 11.5 Special
(2) Whether the repairs should consist only of restor-
ing corroded or otherwise damaged parts or of replacing 11.5.1 The Engineer shall determine whether a member
members in entirety. is permitted to carry live-load stress while welding or
oxygen cutting is being performed on it, taking into
11.3.2 A complete study of stresses in the structure shall consideration the extent of cross-section heating of the
be made if the design of strengtheninggoes beyond the member which results from the operation that is being
restoration of corroded or otherwise damaged members. performed.
Allowance should be made for fatigue stresses that
members may have sustained in past service. 11.5.2 If materialis added to a member carrying a dead-
load stress in excess of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa), it is desirable
11.3.3 Members subject to cyclical loading shall be to relieve the member of dead-load stress or to prestress
designed for fatigue stresses of the general specification. the materialto be added. If neither is practicable, the new
When the previous loading history is available for a material to be added shall be proportioned for a unit
structure, it may be recognized in the design to equalize stress equal to the allowable unit stress in the original
the anticipated lives of old and replaced elements of the member minus the dead-load unit stress in the original
structure. member.
Copyright American Welding Society
25 1
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 W 0784265 0500305 2 W
2521Strengthening and Repairing Existing Structures
11.5.3 Where rivets or bolts are overstressed by the total ing so as to maintain a symmetrical section at all times.
load, oniy dead-load shallbe assigned to them, provided This is of particular importance if live load is permitted
they are capable of supporting it without overstress. In upon the structure while the member under considera-
such cases, sufficient welding shall be provided to sup- tion is being strengthened or repaired.
port all live and impact loads. If rivets or bolts are
overstressed by dead-load alone, then sufficient welding 11.5.5 Particular care should be given to the sequence of
shall be added to support the total load. welding in the applicationof reinforcing plates on girder
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
webs and to the treatment of welds in the end joints of
11.5.4 In strengthening members by the addition of such plates where they abut stiffener assemblies or girder
material, it is desirable to arrange the sequence of weld- splice plates.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendixes
Mandatory Appendixes
These Appendixes contain information and requirements that are considered a part of the standard.
Appendix I Effective Throat
Appendix II Effective Throats of Fillet Weld in Skewed T-Joints
Appendix III Requirements for Impact Testing
Appendix IV Joint Welding Procedure Requirements
Appendix V Weld Quality Requirements for Tension Joints in Dynamically Loaded Structures
Appendix VI Flatness of Girder Webs-Statically Loaded Structures
Appendix VI1 Flatness of Girder Webs -Dynamically Loaded Structures
Appendix VIII Temperature-Moisture Content Charts
Appendix IX Manufacturers Stud Base Qualification Requirements
Appendix X Qualification and Calibration of Ultrasonic Units with Other Approved Reference Blocks
Appendix XI Guidelines on Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat
Nonmandatory Appendixes
These Appendixes are not considered a part of the standard and are provided for information purposes oniy.
Appendix A Short Circuiting Transfer
Appendix B Terms and Definitions
Appendix C Guide for Specification Writers
Appendix D Ultrasonic Equipment Qualification and inspection Forms
Appendix E Sample Welding Forms
Appendix F Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries for the Structural Welding Committee
Appendix G Local Dihedral Angle
Appendix H Contents of Prequalified Welding Procedure Specification
Appendix J Safe Practices
Appendix K Ultrasonic Examination of Welds by Alternative Techniques
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
253
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 07842b5'0500307 b m
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Appendix I
Effective Throat
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a pari of ANSI/AWS D1.l-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel and includes mandatory
requirements for use in this standard)
Note: The effective throat of a weid is the minimum distance from the root of the joint to its face, with or without a deduction of
1/8 in. (3 mm) as required by 2.3.1 3, less any convexity.
Appendix II
Effective Throats of Fillet Welds in Skewed T-Joints
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel and includes mandatory
requirements for use in this standard)
Table II-1 is a tabulation showing equivalent leg size EXAMPLE
factors for the range of dihedral angles between 60" (US. customary units)
and 135') assuming no root opening. Root opening(@
i/ 16 in. (1.6 mm) or greater, but not exceeding 3/ 16 in.
(5 mm), shall be added directly to the leg size. The Given: Skewed T-joint, angle: 75'; root opening:
required leg size for fillet welds in skewed joints is caIcu- i/ 16 (0.063) in.
lated using the equivalent leg size factor for correct Required: Strength equivalent to 90' fillet weld of
dihedral angle, as shown in the example. size: 5 / 16 (0.313) in.
Copyright American Welding Society 255
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 72 m O784265 0500308 8 m
2561Appendix II
Procedure: (1) Factor for 75" from Table 11-1: 0.86 (5) Rounding up to a practical
(2) Equivalent leg size, w, of skewed joint, dimension: w 9.0 mm
without root opening:
w 0.86 X0.313 = 0,269 in. For fillet welds having equal measured legs (w,), the
(3) With root opening of: 0.063 in. distance from the root of the joint to the face of the
(4) Required leg size, w 0.322in. diagrammatic weld (t,) may be calculated as follows:
of skewed fillet weld: [(2) + (3)]
(5) Rounding up to a practical For root openings > i / 16 in. (1.6 mm) and I 3 / 16 in.
dimension: w 318 in. (5 mm), use
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
EXAMPLE
wn - Rn
(SI units) t, = - Y
Given: Skewed T-joint, angle: 75'; root opening: 2sin -2
1.6 mm
Required: Strength equivalent to 90" fillet For root openings < i/ 16 in. (1.6 mm), use
weld of size: 8.0 mm
Procedure: (1) Factor for 75" from Table 11-1: 0.86 R, Oand tk t,
(2) Equivalent leg size, w, of skewed joint,
without root opening: where the measured leg of such fillet weld (wn)is the
w = 0.86X 8.0 6.9 mm perpendicular distance from the surface of the joint to
(3) With root opening of: 1.6 mm the opposite toe, and (R) is the root opening, if any,
(4) Required leg size, w, of 8.5 mm between parts. See Figure 2.4. Acceptable root openings
skewed fillet weld: [(2) + (3)] are defmed in 3.3.1.
Table 11-1
Equivalent Fillet Weld Lea Size Factors for Skewed T-Joints
Dihedral angle, iy 60' 65O 70' 75" 80' 85' 90" 95"
Comparable fillet weld
size for same strength 0.71 0.76 0.81 0.86 0.91 0.96 1 .o0 1.O3
Dihedral angle, Y 100" 105" 1 loo 115' 120" 125' 130" 135"
Comparable f i e t weld
size for same strength 1.08 1.12 1.16 1.19 1.23 1.25 1.2% 1.31
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix III
Requirements for Impact Testing
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of ANSIIAWS D1.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel and includes mandatory
requirements for use in this standard)
1111. General II11.4 The Charpy V-notch (CVN) impact test has been
used extensively in mechanical testing of steel products,
III1.1 The impact test requirements and test procedures in research, and in procurement specifications for over
in this Appendix shall apply ONLY WHEN SPECIFIED three decades. Moreover, failure analysis has with few
in the contract drawings or specifications in accordance exceptionsshown service failuresto be attended by low
with 3.7.7(3)(d), 4.6.10,4.7.9,4.14.5,4.15.3,and 5.6.1(7) energy values [usualiy 15 ft-lb (20.3 J) or less] at the
of this Code. temperature of the service failure. Most notable are the
statisticalstudies of WWII Liberty ships and T2 tankers
1111.2 A Charpy impact test is a dynamic test in whicha by the National Bureau of Standards where significant
selected specimen, machined or surface ground and differences were found between plates in which fracture
notched, is struck and broken in a single blow in a started and plates in which fracture arrested,
specially designed testing machine and the energy
absorbed in breaking the specimen is measured. The IïI1.5 The Standard Method for CVN-impact testing is
energy values determined are QUALITATIVE COM- described in ASTM E23 and A370. The test method
PARISONS on a selected specimen and although fre- relates specifically to the behavior of metal when sub-
quentlyspecified as an acceptance criterion,they cannot jected to a single overload of stress, applied at a high rate
be used directly as energy figures that would serve for of loading and at a specified testing temperature. The
engineering calculations. behavior of ferritic steels when notched cannot be relia-
bly predicted from their properties as revealed by the
II11.3 When Charpy impact testing is required by con- tension test. Such materials may display normal ductility
tract drawings or specifications, the designer or engineer in the smooth tension test (eIongation and reduction of
must consider several aspects of Charpy testing as they area), but nevertheless break in brittle fashion when
relate to brittle fracture safeguards or to an overall frac- impact loaded in the notched condition. See the Appen-
ture control plan. The designer or engineer must select a dix of ASTM E23 or A370 for further discussion of the
test temperature and minimum average energy level for significance of notched-bar impact testing.
Charpy testing appropriate for the structure and antici-
pated minimum service temperature. Further, the
designer or engineer must consider the effects of increas-
ing material thickness and increasing material strength 1112. Test Locations
levels on relative Charpy values. The designer or engi- III2.1 The test location for individual Charpy test spec-
neer must consider the effects of welding position as it imens, unless otherwise specified on contract drawings
may relate to heat input on the HAZ Charpy test results or specifications, shall be as shown in Figure III-1.
and also the orientationof the test plates as these relate to
the longitudinalor transverse properties of the HAZ. See II12.2 The positioning of the notch for the weld metal
AWS Welding Handbook,Volume 1,8th Edition, Chap- location and HAZlocation shall be done by first machin-
ter 11,for a thorough discussion of Fracture Toughness, ing 10 X 10 mm square bars out of the test weld at the
References and a Supplemental Reading List. appropriate depth as shown in Figure III4 These bars
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society 257
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 1 - I I 9 2 078Y2b.5 0500310 b =
258/ Appendur III
1 r 1/16 MIN
SINGLE OR DOUBLE V-GROOVE
T 2 1/2 WELD, BUTT JOINT, CORNER
JOINT, (ALL TYPES)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I
Note: if weld face reinforcement consists
of two or more passes, select HAZ test
location from side of weld with the last
cap pass.
Fi
i
12.7
r 1/16 MIN
SINGLE OR DOUBLE BEVEL
GROOVE WELD, BUTT JOINT,
T21/2
T-JOINT,CORNER JOINT,
(ALL TYPES)
Figure III-1 -Location of Welding Procedure Charpy Specimens (see 1112.1)
should be made overlength to allow for exact positioning 10 X 10 mm specimen shall be used where the test mate-
of the notch. Next, the bars should be etched with a mild rial thickness is 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) or greater.
etchant, such as 5% nital, to reveal the location of the
weld fusion zone and heat-affected zones. Finally, the
centerline of the notch shall be located at the center of the 1114. Test Results
weld for weld metal samples or located in the HAZ so 1114.1 The result of an impact test at each designated
that the notch intersects as much of the HAZ as possible. location shali be the average (arithmetic mean) of the
results of the specimens tested as shown in Table III-1.
II14.2 In the case where the optional five specimens are
1113. Impact Tests tested at each location and the highest and lowest values
1113.1 Charpy V-notch impact test specimens shall be are discarded, the result shall be the average (arithmetic
machined from the same welded test assembly (Figures mean) of the remaining three specimens tested.
5.7 through 5.11) made to determine other weld joint II14.3 The results shall meet or exceed the values stated
properties. for the test temperature in the contract drawings or
specifications.
Ii13.2 The impact specimens shall be machined and
tested in accordance with ASTM E23, Standard Methodr
for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials, 1115. Retests
for Type A Charpy (simple beam) impact specimen, or
ASTM A370, Standard Test Method and Definitionsfor If more than one specimen’s energy value is below the
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. specified minimum average or if one value is below the
minimum single value permitted, a retest of three (or five
III3.3 The longitudinalcenterline of the specimens shall and discard the high and low) additional specimens shall
be transverse to the weld axis. The base of the notch shall be made, each of which shall have a value equal to or
be perpendicular (normal) to the surface. The standard exceeding the specified minimum average value.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix III/ 259
Table 111-1
Impact Test Requirements (see 1114.1)
Minimum Average Minimum Value
Number of Specimen Energy Vaíue Permitted for One
Samples/ Set Size per Set Sample per Set
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
for each Test Test
Process
Location Temp. mm ft-lbs J ft-lbs J
SMAW
SAW
3 Note 1 10 x 10 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1
(see Note 2)
ESW
EGW
~~
Notes:
1. Test temperature and energy values to be specified on contract drawings or specifications. Consideration should be given to special situations,
thicker materiais, higher strength materials, and roiiing direction. (See AWS WELDING HANDBOOK for guidance.)
2. The alternatenumber of specimenspermitted per test locationisfive(5).The highest and lowest values are then discardedto minimizesome of the
scatter normaüy associated with Charpy testing of welds and KAZ.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 3 - L 'i2 8784265 0500332 T ~~ ~~
=
Appendix IV
Joint Welding Procedure Requirements
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Síructural Welding Code-Steel, ani includes mandatory
requirements for use with this standard)
This part includes one table for use in Appendix E for preparing Form E-1, Welding Procedure Specification(WPS).
Table IV-1 covers the provisions of the code that maybe modified when thejoint weIdingprocedureisqualified by tests
(see 5.2).
Copyright American Welding Society
261
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-I 92 = 0784265 0509ilL3 L
262lAppendix IV
Table IV-1
Code Requirements That May Be Changed by Procedure Qualification Tests (see 5.2)
Code Provision Subject
1.2 Base Metal
1.3.4 Welding Processes
sect. 2, Part c
Sect. 10, Part D
Details of Welded Joints
3.11 Weld Cleaning
4.1 Filler Metal Requirements
II 4.2 Preheat and Interpass Temperature Requirements
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.5.1,4.5.4 Electrodes for SMAW
4.6 Procedures for SMAW
4.7.3 Maximum diameter of electrode for SAW
4.7.7 Cross section of SAW groove or fiUet weld
4.8.1 Electrodes and flux for SAW
4.9,4.10, Procedures for SAW with single electrode, parallel electrodes,
4.11 and multiple electrodes
4.12 Electrodes for GMAW and FCAW
4.14.1.2
4.14.1.4 Procedures for GMAW and FCAW with single electrode
4.14.1.5 (Note: GMAW and FCAW with multiple electrodes, GMAW-S, EGW, and ESW do not have
4.14.1.6 prequalified status.)
4.14.1.7
4.14.2
Base metal for statically loaded structures
8.2.4
Base metal for dynamicallyloaded structures
9.2.5
Base metal for tubular structures
10.2.4
Notes:
1. The code provisions listed above may be modified, changed, or disregarded when the joint welding procedure is established by tests (see 5.2 and
section 5, Part B), provided that in preparingthe welding procedure specification specXcvalues for each essentialvariable for the welding process
listed in 5.5 are addrhed, and any change of essential variables in 5.5.2 shaU be within prescribed limits.
2. No other code requirements (not listed in Table IV-1)may be changed when the procedure is established by tests.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix V
Weld Quality I tequirements for Tension Joints in
Dynar Rically Loaded Structures
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of A N S I / A W S Dl.1-92, Structural Weldìng Code-Steel, and includes mandatory
requirements for use with .thisstandard)
-- 1I16* I I @ 1132* IN 114 - c -
I EDGE OF MATERIALS
OR TOE OR ROOT OF
FLANGE-TO-WEB WELD
x
'
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
EDGEOF
MATERIAL
XI x2
,
' WELD
Notes:
4 - 114* 118" 4
I
C
1-118
A
- L
L
i:
-
A
1/16*
-
1. A minimum clearance allowed between edges of porosity or fusion-type discontinuities 1/16 in. or larger.
Larger of adjacent discontinuities governs.
-
2. XI largest permissible porosity or fusion-type discontinuity for 3/4 in. joint thickness (see Figure 9.7).
-
3. X2, X3, X4 porosity or fusion-type discontinuity 1/16 in. or larger, but less than maximum permissible
for 3/4 in. joint thickness.
-
4. X5, Xe porosity or fusion-type discontinuity less than 1/16 in.
Interpretation:
1. Porosity or fusion-type discontinuity X4 is not acceptable because it is within the minimum clearance
allowed between edges of such discontinuities (see 9.25.2.1 and Figure 9.7).
2. Remainder of weld is acceptable.
*Discontinuity size indicated is assumed to be its greatest dimension.
Copyright American Welding Society 263
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 M 0784265 05001L5 5
2641 Appendix V
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS
-c- 1.6* 11@í*IN6 --
/ /
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
EDGE OF MATERIALS
Y-
I
OR TOE OR ROOT OF
FLANGE-TO-WEB WELD k
' EDGEOF
MATERIAL
x5, \
........... a
x4
J
XI x2 '3 '6,
/ ......
..........
..........
~
i,
.?R
...... D WELD
I-
l
I
I
I
L
/
A
-. .---IL 1.6"
Notes:
I . A - minimum clearance allowed between edges of porosity or fusion-type discontinuities 1.6 mm or larger.
Larger of adjacent discontinuities governs.
2. XI - largest permissible porosity or fusion-type discontinuity for 19.0 mm joint thickness (see Figure 9.7).
3. X2, X3, X4 - porosity or fusion-type discontinuity 1.6 mm or larger, but less than maximum permissible
for 19.0 mm joint thickness.
4. X5, X6 - porosity or fusion-type discontinuity less than 1.6 mm.
Interpretation:
1. Porosity or fusion-type discontinuity X4 is not acceptable because it is within the minimum clearance
allowed between edges of such discontinuities (see 9.25.2.1 and Figure 9.7).
2. Remainder of weld is acceptable.
*Discontinuity size indicated is assumed to be its greatest dimension.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix VI
Flatness of Girder Webs -Statically Loaded Structures
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, and includes mandatory
requirements for use with this standard)
f /-
FLANGEPLATE --/ PANEL DIMENSION
Notes:
1. D = depth of web
2. d = least panel dimension
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
265
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
2661Appendix VI
Intermediate Stiffeners on Both Sides of Web, Interior Girders
Thickness Depth
of Web, in. of Web, in. Least Panel Dimension, in.
5 / 16 Less than 47 29 36 43 50
47 and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
318 Less than 56 29 36 43 50 58
56 and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
7/ 16 Less than 66 29 36 43 50 58 65
66 and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
1/2 Less than 75 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79
75 and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
9/16 Less than84 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79 86
84 and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
5/8 Less than 94 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79 86 93
94 and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
Maximum Permissible Variation, in.
~ ~
5/16 318 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 13/16 718 15/16 1 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/4
Thickness Depthof
of Web, mm Web, meters Least Panel Dimensions, meters
8.0 Less than 1.19 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27
1.19andover 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
9.5 Less than 1.42 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47
1.42and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 i.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
11.1 Lessthan 1.68 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1.68 andover 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 .47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
12.7 Less than 1.90 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65 .83 2.00
1.90 and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 .47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
14.3 Less than2.13 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65 .83 2.00 2.18
2.13 andover 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
15.9 Less than2.39 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65 1.83 2.00 2.18 2.36
2.39and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
Maximum Permissible Variation, millimeters
8 10 11 13 14 16 19 21 22 24 25 27 29 32
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
(continued)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D 3 - 3 92 m 078Y265 0500338 O m
Appendix VI/267
Intermediate Stiffeners on Both Sides of Web, Fascia Girders
Thickness Depth
of Web, in. of Web, in. Least Panel Dimension, in.
5/16 Less than47 33 41 49
47and over 26 33 39 46 53 59 66 71 79 85 92 98 105 112
3/8 Less than56 33 41 49 57
56 and over 26 33 39 46 53 59 66 71 79 85 92 98 105 112
7/16 Less than66 33 41 49 57 65 73
66andover 26 33 39 47 53 59 66 71 79 85 92 98 105 112
1/2 Lessthan75 33 41 49 57 65 73 81
75 and over 26 33 39 47 53 59 66 71 79 85 92 98 105 112
9/16 Less than84 33 41 49 57 65 73 81 89
84andover 26 33 39 47 53 59 66 71 79 85 92 98 105 112
5/8 Lessthan94 33 41 49 57 65 73 81 89 98
94andover 26 33 39 47 53 59 66 71 79 85 92 98 105 112
Maximum PermissibIe Variation. in.
5/16 3/8 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 1 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-5/16 1-3/8
Thickness Depth of
of Web, mm Web, meters Least Panel Dimension, meters
8.0 Less than 1.19 0.84 1.04 1.24
1.19and over 0.66 0.84 0.99 1.19 1.35 1.50 1.68 1.83 2.01 2.16 2.34 2.49 2.67 2.84
9.5 Less than 1.42 0.84 1.04 1.24 1.45
1.42and over 0.66 0.84 0.99 1.19 1.35 1.50 1.68 1.83 2.01 2.16 2.34 2.49 2.67 2.84
11.1 Less than 1.68 0.84 1.04 1.24 1.45 1.65 1.85
1.68 andover 0.66 0.84 0.99 1.19 1.35 1.50 1.68 1.83 2.01 2.16 2.34 2.49 2.67 2.84
12.7 Less than 1.90 0.84 1.04 1.24 1.45 1.65 1.85 2.06
1.90andover 0.66 0.84 0.99 1.19 1.35 1.50 1.68 1.83 2.01 2.16 2.34 2.49 2.67 2.84
14.3 Less than2.13 0.84 1.04 1.24 1.45 1.65 1.85 2.06 2.26
2.13 andover 0.66 0.84 0.99 1.19 1.35 1.50 1.68 1.83 2.01 2.16 2.34 2.49 2.67 2.84
15.9 Less than2.39 0.84 1.04 1.24 1.45 1.65 1.85 2.06 2.26 2.49
2.39 andover 0.66 0.84 0.99 1.19 1.35 1.50 1.68 1.83 2.01 2.16 2.34 2.49 2.67 2.84
Maximum Permissible Variation. millimeters
8 10 13 14 16 19 21 22 25 27 29 ~~
32 33 35
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
. No Intermediate Stiffeners, Interior or Fascia Girders
Thickness
of Web, in. Depth of Web, in.
Any 38 47 56 66 75 84 94 103 113 122 131 141 150 159 169 178 188
Maximum Permissible Variation. in.
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-3/16 1-1/4
Thickness
of Web, mm Depth of Web, meters
Any 0.97 1.19 1.42 1.68 1.90 2.13 2.39 2.62 2.87 3.10 3.33 3.58 3.81 4.04 4.29 4.52 4.77
Maximum Permissible Variation, millimeters
6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 27 29 30 32
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 H 07842b5 0500339 2 H
268/Appendix VI
Intermediate Stiffeners on One Side Only of Web, Interior Girders
Thickness Depth
of Web, in. of Web, in. Least Panel Dimension, in.
5/16 Less than 31 25 31
31 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
3/8 Less than 38 25 31 38
38 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
7/ 16 Less than 44 25 31 38 44
44 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
1/2 Less than 50 25 31 38 44 50 3
50 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
9/16 Less than 56 25 31 38 44 50 56
56 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
518 Less than 63 25 31 38 44 50 56 63
63 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
Maximum Permissible Variation, in
1/4 5/16 318 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1-1/16
Thickness Depth of
of Web. mm Web. meters Least Panel Dimension. meters
8.0 Less than0.79 0.63 0.79
0.79 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
9.5 Less than0.97 0.63 0.79 0.97
0.97andover 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
11.1 Lessthan1.12 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12
1.12and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 -37 1.50 .60 1.70 1.80
12.7 Less than 1.27 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27
1.27 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 -37 1.50 -60 1.70 1.80
14.3 Less than 1.42 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42
1.42andover 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 ,150 1.70 1.80
15.9 Less than 1.60 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42 1.60
1.60andover 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 .60 1.70 1.80
Maximum Permissible Variation, millimeters
6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 27
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix VI1
Flatness of Girder Webs -Dynamically Loaded Structures
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Sirucíural Welding Code-Steel, and includes mandatory
requirements for use with this standard)
r
Ø
FLANGE PLATE
/
/
f STIFFENER
1 I
D d
4 d L
1 t
\ \
Ø
WEB
WHICHEVER IS THE LEAST
FLANGE PLATE PANEL DIMENSION
Notes:
1. D = depth of web
2. d = least panel dimension
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
269
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 W 0784265 0500323 O W
2701Appendix VI1
Intermediate Stiffeners on One Side Only of Web, Dynamic or Static Loading
Thickness Depth
of Web, in. of Web, in. Least Panel Dimension, in.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5/16 Less than31 25 31
31 andover 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
3/8 Lessthan38 25 31 38
38andover 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
7/16 Less than44 25 31 38 44
44andover 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
1/2 Lessthan50 25 31 38 44 50
50andover 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
9/16 Less than56 25 31 38 44 50 56
56andover 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
5/8 Lessthan63 25 31 38 44 50 56 63
63andover 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
Maximum Permissible Variation, in.
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5 / 8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1-1/16
Thickness Depth of
of Web, mm Web, meters Least Panel Dimension, meters
8.0 Less than 0.78 0.63 0.79
0.79 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
9.5 Less than 0.97 0.63 0.79 0.97
0.97 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
11.1 Less than 1.12 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12
1.12 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
12.7 Less than 1.27 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27
1.27 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
14.3 Less than 1.42 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42
1.42 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
15.9 Less than 1.60 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42 1.60
1.60 and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
Maximum Permissible Variation, millimeters
6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 27
~~~ ~
Note: For actual dimensions not shown,use the next higher figure.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 9 2 m 0784265 0500322 2 m ~ ~ ~~
Appendix VII/ 27 1
Intermediate Stiffeners on Both Sides of Web, Dynamic Loading
Thickness Depth
of Web, in. of Web, in. Least Panel Dimension, in.
5/16 Less than47 29 36 43 50
47andover 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
318 Lessthan56 29 36 43 50 58
56andover 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
7/16 Less than66 29 36 43 50 58 65
66and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
112 Lessthan75 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79
75andover 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
9/16 Less than84 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79 86
84andover 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
518 Lessthan94 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79 86 93
94and over 23 29 35 40 46 52 58 63 69 75 81 86 92 98
Maximum PermissibleVariation, in.
5/16 3/8 7/16 112 9/16 518 314 13/16 718 15/16 1 1-1/16 1-118 1-1/4
Thickness Depth of
of Web, mm Web, meters Least Panel Dimension, meters
8.0 Less than 1.19 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27
1.19 and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
9.5 Less than 1.42 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47
1.42 and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
11.1 Less than 1.68 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65
1.68 and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
12.7 Less than 1.90 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65 1.83 2.00
1.90 and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
14.3 Less than 2.13 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65 1.83 2.00 2.18
2.13 and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
15.9 Less than 2.39 0.74 0.91 1.09 1.27 1.47 1.65 1.83 2.00 2.18 2.36
2.39 and over 0.58 0.74 0.89 1.02 1.17 1.32 1.47 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.18 2.34 2.49
Maximum PermissibleVariation, millimeters
8 10 11 13 14 16 19 21 22 24 25 27 29 32
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L m L 92 W 0784265 0500323 4
2721Appendix VI1
Intermediate Stiffeners on One Side Only of Web, Interior Girders
Thickness Depth
of Web, in. of Web, in. Least Panel Dimension, in.
51 16 Less than 31 25 31
31 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
318 Less than 38 25 31 38
38 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
7/ 16 Less than 44 25 31 38 44
44 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
112 Less than 50 25 31 38 44 50
50 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
9/16 Less than 56 25 31 38 44 50 56
56 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
518 Less than 63 25 31 38 44 50 56 63
63 and over 17 21 25 29 34 38 42 46 50 54 59 63 67 71
Maximum Permissible Variation, in
114 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1-1/16
Thickness Depth of
of Web, mm Web, meters Least Panel Dimension, meters
8.0 Less than0.79 0.63 0.79
0.79and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
9.5 Less than0.97 0.63 0.79 0.97
0.97andover 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
11.1 Less than 1.12 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12
1.12and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
12.7 Less than 1.27 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27
1.27and over 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
14.3 Less than 1.42 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42
1.42andover 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
15.9 Less than 1.60 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42 1.60
1.60andover 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.86 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.37 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80
Maximum Permissible Variation, millimeters
6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 27
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix VII/ 273
Intermediate Stiffeners on Both Sides of Web, Static Loading
Thickness Depth
of Web, in. of Web, in. Least Panel Dimension. in.
5/ 16 Less than 47 25 31 38 44 50
47 and over 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
3/8 Less than 56 25 31 38 44 50 56 63
56 and over 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
7/ 16 Less than 66 25 31 38 44 50 56 63 69
66 and over 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
1/2 Less than75 25 31 38 44 50 56 63 69 75 81
75 and over 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
9/16 Less than 84 25 31 38 44 50 56 63 75 81 88
84 and over 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
5/8 Less than 94 25 31 38 44 50 56 63 69 75 81 88 94
94 and over 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
Maximum Permissible Variation. in.
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1-1/16
Thickness Depth of
of Web, mm Web, meters Least Panel Dimension, meters
8.0 Less than 1.19 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27
1.19and over 0.51 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 1.40 1.52 1.65 1.78 1.90 2.03 2.16
9.5 Less than 1.42 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42 1.60
1.42 and over 0.51 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 1.40 1.52 1.65 1.78 1.90 2.03 2.16
11.1 Less than 1.68 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42 1.60 1.75
1.68 and over 0.51 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 1.40 1.52 1.65 1.78 1.90 2.03 2.16
12.7 Less than 1.90 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42 1.60 1.90 2.06
1.90 and over 0.51 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 1.40 1.52 1.65 1.78 1.90 2.03 2.16
14.3 Less than 2.13 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1-27 1.42 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.24
2.13 and over 0.51 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 1.40 1.52 1.65 1.78 1.90 2.03 2.16
15.9 Less than 2.39 0.63 0.79 0.97 1.12 1.27 1.42 1.60 1.75 1.90 2.06 2.24 2.39
2.39 and over 0.51 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 1.40 1.52 1.65 1.78 1.90 2.03 2.16
Maximum Permissible Variation. millimeters
6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 27
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
No Intermediate Stiffeners, Dynamic or Static Loading
Thickness
of Web, in. Depth of Web, in.
Any 38 47 56 66 75 84 94 103 113 122 131 141 150 159 169 178 188
Maximum Permissible Variation, in.
1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-3/16 1-1/4
Thickness
of Web, mm Depth of Web, meters
Any 0.97 1.19 1.42 1.68 1.90 2.13 2.39 2.62 2.87 3.10 3.33 3.58 3.81 4.04 4.29 4.52 4.77
Maximum Permissible Variation, millimeters
6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 27 29 30 32
Note: For actual dimensions not shown, use the next higher figure.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix VI11
Temperature-Moisture Content Charts
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of ANSI/AWS D1.l-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, and includes mandatory
requirements for use with this standard)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society 275
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I I 92 E 0784265 0500326 T
2761Appendix WI
TEMPERATURE - DEGREES C
16 21 27 32 38 43
550 250
528 240
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
230
484 220
21o
440 200
190
396 180
170
352 160
150
308 140
130
I- 264 120
5 110
8 220 1O0
90
176 80
70
132 60
50
88 40
30
44 20
10
O
32 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110
TEMPERATURE - DEGREES F
Notes:
I. Any standard psychrometricchart may be used in lieu of this chart.
2. See Figure Vlll-2 for an example of the application of this chart in
establishing electrode exposure conditions.
-
Figure Vin-1 Temperature-Moisture Content Chart to be Used in Conjunction with
Testing Program to Determine Extended Atmospheric Exposure Time of Low
Hydrogen Electrodes (see 4.5.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix VIU1277
-
TEMPERATURE DEGREES C
16 21 27 32 38 43
550 250
528 240
230
484 220
21 o
440 200
190
396 180
170
352 160
5
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
150 8
308 140 2œ
W
130 a
W
U
3
264 120 I-
92
O
110 I
U
220 1O0 O
cn
z
90 a
u
176 80
70
132 60
50
88 40
30
44 20
10
O
32 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110
TEMPERATURE - DEGREES F
EXAMPLE: AN ELECTRODE TESTED AT 90' F (32°C)AND 70% RELATIVE
HUMIDITY (RH) MAY BE USED UNDER THE CONDITIONS SHOWN BY THE SHADED
AREAS. USE UNDER OTHER CONDITIONS REQUIRES ADDITIONAL TESTING.
-
Figure VIII-2 Application of Temperature-Moisture Content Chart in Determining
Atmospheric Exposure Time of Low Hydrogen Electrodes (see 4.5.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix IX
Manufacturers’ Stud Base Qualification Requirements
(Mandatory Information)
(This Appendix is a part of ANSI/AWS D1.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, and includes mandatory
requirements for use with this standard)
1x1. Purpose stud base qualification test shall include decking repre-
sentative of that to be used in construction. Welding shall
The purpose of these requirements is to prescribe tests be done in the flat position (plate surface horizontal).
for the stud manufacturers’ certification of a stud base Testsfor threaded studs shail be on blanks (studs without
for welding under shop or field conditions. threads).
1 x 5 2 Studs shall be welded with power source, welding
1x2. Responsibility for Tests gun, and automatically controlled equipment as recom-
The stud manufacturer shall be responsible for the mended by the stud manufacturer. Welding voltage, cur-
performance of the qualification test. These tests may be rent, and time (see IXQ shall be measured and recorded
performed by a testing agency satisfactory to the Engi- for each specimen. Lift and plunge shall be at the opti-
neer. The agency performing the tests shall submit a mum setting as recommended by the manufacturer.
certified report to the manufacturer of the studs giving
procedures and results for all tests including the informa- 1x6. Number of Test Specimens
tion listed under IX10.
IX6.1 For studs 7/8 in. (22.2 mm) or less in diameter,
thirty test specimens shall be welded consecutively with
1x3. Extent of Qualification constant optimum time, but with current 10% above
Qualification of a stud base shall constitute qualifica- optimum. For studs over 7/ 8 in. (22.2 mm) diameter, ten
tion of stud bases with the same geometry, flux, and arc test specimens shall be welded consecutively with con-
shield, having the same diameter and diameters that are stant optimum time. Optimum current and time shall be
smaller by less than 1/8 in. (3 mm). A stud base qualified the midpoint of the range normally recommended by the
with an approved grade of ASTM A108 steel shall con- manufacturer for production welding.
stitute qualification for all other approved grades of IX6.2 For studs 7/ 8 in. (22.2 mm) or less in diameter,
A108 Steel (see 7.3.1), provided that ail other provisions thirty test specimens shall be welded consecutively with
stated herein are complied with. constant optimum time, but with current 10% below
optimum. For studs over 7/8 in. diameter, ten test spec-
1x4. Duration of Qualification imens shall be welded consecutively with constant opti-
mum time, but with current 5% below optimum.
A size of stud base with arc shield, once qualified, is
considered qualified until the stud manufacturer makes
any change in the stud base geometry, material, flux, or 1x7. Tests
arc shield which affects the welding characteristics. IX7.1 Tension Tests. Ten of the specimens welded in
accordance with IX6.1 and ten in accordance with IX6.2
1x5. Preparation of Specimens shall be subjected to a tension test in a fixture similar to
that shown in Figure 7.2, except that studs without heads
IX5.1 Test specimens shaii be prepared by welding may be gripped on the unwelded end in the jaws of the
-
representative studs to suitable specimen plates of tension testing machine. A stud base shall be considered
ASTM A36 steel or any of the other materials listed in as qualified if all test specimens have a tensile strength
10.2. When studs are to be welded through decking, the equal to or above the minimum specified in 7.3.1.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society 279
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 32 m 0784265 0500323 5 m
2801Appendix IX
IX7.2 Bend Tests (Studs 718 in. [22.2 mm] or less in 1x8. Retests
diameter). Twenty of the specimens welded in accord-
ance with IX6.1 and twenty in accordance with IX6.2 If failure occurs in a weld or the heat-affected zone in
shall be bend tested by being bent alternately 30° from any of the bend test groups of IX7.2 or at less than
their original axes in opposite directions until failure specified minimum tensile strength of the stud in any of
occurs. Studs shall be bent in a bend testing device 'as the tension groupsin IX7.1,a new test group (specified in
shown in Figure IX-1, except that studs less than 1/2h. IX6.1 or IX6.2, as applicable) shall be prepared and
(12.7 mm) diameter, optionally, may be bent using a tested. If such failures are repeated, the stud base shall
device as shown in Figure IX-2. A stud base shall be fail to qualify.
considered as quaWied if, on ail test specimens, fracture
occurs in the plate material or shank of the stud and not
in the weld or heat-affected zone. All test specimens for 1x9. Acceptance
studs over 7/8 in. (22.2 mm) shall only be subjected to For a manufacturer's stud base and arc shield com-
tensile tests. bination to be qualified, each stud of each group of 30
DOUBLE-ACTING
studs shall, by test or retest, meet the requirementspre-
HYDRAULIC
scribed in IX7. Qualification of a given diameter of stud
~ 3 0 ' ~ 3 0 < CYLINDER base shall be considered qualification for stud bases of
the same nominal diameter (see M3,stud base geometry,
material, flux, and arc shield).
1x10. Manufacturer's Qualification
Test Data
The test data shall include the following:
(1) Drawings showing shapes and dimensions with
MAXIMUM DEFLECTED STUD SHALL BE tolerances of stud, arc shields, and flux
MEASURED AT CENTER LINE (2) A complete description of materials used in the
OF PLUNGER
studs, .including the quantity and type of flux, and a
Notes:
description of the arc shields
1. Fixture holds specimen and stud is bent 30' (3) Certified results of laboratory tests required.
alternately in opposite directions.
2. Load can be applied with hydraulic cylinder STUD DIAM
*
(shown) or fixture adapted for use with +i164 in.
tension test machine.
................. .........
TYPICAL FRACTURES IN SHANK OF STUD
r-L FRACTURE LINE
, I - i=, i l 4 in.
2 in. MAX
Note: Fracture in weld Note: Fracture through
near stud fillet remains flash torn from plate
on plate. SPECIMEN PLATE
TYPICAL WELD FAILURES -
Figure IX-2 Suggested Type of Device for
Qualification Testing of Small Studs
Figure IX-1 -Bend Testing Device (see IX7.2) (see IX7.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix X
The Qualification and Calibration of the Ultrasonic Unit
with Other Approved Reference Blocks
(See Figure X-1)
(Mandatory Information)
uhis Appendix is a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, and includes mandatory
requirements for use with this standard)
Xl. Longitudinal Mode X2.1.3 The point on the Search Unit that is in line
with the line on the calibration block is indicative of the
X1.l Distance Calibration point of sound entry.
xl*l*l The transducer shall be set in position On
Note: ïñissoundentrypoint shallbe usedfor allfurther
the D C block, or M on the DSC block. distance and angk checks.
X1.1.2 The instrument shall be adjusted to produce x2.2 Sound Path h g l e Check
indicationsat 1in. (25 mmì. 2 in. (50 mmì. 3 in. (75 mmì.
I - ,.
4 in. (100 mm) etc.; on theCRT.'
r -
X2.2.1 The transducer shall be set in position:
K on the DSC block for 45" thru 7Ôo
Note: This procedure establishes a 10 in. (255 mm) N on the SC block for 70°
screen calibration and may be modìjìed to establish O on the SC block for 45"
other dtktances aspermitted by 6.18.4.1. P on the SC block for 60°
X1.2 Amplitude X2.2.2 The transducer shali be moved back and forth
With the transducer in position described in ~ 1 . 1the
, over the h e indicative Of the transducer angle Until the
shall be adjusted until the maximized indication Sima1from the radius is maximized.
from the fu'st back reflection attains 50 to 75% screen X2.2.3 The sound entry point on the transducer shall
height. be compared with the angle mark on the calibration
block (tolerance 2O).
X2.3 Distance Caiibration
X2. Shear Wave Mode (Transverse)
X2.1 Sound Entry (index) Point Check X2.3.1 The transducer shall be in position (Figure
X-i) L on the DSC block. The instrument shall be
X2.1.1 The Search Unit shall be set in position J or L adjÚsted to attain indications at 3 in. (75 mm) and 7 in.
on the DSC block; or I on the DC block. (180 mm) on the CRT.
X2.1.2 The Search Unit shall be moved until the X2.3.2 The transducer shall be set in position J on the
signai from the radius is maximized. DSC block(any angle). The instrumentshalibe adjusted
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
281
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 m 0784265 0500331 3 m
2821Appendix X
3.000 I
I i -I
0.375
DSC BLOCK
/
li0 DIAM
/
0.250 RADIUS
3.000RADIUS
TYPE DSC - DISTANCEAND SENSITIVITY CALIBRATIONBLOCK
0.250 0.250
1.000 RADIUS
TYPE DC - DISTANCE REFERENCE BLOCK DC BLOCK
1.822
SC BLOCK
ALL DIMENSIONSIN INCHES
-
TYPE SC SENSITIVITY REFERENCE BLOCK
Notes:
1. The dimensional tolerance between all surfaces involved in referencing or calibrating shall be within
1.005 inch (.13 mm) of detailed dimension.
2. The surface finish of all surfaces to which sound is applied or reflectedfrom shall have a
maximum of 125 pin. r.m.s.
3. All material shall be ASTM A36 or acoustically equivalent.
4. All holes shall have a smooth internal finish and 'shall be drilled 90' to the material surface.
5. Degree lines and identification markings shall be indented into the material surface so that permanent
orientation can be maintained.
Copyright American Welding Society
Figure X-1 -Other Approved Blocks and Typical Transducer Position (see X2.3.1)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 W 0784265 0500332 5
Appendix XI283
to attain indications at 1in. (25 mm), 5 in. (130 mm), 9 in. X3. Horizontal Linearity Procedure
(230 mm) on the CRT.
X2.3.3 The transducer shall be set in position1on the Note: Since this qualjkation procedure is performed
D C block (any angle). The instrument shall be adjusted with a straight beam search unit which produces longi-
to attain indication at 1in. (25 mm), 2 in. (50 mm), 3 in. tudinal waves with a sound velocity of almost double
(75 mm), 4 in. (100 mm), etc., on the CRT. that of shear waves, it is necessary to double the shear
wave distance ranges to be used in applying this
Note: This procedure establishes a 10 in. (255 mm) procedure.
screen calibration and may be modified to establish
other distances as permitted by 6.18.5.1. X3.1 A straight beam search unit, meeting the require-
ments of 6.15.6, shall be coupled in position:
X2.4 Amplitude or Sensitivity Calibration G on the IIW block (Figure 6.1 1)
X2.4.1 The transducershallbe set in position L on the H on the DC block (Figure X-1)
DSC block (any angle). The maximized signal shall be M on the DSC block (Figure X-i)
adjusted from the 1/32 in. (1 mm) slot to attain a hori- T or U on the DS block (Figure 6.11)
zontal reference line height indication.
X3.2 A minimum of five back reflections in the qualifi-
X2.4.2 The transducer shall be set on the SC block in cation range being certified shall be attained.
position:
N for 70’ angle X3.3 The first and f i t h back reflections shallbe adjusted
O for 45O angle
to their proper locationswith use of the distance calibra-
P for 60° angle tion and zero delay adjustments.
The maximized signal from the 1116in. (1.6 mm) hole
shall be adjusted to attain a horizontal reference line
height indication. X3.4 Each indicationshall be adjusted to reference level
with the gain or attenuation control for horizontal loca-
X2.4.3 The decibel reading obtained in X2.4.1 or tion examination.
X2.4.2 shall be used as the “reference level” “b” on the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Test Report sheet (Appendix D, Form D-1 1) in accord- X3.5 Each intermediate trace deflection location shall
ance with 6.16.1. be correct within zk 2% of the screen width.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix XI
Guideline on Alternative Methods
for Determining Preheat
(Mandatory Information)
(ThisAppendix is a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, and includes mandatory
requirements for use with this standard)
XIl. Introduction X13.2 This method is based on the assumption that
cracking will not occur ifthe hardness of the HAZ is kept
The purpose of this guide is to provide some optional below some critical value. This is achieved by controlling
alternativemethods for determining welding conditions the cooling rate below a critical value dependent on the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(principally preheat) to avoid cold cracking. The methods hardenability* of the steel. Equations and graphs are
are based primarily on research on small scale tests available in the technical literature that relate the weld
carried out over many years in several laboratories cooling rate to the thickness of the steel members, type of
world-wide. No method is available for predicting opti- joint, welding conditions and variables.
mum conditions in all cases, but the guide does consider
several important factors such as hydrogen level and X13.3 The selection of the critical hardness will depend
steel composition not explicitly included in the require- on a number of factors such as steel type, hydrogen level,
ments of Table 4.3. The guide may therefore be of value restraint and service conditions. Laboratory tests with
in indicating whether the requirements of Table 4.3 are fdlet welds show that HAZ cracking does not occur if the
overly conservative or in some cases not sufficiently HAZ Vickers Hardness No. (Vh) is less than 350 Vh,
demanding. even with high hydrogen electrodes. With low-hydrogen
The user is referred to the Commentary for more electrodes, hardnesses of 400 Vh could be tolerated
detailed presentation of the background scientific and without cracking. Such hardness, however, may not be
research information leading to the two methods tolerable in service where there is an increased risk of
proposed. stress corrosion cracking, brittle fracture initiation, or
In using this guide as an alternative to Table 4.3, other risks for the safety or serviceability of the structure.
careful considerationmust be given to the assumptions The critical cooling rate for a given hardness can be
made, the values selected, and past experience. approximately related to the carbon equivalent of the
steel (see Figure XI-2). Since the relationship is only
approximate, the curve shown in Figure XI-2may be
conservative for plain carbon and plain carbon-manga-
X12. Methods nese steels and thus allow the use of the high hardness
curve with less risk. Some low alloy steels, particularly
Two methods are used as the basis for estimating those containing columbium (niobium), may be more
welding conditions to avoid cold cracking: hardenablethan Figure XI-2 indicates, and the use of the
(1) Heat-affected zone (HAZ) hardness control lower hardness curve is recommended.
(2) Hydrogen control
*Hardenability of steel in welding relates to its propensity
towards formation of a hard HAZ and can be characterized
X13. HAZ Hardness Control by the cooling rate necessary to produce a given level of hard-
ness. Steels with high hardenability can, therefore, produce
XI3.1 The provisions included in this guide for use of hard HAZ at slower cooling rates than a steel with lower
this method are restricted to fiiet welds. hardenability.
Copyright American Welding Society
285
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500334 9 m
2861Appendix XI
X13.4 Although the method can be used to determine X15. Selection of Method
a preheat level, its main value is in determining the X15.1 The following procedure is suggested as a guide
minimum heat input (and hence minimum weld size) for selection of either the Hardness Control or Hydrogen
that prevents excessive hardening. It is particularly use- Control Method.
ful for determining the minimum size of single pass fillet Determine carbon and carbon equivalent:
welds that can be deposited without preheat.
(Mn+Si) + (CrtMotV) (Ni+Cu)
X13.5 The hardness approach does not consider the CE=C+ +
5 15
possibility of weld metal cracking. However, from expe-
rience it is found that the heat input determined by this to locate the zone position of the steel in Figure XI-1.
method is usually adequate to prevent weld metal crack- (See X16.1.1 for the different ways to obtain chemical
ing, in most cases, in fillet welds if the electrodeis not a analysis.)
high strength filler metal and is generally of alow hydro- X15.2 The performance characteristics of each zone and
gen type (e.g., low hydrogen (SMAW) electrode, gas the suggested action are as follows:
metal arc, flux cored arc, submerged arc).
(1) Zone I. Cracking is unlikely, but may occur with
X13.6 Because the method depends solely on controlling high hydrogen or high restraint. Use hydrogen control
the HAZ hardness, the hydrogen level and restraint are method to determine preheat for steels in this zone.
not explicitly considered. (2) Zone II. The hardness control method and
selected hardness shall be used to determine minimum
X13.7 This method is not applicable to Q & T steels. energy input for single pass fillet welds without preheat.
(SeeXI5.2(3) for limitations.) If the energy input is not practical, use hydrogen method
to determine preheat.
For groove welds,the hydrogen control method shall
be used to determine preheat.
For steels with high carbon, a minimum energy to
X14. Hydrogen Control control hardness and preheat to control hydrogen may
be required for both types of welds; i.e., fillet and groove
X14.1 The hydrogen control method is based on the welds.
assumption that cracking will not occur if the average (3) Zone III. The hydrogen control method shall be
quantity of hydrogen remaining in the joint after it has used. Where heat input is restricted to preserve the HAZ
cooled down to about 120’F (50°C) does not exceed a properties (e.g., some quenched and tempered steels), the
critical value dependent on the composition of the steel hydrogen control method should be used to determine
and the restraint. The preheat necessary to allow enough preheat.
hydrogen to diffuse out of the joint can be estimated
using this method.
X16. Detailed Guide
X14.2 This method is based mainly on results of re-
strained partial joint penetration groove weld tests; the X16.1 Hardness Method
weld metal used in the tests matched the parent metal. X16.1.1 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated as
There has not been extensive testing of this method on follows:
fillet welds; however, by allowing for restraint, the
method has been suitably adapted for those welds. (Mn + Si) + (Cr + Mo + V) + (Ni + Cu)
CE=C+
5 15
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
X14.3 A determination of the restraint level and the
original hydrogen level in the weld pool is required for The chemical analysis may be obtained from:
the hydrogen method. (1) Mill test certificates
In this guide, restraint is classified as high, medium, (2) Typical production chemistry (from the mill)
and low, and the category must be established from (3) Specification chemistry (using maximum values)
experience. (4) User tests (chemical analysis)
X16.1.2 The critical cooling rate shall be detemined
X14.4 The hydrogen control method is based on a single for a selected maximum HAZ hardness of either 400 Vh
low heat input weld bead representing a root pass and or 350 Vh from Figure XI-2.
assumes that the HAZ hardens. The method is, there-
fore, particularlyuseful for high strength,low alloy steels X16.1.3 Using applicable thicknesses for “flange”and
having quite high hardenability where hardness control “web” plates, the appropriate diagram shall be selected
is not always feasible. Consequently, because it assumes from Figure XI-3 and the minimum energy input for
that the HAZ fully hardens, the predicted preheat may single pass fillet welds shall be detemined. This energy
be too conservative for carbon steels. input applies to submerged arc welds.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 92 0784265 0500335 O
Appendix XI/287
t I
!
W
i I
o
a
W
a
+-
z
W
!i
8z 0.20 I I
8 I ZONE 111
œ
o 0.10 --- *I œ -
I ZONE I
0.00
II 1 I I I I ---
0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
CARBON EQUIVALENT (CE)
Note 1 : CE = C+(Mn+Si)/6+(Cr+Mo+V)/5+(Ni+Cu)/15
Note 2:See X15.2(1), (2), or (3),for applicable zone
characteristics.
Figure XI-1 - Zone Classificationof Steels (see X15.1)
0.80
0.70
8
5 0.60
Y
s2 0.50
z
3o 0.40
0.30
0.20
200 100 80 6 0 5 0 4 0 30 20 109876 5 4 3 2 1
R,,, ('C/s)FOR HAZ HARDNESS OF 350 VH AND 400VH
Note: CE = C+(Mn+Si)/6+(Cr+Mo+V)/5+(Ni+Cu)/l5
Figure XI-2 -Critical Cooling Rate for 350 VH and 400 VH (see X13.3)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 M 0784265 0500336 2 W
2881Appendix XI
300
200
DESIGNATED AS
100 FLANGE
3
I--
3 50
n
z 40
30
$!
20
W
10
I 2 3 4 5 678910 20 30 4050 100 200
COOLING RATE AT 540' C ("C/s)
Note: Energy input determined from chart does not imply
suitability for practical applications. For certain combination
of thicknesses melting may occur through the thickness.
(a) SINGLE PASS SAW FILLET WELDS WITH WEB AND
FLANGE OF SAME THICKNESS
300
200
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
DESIGNATED AS
1O0 FLANGE
3
L
I-.-
3 50
[L
z 40
> 30
$!
W
w 20
10
1 2 3 4 5 678910 20 30 4050 100 200
COOLING RATE AT 540' C ('C/S)
(b) SINGLE PASS SAW FILLET WELDS WITH 1/4 in.
FLANGES AND VARYING WEB THICKNESSES
Figure XI-3 - Graphs to Determine Cooling Rates for Sing1 Pass Submerged
Arc Fillet Welds (see X16.1.3)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
~
4
Appendix XII289
300
200
DESIGNATED AS
1O0 FLANGE
50
B
z 40
30
20
10
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Note: Energy input determined from chart does not imply
suitability for practical applications. For certain combination
of thicknesses melting may occur through the thickness.
(c) SINGLE PASS SAW FILLET WELDS WITH 1/2 in.
FLANGES AND VARYING THICKNESSES
300
200
DESIGNATED AS
1O0 FLANGE
50
40
30
20
10
1 2 3 4 5 678970 20 30 4050 I00 200
COOLING RATE AT54O"C ( W s )
Note: Energy input determined from chart does not imply
suitability for practical applications. For certain combination
of thicknesses melting may occur through the thickness.
(d) SINGLE PASS SAW FILLET WELDS WITH 1 IN.
FLANGES AND VARYING WEB THICKNESS
Figure XI-3 (continued) -Graphs to Determine Cooling Rates for Single Pass
Submerged Arc Fiilet Welds (see X16.1.3)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1i.L 92 m 07842bS OSO0338 b m ,
290/Appendk XI
300
200
DESIGNATED AS
1O0 FLANGE
!i50
LL
z 40
30
20
10
COOLING RATE AT 540nC ('C/s)
(e) SINGLE PASS SAW FILLET WELDS WITH 2 in.
FLANGES AND VARYING WEB THICKNESSES
DESIGNATED AS
FLANGE
1 2 3 4 5 678910 20 30 4050 100 200
COOLING RATE AT 540' C (Ws)
Note: Energy input determined from chart does not imply
suitability for practical applications. For certain combination
of thicknesses melting may occur through the thickness.
(f) SINGLE PASS SAW FILLET WELDS WITH 4 in.
FLANGES AND VARYING WEB THICKNESSES
-
Figure XI-3 (continued) Graphs to Determine Cooling Rates for Single Pass
Submerged Arc Fiiiet Welds (see X16.1.3)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 9 2 W 0784265 0500339 B W
Appendix Xi/ 29 1
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
X16.1.4 For other processes, minimum energy input X16.2.4 Minimum Preheat Levels and Interpass.
for single pass fillet welds can be estimated by applying Table XI-2 gives the minimum preheat and interpass
the following multiplication factors to the energy esti- temperatures that shall be used. Table XI-2gives three
mated for the submerged arc welding process in X16.1.3: levels of restraint. The restraint level to be used shall be
determined in conformance with XI6.2.5.
Welding Process Multiplication Factor X16.2.5 Restraint. The classification of types of welds
SAW 1 at various restraint levels should be determined on the
SMAW 1.50 basis of experience, engineering judgement, research, or
GMAW, FCAW 1.25 calculation.
Three levels of restraint have been provided:
(1) Low Restraint. This level describes commonfillet
X16.1.5 Figure X I 4 may be used to determine fillet and groove weldedjoints in which areasonablefreedom
sizes as a function of energy input. of movement of members exists.
.
X16.2 Hydrogen Control Method (2) Medium Restraint. This level describes fillet and
groove welded joints in which, because of members being
Xï6.2.1 The value of the composition parameter, already attached to structural work, a reduced freedom
P,,, shall be calculated as follows: of movement exists.
Si Mn Cu + N i + Cr Mo V (3) High Restraint. This level describes welds in
p,,=c+-+-
+
- - -+ - +-+5B which there is almost no freedom of movement for
30 20 20 60 20 15 10 membersjoined (such as repair welds, especially in thick
The chemical analysis shali be determined as in X16.1.1. material).
X16.2.2 The hydrogen level shall be determined and
shall be defined as follows: Table XI-1
(1) H1 Extra Low Hydrogen. These consumables Susceptibility Index Grouping
give a diffusible hydrogen content of less than 5 mi/ 1OOg
deposited metal when measured using I S 0 3690-1976 as Function of Hydrogen Level “H”
(E) or, a moisture content of electrode covering of and Composition Parameter P, (see-X16.2.3)
0.2% maximumin accordancewith AWS A5.1 or A5.5. Susceutibilitv Index2 GrouuinE - -
This may be established by testing each type, brand, or
wire/flux combination used after removal from the Hydrogen Carbon Equivalent = PA
Level, H
package or container and exposure for the intended <0.18 <0.23 <0.28 <0.33 <0.38
duration, with due consideration of actual storagecondi-
tions prior to immediate use. The following may be H1 A B C D E
assumed to meet this requirement: H2 B C D E F
(a) Low hydrogen electrodes taken from hermeti-
caliy sealed containers, dried at 70O0F-8OO’F (370’ - H3 C D E F G
430OC) for one hour and used within two hours after Notes:
removal. 1. p, = C
Si Mn Cu
+- Ni Cr
.t -+ - + - + -+
Mo
- V
+ - + 5B
(b) GMAW with clean solid wires 30 20 20 60 20 15 10
(2) H2 Low Hydrogen. These consumables give a 2. Susceptibilityindex - 12 Pcm+ loglo H.
diffusible hydrogen content of less than 10 mi[loOg 3. SusceptibilityIndex Groupings, A through G, encompass the com-
deposited metal when measured using IS0 3690-1976, bined effect of the composition parameter,P,, and hydrogenlevel,H,
or a moisture content of electrode covering of 0.4% in accordance with the formula shown in Note 2.
maximum in accordance with AWS A5.1. This may be The exact numerical quantities are obtained from the Note 2formula
established by a test on each type, brand of consumable, using the stated values of P,, and the following values of H, given in
or wirelflux combination used. The following may be ml[lûûg of weld metal (see X16.2.2, a, b, c):
assumed to meet this requirement: H1- 5; H2- 10; H3 -30.
(a) Low hydrogen electrodes taken from hermeti- For greater convenience, Susceptibility Index Groupings have been
cally sealed containers conditioned in accordance with expressed in the table by means of letters, A through G, to cover the
4.5.2 of the Code and used within four hours after following narrow ranges:
removal Susceptibiuíy Index Groupings
(b) Submerged arc welding with dry flux A = 3.0; B = 3.1-3.5; C = 3.6-4.0;
(3) H3 Hydrogen Not Controlled. All other consum- Ds4.1-4.5; Ez4.6-5.0; Fz5.1-5.5;
ables not meeting the requirements of H1 or H2. G = 5.6-7.0
These groupings are used in Table XI-2 in conjunctionwith restraint
X16.2.3 The susceptibilityindex groupingfromTable and thickness to determine the minimum preheat and interpass
XI-1 shall be determined. temperature.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L m L 92 07842b5 0500340 4
2921Appendix XI
112 13
7116 11
.-E
I
318 10
F
zY
a
Y 5/16 8
114 6
3116 5
118 3
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
AVERAGE ENERGY INPUT - (kJ1in.)
(a) SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING (SMAW)
314
DESIGN CURVE FOR DCEN
.i 518 - 16
I
I-
f DESIGN CURVE FOR DCEP
112 - 13
a
Y
DCEN
318 V DCEP - 10
5116 -8
1I4 -6
311 6
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360
AVERAGE ENERGY INPUT - (kJIin.)
(b) SUBMERGED ARC WELDING (SAW)
Figure XI-4 -Relation Between Fillet Weld Size and Energy Input (see X16.1.5)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 07842h5
-~
0500343 h -. ~~
Appendix x1/293
Table XI-2
Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperatures for Three Levels of Restraint (see X16.2.4)
<3/8 <65 <65 <65 100 230 300 320
318-314 <65 65 150 220 280 320 320
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
314-1-112 65 185 240 280 300 320 320
High
1-112-3 240 265 300 300 320 320 320
>3 240 265 300 300 320 320 320
*Thickness is that of the thicker part welded (continued)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 92 H O784265 0500342 8 H
294IAppendix XI
Table XI-2 (continued)
19-38.1 18 85 116 138 149 160 160
High
38.1-76.2 116 129 149 149 160 160 160
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
>76.2 116 129 149 149 160 160 160
*Thickness is that of the thicker part welded
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 W 07842b5 0500343 T W ~ ~~
Appendix A
Short Circuiting Transfer
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes only.)
Table A-I
Typical Current Ranges for
Short Circuiting Transfer Gas Metal Arc Welding of Steel
Welding Current, amperes*
Electrode Diameter Fiat and Horizontal Positions Vertical and Overhead Positions
~~
in. mm min max min max
0.030 0.8 50 150 50 125
0.035 0.9 75 175 75 150
0.045 1.2 100 225 100 175
*Electrode positive
Short circuiting transfer is a type of metal transfer in Al. As the wire touches the weld metal, the current
gas metal arc welding in which melted material from a increases. It would continue to increase if an arc did not
consumable electrode is deposited during repeated short form, as shown at E in Figure Al. The rate of current
circuits. This information is from Volume 2 of the increase must be high enough to maintain a molten
Seventh Edition of the Welding Handbook, page 115 electrodetip until filler metal is transferred. Yet, it should
and page 117, Table 4.1. not occur so fast that it causes spatter by disintegration
Short circuiting arc welding uses the lowest range of of the transferring drop.of filler metal. The rate of cur-
welding currents and electrodediameters associated with rent increase is controlled by adjustment of the induc-
GMAW. Typical current ranges for steel electrodes are tance in the power source. The value of inductance
shown in Table Al. This type of transfer produces a required depends on both the electrical resistance of the
small, fast freezing weld pool that is generally suited for welding circuit and the temperature range of electrode
the joining of thin sections, for out-of-position welding, melting. The open circuit voltage of the power source
and for the filling of large root openings. When weld heat must below enough so that an arccannot continue under
hput is extremely low, plate distortion is smail.Metal is the existing welding conditions. A portion of the energy
transferred from the electrode to the work only during a for arc maintenance is provided by the inductive storage
period when the electrode is in contact with the weld of energy during the period of short circuiting,
pool. There is no metal transfer across the arc gap. As metal transfer only occurs during short circuiting,
The electrode contacts the molten weld pool at a shieldinggas has very little effect on this type of transfer.
steady rate in a range of 20 to over 200times each second. Spatter can occur. It is usually caused by either gas
The sequence of events in the transfer of metal and the evolution or electromagneticforces on the molten tip of
corresponding current and voltage is shown in Figure the electrode.
Copyright American Welding Society
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
295
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 92 m 0784265 0500344 L m
2961Appendix A
ZERO
A B C D E F G H I
-
Figure A-1 Oscillograms and Sketches of Short
Circuiting Arc Metal Transfer
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix B
Terms and Defmitions
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix iS not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes only.)
The terms and definitionsin this glossary are divided into three categories: (1) general welding terms compiled by the
AWS Committee on Definitions and Symbols; (2) terms, defined by the AWS Structural Welding Committee, which
apply only to ultrasonic testing, designated by (UT) following the term; and (3) other terms, preceded by asterisks, which
are defined as they relate to this Code.
A B
*ali-weld-metaltest specimen. A test specimen with the backgouging. The removal of weld metal and base
reduced section composed wholly of weld metal. metal fromthe other side of apartially weldedjoint to
facilitatecomplete fusion and completejoint penetra-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
amplitude length rejection level (UT). The maximum tion upon subsequent welding from that side.
length of discontinuity permitted by various indica-
tion ratings associated with weld size, as indicated in backing. A material or device placed against the back
Tables 8.2 and 9.3. side of the joint, or at both sides of a weld in electro-
slag and electrogas welding, to support and retain
angle of bevel. See preferred term bevel angle. molten weld metal. The material may be partially
arc gouging. An arc cutting process variation used to fused or remain unfused during welding and may be
form a bevel or groove. either metal or nonmetal.
as-welded. The condition of weld metal, welded joints, backing pass. A weld pass made for a backing weld.
and weldments after welding, but prior to any subse- backing ring. Backing in the form of a ring, generally
quent thermal, mechanical, or chemical treatments. used in the welding of pipe.
attenuation (UT). The loss in acoustic energy which backing weld. Backing in the form of a weld.
occurs between any two points of travel. This loss
may be due to absorption, reflection, etc. (in this *backup weld (tubular structures). The initial closing
Code, using the shear wave pulseecho method of pass in a complete joint penetration groove weld,
testing, the attenuation factor is 2 dB per inch of made from one side only, which serves as a backing
sound path distance after the first inch,) for subsequent welding, but is not considered as a part
of the theoretical weld (Figures 10.12 through 10.14,
automatic welding. Welding with equipment that per- details C and D).
forms the welding operation without adjustment of
the controls by a welding operator. The equipment back weld. A weld made at the back of a single groove
may or may not load and unload the workpieces. See weld.
also machine welding.
base metal. The metal to be welded, brazed, soldered, or
axis of a weld. See weld axis. cut.
Copyright American Welding Society
297
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L m L 92 m 0784265 0500346 5 m
298/Appendix A
bevel angle. The angle formed between the prepared corner joint. A joint between two members located
edge of a member and a plane perpendicular to the approximately at right angles to each other.
surface of the member.
*cover pass. See preferred term cap pass.
boxing. The continuation of a fillet weld around a COZ welding. A nonstandard term for gas metal arc
comer of a member as an extension of the principal welding.
weld.
crater. A depression at the termination of a weld bead.
*brace intersection angle, 8 (tubular structures). The
acute angle formed between brace centerlines.
butt joint. A joint between two members aligned
D
approximately in the same plane, decibel (dB)(UT). The logarithmic expression of aratio
of two amplitudes or intensities of acoustic energy.
butt weld. A nonstandard term for a weld in a butt joint.
See butt joint. decibel rating (UT). Seepreferred term indicationrating.
defect. A discontinuity or discontinuities that by nature
C or accumulated effect (for example total crack length)
render a part or product unable to meet minimum
*cap pass. One or more weld passes that form the weld applicable acceptance standards or specifications.
face (exposed surface of completed weld). Adjacent This term designates rejectability.
cap passes may partially cover, but not completely
cover, a cap pass. defect level (UT). See preferred term indication level.
*caulking. Plastic deformation of weld and base metal defect rating (UT). See preferred term indicationrating.
surfaces by mechanical means to seal or obscure defective weld. A weld containing one or more defects.
discontinuities.
depth of fusion. The distance that fusion extends into
complete fusion. Fusion which has occurred over the the base metal or previous pass from the surface
entire base material surfaces intendedfor welding and melted during welding.
between all adjoining weld beads.
*dihedral angle. See local dihedral angle.
completejoint penetration. A penetration by weld metal discontinuity. An interruptionof the typical structure of
for the full thickness of the base metal in ajoint with a a weldment such as a lack of homogeneity in the
groove weld. . mechanical or metallurgical or physical characteris-
*complete joint penetration groove weld (statically and tics of material or weldment. A discontinuity is not
dynamically loaded structures). A groove weld which necessarily a defect.
has been made from both sides or from one side on a downhand. See preferred term flat position.
backing having complete penetration and fusion of
weld and base metal throughout the depth of the
joint. E
*completejoint penetration groove weld (tubular struc- edge angle (tubular structures). The acute angle between
tures). A groove weld having complete penetration a bevel edge made in preparation for welding and a
and fusion of weld and base metal throughout the tangent to the member surface, measured locally in a
depth of the joint or as detailed in Figures 10.9 plane perpendicular to the intersection line. Alibevels
through 10.12. A completepenetrationtubular groove open to outside of brace.
weld made from one side oniy, without backing, is effective length of weld. The length throughout which
permitted where the size or configuration, or both, the correctly proportioned cross section of the weld
prevent access to the root side of the weld. exists. In acurved weld, it s h d be measured along the
complete penetration. A nonstandard term for com- weld axis.
plete joint penetration. electrogas welding (EGW). An arc welding process that
consumable guide electroslag welding. See electroslag produces coalescence of metals by heating them with
welding. an arc between acontinuous filler metal electrode and
the work. Molding shoes are used to confine the
continuous weld. A weld that extends continuously molten weld metal for vertical position welding. The
from one end of ajoint to the other. Where thejoint is electrodes may be either flux cored or solid. Shielding
essentially circular, it extends completely around the may or may not be obtained from an externally sup-
joint. plied gas or mixture.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 92 W 0784265 0500347 7 W
Appendix BI299
electroslag welding (ESW). A welding process that pro- *fusion type discontinuity. Signifies slag inclusion,
duces coalescence of metals with molten slag that incomplete fusion, incomplete joint penetration, and
melts the filler metal and the surfaces of the work- similar discontinuities associated with fusion.
pieces. The weld pool is shielded by this slag which
moves along the full cross section of the joint as fusion zone. The area of base metal melted as deter-
welding progresses. The process is initiated by an arc mined on the cross section of a weld.
that heats the slag. The arc is then extinguished by the
conductive slag, which is kept molten by its resistance G
to electric current passing between the electrode and
the workpieces. -
gas metal arc welding (GMAW). An arc welding process
that produces coalescence of metals by heating them
consumable guide electroslag welding- An elec- with an arc between a continuous filler metal elec-
troslag welding process variation in which filler trode and the workpiece. Shielding is obtained entirely
metal is supplied by an electrode and its guiding from an externally supplied gas.
member.
gas metal arc welding-short circuit arc (GMAW-S). A
gas metal arc welding process variation in which the
F consumable electrode is deposited during repeated
faying surface. The mating surfaceof a member which is short circuits.
in contact or in close proximity with another member *gas pocket. A cavity caused by entrapped gas.
to which it is to be joined.
gouging. The forming of a bevel or groove by material
filier metal. The metal to be added in making a welded, removal. See also back gouging, arc gouging, and
brazed, or soldered joint. oxygen gouging.
m e t weld leg. The distancefromthejointroot to the toe groove angle. The total included angle of the groove
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of the fillet weld. between workpieces.
flare-bevel-grooveweld. A weld in a groove formed by a *grooveangle, C#J (tubular structures). The angle between
member with a curved surface in contact with a planar opposing faces of the groove to be filled with weld
member. metals, determined after the joint is fitted up.
flare-V-grooveweld. A weld in a groove formed by two groove face. That surface of a member included in the
members with curved surfaces. groove.
*flash. The material which is expelled or squeezed out of groove weld. A weld made in the groove between the
a weld joint and which forms around the weld. workpieces.
flat position. The welding position used to weld from
the upper side of the joint and the face of the weld is H
approximately horizontal.
heat-affected zone. That portion of the base metal
flux cored arc welding (FCAW). An arc welding process which has not been melted, but whose mechanical
that produces coalescence of metals by heating them properties or microstructurehave been altered by the
with an arc between a continuous filler metal elec- heat of welding, brazing, soldering, or cutting.
trode and the work. Shielding is provided by a flux
contained within the tubular electrode. Additional horizontalfixed position(pipe welding). The position of
shielding may or may not be obtained from an exter- a pipe joint in which the axis of the pipe is approxi-
nally supplied gas or gas mixture. mately horizontal, and the pipe is not rotated during
welding. See Figures 5.1,5.2 and 5.4.
*flux cored arc welding- gas shielded (FCAW-G). A
flux cored arc welding process variation in which horizontal position.
additional shielding is obtained from an externally fillet weld. The position in which welding is per-
supplied gas or gas mixture. formed on the upper side of an approximatelyhori-
zontal surface. See Figures 5.1,5.2, and 5.5.
*flux cored arc welding -self shielded (FCAW-SS). A groove weld. The position of welding in which the
flux cored arc welding process where shielding is weld axis lies in an approximately horizontal plane
exclusively provided by a flux contained within the and the weld face lies in an approximately vertical
tubular electrode. plane. See Figures 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3.
fusion. The melting together of filler metal and base horizontal reference line (UT). A horizontal line near
metal (substrate),or of basemetal only, which results the center of the ultrasonic test instrument scope to
in coalescence. See also depth of fusion. which all echoes are adjusted for dB reading.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 m O784265 0500348 9 m
300/Appendix B
horizontal rotated position (pipe welding). The position L
of a pipe joint in which the axis of the pipe is approx-
imately horizontal, and welding is performed in the lap joint. A joint between two overlapping members in
flat position by rotating the pipe. See Figures 5.1,5.2, parallel planes.
and 5.4.
*layer. A stratum of weld metal or surfacing material.
*hot-spot strain (tubular structures). The cyclic total The layer may consist of one or more weld beads laid
range of strain which would be measured at the point side by side.
of highest stress concentration in a welded connec-
tion. When measuring hot-spot strain, the strain gage leg (UT).The path the shear wave travels in a straight
should be sufficiently smail to avoid averaging high line before being reflected by the surface of material
and low strains in the regions of steep gradients. being tested. See sketch for leg identification. Note:
Leg I plus leg II equals one V-path.
I
*image quality indicator (IQI). A device whose image
in a radiograph is used to determine radiographic
quality level. It is not intended for use in judging the
size nor for establishing acceptance limits of dis-
continuities.
indication (UT). The signal displayed on the oscillo-
scope signifying the presence of a sound wave reflec-
tor in the part being tested.
indication level (UT). The calibrated gain or attenua- leg of a Wlet weld. See fillet weld leg.
tion control reading obtained for a reference line
height indication from a discontinuity. *local dihedral angle, Y (tubular structures). The angle,
indication rating (UT). The decibel reading in relation measured in a plane perpendicular to the line of the
to the zero reference level after having been corrected weld, between tangents to the outside surfaces of the
for sound attenuation. tubes being joined at the weld. The exterior dihedral
angle, where one looks at a localized section of the
inert gas metal arc welding. See preferred term gas metal connection, such that the intersecting surfaces may be
arc welding. treated as planes.
intermittent weld. A weld in which the continuity is
broken by recurring unwelded spaces.
interpass temperature. In a multipass weld, the temper-
ature of the weld before the next pass is started. machine welding. Welding with equipment which per-
forms the welding operation under the constant
observation and control of a welding operator. The
equipment may or may not load and unload the
J workpieces. See also automatic welding.
joint. Thejunction of members or the edges of members manual welding. A welding operation performed and
that are to be joined or have beenjoined. controlled completely by hand. See automatic weld-
ing, machine welding, and semiautomatic welding.
joint penetration. The depth a weld extendsfrom its face
into a joint, exclusive of reinforcement.
joint root. That portion of ajoint to be welded where the N
members approach closest to each other. In cross
section, the joint root may be either a point, a line, or node (UT). See preferred term leg.
an area.
nominal tensile strength of the weld metal. The tensile
*joint welding procedure. The materials and detailed strength of the weld metal indicated by the classifica-
methods and practices employed in the welding of a tion number of the filler metal [e.g., nominal tensile
particular joint. strength of E60XX is 60 ksi (420 MPa)].
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 m 07842b5 05003i.19 O m
Appendix B/301
O preheat temperature, A specified temperature that the
base metal must attainin the welding, brazing, solder-
overhead position. The position in which welding is ing, thermal spraying, or cutting area immediately
performed from the underside of the joint. See Fig- before these operations are performed.
ures 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, and 5.5.
procedure qualification. The demonstrationthat welds
overlap. The protrusion of weld metaí beyond the weld made by a specific procedure can meet prescribed
toe or root weld. standards.
oxygen cutting (OC). Agroup of cutting processes used
to sever or remove metais by means of the chemical Q
reaction between oxygen and the base metal at ele-
vated temperatures.In the case of oxidation-resistant qualification. See preferred terms welder performance
metals, the reaction is facilitatedby the use of a chem- qualification and procedure qualification.
ical flux or metal powder.
R
oxygen gouging. An application of oxygen cutting in
which a bevel or groove is formed. random sequence. A longitudinalsequence in which the
weld bead increments are made at random.
reference level (UT). The decibel reading obtained for a
P horizontal reference line height indication from a
reference reflector,
*parallel electrode. See submerged arc welding (SAW).
reference reflector (UT). The reflector of known geom-
partial joint penetration. Joint penetration that is inten- etry contained in the IIW reference block or other
tionally less than complete. approved blocks.
pass. See preferred term weld pass. reinforcement of weld. See weld reinforcement.
peening. The mechanical working of metals using *rejectable discontinuity. See preferred term defect,
impact blows.
resolution (UT). The ability of ultrasonic equipment to
*pipe. Tubular-shaped product of circular cross section. give separateindications from closelyspaced reflectors.
See tubular. root face. That portion of the groove face adjacent to
*piping porosity (electroslagand electrogas). Elongated the root of the joint. A nonstandard term for root
porosity whose major dimension lies in a direction opening.
approximatelyparallel to the weld axis. root gap. A nonstandard term for root opening.
*piping porosity (general). Elongated porosity whose root of joint. See joint root.
major dimension lies in a direction approximately
normal to the weld surface. Frequently referred to as root of weld. See weld root.
pin holes when the porosity extends to the weld root opening. The separation at the joint root between
surface. the workpieces.
plug weld. A weld made in a circular hole in one
member of a joint fusing that member to another S
member. A fillet-welded hole is not to be construed as
conforming to this definition. scanning level (UT). The dB setting used during scan-
ning, as described in Tables 8.2 and 9.3.
porosity. Cavity type discontinuities formed by gas
entrapment during solidification. semiautomatic arc welding. Arc welding with equip-
ment that controls only the filler metal feed. The
positioned weld. A weld made in a joint that has been advance of the welding is manually controlled.
placed to facilitate making the weld.
shielded metal arc welding (SMAW). An arc welding
postweld heat treatment. Any heat treatment after process that produces coalescence of metals by heat-
welding. ing them with an arc between a covered metal elec-
trode and the workpieces.. Shielding is obtained from
preheating. The application of heat to the base metal decompositionof the electrode covering. Pressure is
immediately before welding, brazing, soldering, not used and filler metal is obtained from the
thermal spraying, or cutting. electrode.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 W 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500350 7 W
302 /Appendix B
shielding gas. Protective gas used to prevent atmo- T
spheric contamination,
tack weld. A weld made to hold parts of a weldment in
single-welded joint. In arc and gas welding, any joint proper alignment until the final welds are made.
welded from one side only,
*tack welder. A fitter, or someone under the direction of
size of weld. See weld size. afitter, who tack welds parts of aweldment to hold them
slot weld. A weld made in an elongated hole in one in proper alignment until the final welds are made.
member of a joint fusing that member to another *tandem. Refers to a geometrical arrangement of elec-
member. The hole may be open at one end. A fdiet trodes in which aline through the arcs is parallel to the
welded slot is not to be construed as conforming to direction of welding.
this definition.
temporary weld. A weld made to attach apiece or pieces
sound beam distance (UT). See preferred term sound to a weldment for temporary use in handling, ship-
path distance. ping, or working on the weldment.
sound path distance (UT). The distance between the throat of a faet weld.
search unit test material interface and the reflector as theoretical throat. The distance from the beginning
measured along the centerline of the sound beam. of the joint root perpendicular to the hypotenuse of
spatter. The metal particles expelled duringfusion weld- the largest right triangle that can be inscribed within
ing that do not form a part of the weld. the cross section of a fiiet weld. This dimension is
based on the assumption that the root opening is
stringer bead. A type of weld bead made without equal to zero.
appreciable weaving motion. actualthroat. The shortestdistancebetween the weld
*stud base. The stud tip at the welding end, including root and the face of a fillet weld.
flux and container, and 118 in. (3 mm) of the body of throat of a groove weld. A nonstandard term for groove
the stud adjacent to the tip. weld size.
stud arc welding (SW). An arc welding process that T-joint. A joint between two members located approx-
produces coalescence of metals by heating them with imately at right angles to each other in the form of aT.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
an arc between a metal stud, or similar part, and the
other workpiece. When the surfaces to be joined are toe of weld. See weld toe,
properly heated, they are brought together under *transverse discontinuity. A weld discontinuity whose
pressure. Partial shielding may be obtained by the use major dimension is in adirection perpendicular to the
of a ceramic ferrule surrounding the stud. Shielding weld axis “X,” see Appendix D, Form D-1 1.
gas or flux may or may not be used.
*tubular. Tubularproducts is agenericterm for afamily
submerged arc welding (SAW). An arc welding process of hollow section products of various cross-sectional
that produces coalescence of metals by heating with configuration. The term pipe denotes cylindrical
an arc or arcs between a bare mGtal electrode or products to differentiatefrom square and rectangular
electrodes and the workpieces. The arc and molten holiow section products. However, a tube or tubing
metal are shielded by a blanket of granular, fusible can also be cylindrical. User should note the AISC
material on the workpieces. Pressure is not used, and designation of tubular sections:
f i e r metal is obtained from the electrode and some- TSD X t for circular tubes (pipe)
times from a supplemental source (welding rod, flux, TSa X b X t for square and rectangular tubes
or metal granules). (referred to collectively as box
*single electrode. One electrode connected exclusively sections in section 10)
to one power source which may consist of one or more Where, TS the group symbol
power units. t nominal wall thickness
D nominal outside diameter
*parallel electrode. Two electrodes connected electri- a = nominal major width
cally in parallel and exclusively to the same power b = nominalminorwidth
source. Both electrodes are usually fed by means of a
single electrode feeder. Welding current, when speci- *tubular connection. A connection in the portion of a
fied, is the total for the two. structure that contains two or more intersecting
members, at least one of which is a tubular member.
*multiple electrodes. The combination of two or more
single or parailel electrode systems. Each of the com- *tubular joint. A joint in the interface created by a
ponent systems has its own independent power source tubular member intersecting another member (which
and its own electrode feeder. may or may not be tubular). ’
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D3.L 92 07BY2b5 0500353 9
Appendix B/ 303
U weld root. The points, as shown in cross section, at
which the back of the weld intersects the base metal
undercut. A groove melted into tue base metal adjacent surfaces.
to the weld toe or weld root and left udilled by weld
metal. weld size.
fillet weld size. For equal leg fillet welds, the leg
lengthsof the largest isosceles right trianglewhich can
V be inscribed within the fillet weld cross section. For
unequal leg fillet welds, the leg lengths of the largest
vertical position. The position of welding in which the right triangle that can be inscribed within the fdet
axis of the weld is approximatelyvertical. See Figures weld cross section.
5.1, 5.2, 5.3, and 5.5,
Note: When one member makes an angle with the
*vertical position (pipe welding). The position of a pipe other membergreater than 1059 the leg length (size)
joint in which welding is performed in the horizontal is of less significance than the eflective throat, which is
position and the pipe shall not be rotated during the controllingfactor for the strength of the weld.
welding. See Figures 5.1,5.2, and 5.4.
goove weld size. The joint penetration of a groove
V-path (UT). The distance a shear wave sound beam weld.
travels from the search unit test material interface to
weld tab. Additional material on which the weld may be
the other face of the test material and back to the
original surface. initiated or terminated.
weld toe. The junction of the weld face and the base
metal.
W
welder. One who performs a manual or semiautomatic
weave bead. A type of weld bead made with transverse welding operation.
oscillation.
welder certification. Certificationinwriting that awelder
weld. A localized coalescence of metais or non-metals has produced welds meeting prescribed standards.
produced by heating the materials to the welding welder performance quaufication. The demonstration
temperature, with or without the applicationof pres-
of a welder's ability to produce welds meeting pre-
sure and with or without the use of filler metal.
scribed standards.
weldabuity. The capacity of a material to be welded welding. A materials joining process used in making
under the imposed fabrication conditions into a welds. (See the Master Chart of Welding Processes,
specific, suitably designed structure and to perform AWS A3.0).
satisfactorily in the intended service.
welding machine. Equipment used to perform the weld-
weld axis. A line through the length of a weld, perpen- ing operation. For example, spot welding machine,
dicular to and at the geometric center of its cross arc welding machine, and seam welding machine. '
section.
welding operator. One who operates machine or auto-
weld bead. A weld deposit resulting from a pass. See matic welding equipment.
stringer bead and weave bead.
*welding procedure. The detailed methods and prac-
weld face. The exposed surface of a weld on the side tices including all joint welding procedures invoíved
from which welding was done. in the production of a weldment. See joint welding
procedure.
weld pass. A single progression of welding or surfacing
along ajoint or substrate.The result of apass is a weld welding sequence. The order of making the welds in a
bead, layer, or spray deposit. weldment.
weld reinforcement. Weld metal in excess of the quan- weldment. An assembly whose component parts are
tity required to fill a joint. joined by welding.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix C
Guide for Specification Writers
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes only)
A statement in a contract document that ail welding be done in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1, Structural
Welding Code-Steel, covers only the mandatory welding requirements. other provisions in the Code are optional.
They apply only when they are specified. The following are some of the more commonly used optional provisions and
examples of how they may be specified.
Optional Provision Typical SpeciGcation
Fabrication/ Erection Inspection [when Fabrication/ Erection inspection will be performed by the owner.
not the responsibility of the contractor
(6.1.i)] or
Fabrication/ Erection inspection will be performed by testing agency
retained by the owner,
Note: Whenfabrkation/erection inspection is performed by the owner or
the owner’s testing agency, complete details on the extent of such testing
must be given.
Verifkation Inspection (6.1.2) Verification inspection (6.1.2) shall be performed by the Contractor.
or
Verification inspection will be performed by the owner.
or
Verification inspection will be performed by a testing agency retained by
the owner.
or
Verification inspection is waived
Nondestructive Testing Nondestructive Teshg General: For each type of joint and [other than
visual (6.7) and type of stress (tension, compression and shear)] indicate
type of NDT to be used, extent of inspection, any special techniques to be
used, and acceptance criteria. Specific examples (to be interpreted as
examples and not recommendations)follow. The Engineer shail determine
the specific requirements for each condition.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
305
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 078LI2b-5 0500353 2
306/Appendix C
Optional Provision Typical Specification
Statically Loaded Structure Fabrication: Moment Connecta Tension
Groove Welds in Butt Joints-25% UT inspection of each of the fmt
four joints, dropping to 10% of each of the remaining joints. Acceptance
criteria-Table 8.2.
Fillet welds-MT-Inspection of 10% of the length of each weld.
Acceptance criteria-8.15.2.
Dynamically Loaded Structure Fabrication: Tension Butt Splices- 100%
UT, or 100% RT- Acceptance criteria-UT9.25.3; R T 9.25.2.
Full Penetration Corner Welds in AxiaUy Loaded Members: Tension
Stresses- 100% UT, Scanning Patterns D or E-Acceptance criteria-
Table 9.3.
Compression Stresses-25%, UT, Scanning Movements A, B, or C.
Acceptance criteria-Table 8.2.
Fillet Welds-MT-Inspection of 10% of the length of each weld-
Acceptance criteria-9.25.2.
or
(6.8.3) Rejection of any portion of a weld inspected on aless than 100%basis shail
require inspection of 100% of that weld.
or
(6.8.3) Rejection of any portion of a weld inspected on a partial length basis shali
require inspection of the stated length on each side of the defect.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix D
Ultrasonic Equipment Qualification and Inspection Forms
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS D1.l-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes only)
This appendix containsexamplesfor use of three forms, D8, D9, and D10, for recording of ultrasonic test data. Each
example of forms D8, D9, and D10 shows how the forms may be used in the ultrasonicinspectionof welds. Form D11 is
for reporting results of ultrasonic inspection of welds.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society 307
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 72 07842b5 0500355 b E
308/Appendk D
Ultrasonic Unit Certification
Ultrasonic unit Date
Model - Serial no. -
BY
Search unit
Size TY Pe ASNT Level
Frequency MHz
Find the average % screen values
from column b disregarding the
first three and last three tabula-
tions. Use this percentage as Oh2
in calculating the Corrected
Reading c.
The dB Error d is established by
subtracting the Corrected Read-
ing from the dB Reading a.
Beginning with the tabulated dB
Error d nearest to 0.0, collec-
tively add the dB Error d values
up and down placing the sub-
totals in column e (Collective
dB Errors).
Moving vertically up and down
from the Average % line, find the
largest vertical span in which the
top and bottom Collective dB Error
figures remain at or below 2 dB.
Count the number of vertical
spaces of movement, subtract one,
and multiply the remainder by six.
This dB value is the acceptable
range of the unit.
In order to establish the accept-
able range graphically, Form D9
should be used in conjunction with
Form D8 as follows:
(1) Apply the collective dB Error
“e” values vertically on the hori-
zontal offset coinciding with the
dB reading values “a.”
(2) Establish a curve line pass-
ing through this series of points.
(3) Apply a 2 dB high horizontal
window over this curve positioned
vertically so that the longest
section is completely encompassed
within the 2 dB Error height.
(4) This window length represents
the acceptable dB range of the
unit.
dB, = 20 X log (%2 + %i)
+ dB,
Yo2 (Average) YO
Total qualified range -dB to -dB = -dB Total error -dB
Total qualified range -dB to -dB = -dB Total error -dB
Form 0-8 --``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Form D-8
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D i - 1 92 07842b5 0500356
~ ~ ~~
Appendix DI309
Ultrasonic unit
Model u z 9 Serial no. -6
Search un’t.
Size / d Type
C
Frequency ama€7
.
MHz
sr
TABULATION CHART I
No. Reading
-
b C
Corrected
reading
1 1 I
ddB
Error
e
Collective
db error
Find the average % screen values
from column b disregardingthe
first three and last three tabula-
tions. Use this percentage as %2
in calculating the Corrected
1 6 6Y Reading c.
2 12. 75 The dB Error d is established by
subtracting the Corrected Read-
-
3 1 8 7 r ing from the dB Reading a.
Beginning with the tabulated dB
424 77 Error d nearest to 0.0, collec-
530 71 tively add the dB Error d values
up and down placing the sub-
-
636 77 totals in coiumn e (Collective
- 42 77
7 dB Errors).
Moving vertically up and down
- 48 ’78
8 from the Average % line, find the
largest vertical span in which the
9 54 77 top and bottom Collective dB Error
- 60 78
Average 78%- 10 figures remain at or below 2 dB.
Count the number of vertical
11 66 79 spaces of movement, subtract one,
- 72
12 80 and multiply the remainder by six.
This dB value is the acceptable
13
- 78 81 range of the unit.
14 In order to establish the accept-
- 84 86 able range graphically, Form D9
15 should be used in conjunction with
I
Form D8 as follows:
16 (1) Apply the collective dB Error
17 “e” values vertically on the hori-
- zontal offset coinciding with the
18 dB reading values “a.”
I
19 (2) Establish a curve line pass-
ing through this series of points.
20 (3) Apply a 2 dB high horizontal
- window over this curve positioned
21
- vertically so that the longest
22 section is completely encompassed
within the 2 dB Error height.
23
-
24
-
25
-
l I
(4) This window length represents
the acceptable dB range of the
unit.
dB, = 20 X log (%2f %+I
dB,
)
26
oh2 (Average) 78 YO
Total qualified range 12 dB to dB = 66 dB 78 Total error /* 8 d B
I
Total qualified
- range //dB to dB = dB 64 Total e r r o r-
zddB
Form D-8
-
Figure D-1 Example of the Use of Form D-8 Ultrasonic Unit Certification
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 = 0784265 0500357 T
31O/Appendix D
dB ACCURACY EVALUATION
COLLECTIVE dB ERROR e
+4
i3
+2
+1
-1
-2
-3
-4
O 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108
FORM D-9 dB READING a
Form D-9
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - & 92 m 07BY265 0500358 II
Appendix D/ 3 11
EXAMPLE OF THE USE OF FORM D-9
COLLECTIVE dB ERROR e dB ACCURACY EVALUATION
O 6 12 18 24 30 - 3 6 48 42
54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102
dB READING a
FORM D-9
- ACCEPTABLE dB RANGE 70 dB - L
THE CURVE ON FORM D-9 EXAMPLE IS DERIVED FROM CALCULATIONSFROM FORM D-8 (FIGURE D-1).
THE CROSS HATCHED ON FIGURE D-9 SHOWS THE AREA OVER WHICH THE EXAMPLE UNIT QUALIFIES
TO THIS CODE.
Note: The first line of example of the use of Form D-8 is shown in this example.
Figure D-2-Example of the Use of Form D-9
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 m 0784265 0500357 3 m
I
312/Appendix D
DECIBEL (ATTENUATION OR GAIN) VALUES NOMOGRAPH
A B C
10 1O0 10 10 O O
9 90
8 80 9 9 8 2
7 70
8 8 6 4
6 60
5 50 7 7 4 6
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4 40 6 6 2 8
5 5 O O
3 30
2r
4 4 8 2
20 3 3 6 4
2 2 4 6
z
1 1 2 8
1 10 O O O O
PERCENT SCREEN PIVOT ATTENUATION GAIN
OR VOLTAGE DECIBELS
FORM D I 0
Note: See 6.22.2.3for instruction on use of this nomograph.
Form D-10
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D L - L 92 W 0784265 0500360 T W ~~ ~ ~~~
Appendix D/ 3 13
1. THE 6 dB READING AND 69% SCALE ARE DERIVED FROM THE INSTRUMENT READING
AND BECOME dB “bf AND %I “c” RESPECTIVELY.
2. ‘/o2 IS 78 - CONSTANT.
3. dB2 (WHICH IS CORRECTED dB “d) IS EQUAL TO 20 TIMES X Log (78/69) + 6 or 7.1,
THE USE OF THE NOMOGRAPH IN RESOLVING LINE 3 IS AS SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE.
DECIBEL (ATTENUATIONOR GAIN) VALUES NOMOGRAPH
A B C
10 O
9
8 2
% b- 7-
4
6
5 6-a
4 8
O
3
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2
2 - 3 6 4 4
-
8
FORM D-1O
1 10 0 - 0 o= O
PERCENT SCREEN PIVOT AlTENUATION GAIN
OR VOLTAGE DECIBELS
THE CURVE ON FORM D-10 EXAMPLE IS DERIVED FROM CALCULATIONS FROM
FORM D-9 EXAMPLE. THE CROSS HATCHED AREA ON FORM D-10 EXAMPLE
SHOWS THE AREA OVER WHICH THE EXAMPLE UNIT QUALIFIES TO THIS CODE.
Notes: Procedure for using the Nomograph:
1. Extend a straight line between the decibel reading from Column a applied to the C scale
and the corresponding percentage from Column b applied to the A scale.
2. Use the point where the straight line from step 1 crosses the pivot line B as a pivot line
for a second straight line.
3. Extend a second straight line from the average sign point on scale A, through the pivot
point developed in step 2, and onto the dB scale C.
4. This point on the C scale is indicative of the corrected dB for use in Column C.
Figure D-3 -Example of the Use of Form D-10
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 078LIZb5 0 5 0 0 3 6 1 1 m
3 141Appendix D
Form D-11
REPORT OF ULTRASONICTESTING OF WELDS
Project Report no.
Weld identification
Material thickness
~ * ' x Weld joint AWS
Welding process
Quality requirements - section no.
Remarks
3 1
q=
17
26 I
le, the undersigned, certify that the statements in this record arecorrect and that the welds were preparedand tested in accordance
with the requirements of section 6,Part C of ANSVAWS Dl.1, ( ) Structural Welding CodeSteel.
year
Test date Manufacturer or contractor
Inspectedby Authorized by
Note: This form is applicable to sections 8 and 9
íStaticallvand DvnamicallvLoadedStructures). Do Date
NOT use-this fotm for Tuthar Structures ( s e t h --``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10).
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Form D-il
Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
I
Appendix D/ 315
Notes:
1, In order to attain Rating ‘Id”
(A) With instruments with gain control, use the formula a-b-c=d.
(B) With instruments with attenuation control, use the formula b-a-c=d.
(C) A plus or minus sign must accompany the “d” figure unless “d” is equal to zero.
2. Distance from X is used in describing the location of a weld discontinuity in a direction perpendicular to
the weld reference line. Unless this figure is zero, a plus or minus sign must accompany it.
3. Distance from Y is used in describingthe location of a weld discontinuity in adirection parallel to the weld
reference line. This figure is attained by measuring the distance from the “Y” end of the weld to the
beginning of said discontinuity.
4. Evaluation of Retested Repaired Weld Areas must be tabulated on a new line on the report form. If the
original report form is used, R, shall prefix the indication number. If additional forms are used, the R
number shall prefix the report number.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
*Use Leg I,II,or 111. See glossary of terms (Appendix B).
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix E
Sample Welding Forms
(Nonmandatory Information)
(ThisAppendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes only)
This appendix contains six forms that the Structural Welding Committee has approved for the recording of
procedure qualification, welder qualification, welding operator qualification, and tack welder qualification data
required by this code. Also included are laboratory report forms for recordingthe results of nondestructiveexamination
of welds.
It is suggested that the qualificationand NDT informationrequired by this code be recorded on these forms or s i d a r
forms which have been prepared by the user. Variations of these forms to suit the user’s needs are permissible. These
forms are available from AWS.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society 3 17
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 D 078Y2b5 05003bY 7 D
3 1û/Appendix E
WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS) Yes ( )
PREQUALIFIED QUALIFIED BY TESTING
or PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (PQR) Yes ( )
Identification #
Revision Date BY
Company Name Authorized by Date
Welding Process(es) Type-Manual ( ) Semi-Automatic ( )
Supporting PQR No. (s) Machine( ) Automatic ( )
JOINT DESIGN USED POSITION
Type Position of Groove Fillet
Single ( ) Double Weld ( ) Vertical Progression: Up ( ) Down ( )
Backing Yes ( ) No ( ) -
Backing Material ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Root Opening Root Face Dimension
Groove Angle Radius (J-U) Transfer Mode (GMAW) Short-circuiting ( )
BackGouging: Yes ( ) No ( ) Method Globular ( ) Spray ( )
Current:AC ( ) DCEP ( ) DCEN ( ) Pulsed (
BASE METALS I Other
Type or Giade TECHNIQUE
Thickness Groove Fiilet Stringer or Weave Bead
Diameter (Pipe) Multi-pass or Single Pass (per side)
Number of electrodes
FILLER METALS
Electrode Spacing Longitudinal
AWS Specification
Lateral
AWS Classification
Angle
SHIELDING
Flux Gas
Composition I Contact Tube to Work Distance
n---:..-
reemg I
I I
I
Electrode-Flux (Class) Flow-
- -Rate^.
tias LUU size I
Internass cleaning:
I
PREHEAT Max ; r e W E L D HEAT TREATMENT
Preheat Temp., Min. Temp.
Interpass Temp., Min
WELDING PROCEDURE
Filler Metals Current I Joint Details
Amps or
Pass or Wire
Weld Type & Feed Travel
Layer(s) Process Class Diam. Polarity Speed Volts Speed
Form E-1 (Front)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0784265 0500365 9 ~~
Appendix E/319
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) #
Test Results
TENSILE TEST
Specimen Ultimate tensile Ultimate unit Character of failure
no. Width Thickness Area load. lb stress. psi .and location
GUIDED BEND TEST
Specimen
No. Type of bend Result Remarks
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
VISUAL INSPECTION
Appearance Radiographieultrasonicexamination
Undercut RT report no: Result
Piping porosity UT report no: Result
Convexity FILLET WELD TEST RESULTS
Test date Minimum size multiple pass Maximum size single pass
Witnessed by Macroetch Macroetch
1. 3. 1. 3.
2. 2.
Other Tests
All-weld-metal tension test
Tensile strength, psi
Yield point/strength, psi
Elongation in 2 in., %
Laboratory test no.
Welder’s name Clock no. Stamp no.
Tests conducted by Laboratory
Test number
Per
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and tested in
accordance with the requirements of section 5, Part B of ANSI/AWS D1.l.( ) Structural Welding Code-Steel.
Y=
Signed
Manufacturer or Contractor
BY
Title
Date
Form E-1 (Back)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
3201 Appendix E
WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD
FOR ELECTROSLAG AND ELECTROGAS WELDING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION TEST RESULTS I
Material specification Reduced-section tensile test
Welding process Tensile strength, psi
Position of welding 1.
Filler metal specification 2.
Filler metal classification
All-weld-metal ter-'-- '--'
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Filler metal
Flux Tensile strength, psi
. . . .
Shielding gas Flow rate Yield poinVstrength, psi -
Elongation in 2 in., 016
Gas dew point
Thickness range this test qualifies
Single or multiple pass
Side-bend tests
1. 3.
II
Single or multiple arc 2. 4.
Welding current
Preheat temperature Radiographic-ultrasonic examination
I
Postheat temperature RT report no.
Welder's name UT report no.
Impact tests I
VISUAL INSPECTION (9.25.1)
Size of specimen Test temp
Appearance Ftelb: 1. -2. -3. 4. -
Undercut 5. 6. -Avn'U'
Piping porosity High Low -
Laboratory test no.
Test date
Witnessed by
WELDING PROCEDURE
Welding current
Pass Electrode Joint detail
no. size Amperes Volts
Guide tube flux
Guide tube composition
Guide tube diameter
Vertical rise speed
Traverse length
Traverse speed
Dwell
Type of molding shoe
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, weldel
and tested in accordance with the requirements of section 4, Part E, and section 5, Part B of ANSVAWS D1
( ) Structural Welding Code-Steel.
year
Procedure no. Manufacturer or contractor
Revision no. Authorized by
Copyright American Welding Society
Form E-3 Date
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix E/ 321
WELDER, WELDING OPERATOR OR TACK WELDER QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD
Type of Welder
Name Identification No.
Welding Procedure Specification No. Rev- Date
Used in Qualification Qualification Range
Variables
Processnype (5.16.2)
Electrode [single or multiple)
CurrenVPolarity
Position (5.16.5)
Weld Progression (5.16.7)
Backing (YES or NO) (5.16.18)
MateriaVSpec. (5.16.1)
Base Metal
Thickness: (Plate)
Groove
Fillet
Thickness: (Pipehube)
Groove
Fillet
Diameter: (Pipe)
Groove
Fillet
Filler Metal (5.16.3)
Spec. No.
Class
F-NO.
Gas/Flux Type (5.16.4)
Other
VISUAL INSPECTION (5.12.6or 5.12.7)
Acceptable YES or NO-
Guided Bend Test Results (5.28.1/5.29.1)
Type Result Type Result
Fillet Test Results (5.28.2h28.3; 5.39.3E.39.4)
Appearance Fillet Size
Fracture Test Root Penetration Macroetch
(Describe the location, nature, and size of any crack or tearing of the specimen.)
Inspected by Test Number
Organization Date
RADIOGRAPHIC TEST RESULTS (5.28.4/5.39.2)
Film Film
Identification Results Remarks Identification Results Remarks
Number Number
I I
I I
Interpreted by Test Number
Organization Date
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded,
and tested in accordancewith the requirementsof Section 5, Part C or D of ANSVAWS D I .I, ( ) Structural
Welding Code-Steel year
Manufacturer or Contractor
Authorized By
Date --``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Form E-4
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
322/Appendix E
REPORT OF RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF WELDS
WELD LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION SKETCH
Technlque
Source
Film to source
(Describe length, width, and thickness of all joints radiographed)
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the welds were prepared and tested in
accordancewith the requirementsof the American Welding Society ANSVAWS D1.l, ( ) Structural Welding
Code-Steel. year
Radiographer(s) Manufacturer or contractor
Interpreter Authorized by
Test date Date
Form E-7
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 72 0784265 0500367 b ~~
~
~~
Appendix E/ 323
REPORT OF MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION OF WELDS
Project
Quality requirements - section no.
Reported to
WELD LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION SKETCH
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
We, the undersigned, certify that the statements inthis record are correct and that the welds were prepared and tested in
accordancewith the requirementsof the American Welding Society ANSVAWS D1.l, ( 1Structural Welding
year
Code-Steel.
Inspector Manufacturer or contractor
Test date Authorized by
Method of inspection: Date
O Dry U Wef O Residual U Continuous
OAC O DC OHalf-wave
Form E-8 @ 1978 by American Welding Society. All rights reserved.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 07842b5 0500370 2 E
3241 Appendix E
Commentary on the Use of Welding Procedure Qualified by Testing
Forms El (Front) and El Qack)
The WPS may be qualified by testing in accordance
The Form El may be used to record information with the provisions of Part B of section 5. In this case, a
for either a WPS or a PQR. The user should indicate supportingPQR is required in addition to the WPS. For
their selected application in the appropriate boxes or the PQR, Form El (Front) can again be used with an
the user may choose to blank out the inappropriate appropriate heading change. Also, the Form El (Back),
headings. may be used to record the test results and the certifying
The WPSs and PQRs are to be signed by the autho- statement.
rized representative of the Manufacturer or Contractor. For the WPS, state the permitted ranges qualified by
For joint details on the WPS, a sketch or a reference to testing or state the appropriate tolerances on essential
the applicable prequalified joint detail may be used (e.g., variable (e.g., 250 amps rt 10%).
B-U4a). For the PQR, record the actual joint details and the
values of essential variables used in the testing. Attach a
copy of the Mill Test Report for the material tested.
Prequalified Also, Testing Laboratory Data Reports may also be
included as backup information.
The WPS may be Prequalied in accordancewith all The inclusion of items not required by the Code is
of the provisions of 5.1 in which case only the one-page optional; however, they may be of use in setting up
document, Form El is required. equipment, or understanding test results.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix F
Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries
for the Structural Welding Committee
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for informa-
tion purposes only)
Fl. Introduction F2.1 Scope
The AWS Board of Directors has adopted a policy Each inquiry must address one single provision of the
whereby all official interpretations of AWS Standards Code, unless the point of the inquiry involves two or
will be handled in a formal manner. Under that policy, more interrelated provisions. That provision must be
ail interpretations are made by the Committee that is identified in the Scope of the inquiry, along with the
responsible for the Standard. Official communication edition of the Code that contains the provisions or that
concerning an interpretation is through the AWS staff the Inquirer is addressing.
member who works with that committee. The policy F2.2 Purposeof the Inquiry
requires that all requests for an interpretation be sub-
mitted in writing. Such requests will be handled as expe- The purpose of the inquiry must be stated in this por-
ditiously as possible but due to the complexity of the tion of the inquiry. The purpose can be either to obtain
work and the procedures that must be followed, some an interpretation of a Code requirement, or to request
interpretationsmay require considerabletime. the revision of a particular provision in the Code.
F2.3 Content of the Inquiry
The inquiry should be concise, yet complete, to enable
the Committeeto quickly and fully understand the point
F2. Procedure of the inquiry. Sketches should be used when approp-
riate and ail paragraphs, figures, and tables (or the
Au inquiries must be directed to: appendix), which bear on the inquiry must be cited. If the
Director of Technical Standards and Publications point of the inquiry is to obtain a revision of the Code,
American Welding Society the inquiry must provide technicaljustification for that
550 N.W. LeJeune Road revision.
Post Office Box 351040 F2.4 Proposed Reply
Miami, Florida 33135
The inquirer should, as a proposed reply, state an inter-
All inquiries must contain the name, address, and afffi- pretation of the provision that is the point of the inquiry,
ation of the inquirer and they must provide enough or the wording for a proposed revision, if that is what
information for the Committee to fully understand the inquirer seeks.
point of concern in the inquiry. Where that point is not
clearly defined, the inquiry will be returned for clari- F3. Interpretation of Code Provisions
fication. For efficient handling, all inquiries should
be typewritten and should also be in the format used Interpretations of Code provisions are made by the
here. Structural Welding Committee. The Secretary of the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
325
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 H 07842b5 0500372 b =
326/ Appendix F
Committee refers ali inquiries to the Chairman of the related to the use of the Code. The Board of Directors’
particular subcommittee that has jurisdiction over the Policy requires that ali Staff members respond to a
portion of the Code addressed by the inquiry. The Sub- telephone request for an Official Interpretation of any
committee reviews the inquiry and the proposed reply to AWS Standard with the information that such an inter-
determine what the response to the inquiry should be. pretation can be obtained only through a written
Following the Subcommittee’s development of the re- request. The Headquarters Staff can not provide con-
sponse, the inquiry and the response are presented to the sulting services. The Staff can, however, refer a caller to
entire Structural Welding Committee for review and any of those consultantswhose names are on file at AWS
approval. Upon approval by the Committee, the inter- Headquarters.
pretation wiíl be an official interpretation of the Society,
and the Secretary will transmit the response to the
inquirer and to the Welding Journal for publication. F6. The StructuralWelding Committee
The Structural Welding Committee’s activities, in
F4. Publication of Interpretations regard to interpretations, are limited strictly to the Inter-
pretation of Code provisions or to consideration of revi-
All official interpretations will appear in the Welding sions to existing provisions on the basis of new data or
Journal. technology. Neither the Committee nor the Staff is in a
position to offer interpretive or consulting services on:
(1) specific engineering problems, or (2) Code require-
F5. Telephone Inquiries ments applied to fabrications outside the scope of the
Code or points not specifically covered by the Code. In
Telephone inquiries to AWS Headquarters concerning such cases, the inquirer should seek assistance from a
the Structural Welding Code should be limited to competent engineer experienced in the particular field of
questions of a general nature or to matters directly interest.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 = O784265 0500373 8
~ ~~~~
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Appendix G
Local Dihedral Angle
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes oniy)
Copyright American Welding Society 327
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 M 0784265 0500374 T M
328 I Appendix G
1mo
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
AXIS OF WELD
AT ANY
POINT "P"
DIHEDRAL ANGLE
180
- 170 - fi -
I . e = 200
I
-1
O 102030 40506070 €JO! 100 110 120 130 1 b 150 160 1 o
VALUES OF p
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix GI329
180
170 e= 300
160
150v
140
130
VALUES OF fi = -
I/
~
I
r
120
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
VALUES OF p
e = mo
\t
+ -
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
VALUES OF p
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 0784265 O500376 3 m
3301Appendix G
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
+-
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 11 150 I& 1;
VALUES OF p
û 60?
-
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 1t 3
VALUES OF p
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix GI331
180
e= 70"
170
160
I"
-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
VALUES OF p
180
I
e = 90"
170
""
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
VALUES OF p
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix H
Contents of Prequalified Welding Procedure Specifications
(Nonmandatory Information)
(ThisAppendix is not a part of ANSI/ AWS Dl.1-92,Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for informa-
tion purposes oniy.)
Prequalified welding requires a written WPS addressing the foilowing Code subsections as applicable to weldments
of concern. In addition to the requirements for a written WPS, this Code imposes many other requirements and
limitations on prequalified welding. The organization using prequalified welding must comply with all the relevant
requirements.
The specification of the WPS may meet the users needs. Items such as assembly tolerances may be referenced.
WPS
1.3.1, 1.3.3 Processes Permitted 4.10.2,4.10.3,4.10.4,4.10.5,4.10.6 (except 4.10.6.1)
2.3.1.4 PrequalXed Joints 4.11.2,4.11.3,4.11.4,4.11.5,4.11.6 (except4.11.6.1)
2.7.1.1 and 2.7.1.2 Fillet Welds 4.12.1,4.12.2 GMAW, FCAW
2.8.1,2.8.2,2.8.4,2.8.6,2.8.8 Plug and Slot Welds 4.13 Shielding Gas
2.9 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds 4.14.1,4.14.2,4.14.4GMAW, FCAW
2.10 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds 4.21 Plug Welds
2.11 Skewed T Joints 4.22 Slot Welds
3.1.3 Temperature 5.1.2and Specific Portions of 5.5 Variables
3.2.1,3.2.2 Base Metal Preparation 7.5.5 SMAW Studs
3.3 Assembly 7.7.5
3.8 Peening
3.1 1.1 In Process Weld Cleaning
3.13.1,3.13.2,3.13.3Groove Welding Backing
4.1.1 Matching Filler Metal
4.1.2 Filler Metal Limitations
10.2.1,10.2.2,10.2.4*,10.2.5
*Limitations
1
8.2.1,8.2.2,8.2.3.2,8.2.3.3,8.2.4*,8.2.5
9.2.1,9.2.2,9.2.3,9.2.4.2,9.2.5*,9.2.6 Base Metals
4.1.4 A242 and A588 The provisions of this Code are not intended for use with
4.1.5 steels having a specified minimum yield point or yield
4.2 Preheat strength over 100 o00 psi (690 MPa).
4.3 Heat Input*
4.5.1 Electrodes AU groove and fillet weld procedures for weld metal and
4.6 Except 4.6.1 and 4.6.10 SMAW Procedures base metal with a minimum specified yield strength of
4.7.1,4.7.3,4.7.4,4.7.6SAW 90 o00 psi (620 MPa) or higher shall be qualified to the
4.8.1 SAW As Applicable satisfaction of the Engineer prior to use by tests as pro-
4.9.2,4.9.3,4.9.4 vided in 5.2.
Copyright American Welding Society
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
333
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Appenc iiy J
Safe Practices
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS Dl.1-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
information purposes oniy.)
This appendix covers many of the basic elements of safety generalto arc welding processes. It includes many, but not
all, of the safety aspects related to structural welding. The hazards that may be encountered and the practices that will
minimize personal injury and property damage are reviewed here.
51. Electrical Hazards radiation on the surrounding environment. Everyone
associated with the welding operation should acquaint
Electric shock can kill. However, it can be avoided. themselves with the effects of these fumes and gases.
.Live electrical parts should not be touched. Read and The possible effects of overexposure to fumes and
understand the manufacturer’s instructions and recom- gases range from irritation of eyes, skin, and respiratory
mended safe practices. Faulty installation, improper system to more severe complications. Effects may occur
grounding, and incorrect operation and maintenance of immediately or at some later time. Fumes can cause
electrical equipment are all sources of danger. symptoms such as nausea, headaches, dizziness, and
All electrical equipment and the workpiece should be metal fume fever.
grounded. A separate connection is required to ground Sufficient ventilation, exhaust at the arc, or both,
the workpiece. The work lead should not be mistaken for should be used to keep fumes and gases from breathing
a ground connection. zones and the general work area.
To prevent shock, the work area, equipment, and For more detailed information on fumes and gases
clothing should be kept dry at all times. Dry gloves and produced by the various welding processes, see Refer-
rubber soled shoes should be worn. The welder should ences 1,4 and 11.
stand on a dry board or insulated platform.
Cables and connectorsshould be kept in good condi-
tion. Worn, damaged, or bare cables should not beused. 53. Noise
in case of electric shock, the power should be turned off Excessive noise is aknown health hazard. Exposure to
immediately. If the rescuer must resort to pulling the
victim from the live contact, nonconducting materials excessive noise can cause a loss of hearing. This loss of
hearing can be either full or partial, and temporary or
should be used. A physician should be called and CPR
continued until breathing has been restored, or until a permanent. Excessive noise adversely affects hearing
physician has a~ived.See References 8,7,and 10. capability. In addition, there is evidence that excessive
noise affects other bodily functions and behavior.
Personal protective devices such as ear muffs or ear
plugs maybe employed. Generally, these devices are only
52. Fumes and Gases accepted when engineering controls are not fully effec-
Many welding, cutting, and allied processes produce tive. See References 1,5, and 11.
fumes and gases which may be harmful to one’s health.
Fumes and solid particles originate from welding con- 54. Burn Protection
sumables, the base metal, and any coatings present on
the base metal. Gases are produced during the welding Molten metal, sparks, slag, and hot work surfaces are
process or may be produced by the effects of process produced by welding, cutting, and allied processes.
Copyright American Welding Society
335
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 7 2 N 07842b5 0500380 5 N
336lAppendix J
These can cause burns if precautionary measures are should acquaint themselves with the effects of this
not used. radiant energy.
Workers should wear protective clothing made of fire Radiant energy may be ionizing (such as X-rays) or
resistant material. Pant cuffs or clothing with open non-ionizing (such as ultraviolet, visible light, or
pockets or other places on clothing that can catch and infrared). Radiation can produce avariety of effects such
retain molten metal or sparks should not be worn. High as skin burns and eye damage, if excessive exposure
top shoes or leather leggings and fire resistant gloves occurs.
should be worn. Pant legs should be worn over the Some processes such as resistance welding and cold
outside of high top boots. Helmets or hand shields that pressure welding ordinarily produce negiigible quantities
provide protectionfor the face, neck, and ears, should be of radiant energy. However, most arc welding and cut-
worn, as well as a head covering to protect the head. ting processes (except submerged arc when used prop-
Clothingshould be kept free of grease and oil. Combust- erly), laser welding and torch welding, cutting, brazing,
ible materials should not be carried in pockets. If any or soldering can produce quantities of non-ionizing
combustible substance is spilled on clothing, it should be radiation such that precautionary measures are necessary.
replaced with clean fire resistant clothing before working Protection from possible harmful radiation effects
with open arcs or flame. include the following:
Appropriateeye protectionshould be used at all times. (1) Welding arcs should not be viewed except through
Goggles or equivalent also should be worn to give added welding filterplates, (see Reference 2). Transparentweld-
eye protection. ing curtains are not intended as welding filter plates, but
Insulated gloves should be worn at all times when in rather, are intended to protect passersby from incidental
contact with hot items or handling electrical equipment. exposure.
For more detailed information on personal protection (2) Exposed skin should be protected with adequate
References 2,3,8 and 11 should be consulted. gloves and clothing as specified. See Reference 8.
(3) The casual passerby to welding operations should
J5. Fire Prevention be protected by the use of screens, curtains, or adequate
distance from aisles, walkways, etc.
Molten metal, sparks, slag, and hot work surfaces are (4) Safety glasses with ultraviolet protective side
produced by welding, cutting, and allied processes. shields have been shown to provide some beneficial pro-
These can cause fire or explosion if precautionary mea- tection from ultraviolet radiation produced by welding
sures are not used. arcs.
Explosions have occurred where welding or cutting
has been performed in spaces containing flammable References Cited
gases, vapors, liquid, or dust. All combustible material
should be removed from the work area. Where possible, 1. American Conference of Governmental Industry
move the work to a locationwell away from combustible Hygienists (ACGIH). Threshold limit valuesfor chemi-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
materials. If neither action is possible, combustibles cal substances and physical agents in the workroom
should be protected with a cover of fire resistant mate- environment. Cincinnati, Ohio; American Conference of
rial. All combustible materials should be removed or Governmental Industry Hygienists (ACGIH).
safely protected within a radius of 35 ft. (11 m) around
the work area. 2. American National Standards Institute. Practice
Welding or cutting should not be done in atmospheres for occupational and educational eye and face protec-
containing dangerously reactive or flammable gases, tion, ANSI 287.1 New York American National Stan-
vapors, liquid, or dust. Heat should not be applied to a dards Institute.
container that has held an unknown substance or a
combustible material whose contents when heated can 3. , Safety-toe footwear, ANSI 241.1.
produce flammable or explosive vapors. Adequate ven- New York American National Standards Institute.
tilation should be provided in work areas to prevent 4. American Welding Society. Fumes andgases in the
accumulation of flammable gases, vapors or dusts. Con- welding environment, AWS report. Miami, Florida:
tainers should be cleaned and purged before applying American Welding Society.
heat.
For more detailed information on fire hazards from 5. . Method for sound level measure-
welding and cutting operations, see References 6, 8, 9 ment of manual arc welding and cutting processes,
and 11. ANSI/ AWS F6.1. Miami, Florida.
56. Radiation 6. . Recommended safe practicesfor the
preparation for welding and cuttingcontainers that have
Welding, cutting, and allied operations may produce held hazardous substances, ANSI/ AWS F4.1. Miami,
radiant energy (radiation) harmful to health. Everyone Florida: American Welding Society.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix J/ 337
7. .Safe Practices. (Reprint from Weld- 10. .
National electrical code. NFPA
ing Handbook, Volume 1,Eighth Edition) Miami, Flor- No. 70. Quincy, Massachusetts: National Fire Protec-
ida: American Welding Society. tion Association.
8. .Safety in weldingand cutting,ANSI/ 11. Occupational Safety and Health Administra-
ASC 249.1. Miami, Florida: American WeldingSociety.
tion. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 20 Labor,
9. National Fire Protection Association. Cutting and Chapter XVII, Part 1910; OSHA General Industry
weldingprocesses,NFPA Standard 51B. Quincy, Massa- Standards. Washington, D C U.S. Government Printing
chusetts: National Fire Protection Association. office.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0784265 0500382 9 ~
Appendix K
Ultrasonic Examination of Welds by Alternative Techniques
(Nonmandatory Information)
(This Appendix is not a part of ANSI/AWS D1.l-92, Structural Welding Code-Steel, but is included for
infòrmatiön-purposes only.)
K i . General They have been used by other industries, including the
shipbuilding and offshore structures, for the past 25
The purpose of this Appendixis to describe alternative years. Although they have not been prohibited, they
techniques for ultrasonic examination (UT) of welds. have not been organized and specifically made available
The techniques described are proven methods currently for use in AWS documents. Some of the methods
being used for other applications but not presently included in this section are also contained in the Ameri-
detailed in the Code. The alternative techniques pre- can Petroleum Institute’s API RP 2X,Reconmended
sented require qualified, written procedures, special ultra- Practicesfor Ultrasonic Examination of osfshore Struc-
sonic operator qualifications and special calibration tural Fabrication and Guidelines for Qual@cation of
methods needed to obtain the required accuracy in dis- Ultrasonic Technicians. Additional, useful information
continuity sizing. The use of this Appendix and the can be obtained by reference. For maximum control of
resulting procedures developed, including the applicable discontinuitysizing, emphasis has been placed upon: the
acceptance criteria, are subject to approval by the Engi- UT procedure which must be written and qualified; UT
neer. This Appendix is nonmandatory unless specified technician special requirements; and UT instrumentation
by the Engineer. When so specified, however, the entire and calibrationrequirements. AWS recognizes the inher-
requirements contained herein (as applicable) shall be ent limitations and inconsistencies of ultrasonic exami-
considered mandatory unless specifically modified by nation for discontinuitycharacterizationand sizing. The
the Engineer in writing. accuracies obtainable are required to be proven by the
Applicable requirements of the Code regarding in- UT technician using the applicable procedures andequip-
strumentation and operator qualifications, except as ment. Procedurequalification results should be furnished
amended herein, may be used to supplement this Appen- to the Engineer. AWS makes no claim for accuracies
dix. However, it is not intended that these techniques be possible for using the methods contained herein.
used to supplement the existing requirements of section6
or 10 of the Code since the procedures and techniques
specified therein are complete and represent a different
approach for the UT of welds. K3. UT Procedure
All UT shalí be performed in accordancewith a writ-
Part A ten procedure which shalí contain a minimum of the
Bmic UltrmonicProcedures following information regarding the UT method and
examination techniques:
K2. Introduction (1) The types of weld joint configurations to be
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
examined
The basic UT procedure, instrumentation and opera- (2) Acceptance criteria for the types of weld joints to
tor requirements contained in this Part A are necessary be examined (additional criteria when the acceptance
to ensure maximum accuracy in discontinuity evaluation criteria of 8.15, 9.25, or 10.17 are not invoked by the
and sizing. The methods described herein are not new. Engineer)
Copyright American Welding Society
339
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 07842b5 0500383 O m
340/Appendix K
(3) Type of UT equipment (manufacturer, model qualified by experience in examination of the specific
number, serial number) types of weld joints to be examined.
(4) Type of transducer, including frequency, size,
shape, angle and type of wedge if it is different from those
required from those referenced in 6.15.6 or 6.15.7
(5) Scanning surface preparation and couplant re- K4. Ultrasonic Operator and
quirements Equipment
(6) Type of calibration test block(s) with the appro-
priate reference reflectors In addition to the requirements of 6.7, 6.14, and
(7) Method of calibration and calibration interval 10.19.2, the ultrasonicoperator shall demonstrateability
(8) Method for examining for laminations prior to to use the written procedure, including all special tech-
weld evaluation if the method is different from 6.19.5 niques required and, when discontinuity height and
(9) Weld root index marking and other preliminary length are required, shall establish ability and accuracy
weld marking methods for determining these dimensions.
(10) Scanning pattern and sensitivity requirements Ultrasonic equipment shall meet the requirements of
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(11) Methods for determining discontinuity location 6.15 and as required in this Appendix. Transducers with
height, length and amplitude level frequencies up to 6 MHz, with sizes down to 1/4 in.
(12) Transfer correction methods for surface rough- (6.4 mm) and of any shape may be used provided they are
ness, surface coatings and part curvature, if applicable included in the procedure and properly qualified.
(13) Method of verifying the accuracy of the com-
pleted examination. This verification may be by re-UT
by others (audits), other NDE methods, macroetch spec- K5. Reference Standard
imen, gouging or other visual techniques as may be ap-
proved by the Engineer The standard reflector shall be a 1.5 mm diameter side
(14) Documentation requirements for examinations, drilled hole or equivalent. The reflector may be placed in
including any verifications performed any design of calibration block, weld mock-up or actual
(15) Documentation retention requirements production part at the option of the user. Orientation
The written procedure shall be qualified by testing and tolerances for placement of the reflector are shown
mock-up welds which represent the production welds to in Figure K-l. A recommended calibration block is
be examined. The mock-up welds shali be sectioned, shown in Figure K-2. Alternate possible uses of the
properly examined, and documented to prove satisfac- reflector are shown in Figure K-3. When placed in weld
tory performance of the procedure. The procedure and mock-ups and sections of production weldments, the
ali qualifying data shall be approved by an individual reflector should be in locations where it is difficult to
who has been certified Level III in UT by testing in direct sound beams, thereby ensuring detection of dis-
accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A and who is further continuities in ali areas of interest.
SCANNING SURFACE
--
----
REFLECTING SURFACE
-----
Notes:
1. d, = d2 f0.5 mm d3 = d4 f0.5 mm
SPI = CPp f 1 mm SP3 = CP4 f 1 mm
2. The above tolerancesshouldbe consideredas appropriate.The reflector should, in all cases, be placed in a manner to
permit maximizing the reflection and UT indication. (This is a general comment for all notes in Appendix K.)
Figure K-1 -Standard Reference Reflector (see K5)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix K/341
Note: Dimensions should be required to accommodatesearch units for the sound path distances required.
Figure K-2-Recommended Calibration Block (see K5)
(A) GROOVE WELD WITH BACKING (B) PARTIAL PENETRATION GROOVE WELD
w
P ..........
..A
$;@.::
:..:..:..:......
................
.........
.:.:y .
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(C) GROOVE CORNER WELD (D) GROOVE TEE WELD
(E) T-, K-,AND K-GROOVE WELDS
-
Figure K-3 Typical Standard Reflector
(Located in Weld Mock-ups and Production Welds) (see K5)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
0500385 4 M
342lAppendix K
K6. Calibration Methods K6.2 Compression Wave
Calibration methods described herein are considered K6.2.1 Depth (Horizontal Sweep). Use indications
acceptable and are to be used for accomplishing these from multiple reflections obtained from the thickness of
alternateUT procedures. The Code recognizes that other the calibration standard or from a gaged area of amock-
calibration methods may be preferred by the individual up or production weldment, as shown in Figure K-5.
user. If other methods are used, they should produce Accuracy of calibration should be within f 5%of actual
results which can be shown to be at least equal to the thickness for examination of base metal for laminations
methods recommended herein. The standard reflector de- and f 2% for determining discontinuity size (height and
scribed in K5 should be considered the standard reflector width).
for these and for all other methods which might be used. K6.2.2 Sensitivity Calibration (Standard). Place the
K6.1 Standard Sensitivity. Standard sensitivity should search unit over the standard reflectors at a minimum of
consist of the following: 3 depths to ensure coverage throughout the thickness to
be examined in accordance with Figure K-6. Record the
K6.1.1 Basic Sensitivity. The maximized indication dB values obtained from the maximized indications
from the standard.reflector. from each reflector. Establish a depth amplitude curve
(DAC) or use electronic methods to know the CRT
K6.1.2 Distance Amplitude Correction. Determined indication locations which represent the standard reflec-
from indications from multiple standard reflectors at tor at the various thicknesses to be examined.
depths representing the minimum, middle and maxi-
mum to be examined. K6.2.3 Scanning Sensitivity. Scanning sensitivity
should be standard sensitivity t approximately 6-12 dB
K6.1.3 Transfer Correction. Adjustment for material or as required to verify sound penetration from indica-
type, shape and scanningsurfaceconditions as described tions of surface reflections. Indicationevaluation should
below: be performed with reference to the standard sensitivity
For precise sensitivity standardization, transfer cor- except that standard sensitivity is not required if higher
rection should be performed. This will ensure that the or lower sensitivity is more appropriate for determining
differences in acoustical properties, scanning surfaces the maximum discontinuity size (height and length).
and part shape between the calibration standard and the
calibration block are utiiized when performing the K6.3 Shear Wave
standard sensitivity calibration. Transfer correction K6.3.1 Depth (Horizontal Sweep). Use indications
values should be determined initially before examination from the selected standard reflectors to cover the maxi-
and when material type, shape, thickness and scanning mum depth to be used during examination in accordance
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
surfacesvary such that different values exceeding f 25% with Figure K-7.Accuracy should be within f 1% to
of the original values are expected. Determine the facilitate the most accurate discontinuity height mea-
transfer correction values as shown in Figure K-4. surement. Use the delay technique for discontinuities
Procedure: Placetwo similar angle beam search unitson the calibrationblock or mock-up to be used in the positionshown
above. Using through transmission methods, maximize the indication obtained and obtain a dB value of the indication.
Transfer the same two search units to the part to be examined and orient in the same direction in which scanning will be
performed and obtain a dB value of indications as explained above from at least three locations. The difference in dB
betweenthecalibration blockor mock-upand theaverageofthat obtained from the part to beexaminedshould be recorded
and used to adjust the standard sensitivity.
Figure K-4 -Transfer Correction (see K6.1.3)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-I 72 = 07842b5 0500386 b
Appendix K/343
Figure K-5 -Compression Wave Depth (Horizontal Sweep Calibration) (see K6.2.1)
\
I
ea 1 2 3
I
ALTERNATE BLOCK
Figure K-6 -Compression Wave Sensitivity Calibration(see K6.2.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 0784265 0500387 8 W
344/Appendix K
112 in. 1-112 in. 2-112 in.
DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH
&na
1-112 in.
I I I
1/2 in. 1-112 in. 2-112 in.
Depth below the surface
Example: Delayed technique for
discontinuities between 1.5O -2.5' for
greater accuracy of determining depth
location and height measurement.
I I
1-112 in. 2-112 in.
Figure K-7 -Shear Wave Distance and Sensitivity Calibration (see K6.3.1)
I
with depth greater than approximately 1.5 in. to maxim- (1) Spherical (individual pores and widely spaced
ize the most accurate discontinuity depth reading (and porosity, non-elongated slag)
discontinuity height) accuracy. (2) Cylindrical (elongated slag, aligned pores of por-
K6.3.2 Sensitivity (Standard). Use standard refleu osity, hollow beads)
tors located at the minimum, middle and maximum (3) Planar (incomplete fusion, inadequatejoint pene-
depths below the surface to be used for examhation in tration, cracks)
accordance with Figure K-7. Maximize indications and
establish a DAC or use electronic methods to know the K8.2 The following methods should be used for deter-
CRT indication locations which represent the standard mining basic discontinuity characteristics:
reflector at the various depths selected. Adjust the DAC
based upon the results of the transfer correction. The K8.2.1 Spherical. Sound is reflected equally in all
sensitivity calibration methods described herein are not directions. Indication remains basically unchanged as
essential when actual discontinuity size (height and the search unit is moved around the spherical disconti-
length) is required. In this case, it is only necessary to nuity as shown in Figure K-9.
maintain sufficient sensitivity throughout the part being
examined so that ali discontinuitiesare found and prop- K8.2.2 Cylindrical. Sound is reflected equally in one
erly evaluated. direction but is changed in other directions. Indication
remains basically unchanged when the search unit is
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
moved in one direction but is drastically changed when
K7. Scanning moved in other directions as shown in Figure K-10.
Scanning shall be as specified in 6.24 and 10.19.5. In
addition, for special applications not covered in the K8.2.3 Planar. Sound is reflected at its maximum
above Code references, the scanning methods of Figure from only one angle of incidencewith one plane, Indica-
K-8 should be used, as applicable. tion is changed with any angular movement of the search
unit as shown in Figure K-11. Indications from cracks
typically have multiple peaks as a result of the many dis-
K8. Weld Discontinuity continuity facets usually present.
Characterization Methods UT discontinuity characterization and subsequent
categorization and reportingshould be limited to spheri-
KS.1 Discontinuitiesshould be characterizedas follows: cal, cylindrical, and planar only.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix K/345
SCAN PAST BMHAZ
COMPRESSION WAVE
L T
WELD GROUND FLAT WELD GROUND FLUSH
(PREFERRED)
. .
II '
I I
I
1
SCAN PAST BMHAZ
SHEAR
I ' I
I I
WHEN ACCESSIBLE
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
....:..+:..:..
ggg::.
II) FIXED
DISTANCE
Notes:
1. D-i] E-&-'Denote scanning, otherwise search unit should be at a fixed distance from the weld while scanning
dL1 down the weld.
2. Cross section scanning is shown. It is assumed that scanning will also be performedcompletely down the length of the weld with a
minimum of 25% overlap to ensure 100%coverage. All scanning positions shown may not be required for full coverage. Optional
positions are given in case that inaccessibilityprevents use of some positions.
Figure K-8 -Scanning Methods (see K7)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L * L 92 W O784265 0500389 L W
34ó/Appendix K
A B C
Note: Amplitude and depth are unchanged when the search unit
is maintained at a constant distance from and moved around the
discontinuity.
Figure K-9 -Spherical Discontinuity Characteristics(see K8.2.1)
A B C
Amplitude drops off rapidly as the search unit position is changed
from a normal incident angle with the discontinuity.
<
SIDE VIEW
45" mo 70"
Amplitude remainsunchanged (assuming equal sensitivity calibration
and adjustment for attenuation),distance changes with angle (unless
calibratedto bethesame) assound is moved aroundthe discontinuity.
SAME ANGLE -B A
I
C
L
d4~lpJ-
I
<
'\
I: I II s
SIDE VIEW
A-. B C
Amplitude drops rapidly showing little or no discontinuity indication
with thesameangle but distancechangesasthesearch unit is moved
towards and away from the discontinuity.
Figure K-10 -Cylindrical Discontinuity Characteristics(see Kû.2.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 m 07842b5 0500390 8 m ~~~ ~ ~
Appendix K/ 347
A B C
Amplitude drops off rapidly as the search unit position is changed
PLAN VIEW
\ from a normal incident angle with the discontinuity.
B A C
<~
SIDE VIEW ~1 A B
pJ
C
f i
Amplitude drops slightly at first movement of search unit then drops
rapidly. An envelopeof movement along the baselineshowsdiscontinu-
ity height assearch is movedtowardsand awayfrom thediscontinuity.
Figure K-il -Planar Discontinuity Characteristics(see K8.2.3)
K9. Weld Discontinuity Sizing and K9.2.3 Move the search unit away from the disconti-
Location Methods nuity until the indication height begins to drop rapidly
and continuously towards the base line. Stop and note the
K9.1 Calibration. Calibration should be based upon location of the leading edge of the indication at location C
depth from the surface in accordance with K6. Disconti- in Figure K-12 in relation to the CRT horizontal base line
nuities may be sized with the highest achievable level of scale.
accuracy using the methods described in this section;
however, the user is reminded that UT, like ail other NDT K9.2.4 Obtain the mathematical difference between B
methods, provides relative discontinuity dimensions. and C to determine the height dimension of the disconti-
Discontinuity orientation and shape, coupled with the nuity.
limitations of the NDT method, may result in significant K9.3 Length. Determine the discontinuity length using
variations between relative and actual dimensions. the following methods:
K9.2 Height. Determine the discontinuityheight (depth
dimension) using the following methods: K9.3.1 Determine the orientation of the discontinuity
by manipulation of the search unit to determinethe plane
K9.2.1 Maximize the indication height by moving the and direction of the strongest indication in accordance
search unit to and from the discontinuity in accordance with A of Figure K-13.
with A of Figure K-12. Adjust the indication height to a
known value (e.g., 80% of full screen height (FSH)). K9.3.2 Move the search unit to one end of the discon-
tinuity while keeping part of the indication visible on the
K9.2.2 Move the search unit towards the discontinuity CRT at ail times until the indication drops completely to
until the indication height begins to drop rapidly and the base line. Move the search unit back towards the
continuously towards the base line. Stop and note the discontinuity until the indication height reaches 50% of
location of the leading (left) edge of the indication at the maximum height originally obtained near the end in
location B in Figure K-12in relation to the CRT horizon- accordance with B of Figure K-13. Mark the location on
tal base line scale. A 0.010 inch division scale or metric the end of the discontinuity on the scanning surface or
scale should be used. weld in line with the search unit maximum indication
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500391 T m
348lAppendix K
B A C
A B C
bh-4
Maximize indication height Move search unit towards Move search unit away from
and adjust to a known value. discontinuity until point the discontinuity until point
where indication drops where indication drops
rapidly to the base line. rapidly to the base line.
Mark or note the location. Mark or note location.
- height
h = Discontinuitv -
Discontinuity location is from scanning surface as measured along the CRT. dimension.
Figure K-12 -Discontinuity Height Dimension (see K9.2)
Ar
/
I
Bl
Determine discontinuity orientation and
minimum/maximum indication height.
Move search unit to end B until indication
drops to 1/2 of height near the end. Mark
scanning surface adjacent to search unit
reference center beam reference mark. -
Move search unit to end C and repeat B,
above. Indication length (L) is the distance
between both marks.
'WELDMENT REFERENCE MARK
L = Total length of discontinuity Discontinuity location along the weld is from the weldment reference mark.
Figure K-13 -Discontinuity Length Dimension (see K9.3)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I I - L 92 0784265 0500392 II
Appendix KI349
mark. Perform this marking carefully using a fine line General Classification Relative
marking method. of Discontinuity UT Sensitivity
K9.3.3 Repeat steps above for locating the opposite (a) Planar Highest
end of the discontinuityin accordance with C of Figure (b) Linear
K-13 and mark carefully. (c) Spherical Lowest
K9.3.4 Obtain the length of the discontinuity by
measuring the distance between the two marks in accor- Note: The above tabulation assumes best orientation
dance with Figure K-13. for detection and evaluation.
K9.4 Location- Depth Below the Scanning Surface. K10.3 Size. Discontinuitysize affects accurateinterpre-
The depth location of discontinuitiescan be read directly tation. Planar-type discontinuities with large height or
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
from the CRT horizontal base line scale when using the very little height may give less accurate interpretation
methods described above for determining discontinuity than those of medium height. Small, spherical pores are
height. The reported locationshould be the deepest point difficult to size because of the rapid reflecting surface
determined, unless otherwisespecified, to assist in remo- changes which occur as the sound beam is moved across
val operations. the part.
K9.5 Location-Along the Length of the Weid. The K10.4 Orientation. Discontinuity orientation affects
location of the discontinuity from a known reference UT sensitivity since the highest sensitivity is one that
point can be determined by measuring the difference reflects sound more directly back to the search unit.
from the reference point to the discontinuity length Relative sensitivities in regards to orientation and dis-
marks established for the length. Measurement should continuity types are opposite those shown in the pre-
be made to the beginning of the discontinuity unless vious tables. The UT technician can increase sensitivity
otherwise specified. to discontinuity orientation by selecting a sound beam
angle which is more normal to the discontinuity plane
and reflecting surface. The selection of angles which
match the groove angle will increase sensitivity for
Klo. Problems with Discontinuities planar- and linear-type discontinuities which are most
likely to occur along that plane.
Users of UT for examinations of welds should be
aware of the following potential interpretation problems K10.5 Location. Discontinuitylocationwithin the weld
associated with weld discontinuity characteristics: and adjacent base metal can influence the capability of
K10.1 Type of Discontinuity. Ultrasonic sound has detection and proper evaluation. Discontinuities near
variable sensitivity to weld discontinuities depending the surface are often more easily detected but may be less
upon their type. Relative sensitivity is shown in the easily sized.
followingtables and should be considered during evalua-
tion of discontinuities. The UT technician can change K10.6 Weld Joint Type and Groove Design. The weld
sensitivity to all discontinuity types by changing UT joint type and groove design are important factors affect-
instrument settings, search unit frequency, and size and ing the capabilities of UT for detecting discontinuities.
scanning methods, including scanning patterns and The following are design factors which can cause prob-
coupling. lems and should be considered for their possible affects:
(1) Backings
Relative (2) Bevel angles
Discontinuity Type UT Sensitivity (3) Joint member angles of intercept
(4) Partial penetration welds
(1) Incomplete fusion Highest (5) Tee welds
(2) Cracks (surface) (6) Tubular members
(3) Inadequate penetration (7) Weld surface roughness and contour
(4) Cracks (sub-surface)
(5) Slag (continuous)
(6) Slag (scattered)
(7) Porosity (piping) K l l . Disconîinuity Amplitude Levels
(8) Porosity (cluster) and Weld Classes
(9) Porosity (scattered) Lowest
Discontinuity Amplitude Levels. The following discon-
K10.2 General classification of discontinuities may be tinuity amplitude level categories should be applied in
compared as follows: evaluation of acceptability:
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500393 3 m
350/Appendix K
Level
- Description K12. Acceptance-Rejection Criteria
1 Equal to orgreater than SSL (see Figure K-14) K12.1 Amplitude. The acceptance-rejection criteria of
2 Between the SSL and the DRL (see Figure K-14) Table K1 should apply when amplitude and length are
3 Equal to or less than the DRL(see Figure K-14) the major factors and maximum discontinuity height is
not known or specified.
SSL Standard Sensitivity Level-per Section 6.
SRL Disregard Level = 6 dB less than the SSL. K12.2 Size. When maximum allowable discontinuity
size (height and length) are known and are specified by
Weld Classes. The followingweld classes should be used the Engineer, the actual size (both height and length)
for evaluation of discontinuity acceptability: along with location (depth and along the weld) shall be
Weld determined and reported. Final evaluation and accept-
-
Class Description ance/ rejection shall be by the Engineer.
S Statistically loaded structures
D Dynamically loaded structures
R Tubular structures (substitute for RT) K13. Preparation and Disposition
X Tubular T-, Y-, Kconnections of Reports
A report shall be made which clearly identifies the
work and the area of examination by the ultrasonic
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
operator at the time of examination. The report, as a
minimum, shall contain the information shown on the
sample report form, Figure K-15.
When specified, discontinuities approaching rejecta-
ble size, particularly those about which there is some
doubt in their evaluation, should also be reported.
Before a weld subjectto ultrasonicexamination by the
contractor for the owner is accepted, all report forms
pertainingto the weld, including any that show unaccept-
11 able quality prior to repair, shall be submitted to the
owner upon completion of the work. The contractor’s
The CRTScreen may be markedto show SSL established during obligation to retain ultrasonic reports shall cease (1)
sensitivity calibration with the DRL located 6 dB below. upon delivery of a full set to the owner, or (2) one full
year after completion of the contractor’swork, provided
Figure K-14 -CRT Screen Marking (see K l l ) the owner is given prior written notice.
Table K1
Acceptance-Rejection Criteria (see K12.1)
Maximum
Discontinuity
>SSL= None >SSL= None Figure 10.21 Figure 10.22
o to SSL - 314 in. o to SSL - 112 in. (Utilizes height)
2 2 in. 2 in. (Mid. 1/2 of weld) Figure 10.21 Figure 10.22
314 in. (Top k bottom 1/4 of weld)
3 Disregard
~~ ~ ~
Note: When specified, record Level 3 discontinuitiesfor information.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix K/351
Page of
Project Report No.
Weld I.D. Thickness Class
UT Procedure No. Technique
UT Instrument
Search Unit: No. Angle Freq. Size
RESULT (identify and describe each discontinuity)
Ampl. Length Height
No. Location from Level (in.) (in.) Comments
Sketch (identify each discontinuity listed above)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NDE Tech. Contractor
Date Examined Approved
Date Approved
-
Figure K-15 Report of Ultrasonic Examination
(Alternative Procedure) (see K13)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Commentary on
Structural Welding Code
-Steel
Prepared by
AWS Structural Welding Committee
Under the Direction of
AWS Technical Activities Committee
Approved by
AWS Board of Directors
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society 353
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 92 W 07842b.5 O500396 9 W
~ ~ _c___
_-
Foreword
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(This Foreword is not a part of the Commentasr of ANSI/ AWS Dl.1-92, Structura€Welding Code-Steel, but is
included for information purposes only.)
This commentary on ANSI1AWS D1.1-92, has been prepared to generate better understanding in the application of
the Code to welding in steel construction.
Since the Code is written in the form of a specification, it cannot present background material or discuss the
Committee’s intent; it is the function of this commentary to filI this need.
Suggestions for application as well as clarificationof Code requirements are offered with specificemphasis on new or
revised sections that may be less f d i a r to the user.
Since publication of the first edition of the Code, the nature of inquiriesdirected to the American Welding Society and
the StructuralWelding Committeehas indicated that there are some requirementsinthe Codethat are either difficultto
understand or not sufficiently specific, and others that appear to be overly conservative.
It should be recognized that the fundamental premise of the Code is to provide general stipulationsapplicable to any
situation and to leave sufficient latitude for the exercise of enguieerkg judgement.
Another point to be recognizedisthat the Code representsthe collective experience of the Committee and while some
provisions may seem overly conservative, they have been based on sound en&eering practice.
The Committee, therefore, believes that a commentary is the most suitable means to provide darification as well as
proper interpretation of many of the Code requirements. Obviously, the size of the commentary had to impose some
limitations with respect to the extent of coverage.
This commentary is not intended to provide a hktoncal background of the development of the Code, nor is it
intended to provide a detailed resume of the studies and research data reviewed by the Committee in formulating the
provisions of the Code.
Generally, the Code does not treat such design considerations as loading and the computation of stresses for the
purpose of proportioning the load-carrying members of the structure and their connections. Such considerations are
assumed to be covered elsewhere, in a general building code, bridge specification, or similar document.
As an exception, the Code does provide alíowable stresses in welds, fatigue provisions for welds in dynamicafly
loaded structures and tubularstructures, and strengthlimitations for tubular connections. These provisions are related
to particular properties of welded connections.
The Committee has endeavored to produce auseful document suitable in language, form, and coverage for weldingin
steel construction. The Code provides a means for establishingwelding standards for use in design and construction by
the owner or the owner’s designated representative. The Code incorporates provisions for regulation of welding that are
considered necessary for public safety.
The Committee recommends that the owner or owner’s representativebe guided by this commentary in applicationof
the Code to the welded structure. The commentary is not intended to supplement Code requirements, but only to
provide a useful document for interpretation and application of the Code; none of its provisions are binding.
It is the intention of the Structural Welding Committee to revise the commentary on a regufar basis so that
commentary on changes to the Code can be promptly supplied to the user. In this manner, the commentary wiil always
be current with the edition of the Structura€FVeidfng Code-Steelwith which it is bound.
Changes in the commentary have been indicated by a single vertical line that appears in the margin immediately
adjacent to the paragraph affected. Changes to tables and figures, as well as new tables or figures. have been so indicated.
Copyright American Welding Society
355
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Commentary on
Structural Welding Code -Steel
a.General Provisions
Note: All refermces to numbered paragraphs, tables, and$gures, unless otherw.,a indicated, rder to subsections,
fables,orfigures in ANSIIA WS DI. I , Structural Welding Code- Steel. References ta subsections, tables, orfgures
iit this cottinzenfary are prefxed with a C. Hence, Figure 8.6 is in ANSIIA W S D1.1,while Figure C8.6 is in this
commentary.
Cl.1 Application product should be the Engineer's decision. When modifi-
cations are approved,evaluationof suitabilityfor service
The Structural Welding Code-Steel, hereinafter using modern fracture mechanics techniques, a history
referred to as the Code, provides welding requirements of satisfactory service in similar structures, or experi-
for the construction of steel structures. It is intended to mental evidence is recognized as a suitabIe basis for
be complimentarywith any generalcode or specification alternate acceptance criteria for welds.
for design and construction of steel structures.
When using the Code for other structures, owners,
architects. and engineersshould recognize that not all of
its provisions may be applicable or suitable to their Cl.2 Base Meta€2
particular structure. However, any modifications of the
Code deemed necessary by these authorities should be The ASTM A6 and A20 specifications govern the
clearly referenced in the contractual agreement between deliveryrequirementsfor steels, provide for dimensional
the owner and the contractor.' tolerances, delineate the qudity requirements, and out-
line the type of mill conditionkg.
C1.1.1 The criteriaprovided insection 3, Workmanship, Material used for structural applications is usually
of the Code are based upon knowledgeablejudgment of furnished in the as-rolled condition. The Engineer
what is achievable by a qualified welder. The criteria in should recognize that surface imperfections (seams,
section 3 should not be considered as a boundary of scabs, etc.) acceptableunder A6 and A20 may be present
suitability for service. Suitability for service analysis on the material received at the fabricating shop. Special
would lead to widely varying workmanship criteria surfacefinish quality, when needed in as-rolled products,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
unsuitable for a standard code. Furthermore, in some should be specified in the information furnished to the
cases, the criteria woujd be more liberal than what is bidders.
desirable and producible by a qualified welder. In
general, the appropriate quality acceptance criteria and
whether a deviation is harmful to the end use of the
2. Since all steel specificationsapprovedby the Code for use ia
statically loaded structures, dynamicaEy loaded structures, and
tubular structures are listed in 102, the general provisions for
1. As used in thiscommentary,contractordesignates the party approved base metals wiff be discussed in C10.2. As an excep-
responsible for performing the welding under the Code. The tion, specific provisions applicable only to staticaIky loaded
term is used collectively to mean contractor, fabricator, erec- structures or dynamically loaded structures are discussed in
tor, manufacturer, etc. C8.2 or C9.2 respectively.
Copyright American Welding Society
357
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D 4 - L 92 m O784265 0500398 2 m
C1.3 Welding Processes quirements for prequalified joints in tubular construc-
tion are given in section 10, Tubular Structures.
Certain shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal The use of prequalified joints and procedures does not
arc (exc1udhgthe short circuiting mode of metal transfer necessarily guarantee sound welds. Fabrication capabil-
acrossthe arc), and flux cored arc welding proceduresin ity is still required, together with effective and knowl-
conjunctionwith certain related types of joints have been edgeable weIding supervision to consistently produce
thoroughly tested and have a long record of proven sound welds.
satisfactory performance. These weIding procedures and The Code does not prohibit the use of any welding
joints are designated as prequalified and may be used process. It also imposes no limitation on the use of any
without tests or qualification (see 5.1 and 5.2). other type of joint; nor does it impose any procedural
Prequalified provisions are given in section 2, Prequal- restrictions on any of the welding processes. It provides
ified Joint Details; section 3, Workmanship; and section for the acceptance of such joints, wefdingprocesses, and
4, Technique. Section 4 includes welding procedures, procedures on the basis of a successful qualification by
with specific reference to preheat, filler metaIs, electrode the contractor conducted in accordance with the require-
size, and other pertinent requirements. Additional re- ments of the Code (see 5.2).
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS DL.1 92 0784265 0500399 4 ~ ~ ~
C2.13 The engineer preparing contract designdrawings C2.7.1 Minimum Fület Weld Sizes for Requalified
cannot specify the depth of groove (S) without knowing Joints. ï h e Code specifies minimum fillet weld sizes
the welding process and the position of welding. The based upon two independent considerations.
Code is explicit in stipulatingthat only the weld size (E) is (I) For non-low hydrogen processes, the minimum
to be specified on design drawings for partial joint pene- size specified is intended to ensure sufficientheat input to
tration groove welds (2.1.3.1). This allows the contractor reduce the possibility of cracking in either the heat-
to produce the weld size by assigning adepth of prepara- affected zone or weld metal.
tion to grooves shown onshop drawings as related to the (2) When possibility of cracking is reduced by use of
contractor’s choice of welding process and position of low hydrogen processes or by non-low hydrogen pro-
welding. cesses using a procedure established in accordance with
The root penetration will generally depend on the 4.2.2, the specified minimum is intended to maintain
angle subtended at the root of the groove in combination reasonable proportionality with the thinner connected
with the root opening, the welding position, and the parts.
welding process. For joints using bevel- and V-groove in both cases, the minimum size applies if it is larger
welds, these factors determine the relationship between than the size required to satisfy design requirements.
the depth of preparation and the weld size for prequali- The intent of Table 2.2 is further clasified as follows:
fied partial joint penetration groove welds. Base metal thickness of 3f 4 in. (19 mm) and under are
exempt from preheat in accordance with Table 4.3.
Should fillet weld sizes greater than the minimum sizes
be required for these thicknesses, then each individual
C2.5 Partial Joint Penetration pass of multiple-pass welds must represent the same heat
Groove Welds input per inch of weld length as provided by the min-
imum fillet size required by Table 2.2.
A partial joint penetration groove weld has an
unwelded portion at the root of the weid. This condition
may also exist in joints we€dedfrom one side without €2.8 Plug Welds and Slot Welds
backing, and, therefore, the Code considers them partial
joint penetration groove welds except as modified in Plug and slot welds conforming to the dimensional
10.13.I. requirements of 2.8, welded by techniques prescribed in
The unwelded portions are no more harmful than 4.21 or 4.22 and using materials approved by 8.2,9.2, or
those in fillet welded joints. These unwelded portions 10.2, are considered prequayied and may be used with-
constitute a stressraiser having significancewhen fatigue out performing joint welding procedure qualification
loads are applied transverselyto thejoint. This condition tests.
is reflected in the applicable fatigue criteria. C2.9.2 After preparation, the second side of double
However, when the load is applied longitudinally, weldedjoints may not exactly match the sketches shown
there is no appreciable reduction in fatigue strength. for prequalified welded joints in Figure 2.4 due to inher-
Irrespective of the rules governingthe service application ent limitations of the back gouging process. U- and
of these particular grooves, the eccentricity of shrinkage J-shapes may appear to be combined with V-and bevel
forces in relation to the center of gravity of the material shapes. This is an acceptable condition.
will result in angular distortion on cooling after welding.
This same eccentricity will also tend to cause rotation in C2.9.5-Ct.10.5 Corner Joint Details. ï h e Code per-
transfer of axial load transversely across thejoint. There- mits an alternative option for preparation of the groove
fore, means must be applied to restrain or preclude such in one or both membersfor all bevel- and J-groove welds
rotation, both during fabrication and in service. in corner joints as shown in Figure C2.1.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 H 07842b5 0500400 7 H
360 Commentary
This provision was prompted by Iamellar tearing con- plate. This can easily be done by preparing the groove in
siderations permitting all or part of the preparation in both memben {angle fi).
the vertka1 member of the joint. Such groove prepara-
tion reduces the residual tensile stresses, arising from
shrinkage of welds on cooling, that act in the through- Figure 2.6 -Effective Weld Size of Flare-Bevel-
thickness direction in a single vertical plane, as shown in Groove Welded Joints. Tests have been performed an
prequalified corner joints diagrammed in Figures 2.5 cold formed ASTM A500 material exhibiting a "c"
and 2.6. Therefore, the probability of lamellar tearing dimension as small as Ti with a nombal radius af2t. As
can be reduced for thesejoints by the groove preparation the radius increases, the "c" dimension also increases.
now permitted by the Code. However, some unprepared The corner curvature may not be a quadrant of a circle
thickness, "a," as shown in Figure C2.1 must be main- tangent to the sides. The corner dimension, "c: may be
tained to prevent melting of the top part of the vertical less than the radius of the corner.
7 Is'
/' ß INVOLVES PREPARATION IN
'' BOTH PLATES IN THE CORNER
JOINT. USED WHEN, FOR A
MINIMUM "a''THICKNESS, THE
VERTICAL PLATE CANNOT
ACCOMMODATE cx GROOVE
a=ß
_ia t
Figure C2.1- DetaiIs of Alternative Groove Preparations €or Prequalified
Corner Joints (see C2.9.5-2.10.5)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 92 m 07842b.5 0500401 9 ~~ m
c3. Workmanship
C3.1 General paratively slow speeds, and, under these conditions,
gases formed may have time to escape before the molten
C3.1.1 The criteria contained in section 3, Workman- meta1 solidifies.
ship, are intended to provide definition to the producer, When discontinuitiesthat would adverselyaffect weld
supervisor,engineer and welder of what constitutes good quality are present at locationsto be welded, the contrac-
workmanship. Compliancewith the criteriais achievable tor is expected to repair them in accordance with 3.2.3.
and expected. If the workmanship criteriaarenot gener-
aüy met, it constitutes a signal for corrective action. C3.2.2 Corrections are permitted for thermal cut sur-
C3.1.4 Experience has shown that welding personnel faces that exceed the maximum permissible surface
cannot produce optimum results when working in an roughness values. Occasional notches or gouges of
environment where the temperature is lower than O O F limited depth may be corrected, the deeper ones only
(-18OC). Reference is made in 3.1.4 to 4.2 relative to the with approval. Depth limitationsrepresent the collective
use of a heated structureor shelter to protect the welder, judgement of the Committee and reflect on the structural
and the area being welded, from inclement weather con- requirements and typical workmanship capability of the
ditions. If the temperature in this structure or shelter contractor.
provides an environment at O O F (-18OC), or above, the By referring to “occasional notches and gouges,” the
prohibition of 3.1.46 not applicable. The environmenta€ Committee refrained from assigning any numerical
conditions inside the structure or shelter do not alter the values on the assumption that the Engineer-being the
preheat or interpass temperature requirements for base one most familiar with the specific conditions of the
metais stated ekewhere in the Code. structure-wifl be a better judge of what is acceptable.
The Engineer may choose to establish the acceptance
C3.1.5 Either or both legs of Wlet welds may be over- criteria for masional notches and gouges.
sized without correction, provided the excess does not
interfere with satisfactoryend use of amember. Attempts C3.2.3 Mil1induced defects observed on cut surfaces are
to remove excess material from oversizedwelds serve no caused by entrapped slag or refractory inclusions, deox-
purpose. Adequacy of throat dimension and confom- idation products, or blow holes. The repair procedures
ance to weld profile of 3.6 should be the only acceptance for discontinuities of cut surfaces may not be adequate
criteria. where tension is applied in the through-thickness direo
tion of the material. For other directionsof loading, this
article permits some lamination type discontinuities in
the material. Experience and tests have shown that lami-
C3.2 Preparation of Base Meta1 nations parallel to the direction of tensile stresses do not
generally adversely affect the loadcarrying capacity of a
C3.2.1 Girder web-to-fíangewelds are usually minimum structural member. The user should note that the repair
size fillet welds deposited at relatively high speeds; these procedures of 3.2.3 are on€yintended for correction of
welds may exhibit piping porosity when welded over material with sheared or thermal cut edges.
heavy mill scale often found on thick flange plates. It is
only for these flange-to-web welds in girders that the C3.2.4 Statically loaded and tubular structures permit,
mandatory requirement to completely remove mill scaIe and generally require, a smaller reentrant corner radius
applies. than is permitted for dynamically loaded structures. The
In stiffener-to-web welds, iight mill scale on the thin smaller radius is necessary for some standard bolted or
members forming the joints reduces the probabiíity of riveted connections.
piping porosity. In columns, the web-to-flange welds are See Figure C3.1 €or examples of unacceptable reen-
usually large, the multipíe-pass welds are made at com- trant corners.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
0500402 O W .
362jCommentary
C3.2.5 The Code does not specify a minimum radius for in orthogonal directions, and to provide adequate clear-
cornersof beam copesand weld access holes of hot rolled ance for the exercise of high quality workmanship in hole
beams or welded built-up cross sections because any preparation, welding, and ease of inspection.
arbitrady selected &&mum radius would extend up WeIded closure of weld access holes is not recom-
into the beam fillet or the bottom of the flange, in some mended.
cases, making the radius extremely difficult or impos- When weld access holes must be closed for cosmetic or
sible to provide. Further, the peak stress can be accom- corrosion protection reasons, seafing by use of mastic
modated only by localized yielding, and the magnitude materials is preferable to welding.
of the elastic stress concentration factors is not sign&
cmtly affected by the differencesin radii of any practical C3.2.6 Oxygen gouging on quenched and tempered or
size. Figure C3.2 shows examples of good practice for normalized steel is prohibited because of the high heat
forming copes and weld access holes. input of the process (see C4.3).
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C3.2.5.1 Solidified but Stil hot weld metal contracts C3.2.7 Heat upsetting (also referred to as ffame shrink-
sign%cant€yas it cools to ambient temperature. Shrink- ing) is deformation of a member by application of Iocal-
age of Iarge we€dsbetween elements which are not free to ized heat. It is permitted for the correction of moderate
move to accommodate the shrinkage induced strains in variations from specified dimensions. The upsetting is
the material adjacent to the weld can exceed the yieId accomplished by careful application of heat with the
point strain. In thick material, the weld shrinkage is resulting temperature not exceeding the maximum
restrained ìn the thickness directions as well as in the temperature specified in 3.7.3.
width and length directions, causing triaxial stresses to
develop that may inhibit the ability of ductile steel to
deform in P ductile manner. Under these conditions, the C3.3 Assembly
possibility of brittle fracture increases.
Generously sized weld access holes, Figure 3.2, are C3.3.1 Except €or the separation of faying surfaces in
required to provide increased rekf from concentrated lap joints and backing bars, a gap of 3j í6 in. (5 mm)
wefd shrinkage strains, to avoid close juncture of welds maximurn is perniitted for fillet welding material not
POiNf OF TANGENCY
POINT OF TANGENCY
MIN RADIUS FOR
OFFSET CUTTING B€YOND POIN
Figure C3.1- Examples of Unacceptable Reentrant Corners (see C3.2.4)
ACCEPTABLE PROFELE
---- ----
---- ---_
1
BEVEL FLANGE CUT FIRST
TO PLACE POTENTIAL NOTCH
A IN WASTE MATERIAL
A
-
Figure C3.2 ExampIes of Good Practice for Cutting Copes (see C3.2.5)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 = 07842b5 0500483
-~2 W ~
Workmanship[ 363
exceeding 3 in. (76 mm) in thickness. For material over jacking loads, additional stresses may act upon the
3 in. (76 mrn), the. maximum permissible gap is 5 j 16in. weIds. Any gap li 16 in. (1.6 mm) or greater in size
(8 mm). requires an increase in size of fillet by the amount of
These gaps are necessitated by the allowabfe mill toìer- separation.
ances and inability to bring thick parts into closer align-
ment. The Code presupposes straightening of material C3.3.2 See C3.2.1.
prior to assembly or an application of external load C3.3.3 Typica€sketches of the application of the align-
mechanism to force and keep the materia1 in aggnment nient requirements for abutting parts to be joined in
during assembly. welds in butt joints are shown in Figures C3.3 and C3.4.
These gaps may require sealing either with a weld or
other material capableof supportingmolten weld metal. C3.3.4.1 Root openings wider than those permitted
It should be realized that upon release of any external by the table in 3.3.4 may be corrected by building up one
tl
-
10
FOR EQUAL THICKNESS
or 2
10
FOR UNEQUAL TH~CKNESS
7 PLAN€ OF THEORETICAL
1 .. .- ... .-. .-
\ II i ft
, I
Note: An offset not exceeding 10%of the thickness of the thinner
part joined, but in no case more than 1/8 in.p mm), may be
permiited as a departure from the theoretical alignment.
Figure C3.3 -Permissible Offset in Abutting Members (see C3.3.3)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ i---'-
y/
i
I THIS PORTION PULLED f
INTO ALIGNMENT
Note: In correcting misalignmentthat exceeds the permissible
allowance, the parts shall not be drawn to a slope
greater than 1/2in.(l3 mm) in i 2 in4305 mm).
Figure î3.4 -Correction of Misaligned Members (see C3.3.3)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500404 4 m ~
or both sides of the groove faces by welding. In correct- with other members during erection. Members of box
ing root opening, the user is cautioned to obtain the cross sections are approximately loo0 times as stiff in
necessary approvals from the Engineer where required. torsion as an open I or W shape with equivalent bending
The f i a l weld is to be made only after thejoint has been and area section properties. Once a closed box section
corrected to conform to the specified root opening toler- has been welded, it is extremely difficult to correct any
ance, thus keeping shrinkage to a minimum. twist that may have been built in without cutting one
corner apart and rewelding. Because twist resulting from
C3.3.7 Tack Welds. Tack weids must comply with the wejdingis not entirely predictable and extremelydifficult
same workmanship, preheat, etc., and quality criteria to correct in closed box members, the following app€y.
required for fulished welds, unless remelted and incor- (1) Appropriate provisions should be incorporatedin
porated in final submerged arc welds. design to ensure reliable service performance of such
members with some arbitrary measure of twist.
(2) Due cognizance should be taken of the size of the
C3.5 Dimensional Tolerances element, of the effect of the twist when placing cement on
the structure, and the use of such connectiondetailsthat
C3.5.1.l and C3.5.f.2 Permissiblevariationinstraight- will satisfactorily accommodate the twist.
ness of welded built-up members are the same as those
spesied in ASTM A6 for hot rolíed shapes. C3.5.2 Figure C3.7 austrates application of the code
requirement.
C3.5.1.3 The cambering of welded beams or girders is
used to eliminate the appearance of sagging or to match C3.5.4 Tolerances specified in 3.5 are limited to rou-
efevation of adjacent building components when the tinely encountered cases. Dimensional tolerances not
member is fully loaded. covered in 3.5 should be established to reflect construc-
Although the tolerance on camber is of less impor- tion or suitability for service requirements.
tance than camber per se, for consistency, allowable
variation in camber is based upon the typical loading
case of distributed load which causes a parabolic
deffected shape.
The tolerances shown are to be measured when C3-6 WeId Profiies
members are assembled to drill holes for field splices or C3.6.1 The 1982 edition changed the f i e t weid con-
ta prepare field welded splices {see Figure C3.5). vexity requirements in such a way that the maximum
When the deck is designed with aconcrete haunch, the convexity formula applies not only to the total face
1-112 in. (38 mm) tolerance at mid-span is based upon width of the weld, but also to the width of an individual
an assumed 2 in. (50 mm) design haunch. The 1/2 in. bead on the face of a multipass weld. This was done to
(13 mm) difference is for field deviations and other eliminate the possibility of accepting a narrow “ropey”
contingencies. bead on the face of an otherwise acceptable weld. The
When the contractor checks individualmembers, care new formula, which is based on the “width of face,”
should be exercised to assure that the tolerances of the provides the same convexity requirement asthe previous
assembfy will be met. formuta which was based on “leg size.”
There are two sets of tolerances for permissible varia- When afílet weld is started, the weld metal, due to its
tion from specified camber. The first set of tolerances surface tension, is rounded at the end. Sometimes this is
applies to allwelded beams and girders, except members such that there is aslight curveinward. Also, at both the
whose top flange is embedded in concrete without a start and finishing ends, this curve prevents the weld
designed concretehaunch. Here the camber toleranceis from being fulI size to the very end. Therefore, these
positive with no minus tolerance permitted. portions are not included as part of the effective weld
The second set of tolerances applies to welded members length. If the designer has any concern relative to the
where the top Bange is embedded in concrete without a notch effects of the ends, a continuousfdlet we€dshould
designed haunch; the variation permitted has both a plus be specified which would generally reduce the required
and minus tolerance. weld size.
C3.5.3.7 The combined warpage and tilt A of the
fIange of welded beams and girders is measured as shown
in Figure C3.6.In the Committee’s judgement,this toler-
ance is easier to use than the ASTM A6 specification C3.7 Repairs
criteria, although both sets of tolerances are in reason-
able agreement. 0.7.2 The Code permits the contractors, at their
ToIerance on twist is not specified because the tor- option, to either repair or remove and replace an un-
sional stiffness of open (non-box) shapes is very low, acceptable weld. It is not the intent of the Code to give
such that twist is readily eliminated by interconnection the Inspectorauthorityto specifythe mode of correction.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0 7 8 4 2 6 5 0500405 b =
~
Workmanshipj 365
F.S. = FIELD SPLICE
TYPICAL GIRDER ASSEMBLY
ALTERNATE REF. LINE -
1
>.
ALTERNATE
ALTERNATE
CAMBERDIMENSION 7 2 \
1
DETAILED
CAMBER SHAPE 7
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
-
CAMBER
I- DIMENSION
U
aa G
z r-'
2:
aa
3 3
v) v)
-
O CI
z
w S z
* w
TYPICAL GIRDER ASSEMBLY SHOWING SAG CURVE
Note: Plus tolerance indicates point is above the detailed camber shape.
Minus tolerance indicates point is below the detailed camber shape.
Figure C3.5 -Illustration Shawhg Camber Measurement Methods (see C3.5.1.3)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 m 0784265 0500406 8 m
~~ ~-
3661Commentary
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
W (in.)
Q fin.) 5 -OR 1/4 in. (6mm),WHICHEVER IS GREATER
1 00
Figure C3.6 -Measurement of F h g e Warpage and Tilt (see C3.5.1.7)
C3.7.3 Application of localized heat is permitted for C3.8 Peening
straighteningmembers;however, this must be done care-
fully sa as not to exceed temperature limitations that Peening of the surface layer of the weid is prohibited
would adversely affect the properties of the steel. because mechanical working of the surface may mask
Quenched and tempered steels should not be heated otherwise rejectable surface discontinuities. For similar
above f I O O O F (595' C) because deteriorationof mechan- reasons, the use of lightweight vibrating tools for slag
ical properties may possibly result from the formation of removal shGuld be used with discretion.
an undesirable microstructure when cooled to room
temperature. other steels should not be heated above C3.10 Arc Strikes
12W°F (65OoCf to avoid the possibility of undesirable
transformation products or grain coarsening, or both. Arc strikes result in heating and very rapid cooling.
When located outside the intended weld area, they may
C3.7.7 Restoration of UnaceeptabieHoles by Welding. result in hardening or localized cracking, and may serve
The technique for making plug welds set forth in 4.21 of as potential sites for initiating fracture.
this Code is not satisfactoryfor restoringthe entire cross
section of the base metal at mislocated holes. Flug welds
are intended to transmit shear from one plane surface to C3.11 Weld Cleaning
another and not to develop the fuH cross section of the
hoIe. One method of restoring unacceptable holes is to The renioval of slag from a deposited weld bead is
fill one-half the depth or less with steel backing of the mandatory to prevent the inclusion of the slag in any
same material specifcation as the base metal, gouge an following bead and to allow for visual inspection.
elongated boat-shaped cavity down to the backing, then
fill the cavity by welding using the stringer bead C3.12 Weld Termination
technique. After the first side is welded, gouge another
elongated boat-shaped cavity completely removing the The termination, start or stop, of a groove weld tends
temporary backing on the second side, and complete by to have more discontinuities than are generally found
welding using the stringer bead technique. elsewhere in the weld. This is due to the mechanism of
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Workmanship/ 367
BEARING OF STIFFENER
ON FLANGE-CONTACT OVER
75% OF SHADED AREA.
MAXIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN
FLANGE AND BASE PLATE OR
SEAT-0.01 in. (0.25 mmj OVER
75% OF PROJECTED AREA AND
NOT MORE THAN li332 in. (1 mmj
OVEE REit/iAlNlh'G 25% OF PRQJFCTTED
PROJECTED AREA OF
WEB Ai\!D SflFFENER8
i./I//
-_ANGLE BETWEEN F 2E OF WEB
/---
AND FLANGE SURFACE - NOT
MORE THAN 90' THROUGHOUT
BEARING LENGTH
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
,-A.* - MAXIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN
FLANGE AND BASE PLATE OR
~~~~
.... SEAT-0.01 in. (0.25 mm) OVER
............
....
....
75% OF PROJECTED AREA AND
PROJECTED AREA OF WEB ....
....
...
.... NOT MORE THAN fi32 in. (1mm)
....
....
...
.... OVER REMAINING LENGTH OF BEARING
....
....
........
. ....
.
GIRDER WITHOUT BEARING STIFFENERS
Figure C3.7 -Tolerances at Bearing Points (see C3.5.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500408 1
368/Commentary
starting and stoppingthe arc. Hence, we€dtabs should be used, it shall be continuous for the entire length of the
used to place these zones outside the finished, functional weld (see 3,132). When not continuous, the unwelded
we€dwhere they can be removed as required by 3.12.2or butt joint of the backing wiU act as a stress raiser that
3.12.3. Weld tabs will also help maintain the fui1 cross may initiate cracking.
section of the weid throughout its specified length. It is
important that they be installed in a manner that will C3.13.2 It is imperative that steel backing be continuous
prevent cracks from forming in the area where the weld for the full length of the weld. Experiencehas shown that
tab is joined to the member. a tightly fitted, but unwelded square butt joÍnt in steel
backing constitutes a severe notch that potentially leads
to transversecracks in the weld. Such cracks will, in most
C3.13 Groove Weld Backing cases, propagate into the base metal.
Atl prequaIified complete joint penetration groove C3.13.4 Steelbacking transverseto applied stressfonns
welds made from one side oniy, except as permitted for a point of stress concentration and may be a source of
tubular structures, are required to have complete fusion fatigue crack initiation in cycIkally loaded structures.
of the weld metal with it steel backing. Other backing, Therefore, the provisions of 3.13.4 require the removal
such as listed in footnote 7 of 3.3.f may be used, if of backing that is transverseto the direction of computed
quaXi& in accordance with 5.2. When steel backing is stress in dynamically loaded structures.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 m 0784265 0500409
- 3 m
c4. Technique
C4.1 Filler Metal R quirements C4.2 Reh at and Interpass
The electrodes and electrode-fluxcombinationsmatch-
Temperature Requirements
ing the approved base metals for use in prequagied The principle of applyingheat until a certain tempera-
joints are listed in Table 4.1, matching filler metal ture is reached and then maintainhg that temperature as
requirements. In this table, groups of steel specifications a minimum is used to control the cooGng rate of weld
are matched with fiilfer metal classificationshaving sim- metal and adjacent base metal. The higher temperature
ilar tensile strengths. In joints involvingbase metals that permits more rapid hydrogen diffusion and reduces the
differ in tensile strengths, electrodes applicable to the tendency for co€dcracking. The entire part or only the
lower strength materialmay be used provided they are of metal in the vicinity of the joint to be welded may be
the low hydrogen type if the higher strength base metal preheated (see Note 3 in Table 4.3). For a given set of
requires the use of such electrodes. welding conditions, coolingrates will be fasterfor a weld
made without preheat than for a weld made with pre-
C4.1.4 The requirements in this paragraph are for ex- heat. The higher preheat temperatures result in slower
posed, bare, unpainted applications of ASTM A242 and cooling rates. When cooling is sufficiently slow, it will
A588 steel where atmospheric corrosion resistance and effectively reduce hardening and cracking.
coloring characteristicssimilarto those of the base meta€ For quenched and tempered steels, slow cooling is not
are required. The fiier metals specifiedinTable4.2are to desirable and is not recommended by the steel producer.
be used to meet this requirement. When welding these It should be emphasized that temperatures in Table
steels for other applications,the electrode,the electrode- 4.3 are minimum temperatures, and preheat and inter-
flux combination, or grade of weld metal specified in pass temperatures must be sufficiently high to ensure
Table 4.1 is satisfactory. sound welds. The amount of preheat required to slow
The use of filler metais other than those listed inTable down cooling rates so as t o produce crack-free, ductile
4.2 for welding ASTM A242 and A588 steel (used in joints will depend on:
bare, exposed applications) is permitted for certain size (if The ambient temperature
single-pass fillets (related to welding process), as shown (2) Heat from the arc
in 4.1.5. Here, the amount of weld metal-base metal (3) Heat dissipation of the joint
admixture results in weld metal coloring and atmo- (4) Chemistry of the steel (weldability1
spheric corrosion characteristics similar to the base (5) Hydrogen content of deposited weid metal
metal. (6) Degree of restraint in the joint
In multiple-pass welds, a filler metal from Table 4.1 Point 1 is considered above.
may be used to fill thejoint except for the last two layers. Point 2 is not presently considered in the Code.
Filler metal as specified in Table 4.2 must be used for the Point 3 is partly expressed in the thickness of material.
last two surface layers and ends of welds. Point 4 is expressed indirectly in grouping of steel
Table 4.2 This table has been updated to the latest filler designations.
metal specification classifications. For each welding Point 5 is presently expressed either as non-lm
process (verticalcolumn), the electrodeshave been listed hydrogen welding process or a low hydrogen welding
in preferred order of usage based on best match of process.
chemical and mechanical properties. Some new elec- Point 6 is least tangible and only the general condition
trodes have been added; others have been dropped is recognized in the provisions of Table 4.3.
because they are most suitable for use in the stress Based on these factors, the requirements of Table 4.3
relieved condition. Electrodes listed on the same hori- should not be considered allencompassing, and the
zontal line across the tabk are equivalent in chemicaì emphasison preheat and interpasstemperatures as being
composition of the electrode or deposited weld metal. minimum temperatures assumes added validity.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
369
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 9 2 W O784265 0500410 T W
-
3701 Commentary
Caution should be used in preheating quenched and Part B
tempered steel, and the heat input must not exceed the Shielded Metal Are Welding
steel producer's recommendation (see 4.3).
C4.3 Heat Input for Quenched and
C4.5 Electrodes for Shielded Metal
Tempered Steel Arc Welding
The ability of low hydrogen electrodes to prevent
The strength and toughness of the heat-affected zone underbead cracking is dependent on the moisture con-
of welds in quenched and tempered steels are related to tent in the coating. During welding, the moisture disso-
the cooling rate. Contrary to principles applicable to ciates into hydrogen and oxygen; hydrogen is absorbed
other steek, the fairly rapid dissipation of welding heat is in the molten metal and porosity and cracks may appear
needed to retain adequate strength and toughness. The in the weld after the weld metal solidifies. The provisions
cooling rate of the austenitized heat-affected zone must of the Code for handling, storage, drying, and use of low
be sufficient€yrapid to emme the formation of the harden- hydrogen electrodes should be strictly adhered to in
ing constituentsin the steel microstructure. Overheating order to prevent moisture absorption by the coating
of quenched and tempered steelfollowed by slow cooling material.
prevents the formation of a hardened microstructure.
The deposition of many small weld beads improves C4.5.2 For carbonsteellow hydrogen electrodes, ANSI/
the notch toughness of the weld by grain refining and the AWS A5.1, Specificationfor Carbon Steel Covered Arc
tempering action of ensuingpasses. A weave bead, with Welding Electrodes, specifies no moisture limit for the
its slower trave1 speed, increases heat input and is there- Iow hydrogen coating. However, the appendix to
fore not recommended. Because the maximum heat ANSIIAWS A5.1 states it should be less than 0.6%.
input €or various quenched and tempered steels varies Alloy steel low hydrogen elctrodes covered in ANSI(
over a wide range, heat input as developed and reeom- AWS A5.5, Speci@icationfor Low Alloy Steel Covered
mended by the steel producers should be strictly observed. Arc Welding Electrodes, have a specified maximum
moisture content in the as manufactured condition. For
C4.4 Stress Refief Heat Treatment the E7OXX-X class eìectrodes, it is 0.4%; for E80XX-X
This paragraph provides for two postweld heat treat- electrodes, it is 0.295; for the E9oXX-X, ElOOXX-X,
ment methods for stressrelief of a welded assembly. The EI IOXX-X, and EILOXX-X dass electrodes, it is 0.15%.
Erst method requires the assembly to be heated to Experience has shown that the limits specified above
llOO°F (595T)max for quenched and tempered steels, for moisture contents in electrode coverings are not
and between 1I00 and 1200'F (595 to 650" C) for other always sufficientlyrestrictive for some applications using
steels. The assembly is held at this temperature for the the E9OXX-X and lower classes. Electrodes of classifica-
time specified in Table 4.4. In 4.4.3, an alternative tions lower than EIOOXX-X are subject to more strut-
method permits a decrease in temperature below the gent moisture level requirementswhen used for welding
m k b u m specified in the firnt method, when the holding the high-strength quenched and tempered steels, ASTM
time is increased. The alternativemethod is used when it A514 and A517. Alf such electrodes are required to be
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
is impracticalto postweld heat treat the welded assembly dried between 700 and 8WF (370 and 430T) before
at higher temperatures. These temperatures are suffi- use. Electrodes of classification below E9OXX-X are not
ciently be€ow the critical temperature to preclude any required by ANSI/ AWS A5.5 to have a moisture con-
change in properties. tent less than O. is%,and the required dryingwill achieve
I€ the purpose of the postweld heat treatment is to at least this moisturelevel. This precaution was necessary
stress relieve the weld, the holding time is based on the because of the sensitivity of high strengthsteels and weld
weld metal thickness even though some material in the metal to hydrogen cracking.
weldment is thicker than the weId. If the purpose of the Tests have shown there can be a wide variation in the
postweld heat treatment is to maintain dimensional moisture absorption rate of various brands of electrodes
stability during subsequent machining, the holding time representing a given AWS classification. Some elec-
is based on the thickest component in the weldment. trodes absorb very little moisture during standard expo-
Certain quenched and tempered steels, if stress relieved sure times while others absorb moisture very rapidly.
as a carbon or low alioy steel, may undergo undesirable The moisture control requirements of 4.5.2 are neces-
changes in microstructure, causing a deterioration of sarily conservative to cover this condition and ensure
mechanical properties or cracking, or both. Such steeIs that sound welds can be produced.
should o d y be stress relieved after consultation with The time restrictions on the use of electrodes after
the steel producer and in strict accordance with the removal from a storage oven may seem overly restrictive
producer's recommendations. to some users. The rate of moisture absorption in areas
of low humidity is lower than that encountered in areas
Precautionary Xote: Consideration must be given to of high humidity. The Code covers the most restrictive
possible distortion due to stress relie$ situations.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0784265 05004LL 1 =
Technique) 37i
C4.6 Procedures for Shielded Metal In view of the above, 4.7.7 requires that neither the
Arc Welding depth nor the maximum width in the cross section of the
weld metal deposited in each weld pass shall exceed the
This section contains the prequalified welding proce- width at the surface of the weld pass. This is also illus-
dure requirements for shielded metal arc welding. trated in Figure 4.1.
Weld bead dimensions may best be measured by sec-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tioning and etching a sample weld.
Part C
Submerged Arc Weldutg C4.8 Electrodes and Flux for
Submerged Arc Welding
C4.7 General Requirements
C4.8.1 ANSI; AWS AS.23, SpecificationforLaw Alloy
Part C contains prequalified procedure requirements Steel Electrodes and Fluxesfor Submerged Arc Weld-
for submerged arc welding. The provisions of this section ing, was published in 1976 and rekised in 1980. Elec-
apply only to prequdified welding procedures. Sub- trodes and fluxes conforming to the classification
merged arc welding is normally associated withhigh heat designation ofthis speeification may be used as prequali-
input, and heat input exceeding the steel producer’s fied, provided the provisions of 4.1.1 and Tabíe 4.1 are
recommendations could reduce the toughness of the observed. The contractor should foHow the supplier’s
joint for quenched and tempered steels. recommendations for the proper use of fluxes.
C4.7.7 The weld nugget or bead shape is an important 424.8.3 The requirementsof this section are necessary to
factor affectingweid cracking. Solidification of molten assure that the flux is not a medium for introduction of
weld meta1 due to the quenching effect of the base metal hydrogen into the weld because of absorbed moisture in
starts along the sides of the weld metal and progresses the flux. Whenever there is a question about the suita-
inward until completed. The last liquid metal to solidify bility of the ffux due to improper storage or package
Iies in a plane through the centerline of the weld. If the damage, the flux should be discarded or dried in accord-
weld depth is greater than the width of the face, the weld ance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
surface may solidify prior to center solidification. When
this occurs, the shrinkage forces acting on the still hot, C4.8.4 RecIamation of Flux. For recovery of the
semi-liquid center or core of the weld may cause a center- unfused fiux through the vacuum recovery system, a
line crack to develop, as shown in Figures C4.1(A) and distinction has to be made between fused and bonded
(B). This crack may extend throughout the Iongitudinal fluxes. Fused fluxes, in generaf, tend to become more
length of the weld and may or may not be visible at the coarse as they are recycled (especially where particles are
weld surface. This conditionmay also be obtained when less than 200 mesh). In this case, the vacuum system
fillet welds are made simultaneously on bath sides of a generally filtersout some of the fines-and hence at least
joint with the arcs directly oppositeeach other, as shown 255% virgin matenal should be added to replenish the
in Figure C4.1(C). fines before it is reused. Bonded ff uxes on the other hand,
WIDTH DEPTHOF -
FUSION
DEPTH OF
FUSION
(51 (Cl
GROOVE WELD FfLtET WELD IN
WELD T-JOINT
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L * L 92 W 07842b5 05004L2
372j Commentary
because of their method of manufacture, tend to break C4.11 Procedures for Submerged Arc
up in the flux recovery system giving rise to a greater WeIding with Multiple Electrodes
proportion of smdíer particles. In order to compensate
for the flux break-up, at least 25% Virgin material When using gas metal arc plus submerged arc in tan-
(although 50% is more common among users) needs to dem (see 4.11.4), the maximum 15in. (380 mm) spacing
be added to the recycled flmbefore it isreused. For both between the gas metal arc and the leadingsubmerged arc
categories of fluxes, it is essential to separate out any is required to preserve the preheating effects of the first
possible metallics (from plate rust or milt scale) before arc for the subsequent main weld deposited by the
recycling the flux. remaining two high depositionrate submerged arts. The
The quality of recovered flux from manual colIection short spacing also provides a better conditionfor remelt-
systems is dependent on the consistency of that collec- ing the first pass.
tion technique. Extraneous materia1 and moisture con-
tamination must be controlìed. In addition, the welding
fabricator should follow a procedure that assures that a
consistent ratio of virgin flux is added and mixed with Part D
the recovered flux. Gas Metal Arc and
C4.8.5 Recrushed Slag. The slag formed during sub- Flux CoredArc Welding
merged arc weIding may not have the same chemical
composition as unused (virgin) flux. Its composition is
affected by the composition of the originalflux, the base C4.12 Electrodes
metal plate and electrodecomposition, and the welding AWS filter metal specifications are now available €or
parameters. low alloy weld metal €or both gas metal arc and flux
Although it may be possible to recrush and reuse some cored arc welding. The use of low alloy electrodes is
submerged arc welding slag as a welding flux, the permitted with prequalifíed procedures when the elec-
remshed slag, regardless of any addition of virgin flux trodes conform to either ANSI/AWS A5.28, Specijka-
to it, may be a new chemically different flux. It can be tion for Lor4 Alloy Steel Filler Metalsfor Gas Shielded
classified under the ANSI/ AWS A5.17 or A5.23 specifi- Arc Welding or ANSIJAWS A5.29, Specification for
cation, but should not be considered to be the same as Low Alloy Steel Electrodesfor Flux Cored Arc Wetding.
virgin flux.
C4.9 Procedures for Submerged Arc C4.13 Shielding Gas
Welding with a Single Electrode From information supplied by the manufacturers of
C4.9.4 Tests have demonstrated that an empirical rela- shielding gas, it has been determined that a dew point of
tion appears to exist between the angle at the root of the -@OF (-40T) is a practical upper limit providing ade-
groove and the maximum current that can be used with- quate moisture protection. A dew point of - @ O F
out producingweld profilesprone to cracking, as shown (-40%) converts to approimately 128parts per million
in Figure C4.1. Under these circumstances, only prequal- (ppm) by volume of water vapor or about 0.01%avail-
Zed bevel and V-grooves without backing are effective. able moisture. This moisture content appears very low
J- and U-grooves have a greater angle at theroot than the but, when dissociated at welding temperatures, would
groove angle aad, in their case, the probability of an contribute hydrogen to that already associated with the
undesirablecrack-prone weld nugget isvery small. How- electrode. Therefore, it is mandatory to have -40'F
ever, the Code makes no distinction between V-grooves ( - 4 O O C ) or lower dew point in shielding gas.
and J- and U-grooves in this regard. It makes the provi-
sions of 4.9.3 applicable to all grooves. Since the use of
J-and U-grooves is less frequent, this requirement does
(24.14 Procedures for Gas Metal Arc
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
not appear to be unreasonable.
The empirical relation defines the acceptable amount and Flux Cored Arc Welding
of current, in amperes, as approximately ten times the with a Single Electrode
included groove angle. This applies primady to pre-
qualified joints welded without backing using bevel and This section provides the requirements for gas metal
V-grooves. Since the included angle for such prequali- arc welding and flux cored arc welding procedureswhen
fied joints is Wo, the maximum amperage permitted by prequalified welding procedures are used.
the Code is 600 A; for a 90° filIet weld, the maximum The gas shielding at the point of welding is to be
current permitted is loo0 A. This limitation applies only protected from the wind to prevent interruption in
to passes fusing both faces of the joint, except for the shieIding and resultingcontamination ofthe weld by the
cover pass. atmosphere.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Technique! 373
The prequalified provisions apply oníy to gas metal C4.16 AH-Weld-Metal Tension Fest
arc welding using spray and globular transfer modes of Requirements
metal deposition. Gas metal arc welding in the short
circuiting transfer mode is not prequawied and must be Testing of each procedure is necessary to demonstrate
qualified in accordance with 5.2. Experience has shown that the weld metal will have praperties corresponding
frequent cases of lack of penetration and fusionwith this with those of the base metal. Ali-weld-metal tension test
mode of metal transfer. A common reason for this unreli- specimens must meet the mechanical property require-
ability is the low heat input per unit of deposited weld ments specified in the latest edition of ANSItAWS
metal resulting in a tendency toward Iittle or no melting A5.25, Specijkation for Constìmablesfor Electroslag
of the base metal. Therefore, each user is required to Welding, or the latest edition of ANSI/AWS A5.26,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
demonstrate the ability of the selected joint welding Specijìeationfor Comumablesfor Electrogas Welding,
procedure to produce sound welds when using short as applicable.
circuiting transfer gas metal arc welding.
C4.18 Shielding Gas
see c4.13.
Part E
Electruskg md Electragas Wehfing C4.20 Procedures for Electroslag and
C4.15 Qualification of Processes, Electrogas Welding
Procedures, and Joint Details The procedures to be used for ekctroslag and electra-
gas welding are detded in 4.20, and the essential varia-
The welding processes, procedures, and joint details bles for these procedures are given in 5.5.2.5.
for electroslag and electrogas welding are not accorded ï h e Code requires the qualXcation of welding proce-
prequaIified status in the Code. The welding procedures dures since welding variables influence the operation of
must comply with the requirements of section 4, Part E, the process with respect to adequate penetration, com-
and must be established in accordancewith 5.2. Welding pkte fusion of the joint area, and ability to produce a
of quenched and tempered steels with either of these sound weld.
processes is prohibited since the high heat input asso- These are relatively new processes, and insufficient
ciated with them causes serious deterioration of the experience is the justification for not according a pre-
mechanical properties of the heat-affected zone. qualified status to them.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
C5. Qualification
Part A ing all the requirements prescribed in Part B of this
General Requirement section, the Code recommends that the Engineer accept
properly documented evidenceof a previous test and not
C5.1 Approved Procedures require the test be performed again. Proper documenta-
tion means that the contractor has complied with the
C5.1.1 The Code permitsthe use of all welding processes requirements of section 5, Part B, and the results of the
applicable to steel construction. Through experience quaíification tests are recorded on appropriate forms
over the years, certain joint weIding procedures for such as those found in Appendix E. When used, the form
shielded meta1 arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, and in Appendix E should provide appropriate information
flux cored arc welding processes have had a long record listing all essentialvariables and the results of quaWica-
of satisfactory performance. They are designated as pre- tion tests performed.
qualified and are exempt from tests or quali-fications, There are general stipu€ationsapplicable to any situ-
provided they conform in ail respects to the applicable ation. The acceptability of quaNication to other stan-
requirements of the Code. dards is the Engineer’s responsibility to be exercised
based on the specific structures and service conditions.
C5.1.2 Although prequalified procedures are exempt The Structural Welding Committee does not address
from tests, the Code does require that the contractor qualification to any other welding standard.
prepare a written procedure specification for the joint
welding procedure to be used in fabrication. This is a
record of the materials and the welding variables which C5.3 Welders, Welding Operators, and
shows that the joint welding procedure meets the Tack Welders
requirements for prequalified status.
It is the intent of the Code that welders, weIding oper- The qualification tests are especially designed to
ators, tack welders, and inspectionpersonnel have access determine the ability of the welders, welding operators,
to the written prequalified welding procedure specifica- and tack welders to produce sound welds by folIowing a
tion. The Code requires that four critical variables be welding procedure specification. The code does not
specified on the written prequalified welding procedure imply that anyone who satisfactorilycompletesqualifica-
specificationwithin limits that will insure that it provides tion tests can do the weldingforwhich they are quaIified
meaningful guidance to those who implement its provi- for all conditions that might be encountered during pro-
sions. The allowableranges for amperage, voltage, travel duction welding. It is essential that welders, weIding
speed, and shielding gas, as applicable, are the same as operators, and tack welders havesome degree oftraining
those allowed for qualified procedures in 5.5.2 of the for these differences.
Code. The limitationimposed on these four variablesare C5.3.1 Quenched and Tempered High-Strength Steels.
sufficiently conservative to permit rounding off. IdealIy, welders, welding operators and tack welders
welding quenched and tempered high-strength steeis
shouId have experiencewelding such base metals. In lieu
C5.2 Other Procedures of such experience,the contractorshould ensure that the
contractor’s personnelreceive instruction and training in
The Code does not restrict welding to the prequalified the welding of such steels. It is further recommended that
joint weldingproceduresdescribed in 5.1. As other weId- other personnel, such as fitters and thermal cutters
ing procedures and new ideas become available, their use {burners) involved in fabrication utilking quenched and
is permitted, provided they are qualified by the require- tempered high-strength steel be experienced or receive
ments prescribed in section5, Part B. Where acontractor instruction and training prior to the start of thermal
has previously qualified ajoint welding procedure meet-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
cutting operations.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 3 92 m 0784265 0500435 9 m
...
3761Commentary
C5.3.2 From time to time, the contractor may upgrade C5.5.2.3 and C5.5.2.4 Electrode extension or contact
or add new control equipment. The previously quaIified tube to work distance is an important welding variable
welding operator may need training to become familiar which affects the amperage as well as the transfer mode.
with this new equipment. The emphasis is placed on the At a set wire feed speed, using a constant-voltagepower
word “trainíng”ratherthan “reqUalification”since several source, longer electrode extensions cause the welding
beads on a plate or a tube, as appropriate, may be current to decrease. This may reduce weld penetration,
sufficient. The intention is that the contractor would heat input and causefusion discontinuities. Shorterexten-
train the welding operator to weM using the new sion causes an increasein welding current. A variation in
equipment. electrode extension may cause a spray transfer to change
to globular or short circuiting modes. It is important to
controlelectrode extension as well as other welding vari-
C5.4 Qualification Responsibility ables. Semi-automatic welding processes may be con-
trolled by using wire feed speed, electrodeextensionand
All contractors are responsiblefor their finalproduct. arc length, or voltage. For machine operation, electrode
Therefore, it is their responsibility to comply with the extension may be premeasured;for manual welding, it is
quafification requirements of the Code relative to weld- visually estimated.
ing procedures, welders, welding operators, and tack
welders. Properly documented welding procedures and
personnel qualificationtests conducted by the contractor
in accordance with this Code are generally acceptable to (25.8 Positions of Test Welds
the Engineer for the contract.
This subsection defines welding positions for qualifi-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C5.4.3 The acceptability of qualification to other stan- cation test welds and production welds. Position is an
dards is the Engineer’s responsibility to be exercised essential variable for all of the welding procedures,
upon the specific structures and service conditions. The except for the electrogasand electroslagprocesseswhich
StructuralWelding Committee does not address quaïi- are made in only one position. Each procedure shall be
cation to any other welding standard. qualified for each position for which it wiU be used in
fabrication. Relationshipsbetween the position and con-
figuration of the qualification test weld and the type of
weld and positions qualified are shown in Table 5.4. It is
essential to perform testing and evaluation of the welds
to be encountered in construction prior to their actual
use on the job. This will assure that all the necessary
C5S Limitation of Variables positions are tested as part of the qualifkation process.
This Code allows some degree of departure from the
variables used to quaIify a welding procedure. However,
departurefrom variables which affect the mechanical or
chemical composition of material properties, or sound- C5.10 Test Specimens: Number, Type,
ness of the weldment are not aîiowed without requalifi- and Preparation
cation. These latter variables are referred to as essential
variables. The base metal essential variables are listed in Table 5.1 summarizesthe requirementsfor the number
5.5.1.1 through 5.5. f .4. The welding process essential and type of test specimens and the range of thicknesses
variables are listed in 5.5.2.1 through 5.5.2.5. The posi- qualified.A test plate thickness of 1 in. (25.4mm) or over
tions of test welds are listed in 5.8. Changes ìn these qualifies a procedure for unlimited thickness. The 1 in.
variabjes beyond the variation aîiowed by the subject thickness has been shown to generally reffect the influ-
subsections require requaWication of the procedure. ence of weld metal chemistry, heat input, and preheat
Similarly, changes beyond those shown in 5.5.3 require temperature on the weld metal and heat-affected zone.
requaliîïcation using radiographic or ultrasonic testing The term direction of rolling was made optional in the
only. These essentid variables are to be specific in the 1988edition, although the mechanicalproperties of steel
welding procedure document and followed in welding plate may vary significantly with the direction of rolling
fabrication. and may affect the test results. For example, tensile
strength and impact toughness are often greater in the
CS.5.2 Trave1 speed affects heat input, weld coofing longitudinal direction than in the transverse direction
rates, and weld metallurgy, which are important for unless cross rolling is used. Similarly, the rolling direc-
fracture toughness control and for welding quenched tion shown in the sketchesoften gives better results in the
and tempered steefs. Proper selection of travel speed bend tests. For some applications, toughness resuIts are
is also necessary to avoid incomplete fusion and slag required and the direction of rollingshould be referenced
entrapment. on the test results.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1..3 92 m 0784265 0500436 O m
Qualification/377
Table 5.1, Number and Type of Test Specimens and plate plug. Obviously, the skilis for straightline progres-
Range of Thickness Quaüíîed -Procedure Qualifica- sion parallel to the pipe axis are no different from the
tion. The procedure qualificationfor pipe includes con- skills for welding plate wrought shapes using a straight
ditions €or large diameter job size pipe. This is intended line progression; therefore, the pipe product form limita-
for procedure qualification of large diameter pipe by tion does not apply in these straight line cases. Refer to
automatic welding processes, such as submerged arc Figure C5.1.
welding, and may be applied to any welding process that
can be used on large diameter pipe, but not on 8 in. C5.10.53 Procedure Quaiifkation for T-, Y-, and K-
(200 mm) Sch. 120 pipe. Connections. The standardized pipe butt joint test spec-
imens, specified in 5.10 for procedure qualification, are
C5.10.1.3 All procedure qualification test plates satisfactory for establishing metallurgical soundness of
or test pipes are required to be radiographed or ultra- welding procedures and materials. They cannot cover
sonicallytested to demonstrate soundness before mech- the full range of continuously varying geometry and
anical testing, regardless of the welding process used. position encountered in structura€T-, Y-,and K-con-
Additionally,nondestmctivetesting reducesthe expense neetions.
and delays that result from machining and testing welds The prequafified joint details given in 10.13 are based
having discontinuitiesprohibited by the Code. on experience with full scale mock-ups of such connec-
tions that often reveal practical problems that do not
C5.10.1.5 Provision has been made in this paragraph show up in the standard test specimen. Qualification of
for longitudinalbend tests when material combinations processes not prequalifredand of procedures with essen-
differ markedly in mechanical bending properties. tial variables outside prequalified ranges are required to
C5.10.2 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds. This meet the provisions of 10.12.3.3. This subsection pro-
subsection addresses the requirements for qualification videsfor sampíejoint or tubuiar mock-up tests. WeIding
of partial joint penetration groove welds that require procedures for box sectionsmay be based on eitherplate
qualification by the contractor because the joint design or pipe tests for position and compatibility. When mock-
and welding procedure to be used in constructiondo not up tests for box sectionsforT-, Y-, and K-connectionsare
meet prequalified status as described in 5.1.1, or a weld- considered, square or rectanguIar tubes should be used.
ing procedure qualified to produce completepenetration Additional tests are required for connections with
welds utilizing a specificjoint design is proposed for use groove angles less than 30" as outlined in 10.12.3.2.
as a partial penetration weld. The intent is to establish C5.1Z.Z The new, more definitive wording for bend test
the weld size that will be produced using the joint design acceptancewas added to aid the interpretation of the test
and welding procedure proposed for construction. Cer- results. The purpose of the bend test, as stated in 5.6.1, is
tain joint designs in combinationwith a specifk welding to prove the soundness of the weld. ï h e statement
process and position may show that the groove prepara-
tion planned will not give the desired weld size (E).
Macroetch test specimens only are required for proce-
durequalificationsthat meet the requirementsof 5.10.2.1
or 5.10.2.2. Additional testing is required for thosejoint
welding proceduresthat fallunder the criteriaof 5.10.2.3.
These test requirements are shown in Table 5.2.
C5.10.3 Fillet Welds. When single-pass fillet welds are
to be used, one test weId is required as shown in Figures
5.16 and 5.18 using the maximum size singIe-pass fitlet
weld. If multiple-passfillet welds only are used, then one
test weld is required, as shown in Figures 5.16 and 5.18,
using the minimum size multiple-pass fillet weld to be
used. Each ofthesetests is presumed to evaluatethe most
critical situation.
C5.10.5 and C5.23 Welding on pipe (or tubing) material
product forms does not necessarily mean that pipe weld- PIPE QUAtlFICATION IS NOT REQUIRED AND PLATE
ing is being performed. There is obviously a difference QUALIFfCATION IS ACCEPTABLE FOR 3G, 3F, 4G, 4F
between welding around a pipe as opposed to welding AND FOR 1F. 1G, 2F and 2G.
along a pipe parallel to the pipe axis (centerline). A girth
weld in a butt joint is completelydifferent from a longi-
tudinal groove weld that joins roiled plate to make a -
Figure C5.í Type of Welding on Pipe That
Does Not Require Pipe Qualification
pipe; asocketjoint with a f a e t weld is completelydiffer-
ent from a fillet weld along the pipe length attaching a (see C5.10.5 and C5.23)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
regarding the total quantity of indications was added to pected to make completejoint penetration groove welds
restrict the accumulative m o u n t of discontinuities. in box tube T-, Y-, and K-connections.
A maximum limit on tears oriaating at the corners For this case, quWied 6GR welders tested on round
was added to prevent the case where the corner cracks tubes or pipe per Figure 5.25 would only be required to
might extend halfway across the specimen, and under the pass the additional corner macroetch test per Figure
previous criteria, would be judged acceptable. 5.26, provided all the requirements of Table 5.5 and
10.12.3.2 are met.
If the contractor wishes to qualify a welder without
existing 6GR status for complete joint penetration
groove welds in T-, Y-, and K-connections using box
tubes, the welder must weld the 6GR test assembly of
Figure 5.25 using either a round or box tube in accord-
C5.15 General ance with the limitations of Table 5.6. In addition, the
weld must successfuliy perform the corner macroetch
The welder qualificationtest is specificallydesigned to test using Figure 5.26 or, as an option, if box sections
determine a welder’s ability to produce sound welds in were used for Figure 5.25, remove and macroetch the
any given test joint. After successfully completing the corner sections from the test weldment.
welder qualification tests, the welder should be consid- QuaIification on 2G plus 5G or 6G pipe tests also
ered to have minimum acceptable qualifications. quaIifiesfor butt joints in box sections (with applicability
Knowledge of the material tobe welded is beneficial to based on thickness, neglecting diameter) and vice versa,
the welder in producing a sound weldment; therefore, it For these butt joints, the macroetch corner test of Figure
is recommended that before welding quenched and tem- 5.26 is not necessary because all production joints
pered steels, welders should be given instructions relative require nondestructive examination per 10.12.3.1.
to the properties of this material or have had prior Qualification on groove welds in box sections also
experience in welákg the particular steel. qualifies for plate, but not vice versa.
C5.16 Limitation of VariabIes C5.21 Welder QuaUncationof Pipe, arid
The ability of a welder to produce a sound weld is Square and Rectangular Tubing
considered by the Code to be dependent upon certain Table 5.5 and Table 5.6 do not differentiate between
essential variables, and these are listed in 5.16. pipe (circular tubing) and box sections (square or rec-
CS.163 Electrodes for shielded metal arc welding are tangular tubes). For this reason, the following interpre
grouped relative to the skill required of the welder. The F tation is appropriate:
Group designation permits a welder qualified with an (i) QuíAScation on the 6GR pipe test also q u a i e s
eIectrode of one group designation to use other elec- for T-, Y-, and K-connections and groove welds in box
trodes listed in a numerically lower designation. For sections.
example, a welder qualified with an E6010 electrodewill (2) Qualification on 5G and 2G pipe tests also quali-
also be qualified to weld an E6011 electrode, group fies for box sections (with applicability based on thick-
designation F3 and is permitted to weld with electrodes ness, neglecting diameter), but not vice versa.
having group designation F2 and FI; the welder is not (3) QuaIification for groove welds in box sections also
qualified to weld with electrodes having a group designa- qualifies for plate (and vice versa if within the limitation
tion F4. of 5.16.8 of the Code).
(4) When box sections are used in qualification,bend
C5.17.2 We?der QuaHication of Pipe, and Square and tests taken from the faces do not evaluate the weíder’s
Rectangular Tubing. When box sections are used in ability to carry sound welding around comers. These
performance qualifïcation, bend tests taken from the bend tests do not fulfill the needs of T-, Y-, and K-
faces do not evaluate the welder’s ability to carry sound connections, because the comers in these connections
weld metd around the relatively abrupt corners. These are highly stressed. Where a 6GR test utilizes box sec-
bend tests do not fulfill the needs of complete joint tions, radiography is recommended to evaluate the
penetration groove welds in T-, Y-, and K-connections corners.
because the corners in these connections may be highly
stressed. Due to the concerns for welders to demonstrate
their skill to weld the corners of box tubes when com- C5.23 Position of Test Welds
plete joint penetration is required, the corner macroetch
test of Figure 5.26 was developed. A welder who successfully demonstrates an ability to
The corner macroetch test shown in Figure 5.26 is an weid the 6G pipe-groove quaEcation test is deemed to
additional performance test required for welders ex- be able to weld all other positions of pipe-groove, plate-
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
QuaHication/379
groove, and fillet welds except for completejoint pene- 5.6 for welder qu&ication are not always available to
tration groove welds in T-, Y-,and K-connectionswhich the contractor.
require a 6GR test per Figure 5.25 for circularsectionsor
a 6GR test per Figures 5.25 and 5.26 for box sections.
Conversely, a welder who successfully demonstrates the C5.30 Period of Effectiveness
ability to weld the 6GR pipe-groove qualification test is This subsection controls the expiration date of a
deemed to be able to weld all other positions of pipe- welder’s qualification. The quaIifcation shall remain in
groove, plate-groove, and faet welds except for com- effect (1) for six months beyond the date that the welder
plete joint penetration butt joints welded from one side fast used the weIding process, or (2) untii there is a
without backing as represented by Figure 5.23. specific reason to question the weIder’s ability. For
The committee recognizes that different welder skiils {I), the requalification test need be made only in 3/8 in.
are needed to successfully weld the root pass ofthe 6G or (9.5 mmn) thickness using plate or pipe or both. If the
the 6GR test assemblies taking into account such things weíder failsthis test, then requflication sha€€follow the
as heat input, heat-sink, arc-force, angle-of-attack, and requirements of section 5, Part C, Welder Quatifieation.
electrode size versus root opening. For (21, the type of test should be mutuaíiy agreed upon
between the contractor and the Engineer and shall be
C5.26.1 Qualification of welders using job size pipe or within the requirements of section 5, Part C, Welder
tubing is permitted because pipe sizes specifred in Tabfe Qualifeation.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C6. Inspection
Part A ance function may be done independently by the owner
General Requirement or their representative or, when provided in the contract,
verification inspectionmay be waived or it may be stipu-
This section of the Codehas been the subjectof exten- lated that the contractor shall pedom both the inspec-
sive revisions, which appeared €or the first time in the tion and the verification.3
1980 Code. The revisions are designed to clarify the C6.1.2 This subsection describes the difference between
separate responsibilities of the contractor/ fabricator1 the Inspector representing the owner and the Inspector
erector, as opposed to the owner1Building Commissioner1 representing the contractor.
Engineer, etc.
The revisions clarify the basic premise of contractual C6.1.4 This subsection requires that the Inspectorverify
obligations when providing product and services. Those that all fabrication and erection by welding is performed
who submit competitive bids or otherwise enter into a in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
contract to provide materials and workmanship for Documents. This includes not only welding but also
structural weldments in accordance with the provisions materials, assembly, preheating, nondestructive testing,
of the Code assume an obligation to furnish the products and all other requirementsof the Code and provisions of
as specified in the contract documents and are fully the Contract Documents.
responsible for product quality.
C6.1.5 Inspectors need a complete set of approved
drawings to enable them to properly do their work. They
C6.1 Genera1 need be furnished only the portion of the Contract Doc-
uments describing the requirements of products that
In this section, the term fabricationlerection inspec- they will inspect. Much of the Contract Documents deal
tion is separated from verification inspection. In the with matters that are not the responsibility of the Inspec-
original draft of this section, these separate functions tor; these portions need not be furnished.
were designated as qualitycontrol and quaIity assurance,
respectively. These terms were replaced with the broader C6.f.6 If the Inspectors are not notified in advance of
terms now contained in the Code to avoid confusion the start of operations, they cannot properly perform the
with the usage in some industries (e.g., nuclear). Quality functions required of them by the Code.
assurance means specific tasks and documentation pro-
cedures to some users of the Code. It was advantageous
to use more generalterms that place greater emphasis on
timely inspection. The contractor is solely responsible C6.2 Inspection of Materials
for the ordering of materials, and assembly and welding
of the structural weldments. Inspection by the owner This Code provision is all-encompassing. It requires
must be planned and timely if it is to improve the quality inspection o€materials and review of materials certifica-
of the construction. tion and mill test reports. It is important that this work
be done in a timely manner so that unacceptable mate-
C6.1.1 This subsection describes the responsibility of rials are not incorporated in the work.
the contractor for fabrication/erection inspection and
testing, which is basically the qualitycontrol responsibil-
ity described in other contract documents. The owner 3. When this is done, quaiity controì and quality assurance
has the right, but generalIy not the responsibility, remain separate functions. Verifcation inspection should be
to provide independent inspection to verify that the performed independentlyby personnel whose primaryrespon-
product meets specified requirements. This qualityassur- sibilty is quaEty assurance and not production.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 7 2 m 078LI265 0500LI20 2 m
3821Commentary
C6.3 Inspection of Welding Procedure C6-6 Obligations of the Contraetor
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Qualification and Equipment C6.6.1 Contractors are responsible for the acceptabZty
The requirements of 6.3.1 and 6.3.2, including any of their products. They shall conduct inspection to the
qualification testing required by 5.2, should be com- extent necessary to ensure conformance with the Code,
pleted before any welding is begun on any weldments except as provided in 6.6.5.
required by the Contract Documents. Qualification C6.6.2 If the Inspector(s) find deficiencies in the mate-
should atways be done before work is started, but all rials and workmanship, regardless of whether the Inspec-
quaXication does not have to be completed before any tor@)is a representative of the owner or an employee of
work can be started. the contractor, the contractor shall beresponsibfefor all
necessary corrections.
C6.6.4 and C6.6.5 When nondestructivetestingis speci-
C6.4 Inspection of Welder, Welding fied in the information furnished to bidders, the con-
tractor shall take necessary steps to ensure that the
Operator, and Tack Welder nondestructive testing acceptance criteria prescribed by
Qualifications the Code are met. When nondestructive testing other
thanvisual inspectionis not specified, the owner shall be
C6.4.1 It is important that the Inspector determine that responsible for all associated costs of testing and sudace
alf welders are quaEied before work is begun on the preparation plus the repair of discontinuities not reason-
project. If discovered after welding has begun, lack of ably expected to be discovered during visual inspection.
welder qualifhtion documentation may cause serious Since there is alirnit to the defects that might reasonably
delays in the acceptance of weldments. be expected to be found in welds, welds that contain
defects which are considered beyond reasonable weld
C6.4.2 The inspector must regu€arlyappraisethe quality
of welds produced by welders, welding operators, and quality standards and which appear to result from gross
tack welders. Individuals producing unacceptablewelds nonconformance to this Code shall be repaired or re-
should be required to produce satisfactorytest welds of placed at the contractor’s expense in accordance with
the type causing difficulties. Complete requalification 3.7.2.
may not always be necessary. OnIy qualified welders
producing acceptable welds may be employed in the C6.7 Nondestructive Testing
work.
In addition to visual inspection, which is alwaysneces-
C6.4.3 Any welders who cannot provide evidence that sary to achieve compliancewith Code requirements, foiir
they have used, without interruption, the welding pro- nondestructivetesting (NDT) methods are provided for
cess for which they were qualified, for a period exceeding in the Code: (I) radiographictesting(RT1, (2) ultrasonic
six months, shall be requaaed by appropriate tests. testing (UT), (3) magnetic particle testing (MT), and (4)
Since active welders can maintain their certikation as dye penetrant testing (PT).
long as they continueto do good work, it is essential that Radiographic and ultrasonictesting are used to detect
Inspectors regularly evaluate the quality of the welds both surface and internal discontinuities. Magnetic par-
produced by each welder, welding operator, and tack ticle testing ís used to detect surface and near surface
welder. discontinuities. Dye penetrant testing is used to detect
discontinuities open to the surface. Other NDT methods
may be used upon agreement between owner and
contractor.
C6.5 Inspection of Work and Records C6.7.1 It is essential that the contractor know in
Except for final visual inspection, which is required advance which welds are subject to nondestructivetests
for every weld, the Inspector shall inspect the work at and which testing procedures will be used. Unless other-
suitable intervals to make certain that the requirements wise provided in the Contract Documents, the quality
of the applicable sections of the Code are met. Such criteria for acceptance of welds Ere stated in 8.15,9.25,
inspections,on a sampling basis, shall be prior to assem- and 10.17. It is not necessary to write in the Contract
bly, during assembly, and during welding. The inspector Documents exactly which weid or what portions of spe-
shall identify final acceptance or rejection of the work cific welds wiil be examined by a specific test method. A
either by marking on the work or with other recording general description of weld test requirements may be
methods. The method of identification should not be specified; e.g., “10% of the length of all filiet welds shall
destructiveto the weldment. Die stamping of welds is not be inspected by magnetic particle testing,” or “All com-
recommended since die stamp marks may form sites for plete joint penetration butt joint welds in tensionflanges
crack initiation. of girders shall be radiographed.”
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Inspectiont383
If the location of tension Bange butt joint welds is not
obvious, their location should be designated on the
pians.
When spot checking is specified (e.g., 10% of all fillet
welds), it should not be taken to imply that the con-
tractor be notified prior to welding which specific C6.9 General
welds or portion of welds shall be tested. It is a basic C6.9.1 The procedures and standards set forth in this
premise of the specifications that if random tests or section are primarily designed for the radiographic
spot tests are made, there should be a sufficient number inspection of completejoint penetration groove welds in
of random tests to give a reliable indication of weld dynamically loaded structures and statically loaded
quality. structures. Typical geometriesfor structural connections
There are different acceptance criteria for staticalIy and design requirements for these structures were taken
loaded structures, dynamically loaded structures, and into account in the preparation of the specification. An
tubular Structures. The basic difference in acceptance effort was made to incorporate the methoáology of
criteria for each of these structures is based upon ASTM and to utilize procedures described in the ASME
the difference between static, dynamic, and fatigue Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code whenever possibIe.
loading.
When fatigue crack growth is anticipated, acceptable C6.9.2 Since this section does not provide for the radio-
initial weld flaw sizes must of necessity be smaller. graphic testing of welds in pipe or tubular structures,
All criteria are established in an attempt to preclude variations are permitted based upon agreement between
weld failure during the anticipated service life of the the contractor and the owner. The provisions of section
weldment. 10, Part E shall apply when radiographictestingwelds in
pipe and tubular structures.
C6.7.8 Only individuals that qualify to SNT-TC-IA
NDT Level II may perform nondestructivetests without
supervision. Level III individuds may also perform
NDT tests provided they meet the requirements of NDT C6.10 Radiographic Procedure
Level II. NDT Level III engineers and technicians are C6.10.1 The single source of inspectingradiation is spec-
generallysupervisorsand may not be activeíy engaged in ified to avoid confusion or blurring of the radiographic
the actual work of testing. Sincethere is no performance image. Elsewhere in the Code, limits are placed on the
qualification test for individuals qualified to NDT Level size of the source to limit geometricunsharpness. Radio-
III, all individuals providing testing services under the graphic sensitivity is judged solely on the quality of the
Code must be qualified to Level II, which has specific image quality indicator(IQI) [penetrameter] imagefs), as
performance qualification requirements. in both ASTM and ASME.
C6.10.2 Ionizing radiation and chemicals used in radio-
graphic inspection can present serious health hazards.
AU safety regulations must be complied with.
C6.8 Extent of Testing C6.10.3 When the owner wishes weld surfaces to be
ground fiush or otherwise smoothed in preparation for
It is important that joints to be nondestructivelyexam- radiographic testing, it should be stated in the Contract
ined be clearly described in the information furnished to Documents. The owner and the coxitractor should
bidders as explained in Fart A of this Commentary. attemptto agreein advance on which weld surfaceirregu-
larities will not be ground unless surface irregularities
C6.8.3 It is assumed that if rejectablediscontinuitiesare interfere with interpretation of the radiograph. It is
found in one spot and again in either of the additional extremely difficult and often impossible to separate
required spot radiographs, the remainder of the weld internal discontinuities from surface discontinuities
shall be radiographed to determinethe extent of remain- when reviewing radiographs in the absence of informa-
ing defects, if any. tion describingthe weld surface. m e n agreement can be
reached on weld surface preparation prior to radiog-
C6.8.3 This subsection has been added for clarification raphy, rejections and delays wíìt generally be reduced.
of partial testing coverage. Prior to the 1980 edition of
the Code, no specific procedure was outlined for follow C6.10.3.1 Weld tabs are generally removed prior to
through of procedure requirementsfor additional ultra- radiographic inspection so that the radiograph will
sonic testing requirements due to fiaw detection in the represent the weld as finished and placed in service.
first spot tested. This procedure now has better cover- Contraction cracks are commody found in the weld at
age and follows the same outline required in spot the interfacebetween weld tabs and the edge of the plate
radiography. or shape joined by the weld. These cracks are hard to
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
identifyin the radiograph under the best conditions. It is placed at the extremities of weld joints where geometric
considered necessary to remove the weld tabs before distortion is anticipated to contribute to lack of sensi-
attempting to radiograph the boundaries of the welded tivity in the radiograph as shown in Figures 6.1 through
joint (see also C6.10.8). 6.4.
IQIs may only be placed on the source side unless
C6.1033 When weld reinforcement, or backing, or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Failureto pIace the
both, is not removed, shims placed under the image IQIs on the source side during the radiographic expo-
quaEty indicators (IQIs) are required so that the IQI sure, without prior approval of the Engineer, shall be
image may be evaluatedon the average total thickness of cause for rejection of the radiographs,
steel (weld metal, backing, reinforcement) exposed to the
inspecting radiation. C6.10.8 Welds shaII be radiographed and the f h
indexed by methods that will ensure compfete, continu-
C6.10-4 Provisions of this section are to provide fine ous inspection of the weid within the limits specified.
grain film and to avoid coarseness in the image that may Flange-to-flange welded butt joints thatjoin segments of
result from the use of fluorescent screens. thick flanges in beams and girders are particularly diffi-
C6.10.5 The source of radiation is centered with respect cult to radiograph due to geometric distortion and
to the portion of the weld being examined to avoid as undercut from scattered radiation at the ends of the weld
much geometric distortion as possible. that represent the flange edges. Weld defects at these
critical locations are limited under the provisions of
C6.10.5.1 This subsection is provided to Iimit geo- 8.15.2 and 9.25.2. Centering of the source dose to the
metric unsharpness, which causes distortion and blur- flange edge will avoid geometric distortion at the edge of
ring of the radiographicimage. plate. The use of “edge blocks” wilt often help to avoid
C6.10.5.2 and C6.10.5.3 These sections are intended undercut due to scattered radiation. The use of “edge
to limit geometric distortion of the object as shownin the blocks” should be subject to quaIification and approval
radiograph. An exception is made for panoramic expo- of the Engineer under the provisions of 6.8.2.
sures in pipe and tubular structures, which are not C6.10.8.1 Backscattered radiation can cause general
covered by this section of the Code but are covered in fogging and produce artifacts in the radiograph. The
section 10, Tubular Structures. method described in this section will identify back-
C6.10.6 This subsection intends that x-ray units, scattered radiation so that corrective steps can be taken.
600 kvp maximum, and iridium 192sources may be used C6.10.9 Radiographic inspection is designed to inspect
for ali radiographic inspection provided they have ade- all of the weld zone. Defects in the weId metal or the
quate penetrating ability and can produce acceptable adjacent heat affected zones can produce weld failure.
radiographic sensitivity based upon IQI image as pro- Film widths shall be sufficient to inspect ali portions of
vided in 6.10.7. Since cobalt 60 produces poor radio- the weId joint and have sufficient room for weld
graphic contrast in materials of limited thickness, it is identification.
not approved as aradiographicsourcewhen the thickness
of steel being radiographed is equal to, or less than, C6.10.10 Quality radiographs with the appropriate IQI
2-If2 in. (63.5 mm). When the thickness of steel being sensitivity are the only indicators of proper radiographic
radiographed exceeds 2-lf2 inches, cobalt 60 is often inspection. Defective radiographs will not be accepted.
preferred for its penetratingability. Care shouldbe taken
to ensure that the effective size of the radiograph source C6.10.11 It is the intent of the specification to use radio-
graphic films within the full limits of the usefui f i m
is smal€ enough to precIude excessive geometric un-
sharpnes~.~ density. An effort is made in this Code to avoid the
necessity of making multiple exposures or using f i s of
C6.10.7 and C6.10.7.2 Since radiographic sensitivity more than one exposure speed when examining welded
and the acceptability of radiographs are based upon the joints routinely expected to be encountered in dynami-
image of the required IQIs, care is taken in describingthe caily Ioaded structures and statically loaded structures.
manufacture and use of the required IQIs. fQIs are
C6.10.11.2 The weld transitionsin thickness provided
for in this section are expected to be gradual with a
maximum slope of 1 on 2-lf2 as shown in Figures 8.3,
4. Geometricunsharpnessis defined as the fuzzinessor lack of 8.4, and 9.5.
definition in a radiographic image resulting from the source
size, object-to-fi distance, and source-to-object distance. C6.10.12 This section describes all informationrequired
Geometric unsharpness may be expressed mathematicafly as: to identify the radiograph and also provÍdes methods for
U, = F(Li - L,)/L, matching the radiograph to the weld joint, so that weld
WhereU,isthegeometncunsharpness, Fis thesizeofthefocaI repairs, whennecessary, may be made without repetitive
spot or gamma radiation, Li is the source-to-fim distance, and or unnecessarily large excavations. Radiograph identi-
L, is Ehe source-to-object distance. ficationmarks and locationidentification marks shall be
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0784265 0500423 8
Inspection/385
used to locate discontinuities requiring repair and
to verify that unacceptable discontinuities have been
repaired as demonstrated by the subsequent repair
radiograph.
C6.13.1 The ultrasonic testing (UT) provisions are
written as a precise, direct method of testing weldments.
C6.11 Acceptability of Welds Theseprovisionswere designed to ensure reproducibiíity
of test results when examining specific reflectors. Most
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The provisions of sections 8.15.2,3.25.2, and 10.17.3 groove weldsmay be satisfactorilytested using the provi-
prescribe the radiographic quality of welds for statically sions of section 6, Part C.
loaded, dynamically loaded, and tubular structures, Provisionsfor ultrasonictesting of welds inT-, Y-, and
respectively. K-tubular connections can be found in 10.17.4 and
10.19. Detailed procedureshave not beenincluded in this
section of the Code because of the complex geometry
C6.12 Examination, Report, and associated with these welds. Ultrasonic testing proce-
Disposition of Radiographs duresforthese welded joints should be approved by both
the Engineer and contractor.
C6.12.1 A suitablee,variable intensity illuminator with The ultrasonic testing of fillet welds was not included
spot review or masked spot review capabilityis required in the Codebecause of the inabilityto formulateasimple
since more accurate film viewing is possible when the procedure giving satisfactory resuIts. Considerable
viewers’ eyes are not subjected to light from portions of information can be obtained about the location of a
the radiograph not under examination. The ability to discontinuity in a faet weld, as well as its size and
adjust the light intensity reduces eye discomfort and orientation, when using special techniques. The com-
enhances visibility of fdm discontinuities. Subdued light plexity and limitations of ultrasonic testing increase as
in the viewing area allows the reviewer’s eyes to adjust so the size of the fdlet weld decreases. Fillet weld sizes less
that small discontinuitiesin the radiographic image can than 3/4 in. (19 mm) usually require the use of miniature
be seen. Film review in complete darkness is not advis- search units for compiete evaluation. The frequency
able since the contrast between darkness and the intense for miniature search units should be higher than the
light from portions of the radiograph with low density 2.25 MHz nominal frequency normally required, in
cause discomfort and loss of accuracy. Film densities order to control the sound beam divergence. This fre-
within the range of 2.5 to 3.5 are preferred as describedin quency change wouíd &o affect the 2 decibels per inch
6.10.1 1.1. The viewer must have sufficient capacity to (25 mm) attenuation factor used for indication evalua-
properly illuminateradiographs with densitiesup to 4.0. tion. Variations from the Code provisions €or UT are
In general, within the limits of density approved by the permitted upon agreement from the Engineer. It is
Code, the greater the film density, the greater the radio- recommended that details of such agreements be inwrit-
graphic sensitivity. ing sa that al1 parties know how the welds are to be
C6.12.2 and C6.12.3 After the radiographic inspection inspected.
technician and the fabrication/erection Inspector have C6.13.2 Ultrasonic testing through paint layers on
reviewed and approved both the radiographs and the painted surfaces has been changed to an essentialvaria-
report interpretingthem, the radiographic examination ble requiring approval by the Engineer. Although the
report shall be submitted to the Verification Inspector Code prohibits routine ultrasonic testing through paint
for a separate review on behalf of the owner. All radio- layers, it does not necessarily mean that a good, tightt
graphs, including those showing unacceptable quality uniform coat of paint will interferewith the application
prior to repair, shall, unless otherwise provided in the of ultrasonictesting procedure, When paint is present, it
Contract Documents, become the property of the owner. should be measured and reported.
The contractor shall not discard radiographs or reports During routine fabricationof structuralsteel, all welds
under the provisions of the Code until the owner has should be inspected and accepted prior to beingpainted.
been given, and generally has acknowledged, prior Most testing where painted surfaces are involved is on
notice in writing. members that have been in service, and the condition of
The term a full set of radiographs as used in 6.12.3 that test surface should be considered before routine
means one radiograph of acceptable quafity from each testing is done.
radiographic exposure required for complete radio-
graphic inspection. If contractorseíect to load more than C6.13.3 The Code recommends that spot radiography
one film in each cassette to produce an extra radiograph be used as a supplement to U T when examining elec-
for their own use or to avoid possible delays, extra troslag and electrogas welds in materials over 2 in.
exposures due to film artifacts, or both, the extra radio- (50.8 mm) thick. This is based on the inability of UT to
graphs, unless otherwisespecified, are the property of the evaluateporosity on an amplitude bask Piping porosity
contractor. in this type of weid, although appearing cylindrical, has
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 72 m 07842b5 0500424 T m
386jComentai-y
usually a series of cascaded surfaces throughout its Subsections 6.15.1 through 6.15.5 cover the specific
€ength.The sound reflectivity of these cascaded surfaces equipment features that must be considered for equip-
does not generally respond ultrasonically as a straight ment qualification;6.16.1 coversthe referencestandards;
Iine reflector as would be expected from a side drilled subsections6.17.1 through6.17.5 cover thetimeinterval
hole, which is in itself a difficult discontinuity to quan- requirements and references to the applicable 6.21 refer-
tify. Piping porosity oftenrespondsto ultrasonictests as ence block usage; and 6.22 presentsdetailed qualification
a series of single point reflectors as if received from a procedures. Examples of these applications are inchded
series of spherical reflectors in line. This results in a low in Appendix D, Form D-8.
amplitude-response reflecting surface, reff ecting sound
that has no reliable relationship to diameter and length C6.15.6 ï h e size IimitatÎons of the active areas of
of this particular type of discontinuity. straight beam transducers have not been changed; how-
In addition to this problem, the general nature of ever, the sizes being given as 1 2 (160 mm2) and I in.2
piping porosity in electroslag and electrogas welds is (645 mm2>have been misinterpreted as being i f 2 in.
usually such that holes in the central portion of the weld (1 2.7 mm) square and 1 in. (25.4 mm) square, instead of
may be masked by other surroundingholes. The branches the intended 1 2 squarein. and 1 square in., respectivelyy.
or tunnels of piping porosity have a tendency to tail out These actiye area requirements are now written out to
toward the edges of the weld nugget. UT can only effec- eliminate the confusion.
tively evaluatethe first major reflector intercepted by the C6.15.7.2 In the 1980 Code, transducer size and shape
sound path. Some discontinuitiesmay be masked in this limitations were changed in an effort to reduce the scat-
manner; this is true for all ultrasonic testing. Radio- ter in the results of discontinuity evaluation, which is
graphic testing should be used to evaluate suspected thought to be attributed solely to transducer size.
piping porosity in electroslag and electrogas welds used The StructuralWelding Committeefor the 1988 Code
in buifding construction. See Note 4 of TabIe 8.2. No has withdrawn approval of the 1/2in. X 1 in. (12.7 mm
mention of additional radiographic testing is presently X 25.4 mm) transducer. This size transducer is not
made with referenceto testing electroslagand electrogas acceptable.
welds in Table 9.3 since these processes are not presently
accepted for tension welds. Ultrasonictesting of electro-
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
slag and electrogas welds at higher scanning levels will
give intermittent responses from piping porosity. This
indicates RT should be used as described above. C6.16 Reference Standards
The pitch-and-catch technique for evaluating incom- C6.16.1 All of the blocks used for calibration and certi-
plete fusion by UT in electroslag and electrogas welds is
fication of equipment have now been cdled reference
intended to be used only as a secondary test to be con-
blocks and are detailed in one figure. Note: The DS
ducted in an area along the original groove face in the block has been added in Appendix X.
middle haE of the plate thickness. This test is specified to
further evaluate an ultrasonic indication in this area Figure 6.9 All of the notes shown herewith pertain to
which appears on the cathode ray tube (CRT)at scan- all of the reference blocks in both Figure 5.9 and Appen-
ning level but is not rejectable by indication rating. The dix X.
expected pitch-catch amplitude response from such a
reflector is very high, making it unnecessary to use the C6.16.2 The Code prohibits the use of square corners
appIicable amplitude acceptance levels. However, since for calibration purposes because of the inability of
no alternative is provided, these decibel ratings must be acquiring amplitude standardization from various COI-
used. Since only a specific location is being evaluated, ners that are called “square.” Factors that can affect
predetermined positioning of the probe can be made. amplitude standardization are: the size of the f ~ e or t
Probe-holding fixtures are most helpful in this operation. chamfer on the corner, if any; the amount the corner is
The use of the 705 probe in the primary application is out of square (variationfrom WO); and surface finish of
adequatein testingelectroslag and electrogas weld fusion the materiai. When a60° probe is used, it is very difficult
surfaces of material 2-I/2 in. (63.5 mm) and less in to identify the indication from the corner due to high
thickness because acceptance levels are such that proper amplitude wave mode conversions occurring at the
evaluation can be expected. corner.
C6.15 UItrasonic Equipment
C6.17 Equipment Quameation
Standards are estabtished for ultrasonic flaw detectors
to ensure adequate mechanical and electrical perform- C6.17.1 The use of ASTM E3t7for horizontai linearity
ancewhen used in conformancewith the requirements of quaWication has been eliminated and a step-by-step
the Code. procedure outlined in 6.22.1 is used for certification.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 = 0784265 0500425 L =
Inspection/387
C6.17.2 The vertical lineañty of the ultrasonic unit must strated its capability of performing to Code require-
be calibrated every two months by the procedure ments, may be used in inspection upon agreement
described in 6.22.2 to verify continued accuracy. certifi- between the Engineer and the uItrasonictesting inspector.
cation must be maintained with use of information tabu- Tests should be conducted to determine if there is a
lated on a form similar to Appendix Dy Form IT8 difference in responses from the reference reflector, due
(example information is atso shown). to differences between the couplant used for calibration
compared to the couplant used in actual testing. Any
C6.17.2.1 Caution must be used in the application of measurable difference should be taken into account in
alternate methods for vertical linearity certification. discontinuity evaluation.
Normal ways of translating voltage ratios to dB gradua-
tions generally cannot be used due to potentiometer C6.19.5 The provision to search the base meta€ for
loading and capacitance problems created by the high laminar reflectorsis not intended as a check of the accept-
frequency current transfer. A high degree of shielding ability of the base metat, but rather to determine the
must also be maintained in all wiring. ability of the base metal to accept specifiedultrasonictest
procedures.
C6.17.4 Since the contact surfaces of search units wear
and cause loss of indication location accuracy, the Code C6.19.5.1 A procedure for lamellar size evaluation is
requires accuracy checks of the search unit after a maxi- now included in 623.1.
mum of eight hours use. The responsibility for checking
the accuracy of the search unit after this time interval is C6.19.5.2 R e requirement in this subsectionto grind
placed on the individual performing the work. the weld surface or surfaces flush is necessary only to
obtain geometñc accessibaty for an alternate UT pro-
cedure when laminar discontinuities in the base metal
prohibit testing using standard procedure. Contract
documents may require flush grinding of tension groove
C6.18 Calibrationfor Testing welds to improve fatigue performance and facilitate
more accurate RT and UT.
C6.18.4.1 Indications of at least two plate thicknesses
must be displayed in order to ensure proper distance Table 6.3 The procedure chart was established on the
calibration because the initial pulse location may be basis that a search unit angle of 7OUwill best detect and
incorrect due to a time delay between the transducer more accurately evaluate discontinuitieshaving a major
crystal face and the search unit face. dimension oriented normal or near normal to the com-
C6.18.5.1 At least two indications other than the
bined residuai and applied tensile stresses (most detri-
initial pulse must also be used for this distance calibra- mental to weld integrity). It should be assumed that all
tion due to the built-in time delay between the transducer discontinuities could be oriented in this direction, and
face and the face of the search unit. the 70° probe should be used whenever possible. For
Notes: optimum results, a 10in. (255 mm) sound path has been
1. The initial pulse location will always be off to the ìeft established as a routine maximum. There are, however,
of the zero point on the CRT screen. some joint sizes and configurations that require longer
2. Care must be taken to ensure that the pulse at the left sound paths to inspect the wed compietely.
side of the screen is the initial pulse and not one from a Testing procedures 6,8,9,12,14, and 15in the proce-
reference reflector. (Verify by removing searchunitfrom dure legend of Table 6.3, identified by the top quarter
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
workpiece.) designation GA or the bottom quarter designation GE,
require evaluationof discontinuitiesdirectly beneath the
C6.18.5.1 The note has been added to the end of this search unit. More accurate results may be obtained by
subsection to ensure duplication of location data. testing these large welds from both face A and face Byas
also provided for in this table.
Theprocedure chartwasdeveloped taking into account
the above factors. Note 6 of Table 6.3 provides that
discontinuities in tension weids in dynamically loaded
C6.19 Testing Procedures structures shall not be evaluated directly beneath the
search unit.
C6.19.4 It isrecognized that couplants, other than those
specifically required in the Code, may work equally well Table 6.3 The reason for the very exacting require-
or better for some applications. It is beyond the scope of ments ofthe Code with respect to the application of the
the Code to list all fluids and greases that could be search unit (frequency, size, angle) is to maintain thebest
acceptable couplant materials. Any couplant material, condition for reproducibility of results. It is the intent of
other than those listed in the Code, that has demon- the Code that welds be examined using search unit angles
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
388/Commentary
and weld faces s p d i e d in Table 6.3. Use of other angles length evaluation could be misinterpreted. When a six
or weld faces may result in a more critical examination decibel variation in amplitude is obtained by probe
than established by the Code. movement and the indication rating is greater than that
of a minor reflector, the operator should record each
Legend “P”The use of 60ffprobesis not permitted for portion of the discontinuity that varies by +6 dB as a
evaluation when using the pitch-and-catch method of separate discontinuity to determine whether it is accept-
testing because of the high energy loss that is possible due able under the Code based on length, location, and
to wave mode conversion. spacing.
C6.19.6 When required by Tables 8.2 and 9.3 as appli- C6.13.7.1 In procedures specified for ultrasonic test-
cable, the sensitivity for scanningis increased by at feast ing, the zero reference Ievel for discontinuity evaluation
four decibels above the maximum reject level at the is the maximum indication reflected from a 0.06 in.
maximum testing sound path. This increased sensitivity (1.5 mm) diameter hole in the IIW ultrasonic reference
assures that rejectable discontinuities are not missed dur- block. When actual testing of welds is performed, the
ing scanning. minimum acceptable levels are given in decibeis for var-
C6.19.6.4 The attenuation rate of 2 decibels per inch ious weld thicknesses. The minimum acceptance levels
(2d 3 per 25 m)of sound travel, exduding the first inch for staticalIy loaded structures are given in Table 8.2 and
(25mm), is established to provide for the combination of the minimum acceptance levels for dynamicauy loaded
two factors: the distancesquare law and the attenuation structures are given in Table 9.3. In general, the higher
[absorption) of sound energy in the test material. The the indication rating or acceptance leve1, the smaller the
sound path used is the dimension displayed on the cross-sectional area of the discontinuity normal to the
cathode ray tube (CRT).The rounding off of numbers to appIied stress in the weld.
the nearest decibel is accomplished by maintaining the Indication ratings up to 6 dB more sensitive than
fractionst€or decimal values throughout the calculation, rejectable must be recorded on the test report for wefds
and at the final step, advancing to the nearest whole designated as being “Fracture Critical” so that future
decibelvaluewhenvalues of one-half decibel or more are testing, if performed, may determine if there is ffaw
calculated or by dropping the part of the decibel lessthan growth.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
one-half. The acceptance-rejection levels have been eased in the
5/16to3/4in. (8 to 19.ûmm) thicknesscategoryby2dB
C6.19.7 The required six decibeI drop in sound energy because it was felt to be unnecessarily restrictive.
may be determined by adding six decibels of gain to the The thickness ranges from greater than 4 to 6 and
indicationlevel with the calibrated gain control and then greater than 6 to 8 have been combined and the
rescanning the weld area until the amplitude of the dis- maximum disregard level increased to a + 3 dB level.
continuity indication drops back to the reference line. Previous requirements permitted the UT acceptance of
When evaluating the length of a discontinuity that some discontinuities that were Iater discovered to be
does not have equal reflectivity over its full fength, its cracks.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 m 07842b5 0500427 5 m
C7. Stud Welding
C7.1 Scope C7.4 Workmanship Details
Stud welding is unique among the approved welding Several items of cleanliness are needed to produce
processes in this Code in that not only are the arc length sound quality studs. There is new emphasis on keeping
and the weld time automatically controlled, but it also the studs, material, and the arc shields free of moisture
lends itself to a significant production proof test. Once which can cause steam expIosions, porosity, and in rare
the equipment is properly set, the process is capable of a cases underbead cracking. Stud spacing removal of used
large number of identical sound weIds when attention is arc shields, and the first reference to visual inspection are
given to proper workmanship and techniques. Many also covered.
millions of studs have been successfully applied, using
the previous section 4, Part Fs For the reasons outlined C7.4.6 and C7.4.7 These subsectionsclear@call €orused
above, formal procedures qualification and written arc shieids to be removed and a visual inspection to be
AWS welding procedures are not required. Since this made by the applicator. Good judgement would call for
constitutes the basic change from other approved weld- this check to be performed as soon as practical after the
ing processes in this Code, stud welding has been moved stud is weldeci to avoid a largenumber of defective studs
to section 7. in the case of equipment malfunction.
There are provisions for:
(1) Tests to establish mechanical properties and the C7.5.1 Techniqueis asubsectionthat covers therequire-
qualification of stud bases by the stud manufacturer ments for equipment and initial settings.
(2) Tests to estabhh or verify the welding setup C7.5.5 The Code also permits studs to be fillet welded,
(essential variables) and to qualify the operator and at the option of the contractor, by the shielded metal arc
applications process, although the use of automaticallytimed equip-
(3) Tests for inspection requirement
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ment is generally preferred. Welders must be qualified in
accordancewith 5.3 for this application.The option was
included for situations where only limited numbers of
studs are to be welded in the field. Obviously, the con-
C7.2 General Requirements tractor's decision in this matter wouId be one of econom-
General requirements prescribe the physical dimen- ics. The electrode diameter is specified to help ensure that
sions of studs and describe the arc shield and stabilizing minimum heat input is provided in conjunction with the
flux to be used. These stud base assemblies must be applicable preheat requirements of Table 4.3 =
qualified by the manufacturer as prescribed in Appendix Studs welded by the use of automatically timed weld-
TX of this Code. ing equipment or fillet welded by the shielded metal arc
process are considered to have been welded by aprequal-
Tied procedure.
C7.3 Mechanical Requirements
The section on mechanical requirements has been C7.6 Stud Application Qualification
expanded to show two strengthlevels of studs. The lower Requirements
strength level, Type A, is used for general purpose studs
and the higher strength level, Type E, is used as an Studs applied to a vertical surface may require
essential component of composite beam design and con- modified arc shields and modified arc shields may also
struction. Type B studs are the most used in composite be required when welding to other than flat surfaces.
construction for highway brídges. Since this and other special cases are not covered by the
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 9 2 W 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500428 7 W
~ ~-
3Wf Commentary
manufacture’s stud base qualification, the contractor will serve to prove only that the stud itself& acceptable
shalt be responsibfe for the performance of these tests. with the metal used.
Test data serve the same purpose as procedure qualifi-
cation for other processes. Inspectors shodd accept
evidence of previous special application tests based on C7.7 Production Control
satisfactory preproduction tests with the specifc stud Applicator testing is required for the fist two studs in
wdding set up in use. each day’s production or any change in the set up such as
C7.6.í Special conditions where application qualifica- changing of any one of the following: stud gun, timer,
tion requirements apply have been enlarged from con- power source, stud diameter, gun lift and plunge, total
sideration of modified arc shields and weld position to welding lead length, or changes greater than 5% in cur-
include welds through decking and for studs welded to rent (amperage) and time. Users who are unfamiliar with
other than Group I or II steels from Table 4.1. any of these terms are encouraged to refer to ANSI]
The weld through decking application has been added AWS C5.4, Recommended fracticesfor Sfud Welding.
because of problems inherent for the Manufacturer Stud At the very high currents used in stud welding, it is very
Base Qualification Requirements in determining the important to have adequate lead size and good lead
number of plies or the gages of decking which would connections.
require testing. Further limits would have to be estab- C7-7.1.4 At temperatures below 5WF (lO°C), some
Iished for the coating types or thicknesses which would materials for the stud and base materials lack adequate
require testing. The committee would recommend that toughness to pass a hammer test.
the heaviest metai deckingthickness, whether one or two
plies, be tested along with the thickest coating (galvan-
ized if used) to q u a y work for each project. While the
welding variables developed for this worst case would C7.8 Fabrication and Verification
not necessady apply to every stud to be used on the Inspection Requirements
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
project, the equipment to be used would have been
proven for the worst case, and pre-production testing of In addition to visual and bend tests by the applicator,
7.7.1 should be used for each other set up. studs are to be visually inspected and bend tested by the
The Engineer should accept properly documented inspector.
evidence of weld through decking application tests where C7.8.2 and C7.8.4 The Code provides provisions for the
new work would fall within previous limits. Verification Inspector to test additional studs. Where the
The Application test for other than Group I or II steels stud weid failure rate is high, in the judgement of the
has been added to serve as a reminder that the Engineer Engineer, corrective action shalí be required of the con-
should evaluate each such application. tractor at the contractor‘s own expense.
Most steels in Groups III, IV, and V are heat treated
steels, and the heat from stud weIding can lead to Appendix CIX
reduced base plate static or dynamic physical properties. Manufacturer’s Stud Base Quaiinesttion Requirements
For examp€e3thin quench and tempered steel may have This section has been removed from the main body of
reduced tensile properties, and thicker quenched and the Code since it applies to the stud manufacturer. The
tempered steels are more likely to have r e d u d notch Code similarly refers to but does not reprint f i e r metal
toughness in the stud weld heat-affected zone. The Engi- specifications required ta be met by the electrode manu-
neer should particularly evaluate the application where facturer. information from the required test data does
studs will be weided in members subject to dynamic provide applicator procedure values for prequawied
tensile stress or to stress reversal. The application test studs applied to material in the Bat position.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I I 9 2 0784265 0500429 9
C8. Statically Loaded Structures
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Part A directions of loading, lower strength weld metal may be
GeneralRequirements used, provided that the strength requirements are met.
(2) For f i e t welds and partial joint penetration
C8.1 Application groove welds, the designer has a greater flexibility in the
choice of mechanical properties of weld metal as com-
The provisions of section 8 assume static loading pared with those components that are being joined. In
under service conditions, like those in most building most cases, the force to be transferred by these welds is
codes. However, in situationswhere a significantnumber less than the capacity of the components. Such welds are
of repetitions of a substantial stress range are likely to proportioned for the force to be transferred. This can be
occur in service so as to constitute fatigue-type loading, achieved with weld metal of lower strength than the base
the working stressprovisions of Appendix B of the AISC metal, provided the throat area is adequate to support
Specifcation for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of the given forceg
Structural Steelfor Buildings are recommended for use.' A workingstress equal to 0.3 times the tensile strength
of the frtler metal, as designated by the electrodeclassifi-
cation, applied to the throat of a fillet weld has been
C8.2 Base Metal' shown by tests'O to provide a factor of safety ranging
from 2.2 for shearing forces parallel to the longitudinal
Steelsspecifically approved for Statically loaded struc- axis of the weld, to 4.6 for forces normal to the axis,
tures are listed in 8.2. under service loading. This is the basis for the values
given in Table 8.1.
(3) The stress on the effective throat of frtlet welds is
Part B always consideredto be shear. Althoughthe resistance to
Allowable Unit Stresses failureof fiIIet welds loaded perpendicular to their longi-
tudinal axis is greater than that of filiet welds loaded
The philosophy underlying the Code provisions for parallel to this axis, higher load capacities have not been
stresses in welds can be described by citing the following assigned for fillet welds loaded normal to their Iongitud-
principles: inal axis.
(1) The weld metal in complete joint penetration (4) The load-carrying capacity of any weld is deter-
groove welds subject to tension stresses normal to the mined by the lowest of the capacities calculated in each
effective area should have mechanicalproperties closely plane of stress transfer. These planes for shear in fillet
comparable to those of the base metal. This, in effect, and groove welds are illustrated in Figure C8.1.
provides a nearly homogeneous weldment of unreduced (a) Plane 1-1, in which the capacity may be gov-
cross section so that stresses used in proportioning the erned by the allowable shear stress for material "A"
component parts may be used in and adjacent to the (b) Plane 2-2, in which the capacity is governed by
deposited weld metal. For stresses resulting from other the allowable shear stress of the weld metal
(c) Plane 3-3, in which the capacity may be gov-
erned by the allowab€eshear stress for material "B"
7. Fatigue type loading is defined in the American Institute of
Steel Construction's(AISC) Specificationfor Design, Fabrica-
tion. and Erection of Structurai Steel for Buildings. 9. Because of the greater ductZty of the Iowr strength weld
metal in most cases, this choice may be preferable.
8. Only provisions specifically applicable to staticalty loaded
structures will be discussed in this article. Since 10.2 lists alt IO. Proposed Working Stresses of FiIkt Welds in Building
steel specifcationsapprovedfor use under the code, the general Construction,Hi&s, T.R., and Preece, ER., WeIdingJour-
provisions for base metais will be discussed in C10.2. nal Research SuppIement' Oetober 1968.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0 7 8 Y 2 b 5 0500430 5
~ ~~ ~
392f Commentary
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
r- MATERIALA
MATERIALB
MATERIALB '
MATERIALB -i
FILLET WELD COMPLETE JOINT PENETRATION FLARE-BEVEL-
GROOVE WELD GROOVE WELD
Figure C8.1- Shear Planes for Fillet and Groove Welds (see Part B, Commentary)
Part C C8.8 Fillet Weld Details
Structural Detaik C8.8.1 For longitudinalfillet welds used alone in a con-
nection, the Code requires, because of shear lag, that the
C8.6 Combination of WeIds length of each weld be at least equal to the width of the
connected material. This is illustrated in Figure C8.2.
The Code provides that the capacityof differenttypes
of welds used in combination shall be determined by
adding the separate capacities of separate welds. It must
be recognized that this method of adding individual
capacities of welds does not apply to fillet welds reinforc-
ing groove weIds.
CS.7 Welds in Combinationwith Rivets
and BoIts
In generaI, welds do not load equally with bearingtype
mechanical fasteners. Before ultimate loading occurs,
the fastener wilf slip and the weld must carry practically
al1 of the load. Welds should not be used in the same
connectionwith bearing type fastenersunless the weld is
capabíe of carrying the entire stress in the connection.
High-strength bolts properly installed as a friction
type connectionwill load aiongwith the welds, and welds WHEN W r 8 in., TRANSVERSE FILLET WELDS
in combination with these high-strength bolts may be OR INTERMEDIATE PLUG WELDS ARE REQUfRED
used in the same connections. When welds and high-
strength bolts are involved in the same shear plane, bolts
should be properly tensioned prior to welding in order to Figure C8.2-Minimum Length of
avoid any potential for weld met& to prevent the proper Longitudinal Fillet Welds in End
seating of the parts. Connections (see C8.8.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.3 92 = 0784265 0500433 7
~ __
Statically Loaded Structures/393
68.8.3 The Code specifies a n l i n h i m lap of five times tw70 parts wouId result in a point of weakness whose
the thickness of the thinner part of the joint; this was deleterious effects could vary over a wide range. This is
found necessary to avoid unacceptable rotation of the
joint. In Detail A of Figure C8.3, a lap joint is shown
illustrated in Figure 8.2. -
prior to the application of load, while in Detail 3, the
samejoint is illustrated under the applicationof atensile C8.8.6 In testing of flexible beam-to-column connec-
load. It can be seen that the axial tensile force will cause tions in which the welds ;vere subjected to combined
the plates in the joint to bend near the weld, and the shear and bending, it was found that boxing (hooking
longerthe lap, the less bending will occur. This principle the weld) around the top of seat angle connections (see
is illustrated iii Detail C of Figure C8.3. Detail B of Figure C8.5)did not necessarily increase the
strength of the connection. In the case of header angles,
C8.8.4 Single fillet welded lapjoints, under tension, tend as shown in Detail A' boxing (end returns) tend to delay
to open and apply a tearing action at the root of the weld, the initial tearkg of welds under ultimate failure con-
as shown in Detail B of Figure C8.4, unless restrained by ditions. Continuous GlIet welds around the ends of
a force, R, shown in Detail A. stiffeners Iriay lead to the initiation of cracks in the web
C8.8.5 An attempt to tie two fillet welds deposited on under severe loading, or cause severe undercut around
opposite sides of a common plane of contact between ends of detai! pieces.
I
1-5t-i
(A) BEFORE LOADING (B)AFTER LOADING
t = THICKNESS OF
THINNER MEMBER
+=-Iw+ .....
......
....... ......
......
.....
....
I
l
I
(C) EFFECT OF LAP LENGTH
Figure Cû.3 - Examples of Lap Joints (see C8.8.3)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(A) WELD RESTRAINED
BY A (B) TEARING ACTLON IN
FORCE, R UNRESTRAINED WELD
Figure C8.4 - Single Fillet Welded Lap Joints (see C8.8.4)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS ~ _ _ . _ _______ -
Licensee=Pacific
~~~
Gas and Electric- - _ _
Co/9977613100 ~
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 9 2 m 0784265 0500432 9 m
3941Commentary
(A) BOXING OF HEADER ANGLES (B)BOXING AROUND TOP OF SEAT
ANGLE CONNECTIONS
Figure C8.5 -Examples of Boxing (see CS.8.6)
E c
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Q’
WELDS BALANCED ABOUT THE WELDS UNBALANCED ABOUT THE
NEUTRAL AXIS OF THE ANGLE NEUTRAL AXIS OF THE ANGLE
Figure C8.6 -Balancing of Fillet Welds About a Neutral Axis (see CS.9)
CS.9 Eccentricity CS.10 Transition of Thicknesses or
Tests have shown that balancingwelds about the neu-
Widths 1
tral axis of single or double angie or similar type Stressconcentrationsthat occur at changes in material
members does not increasethe load-carrying capacity of thickness or width of stressed elements, or both, are
the connection. Therefore, unbalanced welds are per- dependent upon the abruptness of the transition with
mitted. It should be noted that boxing (end returns) is stress concentration factors varying between 1 and 3 - fn
not necessary, as tearing is not a problem. Figure C8.6 staticallyloaded applications,such stress concentrations
austrates this principle. may be of structural significance only when the stress is
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D1.1 92 = 0784265 0500433 O
Statically Loaded Structures/395
tension and when the concentration factor times the
average stress exceedsthe yield strength of the material.
By requiring a transition of 1in 2-112only in those cases
s4 24 4
where the stress exceeds 1J3 the allowable stress, the
usual factor of safety is preserved with economy of con-
struction. Fatigue provisions provide for the effect of
geometric discontinuitiesin cyclic load appíicationsand
should be adhered to.
C8.12 Connections of Components of
Built-up Members
C8.12.1 The Code specifies an arbitrarymaximum clear
spacing of 24 in. (610 mm) between stitch welds when
two or more rolled shapes are in contact with each other.
This spacing is independent of any consideration of
stress to be transfemed between the two elements; it
ensures that reasonably tight contact between the mem-
bers will be maintained so that when paint is applied it
will seal the joint and prevent water from entering. Fig-
ure C8.7 illustrates this requirement.
-
Figure C8.7 Maximum Clear Spacing When
CS.12.2 In order to prevent local buckling of an at- Using Stitch Welds in Connections Between
tached plate when loaded in compression,the maximum ROM& Members (see C8.12.1)
clear spacingbetween longitudinal stitch welds is held to:
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where,
t = the thickness of the plate, in.(-)
FE.= specified minimum yield point, psi (MPa)
d = maximum clear spacing between longitudinal
stitch welds, in. (mm)
The distance ( d ) is important since it represents the
unsupported length of plate subjected to buckiing under
compression. Figure C8.8 illustrates this point.
For A36 steel, Eq. 1sets the value of d at 21t. Sincethe
radius of gyration (r, in.) of a rectangular plate is 0.29t,
an effective slendernessratio, d/r,of 36 for compression
is provided. This should provide adequate buckling
resistance. In addition, the Code sets the value of 12 in.
-(305 mm) maximum for this distance. See Figure C8.9.
A second factor to be considered is the maximum Figure C8.8 -Local Buckling Under
transverse distance between longitudinal fiilet welds of Compression (see C8.12.2)
this attached plate. The plates are considered to be
simply supported along their edges by the fíiet weld and
loaded in axial compression. The ratio of the unsup- yield point if the b / t ratio specified by the Code is not
ported width (b)to the thickness (t) is adjusted Uisuch a exceeded. The ratios of b[t may be exceeded if a portion
manner that the resulting critical buckling stress (F,) is of the width no greater than that permitted by the Code
approximately equal to the yield point of the steel. This at the full allowable compressive stress would satisfy the
procedureis conservativebecause somethingbetter than load requirements. ln effect, this procedure causes the
simple support is provided by the welds along the edges, actual stress on the full width of the plate to be less than
and the considerable post buckling strength of a plate the allowable stress that would be determined by the use
supported along the two edgesis ignored. Thus, buckiing of a more precise analysis of critical buckling stress for
will not occur in plates stressed in compressionupto the thin plates. See Figure C8.10, Detail B.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 0784265 0500434 2
. ~ ~.~ ~ . . .
396JCommentary
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure CS.9 -Application of Eq. 1 to Filìet Welded Members (see C8.12.2)
THEORETICAL CRITICAL
ELASTICBUCKLINGCURVE
CURVEOF ACTUAL STRESS
THAT RESULTSFROM GNORING
WIDTH IN EXCESSOF MAXIMUM
_----
COMPRESSION
CRITICAL
BUCKLING
I I I I I I I
bh = WIDTH TO THICKNESS
8000 RATIOOF PLATE
{A) SCHEMATIC ILLUSTRATION (6)PLOTOF RATIObnTO
CRITICALBUCKLINGSTRESS
Figure C8.10 -Fillet Welds in Axial Compression (see Cû.12.2)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D I - I I 92 m 07842b5 0500435 4 W
Statically Loaded Structuresl397
In the sketches of Figure C8.11, typical structural 923.2). When subject to static loading only, the toler-
applications are illustrated. The cross-hatched portions ance is somewhat more liberal. The tolerance given €or
represent the sections being considered. intermediate stiffeners, placed only on one side of the
web, is the same for either dynamic or static loading and
C8.12.3 In built-up members, there is no force to be iS the same as that for interior bridge girders.
transferred by stitch welds, nor is there any buckling
under tensile load. The Code does not require any spe- Note: The AISC Specificationfor Design, Fabrication,
cific amount of we€ding; it does specify an arbitrary and Erection of SfmcturalStee€forBuildingsstates that
maximum clear spacingbetween welds of 24t, but not to the tolerancesfor flatness of girder websgiven in 8.13.2
exceed 12 in. (30 mm), as shown in Figure C8.12. need not apply for statical& loaded girders.
PmtD C8.15 Quality of Welds
Workmmshhyr C8.15.1 Visual Inspection. This article makes visual
inspection of welds mandatory and contains the aceept-
C8.13 Dimensionaï Tolerances ance criteria for it. The workmanship requirements of
C8.13.1 Variations from flatness in girder webs are section 3, Workmanship, are also subject to visual
determined by measuring offset from the nominal web inspection. Permissible depth of undercut was revised in
centerline to a straight edge whose length is greater than the 1980edition of the Code to more accurately reflect an
the least panel dimension and placed on a plane parallel acceptable percentage reduction of cross-sectional area
to the nominal web plane. Measurements shall be made for three categories of stress. The undercut values are for
prior to erection. Determining the offset can be mea- structures and individual members that are essentially
sured as shown in Figure (3.14, staticdy loaded.
Undercut values for dynamically baded structures or
C8.13.2 The flatness tolerances for webs with interrne- tubular structures (9.25.15 and 10.17.1.5, respectively)
diate stiffeners on both sides and subject to dynamic have not been changed and should be specified for struc-
loading is the same asthat for interior bridge girders(see tures and individualmembers subject to dynamicloading.
f COVERPLATE
I f f
--t
T'b
FABRICATED
BOX COLUMN
Ï
t b
f I 1 I
Note: Cross-hatching indicates -
b 8 0 0 0
I-
the sections considered. t d - T
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
3981Commentary
PLATE TO A ROLLED SHAPE OR
2 PLATES fN CONTACT WITH EACH OTHER
SS24t5121NCHES <I I -
,
12 in. = 305 m m
/ t = THICKNESS OF THINNER ELEMENT
Figure CS.12 -Example of the Application of Stitch Weids in Tension Members
(see C8.12.3)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ADDITIONAL
LOCALIZED
_t LOADING
A DUE TO
MOVEMENT
Note: May be complete or
partial joint penetration
groove weld. A-A
-
Figure C8.13 Partial Length Groove Weid (see CS.12.5)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Statically haded StntcturesJ399
PARALLEL TO CENTERLINEOF WEB
------
VARIATION FROM FLATNESS
DETERMINED BY MUIISUREMENTS
OR STIFFENER TO STRAIGHT EDGE
Figure Cû.14 -Typical Method to(seeDetermine
C8.13.1)
Variations in Girder Web Fìatness
CS.15.2 Nondestructive Inspection. The weld quaGty weld throat. When box columns are used with moment
requirements for nondestructive testing are not a part of connection members wdded EO the outside surface and
the contract unless nondestructive testing is specified in diaphragm plates wefded on the inside to transfer the
information furnished to the bidders or is subsequently primary stress through the box column member, the
made a part of the contract. Both the owner and contrac- ends of the moment plate-tu-box coIumn plate welds are
tor should give careful attentionto the provisions of 6.6.5 subject to the 2L distance from the end of the weld
and 6.7.1 . When, in addition to the requirement for clause, but the welds on diaphragm plates on the inside
visual inspection, nondestructive testing is specified, the of the box are not subject to this restriction. The weld
acceptance criteria of 8.15.2, 8.15.3, or 8.15.4 apply. ends of the diaphragm plates do not carry primary tensile
stress because this stress is carried through the width of
C8.15.4 ultrasonic Acceptance Criteria. Table 8.2 has the adjacent box member plates.
been revised to clanfy the four acceptance-rejection Note (4) of Table 8.2 was added because experience
levels. Class A (large) flaws are unconditionally reject- with ultrasonic acceptance level provisions previously
able regardless of length, location, or distribution. CIass required by the Code resulted in acceptance of some
B (medium) flaws have a 314 in. (19 mm) maximum rather large gas pockets and piping porosity that can
length limit. Class C (small) flaws have a 2 in. (50 mm) occur in electroslag and electrogas welds. The shape of
length limit. Classes B and C must be further judged by these gas defects, which are peculiar to electrosIag and
the distance from the end of the weld and the dear electrogas welds, is such that they reflect less ultrasound
spacing between adjacent flaws, Class D (minor) flaws than the usual weId discontinuities. Testing at 6 dB more
are acceptable regardless of length, location, or distribu- sensitive than standard testing amplitudes will not
tion in a weld. guarantee accurate evaluation of gas defects in electro-
The acceptance-rejection leveIs have been eased in the slag OF electrogas welds. This type of discontinuity is
51 16 to 3[4 in. (8 to 19 mm) thickness category by 2 dB. easily evaluated by RT, which is recommended ifindica-
The thickness ranges from greater than 4 to 6 and tions of pipe or other gas discontinuities are seen at
greater than 6 to 8 have been combined and the maxi- scanning levels.
mum disregard level increased to a +3 dB level. For example, the application of these acceptanee
In Note (2) of Table 8.2, the key words that are most criteriafor evaluation of a2 in. (5ûmm)thick weld, using
often misinterpreted are: "...from weld ends carrying a 70" probe, is shown in Table C8.1.
primary tensile stress." Thisphrase generallyrefers to the
ends of groove welds subject to appIied tensile stress by C8.15.5 Magnetic PartieIe andLiquid Penetrant Accept-
the design loads. The tensile stress must be normal to the ance Crít&. The magnetic particle acceptance criteria
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
4001Commentary
included in the Code are based on the size of the actual
discontinuity, and not the size of the discontinuity as Table C8.1
indicated by the magnetic particle indicating medium. Ultrasonic Acceptance Criteria for
When surface discontinuities are revealed by magnetic 2 in. (50 mm) Welding, Using a 70° Probe
particle means, acceptance shall be based on a direct (see C8.15.4)
visual measurement of the actual discontinuity. Where
the discontinuity cannot be visually seen (with magnifi- Indication Discontinuity
cation if required) after removal of the indicating Rating* Severity Class
medium, evaluationshall be based on the size and nature Class A (large discontinuities)
of the magnetic particle indication. For subsurface dis- -2 or less Unconditionally rejectable
continuities,the evaluation must be based on the size of regardless of length
the discontinuityindication because the discontinuity is
not accessible. Class 3 (medium discontinuities)**
The Code does not include acceptance criteria for -1 or0 Accept if Iength is I3J4in.
liquid penetrant testing based on bleedout of the dye. Reject if Iength > 314 Ut.
When liquid penetrant testing is used, the acceptance of Class C (srnail discontinuities)**
any discontinuityshall be based on a visual evaluationof +1 or +2 Accept if length is 5 2 in.
the discontinuityafter the removal of the indicatingmedium. Reject if length > 2 in.
Where the discontinuitycannot be seen (with magnifica-
tion if required) after removal of the indicatingmedium, Class D (minor discontinuities)
evaluation shall be based on the size and nature of the + 3 or Greater Accept without limits on
liquid penetrant indication. Observation of the penetrant iength or location
as it bleeds out wiU provide useful information concern- Note: For dynamically loaded structures, Table 9.3 requires that
ing the natufe of the discontinuity. discontinuitiesmore serious than Class D discontinuities and which
exceed314in.(19mm)inlengthbepennittedonlyinthenGddIehaEof
CS.15.1.9 and C8.15.6 The acceptance criteria for the weld thickness. This is not a requirement of section 8.
ASTM A514 and A517 high-strength quenched and *See 6.19.6.5 and Appendix D, Form D-II, Report of Ultrasonic
tempered steels are based on inspection, visual or non- Examination of Welds.
destructive, conducted at least 48 hours after completion **The separation between Cim B and C discontinuities or between
of the weld. Since high-strength steels, when welded, and Class B and C discontinuitiesand the end of a weld must be a distance
weid metats are susceptible to delayed cracking caused of at least 2L except where the end of a weld does not carry primary
tensile stress?as in the comers of diaphragmplates in boxsections. (L=
by hydrogen embrittlement, stress rupture, etc., it has The length of the longer two discontinuitiesor the length of a discon-
been necessary to impose this time restriction to assure tinuity which is being evaluated in relationshipto the end of a weid.)
that any delayed cracking has a reasonable chance of The combined Iength of adjacent discontinuitiesmay berequired tobe
being discovered during inspection. measured as a single discontinuity. See Note I in Table 8.2.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DLmL 92 O784265 O500439 L m
c9. Dynamically Loaded Structures
Part A dynamically loaded structures are due irr part to the
GeneralRequirements difference in environments in which dynamically and
statically loaded structures(such as?respectively, bridges
C9.1 Application and buildings) function. Bridges are usually exposed to
weather and its corrosive innuence, while structural
Sections 1through 6 are supplemented by the specific members of buildings are, in most instances, protected
requirements of this section in order to provide a struc- from such corrosion. Live Ioads carried by bridges also
ture capable of serving for a finiteperiod under dynamic tend to be less defined than live loads for buildings
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and repeated or cyclical loads. Design constraints, because bridge ioads are both repetitive (traffic is not
except those specifically related to welding and given in precisely predictable) and subject to legislative change.
this section, should be those of the applicable general Load limit enforcement is also imperfect.
specification. A condensed table for the allowable unit stresses in
welds is presented in Table 9.I. The allowable stress in
welds is specified on the basis of the type of stress expe-
0 . 2 Base Metal rienced by the weld, the type of weld joint, strengthievels
of weld and base metal.
The structural steels that are generally used in welded
dynamicatly loaded structures are included in the list of
approved steels. Other types of steel having less frequent C9.4 Fatigue Stress Provisions
applications, but suitable for use, are listed in 10.2.
The life (cycle life) of a welded structural member
C9.2.3 When an ASTM Specification A242 or A618, subject to repeated variation of tensile or alternately
Grade 1, low alloy steel is considered for use, a special tensile and compressive stress primarily within the elastic
welding investigation is required to confxm the weld- range of the material is principally dependent on the
ability of a specific composition. (However, if the chemi- stress range and joint geometry. Life is defined as the
cal composition of the proposed A242 steel meets the number of times amember can be subjected to aspecific
chemical composition of an A588 grade$ should be load prior to the initiation and growth of a fatigue crack
considered weldable without further testing.) The to sufficient size ta result in either failureof the structural
requirement is considered necessary because a wide component or collapse of the structure. The stress range
range of chemical composition is applicable to steel con- is the absolute magnitude of stress variation caused by
forming to A242 and A618, Grade 1. the application and removal of load. Structural details
and joint geometry include the type ofjoint, the type of
weld, surface finish, and structural details that effect
Part B stress amplification due to mechanical notches. The dif-
AllowabttC Stresses in Welds ferences in stress concentration effects of joints and
structurai detaib are largely responsiblefor the variation
C9.3 Unit Stresses in Welds in life obtained from details and members. Code ap-
proved base metals that have reasonable notch tough-
The allowable working stresses, assigned for propor- ness and are used in customary structural applications
tioning dynamically loaded elements to preclude failure will have approximately equal lives: therefore, the curves
by yielding, have been established in much the same of F in Figure 9.2 are satisfactoryfor all approved base
manner as those for statically lozded except that the unit metals.
allowable stresses structures are approxhately ten per- The stress range-cytle life curves shown in Figure 9.2
cent more conservative. The lower allowable stresses for and defined in Table 9.2 were developed through
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS DL.1 92 O784265 0500440 8 M
402/Conunentary
reseach sponsored by the National Cooperative High-
way Research Program.l1 This research is published as
Reports 102 and 147, “Effect of Weldments on the
Fatigue Strength of Steel Beams,”and “Fatigue Strength
of Steel Beams with Welded Stiffeners and Attach-
ments,” respectively.
C9.5 Combined Unit Stresses
It was the Committee’s intention in this subsection to
alert the designer to the general specification require-
ments for combined bending and axial stresses to assure
that conditions necessary for elasticstability are met by
the design,
‘i_ 5 16t, UNLESS PLUG OR SLOT
WELDED IN CENTRAL AREA
C9.6 Increased Unit Stresses
General specifcationsusually include a provision for
the use of stresses in excess of the prescribed working Figure C9.1- Fillet Welds in End Connections
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
stress for conditions of a transient or temporary nature (see C9.10.2)
and for loading combinations that are highIy improb-
able. A good exampleis a temporary bridgeused to carry
traffic during some construction phase of the “perma-
nent” structure; such a bridge may be designed to be C9.12 Prohibited Types of Joints
adequately safe with higher unit stresses because of the and Welds
expected short term use. Similarly, stressesduring erec-
tion or during the occumnce of natural phenomenon, Joints and welds prohibited by this article do not
such as an earthquake or high winds, may safeIy exceed perform well under cyclic loading. The prohibitions do
the basic working stress. An example of an improbable not apply to welds in those secondary members which
load combinationwould be full live load at the same time are not subject to cyclic stresses.
as maximum wind load. Although the various combina-
tions of loads and the associated increase in allowable
stresses are substantiay more complex than the exam- C9.13 Combination of Welds (See C8.6)
pIe cited, the principal reasons for the increase remain
the same.
0 . 1 4 Welds in Combinations with
Rivets and BOBS (See ~8.7)
Stresses resulting from eccentricity of welds must be
provided for in the design. Note the difference between
C9.10.1 Lap Joints. See C8.8.3. this article and 8.9 for statically loaded structures.
C9.10.2 Filieet Welds Minimum Iength of Longitudinal
Fillet Weìds. See Cû.8.1.
Transverse Spacing of Longitudinal Fillet Welds in
C9.19 Connections of Components of
End Connections. The general commentary for trans- Built-up Members
v e m spacing of longitudinal fillet welds in end connec- The forces (generally shear) that must be accom-
tions for statically loaded structures as given in C8.8.1 is modated by the connections between components are
also applicable for dynamically loaded structures with usually established by the applicable standard speci-
the folfowing exception: the transverse spacing of welds fication; welds must be designed to provide adequate
shall not exceed I6 times the thickness of the connected capacity to resist the assigned forces.
thinner part, unless suitableprovision is made to prevent
buckling or separation of the parts. This restriction is
illustrated in Figure 0 . 1 .
C9.20 Transition of Thicknesses or
Widths at Butt Joints
1I. Available from: Tmnsportation Research Board, National
Academy of Sciences, 2101 Constitution Avenue, ?Vashington, For good welded design, each flangeof any given cross
DC 20418. section is a single plate. These ffange plates are usually
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I 92 M 0784265 0500443 T M
~~
Dynamicdy Loaded Structures/403
varied in thickness or width, or both, as more or less area The application of intermittent faet welds is iílus-
is required. The required smooth transition can be made trated in Figure B . 3 .
by chamfering the thickness or width, or both, of the
larger flange to correspond to that of the kower ffange. C9.21.4 Continuous fiIlet welds around the ends of
There is a practical fimit to the ande of c h d e r , but the stiffeners may lead to the initiation of cracks in the web
Code requires that the slope should not be greater than under severe loading, or cause severe undercut around
1 in 2-1J2(an angle of about 2 2 9 Transitions may also ends of deta2 pieces.
be made by sloping the surface of the weld. C9.21.6 Cover PIates. Normally, the inner end of the
C9.20.2 When the offset is equal to or less than the terminal development length will be relocated at the
thickness of the thinner part connected, the transition theoretical cutoff point. However, to meet fatiguedesign
shall be made with the weld surface as shown in Figure requirements, the cover plate may be extended farther so
0.2, Detail A, or to the prepared face of the thicker part that the distance between the actual and theoretical
as as shown in Detail B, for members that are subject to cutoff point exceeds the required terminal development
shear and compressiveloads. In no case should the slope length. In this case, the required terminal development
be greater than 1 in 2-1/2. length should be used as the length of the connecting
weld for determining weld size, rather than the greater
length of weld between the actual and theoretical cutoff
C9.21 Girders and Beams point.
The relationship of terminal development to weld size
C9.21.3 Stiffeners. The Code permits (but does not is austrated in Figure C9.4.
require) the ends of transverse stiffeners (when used in
pairs) to be welded to the compression flange. When
stiffeners are used only on one side of the web, the Code
requires ends adjacent to the compression flange to be C9.23 Dimensional Tolerances
welded; without the wefd or a second stiffener on the
opposite side of the web, the compression flange will not Permissible toferances for variations from flatness of
have proper support against rotation. dynamicaEy Ioaded girder webs are given in the Code
separately for interior and fascia girders. The stricter
C9.21.3.1 Intermittent fillet welds may be used to tolerance for fascia girders is based only on appearance
connect stiffeners to beams and girders. However, this as there are no structural requirements for the difference.
practice is not recommended in the design of new Even fasciagirder distortion permitted willbe somewhat
dynamically loaded structures. Continuous welds are noticeable, particularly when members are painted with
preferable from a performance and maintenance stand- a glossy finish. The fascia tolerances are considered satis-
point. Semiautcmatic and automatic fillet welding factory for most requirements. If more stringent toler-
equipment can make continuous fillet welds for about ances are needed for appearance, they should be included
the same labor and material costs as manual intermittent in contract documents as stated in 3.23.1.4, but some
welds. degree of distortion is unavoidable.
i IN2.5OR
FLAITERSLOPE 7
1 IN 2.5 OR
n-
FLATTER SLOPE
......
........
...........
.............
...............
.................
................
..............
............
............
..........
.........
(A) WELD SLOPED TO TOP SURFACE (B) WELD SLOPED TO PREPARED
OF THICKER MEMBER FACE OF THICKER MEMBER
Figure C9.2 -Transition in Thickness Between Unequal Members (see C9.20.2)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
454/Commentary
25% OF STIFFENER LENGTH
SHALL BE WELDED ON EACH
WELD BOTH SID
AT EACH END
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
MINIMUM LWGTH OF WELD
IS 1-1/2 m. f38 mmi < t ' MAXIMUM CLEAR SPACING BETWEENWELDS
IS 123 BUT NOT MORE THAN 6 in. (150 mmf
t = THICKNESS OF THINNER PART
Figure C9.3 -AppIieation of Intermittent FiUet Welds to Stiffeners in Beams and Girders
(see C9.2Z.3.1)
C3.23.1 Variations from flatness in girder webs are C9.25.2 Radiographic and Magnetic Particle Nondes-
determined by measuring offset from the nomina€web tructive Inspection. The weld quality requirements for
centerke to a straight edge whose length is greater than nondestructive examination are not a part of the con-
the least panel dimension and pIaced on a plane parallel tract unless nondestructive testing is specified in infor-
to the nominal web plane. Measurements s h d be made mation furnished to the bidders or is subsequently made
prior to erection. Determining the offset can be mea- a part of the contract.
sured as shown in Figure 0 . 5 . Both the owner and contractor should give careful
attention to the provisions of 6.6.5 and 6.7.1. When
C9.23.3 Web distortions of twice the amount per- nondestructive testing is specified, these requirements
mitted for interior or fasciagirder panek are permitted in are in addition to the requirements for visual inspection.
end panels of girders if the installation of field bolted Except for ultrasonic testing, the nondestructive test
splice plates will reduce the distortion to the level other- acceptance criteria are divided into three categories as
wise permitted. To avoid the possibility of costly field follows:
correction, the contractor should determine by a shop (1) Discontinuities 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or larger in
assembly that the bojted splice plate will reduce the groove welds subject to tensile stress under any condition
distortion to acceptable limits. of loading are specified in 9.25.2.1 and Figure 9.7. It
should be noted that Figure 9.7 includes both a permis-
sible size and spacing for discontinuities.
(2) Discontinuities 1/8 in. (3 mm)12 or larger in
0 . 2 5 Quality of Welds groove welds subject to compressive stress only and
which are specifically indicated as such on shop drawings
The quality requirements set forth in9.25 for dynami- have their quality requirements specified in 9.25.2.2 and
cally Ioaded structures are more stringent than those Figure 9.8. Discontinuity sizes constitute the only differ-
required for statically loaded structures by 8.15. As ence in relation to Figure 9.7.
required €or staticalfyloaded structures,all weldments in
dynamicallyloaded structures are subject to mandatory 12. Further restrictions are specified in the note (*) in Fig-
visual inspection by the contractor. ure 9.8.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
M l = MOMENTOF THEORETICAL CUTOFF POINT ' M p = MOMENTAT INNER
-\ END OF TERMINAL
m
DEVELOPMENTIF BEYOND
\ CUTOFF POINT
@ t
,--
I
MOMENT DIAGRAM
THEORETICAL CUTOFF POINT
COVER PLATED BEAM 1 f= -
VaY
I
END WELD: F =
M l ay
-
21 7 ! I
RELATIONSHIP OF TERMINAL DEVELOPMENTTO r __ f
WELD SIZE. REQUIRESTERMINAL DEVELOPMENT COVERPLATE fA1
LENGTH (A AND €3) IS USED RATHERTHAN
ACTUAL LENGTH (A' AND 8')BETWEEN
_._
I
ACTUAL AND THEORETICALCUTOFF POINTS.
1-IRw -J
THE WIDTH OF THE COVER PLATE IS SYMMETRICALLY
~ i z7
INNER END OF TERMINAL DEVELOPMENT
f= ~ ~ E N D -
Mt~ay
i
F =
TAPERED TO A WIDTH OF NO GREATER 113 THE fe,
WIDTH AT THE THEORETICAL END, BUT NO LESS
THAN 3 in. (75 mm). w f
I = MOMENT OF INERTIA OF BEAM WfTH COVER
PLATES
2w
INNER END OF TERMINAL DEVELOPMENT
r-
M2 ay
ay = Q OF FOOTNOTE34 IN CODE
f= -
VaY
217 , ir
_ _
END WELD: F = -
I
V = VERTICAL SHEAR ATTHE POINT OF
CALCULATION
W
I
I
1
I
I
1
- 1 (A')
f = UNLT SHEAR 1-112 w =
F = FORCE IN PLATE TO BE RESISTED BY INNER END OF TERMINAL DEVELOPMENT
TERMINAL DEVELOPMENT WELDS
END WELD: F =
4
- ay
I
THE WIDTH OF THE COVER PLATE IS SYMMETRICALLY
TAPERED TO A WIDTH OF NO GREATER 113 THE (B')
WIDTH AT THE THEORETICAL END, BUT NO LESS
THAN 3 in. (75 mm).
W
INNER END OF TERMINAL DEVELOPMENT
STRESS RANGE BASE METALADJACENT TO WELD
OR WELD TERMINATION MUST BE WITHIN LlMtTS OF
CATEGORY E, TABLE 9.2
Figure C9.4 -Relationship of Terminal Development to WeId Size (see C9.21.5)
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500444 5 W
4061Commentary
Figure 0 . 5 -Typical Method to Determine Variations in Girder Web Fìatness (see C9.23.1)
(3) Discontinuities less than 1/16 h. (1.6 mm) may design or shop drawings are required to confom to the
coexist with larger discontinuitiesin members subject to acceptance criteria of Table 9.3, which are up to 6 dB
tension with no restriction on their location or spacing higher than those in Table 8.2.
except the sum of their greatest dimensions shall not
exceed 3/8 in. (10 111111) in any linear inch of weld. These C9.25.4 Liquid Penetrant Acceptance Criteria. The
quality requirements are specified in 9.25.2.3. Code does not incIude acceptance criteria for liquid
The magnetic part&.de acceptance criteria included in penetrant testing based on b€eedout of the dye. When
the Code are based on the size of the actual discontinuity, liquid penetrant testing is used, the. acceptance of any
and not the size of the discontinuity as indicated by the discontinuityshall be based on avisual evaluation of the
mgnetic particle indicating medium. When surface dis- discontinuityafter the removal of the indicatingmedium.
continuities are revealed by magnetic particle means, Where the discontinuity cannot be seen (with magnüïca-
amptanceshall be based on a direct Visual measurement tion ifrequired) after removal of the indicatingmedium,
of the actual discontinuity. Where the discontinuity can- evaluation shall be based on the size and nature of the
not be Visually seen (with magnificationif required) after liquid penetrant indication. Observationof the penetrant
removal of the indicating medium, evaluation shall be as it bleeds out will provide useful information concern-
based on the size and nature of the magnetic particle in- ing the nature of the discontinuity.
dication. For subsurface discontinuities, the evaluation
must be based on the size of the discontinuityindication TabIe 9.3. The same new system of categorizingweld
because the discontinuityis not accessibIe. fiaw classification is used as on TabIe 8.2. The acceptance-
rejectionlevels have been eased in the 5J 16to 3/4in. (8.0
C9.25.3 ultrasonic Testing. See section CO, Part B to 19.0 mm) thickness category by 3 dB. The thickness
and C, General Requirements. The Code provides ranges from greater than 4 to 6 in. (í02 to 152mm) and
acceptance criteria for welds subject to tensile stresses greater than 6 to 8 (152 to 203 mm) in. have also been
that differ from those subject only to compressive combined. The combining of thicknesses of greater than
stresses. Groove welds subject to compressive stresses 4 to 8 inches into one category makes the acceptance
only and which are indicated on design or shop drawings critena more stringent on extreme thicknesses of mate-
are required to confom to the acceptance criteria of rial. This change was made to reduce the chance of
Table 8-2. Groove welds subject to tensile stresses under aliowing cracks to remain in these thick members.
any condition of ioadingand welds subject only to compres-
sive stresses but not specifically designated as such on C9.25.1.9 and C9.25.5 See C8.15.1.9 and C8.15.5.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500445 7 =
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ClO, Tubular Structures
Structural steels that are generally considered appli-
cable for use u1 welded steel dynamically loaded struc-
tures are listed in 9.2 as approved steek. Other ASTM
specificationsfor other types of steel having infrequent
C10.1 Application applications, but suitable for use in dynamically loaded
Section 10, Tubular Structures, originally evolved structures, are also listed as approved steels. Steeb
from a background of practices and experience with conforming to these additional ASTM specifications,
fixed offshore platforms of welded tubular construction. A500J3A501, and A618, coveringstructuraltubing, and
Like bridges, these are subject to a moderate amount of A516 and A517 pressure vessel plates are considered
cyclic loading. Like conventional building structures, weldabìe and are included in the kt of approved steels
they are redundant to a degreewhich keeps isolatedjoint for dynamically loaded structures.
failures from being catastrophic. ?he requirements of The complete listing of approved steels in 10.2 pro-
section 10 are intended to be generally applicable to a vides the designer with a group of weldabIe steels having
wide variety of tubular structures. Bowever, weIded a minimum specified yield strength range from 30 ksi to
tubular construction involves new terminology and a 100ksif210 MPa to 690 MPa), and in thecase ofsome of
sufficient number of unique requirements for design, the materials, notch toughness characteristics which
detailing, workmanship, and inspection to fd1a separate make them suitab€efor low temperature application.
section of the Code. Other steels may be used when their weidab%ty has
been established according to the qualification proce-
dure required by 5.2.
The Code restricts the use of steels to those whose
specified minimum yield strengthdoes not exceed 100ksi
C10.2 Base Metal (690 MPa). Some provisions of 10.5.1 rely upon the
ability of steel to strain harden.
The steels listed as approved in 10.2 of the Code
include those considered suitable for welded dynami- C10.2.2 The Code includes ASTM specification, A709,
cally loaded structuresand staticallyloaded structuresas Stnrctural Steel for Bridges. This specification is an
well as tubular structures. Also listed are other ASTM attempt by ASTM to consolidatein one specification all
specifications, American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) of the structural steels: i.e., carbon and low alloy steels
specifications, and American Petroleum Institute (API) for structuralshapes, plates, and bars and quenched and
specifications that cover types of materials that have tempered alloy steel plates intended for use in bridges.
been used in tubularstructures. All of the steels approved Grades 36, 50, 50W, 100 and 1OOW are equivalent to
are considered weldable by the procedures specified in ASTM A36, A572 Grade 50, A588, and A5t4, respec-
this Code. Every Code approved steel is listed in 10.2. tively. The A703 specification includes supplementary
The ASTM specificationsfor grades of structuralsteel requirements for impact strength tests, ultrasonic exam-
used in building construction for which welding proce- ination, etc., which may be spesied by the purchaser.
dures are well established are listed in 8.2 together with The A703 specification is listed as an approved steel
other ASTM specifications covering other types of for Grades 36, 50, 50W, 1OO and 1OOW where the
material having infrequent application but which are
suitable for use in statically loaded structures. ï h e
ASTM A242, A588, A514, and A517 specificationscon- 13. Products manufactured to this standard may not be suit-
tain grades with chemistries that are considered suitable able forthose applicationswhere low temperatuenotchtough-
for use in the unpainted or weathered condition. ASTM ness may be important, such as dynamicallyloaded e€ernenísin
A618 is available with enhanced conosion resistance. welded structures.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D I - I 92 0784265 050044b 9
4081Commentary
requirements are equivafent to A36, A572 Grade 50, however, and the risk of collapse under extreme over-
8588, and A514, respectively. Otherwise, the steel must load increases correspondingly.
be considered under the provisions of 10.2.3. (1) Class C steels are those which have a history of
successful application in welded structures at service
C10.2.6 Base MetaI Toughness. Some steeIs are listeti temperatures above freezing, but for which impact tests
by strength group (Groups I, II, III, IV, and V) and are not specified. Such steeis are applicable to structural
toughness class (Ciasses A, Byand C) in Tables ClO.1- members involving limited thickness, moderate forming,
Cf0.3. These listulgs are for guidance to designers, and law restraint, modest stress concentration, quasi-static
follow longestablished practice for offshore structures, loading (rise time 1 second or longer) and structural
as described in Reference 9 and the following: redundancy such that an isolated fracture wodd not be
Strength Groups. Steels may be grouped according to catastrophic. Examples of such applications are piling,
strengthlevel and welding characteristicsasfollows (also braces in redundant space frames, fíoor beams, and
see 4.1.1 and 4.2): columns.
(2) Class €3 steels are suitable for use where thickness,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) Group f designates miid structural carbon steels
with specified minimum yield strengths of 40 ksi cold work, restraint, stress concentration, and impact
(280 MPa) or less. Carbon equivalent (defined in loading or lack of redundancy, or both, indicate the need
Appendix XI, X16.1.1) is generaiiy 0 . W f or less, and for improved notch toughness. Where impact tests are
these steels may be welded by any of the welding proc- specified, Class B steels should exhibit Charpy V-notch
esses as described in the Code. energy of 15 ft-lb (205) for Group I, 25 ft-lb (345) €or
(2) Group II designates intermediate strength low Group II, and 35 ft-lb (485) for Group III, at the lowest
alloy steels with specified minimum yield strengths of anticipated service temperature. Steels listed herein as
over 40 ksi through 52 ksi (280 through 360 MPa). Class B can generally meet these Charpy requirements at
Carbon equivaíent ranges up to 0.45% and higher, and temperatures ranging from 50" to 32°F (10' to 0' C).
these steels require the use of low hydrogen welding Examples of such applications are connectionsin secon-
processes. dary structure, and bracing in primary structure. When
(3) Group III designates high-strength low alloy steels impact tests are specified for Class B steeI, heat lot testing
with specifiedminimumyield strengths in excess of 52 ksi haccordance with ASTM A673, Frequency H, is nor-
through 75 ksi (360 through 515 MPa). Such steeís may mally used. However, there is no positive assurance that
be used, provided that each application is investigated Class B toughness will be present in pieces of steel that
with regard to the following: are not tested.
la) Weldability and specid welding procedures (3) Class A steels are suitable for use at subfreezing
which may be required. Low hydrogen welding proce- temperatures and for critical applications involving
dures would generally be presumed. adverse Combinations of the factors cited above, Critical
(b) Fatigue problems which may result from the applications may warrant Charpy testing at 36-54' F
use of higher working stresses, and (20-30' C) beIow the lowest anticipated service temper-
(c) Notch toughness in re€ationto other elements of ature. This extra margin o€notch toughess prevents the
fracture control, such as fabrication, inspection proce- propagation of brittle fractures from large flaws, and
dures, service stress, and temperature environment. provides for crack arrest in thicknesses of severalinches.
(4) Groups IV and Vinclude higher strength construc- Steels enumerated herein as Class A can generally meet
tional steels in the range of over 75 ksi through 100 ksi the Charpy requirements stated above at temperatures
yield (515 through 690 MPa). Extreme care should be rangingfrom -4" F to -40"F(-20" C to -40' C).Impact
exercised with regard to hydrogen control to avoid crack- testing frequency for Class A steels should be in accord-
ing and heat input to avoid loss of strength due to over- ance with the specification under which the steeI is
tempering. ordered; in the absence of other requirements, heat-lot
testing may be used.
Toughness Class. Toughness classifcations A, B, and C
may be used to cover various degrees of criticalityshown C10.2.6.1 SteeïforTubuhBracíng(BetweenConnec-
in the matrix of Table C10.4, and as described below: tions). These minimal notch toughnessrequirements for
Pfirnary(or fracturecritical) structurecovers elements heavy-section tension members follow the provisions
whose sole failure would be catastrophic. recently proposed by AISC. They rely to a considerable
Secondary structure covers elements whose failure extent on the temperature-shift phenomenon described
would not lead to catastrophic collapse, under condi- by Barsom (Reference 16). The temperature-sMt effect
tions for which the structure could be occupied or capa- is that statically loaded materials exhibit similar leve&of
ble of major off-site damages (e.g., poilution), or both. ductility as dynamically loaded impact specimens tested
For highly redundant tubular space-frame structures, at a higher temperature. For higher strength steels,
fracture of a single brace or its end connection is not Groups III, IV, and V, the temperature-shift is less effec-
likely to kad to collapse under normal or even moder- tive; also fracture mechanics strain energy release con-
ateiy severe loads. The strength is reduced somewhat, siderations would suggest higher required energy values.
Copyright American Welding Society
..
Provided by IHS under license with AWS ..._ Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AUS D I - I I 92 m 0784265 0500447 O m~- ~ ~ ~
Tubular Strueturesj'4û9
Tabfe C10.1
Structural Steef Plates (see Ct0.2.6) ~~ ~ ~~~~~~
Strength Toughness Yield Strength Tefeitsiie Strength
Group Class Specification & Grade ksi MPa ksi MPa
I c ASTM A36 (to 2" thick) 36 250 58-80 400-550
ASTM A131 Grade A (to 1/2" thick) 34 235 58-7f 440-490
I B ASTM A131 Grades B, D 34 235 58-71 400-490
ASTM AS73 Grade 65 35 240 65-77 450-550
ASTM A709 Grade 36T2 36 250 58-80 400-550
I A ASTM A131 Grades CS, E 34 235 58-71 400-490
II C ASTM A242 (to lj2" thick) 50 345 70 480
ASTM A572 Grade 42 (to 2" thick) 42 290 60 415
ASTM A572 Grade 50 (to 112" thick)* 50 345 65 450
ASTM A588 (4" and under) 50 345 70 min 485 min
II B ASTM A709 Grades 50T2, SOT3 50 345 65 450
ASTM A131 Grade AH32 45.5 315 68-85 470-585
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ASTM A131 Grade AH36 51 350 71 -90 490-620
ASTM A808 [strength varies with thickness) 42 -50 290-345 60-65 415-450
ASTM A516 Grade 65 35 240 65-85 450-585
If A API Spec 2H Grade 42 42 290 62-80 430-550
Grade 50 (to 2-112" thick) 50 345 70-90 483-620
(over 2-1/2" thick) 47 325 70-90 483 -620
API Spec 2iV Grade 42 (to 1" thick) 42-67 290-462 62 427
(over I" thick) 42-62 290-427 62 427
Grade 50 (to 1" thick) 50-75 345-517 65 448
(over 1" thick) 50-70 345 -483 65 448
Grade 50T (to 1" thick) 50-80 345-522 70 483
(over I" thick) 50-75 345-517 70 483
API Spec 2Y Grade 42 (to 1" thick) 42-67 290-462 62 427
(over I" thick) 42-62 290-462 62 427
Grade 50 (to 1"thick) 50-75 345-517 65 448
(over 1"thick) 50-70 345-483 65 448
Grade SOT (to 1"thick) 50-80 345-572 70 483
(over 1" thick) 50-75 345-517 70 483
ASTM A131 Grades DH32, EH32 45.5 315 68-85 470-585
Grades DH36, EH36 5f 350 71 -90 490-620
ASTM A537 CI~SS I (to 2-112" thick) 50 345 70-90 485-620
ASTM A633 Grade A 42 290 63-83 435-570
Grades C, D 50 345 70-90 485 -620
ASTM A678 Grade A 50 345 70-90 485-620
III C ASTM A633 Grade E 60 415 80- €00 550-690
III A ASTM A537 CI~SS II (to 2-112" thick) 60 415 80- loo 550-690
ASTM A678 Grade B 60 415 8O-IoO 550-690
APE Spec 2W Grade 60 (to 1" thick) 60-90 414-621 75 517
(over i" thick) 60-85 414-586 75 517
API Spec 2Y Grade 60 (to 1" thick) 60-90 414-621 75 517
(over I" thick) 60-85 414-586 75 5í7
ASTM A710 Grade A Class 3
(quenched and precipitation heat treated)
thru 2" 75 515 85 585
2" to 4" 65 450 75 515
over 4" 60 415 70 485
IV C ASTM A514 (over 2-112" thick) 90 620 110- 130 760-890
ASTM A517 (over 2-1/2" thick) 90 620 110-130 760-896
V c ASTM A514 (to 2412" thick) 100 690 110-130 760-895
ASTM A517 [to 2-1/2" thick) 100 690 110- 130 760-895
*To 2" Thick for Type 1 or 2 Killed, Fine Grain Practice
Note: See list of Refereneeó Specifications for full titles of the above.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 72 m 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500448 2 m
Table Ct0.2
Structural Steel Pipe and Tubular Shapes (see C10.2.6)
Yield Strength Tende Strength
Group Class S~ecification
& Grade ksi MPa ksi MPa
I c API Spec 5L Grade B* 35 240 60 415
ASTM A53 Grade B 35 240 60 415
ASTM 139 Grade B 35 240 60 415
ASTM A500 Grade A (round) 33 230 45 310
(shaped) 39 270 45 310
ASTM Aso0 Grade B (round) 42 290 58 400
(shaped) 46 320 58 400
ASTM A501 (round and shaped) 36 250 58 400
MI Spec 5L Grade X42 42 290 &o 415
(2% max. eofd expansion)
I B ASTM A106 Grade B (normalized) 35 240 60 415
ASTM A524 Grade I (through 318" wet.) 35 240 60 415
Grade II [over 3/8" w.t.) 30 205 55-80 380-550
f A ASTM A333 Grade 6 35 240 60 415
ASTM A334 Grade 6 35 240 60 415
II C API Spec 5L Grade X52 52 360 66 45s
(2% max. cold expansion)
ASTM A618 so 345 70 485
II B API Spec 5L Grade X52 with SRS, SR6, 52 360 66 455
or SR8
Iff c ASTM A595 Grade A (tapered shapes) 55 380 65 450
ASTM A595 Grades B and C 60 410 70 480
(tapered shapes)
*Seamless or with Iongitudinai seam welds
Notes:
f. See iiSt of Referenced Speciíícationsfor fulI titles of the above.
2. Structural pipemay also be fabricatedk accordancewith APl Spec 2B,ASTMA139, ASTM A252+,or ASTM A671 usinggrades of structurai
plate Iisted in Exhibit I except that hydrostatic testing may be omitted.
+ With Iongitudinal w e h and circumferentidbutt welds.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table C10.3
Structural Steel Shames (see C10.2.6)
ASTM Yield Strength Tensile Strength
Group Qass Specification & Grade ksi MPa ksi MPa
r c A36 (to 2" thick) 36 250 58-80 400-550
AI31 Grade A (to 112" thick) 34 235 58-80 400-550
I B A709 Grade 36T2 36 250 58-80 400-550
II c A572 Grade 42 (to 2" thick) 42 290 60 415
A572 Grade 50 (to 1/2" thick) 50 345 65 480
A588 (to 2" thick) 50 345 70 485
II B A709 Grades 5OT2,SOT3 50 345 65 450
A131 Grade AH32 46 320 68-85 470-585
Ai31 Grade AH36 51 360 71-90 490 - 620
*To 2" Thick for Type 1 or 2 Killed, Fine Grain Practice
Note: Thistableispart of thecommentaryontoughnessconsideratio~for tubular structuresfor compositesoftubulm and othershapes), e.g.,used
for offshore piatform. It is not intended to imply that unlisted shapes are unsuitabIe for other applications.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 92 = 0784265 0500449 4 ~~ ~
Tubuiar Stnrctures/411
Table C10.4
CIassification Matrix for Applications [see Cf0.2.6)
SECONDARY
FAIL-SAFE NOMINAL STRESS
WHILE MANNED LOW CONGENTRATtON
PRIMARY œ HIGH STRESS CONCENTRATION
FRACTURE ri PLASTIC DEFORMATtON
CRITICAL
THICK SECTIONS
HIGH RESTRAINT
THIN SECTIONS
LOW RESTRAt NT
Testing as-rolled steeis on a heat-lot basis leaves one Impact Testing Conditions
exposed to considerable variation within the heat, with
impacts showing more scatter than strength properties. Diameter/ Test Test
However, it is better than no testing at alI. Thickness Temperature Condition
Over 30 3 6 O F (20" C) below LAST* Flat plate
C10.2.6.2 Steel for Tubular Connections. The main 20-30 54'F (30° C) below LAST Flat plate
members in tubular connections are subject to local Under 20 F (IOOC) below LAST As fabricated
stress concentrations which may lead to local yielding
and piastic strains at the design load. During the service *LAST Lowest Anticipated Service Temperature
life, cyclic loadingmay initiatefatigue cracks, making ad-
ditionaldemands on the ductility of the steel, particularly (2) Atmospheric Service. For connections exposed
under dynamic loads. These demands are particularly to lower temperatures and possible impact, or for critical
severe in heavy-wall joint-cans designed for punching connections at any location in which it is desired to
shear. prevent all brittle fractures, the tougher Class A steels
(i) Underwater Connections. For underwater por- shoald be considered, e.g., API Spec. 2H,Gr. 42 or
tions of redundant template-type offshore platforms, Gr. 50. For 50 ksi (345 MPa) yield and higher strength
API recommends that steel forjoint cans (such asjacket steels, special attention should be given to weiding
legjoint cans, chords in major X and K joints, and thru procedures, in order to avoid degradation of the heat-
members in connections designed as overlapping) meet affected zones. Even for the less demanding service of
one of the following notch toughness criteria at the ordinaq structures, the following groupjclass base
temperature given in the Table below. metals are NOT recommended for use as the main mem-
(a) NRL Drop-Weight Test no-break performance. bers in tubular connections: IIC, IIIB, IIIC, IV, and V.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(preferred) (3) Critical Connections. For criticai connections
(b) Charpy V-notch energy: 15 €t-lb (205) for Group involving high restraint (including adverse geometry,
I steels, 25 ft-lb (345)for Group II steels, and 3.5 ft-lb high yield strength, thick sections, or any combination of
(485) for Group III steels (transverse test). these conditions), and through-thicknesstensile loads in
The preferred NRL crack arrest criteria follow from service, consideration should be given to the use of steel
use of the Fracture Analysis Diagram (Reference 17), and having improved through-thickness (Zdirection) prop-
from failures of'heavyconnectionsmeetingtemperature- erties, e.g., API Spec. 2H,SuppIements S4 and S5, or
shifted Charpy initiation criteria. For service tempera- ASTM A770.
tures at 40° F (4O c ) or higher, these requirements may (4) Brace Ends. Although the brace ends at tubular
normally be met by using any of the Class A steeIs. connections are also subject to stress concentration,the
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 32 = 0784265 0500q50 O W
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4121Commentary
conditions of service are not quite as severe as the main Circular
- -Box
member (or joint-can). For critical braces, for which (1) Local failure* 1O.S.I.i 10.5.2.1
brittfe fracture would be catastrophic, consideration (2) General collapse 10.5.1.2 10.5.2.2
should be given to the use of stub-ends in the braces (3) Progressive failure (unzipping) 10.5.1.3 10.5.2.3
having the same class as thejoint-can, or one class lower. (4) Materials problems 10.5.1.4 10.5.2.4
This provision need not apply to the body of braces
(between connections). *Overlapping connections are covered by 10.5.1.5 and
10.5.2.5 respectively.
ClO.3 Base Meta1 Stress C10.5.1.1 Local Failure. The design requirements
are stated in terms of nominal punching shear stress (see
C103.1 Limiting diameter1thickness and width/ thick- Figure C10.1 for the simpWIed concept of punching
ness ratios depend onthe application. Referring to Table shear). The actual localized stress situationis more com-
C10.5, the left hand side deals with connection design plex than this simple concept suggests, and includes shell
issues covered by the AWS Dl.1 Code. The first three bending and membrane stress as well. Whatever the
columns delimit stockly members for which simpIified actual mode of main member failure, the allowable V, is
design rules apply; beyond these limitsthe more detailed a conservative representation of the average shear stress
calculations given in the Code must be performed. at failurein static tests of simple welded tubular connec-
The firnits for designing members against local buck- tions, including a safety factor of I .8,For background
ling at various degrees of plasticity are shown on the data, the user should consult References 1-6.
right-hand side. These are an amalgam of API, AISC Treatment of box sectionshas been made as consistent
and AIS1 requirements. Naturally, requirements of the as possible with that of circular sections. Derivation of
governing design specification would take precedence the basic allowable V, for box sections included a safety
here. factor of 1.8, based on limit analyses utilizing the ulti-
mate tensile strength, which was assumed to be 1.5 times
the specified minimum ~ie1d.I~ A favorable redistribution
Part B of load was also assumed where appropriate. Localized
ABowabIe Unit Stresses Ut Welds yieIding should be expected to occur within allowable
load levels. Fairly general yielding with deflection
This part dealing with dowable stresses for tubular exceeding 0.02D can be expected at loads exceeding
sectionsincludesrequirementsfor square and rectangular 120-160% of the static allowable.
sections as well as circular tubes. Alternatives to the punching shear approach €orsizing
In commonly used types of tubular connections, the tubular connections can be found in the literature (for
weld itself may not be the factor limiting the capacity of exampte, Reference 3). However, such empirical rules,
the joint. Such Emitations as local failure (punching particularly design equations which are not dimension-
shear), general collapse of the main member, and lamef- ally complete, should be limited in application to the
lar tearing are discussed because they are not adequateïy tube configurations and sizes (and units) from which
covered in other coáes. derived.
In the 1984 edition, substantial changes have been
made in the punching shear requirements for circular
sections, to bring them up to date. These include:
C10.4 Unit Stresses in Welds (i) Elimination of Ka and Kbfrom the formula for
The allowable unit stresses in welds are presented in acting V,. Although logical from the standpoint of
Tabb 10.1. This table is a consolidated and condensed geometry and statics,these produce inappropriatetrends
version which lists for each type of weld the allowable in comparison to test data on the strength of tubular
unit stress €or tubular application and the kind of stress connections.
the weld will experience. The required weld metal (2) New expressions for the allowable basic V, and a
strength level is also specified. This table is presented in new modifier Qs which give results numerically similar
the same format as Tables 8.1 and 9.1. to those in Reference 2.
(3) Introduction of the chord ovalizkg parameter, (w,
which matches available results from single-plane joints
C10.5 Limitations on the Strength of and offers a promising extension to multiplanar joints
(Reference 3).
Welded Tubular Connections (4) A new expressionfor Qf, based on therecent tests
A number of uníque failure modes are possible in of Yura (Reference 4).
tubular connections. In addition to the usual checks on
weld stiress provided for in most design codes, the 14. This is why LY (alpha) in Table 10.2 limits Fyin the design
designer should check for the following: formula for punching shear to 213 the tensife strength.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/4?3
-
TZW
?dV
8
m
d a
t M
!
Fz
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 07842b5 0500452 4 W
Comenttuy
4f4/
(5) Nonlinear interaction between axial load and
LOCAL SHEAR bending in the branch member, based on the fully plastic
behavior o€tubuíar sections (Reference 5).
Figure C10.2 gives a formula and defines the terms
used for computing a value of the chord ovaliang
parameter alpha (ol) when designing multiplanar tubular
joints. The values of alpha obtained are compatiblewith
both staticstrengthdesign (Table 10.2) and fatigue (Note
5 and Table 10.3) using the punching shear format.
Alpha is evaluated separately for each branch for
which punching shear is checked (the “referencebrace”),
and for eachload case, with summation being carried out
_-I
for all braces present at the node, each time alpha is
evaluated. in the summation, the cosine term expresses
the influence of braces as a function of position around
the circumference, and the exponential decay t e m
expresses the lesseninginfiuence of braces as distance LI
increases; these terms are both unity for the reference
Figure Cl0.l- Simpufied Concept brace which appears again in the denominator. In com-
of minchhg Shear (see C10.5.1) plex space frames, this repetitive calculation may be
/
z=
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
r-
REFERENCE BFIANCH /
MEMBERS FOR WHICH
a! APPLES
/ \ (TENSION
POSITIVE)
P
X P SIN B COS 24e-d(0-6~)
ALL BRANCHES
AT A JOINT
1.0+0.7
CY= .
P StNB
aL1.0 REFERENCE BRANCH FOR
WHICH (Y APPLIES
Figure C10.2 -Definition of Terms for Computed Alpha (see C10.5.i)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - I I 9 2
Tubular Structures/415
incorporated into a joint design postprocessor to the Figure (30.3 showsthe reliabilityof the new punching
design computer analysis. shear criteria based on computed alpha, as a histogram
For hand calculations, the designer might prefer the of the ratio of test ultímate strength (P test) to the
simpIer forms of alpha &en in Table 10.2. However, allowable. The data base of Reference 6 was used.EsThe
these do not cover multiplanarcaseswhere higher values test results cluster tightly just on the safe side of the
of alpha may apply (e.g., 3.8 for a hubstyle cross joint nomind ultimate strength safety factor of 1.8. Using a
with four branches), and require a somewhat arbitrary lognormal safety index format, the median ultimate
classification of joint types. For joints whose load strength for joints faiíhg by plastic collapse is 3.45
pattern falls in between the standard cases (e.g., part of
the load is carried as in a K-joint and part as a T-joint] 15. Inappropriate tests have been deleted, and effective Fy
interpolated values of alpha should be determined. conformingtothe 2f 3 mk have been estimated, as described in
Computed alpha would take care of this automatically. nw-doc xv-405-77.
,/-PLASTIC COLLAPSE
T & Y COMPRESSION
X COMPRESSION
MEAN SF = 2.44
SAFETY INDEX = 3.45
TENSILE FRACTURE
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
T & Y TENSION
MEAN CF = 5.24
SAFETY INDEX = 5.22
.......*.
..--.....
5 .O 2 5 $0
PTEST~LLOWABLE
SF = Safety factor
Daia base: 306 (non-overlap) joints. See reference 6.
Figure C10.3 -Reliability of Punching Shear Criteria Using Computed Alpha (AWS Dî.1-84)
(see ClO.5.1)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.L 72 m 0784265 0500454 B m
standard deviations above the design load, comparable manned, the 1986draft of API RP2A-LRFD proposed
to safety indices of 3 to 4 for connections in other types of more liberal resistance factors of 0.90 to 0.95, corre-
construction. By discriminating between different joint sponding to a reduced target safety index of 2.5 (actuaiiy,
types, the new criteria achieve similar overall economy as low as 2.1 for tension members). API also adjusted
and greater safety than the less precise criteria they their aíIowabte stress design criteriato reflect the benefit
replace. typical tb/db ratios.
The apparently large safety factor and safety index In Canada (Reference 21), using these resistance fac-
shown for tension tests is biased by the large number of tors with slightly different load factors, a42% difference
small tubes in the data base. If only tubes with t, 20.25 in overall safety factor results. This is within calibration
inches are considered, the mean safety factor drops to accuracy.
3.7; for t, 2 0.5 inches, the safety factor is only 2.2.
Considering the singularity (sharp notch) at the toe of C10.5.1.2 General Collapse. In addition to localized
typical welds, and the unfavorable size effect in fracture- failure of the main member, which occurs in the vicinity
controlied failures, no bonus for tension loading has of the we€ded-onbranch, a more widespread mode of
been allowed. general collapse failure may occur. In cylindrical
In the 1992edition, the Code has also incIuded tubular members, this occurs by a general ovalíziig plastic fail-
connection design criteria in ultimate strength format, ure in the cylindrical shell of the main member- In box
subsection 10.5.1.1(2) for circular sections. This was de- sections, this may involve web crippling or buckling of
rived from, and intended to be equivalent to, the earlier the side walls of the main member (see Reference 15).
punching shear criteria. The thin-wall assumption was C10.5.1.3 Progressive Faiiure (Unzipping). The ini-
made (Le., no tb db correction), and the conversion for tial elastic distribution of load transfer across the weld in
bending uses elastic section modulus. a tubular connection is highly non-unZorm, with peak
When used in the context of AISC-LRFD, with a line load (kips/inch) often being afactor of two or three
resistance factor of 0.8, this is nominalIy equivalent with higher than that indicated on the basis of nominal sec-
the allowable stress design(ASD) safety factor of 1.8for tions, geometry, and statics, as per subsection 10.8. Some
structures having 40% dead load and 60% service loads. local yielding is required for tubular connections to re-
The change of resistance factor on material shearing was distributethis and reach their design capacity. If the weld
done to maintain this equivalency. is a weak link in the system, it may “unzip” before this
LRFD falls on the safe side of ASD for structures redistribution can happen. The criteria given in the
having a lower proportion of dead load. AISC criteria Code are intended to prevent this unzipping, taking
for tension and compression members appear to make advantage of the higher safety factors in weld allowable
the equivalency trade-off at about 25% dead load; thus, stresses than elsewhere. For example, the line load ulti-
the LRFD criteria given herein are nominally more con- mate strength of an 0.7t fillet weld made with E7OXX
servativefor a larger part of the population of structures. electrodes is 0.7t(2.67 X 0.3 X 70) = 39t, adequate to
However, since the tb/dbcorrection to punching shear is match the yield strength of mild steel branch material.
not made For another exampIe, if the peak fine load is really twice
actkg vp = 7 Sin 8 f, (f - tb/db) nominal, designing for 1.35 times the nominal line load
will give a joint safety factor of 1.8, when the weid
The ASD punching shear format also contains extra strength is 2.67 times its allowable stress. IIW rules, and
conservatism. LRFD-based strength caiculations,suggest larger match-
ing weld sizes are required, e.g., 1.Ot or 1.2t (I .07t in the
Figure C10.3 indicates a safety index of 3.45, appro- draft Eurocode). Given this easy way out of the problem,
priate for selection of the joint-can as a member (safety there has not been much testing to validate the foregoing
index is the safety margin of the design criteria, including AWS logic for smaller welds.
hidden bias, expressed in standard deviations of total
uncertainty). For further comparison, the ASCE Com- C10.5.1.4 Yield Line Analysisfor Stepped Box Con-
mittee on Tubular Structures in Reference 2 derived a nections. A rational approach to the ultimate strength
resistance factor of 0.81 for similar Yura-based tubuIar of stepped box connectionscan be taken, using the upper
connection design criteria, targeting asafety index of 3.0. bound theorem of Emit analysis (see Figure C10.4) and
Since the local failure criteriain 10.5 are used to select yield line patterns similar to those shown in Figure
the main member or chord, the choice of safety index is (30.5. Various yield line patterns should be assumed in
comparible to that used for designing other structural order to find the minimum computed capacity, which
members-rather than the higher values often cited for may be equal to or greater than the true value. Fan
connection material such as rivets, bolts, or fillet welds, corners (as shown for the T-joint) often produce lower
which raise additional reliability issues, e.g., local ductil- capacity than plain corners shown for the other cases.
ity and workmanship. Suggested design factors are given in Table C10.6; these
For offshore structures, typically dominated by envi- are intended to be consistent with those used in the body
ronmental loading which occurs when they are un- of the Code. For T- and Y-connections, the geometry
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Structures/417
P localked through thickness thermal strains induced at
t restrained corner and T-joint welds'7 may impair this
Capzteity.
Consideration ofthe problem of lamellar tearing must
include design aspects and weld procedures that are
consistent with properties of the connected material. In
connections where lamellartearing might be a problem,
consideration should be given in des@ to provide for
maximum component f k x i i @ and minimum weld
shrinkage strain.
Observkgthe following precautions hasbeen reported
to minimiZe the problems of lamellar tearing during
AXIAL LOAD BENDING MOMENT fabricaîion u1 highly restrained welded connections. It is
assumed that procedures producing low hydrogen weld
metal w o ~ b e u s e din m y case.
(i) On corner joints, where feasible, the bevel should
be on the through-thickness member.
YIELD (2) The size of the weld groove s h o d be kept to a
LINES minimum consistent with the design and overwelding
should be avoided.
(3) Subassemblies involving corner and T-joints
Where should be fabricated completely prior to final assembly
K = RESERVE STRENGTH FACTOR FOR STRAIN of connections. Final assembly should preferably be at
HARDENING. TRIAXfAL STRESS, LARGE butt joints.
DEFLECTION BEHAVIOR, ETC. (4) A predetermined we@ sequenceshould be selected
SF = SAFEP/ FACTOR
to minimize overall shrinkage of the most highly re-
strained elements.
Fy = SPECIFIED YIELD STRENGTH OF MAIN MEMBER (5) The lowest strength we€dmetal avaitable, consist-
8i = ANGULAR ROTATION OF YIELD LINE i AS ent with design requir-e, should be used to promote
DETERMINED BY GEOMETRY OF MECHANISM straining in the weld met& rather than in the more
= LENGTH OF YIELD UNE SEGMENT Sensitivethrough-thkhm diredion of the base phte.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Li (6) "Buttering"withíow sftength wefd metd or "peen-
= WALL THICKNESS OF CHORD ing" or other special weld procedures shodd be cunsid-
ered to mkimizetho~gh-thkknessshrinkage strains in
Figure C10.4 -Upper Bound Theorem
(see C10.5.1.4)
the base plate.
(7)Material with improved through-thich ductil-
ity should be specified for cri- connections.18
In critical joint areas subject to through-thíckness
dkxtion loading, mater% with preexisting laminations
modifier is found to be a function of q as well as ß, in and largemetaltic inchisions &odd be avoided. In addi-
contrast to the simpler expression given in 10.5.1. For tion, the following precautions should be taken:
K-connections, the gap parameter %ais0should betaken (1) The designer s h o d seIectively specis.ultrasonic
into account.16 inspection, afterfabncationor erection or both, of those
For gaps approachingO and for very largeß approach- specific highly restrained coanectionS aitical to the
ing unity, yield line analysis indicates extremely and struchsd integrity that could be subject to lamellar
unrealistically high joint capacity. The limiting provi- tearing.
sions of 10.5.í.l and 10.5.1.3 should also be checked. (2) The designa must emsida whether minor weld
flaws or base metal im@dm can be left urnpaired
ClO.!L1.4(2) Laminations rind Lamellar Tearing. In without jeopardzng the fimldxd integrity since goug-
tubular connectionswhere the branch member iswelded k g and repair welding Wiu d d additional cycles of weld
to the outside surface of the main member3the capacity
to transmit through thickness stresses is essential to the
proper functioning of the joint. Laminations @re- 17. Fm example, intemai rings and diaphragm in tubes.
existing planes of weakness) or lamellar tearing (cracks
parallel to the plate or tube surface caused by high 18. Impraved quality steef d m not etn-ninate weld shrinkage
. y avoid k H a r tearing
and, by itsel€, wiU not necesBBnl
in b$@y restrained jositS. Thus, it should not be spenfied
í6. The dimensionless geometry parameters, q, ß, and 5 are in the absence of comprefiensive design and fabrication
defined in Figure C10.5. consioerations.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
I
c
-?ID
5D
GAP
f I I
i i
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
KJOINT
5 = NON DIMENSIONAL GAP PARAMETER FOR K-JOINT
>
1N-PLANE OUT-OF-PLANE
BENDING BENDING
I -
Figure C10.5 -Yield Line Patterns (see C10.5.1.4)
-
Table C10.6
Suggested Design Factors (see Cl0.5.1.4)
Redundantfail-safe s~ruchuesand designs consistent &th 10.5.í 1.5* 1.8 1.4
! Critical members whose sole failure would be catastrophic 1.5* 2.3 2.0
Archltectitraf applications where localk& deformation would be 1.0 1.7 1.3
objectionable
*Appiicabie where main member, Fy,is not taken to exceed 2/3 the specified minimum tensile strength.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L * L 92 = 0784265 0500457 3 ’
Tubular Snuctures/419
shrinkage to the connection, and may result in the exten- to the ATSC-LRFD format. In the 1992 edition, these
sion of existing flaws or the generation of new flaws by updated criteria were incorporated into the AWS Code,
lamellar tearing. using the thickness-squared ultimate strength format
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(3) When lamellar tears are identified and repair is and Packer’s mistanCe factors, where applicable.
deemed advisable, rational consideration should be given
to the proper repair required. A special weld procedure C10.5.2.f Locpt Fisihres. Load factors vary from
or a change in joint detail may be necessary. equation to equation to reflect the differing amounts of
bias and scatter apparent when these equationsare com-
C10.5.2 Box Settions. In D1.1-90 and earlier editions pared to test data (Reference 21). For example, the
of the Code, treatment of box sections had beenmade as equation for plastic chord face fdure of ‘I- Y-,,and
consistent as possible with that of circular sections. Deri- cross connectionsis based on yield line analysis, ignoring
vation of the basic ailowabie punching shear V, for box the reserve strength which comes from strain hardening;
sections included a sa€etyfactor of 1.8, based on asimple this bias provides the safety factor with a 9of unity. The
yield line limit analysis, but utilizhg the ultimate tensile second equation, for gap K- and N-connections was
strength, which was assumed to be 1.5 times the speci- empificallyderived, had less hidden bias on the safeside,
fied minimum yield. Thisis why F,in thedesign formula and draws a lower mistance factor.
for punching shear was limited to 2J3 times the tensile In the transition between gap connectionsand overlap
strength. A favorable redistribution of load was also connections, there is a region for which no aiteria are
assumed where appropriate. Lai&& yielding should ghen. See figure C10.6. Offshore structure detaiüng
be expected to occur within allowable load levels. Fairly practice typically provides a minimum gap “g” of 2-
general yielding, with connection distortion exceeding inches, or a 3-inch minimum overlap =qS to avoid weld
0.02 Dycan be expected at loads exceeding 12û-fWo of interference. For smaller diameter box connections, the
the static allowable. hitations are stated in relation to the member pro-
A rational approach to the ultimate strength of portions. These limitations also serve to avoid the
stepped box connections can be taken, using the upper touching-toes case for stepped box connections, in which
bound theorem of limit analysis (see Figure C10.4) and adisproportionatelystiff load path is createdthat cannot
yield line patterns (similar to those shown in Figure handIe all the load it attracts, possibly feading to pro-
C10.5). Various yield patterns for plastic chord face gressive failure.
failure should be assumed in order to fmd the minimum C105.2.2 General ColIaps@. To avoid a somewhat
computed capacity, which may be equal to or greater awkward adaptation of column buckling dfowables to
than the true value. Fan corners (as shown €or the T- the box section web crippling problem (e.g., Reference
connection) often produce lower capacities than plain
15), AISC-LRFD web yielding, crippling, and trans-
corners as shown for the other cases. Suggested design verse buckling criteria have been adapted to tension,
factors, givenin Table C10.6, are consistent with the way
we take advantage of strain hardening, load redistribu- one-sided, and two-sided load cases, respectively. The
resistance factors given are those of AISC. Packer (Refer-
tionsetc., in using tests to failure as the basis for empir-
ence 22) indicates a reasonabIy good correlation with
ical design criteria. In general, the capacity willbe found available box connection test resu€&,mostly of the two-
to be a function of the dimensionless topology param-
sided variety.
eters ß, q, and ( (defined in the figure) as well as the
chord thickness-squared (corresponding to T and y in C1052.3 Uneven Distribution of L a d . For box
the punching shear format). sections, this probiem is now treated interms of effective
For very large (over 0.85) and K-connections with width concepts, in which load delivery to more flexible
gap approaching zero, yield line analysis indicates ex- portions of the chord is ignoizd. Criteria for branch
tremely high and unrealistic connectioncapacity. In such member checks aregiven in 1O.5.2.3( I), based empiricalíy
cases, other limiting provisions based on material shear on IIWj CIDECT work. Criteria €orload caículation in
failure of the stifferregions, and reduced capacityfor the welds (subsection 10.8.5) are based upon the testing of
more flexible regions @e., effective width) must also be Packer (Reference 23) for gap K- and N-connections;
observed and checked. and upon extrapolation and simpUication of the IIW
AIthough the old AWS criteria covered these consid- effective width conceptsfor T-, Y-,and cross connections.
erations (Reference 18), for bending as weft as for axial
load (Reference 19), more authoritativeexpressions rep- C1053.4 MateridsCcs&hwmm * Tubularconne-
resenting a much larger data base have been developed tions are subject to stress conœntrations which may lead
over the years by CIDECIT (Commit6 Internationalpour to laiai yielding and plastic strains. Sharp notches and
le Developpement et I’Etude de fa Construction Tubu- flaws at the toe of the welds, and fatigue cracks which
laire) (Reference 20) and by members of IW Subcom- initiate under cyclic loading, pIace additional demands
mittee XV-E(Reference 24). These criteria have been on the ductility and notch toughness of the steef,particu-
adapted for limit state design of steel structuresin Canada larly under dynamic Ioads. These demands are particu-
(Packer et al Reference 21). The Canadian code is similar larly severe in the main member of tubular T-, Y-, and
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 W 07842b5 0500458 5
--
e
I--
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A B c
Figure C10.6 -Transition Between Gap and Overlap connections (see C105.2.1)
-
developed as for axial loads, the effects ofprimaty bend-
ing moments are approximated as an additionai axial
load. In the design expression, JD represents ha€f the
moment arm between stressblocks creatingthe moment,
om are subjected to even moderate heat of nearby analogous to concrete design-half, because only ha¡€
b%ty of such tubing for the intended serv- the axial capacity lies on each side of the neutraì axis.
Various ultimate limit states are used in defiving the
expressions for JD in Table Ciû.7. For chord faceplasti-
fication, a uniform punching shear or line load capacity
is assumed. For the material shear strength limit, the
effective width is used. General coilapse reflects a side
ections. By providing wall failure mechanism. Finally, a simplified engression
branch member to the for JDisgiven, which may conservativelybe usedfar any
of the governing failure modes.
Caution should be exercised where deflections due to
Iiinner chord members in trusses. These joint rotations could be important, e.g., sidesway of
advantageous in box sections, in that the portal frames in architectural applications. Previous d i -
tions of the Code provided a 1/3 DECREASE in allow-
able connection capacity for this situation.
Fully overlapped connections, in which the overlap-
ping brace is we4ded mtireIy to the thru brace, With no C10.5'2.7 Other Canfigmtioiis- The equiva1ence of
box and circular branch members on box chords is based
on their respective perimeters (0.785 is r/4). in
effect applies the concept of punching sheaf to the p r o b
lem, even though these international criteria are always
given in ultimate strength format. The results are on the
safe side of available test results.
C10.7.3 Fatigue Stress Categories. The basis for the
fatigue stress categories can be found in Refefence f .
These were derived from the data on circular sections
and provide ody approximategrridancefor box sections.
The stress categories and fatigue curves have been
revised in order to be consistent With current d p m i -
al wadd design situations, however, local- cally loaded structure provisions (9.4) and the fatest
l d i or purlin loads delivered to the revision of API RP 2A (Reference 9).
The sloping portion of most of the eady wrvw has
been retained. Foilowing API, curves X and K have been
split into two curves each. The upper curve represents the
small-scale laboratory quality Specimensin the historical
(pre4972) data base, while the lower curve represents
recent large s d e tests having welds without profite am-
trol. in interpreting the latter, earfier editions o€ &e
American Codesemphasized weld profite while proposed
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 0784265 0500459~ 7 _m _
~
-
Tubular StructuresJ421
Table Ct0.7
Values of JD (see G10.5.2.61
Governing Failure Mode I In-Flane Bending 1 Out-of-Plane Bending
D
-
General Collapse
2
Branch Member
Effective Width
Conservative
Approximation for ßD
-
Any Mode 4
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
British rules (Reference 12) emphasize thickness effects.
The current hypothesis is that both weld profde and size x
effects are important to understanding fatigue perfor-
mance, and that they are interrelated. This is also an area
where design and welding cannot be separated, and
=(J 1
At tocations 1 & 2
10.7.6 makes reference to a consistent set of "standard" 4; 3 Cyclic Vp = T sin û [CY fa +0.67 fby]
weld profde control practices and fatigue categoryselec- ..,.. ....
...........
....
tions, as a function of thickness. Improved profdes and At locations 3 & 4
2
grinding are discussed in 10.7.5, alongwith peening as an Cyclic Vp = sin û [afa 21.5fb,]
alternative method of fatigue improvement.
The endurance limits on most of the curves have been
delayed beyond the traditional two million cycles. The
zk./-
At the point of highest stress
historical data base did not provide much guidance in
this area, while more recent data from larger welded c@¡c Vp =Tsin 8 [a!f a + J (0.67fby}' + (1.5 fbz)']
specimens clearly shows that the sloping portion should
be continued. The cutof& are consistent with those
adopted for dynamically loaded structures and atmo- In these formulae, the nominal branch member
spheric service. For random loading in a sea envi- stressesA, fby ,fb, correspond to the modes of loading
ronment, API adopted a cutoff of 200 million cycles; shown in Figure C10.7. The a factor on thefa has been
however, this need not apply to AWS appücations. introduced to combine the former curves K and T into
With the revised cutoffs, a single set of curves can be a single curve. Other terms are illustrated in Figure
used for both redundant and non-redundant structures C10.4.
when the provisions of 10.7.4.3 are taken into account.
For Category K (punching shear for K-connections), CSû.7.4 Fatigue Design Criteria. Fatigue data charac-
the empiricaldesign curvewas derived from tests involv- teristically show a large amount of scatter. The design
ing axial loads in branch members. The punchhg shear curves have been drawn to fall on the safe side of 95
formula based on gross static considerations (acting Vp percent of the data points. The AWS design criteria are
in 10.5. I) and geometry (10.83) does not always produce appropriate for redundant, fail-safe structures in which
results consistentwith what is known about the influence localized fatigue failure of a single connection does not
of various modes of loading on localized hot spot stress, lead immediately to collapse. For critical members
particularly where bending is involved. Sincesome of the whose sole failurewould be catastrophic,the cumuIative
relevant parameters (e-g., the gap between braces) are fatigue dasnage ratio, O,as defined in 10.7.4.2, must be
not included, the following simpWxed approX;imations limited to a fractional vafue (ie., 1/3) to provide an
appear to be more appropriate for typical connections added safety factor. This statement presumes there is no
with 0.3 5 p I0.7, conservativebias or hidden safety factor in the spectrum
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 m 07842b5 05004b0 3 m
of applied loads used €or fatigue analysis (many codes Earlier editions of ANSIIAWS Dl.1 contained a less
inclnde such bias). References 8and 9 discuss application stringent weld profile requirement. SiupriSrngly poor
af these criteria to OffJhore structures, including mod%- weld profies could pass this test, with the relative notch
cati- that may be appropriate for high cycle fatigue effect becoming increasinglymoxe severe as the thickness
under random Loading and corrosive environments. of the members increased. Recent European research has
shown the earlier D1-1 to be inadequate in distinguishing
C10.7.5 Fstigne Behrruior Improvement. The faggue between welded tubular connectionswhich meet the per-
behavior of as-welded joints can be improved by reduc- formance of AWS Fatigue ClassificationXg ,and those
iftg the notch effeet at the toe of the weld, or by reducing whieh fall shoa (References f 1 and 12).
-
the tensile residud stresses, neither of which is included Notch stress analysis and fracturemechanics consider-
in the measured hot spot strain range which designers ations, while confirmllig the inadequacy of the old pro-
WE. Various methods for improvingthe fatigue behavior file requirements for heavy sections, also indieate that
of welded joints, as discussed in Reference 11, are as the tighter requirements of Figure C10.7 are more effec-
follows: improvhg the as-welded profife <mcluding the tive in maintainhg C€ssXIfatigue perfomance over a
use of special e€&= designed to give a smooth tran- wide range of thicknesses (Reference 13). Figure C10.7
&on at the we€d toe), full p&e grinding, weld toe also suggests the use of light &ding to correct toe
grinding,weld tocr remelting (GTAW dresculg or plasma defects, such as excessivenotch depth or u n d e m . Once
zrc dressing), hmmes peening, and shot Peening. grinding starts, note that the permissibl notch depth is
A long estab&M (butnot Unive&y used) offshore reduced to 0.01 in. (0.25 mm); merely fiattenkg the tops
kdmtry practice for improved weld profile is shown in of the individualwefd passes,while leaving sharp cmyons
in between, does little to improve the fatigue perform-
ance,even though it wouId meet the letter of the disk test.
the adjoining base Sincethe toes of welds frequently contain microscopic
aswelded generally cracks and other crack-like defects, magnetic particle
inspection fMPI) is necessary to make certain these
defects have been eliminated. Judkious use of @ding
to resolve MPI indication, often done routkeiy as part
of the inspection, also enhances the weld profile.
Depending upon Cucumstances, it may be more cost
effective to grind the entire weld profde smooth. This
would avoid the use of special weìding techniques, pro-
file checking, corrective grinding, and MPI, as desrritred
above, for controllingthe as-welded profile. For &&dar
connections, with multiple concave pa^^ caps, f&pe
cracks may start in the notch 6etween passes; hae, weld
toe grinding agone is not as effective as with Uat-Ekt-
weld profifes that were used in much of the fesearch,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Tubular Stnrcturesl423
BRANCH MEMBER
OR THINNER PART
UNDERCUT NOT
TO WCEED
0.01 in. (0.3mm)
REENTRANTANGLE
COIN OR DISC
INSIDE WELD
THEORFTICAL RADIUS,
R = tbf2, EXCEPT THAT
5/16in. S R Il in.
(& mm 5 R I 25 rnmf
TOOL RADIUS
5/16in. (8 mm)MIN
0.05t OR
0.03in. (0.76mrn)
MAX
ROOT BUTTERPASS -' 0.01 in. (0.25mm) MAX WITH
(TOBE MADE PRIOR NO INDICATIONS fMPf)
TO CAP PASSES)
MPI INDICATION, EXCESSIVE CONVEXITY, OR UNDERCUT
IN WELD TOE PASSES OR BETWEEN ADJACENT PASSES
MAY BE CORRECTED BY LIGHT GRINDING.
Note: Minimum requirements for outside weld at
tubular connections designated to meet AWS 10.7.5tt).
Figure Ci0.8 -Improved Weld profu. Requirements (se C10.7.5)
Weld toe remeltingtechniques can improve the geom- Shot peening is less radical in its deformationeffects, but
etry of the notch at the weld toe, and have been shown in also less effective in improving geometry.
the laboratory to improve the fatigue performance of It should be emphasized that, for many tubular struc-
welded connections. However, unless carefully con- ture applications, the performance of fatigue Classifica-
trolled, the rapid cycle o€heating srnd coolkg tends to tions XzI Kz,and ET will suffice, and the foregoing
produce unacceptably hard heat affected zones, with measures taken to improve fatigue performance are not
possible susceptibgty to stress corrosion cracking in required. Furthermore, the "standard" weld profile prac-
aggressive environments (e.g., seawater). tices described in 10.13.1 can achievethe performance of
Hammer peeningwith around-nosetool alsoimproves fatigue Classifications XI,K I , and DT for alI but the
the weld toe geometry; this additionally induces a com- heavies sections.
pressiveresidual stress in the surface layers where fatigue
cracks would otherwise be initiated. Excessive defoma- ClQ.7.6 Size fnd Profile Eíf- The adversesize effect
tion of the base metal may render it susceptible to strain in the fafigue of welded connsctions is weil documented
embrittlement from subsequent nearby welding. Also, (recent References 11,12, and 13, as well as many earlier
surface layers may be so smeared as to obscure or oblit- ones). For welded joints with a sharp notch at the weld
erate preexisting cracks; thus the requirement for MPI. toe, scaling up the size of the weld and the size of the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
otch results in a decrease in fatigue performance. When
scde of the data base, size
for in design. Reference 12
e strength in proportion to
size -a25
(size iunit)
CîO.12 Procedures and Weider
Requirementsfor TubultuJoints
Other authorities (Reference 14) indicate a milder size
effëct, approximating an exponent of -0.10. WeIding on tubular members differsfrom that in con-
The geometricnotch effect largely responsible for the ventional plate and wide flange construction in several
size effect in welds is nat present in fnUy ground profiles important aspects. Position often changes continuously
and is relatively minor for those profiles which merge in going around the joint; in T-, Y-, and K-comections,
smoothly with the adjoining base metal (Fatigue Cate- the joint geometry also changes. Often there is no access
gories B and Cl ).The stated &e limits (beyond which we to the root side of the weid; and circumstances may
are outside the historicaldata base) for most of the other preclude the use of backing (e.g., the use of tubes as a
categories are s k d a r to those cited in Reference 12, conduit, or the complicated geometry of T-, Y-,and
except that the dimensionsin inches have been rounded K-connections). Yet, for many structures, the conditions
off. The €argersize timils for CategoriesX2,K2, and DT of service demand that these welds meet the strength and
reflect the fact that these S-N curves have already been fatigue performance qualities conventionally associated
drawn to fall belaw the recent farge-sale test data. with complete joint penetration groove welds. To meet
Reference 13discusses the role of size effect relative to these needs, a specialized set of practices regarding
weld profile, at various levels of fafigue performance. procedure and welder quaIifications, as well as prequali-
T6e "standard" weld profiie practices for T-, Y-, and fied joint details, has evolved for tubular structures.
K-connections r e f d to in 10.7.6 vary with thickness These provisions suppìement those given elsewhere in
so as to define two fatigue performance íevels which a.= the Code, sections 2 through 5.
sbindependent. However, where an inferior profile is Severalspecialized tubular applications are defined in
extended beyond its standard range, the size effect which complete joint penetration groove welds are per-
(reduction in performance) would come into play. mitted to be wefded from the outside only, without
"Improved" weld prof2es which meet the requirements backing:
of 10.7.5(1) keep the notch effect constant over a wide (1) Pipe Butt Joints. In butt joints, complete joint
range of thicknesses, thereby mitigating the size effect. penetration groove welds made from one side are prohib-
The smooth surface proBe of fdly ground welds ais0 ited under the conventional provisions for dynamicaliy
exhibit no size effects. Since peening only improves a loaded structures and statically loaded structures, yet
relative tunited volume of the welded joint, the sizeeffect they are widely used in pressure piping applications.
would be expected to Shaw up fairly soon if peening is the They are now permitted for tubular structures, but oniy
only measure taken;however, peening should not incur a when all the special provisions of 10.12.3.1 are foliowed.
Size effect penalty where It is done in addition to profile (2) T-,Y-,and K-Connections. Prequafifed joint
control. details for both circular and box tube connections are
The size effect may also exhibit itsexin static ultimate described in 10.13. The situations under which these may
strength behavior, since the design rules are based in part be applied are described in Tabíe 10.5, along with the
on tests to tende Gacture. For tubular T-, Y-, and required procedure and welder tests. These requirements
K-connections involvhg high strength steels of low or are discussed further below.
unknown notch toughness, the b e l I profile selections Because of the special skills required to successMy
are recommendedin preference to Iargernotches permit- execute a complete joint penetration groove weld in
ted by Level If. tubuIar T-, Y-, and K-connections, the 6GR level of
welder qualification for the process being used is aiways
I c10.8.5 See C10.5.2.3. required (see 5.21). Also, where groove an@= less-than
30° are to be used, the acute angle samplejoint test of
e10.10.2 Fillet Weld Details. The statically and 10.12.3.2 is also required for each welder.
dynamic&y loaded s t m m r e snbsections(see 8.8.1 and Where groove details in T-, Y-, and K-conne-ctions
9.10.1) specify aminirmun Iap of Eve timesthe thickness differ from the preq&ed detaifs of 10.f3, or there is
af the thinner part in the casse of lapjokts. The tubular some question as to the suitability of the joint detaifs for
ftnrctui%section applies t i s requirement to a lap tubufar procedure, then a mock-up or samplejoint in accordance
joint with a fillet mfd ody on the outside. Aside from the with 10.12.3.3 is required, in order to validate the
practica1 difnculty of welding k i r t e a small tube, the procedure.
eccentricity is sel€-balfancingw h the tube as a whole is Additional procedure qualification tests may be re-
considered. quired on account of some essential variable other than
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L = L 92 W 0784265 0500463 9 W ~~
Tubular Structures/425
joint design. These circumstances are described by the
heading "Metallurgical Compatibility" and include (but Tabk C10.8
are not limited to) the following: WeM Notch Toughness [see ClO.12.4)
(3) The use of a process outside the preqWied range Steel Steel Impact Test Weld Metal Avg.
(e.g., short-circuitingGMAW). Group ft-lb (Joules)
CIaSs Temperature
(4) The use of base metal or welding materials outside
the prequalified range (e.g., the use of proprietary steels I c O°F(-iSoc) 20 (23
or a non-low hydrogen root pass on thick material). I B O0F(-lS0C) 20 (27)
(5) The use of welding conditions outside the pre- I A -B°Ff-BOCf 20 (27)
qualified range (e.g., amps, volts, preheat, speed, and If C O0F(-1S0C) 20 f27)
direction of travel). II B -2O0F(-B0C) 20 (27)
(6) The need to satisfy special owner testing require- lI A -4O0F(-4O0C) 25 (34)
ments (e.g., impact tests). HI c -B0F(-B0C) 20 (2)
Qualification for complete joint penetration welds III €3 -40°F(-400C) 20 (27)
using tubular box sections detailed with single-welded UI A -40°F(-400C) 30 (40)
T-, Y-, and K-connections requires additional tests as
stated in Table 10.5 (columns 7 and 8) and shown in IVandV Special Investigation
Figure 5.26. In this test, the welder demonstrates the skill Note: Code requirements represent the lowest common denominator
and technique to deposit sound weld metal around the from the foregoing table.
corners of a box tube member. This macroetch test is not
required for fillet or partial penetration groove welds. of the vafiaus steel grades as listed in Tabks CiO.1-
See Commentary (25.17.2 and C5.23 for further dis- C10.3. When welding procedure qualification by test is
cussion. r e q u i d (Le., when the procedure is not prequalEed,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
For these tests, thejoint configurationsof Figures 5.25 when comparable impact performance has not been pre-
and 5.26 are used in order to simulate the root condition viously demonstrated, or when the welding consumabks
and limited access of T-, Y-, and K-connections. Con- are to be employed outside the range of essentid varia-
ventional specimens for mechanical testing are then bles covered by prior testing), qualification should
prepared in accordance with Table 5.1. include C h q y V-notch testing of the asdeposited weld
Partial joint penetration T-, Y-, and K-connections metal. Specimens should be removed from the test weld,
are also provided for. They can be executed by welders and impact tested, in accordance with Appendix III, Re-
having the common pipe qualifications2G plus 5G. This quirements for Impact Testing. Single specimen energy
could be advantageous in areas where 6GR qualified values (one of three) may be 5 ft-lb (75) lower without
welders are not readily available. Although lower fatigue requiring retest.
allowables apply, the static strength of such joints is Since AWS welding procedure requirements are con-
almost the same as for complete penetration, particu- cerned primarily with tensile strength and soundness
larly where mild steel is used with E70 faer metal. (with minor emphasis on fracture toughness), it is
Fillet welded T-, Y-, and K-connections can be exe- appropriate to consider additional essential variables
cuted by welders having even lower íevels of qualifica- which have an influence on fracture toughness-e.g.,
tion. However, these can not be presumed to match the specific brand wire/fhx combinations, and the restric-
strength of members joined, but must be checked by the tion of SAW consumablesto the limitsactually tested for
designer for the specific applied ìoads, in accordance AWS classification. Note that, for Class A steels*speci-
with 10.5.3, 10.7, and 10.8, as well as €0.5.1 and 10.5.2. fied energy levels higher than the AWS classifications
wilf require that all welding procedures be qualif'ied by
C10.12.4 Weld Notch Toughness. Weld metal and heat-
test,rather than having prequalified status.
affected zone toughness should be based on the same
Charpy impact testing is a method for qualitative
engineering considerations as used to establish the base assessment of material toughness. Although lacking the
metal toughness requirements. However, fracture avoid- fracture mechanics basis of crack tip opening displace-
ance, by increasing toughness alone, is not cost effective.
ment (CrrOD) testing, the method has been and con-
Fatigue cracking, hydrogen-induced cold cracking, and tinues to be a reasonable measure of fracture safety,
solidificationhot crackingmust also be dealt with. Other
when employed with adefinitive program of nondestmc-
parts of the Code address these other problems, via de- tive examination to eliminate weld area defects. The
sign, qualif'ication, technique, and inspection require- recommendations contained herein are based on prac-
ments. Notch toughnessjust he€psus live with imperfect tiawhich have generally provided satisfactory fracture
solutions.
experience in structures located in modefate tempera-
Weld M a l . Notch tough base metals should be joined ture environments (e.g., 40aF sea water and 14OF air
with faer metals possessing compatible properties. The exposure). For environments which are either more or
test temperatures and minimum energy values in Table less hostile, impact testingtemperaturesshould be recon-
C10.8 are recommended for matching the performance sidered,based on local temperatureexposures.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Wish to consider more extensive sampling of the HAZ
tests are run at realis- than the single set of Charpy tests required by Appendix
representing those of BI, e.g., sampling at 0.4-mm,2mm, and 5-mmfrom the
,usmg spechens having the fusion h e . (These dimensions may change with heat
thickness, This yields qnantitative infor- input.) More extensive sampling increases the Eel&
for enguieefing fracture mechanics andy- hood of finding local brittle zones with low toughness
values.
Since HAZ toughness is as much dependent on the
steel as on the welding parameteis, a preferable altenta-
tive €or addressing this issue is through weldability pre-
qualification of the steel. Reference 25 s p k out such a
prequalification procedure, using CTOI) as well as
Charpy testing. This prequaIifieation testing is presently
being applied as a supplementary requirement for high-
performance steels such as API Specs 2W and 2Y, and is
accepted as a requirement by some producers.
Caution: Section5 of this Code permits testing one 50
ksi steel to qualify aE other grades of 50 ksi and befow.
Consequently, selection of API-2H-50-Z (very Iow sul-
fur, 200 ft-lb upper shelf Charpies) for qualification test
plates will wtualiy assure satisfying a HAZ impact
requirement of 25 ft-lb, even when welded with high heat
inputs and high interpass temperatures. There is no
reasonable way to extrapolate this test to ordharyA572
grade 50 with the expectation of reproducing either the
HAZ impact energies or the û 1 degradation of the test
on API-2H-50-Z. Thus, separate Charpy testing of dlf-
ferent steel grades, thickness ranges, and processing
routes should be considered, if HAZ toughness is being
addressed via WPQ testing.
ably attabable, where singleS p h e n Local Brittle Zones (LBZ). Within the weld heat-&&%&
of three) 5 ft-lb (75)lower are allowed zones there may exist Iocalty embrittleú regions. Under
certainconditions, those LBB may be detrimental. The
engineer should consider the risk of LBZs and determine
if counter measures should be empfoyed to limit the
extent of LBZs and their influence on structuralperform-
ance. Some counter measures and mitigating circUm-
stances in offshore practice are listed below:
(1) The use of steeis withmodeme crack-arrest capa-
bilities, as demonstrated by no-break in the NRL drop-
weight test (small fiaw)
(2) Overmatch and strain hardening in conventional
Table C10.9 normalized 42 to 50-ksi carbon-manganese steels in
which the weld metal and H M have higher yield
strength than adjacent base metal, forcing plastic straits
to go elsewhere
(3) The tendency for fatigue cracks in welded tubular
joints to grow out of the HAZ before they reach appre-
ciable size (assuming one avoids unfavorabletangency of
joing can weld seam with the brace footprint)
(41 PrequWied limits on weid layer thickness in
welding procedures, which along with observing limits
on heat input, promote grain refinement in the HAZand
minimize the extent LBZ
(5) Composition changes, e.g., reduced firnitson vana-
dium and nitrogen,and increased titanium
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
C10.13 fiequalified Tubular Joints welds are d e d to the branch member thickness so as to
approximate a concave weld shape. However, we are
Under carefully prescribed conditions (see Figura also constrained by the need to maintainminimum f i e t
10.12 through lO.l5), the Code permits complete joint weld sizes to avoid creating dangerously high haránesses
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
penetration groove welds in tubular T-, Y-, and K- in the heat affected zone at the weld toe (this is also the
connections to be made from one side without backing. location of the “hot spot” which may experience focai-
Lack of access and compíex geometry preclude more ized yieIdíng at the design íoad levels). This alternative
conventionaltechniques. Avery high level of welder skill “standard” proBe is easier to communicate to the
(as demonstrated by the 6GR test) is required. When welders, and easier for them to achiem out of position
matching materials (see Table 4.1) are used, such joints than the ideatized concave weld profile shown in earlier
may be presumed to equal the strength of the sections editions of the Code. The resulting weld profde is much
joined subject to the limitations of 10.5 and 10.7. like that observed on early Gulf of Mexico offshore
In makuig the weld in a Y-,Y-,or K-connection, platforms, whose fatigue performance over several
the geometry and position vary continuously as one decades of serviCe has been consistent with Categories
progresses around thejoint. The detailsshown ínFigpres Xi,Kg,and DT.
10.12 through 10.15 were developed from experience For branch member thicknesses in excess of 0.625 in.
with all-position shielded metal arc welding and fast- (15.9 mm) (typicallyassociated with chord thicknesses in
freezing short circuiting transfer gas metal arc welding. excess of 1.25 in. i3 I .7 m])designers are going beyond
These details are also applicable to eux cored arc weld- the historical fatigue data base and the experience of
ing processes with similar fast-freezing characteristics. early Gu@of Mexico platforms.
The wider grooves (and wider root openings) shown for The size effect begins to manifest itself%and fatigue
GMAW were found necessary to accommodate the performance would begin to decline toward the lower
shrouded tip of the welding gun. Although the later level defined by fatigue categoriesX2and K2,unies the
process is not prequawied for short circuiting transfer, profde is further improved. Branch members of 1.50 in.
the joint details are still applicable to such G M W (38.1 mm) and chord thicknews of 3.0 in. (76.2 mm),
procedures. represent the limits of the recent large-scaIe European
In many applications, particularly with small tubes, tests, and further adversesizeeffects (performance below
the partial penetration joint of 10.13.3 will be entirely Xz and K2)would be expected if sharp@notched weld
adequate. Although requiring additional strength checks profiles were to be scaled up even further. Figure 10.€4
by the designer, the less stringent requirementsfor fit-up describes a concave weid profde which merges smoothly
and welder’s s a €result in significant economies on the with the adjoiningbase metal, mitigating the notch effect
job. For very large tubes in which inside access is pos- and providing an improved level of fatigue performance
sible, the conventional completejoint penetration groove for heavier sections.
welds made from both sides are applicable.
For applications where increased fatigueperformance
associated with completejoint penetration groove welds
is needed for T-, Y-, and K-connections, the Code refers
to a consistent set of “standard” weld profdes, as
described earlier in C10.7.6. Once learned, these should
become a natural progression with thickness for the
welders to follow. They have evolved from the following C10.14 Assembly
experience. C l k f 4 3 In comparison with the Static and dynamic
For very thin tubular connections, flat profdes (Fig- requirements of sections 8 and 9, stricter tolerances are
ure 10.12) represent those commoniy obtained on small required for complete joint penetration groove welds
tubular connectionsused for onshore applications. They made from one side only without backing.
also are similar to the profdes obtained on some of the
scale models used to develop the historical fatigue data
base. Here the entire we€dcap is made in one pass, with
weaving as required. Using E6010 electrodes, the more 430.17 Quality of welds
artistic capping specialist could make this a concave Visual and radiographic weld q d t y requirements for
profile, merging smoothly with the adjoiningbase metal. tubular structures are esseitkliy the same as for stati-
With the advent of higher strength steels and heavier caIly loaded structures (see 8.15 and (33.15 of the Code
sections, requiringlow hydrogenelectrodes,and with the and the Commentary). Radiography can generally not
introduction of high deposition rates, semi-automatic be applied successfully to inspection of tubular T-, Y-,
welding processes, this seems to have become a lost art. and KconneCtions.
For heavier thicknesses, a definitefdlet is added at the
weld toe as required to limit the weld toe notch effect to Cltk17.4 Uîrasmx * Inspection. Theu€trasoníctesting
that of a 45O f i e t weld. See Figure 10.13. These fillet procedures and acceptance criteria set forth in sections
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 7 2 W 0784265 O5004bb 4
wall [under I 2 h.(12.7 =)I, or both. In the root area
of tubular T-, Y-,and K-connections, prominent corner
reflectors are often present which cannot be evalmted
soidy on the basis of amplitude; in this case, beam
R oz C k s s x),and where applicable. Because of boundary techniques are useful for determining the
x geometry of tirbdar T-, Y-, and K- size of the larger discontinuities of seaí concern. &am
boundary techniques are described in section 3.8.3.2 of
Reference 10.
The ultrasonic acceptance criteria should be applied
with the judgement of the Engineer, considering the
following factors:
(1) For tubular T-, Y-, and K-conneCtions having
complete joint penetration groove welds made from tbe
outside only (see Figures 10.12 though lO.15), root
discontinuitiesare less detrimental and more difficultto
repair than those elsewhere in the weld.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(2) It should be recognized that both false alarms
Plotting cards sqserimposing the sound beam on a (ultrasonic testing discontinuities that are not subse-
sectional view ofthe weld are helpful. fnspections quently verified during the repair) and occasionally
missed discontinuitiesmay occur. The former are a part
of the cost of the inspection, whiíe the latter emphasize
the need for structural redundancy and notch-tough
steel.
C10.17.1.8 and C10.17.5 See C8.15.1.9 and C8.15.5.
ClO.19 Wîrasonic Testing
This section sets forth requirements for procedures,
personnel, and their qualifications. It is based largely on
of Reference 10. practices that have been developed for fixed offshore
becomes increasingly difficult platforms of welded tubular construction. These are
r 12 in4305 mmj] or with thin described in detail in Reference 10.
References
I. Marshall, P. W. and Toprac, A. A. ?Basis for 4. Yura, Joseph A. et al. ?Chord Stress Effects on The
tubular joint Welding Journal. Welding Ultimate Strength of Tubular Joints.? PEMSEL
Research Supplement, May 1974. ( A bavailable as Report 82.1. University of Texas: American Petro-
American Societyfor civil EngineerSpreprint ZOOS.) leum Institute, December, 1982.
- Gr&, W.J,, et &??Review of design considerations
for tubularjoints.? Progress Report of the Commit-
tee on Tubuh Structures, ASCE Preprint 81-043. 5. Stmedcovic, A. et d.?Load interaction in T-joints
New York May 19881. of steel circular, hollow sections.? (with discussion
by P. W. Marshall). JoumalofStructuralEnginet.r-
Marshafi, P. W. and Luyties, W. H. ?Aüowable utg. ASCE 9, (109): September 1983. (See &o Pro-
stresses for f a t i p &gu.?? Proceedings of Ttte 3rd ceedings of Internatiod Conference on Joints in
InremafìonafGcmjimence on ?%e Behavior of m- Stressed Steef Work Teeside PolytechnkaE h t i -
&ore 5?tmcma-Boston: August, 1982. tute, May 1981.)
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DLmL 92 0784265 0500467 6
Tubular Stnrctures/429
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6. Rodabaugh, E. C. “Review of data relevant to the 16. Roìfe, S . T. and Barsom, J. M.Fractureandfatigue
design of tubular joints for use in fixed offshore control á1structures. Prentice Hall,19T7.
platforms.” WRC Bulletin 256, January 1980.
17. Carter, R M.,Marshall, P. W.,et. ai. Material
7. Cran, J. A., et aI. Hollow structuraIsectio~-destgn problems in offshore stnictures, Proc. offshore
manualfor connections. Canada: The Steel Com- Tech. Conf., OTC 1043, May 1969.
pany of Canada (STELCO), 1971.
18. Marshall, P. W. “Designing tubular comections
8. Marshall, P. W. “Basic considerations for tubular with AWS Dl.1.” Weldurg J d , March 1989.
joint design in offshore construction.” WRC Bulte-
tinI93, A p d 1974. 19. Sherman, D. R. and Herlache, S . M.“Beam connec-
9. American Petroleum Institute. Recommendedprac- tions to rectangular tubular c o ~ m n AISC
s ~ Na-
ticefor planning, &siping* and constructingf a e d tional Steel Construction Conference. Miami m,
offshoreplatforms. API RP 2A, 17th €33. Dallas: June 1988.
American Petroleum Institute, 1987.
20. Giddkgs, T. W.and Wardenier, J. Ihestrength and
10. American Petroleum Institute. Recommendedprac- behaviour of statically loaded wehiedconnectwns in
tice for ultrasonic examination of offshore struc- structural hollow sections, Section 6, CIDECT
turalfabrication md guidelinesfor qualifzcation of Monograph. British Steel Corp. Tubes Div., 1986.
ultrasonic techniques. API RP 2X, 1st Ed. Dallas:
American Petroleum Institute, 1980. ZL Packer, J. A., Birkemoe, P. C., and Tucker, W.J.
Canadhimplementationof CIDECT monograph
U
11. Haagensen, P. J. “Improving the fatigue perform- 6,”CLDECTRept, 5AJ-84/9E, IIW Doc.SC-XV-84-
ance of welded joints.n Proceedings of International 072. Unk. of Toronto, July 1984.
Conference on ûffshore Welded Structures, 36.
London, November 1982. 22. Packer, J. A. “Review of American RHS web crip-
pliqgproviSions.n ASCEJmmaI of Smrctural Engi-
12. Snedden, N. W., Background to proposed new neering, December 1987.
fatigue design rules for welded joints in offihore
structures.” United Kingdom: United Kingdom 23. Packer, J. A. and Frater, G. S. “Weldment design
Department of Energy, AERE Harwelí, May 198I. forhoftowsectionjoínts,”CIDE€TRept.5AN-87/1-Ey
13. Marshail, P. W. “Size effect in tubular welded IIW Doc. XV-664-87. Univ. of Toronto, A p d 1987.
joints,” ASCE Structures Congress 1983, Session 24. Internationai Institute of Welding. ITW S/C XV-E,
ST6. Houston, October 1983. DeSigPt recommendationsfor hollow seaìonjoints-
14. Society of Automotive Engineers. Society of auto- predominantly static lo&g, 2nd Edition, IIW
motive engineers fatigue design handbook, AE-4. Doc. XV-70149. Helsinki, Finland International
WarrendaIe: Society of Automotive Engineers, Institute of Welding Annual Assembly, September
1968. 1989.
15. Davies, G., et. al. “The behavior of full width RHS 25. American Petroleum Institute. &comm&dprac-
cross joints.” Welding of Tubular Structures. Pro- tice for pre-produetion qua@ììation of steel plates
ceedings of the 2nd InternationalConference, fIw. for o@shoresmturm, API RP2Z,lst Edition. Dal-
Boston: Pergamon Press, July 1984. las: Amencan PetroIem Institute, 1987.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D1.1 92 0784265 0500Yb8 8
~~ =
C l í . Strengthening and Repairing of Existing Structures
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(111.2 Materials Eco omy is the obvious underlyb msideratio
when decidingif a member shouldbe rei ired or entirely
The first essential requirement in strengtheningand replaced. HÕwever, the cost estimate supporting thé
repairing existing structures is the identification of the decision to be made must relate not only to material and
material. labor, but also should include the returns from an unin-
Obviously, with welding anticipatedfor either opera- terrupted use of the member or, conversely, the loss due
tion, weldability of the existing steelis of primaryimpor- to its time out of service.
tance. Together with the mechanical properties of the Generdy, in the case of dynamically loaded struc-
material, it will provide information essential for the tures, sufficient data regarding past service are not avail-
establishment of safe and sound welding procedures. able in order to estimate the remaining fatigue Me. Tf
Only then will realistic data be available for reliable cost such is the case, an inspection pzogram designed to
estimates. Should poor weldability make such cost eco- I a t e possible fatigue cracks in stable gowth prior to
nomically prohibitive, other means of joining should be their becoming critical is a reasonable alternative.
considered by the Engineer. The only practical methods of extending the expected
Mechanical properties are normally determined by fatigue He of a member in a given service is to reduce the
tensile tests from a representativesampletaken from the stress or stress range or to provide connection geometry
existing structure. less susceptibIe to fatigue failure.
If the chemical composition has to be estabkhed by
test, then it will be advisable to take samples from the
greater thicknesses as these are more indicative of the
extremes in chemistry. C11.5 SpeciaI
Subsection 11.5.1 stipulates that the extent of cross-
sectional heating must be considered by the Engineer
C11.3 Design when determining whether live load stresses may be
carried by the member duringwelding or oxygen cutting.
Repair and strengtheningof existingstructures differ The significance of tfiis provision lies in the fact that
from new constructioninasmuch as the first two opera- the properties of steels are influenced by heat. It is the
tions will have to be executed with the structure or the consensus of other reputablespecifications (for example,
structural element under some condition of working ASME)that temperaturesup to 650°F(345"C)have no
stress. reducing effect on the yield strength of the steel.
There is presently little guidance with respect to weld- Under such circumstances, the welding procedures
ing of structural members under stress. Hence, each should be adjusted in such fashion that the total heat
given situation must be evaluated on its own merits, and input per unit length of the weid for a given thickness and
sound engineeringjudgementmust be exercised as to the geometry of the material will keep the 650°F (345OC)
optimum manner in which repair or strengthening isothermsrelativejy narrow and minor in relation to the
should be accomplished. cross section of the stress£anying member.
43 I
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DI-% 92 0784265 0500469 T
~~ ~ ~~
Appendix CXI
Guidelines on Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat
CXIi Preheat -Background Review (2) appropriate level of diffusible hydrogen
and Discussion (3) appropriate ievel of restraint
(4) suitable temperature
CXIl.l General Observations. The probability of One or more of these prerequisites may dominate, but
hydrogen cracking depends upon a number of factors. the presence of alf is necessary for hydrogen cracking to
Some of these can be classed as global (e.g., chemical occur. Practical means to prevent this cracking. such as
composition and thickness) and can therefore be defined. preheat, are designed to control one or more of these
while others which are local factors (e.g,, the details of factors.
the weld root geometry, or local segregation of certain In the past, two different approaches have been taken
chemical elements) cannot be defined. €or predictingpreheat. On the basis of a large number of
In some cases, these factors may dominate, and this fillet wefd controlled therma1 severity ( C T S ) tests, a
makes it virtually impossible to predict in any rational method based on critical heat-affected zone hardness has
manner the precise preheatingconditionsthat are neces- been proposed ( References 1 and 2.) By controllingthe
sary to avoid hydrogen cracking. These situations must weld cooling rate so that the hardness of heat affected
be recognized from experience and conservative proce- zones does not exceed the critical Ievel, the risk of hydro-
dures adopted. However, in the majority of cases, it is gen cracking could be removed.
possible with present day knowledge of the hydrogen The acceptable critical hardness can be a function of
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
cracking phenomenon to predict a preheat and other the hydrogen content. This approach does not recognize
welding procedure details tu avoid hydrogen cracking the effect of preheat on the removal of hydrogen from the
that will be effective in the majority of cases without weld during cooling; aíthough being recommended in
being overly conservative. the guide for predicting a minimum energy input for
The preheat levels predicted from such a system must welding without preheat, it tends to be overly conserva-
of course be compatible with experience. The require- tive when predicting preheat levels.
ments should aliow fabricators to optimize preheating The second method for predicting preheat is based on
conditions for the particular set of circumstances with the control of hydrogen. Recognizing the effect of the
which they are concerned. Thus, rather than calling for a low temperature cooling rate, Le. cooling rate between
certainpreheat for agiven steel specification, the alterna- 572OF and 212OF 800°C and iûû°C>, empirical rela-
tive guide allows preheatsto be based on the chemistry of tionships between the critical cooling rate, the chemical
the plate being welded, as determined from mill reports composition, and hydrogen content have been determined
or analysis. Fabricators may then, through knowledge of using high restraint groove weld tests (Reference 3).
the particular set of circumstances they have, be able to More generalized models have been proposed by
use lower preheats and a more economical welding other researchers {References 4, 5 and 6) using simple
procedure. On the other hand, the requirements should hydrogen diffusion models. Hydrogen content is usually
provide better guidance for more criticaljoints;e.g.. high included as a logarithmic term. ï h e advantage of this
restraint situations that will allow fabricators to under- approach is that the composition of the steel and the
take adequate precautions. hydrogen content of the wefd can be grouped together in
one parameter,which may be considered to represent the
CXI1.2 Basis of Predicting Preheat. Research has susceptibility to hydrogen embrittlement. A reIationship
shown that there are the folIowing four basic prerequi- then exists between the critical cooling time and this
sites for hydrogen cracking to occur: parameter, for a given restraint level. It is possible to
(I) susceptible microstructure (hardness may give a index the Eines for various restraint levels by reference to
rough indication of susceptibitityf large scale tests or experience, and for other types of fillet
Copyright American Welding Society
433
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
434 /Commentary
welds (Reference 7). In developingthe method, relations the part of users within and outside an industry con-
between the spetific preheat and the c o o h g time must ducted surveillanceprogram, restraint w S eventudly be
be assumed. more precisely defined, in terms of actual detail or struc-
it is important to recognize that the preheats predicted turd framing situations.
from these modek depend upon the type of test used to The fact that it was impossible to define restraint more
provide the experimental data. The condition usually explicitly at this time was not taken as sufficiently vaEd
examined in these tests is that of a single root pass in a ground not to address restraint, recognize its pro-
buttjoint. This is considered the most critical and is used nounced influence and provide the presently best avaii-
to determine the preheat: but there are situationswhere it able means to accommodate it.
is possible to weld the second pass before the first p a s
cools down (stove pipe welding for girth welds in pipes), Note: A concerted indz.cstrysponsored supveillance pro-
and with these special procedures, the weld can be made grant designed for an efficient and rapid exchange of
with lower preheats that would be predicted. However, experience so as io permit eventlull chsificatian and
for general application, it is considered that the preheat is listing of spec@c structural derails and situatiom under
properly determined by that required to make the root the three restrainr levels, meritsfull consideration.
pass. For this reason, energy input does not enter explic- Restraint data collected from fabrication and en@-
itly into this hydrogen control method. neering practice coujd providegrounds for more realistic
CX11.3 Seope of Proposed Preheat Requirements. An evaluation of restraint and more reliable determination
important feature that is omitted in all of the proposed of preheats following the recommendations of these
methods for predicting preheat is weld metal cracking. It guidelines.
is assumed that preheat is determined by heat affected CX12.4 The present requirements for weíding proce-
zone cracking [and hence parent metal composition), but dure qualification in structural work, except €or some
in some cases, particularly with modern high strength cases of tubular construction, rely on standard test
low alloy steels, the weld metal may be more susceptible. assemblies to "prove" the adequacy of preheat for the
There has been insufficient research on this problem to same joints as parts of production assemblies. One
inchde it in the present guidelines, and in such cases should be aware that under these circumstances "re-
testing may be necessary. straint" is not being considered in the qualification. A
shift towards qualification using "joint simulated test
assembiies" would result in a much more reliable indica-
CXI2 Restraint tion of performance under seniCe conditions and addi-
tionally permit collection of reliable restraint data.
CXI2.1 The major problem in determining preheats
using the hydrogen control approach is in selecting a
value for the restraint. In the guide three restraint levels
are considered. The first representsalow restraint and is CXI3 Relation Between Energy Input
considered to be independent of thickness. The low re-
straint corresponds to an intensity of restraint, k, less and Fillet Leg Size
than I 000 NlmmJmm and this coincides with the filIet Although the heat input to the pfate is of p r h e con-
weld results. Many welds in practice would be in this sideration in regard to c o o h g rate and potential HAZ
category. The medium restraint is based on a value of k = hardness, it is often more practical to specify weld size.
150 Xplate thickness (in rnm) and correspondsto avalue The relation between energy input and fillet weld size
tovering most of the measured values of restraint that (Le., leg length) is not unique but depends on process,
have been reported. The high restraint tabIe is based on polarity, and other factors. Some workers have sug-
k = 400X plate thickness (in m m )and represents a severe gested that relationships exist between cooling rate and
level of restraint. It is noticed that in the medium and the total cross-sectional area of fused metal. The latter,
higher restraint conditions, the restraint is considered to however, is dSicult to measure and wougd not be a
increase with plate thickness. suitable way of specifying weld s k in practice.
CXI2.2 Restraint must be said to have a pronounced The weld dimensions and welding conditions have
effect on the amount of required preheat. The reference been measured in Fiet weid tests and these data used to
to it in the present Table 4.3 of the Code is included in make plots of leg lengths squared versus energy input.
Note 1under the Table. There it may not fully convey the Another source is information derived from the deposi-
tion rate data where it has been assumed that all of the
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
significance in preheat considerations@ven to it inter-
nationafiy. metd deposited went into forming an ideal fillet. Where
a root opening was present, the leg length was smaller
CXI2.3 The Giude€ines draw the user's attention to the for the same energy input than for the condition of
restraint aspect of welded joints by suggesting three perfect fit-up. The results of these plots are shown in
generally descfibed levels. With continuing alertness on Figure XI-4.
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Appendix CXI/435
For manual covered electrodes with largequantitiesof CX14.3 The methods of measuring effective preheat
iron powder in the covering, a larger fillet size for the remains an independent matter and requires separate
same energy is produced. For submerged arc welding, and continuous attention.
electrode polarity and electrode extensions have a
marked effect, as would be expected. For the normal CX14.4 The effectivenessof preheatin preventing crack-
practica1 range of wdding conditions, a single scatter ing will depend SignifrcantIy on the area preheated and
band can be considered, and a lower bound curve the method used.
selected as a basis for welding procedure design. Sincethe objective is to retard the cooling rate to allow
the escape of hydrogen, a larger preheated area will stay
CXI4 Application hot longer and be more effective.
CX14.1 It should be dear that the proposed methods CX14.5 There appears no need to change the referente
presuppose a good engineering understanding of the in Note 1 under Table 4.3 to preheating within a 3 in.
concepts involved as weil as sound appreciation of the (75mm) radius from the point of welding, as other work
influence of the basic factors and their interplay bust has confirmed the validity of this requirement.
into the preheat methodology.
CX14.2 Engineering judgement must be used in the CX14.6 The methods of preheating (equipment, gases)
selection of the applicable hardness curve and a realistic shou€dbe the subject of another investigation with major
evaluation of the restraint Ievel must be part of the input from fabricators with the objective to report on
judgement. their economy and effectiveness.
References
I. British Standards 5135-1974. cedures to avoid H.4.Z cracking. IIW document No.
1 x 6 31-59.
2. Coe, F. R. Welding steels rvithoui hydrogen crack-
ing. Welding Institute of Canada, 1973. 5. McParlan, M. and Graville*3. A. WeldingJournal.
55 (4) Res. Suppl., April 1976, p-92-s.
3, Gravil€ezB. A. “Determining requirements for pre-
heat.” Techiiology Foctrs. Welding Institute of 6. Suzuki, M.Cold cracking andirspreveniionin steel
Canada, October 1980. welding. IIW document No. IXC-107478.
4, Ito. E and Bessyo, K. Aprediction ofwekۓngpro- 7. Tersaki et a t , Trans. JWS i0 (i), April 1979.
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I O L 92 m 0 7 8 4 2 b 5 0500472 T m
Index
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A 6.8.1,6.10.4, 6.10.7.2,7.3.1,7.3.2, 8.2, straightness, 3.5.1.2
Acceptance criteria, 8.2.2,8.2.3.2,8.15.1.9,8.15.5,9.2,9.2.2, tilt, 3.5.1.7
bend tests, 5.12.2,5.28.1,5.39.1 9.2.3,9.25.1.9,9.25.5, 10.2, 10.2.2, warpage, 3.5.1.7
liquid penetrant testing, 8.15.5, 10.17.1.8, 10.17.6,Table4.1,Table4.3 Bearing at points of loading, 3.5.1.9
9.25.4, 10.17.5 Atmospheric corrosion resistance bearing stiffeners, 3.5.1.9,3.5.3.3
macroetch test, 5.12.3, 5.28.3, 5.39.4 base metals for, 4.1.4 tolerances, 3.3.2, 3.5.1.9,3.5.3.3
magnetic particle testing, 8.15.5, electrodes for, 4.1.4 Bend test requirements,
9.25.2, 10.17.5 Attenuator, see Gain control procedure qualifications, 5.12.2
radiography, 10.17.3, Fig. 10.9, Fig. stud welds, 7.6.6.1
10.19, Fig 10.20 welder qualification, 5.28.1
reduced section tension test, 5.12.1 B welding operator qualification,
stud welding, 7.7 Back gouging, 2.10.1.1, 3.2.5, 5.39.1
tack welds, 3.3.7, 5.49 5.5.2.1(11), 5.5.2.2(22), 5.5.2.3(17), Bidders, 6.7.1, 8.13.4,9.23.4
tubular structures, 10.17 5.5.2.4(17) Bolt holes, mislocated,
ultrasonic testing, 8.15.3,9.25.3, air carbon arc, 3.2.5 restoration by welding, 3.7.7
10.17.4 chipping, 3.2.6 Bolts, 8.7,9.14, 10.9.2
visual, 5.12.6, 5.12.7,5.28.5,5.28.6, grinding, 3.2.6 Boxing,2.3.2.1, 8.8.6,9.15,
5.39.5, 8.15.1,9.25.1, 10.17.1 oxygen gouging, 3.2.5 10.10.5, C8.8.6
Aging, 5.10.4,5.37.5 Backing,2.10.1.1, 3.3.2, 3.13,4.7.6, Box cross section twist, C3.5.1.7
Alignment, 3.3.3 4.7.8,4.14.2,4.14.4, 8.2.4,9.2.5, Box tube design rules, 10.5.2
jigs and fixtures for, 3.3.6 9.12.2, 10.2.4, 10.12.1.2, 10.12.2.1(2) Bracing, 3.5.1.4
offset, 3.3.3 Backing material, see Backing Brackets, 8.8.6.1
welds in butt joints, 3.3.3 Backing, removal of, 3.13.4, 3.13.6, Break test, fillet welds, 5.27.2,
Allowable stresses, Part B of sections 6.10.3.2 5.28.2,5.38.3, 5.39.3
8,9, and 10, Table 8.1, Table 9.1, Backing thickness, 3.13.3 Buckling stress, 10.5.2.1
Table 10.1 Base metal, 1.2, 3.2, 5.7,5.24, Building code, 1.1
All-weld-metal test, 4.16,5.6, 5.12.4, 5.35, 5.46,7.2.1,8.2,9.2, 10.2 Building commissioner, 1.1.2
Fig. 5.13, Fig. 5.18 inspection, 3.2.3 Built-up members, 8.12
Alpha, computed, Fig. C10.1 limitations, 8.2.5, 9.2.6, 10.2.5 Bursts, 7.2.5
ANSI B46.1 Specifcation, 3.2.2, notch toughness (tubular), 10.2.6,
Footnote 4 C10.2.6
Anti-spatter compound, 3.2.1 preparation, 3.2, 5.7,9.22 C
Application of D1.1, 1.1, 8.1,9.1, 10.1 removal, 3.2.2,3.7 Calibration, ultrasonic, Appendix X,
Approved procedures, 5.1 repair, 3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.7, 3.3.4.1 6.21
Arc shield, 7.2.2,7.4.4,7.4.6, specifications, 8.2,9.2, 10.2 angle beam, Appendix X4
Ix3, Ix9, IX10.1 surfaces, 3.2.1, 3.2.2 block (IIW), 6.15.7.7, Fig. 6.8
Arc strikes, 3.10 thermal cutting, 3.2.2 dB accuracy, 6.22.2
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel thicknesses, 3.2.2 equipment, 6.15.1,6.16.1,6.21
Code, 6.10.5.1 unlisted, 8.2.3,9.2.4 hÖ&ontal-linearity, Appendix X-1,
ASNT Recommended Practice weldability, 8.2.3.1, 8.2.2,9.2.2, 6.22.1
SNT-TC-lA, 6.7.8, 10.19.1 9.2.3, 10.2.2, 10.2.3.2 longitudinalmode, Appendix X-1,
Assembly, 3.3, 10.14 Beams, 6.21.1
ASTM A514 and A517, 8.15.1.9, access holes, 3.2.5, Fig. 3.2 nomograph, Appendix D, Fig. D-2
9.25.1.9, 10.17.1.8 built-up edges, 3.2.6 shear wave mode, Appendix X2,
ASTM A710, Tables 4.1,4.3, 8.2.1, camber, 3.5.1.3 6.21.2
9.2.1, 10.2.1 copes, 3.2.5, Fig. 3.2 Camber, 3.2.7,3.5.1.2,3.5.1.3,4.2.6
ASTM A808, Tables 4.1,4.3, 8.2.1, cover plates, 9.21.5 beams, 3.5.1.3,C3.5.1.3
9.2.1, 10.2.1 depth, 3.5.1.8 girders, 3.5.1.3, C3.5.1.3
ASTM Specifications, 6.7.5,6.7.6, splices, 9.18 measurement, Fig. C3.5
Copyright American Welding Society
437
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 07842b5 0500473 L m
4381Index
quenched and tempered steel, 3.2.7 Deficiencies in the work, 6.6.2 9.23.2, Appendix VI1
tolerance, Tables 3.2,3.3 Definitions, 1.4,2.10.1.1, floor systems, 9.9
Cap pass, Appendix B Appendix B girders,
Carbon equivalent, Appendix XI, Delayed inspection, 8.15.1.9, acceptance criteria, 9.25.1,
XI5.1, X16.1.1, Figs. XI-1, XI-2, 9.25.1.9, 10.17.1.8 9.25.2, 9.25.3,9.25.4
Table XI-1 Dew point, 4.13,4.18 cover plates, 9.21.5
Caulking, 3.9 Diagrammatic weld, 2.3.2.4, 2.3.4, splices, 9.21.1,9.21.2
Charpy impact test, Appendix III Appendix I stiffeners, 9.21.3
Chipping, 3.2.5,4.14.2 Die stamping, 6.5.6 web flatness, Appendix W
Cleaning, 3.11,7.4.1 Dimensional tolerances, 2.9.2,2.10.2, increased unit stress, 9.6
weld spatter, 3.11.2 3.3, 3.5, 8.13, 9.23, 10.16, Figs. inspection, 9.25.1
Clipping control (UT), 6.18.1,6.19.6 2.4,2.5 liquid penetrant testing, 9.25.4
Code interpretations, ix, xi, Discontinuities,3.2.3.2, 3.3.7.1(2), magnetic particle testing, 9.25.2
Appendix F 3.6.2,4.20.6, 5.11.3,5.28.2.2, radiographic testing, 9.25.2
Collapse, 10.5.2, C10.5.2 5.28.3,5.37.2.2, 5.39.1, 5.49.2, ultrasonic testing, 9.25.3
Columns, variation from 6.6.5,6.11,6.19.6.3,6.19.8, visual inspection, 9.25.1
straightness, 3.5.1.1 6.24.1, 6.24.2,7.4.7, 8.15.2, lap joints, 9.10
Combination of welds,.8.6,9.13, 10.9.1 9.25.2, 10.17.3.1, 10.17.3.2, material preparation, 9.22
Compression members, acceptance, 10.19.7, 10.19.8.2, 10.19.8.4 noncontinuous beams, 9.8
9.25.2.2 acceptance criteria, 6.11, 8.15, plug welds, 9.17
built-up, 8.12.1.2 9.25, 10.17 prohibited welds, 9.12
column, 10.16 dimensions, 9.25.2.1, 9.25.2.2, quality of welds, 9.25, Appendix V
splices, 9.17,9.18 Fig. 9.7, Fig. 9.8, Figs. 10.18 splices, 9.17,9.18
stresses, Table 8.1, Table 9.1, through 10.22 stiffeners, 9.21.3
9.25.3.1, Table 10.1 elongated, 8,15.3.2(1) stresses,
Computed alpha, Figs. C10.1, C10.2 in-line, 8.15.3.2(6) compressive, 9.20.2
Concavity, 3.6.1,3.7.2.2,4.11.6, isolated, 8.15.3.2(4) fatique, 9.4
5.28.5.5, 5.12.6(5) length, 6.23.2 shear, 9.20.2
Contractor, 3.4.3,3.7.2,4.5.5,4.7.5, repair, 3.2.3,3.7,6.11 tensile, 9.20.1,9.20.3
4.8.2,4.12.3,4.16,5.4.1, 5.5.1, 5.5.1.5, rounded, 8.15.3.2(3) structural details, 9 Part C
5.5.2,5.13, 5.22, 5.26.1,5.34.4,5.37.11, Disposition of radiographs, 6.12.3 T-and cornerjoints, 9.11
5.42,6.6,7.1,7.2.6,7.3.3,7.5,5,7.6.2, Distortion, 3.4.3,3.7.3 temporary welds, 9.24
7.6.6,7.8.4,7.8.5, 10.14.2 control, 3.4 tension members, 9.17, 9.25.3.2
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
obligations of, 6.6 straightening, 3.7.3 transition of radius, 9.20.3
Conve&y, 3.6.1, Fig 3.4, 3.7.2.1, 5.28.3, Drawings,2.1, 2.10.3,4.15.3, transition of thickness or width
5.39.4 6.5.1,7.2.1, 7.6.7.1,9.15.1, in butt joints, 9.20
Cooling rates, Appendix XI, 9.24, 10.15, 11.2.1 undercut, 9.25.1.5
Figs. XI-2, XI-3 Drying, unit stress, 9.3
Cope holes, 3.2.5, Fig. 3.2 arc shields, 7.4.4 welds, rivets, and bolts, 9.14
Cornerjoints, 2.9.5,2.10.5, electrodes, 4.5.2 workmanship, 9 Part D
9.11,9.12.2(4) flux, 4.8.3
Comer reflector, 6.16.2 ovens, 4.5.2
Correction of deficiencies, 6.6.2 Dye penetrant testing, 6.7.6
Cover plates, beams, 9.21.6 Dynamically Loaded Structures, 9 E
fillet welds, 9.21.3.1 allowable stress, 9 Part B, Table 9.1 Eccentricity, 8.9,9.16
girders, 9.21.4,9.21.5 backing, 9.2.5,9.12.2(2) Effective throat, See also Effective
partial length, 9.21.6.2 base metal, 9.2 weld she, 2.3.2,2.3.2.4
terminal development, 9.21.6.2 weldability, 9.2.3 Effective weld area, 2.3.1, 2.3.2,
terminal distance, 9.21.6.2 beams, 10.8.1, 10.8.2
thickness, 9.21.6.1 cover plates, 9.21.6 Effective weld length, 2.3.1.1,
width, 9.21.6.1 splices, 9.18 2.3.2.1, 2.3.2.2, 10.8
workmanship, 8 Part D stiffeners, 9.21.3 box, 10.8.5
Cracks, 3.7.2.4,3.7.4, 5.12.6(1), combination of welds, 9.13 circular, 10.8.4
5.28.3(3a)(4a), 5.49.1, combined stresses, 9.5 Effective weld size, 2.3.1.2,
8.15.1.1,9.25.1.1,9.25.2, compression members, 9.17,9.18 2.3.1.3,2.3.1.4, Table 2.1,
10.17.1.1, 10.17.3.1 dimensional tolerances, 9.23 2.3.1.5, 2.3.2.4, 2.3.4, 2.10.3,
Craters, 3.3.7.1, 3.7.2.2, 5.12.6(5), web distortions, 9.23.3 Table2.3,2.12.3, 5.10.2.1,
8.15.1.3,9.25.1.3, 10.17.1.3 eccentricity of connections, 9.16.2 5.12.1.3,8.15.2,9.25.2.4,
fatigue stress, 9.4, 9.21.2, 10.8, 10.13.1, 10.17.2,
Table 9.2 Appendix I, Appendix II
fillet weld details, 9.15 diagrammatic weld, 2.3.2.4,
D interrupted, 9.15.2, Fig. 9.4 2.3.4
Dead loads, 11.5.2 findetwelds, 9.15,9.21.3.1,9.21.6 Effective width (box sections),
Decibel calculating equation, 6.22.2.2 flatness of girder webs, 9.23.1, 10.1.3, 10.5.2.3, 10.5.2.5
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Index1439
Electrodes, 4.1.1,4.1.4,4.5,4.8, Engineer, 1.1.2,2.3.1.4,2.6.2, Filler metals, 4.1
4.9,4.10,4.11,4.12,4.14,4.17, 3.2.3.2(4),(5), 3.3.4,3.3.7.3, cut wire, 5.5.2.2(19)
5.5.2.1,5.5.2.4,5.5.2.5(1), 3.4.3,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.7.7(3),(5), electrode-flux, 4.1.1
5.5.3.1,5.16.3,5.33.2,5.33.3, 3.13.4,4.5.5,4.7.5,4.8.2,4.10.6.1, electrodes, 4.1.1,Table 4.1
5.44.2,7.5.5.6 4.12.3,4.15.4,4.16,4.18,5.2, granular, 5.5.2.2
drying, 4.5.2 5.4.2,6.6.3,7.2.6,7.3.1.1,7.3.3, hydrogen control, Appendix X16.2
electrogas, 4.16 7.3.4,7.8.4,8.2.3,8,14,9.2.3, matching requirements, 4.1.5,8.2.4,
electroslag, 4.16 9.22.2,9.24,10.2.2, 10.2.3, 9.2.5,10.2.4
flux cored arc, 4.1.5.4,4.12.2.2,414, 10.14.1,10.14.2,10.15, 11.5.1, powdered, 5.5.2.2(19)
Table 4.1,Table 4.2 Appendix IX2 storage, 4.1.3,4.5.2
for atmospheric corrosion resistance, Equipment welder group-designation,5.16.3,
4.1.4,Table 4.2 ultrasonic testing, 6.15.1 5.44.2
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
gas metalarc, 4.1.5.3,4.12,4.14.1 welding, 3.1.2,6.3.2,7.2.1,7.5.1 Fiilers, 2.4, 10.14.1
low hydrogen, 3.2.1,3.2.2,Table 4.1, ER80S-D2,Table 4.1,Note 8 Fillet welds
4.5.2,4.7.8,5.5.2.1(2), 7.5.5.2,7.7.5, Essential variables along an edge, 2.7.1.2
9.24,10.14 electrogas welding, 5.5.2.5 allowable stresses, Table 8.1,
manufacturer's certification, 4.5.5, flux cored arc welding, 5.5.2.4 Table 9.1,Table 10.1
4.8.2,7.2.6.2,7.3.3, Appendix 1x1, gas metal arc welding, 5.5.2.3 assembly tolerances, 3.3, 10.14
Appendix XI10 shielded metal arc welding, 5.5.2.1 boxing, 8.8.6
shielded metal arc, Table 4.1, submerged arc welding, 5.5.2.2 break test, 5.27.2,5.28.2,
Table 4.2,4.5.1 tacker qualification, 5.44 combination with partial joint stress
storage, 4.1.3,4.5.2,4.1.5.2,4.8.1 welding operator qualification, 5.34 penetration weld, Appendix A stress
Table 4.1,Table 4.2 limitation of, 5.5 concavity, 3.6.1
submerged arc, 4.8, 4.8.1 Existing structures, 11.4 convexity, 3.6.1,3.6.2,5.12.3,
usage, 4.1.5,4.5.2,4.6.3,4.8,4.12 design, 11.3 Table 5.28.3,5.39.4
welder suahcation groÜps,.5.16.3, fatigue stresses, 11.3.2 curved, effective length, 2.3.2
5.44.2 live load, 11.5.1 details, 2.7,8.8,9.15, 10.10
materials, 11.2 effective length, 2.3.2.I
repair, 11.3.1.2 effective throat, 2.3.2.4
electrodes, 4.17,5.5.5,4.16 rivets or bolts, loads on, 11.5.3 end connections, 8.8.1
flux, 4.19 strengthening, 11.5.4 energy input, Appendix Xi, Fig. XI-4,
guide to tubes, 4.17 workmanship, 11.4 Table XI-2
impact strength, Appendix III Extension bars, see weld tabs in holes, 2.7.1.3
impact tests, 4.15.3,Appendix III inlapjohts, 8.8.3,8.8.4,10.10.2,
joint details, 4.15.1,5.34.2,Fig. 5.9, 10.10.3
Fig. 5.35 F in slots, 2.7.1.3
mechanical properties, 4.16 Fabricator, see also Contractor intermittent, 2.7.1.5,8.8.2,9.12.1.4,
previous qualifications, 4.16 Face-bend test, 5.6.1,5.11.3,5.12.2, IO.10.1
procedures, 4.20 5.27.1,5.28.1 interrupted, 9.15.2
procedure test record form, Failure, local, 10.5.1,C10.1 longitudinal, 8.8.1
Appendix E Fatigue, 2.5, 10.7, 11.3.2 macroetch test for, 5.6.1.2,5.26.3,
procedure qualification, essential allowable stress, 10.7.4,Fig. 10.6 5.37.3
variables, 4.15.1,5.5.2.5 increase in, 10.6, 10.7.4.1 maximumsize,2.7.1.2,4.1.5.1,4.1.5.2,
procedure specification, 4.15.1 behavior improvement, 10.7.5,C10.7 4.1.5.3,4.1.5.4,10.10.4
protection, 4.20.2 dynamically loaded structures, 9.4, tolerance, 3.1.4
qualitication, 4.15.1 Table 9.2 minimum size, 2.7.1.1
quenched and tempered steels, 4.15.2 statically loaded structures, 8.1.2 tolerance, 3.1.5
shielding gas, 4.18 critical members, 10.7.4.3 opposite sides, of common
Electroslag welding, 4 Part E cumulative damage, 10.7.4.2 plane, 8.8.5
electrodes, 4.16,4.17 loading, 11.3.3 pipe positions, 5.8.1.4
flux, 4.19 peening, 10.7.5(3) prequalified, 2.7.1,Fig. 2.3,10.13.1
guide tubes, 4.17 repeated stress, 10.7.1 profies, 3.6
impact strength, Appendix C shearing stress, 10.7.1 skewed joints, Fig. 2.6,2.11,
impact tests, 4.15.3,Appendix C stress categories, 9.4.10,Fig. 10.6, Appendix II
joint details, 4.15.1 Table 10.3,11.4.3 test plates, 5.10.3,5.22,5.45,5.34.4
previous qualifications, 4.20.1 stress cycles, 10.7.2 undersize, 3.1.4,8.15.1.7,9.25.1.7
procedures, 4.20 stress fluctuations, 10.7.1 Flare groove welds, 2.3.1.4,Table 2.1
procedure specification, 4.20.1 tubular structures, 10.7,Table 10.3, Flaw size evaluation, 6.23,6.25
procedure test record form, Table 10.4 angie beam testing, 6.23.2
Appendix E Faying surfaces, 3.3.1,3.6.3,3.13, straight beam testing, 6.23.1
qualification, 4.15 10.14.1 Floor system, 9.9
quenched and tempered steels, 4.15.2 FCAW-G, FCAW-SS, Appendix B Flux, 4.8,4.19,7.2.3
End returns, see Boxing Fiber stresses, 10.4.2 condition, 4.8.3,4.19
Energy input, Appendix XI,XI3,CXi3 Field welds, 2.1.1 damaged packages, 4.8.3
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 = 0784265 0500475
440/Index
drying, 4.8.3,4.19 Table 10.1 quenched and tempered steels,
electrode combination, 4.8.1 assembly tolerances, 3.3 3.7.7(3)
fused, 4.8.3 backing, 3.13,8.2.4,9.2.5, 10.2.6 restoration by welding, 3.7.7
packing, 4.8.3,4.19 bevel, 5.18,5.19,5.20,5.21,34.1, subject to other stresses, 3.7.7(1)
reclamation, 4.8.4 9.12.1.5 subject to tensile stresses, 3.7.7(2)
storage, 4.19 complete joint penetration, 2.9.1 , surface finish, 3.7.7(4)
submerged arc welding, 4.8,4.8.3, 4.16.8, 5.10.1,5.17.3,Table9.1, tests required, 3.7.7(3)(d)
4.8.4 Table 10.1, 10.12.3, 10.12.4, Hydrogen control, Appendix XI,
Flux cored arc welding, 1.3,2.6.1(2), Table 10.5, 10.13.1, 10.13.2 XI-6.2
4 Part D, 5.5.2.4, 10.12.2, 10.14.3 cross sections of, 10.14.3
backing, 4.14.2,4.14.4 details, Fig. 2.4, Fig. 2.5, Fig.
electrodes, 4.12.1,4.12.2.2,4.14.1.1, 5.19, Fig. 5.20, Fig. 5.23, 1
4.14.1.2 5.34.1, 5.34.2 IIW ultrasonic reference block,
layer thickness, 4.14.1.5 dimensional tolerances, 2.9.2,2.10.2, 6.16.1,6.21, Fig. 6.9
prequalified procedures, 4.14.1 3.3.4, 10.14.3 Image quality indicator, 6.10.1,
procedure qualification, 5.5.1 effective length, 10.8.1 6.10.3.3, Table 6.2,6.10.7, Fig. 6.6,
essential variables, 5.5.2.4 effective weld size, 2.3.1, 2.10.3, 2.12.3, 6.10.9, Appendix B
progression of passes, 4.14.1.7 10.8.1, Table 2.3 Impact strength, 4.6.10,4.7.9,4.14,5,
protection, 4.14.3 intermittent, C8.12.1.5 Table III-1, Appendix III
shielding gas, 4.13 partial joint penetration, 2.5, Fig. 2.5, Impact test, 4.15.3,5.6.1, Appendix
Forms, Appendix C, Appendix E 5.10.2, Table 9.1, Table 10.1, Table III, Figs. 5.10.1.3(A,C,D,E) Notes
10.5, 10.13.3 Inadequate joint penetration, 3.6,5.28.5.4
prequalified, 2.9.1, Fig. 2.4, Fig. 2.5, Incomplete fusion, Fig. 3.4,3.7.2.3,
G 2.10.1, 10.12.3, 10.13 5.28.5.4
Gain control (attenuator), 6C profiles, 3.6.2, Fig. 3.4 Independent testing agency, 5.4.1
Gamma ray, 6.10.1 size and length, 3.1.4 Inspection
Gap (g), 10.1.3, Fig. 10.1, 10.3.1, Table termination, 3.12 delay, 8.15.1.9,9.25.1,9, 10.17.1.8
10.2, Fig. 10.4, 10.5.2.1, 10.5.2.2, throat, see effective weld size dye penetrant, 6.7.6
10.5.2.3, 10.5.2.7, C10.5.2.2, Fig. C10.6 tubular, Table 10.12 equipment, 6.3
Gasmetalarcwelding, 1.3.1,2.6.1,2.7.1, Groove weld test plate, 5.10,5.18,5.19, general, 7.8
2.8.1,2.9.1.1, 2.10.1.2,4.12.1,4.14, 5.34.3 Gquid penetrant, 6.7.6, 8.15.5,9.25.4,
5.5.2.3 Guided bend test jig, 5.27.1, 5.38.1 10.17.5
backing, 4.14.4 Figs. 5.31 through 5.33 magnetic particle, 6.7.5, 8.15.5,9.25.4,
electrodes, Table 4.1,4.12.1, Guide tubes, 4.17 10.17.5
4.12.2.2,4.14.1.1,4.14.1.2 nondestructive testing, 5.10.1.3,5.12.5,
layer thickness, 4.14.1.4 6.7,7.8.1, 8.1, 8.15.2,9.25.2, 10.17.2
prequalified procedures, 4.14 of materials. 6.2
essential variables, 5.5.2.3 H of pipe and tubing, 5.12.6, 5.28.5,
progression of passes, 4.14.1.7 Hardness, 4.10.6,4.11.6 5.39.5(2)
properties of electrodes for, 4.12.2.1 determinations, 4.10.6.1,4.11.6.1 radiographic, 6 Part By8.15.2,9.25.2,
protection; 4.14.3 grinding prior to testing for, 10.17.3, 10.18
shielding gas, 4.13 4.10.6.1,4.11.6.1 records, 6.5
short circuiting transfer, 1.3.1,2.6.1, HAZ hardness control, Appendix studs, 7.1,7.5.5.6,7.8, 7.8.4
2.7.1,2.8.1,2.9.1,2.10.1,5.16.4, XI3 ultrasonic, 6.7.4,6 Part C, 8.15.2,
10.12.3.4, Appendix A Heat-affected zones 9.25.2, 10.17.6
General collapse hardness of, 4.10.6,4.11.6 verification, 6.1.1
box, 10.5.2.2 notch toughness, CIO. 12.4, Table C10.9 visual, 5.12.6, 5.12.7, 5.28.5, 5.28.6,
circular, 10.5.1.2 testingof, 4.10.6.1,4.11.6.1,5.11.3 5.39.5,7.5.5.6,7.7.1.3,7.8.1,
Girders Heat input, 4.3 8.15.1,9.25.1,9.25.1.8, 10.17.1
camber, 3.5.1.3 Heat treatment, 4.4 welder qualification, 6.4
cover plates, 9.21.6 Hermetic containers, 4.5.2 welding procedure qualification, 6.3
depth, 3.5.1.7 Hole-type IQI, Table 6.1,6.10.3.3, work, 6.5
splices, 9.21.1 Fig. 6.5,6.10.7,6.10.9 Inspector, 4.26.3,6 Part A, 6.1,6.2, 6.3,
stiffeners, 9.21.3 design, 6.10.7.2, Table 6.1 6.4,6.5,6.20.1, 6.20.2,7.8.2
straightness, 3.5.1.2 essential hole size, Table 6.1 AWS Certified Welding, 6.1.3.1(a),
tilt, 3.5.1.7 location, 6.10.7, Figs. 6.1 assistant inspector, 6.1.3.3
warpage, 3.5.1.7 through 6.4 fabrkation/erection, 6.1.1, 6.1.2
web flatness, 3.5.1.6,9.23.1,9.23.2 minimum exposure, 10.18 qualification, 6.1.3
Gouging, see Back gouging number required, 6.10.7, 10.18 verification, 6.1.2,6.6.2
Grinding, 3.2.6 thickness, 6.10.3 vision requirements, 6.1.3.4
Groove pipe test welds, 5.10.1.1, 5.12.6, Holes, unacceptable, bolt or identification of accepted welds,
5.17.4,5.20, 5.21, 5.23.2, 5.28.5 punched appearance, 3.7.7(1) 6.5.6
Groove welds approved welding procedure, Intermittent welds, 2.7.1.5,9.12.1.3,
allowable stresses, Table 8.1, Table 9.1,
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 3.7.7(2)(b) 9.12.1.4
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - I I 9 2 0784265 0500476 7
Index/441
Interpass temperature of test plates, electrodes, 5.33.2, 5.33.3 N
5.12.7,5.28.6, 5.39.5(1) position, 5.33.5 Nomograph, ultrasonic attenuation,
Interpass temperafure, 3.4.7,4.2, Table welder, 5.33.6 Appendix D, Form D-10
4.3, 4.11.6, 5.5.2.1(9), 5.5.2.2(17), Liquid Penetrant testing, 6.7.6, 8.15.4, Noncontinuous beams, 9.8
5.5.2.3(14), 5.5.2.4(14) 9.25.4, 10.17.5 Nondestructivetesting, 5.10.1.3,5.11.5,
Interpretation of code provisions, Load 5.12.5,6.6.5,6.7,6PartsB,C,10.17.2,
Ur, xi, Appendix F dead, 11.5.2 10 Part F
Intersection length, 10.8.4 live, 11.5.1 liquid penetrant, 6.7.6,8.15.4,9.25.4,
Isotope radiation, 6.10.1 uneven distribution of, 10.5.3 10.17.5
Local dihedral angle, Appendix B, magnetic particle, 6.7.5, 8.15.2,9.25.2,
Appendix G 10.17.5
J
Job sue pipe or tubing, Table 5.1,
Local failure
box, 10.5.2.1
personnel qualification, 6.7.7, 10.19.2
iadiographic testing, 6 Part B, 10.18
Table 5.6,5.17.4 circular, 10.5.1.1 ultrasonic testing, 10.19
Joint root openings, 2.9.4 Low hydrogen electrodes, 3.2.2,3.3.1, Nonfusion, see Incomplete fusion
Joint welding procedures, 5.1, 5.25 4.1.5.1,4.5.2,4.5.2.2, 5.5.2.1,
7.5.5.2, 10.15,Table4.1 (Note7),
prequalified, 2.6.1.1, 5.1.1,5.1.2,
Appendix E Table 4.6, Appendix VIE O
procedure qualification, 5 Part B atmospheric exposure, 4.5.2.1 Offset, 3.3.3, 3.5.1.6, 10.14.2
limitation of variables, 5.5 condition, 4.5.2 Optional code provisions or
procedure qualification by tests, established by tests, 4.5.2.2, Appendix requirements, 1.1.3,6.1.1,6.1.3,6.7,
sample form, Appendix E VILI Appendix C
qualification tests, 5.10 redrying, 4.5.4 Overlap, Fig. 3.4, 3.6.4, 3.7.2
Joints restrictions, 4.5.3 Owner, 1.1.2,6.6.5,6.20.2, 10.14.2
comer, 9.11 storage, 4.5.2 Oxygen cutting, 3.2.5
prequalified, 2.7,2.8,2.9,2.10 Lowest Anticipated Service Temperature plate preparation, 9.22.2
transition in thickness and width, 8.10, (LAST), 10.2.6, 10.12.4 repair, 3.2.5
9.20, 10.12 roughness, 3.2.2
Oxygen gouging, 3.2.5, 3.7.1,4.3,
9.22.2
K M metal removal, 3.7.1
K-connection, 10.5.3 Machining, 3.2.5, 3.7.1 on quenched and tempered steels,
Macroetch test, 5.6.1, 5.11.2,5.12.3, 3.2.5, 3.7.1,4.3
5.28.3, 5.37.3,5.38.4,5.39.4
L Macroetch test specimen, 5.11.1,
P
Lamellar tearing, 10.5.4 5.12.1.3,5.38.4, Fig. 5.27,5.28.3,
Laminar reflector, 6.19.5 Fig. 5.38,5.28.3 Paint, removalof, 3.2.1,6.19.3, 11.4.1
Laminations, 10.5.4 Magnetic particle testing, 6.7.5, 8.15.5, testing through, 10.19.3(3)
Lap joints, 8.8.3,9.10, 10.10.2, 10.10.3, 9.25.4, 10.17.5 Parallel electrodes, 4.7.1,4.10
Fig. 8.1, Fig. 10.8 sample form, test report form, Peening, 3.8
Limitation of variables, procedure Appendix E, Form E-8 acceptable peening, 3.8.1, C10.7.5
qualification, 5.5 Mandatory code provisions, 1.1.3 slag removal, 3.8.2
electroslag and electrogas welding, Manufacturer, 5.1.2, 5.4.1, 5.5.1, 5.13, use of vibrating tools, 3.8.2
5.5.2.5 5.31, 5.42,5.52 Penetrameters, see hole-type IQI or
flux cored arc welding, 5.5.2.4 electrode certification, 4.5.5,4.8.2, wire IQI
gas metal arc welding, 5.5.2.3 4.12.3,4.16 Personnel qualification for NDT, 6.7.7,
shielded metal arc welding, 5.5.2.1 responsibility, 5.4.1 10.19.2
submerged arc welding, 5.5.2.2 shielding gas certification,4.13,4.18 Pipe welds
Limitation of variables, tack welders, stud certification,7.1,7.2.6.2, 7.3.3 job-size pipe, 5.17.4
5.44 ultrasonic equipment certification, position, 5.8.1.2
base metais, 5.44.1 6.17.1 procedure qualification
electrodes, 5.44.2, 5.44.3 Mechanical testing, 5.10.1.4 test specimens, 5.10.1.3
position, 5.44.5 Melt-thru, See melting-through visual inspection, 5.12.7
welding process, 5.44.4 Melting-through, 3.3.1,4.7.6,4.14.4, welder qualification, 5.20,5.21,
Limitation of variables, welder 5.12.6.(5) Figs. 5.23 through 5.26
qualification, 5.16 Method of testing, 5.1 1,5.27,5.38, test specimens, location, Fig. 5.30
base metals, 5.16.1 5.48 tests required, 5.17.2, 5.17.4
electrodes, 5.16.3, 5.16.4 Mill scale, 3.2.1,3.10.1,4.19,6.19.3, visual inspection, 5.28.5
progression of welding, 5.16.7 7.4.3,7.5.5.1 Piping porosity, 8.15.1, 9.25.1, 10.17.1
position, 5.16.5 Misaiignmenf, 3.3.3 Plug welds, 2.3.3, 2.8, 3.3.1,4.21,
welding process, 5.16.2 Mislocated holes, 3.7.7 5.17.1.1(4), 8,6,9.17, 10.4.3
Limitation of variables, welding operator Multiple arc, 4.7.1,4.11 ailowable stresses, Table 8.1,
qualification, 5.33 Multiple pass, 3.3.7.2, 5.10.3.1 Table 9.1, Table 10.1
base metals, 5.33.1 Multiple electrodes, 4.12,4.12.1 assembly, 3.3.1
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - L 92 m 0784265 0500477 9 m
4421Index
effective area, 2.3.3 retests, 5.14,5.29, 5.40,5.50 Reduced-section tension tests, 5.6.1
macroetch test, 5.28.3(4), 5.39.4 stud application, 7.6 test specimens, Fig. 5.12
qualification tests, 5.34.4, Fig. 5.38 tack welders, 5 Part E, 5.3 Reentrant corners, 3.2.4, C3.2.4
quenched and tempered steels, 2.8.5 ultrasonic unit, Appendix X Reference block, ultrasonic testing IIW,
sue, 2.8.2 welders, 5 Part C, 5.3 6.16.1, Fig. 6.9
spacing, 2.8.3 welding operators, 5 Part D, 5.3, other approved design, 6.16.1,
stresses, Table 8.1, Table 9.1 5.34.2.1,7.7.4 Fig. 6.10, Appendix X, Fig. X-1
technique for making, 4.21 Quality of welds, 7.7.4, 8.15,9.25, 10.17 Regulatory limitations, 1.6 Note
thickness, 2.8.8 Quivers, 4.5.2 Reinforcement, 3.6.2,3.6.3,6.10.3,
Porosity, 3.7.2.3, 8.15.1.6,9.25.1.6, 8.12.6(3)
9.25.2.1, 10.17.1.6 removal of, 3.6.3,6.10.3.3
Position 1F rotated, Table 5.4, Table 5.5 R Reject control (UT), 6.18.1, 6.19.6
Position 2F rotated, Table 5.4, Table 5.5 Radiation Imaging, 6.27 Repair, 3.2.2,3.2.7,3.2.3.3(3), 3.2.5,
Position 1G rotated, Table 5.4, Table 5.5 Radiographic Inspection, see 3.3.4, 3.7.2, 3.7.7,6.19.7
Position of welding, 5.5.3.8,5.8, 5.10.5, Radiographic testing of cracks, 3.7.2.4
5.23, 5.23.1, 5.33.1.5,5.33.5, 5.44.5, Radiographic procedure, 6.10 of existing structures, 11
5.51,7.6.1,7.6.3 Radiographic testing, 6 Part B, 5.26.1, of plate, 3.2.3
Preheat, 3.3.7.1,4.2,4.10.6,4.11.6, 5.26.4, 5.27.4, 5.28.4, 5.37.2,5.38.2, of studs, 7.7.3,7.7.5
7.5.5.5, Table 4.3, Appendix XI, Table 8.15.2,9.25.2, 10.17.3, 10.18 Report forms, Appendix E, Appendix C
XI-2, Commentary Appendix XI acceptance criteria, 8.15.3.2,9.25.2.1, Reports, 6.156.20
effect on hardness, 4.10.5,4.11.5 9.25.2.2, 9.25.2.3, 10.17.3.2, 10.17.3.3 Restoration by welding, of holes, 3.7.7
Prequalifed joint details, 2.7.1,2.8.1, backscattered radiation, 6.10.8.1 Restraint, Appendix XI, X16.2.5, CXI2
Fig. 2.4,2.10.1, Fig. 2.5,2.11.1, extent of testing, 6.8 Retests, 5.14, 5.29, 5.40, 5.50
2.12.1,2.13.1,2.14.1, 10.12.3, partial testing, 6.8.2 Rivets, 8.7,9.14, 10.9.2
10.13.1, 10.13.3 spot testing, 6.8.3 Root-bend test, 5.6.1,5.11.3,5.12.1.2,
Prequalified joint welding procedures, film type, 6.10.4 5.27.1, 5.28.1, 5.38.1,5.39.1
4.6,4.9,4.10,4.11,4.14, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, f i width, 6.10.9 Root face, 3.3.4, 10.14.3
5,1.3, 7.6.1 gamma ray sources, 6.10.6 Root opening, 2.9.4, 3.3.1, 3.3.4, 3.3.4.1,
weld metal and base metal general, 6.10.1,6.10.8 10.14.3
limitations, 5.1.1 hole-type IQI, 6.10.7 build-up of, 3.3.4.1, 10.14.3
Procedure qualification, 5 Part B image quality indicators, 6.10.1, Run-off plates, see Weld tabs
limitation of variables, 5.5.2 6.10.7,6.10.7.3, Fig. 6.6, Rust-inhibitive coating, 3.2.1
records, 5.13 Table 6.1, Table 6.2
results required, 5.12 minimum exposure, butt joint welds
retests, 5.14 10.18
test weld positions, 5.8 radiograph illuminator, 6.12.1 S
tests, 5.6, 5.10, 5.1 1, 5.12 safety, 6.10.2 Safety, 1.7,6.10.2, Appendix J
Procedure qualification record (PQR), source location, 6.10.5 Sample report forms, Appendix D,
5.5.1.5, Appendix E sources, 6.10.6 Appendix E
Procedure specification, see Welding surface preparation, 6.10.3 Sequence, 3.4.3
procedure specification wireIQI,6.10.1,6.10.3, 6.10.3.3, Shear area, 10.8.3
Profile effects, 10.7.6 6.10.7, 6.10.7.1, 6.10.7.3,6.10.9, Shear connectors, 7.2.5, Fig. 7.1
Profiles, weld, 3.6, 8.15.1.4,9.25.1.4, Fig. 6.6 Shielded metal arc welding, 1.3.1, 2.7.1,
10.17.1.4, C10.7.3, C10.7.6 x-ray unit size, 6.10.6 2.8.1,2.9.1,2.10.1, 3.3.1,4.1.5.1,4.5,
Progression of welding, 4.6.8,4.14.1.7, Radiographic tests, 5.3.2, 5.10.1.3, 4.6, 5.5.2.1, 5.16.1.3, 5.44.1,7.5.5,
5.16.7 5.11.5, 5.27.4, 5.28.4, 5.39.2, 6 9.24, 10.15
Prohibited welded joints, 9.12 Part B, 8.15.2,9.25.2, 10.17.3, 10.18 atmospheric exposure, 4.5.2
Protective coatings, 3.2.1, 3.11.2, 7.4.1 acceptance, 5.12.1.5, 5.28.4,5.38.2, electrodes,4.1.1,4.5.1,4.5.2
Punched holes, repair, 3.7.7 6.11, 8.15.2,9.25.2, 10.17.3 layer thickness, 4.6.5,4.6.7
Punching shear stress, 10.5.1, C10.5.1 Radiographs, 5.26.4, 5.28.4, 6.10.1, maximum fillet weld she, 4.6.6,4.7
6.10.5,6.10.6, 6.10.7,8.15.2,9.25.2, of studs, 7.5.5
10.17.3 prequalified procedures, 4.6
Q contractor’s obligation, 6.12.2, 6.12.3 procedure qualification, 5 Part B
essential variables, 5.5.2.1
Qualification, Sect. 5 density limitations, 6.10.11
forms, Appendix C, Appendix E density measurements, 6.10.11.1, root pass, 4.6.5,4.14.4
general requirements, 5 Part A 6.10.11.2 Shielding gas, 4.13,4.18
inspector, 6.1.3 geometric unsharpness, C6.10.6, dew point, 4.13,4.18
NDT, 6.7.7, 10.19.2 Footnote 4 in Commentary electrogas welding, 4.18
prequalified procedures, 5.1.2 identification of, 6.10.12 flux cored arc welding, 4.13
previously qualified procedures, 5.2 quality, 6.10.10 gas metal arc welding, 4.13
procedures, 5 Part B, 5.9,5.25,5.36 submitted to owner, 6.12.3 manufacturer, 4.13,4.18
records, 5.13, 5.31, 5.42, 5.52 Radiography, 6.10.2, 6.13.3 protection, 4.14.3
required tests, 5.17,5.34 Records, 5.13, 5.31, 5.42,5.52 Shop splices, 3.4.6
responsibility, 5.4.2 Recrushed slag, 4.8.5, 04.8.5 Shop welds, 2.1.1
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 92 O784265 0500478 O ~
Index/ 443
Short circuiting transfer, 1.3.1,2.6.1(2), visual inspection, 8.15.1 spacers, 8.2.4 Table 9.2, 10.9.2
2.9,2.10, 10.12.3.4, Fig. 10.14 structural details, 8 Part C Studs, acceptance Ix
(Note 2), Appendix A allowable unit stresses, application qualification, 7.1,7.6
Shrinkage, 3.4 base metal, 8.3 base qualification, 7.2.4,7.2.6,7.3,
due to cutting, 3.2.6 welds, 8.4 7.4,7.5,7.6,7.6.5,7.6.6.1,7.6.6.3,
due to welding, 3.2.6 temporary welds, 8.14 7.7.1.4,7.7.1.5,7.7.4.1,7.8.1, 7.8.2,
Side-bend test, 5.6.1, 5.10.3.2(3), 5.11.3, transition of thickness, 8.10 7.8.3, Appendix IX,Fig. IX-1,
5.12.1,5.27.1, 5.28.1, 5.37.1, 5.38.1 transition of widths, 8.10 Fig. IX-2, IX7.2, IX8, IX9
Size effects, 10.7.6, C10.7.6 undercut, 8.15.1.5 certification, 7.2.6.2,7.3.3
Skewed Tjoints, 2.11, Table 2.4, web flatness, girders, Appendix VI cracks, 7.2.5
Fig. 2.6 weldabzty, 8.2.2, 8.2.3 welds, rivets, decking, 7.6.1.2, C7.6.1.2
Slag, 3.11.1 and bolts, 8.7 description, 7.3.1
Slag inclusion, 3.7.2.3 workmanship, 8 Part D design, 7.2.1
Slag removal, required, 3.11.2 Steels approved, 1.2.2, 8.2,9.2, 10.2 finish, 7.2.5
use of slag hammers, 3.8.2 weIdabXty of, 8.2.2, 8.2.3,9.2.2, length of studs, 7.2.1, Fig. 7.1
use of vibrating tools, 3.8.7 10.2.2, 10.2.3.1 manufacturers, 7.1,7.2.6.2,7.6.2,
Slot welds, 2.3.3,4.22, 8.6, 10.4.3 Steels, quenched and tempered, 3.2.5, Appendix IX
cleaning, 4.5 3.7.3,4.3 materials, 7.3.1
effective area, 2.3.3 camber correction, 3.2.7 mechanical requirements, 7.1,7.3,
ends, 2.8.6 heat input control, 4.3 Fig. 7.2
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
in quenched and tempered steels, 2.8.5 oxygen gouging, 4.3 moisture, 7.4.1,7.4.3
length, 2.8.4 procedure qualification, 5.1.1 not prequalified, 7.6.1
operator qualificafion, 5.34.2.1 Stiffeners oil, 7.4.1,7.4.4
size, 2.8.7 beams, 9.21.3 removal, 7.7.5
spacing, 2.8.7 bearing, 3.5.1.8, 3.5.3.2 rust, 7.4.1,7.4.3 scale, 7.4.1,7.4.3
stresses, 10.4 fit, 3.5.1.9 shear connectors, 7.8.3,7.4.5
technique for making, 4.22 girders, 9.21 tensile requirements, 7.3.1.1,IX7.1,
thickness, 2.8.2 intermediate, 3.5.3.1, 8.13.2,9.23.2 Fig. 7.2
welder qualification, 5.17.1.2,5.17.2.2 straightness, 3.5.3.2, 3.5.3.3 torque testing, 7.6.6.2,6.8.1,
SNT-TC-IA qualification, 6.7.7 tolerance, 3.5.3 Fig. 7.3
Spacers, 8.2.4,9.2.5, 10.2.4 Stitch welds, 8.12.1.3 type A, 7.3.1.1,7.8.3
Spatter, 3.11.2 Straightening, 3.7.3 type B, 7.3.1.1,7.8.3,7.4 5
Splice plates, 9.23.3 Straightness, 3.5.1.1 Stud welding
Splices, 9.17,9.18 Strengthening of existing structures, 11 application qualification
Spot radiography, 6.8.3 design, 11.3 requirements, 7.6
Spot testing (UT), 6.8.3 materials, 11.2 arc shields, 7.2.2,7.4.4,7.4.6, IX3
Square or rectangular tubing, welder’s special conditions, 11.5 automatically timed welding
qualification, 5.17.2.1, 5.20,5.21 workmanship, 11.4 equipment,7.2.1,7.5.1,7.5.2
Statically loaded structures Stress, buckling, 10.5.2.1 certification, 7.2.6.2
allowable stresses, 8.4, Table 8.1 Stresses in welds, 10.8.3 decking, 7.4.3, footnote 26
backing, 8.2.4,9.2.5.1, 10.2.4 Stress relief, 4.4 electrode diameters, 7.5.5.6
base metals, 8.2 alternate temperatures, 4.4.3 fabrication and verification
beam end connections, 8.11 cooling, 4.4.2(4) fillet welded studs, 7.5.5
combinations of welds, 8.6 heating, 4.4.2(2) inspection, 7.5.5.7,7.8
connections for built-up members, 8.12 quenched and tempered steels, 4.4.2(3) inspection requirements, 7.8
dimensional tolerances, 9.13 temperature, 4.4.2 low hydrogen electrodes, 7.5.5.6
eccentricity, 8.9 Structural details, 8 Part C minimum size, 7.5.5.4, Table 7.2
fatigue loading, 8.1.2 9 Part C, 10 Part C preheat requirements, 7.5.5.5,
flatness of girder webs 8.13.1, 8.13.2, beam end connections, 8.11 Table 4.3
Appendix VI beams, 9.21 prequalified processes (SMAW,
fulet weld details, 8.8 built-up members, 8.12,9.19 GMAW, FCAW), 7.5.5
boxing, 8.8.6 combination of welds, 8.6, 10.9.2 ferrule, 7.2.2,7.4.4,7.4.6, Appendix
intermittent, 8.8.2 Table 9.2, Ix3
lapjohts, 8.8.3, Fig. 8.1, 8.8.5 eccentricity, 8.9,9.16 flash, 7.4.7,7.7.1.3,7.7.1.5,7.7.3,
longitudinal, 8.8.1 fillet welds, 8.8,9.3.2, 10.10, Table 9.2 7.8.1, footnote 27
quality of welds, 8.15 girders, 9.21 flux, 7.2.3
acceptance criteria, 8.15.1, 8.15.2, lap joints, 9.10 general requirements, 7.2
8.15.3, 8.15.4 noncontinuous beams, 9.8 inspection, 7.5.5.7, 7.7.1.3, 7.7.1.4,
increased unit stress, 8.15 participation of floor systems, 9.9 7.7.1.5,7.8
liquid penetrant testing, 8.15.4 prequalified tubular joints, 10.13 length of studs, 7.2.1, Fig. 7.1
magnetic particle testing, 8.15.2 T-and cornerjoints, 9.11 moisture, 7.4.1,7.4.3,7.4.4
radiographic testing, 8.15.2 transition of thickness, 8.10, 10.11 operator qualitication, 7.7.4
spacers, 8.2.4 transition of width, 8.10,9.20 pre-production testing, 7.7.1
ultrasonic testing, 8.15.3 welds, rivets, and bolts, 8.71, production control, 7.7
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D I - L 92 0784265 0500479
444/Index
production welding, 7.7.2 records, 5.52 Tubular joint, definition, Appendix B
repair, 7.7.3 retests, 5.50 Tubular joints
removal, 7.7.5 test reporf form, Appendix E Allowable Stress Design (ASD), 10.3,
rust, 7.4.1,7.4.3 test results, 5.49 C10.3.1, C10.5
scale, 7.4.1, 7.4.3 test specimens, 5.47 box, 10.5.2, Table 10.1, 10.6.1
stud base qualification, 7.2.4,7.2.6, tests, 5.49 circular, 10.5.1, Table 10.1, 10.6.1
Appendix IX, Tack welders,' 3.12, 5.3, 5.4, 5 Part E, 6.4 box sections, 10.13.1
technique, 7.5 Tack welds, 3.3.7 matched, 10.13.3
torque tests, 7.6.6.2,7.8.1, Fig. 7.3 discontinuties, 3.3.7.1(2) stepped, 10.5.1.4
workmanship, 7.4 in final weld, 3.3.7.2 complete joint penetration, 10.5.1.2,
Submerged arc welding multiple pass, 3.3.7.2 10.13.1, 10.13.2
electrode diameter, 4.7.3 preheat, 3.3.7.1 fillet welded, 10.2.2.3, 10.13.3
electrodes and fluxes, 4.7.1,4.8 quality, 3.3.7.1 fillet welds for tubular, T-, Y-, and
flux reclamation, 4.8.4 sue, 4.7.8 K-connections, 10.13.3
general requirements, 4.7 Tacker, see Tack welder Load and Resistance Factor Design,
hardness testing, 4.10.6.1,4.11.6.1 Technical inquiries, ix, xi, Appendix F 10.3, C10.3.1, C10.5
heat input, 4.7.2 Temporary welds, 8.14,9.24, 10.15 box, 10.5.2,Table 10.1, 10.6.2,
interpass temperature, 4.9.3,4.10.6, Tension members, 8.8.1, 9.17 C10.5.2, C10.5.2.2
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.11.6 acceptance, Appendix V circular, 10.5.1.1, Table 10.1, 10.6.2,
layer thickness, 4.10.3,4.11.3 built-up, 8.12.1.3 C10.5.1.3
macroetch test specimens, 4.7.5, repair, 3.2.3 nondestructive testing, 10 Part F
4.10.6.1 (i), 4.11.6.1(1) splices, 9.17 liquid penetrant, 10.17.5
maximumcurrent, 4.10.4.1,4.11.4.1 stress, 8.4.1,8.8.2,9.25.2.1,9.25.3.1, magnetic particle, 10.17.5
multiple arcs, 4.11.6 9.25.3(1), Table 8.1, Table 9.1, radiographic, 10.18
multiple electrodes, 4.7.1,4.11 Table 10.1 ultrasonic, 10.19
definition, 4.11.1 Tension test, stud weld, 7.6.6.3 notch toughness
GMAW root pass, 4.11.5 Tension test fíture, Fig. 7.2 base metal, 10.2.6, (30.2.6
hardness determination, 4.1 1.6.1 Terms, 7.6.2, Appendix B weld metal, 10.12.4, C10.12.4, Table
position, 4.1 1.2 Testing agency, 7.6.2, Appendix 1x2, C10.8
reduction of preheat and interpass Test plates, welded HAZ, C10.12.4, Table C10.9
temperatures, 4.11.6 aging, 5.10.4,5.37.4 overlapping
restriction on f i e t welds, 4.11.6.2 procedure qualification, Figs. 5.7 box, 10.5.2.5, Fig. 10.5, C10.5.2.1,
weld current limitations, 4.11.4.1 through 5.1 1 Fig. C10.6, C10.5.2.5
weld layer thickness, 4.1 1.3 tack welder qualification, Fig. 5.39 circular, 10.5.1.5
Pardel electrodes, 4.7.1,4.10 welder qualification, Figs. 5.19 through partial joint penetration, 10.13.2,
definition, 4.10.1 5.24 10.12.3.6
GMAW root pass, 4.10.5 welding operator qualification, Fig. prequalified joint details, 10.13,
hardness determination, 4.10.6.1 5.34, Fig. 5.37,7.7.4 (30.13
position, 4.10.2 Test results, Fig. 2.4,5.12, 5.28, 5.31, tubular grooves in T-, Y-, and
reduction of preheat and interpass 5.49 K-connections, 10.13.1
temperatures, 4.10.6 Test specimens, 5.10, Table 5.1, Table 5.6, test specimens, qualification,
restriction on fillet welds, 4.10.6.2 Figs. 5.12 through 5.17, 5.26, 5.37 5.10.1.3(1)
weld layer thickness, 4.10.3 Test weld positions, 5.8, Figs. 5.1 Tubular mock-up, 10.12.3.3(1)
welding current limitations, 4.10.4.1, through 5.6 Tubular structures, section 10
4.10.5 Thermal cutting, 3.2.2 acute angle heel test, Fig. 10.10
preheat, 4.10.6,4.11.6 T-joints, 9.11 allowable load components, 10.5.1.5
prequalifed procedures, 4.9,4.10,4.11 Tolerances allowable shear stress, 10.5.1
procedure qualification, 5, Part B, alignment, 3.3.3,3.5.1.8,3.5.3 allowable stresses in welds, 10.4,
essential variables, 5.5.2.2 camber, 3.5.1.3 Table 10.1
sample joint, 4.10.6.1,4.11.6.1 dimensional, 2.9.2,2.10.2, 3.3.4, 3.5, fiber stresses, 10.4.2
single electrodes, 4.9,4.11.4.1 8.13,9.23, 10.16 plug and slot welds, 10.4.3
definition, 4.9.1 flatness, 3.5.1.5, 8.13,9.23.1.2 allowable unit stresses, 10.4.2, 10.5
tack welds, 4.7.8 offset, 3.5.1.6 assembly, 10.14
Surface preparation, 3.2.1, 3.11 variation from straightness, 3.5.1.1 axial load, 10.8.4
Surface roughness, 3.2.2,3.6.3 warpage, 3.5.1.6 backing, 10.2.4
Surface roughness guide, 3.2.2, Torquetesting, 7.6.6.2, Fig. 7.3,7.8.1 spacers, 10.2.4(2)
Footnote 4 Transducer calibration, 6.21 weldabiiity, 10.2.3.1
Transducer specifications, 6.15.6,6.15.7, base metals, 10.2
6.21 bending, 10.8.4
T Transitions of thickness or widths. 8.10, box section parts, Fig. 10.1
Tack welder qualification, 5 Part E Fig. 8.3, Fig. 8.4,9.20, Fig. 9.5, Fig. 9:6, box section strength, 10.5
limitation of variables, 5.44 10.11. Fig. 10.9 branch member loading, 10.5.1.5,
. method of testing specimens, 5.48 Tubular connictions, Fig.lO.1 circular section, Fig. 10.1(A)
period of effectiveness, 5.51 limitations on strength, 10.5 combination welds, 10.9.1
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
Index/445
cross joints, Fig. lO.l(G), 10.5.2.1 weld stress, 10.8.3 transducer positions, Fig. 6.11,
crushing load, 10.5.2.1 punching shear stress, 10.5.1,10.5.1.7, Appendix X, Fig. X-1
details of welded joints, Figs. 10.12 10.8.3 calibration for straight beam, 6.18.4
through 10.17,10.13,10.13.3 acting V,, 10.5.1.1 horizontal sweep, 6.18.2,6.18.4.1,
diaphragms, rings, and collars, 10.5.2.1 allowable V,, 10.5.1.1,Fig. 10.2 6.18.5.1,10.19.3.1
dimensional tolerances, 3.5,10.16 qualification tests, 5.8.1.2,5.17.2.1, sensitivity, 6.18.4.2
effective f i e t length, 10.8.2 5.17.2.2,5.17.4,5.21,5.23.2.5, calibration for testing, 6.18
effective throat, 2.3.1,10.8 Table 5.5,Table 5.6,Table 10.5 distance, 6.18.5.1
effective weld areas, 10.8 quality of welds, 10.17 horizontal sweep, 6.18.5.1
fatigue, 10.7,Fig. 10.6 shear area, 10.8.3 zero reference level sensitivity,
fiber stresses, 10.7.1 spacers, 10.2.4(2) 6.18.5.2
fillet welds strength of connections, limitations of, crossing patterns, 6.19.6.2
boxing, 10.10.5 10.5 discontinuities, longitudinal, 6.24.1
details, 10.8.2,10.10 structural details, 10Part C discontinuities, transverse, 6.24.2
intermittent, 10.10.1 T-, Y-, K- connections, Table 10.1, electroslag and electrogas welds,
flared connections, 10.5.1.6 10.5.1.2,10.5.1.3,10.5.1.7,10.5.2.3, 6.24.3
groove welds, 10.8.1 10.5.2.4,10.5.2.5,Fig. 10.5,10.5.2.7, equipment, 6.15
increased unit stress, 10.6 10.8.3,10.8.4,10.12.2.1(2), Table gain control, 6.15.4
intersectionlengths of welds 10.5,10.12.2.2(2),10.12.3.2,10.12.3.4, horizontal linearity, 6.15.2,6.22.1
in box sections, 10.8.5 10.13,Figs. 10.12-10.15,10.14.3,Fig. search units. 6.15.6,6.15.7
inT-, Y-, K-connections, 10.8.3 10.18,10.19,Fig. 10.19,10.19.5, equipment qualification, 6.17
K-joints, 10.5.2.2 C10.5.2,C10.7.6,C10.12,C10.13 calibration block, 6.17.5
lap joints, 10.10.2,10.10.3,10.10.4, temporary welds, 10.15 certification, 6.17.3
10.14.1 transfer of load,10.5.3 dB accuracy, 6.22.2
maximum size, 10.10.4 transition slope, 10.5.1.6 gain control, 6.17.2
length of welds, 10.8.4 transition of thickness, 10.11,Fig. horizontal linearity, 6.17.1,
local yielding, 10.5.3 10.9,10.14.2 Appendix X, X3
main member, 10.5.1,10.5.1.5, transitions, tube size, Fig. 10,1(K) internal reflections, 6.22.3
10.5.2.1,10.8.3 undercut, 10.17.1.5 examples, 6.25
nondestructive testing of tubular unit stresses, base metals, 10.3 flaw size evaluation, 6.25.2
structures, 10Part F unit stresses, welds, 10.4 vertical linearity certification, 6.25.1
liquid penetrant and magnetic welds, rivets, and bolts, 10.9.2 extent of testing, 6.14
particle, 10.17.5 workmanship, 10Part E flaw length determination, 6.19.7
radiographic testing, 10.18,Figs. Twist of welded box, C3.5.1.3 flaw size evaluation procedures, 6.23
10.23through 10.26 Types and purposes of tests, 5.6 angle beam testing, 6.23.2
ultrasonic testing, 10.19 straight beam testing, 6.23.1
overlappingjoints, 10.5.1.5,Fig. 10.3, indication length,6. 195.6
Fig. 10.5, Fig. C10.6 U
indication level, 6.19.5.5
partial joint penetration groove welds Ultrasonic testing, 6 Part C,10.19 laminar reflector, 6.19.4.1
inmatched boxconnections, 10.12.3.6 acceptance criteria, 8.15.3, Table longitudinalmode calibration, 6.21.1
prequalified joint details, 10.12,10.13 8.2,9.25.3Table
, 9.3,10.17.4, nomograph, Appendix D,Form D-10
procedure qualification tests, 10.12.3 Figs 10.18,Fig. 10.19 operator requirements, 6.14
butt joints welded from one side, attenuation factor, 6.19.5.4 personnel qualification, 6.7.7
10.12.6.1 base metal discontinuities, 6.13.6 procedure, 5.11.6,6Part C
radiographic testing, 10.18,Figs. calibration, 6.16,6.17,6.18,6,21, procedures, equipment qualification,
10.23through 10.26 10.19.3 6.22,Appendix X, X3
ultrasonic testing, 10.19 calibration for angle beams, 6.18.5, horizontal linearity, 6.22.1,
overlapping joints, 10.5.1.5, Fig. 10.3, Appendix X, X2 Appendix X,X3
Fig. 10.5,Fig. C10.6 distance, 6.18.5.1 internal reflections, 6.22.3
partial joint penetration groove welds horizontal sweep, 6.18.5.1 vertical linearity, 6.22.2
in matched box connections, zero reference level sensitivity, procedures, flaw size evaluation, 6.23
10.12.3.6 6.18.5.2 angle beam testing, 6.23.2
prequalified joint detaiis, 10.12,10.13 calibration for longitudinalmode, straight beam testing, 6.23.1
procedure qualification tests, 10.12.3 6.21.1,10.19.3.1,AppendixX, X7 reference blocks, 6.16IIW, 6.15.7.7,
butt joints welded from one side, calibration for shear mode, 6.21.2, 6.16.1,Fig. 6.9,Fig. 6.10
10.12.6.1 Appendix X, X2.9 informationon, 6.19.6.3, 6.19.6.4,
processes and procedures, 10.12.3 amplitude calibration, 6.21.2.4, 6.19.6.5,6.20.1
T-,Y-, and K-connections (less than Appendix X,X1.2 other approved blocks, 6.16.1,
30deg), 10.12.3.2 approach distance, 6.21.2.6 Appendix X,Fig. X-1
other joint details, 10.12.3.5 distance calibration, 6.21.2.3, reports,6.19.6.5,6.19.9,6.20,6.20.1,
projected chord length, 10.5.1.5 Appendix X2.3 10.19.8,Appendix E
punching shear, in-plane bending, resolution, 6.21.2.5 disposition, 6.20.3
10.8.4,10.8.5.1 sound entry point, 6.21.2.1 repairs, 6.19.9,6.19.9.1
out-of-plane bending, 10.8.4,10.8.5.1 sound path angle, 6.21.2.2 scanning patterns, 6.24,Fig. 6.12
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS DL.1 72 07842b5 05004'eL O M
4461Index
search units shear wave, K6.3 groove weld tests, 5.18, 5.19, 5.20,
amplitude, 6.21.2.4 standard reflector, K5, Fig. K-1, Fig. 5.21
angle beam, 6.15.7,6.19.6,6.23.2 K-3, K6.1.1, K6.1.2, K6.2.2, K6.3.1, limitation of variables, 5.16
application, C6.19.5.2 K6.3.2 limited thickness, 5.19
approach distance, 6.21.2.6 transducer, K3(4), K4 method of testing, 5.27
dimensions, 6.15.6,6.15.7.6 transfer correction, K3(12), K6.1.3, period of effectiveness, 5.30
distance calibration, 6.21.2.3 Fig. KA, K6.3.2 pipe welding tests, 5.20,5.21
resolution, 6.21.2.5 weld classes, K11 position, 5.23
sensitivity, 6.21.2.4 weld marking, K3(9), K9.3.2, K9.3.3, position limitations, 5.23, Table 5.5
shear wave mode, 6.21.2 K9.3.4, K9.5, Fig. K-13 preparation, 5.2.6
sound entry point, 6.21.2.1 Undercut, 3.3.7.1, Fig. 3.4,3.7.2.2, records, 5.31
sound path angle, 6.22.2.2 4.9.4, 5.12.3, 5.12.6, 5.12.7,5.28.2.1, retest, 5.29
straight beam, 6.15.6,6.19.5,6.23.1 5.28.3(3), 5.39.3.1, 8.15.1.5, test pipe or tubing, Figs. 5.23
spot testing, 6.8.3, C6.8.3, C6.13.3 9.25.1.5, 10.17.1.5 through 5.26
testing procedure; 6.19, Table 6.3, Unlisted base metals, 8.2.3,9.2.4 test plates, Figs. 5.19 through 5.23,
10.19.1 Unlisted materials, 8.2.3.3 Fig 5.27, Fig. 5.28
cleanliness of surfaces, 6.19.3 Unit stresses test results, 5.28
couplant materials, 6.19.4 base metal, 8.3,9.5, 10.3 bend tests, 5.2.8.1
flaw evaluation, 6.19.7, 10.19.7 plug welds, 10.4 fillet weld break tests, 5.28.2
testing of repairs, 6.19.9 shear, 8.4.2,9.3.2 macroetch test, 5.28.3
thickness limitations, 6.13.1 slot welds, 10.4 radiographic test, 5.28.4
transducer size, 6.15.6,6.15.7.2 tension, Table 8.1, Table 9.1, Table visual, 5.28.5,5.28.6
tubular structures, 10.19 10.1 test specimens, 5.37
weld identification, 6.19 welds, 8.4,9.3, 10.4 location, pipe and rectangular
Ultrasonic testing (Alternative Method), Unzipping, 10.5.1.3 tubing, Fig. 5.26.2
6.13.2, Appendix K UT report forms, Appendix E preparation, 5.26
acceptance criteria, K3(2), K12 T-, Y-, K-connections, Table 10.5
amplitude, Fig. K-9, Fig. K-10, Fig.
K-11, K11, K12.1, Fig. K-15
calibration, K3(7), Fig. K-2. K6, Fig.
v
Verification inspection, 6.1.1
type, 5.18, 5.19, 5.20, 5.22,5.24, 5.26
tubing, square or rectangular tests,
5.20, 5.21, Figs. 5.23 through 5.26
K-5, Fig. K-6, K9.1 Vertical position welding prequalified, unlimited thickness, 5.18
calibration test block, K3(6), K5, Fig. 4.6.8,4.14,1.7 Welders, 3.1.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5PartC, 5.29.1,
K-2, K6.1.3 restrictions on, 4.6.8,4.14.1.7, 5.16.7 5.30,6.4, 10.12.1.1,Table 10.5
compression wave, K6.2 Visual inspection, 3.2.3, 5.12.6,5.12.7, Welding
CRT (Cathode Ray Tube), Fig. K-5, 5.28.5,5.28.6, 6.5.5, 6.6.3,7.5.5.6, at low temperatures, 3.1.3,4.2
K6.3.2, Fig. K-6, Fig. K-7, Fig. K-12, 7.7.1.4, 7.7.1.5, 7.8.1, 8.15.1,9.25.1, equipment, 3.1.2,4.22.1,4.24.1,6.3
K9.2.3, K9.4, Fig. K-14 10.17.1 progression, 3.4.2,4.6.7,4.14.1.7
discontinuities, K3(1i), K5, K6.3, K11, sequence, 3.4.2,7.5.4
K12, Fig. K-15 Welding operators, 3.1.2,5.3,5.4,5 Part
cylindrical, K8.1.2, K8.2.2, K10.2(b), W D, 5.41, 6.4, 7.7.4
Fig. K-10 Warpage, 3.4, 3.5.1.7 Welding operator qualification, 5 Part
height, K9.2, Fig. K-12 Web buckling or crippling, 10.5.2.1(3) D, 7.7.4
.length, K9.3, Fig. K-13 Web-to-flange welds, 9.25.3.3 electrodag/ electrogas weld tests,
location, K9.4, K9.5, K10.5 Weld cleaning, 3.11 5.34.2, Fig. 5.35
orientation, K10.4 completed welds, 3.11.2 f i e t weld tests, 5.34.4,5.34.2, Fig.
planar, K8.1.3, K8.2.3,KlOa2(a),Fig. in-process cleaning, 3.1 1.1 5.36, Fig. 5.37
K-11 use of manual hammers, 3.8.2 groove weld tests, 5.34.1
spherical, K8.1.1, K8.2.1, K10,2(c), use of lightweight vibrating tools, limitations of variables, 5.33
Fig. K-9 3.8.2 method of testing, 5.38
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
DAC (Distance Amplitude Correction), Welded joint details, see joints period of effectiveness, 5.41
K6.1.2, K6.2.2, K6.3.2, Fig. K-6, Weld metal removal, 3.7.6 pipe weld tests, 5.34.3.1, 5.34.3.2
Fig. K-7 Weld profiles, Fig. 3.4,3.6,1, 3.6.2, plate weld tests, 5.34.1, Fig. 5.34
documentation requirements, K3(14), 3.6.3 preparation of test specimens, 5.37.1,
K3(15) Weld spatter, removal of, 3.11.2 5.37.2.2
equipment, K3(3), K4 Weld tabs, 3.12.2, 3.12.3,6.10.3.1, retests, 5.40
laminations, K3(8) 8.2.4,9.2.5, 10.2.4 slot welds, 5.34.2.1
Level III (ASNT), K3(15) Weld termination, 3.12, 8.8.6.1 stud welds, 7.7.4
operator, K4 Weld thickness (UT), Table 8.2, test report form, Appendix E
procedures, K2, K3, K4 Note, Table 9.3, Note test results required, 5.39
reports, K13, Fig. K-15 Weldability, 8.2.1, 8.2.2, 8.2.3,9.2.1.9, bend tests, 5.39.1
scanning, K3(5), K3(10), K7, Fig. K-8 9.2.4, 10.2, 10.2.3 fillet weld break tests, 5.39.2
sensitivity, K3(10), K6.1, K6.1.1, Welder qualification, 5 Part C macroetch tests, 5.39.3
K6.1.3, K6.2.2, K6.2.3, Fig. K-4, m e t weld tests, 5.22, Figs. 5.27, radiographic tests, 5.39.4
Fig. K-6, Fig. K-7, K1 1, Fig. K-14 5.28 visual, 5.39.5, 5.39.6
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
AWS D L - 1 7 2 O784265 0500482 2 =
Index/447
test specimens, 5.37 quality, 8.15,9.25,10.17 repairs, 3.7
Welding procedure specification, 5.1.2, stresses, 10.8.3 statically loaded structures, 8.13,8.14
5.5.1.5,5.9.1,5.25.1,5.36.1 surfaces, 3.6.3 tolerances, 3.5, 8.13,9.23,10.16
sample forms, Appendix E tack, 3.3.7 tubular structures, 10.14,10.15,10.16
specific values required, 5.5.1.5 temporary, 8.14,9.24,10.15 visual inspection, 3.2.3,6.5.5,7.5.5.6,
Welding sequences, 3.4.2 termination, 3.12,8.8.6.1 7.8.1,8.15.1,9.25.1, 10.17.1
Welding symbols, 1.5 Wind velocity, 3.1.3,4.14.3,4.20.2 weld profiles, 3.6, 8.15.1.4,9.25.1.4,
Welds Wire feed speed, 5.5.2.2(6), 5.5.2.3(7), 10.17.1.4,Fig. 3.4
acceptability, 8.15,9.25,10.17 5.5.2.4(6), 5.5.2.5(6), (3.5.2.3,C5.5.2.4 welding, 3.1,7.4.7
accessibility, 3.7.6 Workmanship, 3.7.4,7.4,8 Part D,
cleaning, 3.11, 11.4.1 9 Part D,10 Part E
fatigue stress provisions, 9.4,Table 9.2
multiple pass, 4.9.3,5.10.3.1
alignment, 3.3
control of distortion and shrinkage,
Y
notch toughness (tubular), 10.12.4, Yield line analysis, C10.5.1.4,Fig. C10.5
3.4
C10.12.4,Table C10.8,Table C10.9 dynamically loaded structures, 9.22,
painting;3.11.2
profiles, 3.6,8.15.1.4,9.25.1.4,
9.23,9.24
general requirements, 3 Z
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10.17.1.4 inspection, 6.4.2,6.5.2,6.5.5,7.8 Z loss, Table 2.4, Table 10.8
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
I AWS Structural Welding Code Document List
Code Document
D1.1-92 Structural Welding Code -- Steel
D1.2-90 Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum
D1.3-89 Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel
D1.4-79 Structural Welding Code -- Reinforcing Steel
D I .5-88 Bridge Welding Code
--``,,,,````,,,`,``,``,```,````,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Pacific Gas and Electric Co/9977613100
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/25/2013 11:05:15 MDT
You might also like
- CA Inter Corporate & Other Laws Chart Book With Index Final80% (5)CA Inter Corporate & Other Laws Chart Book With Index Final237 pages
- Underwater Welding Code: D3.6M:2017 An American National Standard50% (4)Underwater Welding Code: D3.6M:2017 An American National Standard14 pages
- AWS QC 10-95 Spec 4 Qualification Certification Entry Level WelderNo ratings yetAWS QC 10-95 Spec 4 Qualification Certification Entry Level Welder25 pages
- AWS A5.23 Specification For Low Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes For Submerged Arc Welding PDFNo ratings yetAWS A5.23 Specification For Low Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes For Submerged Arc Welding PDF44 pages
- A5-11 Specification For Nickel and Nickel Alloy Wel - El For SMAW PDF100% (1)A5-11 Specification For Nickel and Nickel Alloy Wel - El For SMAW PDF41 pages
- AWS D14.1 - 1997 Specification For Welding of Industrial and Mill Crane and Material Handling Eq50% (2)AWS D14.1 - 1997 Specification For Welding of Industrial and Mill Crane and Material Handling Eq141 pages
- PDF NCP X-Form WSX03 HDG Zinc-Coated-Steel WPS AWS-D11-D190-72 Pre-prepared-TemplateNo ratings yetPDF NCP X-Form WSX03 HDG Zinc-Coated-Steel WPS AWS-D11-D190-72 Pre-prepared-Template1 page
- AWS A5.14 (Nickel & Nickel Alloy Bare Welding Electrode & Rods)No ratings yetAWS A5.14 (Nickel & Nickel Alloy Bare Welding Electrode & Rods)30 pages
- Fillet Weld Research Paper - For UndercuttingNo ratings yetFillet Weld Research Paper - For Undercutting7 pages
- 1 Qualified Welding Procedure Specifications: GeneralNo ratings yet1 Qualified Welding Procedure Specifications: General15 pages
- Figure NC-4427-1 Fillet and Socket Weld Details and DimensionsNo ratings yetFigure NC-4427-1 Fillet and Socket Weld Details and Dimensions4 pages
- BOHLER Union S EM12K + UV C 401 - R6 - 231218 - 131726No ratings yetBOHLER Union S EM12K + UV C 401 - R6 - 231218 - 1317262 pages
- API 570 Interview Questions and Answers: Essential Guide for Piping InspectorsFrom EverandAPI 570 Interview Questions and Answers: Essential Guide for Piping InspectorsNo ratings yet
- AWS A5.12 Tungsten Electrodes For Arc Welding and Cutting100% (1)AWS A5.12 Tungsten Electrodes For Arc Welding and Cutting22 pages
- AWS 14.6 Especificación de Soldadura de Elementos Rotativos.No ratings yetAWS 14.6 Especificación de Soldadura de Elementos Rotativos.110 pages
- Specification For Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Welding Electrodes For Shielded Metal Arc WeldingNo ratings yetSpecification For Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Welding Electrodes For Shielded Metal Arc Welding41 pages
- AWS A5.5-96 Specification For Low Alloy Steel Electrodes For Shielded Metal Arc Welding0% (1)AWS A5.5-96 Specification For Low Alloy Steel Electrodes For Shielded Metal Arc Welding55 pages
- AWS A5-5 1996 Low Alloy Steel Electrodes For SMAWNo ratings yetAWS A5-5 1996 Low Alloy Steel Electrodes For SMAW55 pages
- AWS D1.6 - Structural Steel Code - Stainless Steel100% (1)AWS D1.6 - Structural Steel Code - Stainless Steel215 pages
- Regulatory Guide: Control of Electroslag Weld PropertiesNo ratings yetRegulatory Guide: Control of Electroslag Weld Properties3 pages
- The Development of Equity and The Good Person Philosophy in Common Law SystemsNo ratings yetThe Development of Equity and The Good Person Philosophy in Common Law Systems9 pages
- FUNDAMENTALS OF LAWYERING Glazed Draft 4No ratings yetFUNDAMENTALS OF LAWYERING Glazed Draft 45 pages
- Updated Amnesty - Step by Step Guide Jan 2025No ratings yetUpdated Amnesty - Step by Step Guide Jan 20255 pages
- Homework 13 - Ungraded Score and Graduated Score - Reliance - Ricketts v. ScothornNo ratings yetHomework 13 - Ungraded Score and Graduated Score - Reliance - Ricketts v. Scothorn2 pages
- Final Signed CYD Master Yellow Dragon Compliance 2025 KYC For 12 Boxes 4.5.2025No ratings yetFinal Signed CYD Master Yellow Dragon Compliance 2025 KYC For 12 Boxes 4.5.202518 pages
- Paredes vs. Abad - Canonizado vs. AguirreNo ratings yetParedes vs. Abad - Canonizado vs. Aguirre2 pages
- Comprehensive Reviewer in ACC 103 For P1No ratings yetComprehensive Reviewer in ACC 103 For P12 pages
- Petition For Review - CA - CEMTRANS Vs Jesus NapayNo ratings yetPetition For Review - CA - CEMTRANS Vs Jesus Napay17 pages
- Classification of Administrative Action Project100% (1)Classification of Administrative Action Project15 pages
- Investment AGreement - Final Draft - Pending ClarificationsNo ratings yetInvestment AGreement - Final Draft - Pending Clarifications4 pages
